Yes, for double door installations, the kit can be duplicated. It is important to ensure the alignment of the profiles and to leave adequate clearance between the two leaves to avoid interference during opening and closing.
Requires a unit with a minimum width of 630 mm, minimum height of 575 mm, and a minimum depth of 488 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
This template set is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawers.
Templates allow precise marking of the position of the drawer front attachments, eliminating the need for manual measurements.
The kit includes only the marking templates, specifically designed to facilitate the installation process.
The inserts are made of durable plastic, ensuring durability and precision during use.
No pre-measurement is necessary, as the templates are designed for direct and precise marking without additional calculations.
To ensure the Barn system is installed correctly, we recommend leaving a minimum clearance of approximately 150–200 mm between the ceiling and the opening. This space is required to accommodate: the top rail, the mounting brackets, the sliding carriages, and the door’s installation clearance. Furthermore, it is important to ensure that the door does not scrape the floor and that there is sufficient clearance for installation and adjustment.
The required opening width depends directly on the length of the track used. In this case, the Barn system for suspended wooden sliding doors features a 2,000 mm (2-meter) track, and we recommend: That this system is suitable for openings approximately 700 to 1,000 mm wide. Technical explanation: The 2,000 mm track allows for the full travel of a door panel up to approximately 1,000 mm wide. For the opening to function properly, the door must be able to slide completely out of the opening. Therefore, the door width is usually equal to or slightly greater than the opening width (to ensure proper overlap and coverage). Example: 800 mm opening → recommended door: 850–900 mm → 2 m guide rail suitable. This range covers the most common door widths in residential settings, ensuring proper system operation.
It depends on several factors, but the goal is to achieve a balance between capacity, proper drape of the trousers, and ease of use when pulling out the trouser rack. Below are the most suitable recommended dimensions:

  • Height: recommended 950mm, minimum 600mm, ideal between 800 and 1,000mm.
  • Width: recommended 600mm, minimum 450mm, ideal between 600 and 800mm.
  • Depth: recommended 500mm, minimum 500mm, ideal between 450 and 750mm.
The selection must take into account the load capacity (kg), the type of extension (full or partial), the opening system (standard or push-to-open), the closing system (standard or soft-close), the adjustment options and the finish colour. These factors directly influence the performance and installation of drawers in both industrial manufacturing and joinery applications.
Our drawers are equipped with various opening systems to enhance functionality and convenience. We offer soft-close systems that prevent impacts and noise, ensuring a smooth and silent closing action. Push-to-open systems allow drawers to be opened with a simple touch, making them ideal for modern kitchens without visible handles. We also provide full-extension systems, which allow complete access to the drawer contents, improving usability and organisation. These systems are designed to deliver a superior user experience and adapt to the requirements of each space.
The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Lokbox mechanism.

Installation is by screwing into the sides of the Vertex drawer front panel, ensuring a firm and adjustable fixing.
The hooks are made of high quality plastic, which guarantees durability, resistance to daily use and structural stability.
The stability of the front panel is achieved thanks to the design of the latches, which provide a secure and stable fit, even under continuous load.
This product is specifically designed for 131 mm high drawers, so it is not compatible with other heights.
The white plastic is lightweight, moisture resistant and easy to clean, making it ideal for applications in domestic environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
The included full-extension slides support a load capacity of up to 40 kg, with cushioned locking to ensure smooth sliding.
Yes, the bottom and back panels can be cut to fit non-standard dimensions, offering flexibility in assembly.
The kit is available in white and anthracite grey painted finishes, with matching table tops that combine design and functionality.
The side ribs allow adjustment of the drawer front by up to +2 mm vertically and +1 mm horizontally for perfect alignment.
The boards are made of particle board with a resistant melamine, which makes them more durable and resistant to moisture.
The full-extension slides support a maximum load of 40 kg, ensuring smooth sliding and soft closing.
The panels have a depth of 399 x 450 mm and a back panel of 376 x 63 mm. Yes, they can be trimmed to fit different module widths.
The side ribs allow adjustments of +2 mm vertically and +1 mm horizontally, achieving a perfect alignment of the drawer front.
This kit is available in white and anthracite grey painted finishes, with an elegant and functional design.
The boards are made of particle board and durable melamine, offering durability and protection against moisture.
This template set is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawers.
Templates allow precise marking of the position of the drawer front attachments, eliminating the need for manual measurements.
The kit includes only the marking templates, specifically designed to facilitate the installation process.
The inserts are made of durable plastic, ensuring durability and precision during use.
No pre-measurement is necessary, as the templates are designed for direct and precise marking without additional calculations.
The Vertex external drawer supports a maximum weight of 40 kg, thanks to its synchronised full-extension slide system and high-strength steel.
The board for the back and rear must be 16 mm thick to ensure proper installation.
The drawer front is adjustable up to ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally, ensuring correct alignment.
Yes, the slide system includes a cushioned closure, which provides a smooth and quiet closure.
Kit includes: 1 set of slides, 1 set of ribs, 1 set of drawer front clips and screws. Front, back and bottom are not included and must be purchased separately.
The Vertex 83 mm front attachment kit is compatible with 83 mm high front panels.
Installation is carried out by screwing the hooks to the sides of the front panel of the drawer, ensuring a firm and stable fixing.
The hooks are made of high quality plastic, which makes them strong, durable, easy to clean and aesthetically pleasing.
No, only screws, which are usually included in the kit, are needed for easy installation.
This system makes it possible to optimise the space inside the drawer, while maintaining a functional and aesthetic design in the storage modules.
This set of hooks is compatible with interior drawers of height 178 mm of the Vertex system.
The hooks are made of high quality plastic, offering durability, resistance to continuous use and ease of cleaning.
Installation is carried out by screwing the hooks on each side of the front panel of the drawer, ensuring a secure and stable fit.
Yes, the latches are designed to keep the front panel fixed and stable for long periods, even with frequent use.
These attachments are specifically designed for the Vertex system, ensuring perfect compatibility with its 178 mm high panels.
The bottom and back of the drawer are dimensioned for a board thickness of 16 mm, guaranteeing robustness and stability.
The drawer slides have a maximum load capacity of 40 kg, ensuring optimum performance even in demanding applications.
Yes, the system allows adjustment of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally, achieving perfect alignment of the front panel.
The drawer is made of painted steel, which provides high wear resistance and long-lasting durability.
Yes, the anthracite grey finish is designed for corrosion resistance and excellent performance in daily use, meeting high quality standards.
This Vertex drawer rib is available in a height of 93 mm and depths of 400 mm and 500 mm, allowing it to be adapted to different drawer configurations.
Yes, it is fully compatible with other elements of the Vertex line, ensuring an integrated and functional assembly.
It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish, which provides high resistance to everyday use and ensures long-lasting durability.
The stability of the drawer is achieved by the robust design of the rib and its installation on the left side of the drawer, ensuring optimal support for distributed loads.
The anthracite grey finish not only offers an elegant design, but also provides resistance to wear and tear, keeping it in excellent condition for everyday use.
The front profile for the Vertex internal drawer is attached to the system by means of a set of front connectors, which makes it easy to install and ensures a stable connection.
Painted aluminium provides a corrosion-resistant and easy-to-clean surface, which reduces maintenance costs and ensures a long service life of the profile.
Yes, the front profile can be installed on drawers with or without rails, depending on the user's needs and the drawer design.
No, the front profile does not include additional accessories for mounting. However, it must be combined with the specific front attachments depending on the height of the Vertex drawer.
The design and finish of the front profile allows for aesthetic and functional integration with other components of the Vertex system, achieving a uniform result in terms of appearance and functionality.
The guide is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides high resistance to corrosion and greater durability in demanding environments, such as kitchens or bathrooms.
This slide has a maximum load capacity of 40 kg, which makes it suitable for drawers that store heavy objects.
Yes, this slide is part of a system that includes versions compatible with depths of 350 mm, 450 mm and 500 mm, offering flexibility in use.
The soft-close feature avoids abrupt shocks when closing the drawer, which reduces wear and tear on parts and extends the life of the system, as well as improving the user experience.
Yes, this slide is compatible with full-extension systems, allowing full access to the inside of the drawer and better use of space.
Fixing: This rib is fixed to the drawer by means of screws, which ensures precise and stable installation, preventing movement or misalignment over time.
Load capacity: Although dependent on the complete drawer system, this rib is part of an assembly designed to support up to 40 kg, ideal for demanding applications.
Maintenance: No special maintenance is required. Its anthracite grey finish is resistant to scratches and corrosion, so it is sufficient to clean the surface with a damp cloth and avoid abrasive products.
93 mm height: Provides a low profile that optimises drawer space while maintaining a modern aesthetic and functional design for storing medium-height items.
Certifications: This rib is manufactured to European quality standards and meets certifications such as CATAS to ensure strength, durability and safety in use.
Maximum supported weight: The slide supports a weight of up to 40 kg, even with synchronised full opening, which guarantees safe and functional use in drawers with heavy loads.
Alignment during installation: The slide includes standard drill holes for attachment to the side of the module and drawer. In addition, the use of marking templates is recommended to ensure accurate and aligned installation.
Benefits of the zinc plated finish: The zinc plated finish protects the slide against corrosion, increases its durability and improves its resistance to daily wear and tear, while maintaining a clean and uniform aesthetic appearance.
Adjustment mechanism: Yes, the slide incorporates an integrated adjustment system that allows corrections to be made to the vertical and horizontal alignment, improving accuracy after initial installation.
Difference between left and right-hand versions: The difference lies in the mounting position inside the module. The left-hand slide is installed on the left side of the drawer, while the right-hand version is designed for the opposite side, ensuring compatibility in pairs.
Maximum supported weight: These hooks are designed to support the weight of standard front panels on Vertex interior drawers, ensuring stability and functionality under normal domestic use.
Front panel stability: The design includes secure fixing points that immobilise the front panel to the hitch, preventing disengagement during prolonged use.
Screw compatibility: The couplings are compatible with standard screws for fastening into wood panels or derived materials with suitable thicknesses.
Tools required: No special tools are required; mounting is easily done with a standard screwdriver.
Material resistance: The plastic used in the couplings is of high quality, resistant to wear, impact and normal environmental conditions, but is not specifically designed to withstand high temperatures or aggressive chemicals.
This set of hooks is compatible with the Vertex and Concept drawer models.
Supports drawer heights of 178 mm and 185 mm, depending on the model selected.
It can be screwed or pressed directly onto the front of the drawer, adapting to different configurations.
The set includes 8 x 4x20 mm screws, which are needed to fix the parts to the drawer front and the side ribs.
Once installed, the hook is concealed within the side of the drawer, ensuring a clean, unobtrusive design without interfering with the overall aesthetics.
It is compatible with 131 mm high Vertex drawers.
This rib must be installed on the left side of the drawer.
Supports a depth of 350 mm.
It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish.
This rib provides support and stability to the drawer, remaining visible with a formal and modern design thanks to its anthracite grey finish.
It has a height of 131 mm and a depth of 350 mm.
It uses a bolted attachment system.
Yes, it is compatible with applications in kitchen, office and other similar spaces.
It is made of steel, which ensures resistance to wear and tear and stability over time, as well as an anthracite grey finish that protects the surface.
The rib provides support and stability to the drawer structure, as well as a modern aesthetic design.
The Vertex outer box has a depth of 450 mm and a specific height of 93 mm.
The maximum load capacity of the drawer is 40 kg.
The front adjustment allows adjustments of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally for perfect alignment.
The sides are made of steel with an anthracite grey or white painted finish, depending on the model.
This drawer is compatible with 16 mm thick boards for both the bottom and the back of the drawer.
The front attachment uses a screw fixing system, which ensures a firm and secure connection to the drawer rail.
The screw allows the hook to be fixed to the drawer rail, ensuring that it remains stable and supports the weight of the objects without any misalignment.
The plastic from which the hitch is made is tough, allowing it to withstand the test of time and maintain its functionality without warping or cracking.
This attachment is compatible with handrails specifically designed for Concept drawer systems, providing an efficient and stable attachment.
Its compact and reinforced design allows for easy installation and high durability, ensuring that it withstands continuous use and does not wear out easily.
The Vertex external drawer with push system supports a maximum load capacity of up to 40 kg.
The kit includes full-extension slides, hitch set, ribs, and hardware necessary for assembly, with the addition of the correct dimensioned boards for the bottom, back and front of the drawer.
This drawer model is available in white and anthracite grey painted finishes.
The full-extension slides offer smooth movement and full access to the drawer contents, as well as incorporating the push system that eliminates the need for handles.
The drawer depth is 450 mm in the white painted model and 400 mm in the anthracite grey model, which makes it suitable for kitchen and bathroom units with these dimensions.
The rear attachment of the railings is designed to be compatible with standard boards without the need for machining.
Standard depths available are 270 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm and 500 mm.
The square rails ensure that items inside the drawers do not shift around, maximising storage and organisation.
Yes, the painted finish of steel railings provides adequate corrosion resistance, making them ideal for wet environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
No, this model is designed for direct installation without the need for machining on the panel.
The kit includes 2 aluminium profiles, 4 plastic side adapters, 4 plastic dividers and assembly instructions.
The profiles are made of aluminium, and the side adapters are made of plastic with a painted finish, which guarantees strength, lightness and a functional design.
The kit is initially designed for depths of 350 mm, but is not compatible with depths shallower than this.
It is compatible with square rails from the Vertex and Concept range, 178 mm Vertex drawer sides, 185 mm Concept sides and straight ribs of other heights such as 13 mm.
The widths are adjusted using the included aluminium profiles, which allow the length to be modified according to the requirements of the drawer.
The trim plate is designed to cover the access to the drawer front attachment and adjustment system, improving both aesthetics and functionality.
Yes, the cover plate is suitable for mounting on both the left and right side of the drawer.
It is made of plastic, which guarantees lightness, durability and a clean, uniform finish.
The cover plate covers the access to the coupling and regulation system, protecting and concealing it for a more aesthetic and functional design.
It is available in three finishes: white, grey and anthracite grey, which can be aesthetically integrated with different drawer designs.
The 93 mm high Vertex Push Sincro external drawer supports a maximum load capacity of 40 kg.
This model of drawer incorporates a synchronised total extraction system that guarantees a smooth and silent sliding.
The synchronising rod (code 3202261, not included in the kit) is necessary to assemble the drawer in widths greater than 600 mm.
The ribs are available in three heights: 93 mm, 131 mm and 178 mm, allowing them to be adapted to different design needs.
The eccentric adjustment of the front panel allows an adjustment of ±2 mm, facilitating the perfect alignment of the drawer.
The 131 mm high Vertex Push Sincro external drawer has a maximum load capacity of 40 kg.
This model incorporates a total synchronised extraction system that provides a smooth and silent glide.
It is recommended to use the synchronising rod (code 3202261, not included in the kit) for widths over 600 mm.
The eccentric adjustment of the front panel allows adjustments of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally, facilitating precise alignment.
Kit includes 1 set of slides, 1 set of ribs, 1 set of drawer front clips and screws.
The eccentric allows a drawer front adjustment range of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally.
The full-extension slides have a length of 450 mm, suitable for modules of this depth.
The available rib heights for this model are 93 mm, 131 mm and 178 mm.
Synchronised slides contribute to the smooth running of the drawer thanks to the ejector system when the drawer is pressed down, combined with a damping piston.
No special tools are required for the installation of this drawer; the components are designed for easy and intuitive assembly.
The sides of the drawer are made of transparent tempered glass with a thickness of 6 mm, which ensures strength and aesthetics.
The full-extension slides have a maximum load capacity of 40 kg, suitable for intensive use in kitchens.
The eccentric of the drawer front allows an adjustment range of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally, ensuring precise installation.
The kit includes synchronised full-extension slides, a set of glass-sided ribs, a set of cover caps and a set of front hooks for the outer drawer.
This model is available in anthracite grey finish, providing an elegant and modern design for kitchen furniture.
The tempered glass used on the sides of the Vertex drawer is 6 mm thick, ensuring impact resistance and a modern aesthetic design.
The Vertex drawer slides with glass sides have a maximum load capacity of 40 kg, ideal for intensive use.
The eccentric adjustment of the front panel allows adjustments of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally, ensuring precise alignment of the drawer.
The ribs are made of high quality painted aluminium, while the slides are made of steel with a synchronised full-extension system and damped locking.
The boards used for the back and rear panels must be 16 mm thick to ensure correct and stable assembly.
The Vertex drawer with 178 mm high glass sides has a depth of 450 mm, offering large storage capacity.
The glass used is 6 mm thick, transparent and tempered, providing impact resistance and a sleek, modern design.
The drawer front includes an eccentric adjustment system with an adjustment range of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally to ensure perfect alignment.
The ribs are made of painted aluminium, while the guides are made of steel with full synchronised extraction and cushioned locking for smooth and durable operation.
This drawer has a maximum load capacity of 40 kg, ideal for supporting heavy utensils and objects in the kitchen or other spaces.
The synchroniser is designed for Vertex slides with Push Syncro 2 and allows synchronised opening and closing by pressing the drawer front at any point.
The bar has a maximum length of 1,200 mm and is suitable for module widths of more than 600 mm, optimising its function in wider furniture.
The bar is made of natural aluminium, which guarantees lightness, durability and corrosion resistance, making it ideal for extended opening systems.
It is recommended to use the synchroniser in drawers wider than 600 mm to guarantee a uniform and simultaneous opening of the slides.
Yes, the synchroniser includes the possibility to cut the bar to fit different module widths, offering flexibility in installation.
The design of the fixture directly covers the side edges of the rear panel, eliminating the need for additional machining on the part.
With this set of rear hooks and a rail, it is possible to configure double or half-height drawers, adapting to different storage needs.
They are made of plastic with a durable finish, ensuring strength, lightness and an aesthetic appearance in keeping with the design of the drawer.
No, the accessory allows manual height adjustment without additional effort, offering an intuitive and efficient installation.
The drawer must have a height of 93 mm and a depth of 500 mm to install this kit correctly, and must be sized for a board thickness of 16 mm at the bottom and back.
The design of the side metal ribs, made of painted steel, improves the stability and durability of the drawer, allowing it to withstand a maximum load of 60 kg without deformation.
This product complies with the quality standards indicated by the CATAS and FCBA certifications, which guarantee its resistance and safety in use.
The slides include a soft closing system that cushions the impact when closing the drawer, providing a quieter slide, avoiding slamming and prolonging the useful life of the furniture.
The kit's components are secured by means of anchoring systems and hardware included in the package, ensuring a solid installation that avoids misalignment during prolonged use.
The thickness of the board required for the bottom and back of the drawer should be 16 mm to ensure a safe and stable installation.
This kit supports a maximum load of 60 kg thanks to the metal ribs and soft closing rails, which ensure stability and strength even under heavy weight.
The drawer front allows a position adjustment of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally, facilitating precise adjustment during installation.
The side ribs are made of anthracite grey painted steel or painted aluminium, offering high resistance to prolonged use, durability and an elegant finish that integrates perfectly into modern spaces.
Synchronised full-extension slides provide smooth and quiet gliding, allowing full access to the drawer interior, which is especially useful in kitchen and bathroom applications where optimised access is critical.
The tray adjustment system is sliding and can be adapted to the length of the cutlery inside the drawer, and can be installed directly and without the need for tools.
The kit includes synchronised full-extension slides, with cushioned closure and a load-bearing capacity of up to 40 kg.
The recommended board thickness for the bottom and back of the drawer is 18 mm.
The drawer front can be precisely adjusted by means of an eccentric of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally.
Yes, the metal components are made of steel with an anthracite grey painted finish, which enhances strength and aesthetics.
No, the kit includes all the necessary elements: guides, side ribs, front hooks and screws, so there is no need to purchase additional elements.
The kit includes synchronised full-extension slides with cushioned closing, which guarantee a smooth and silent sliding of the drawer, improving its functionality and comfort.
The drawer supports a maximum load capacity of 40 kg, thanks to the included heavy-duty slides.
The front of the drawer can be adjusted by means of an eccentric, allowing an adjustment of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally.
The side ribs are made of steel with a stylish anthracite grey painted finish, providing strength, durability and a modern aesthetic.
For the bottom and back of the drawer, we recommend using 18 mm thick boards for a perfect fit and safe assembly.
This drawer is compatible with modules that allow a depth of 450 mm and are suitable for 18 mm thick back and front panels.
The kit includes slides, side ribs, a set of front hooks for mounting the drawer and screws required for installation.
This product complies with quality standards such as CATAS and FCBA certifications, guaranteeing its durability and resistance for intensive daily use.
The synchronised full-extension system provides smooth and silent sliding, optimising access to the interior of the drawer by allowing the full capacity to be utilised.
The trim covers enhance the aesthetic design of the drawer by covering the fixings, offering a clean, modern finish that blends in perfectly with the furniture.
This plate is compatible with the drawers of the Vertex, Concept and Convex ranges.
Installation is simple, as the plate is fitted to the side of the drawer by means of a clip located in the lower area, ensuring a firm and quick fixing.
Yes, the front of the plate can be screen-printed with a customised logo or design according to the customer's needs.
The plate is made of polypropylene with a finish available in various colours, such as white, grey and anthracite grey.
Yes, the plate can be installed on the left or right side of the drawer, as required.
The 3D system allows the drawer front to be adjusted in three dimensions: ±2 mm vertically, ±1 mm horizontally and ±1.5/4° inclination for precise adjustments.
The drawer has a maximum load capacity of 60 kg, ideal for kitchen or bathroom furniture applications.
This kit is compatible with 16 mm thick boards for the bottom and back of the drawer.
The eccentric adjustment of the drawer front has settings of ±2 mm vertically, ±1 mm horizontally and ±1.5/4° inclination.
The side ribs and trim covers are made of painted steel, with finishes available in anthracite grey, grey or white.
This accessory is compatible with modules with a maximum width of 1200 mm.
The front accessories are made of anthracite grey plastic.
Yes, for installation it is necessary to purchase separately the aluminium front profile designed for these accessories, as well as the 6 mm thick glass panel.
The rail must be mounted in a rearmost position, using the third hole instead of the fourth hole, as indicated in the assembly instructions.
This accessory is compatible with 6 mm thick glass fronts.
This accessory is compatible with interior drawers with a height of 131 mm.
Can be used with modules with a maximum width of 1200 mm.
It is made of anthracite grey plastic, providing a modern and functional finish.
Yes, for installation it is necessary to purchase separately the specific aluminium front profile and the 6 mm thick glass panel, which are not included.
It is necessary to install the guide in a rearmost position, using the third hole instead of the fourth hole, as detailed in the assembly instructions.
This accessory is compatible with drawers with a height of 178 mm and modules with a maximum width of 1200 mm.
To complete the installation, the aluminium front profile and the 6 mm thick glass panel must be purchased separately. These elements are not included in the set.
It is compatible with Vertex drawer kits with metal sides and glass sides.
The position of the guide must be adjusted by moving it further back, using the third hole instead of the fourth hole, as indicated in the instructions.
This accessory is made of anthracite grey plastic, offering a modern and elegant finish that matches different styles of furniture.
This front profile is compatible with Vertex drawers with metal sides and glass sides, for heights of 93 mm, 131 mm and 178 mm.
This front profile is suitable for drawer modules with a maximum width of 1200 mm.
To complete the assembly, the following must be purchased separately: The connecting fittings for attaching the profile to the drawer front. And the 6 mm thick glass panel.
The profile is made of lacquered aluminium with an anthracite grey finish, ensuring strength and modern aesthetics.
Yes, the profile can be cut to size to fit smaller module widths, ensuring that it fits perfectly into custom configurations.
Yes, it is 100% compatible.
The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Vertex drawer.

The following video shows how you can easily to adjust the Vertex drawer.

The following video shows how you can easily to disassemble the Vertex drawer.

Yes, board size are the same for both drawers only the height of the back board changes in the 93mm-high version.
Yes, the railings are the same for both drawers.
Yes, for example, if we want to assemble a drawer for a module width of 500 mm, we have to use the existing code for the 600 mm module and cut the base and rear panels to the width indicated by the formula. Width of module interior - 19 mm.
The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish of the sides of the Vertex drawer is approximately 7043. The RAL code of the grey finish of the sides of the Vertex drawer is approximately 7045. The RAL code of the white finish of the sides of the Vertex drawer is approximately 9003.
The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Vertex inner drawer.

Yes, as long as you have a 13 mm wide square railing , or a straight rib with a minimum internal height of 135 mm and width of 13 mm. If I have a 800 mm wide module, and a 16 mm thick side panel.
The formula is: internal module width -70. For this particular case, the internal width of the module will be 800 - 32 = 768 mm. From this measurement we subtract 70 to get the length to cut the profiles = 666 mm.
Yes, it is the same profile that is used for all four drawer heights. The 178 mm height panel, however, also needs the front rail profile.
Here we will show you how to assemble a Vertex/Concept drawer with the Tecnotool-Pro machine; you will see that it is very simple and very fast thanks to its automatic side stapling system. You will be able to assemble large series of drawers.

It depends on the type of front panel you use for the interior drawer:- Aluminium front. This is fitted onto guides at the usual distance, 37 mm in the 4th hole of the guide.- Particle board front. The thickness of this board must be added to the 37 mm of the 4th hole of the guide. In other words, if the front is 19 mm thick, the guide must be fastened at 37 + 19 = 56 mm at the 4th hole of the guide.
No, the assembly and positioning of the rails is the same in both the push and soft close versions.
No, the minimum unit depth is the same (depth + 5 mm).
The kit incorporates 40 self-adhesive silicone drops, which are placed on the base of each tray to prevent movement during the opening or closing of the drawer, ensuring stability without the need for mechanical fixing.
A minimum depth of 500 mm is recommended to guarantee the correct extraction of the 450 mm offered by the mechanism.
Yes, the spacers that are user for assembling kitchen Vertex, Concept and Vantage drawers are the same as hinges on unit doors (hinged doors).
It has a thickness of 6 mm.
No, the glass sides are already mounted, just like the traditional metal sides.
Yes, without any problem. However, if the drawers are wider than 600 mm, and in order to guarantee a correct opening of the drawer when pressing on any point of the front of the drawer, it is recommended to mount it.
The rod is supplied with a length valid for modules of 1200 mm, with a side thickness of 16 mm, and can be cut to the size required for our assembly.
No, the minimum installation depth is the same. Drawer depth + 5 mm
They are calculated for a side thickness of 16 mm.
Both the bottom and the back are 16 mm thick.
The following video shows how to assemble such a box in a simple way:

The hook set is designed to attach the drawer front to the ribs, providing a secure, strong and simple connection. It is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawer systems.
The parts are made of sheet steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides high corrosion resistance and durability.
This product includes two mounting methods: a screw mounting method and a snap-on mounting method, allowing it to be adapted to different installation needs. The kit includes 4 x 4x20 mm screws and a set of hooks.
It is designed for the following drawer heights: Vertex: 83 mm, 133 mm. Concept: 105 mm, 138 mm. Convex: 90 mm, 128 mm.
Secure fixing is achieved by means of a robust design that allows the hitch to be installed inside the side of the drawer, fixing it firmly to the front of the drawer, ensuring stability and strength even with prolonged use.
The Lokbox joint is ideal for wide drawer widths where a secure bottom to border fixing is required without compromising adjustability or requiring pre-machining.
Although its load capacity depends on the design of the drawer and the border material, its fixing with expandable cleats ensures a firm and stable hold for prolonged use.
Yes, the Lokbox joint can be dismantled and reused in another drawer, provided that the expandable plugs are still in good condition and the new installation is compatible with its fixing system.
Plastic with a grey finish provides good resistance to wear and tear and moisture, as well as being a lightweight material that does not add extra weight to the drawer structure.
No specific maintenance is required, but it is recommended to periodically check the fixing of the expanding dowels and clean the surface with a dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation.
The slim rectangular siphon guard is designed to conceal the view of the siphon in bathroom furniture, optimising the interior space and preventing objects from falling out.
The kit includes a set of synchronised full-extension slides, a set of ribs, a set of front hooks and screws for mounting the drawer.
The 3D adjustment allows the drawer to be adjusted in three axes: vertically by means of an eccentric (±2 mm), horizontally (±1 mm) and inclination (+1.5/-4 mm), which facilitates precise and aligned installation.
This drawer supports up to 40 kg of load. Its slides have a damped closing system and total synchronisation, ensuring a smooth and silent movement.
It is available in depths of 270 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm, 500 mm and 550 mm, with finishes in white painted, aluminium painted and anthracite grey.
The cabinet must have a board thickness of 16 mm for the bottom and back of the drawer, ensuring a safe installation and a perfect fit of the adjustment system.
This 131 mm high model offers more storage capacity compared to lower versions, without compromising the accessibility and stability of the drawer.
The 3D adjustment allows the drawer front to be adjusted in three directions: ±2 mm vertically by means of an eccentric, ±1 mm horizontally and inclination of +1.5/-4 mm, ensuring precise adjustment.
It is available in depths of 270 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm, 500 mm and 550 mm, with finishes in white painted, aluminium painted and anthracite grey.
The drawer supports up to 40 kg load thanks to its synchronised full-extension slides with cushioned closing, which ensure smooth, shock-free movement.
The cabinet must have a board thickness of 16 mm at the bottom and back of the drawer to ensure a stable installation and optimal adjustment of the adjustment system.
The 178 mm Vertex drawer offers greater storage capacity, allowing larger items to be stored without compromising accessibility or the stability of the unit.
The 3D adjustment allows precise adjustment of the drawer front in three directions: ±2 mm vertically by means of an eccentric, ±1 mm horizontally and an inclination of +1.5/-4 mm, facilitating perfect alignment.
It is available in depths of 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm, 500 mm and 550 mm, with finishes in white painted, aluminium painted and anthracite grey.
This drawer supports up to 40 kg load and features synchronised full-extension slides with soft closing, guaranteeing smooth and silent sliding.
The cabinet must have a board thickness of 16 mm at the bottom and back of the drawer to ensure stable installation and precise adjustment of the adjustment system.
At Emuca, we make it easy for you. Here you can download this Excel file that will help you configure your drawer unit step by step. Simply enter the module measurements (height, thickness, overlap, etc.) and specify how many drawers you want. This file allows you to: Automatically calculate the machining dimensions of the drawer fronts (H1, H2, H3...) (mm). Determine the height of each drawer front (mm). And obtain the machining dimensions required to manufacture the drawer fronts (X, Y) (mm). It also includes visual representations so you can check the result and avoid errors. Ideal for carpenters, designers or DIY enthusiasts who want a practical and accurate solution. If a warning message appears when you open the Excel file, close the file. Right-click on the downloaded file and select Properties. At the bottom of the window, tick the box Unblock. Click Apply and then OK. You can now open the file.
Download document
Due to the fact there is separate assembly on the drawer, you can mount the Concept rails on other models of drawers. However, it is not advisable, as each drawer has its own rails and its own machining distances.
In order to assemble a kitchen drawer with hinges on the unit doors (hinged doors) it is necessary to use hinges with an opening angle of 165ª or to use spacers, doing so means there will be enough space to pull out the drawer.
Yes, the Lokbox mechanism is used to fasten the bottom of the drawer to the front part without preventing adjustment of it. It is compatible with the Concept, Slim and Vantage-Q drawers or any drawer. It is especially recommended for very wide drawers used in the furnishings of kitchens, bathrooms, lounges and even inside wardrobes. However, you need to take into account that the installation dimensions change. See diagram.
The white painted aluminium finish offers a modern and easy to clean design, ideal for environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Lokbox mechanism.

The railing is made of painted aluminium, which ensures corrosion resistance and durability in high humidity environments.
Yes, it is compatible with full-extension systems, improving functionality and access to interior drawers.
It is recommended to use self-drilling screws or specific brackets compatible with the drawer to ensure a firm fixing.
The 1.12 metre length allows the weight to be distributed evenly, avoiding deformation and improving the stability of the contents.
The white painted aluminium finish offers a modern and easy to clean design, ideal for environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
This template set is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawers.
Templates allow precise marking of the position of the drawer front attachments, eliminating the need for manual measurements.
The kit includes only the marking templates, specifically designed to facilitate the installation process.
The inserts are made of durable plastic, ensuring durability and precision during use.
No pre-measurement is necessary, as the templates are designed for direct and precise marking without additional calculations.
The front attachment uses a screw fixing system, which ensures a firm and secure connection to the drawer rail.
The screw allows the hook to be fixed to the drawer rail, ensuring that it remains stable and supports the weight of the objects without any misalignment.
The plastic from which the hitch is made is tough, allowing it to withstand the test of time and maintain its functionality without warping or cracking.
This attachment is compatible with handrails specifically designed for Concept drawer systems, providing an efficient and stable attachment.
Its compact and reinforced design allows for easy installation and high durability, ensuring that it withstands continuous use and does not wear out easily.
The rear attachment of the railings is designed to be compatible with standard boards without the need for machining.
Standard depths available are 270 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm and 500 mm.
The square rails ensure that items inside the drawers do not shift around, maximising storage and organisation.
Yes, the painted finish of steel railings provides adequate corrosion resistance, making them ideal for wet environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
No, this model is designed for direct installation without the need for machining on the panel.
The kit includes 2 aluminium profiles, 4 plastic side adapters, 4 plastic dividers and assembly instructions.
The profiles are made of aluminium, and the side adapters are made of plastic with a painted finish, which guarantees strength, lightness and a functional design.
The kit is initially designed for depths of 350 mm, but is not compatible with depths shallower than this.
It is compatible with square rails from the Vertex and Concept range, 178 mm Vertex drawer sides, 185 mm Concept sides and straight ribs of other heights such as 13 mm.
The widths are adjusted using the included aluminium profiles, which allow the length to be modified according to the requirements of the drawer.
The design of the fixture directly covers the side edges of the rear panel, eliminating the need for additional machining on the part.
With this set of rear hooks and a rail, it is possible to configure double or half-height drawers, adapting to different storage needs.
They are made of plastic with a durable finish, ensuring strength, lightness and an aesthetic appearance in keeping with the design of the drawer.
No, the accessory allows manual height adjustment without additional effort, offering an intuitive and efficient installation.
The tray adjustment system is sliding and can be adapted to the length of the cutlery inside the drawer, and can be installed directly and without the need for tools.
This plate is compatible with the drawers of the Vertex, Concept and Convex ranges.
Installation is simple, as the plate is fitted to the side of the drawer by means of a clip located in the lower area, ensuring a firm and quick fixing.
Yes, the front of the plate can be screen-printed with a customised logo or design according to the customer's needs.
The plate is made of polypropylene with a finish available in various colours, such as white, grey and anthracite grey.
Yes, the plate can be installed on the left or right side of the drawer, as required.
Yes, it is 100% compatible.
The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Vertex inner drawer.

Yes, as long as you have a 13 mm wide square railing , or a straight rib with a minimum internal height of 135 mm and width of 13 mm. If I have a 800 mm wide module, and a 16 mm thick side panel.
The formula is: internal module width -70. For this particular case, the internal width of the module will be 800 - 32 = 768 mm. From this measurement we subtract 70 to get the length to cut the profiles = 666 mm.
Yes, it is the same profile that is used for all four drawer heights. The 178 mm height panel, however, also needs the front rail profile.
It depends on the type of front panel you use for the interior drawer:- Aluminium front. This is fitted onto guides at the usual distance, 37 mm in the 4th hole of the guide.- Particle board front. The thickness of this board must be added to the 37 mm of the 4th hole of the guide. In other words, if the front is 19 mm thick, the guide must be fastened at 37 + 19 = 56 mm at the 4th hole of the guide.
Yes, the spacers that are user for assembling kitchen Vertex, Concept and Vantage drawers are the same as hinges on unit doors (hinged doors).
The hook set is designed to attach the drawer front to the ribs, providing a secure, strong and simple connection. It is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawer systems.
The parts are made of sheet steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides high corrosion resistance and durability.
This product includes two mounting methods: a screw mounting method and a snap-on mounting method, allowing it to be adapted to different installation needs. The kit includes 4 x 4x20 mm screws and a set of hooks.
It is designed for the following drawer heights: Vertex: 83 mm, 133 mm. Concept: 105 mm, 138 mm. Convex: 90 mm, 128 mm.
Secure fixing is achieved by means of a robust design that allows the hitch to be installed inside the side of the drawer, fixing it firmly to the front of the drawer, ensuring stability and strength even with prolonged use.
The Lokbox joint is ideal for wide drawer widths where a secure bottom to border fixing is required without compromising adjustability or requiring pre-machining.
Although its load capacity depends on the design of the drawer and the border material, its fixing with expandable cleats ensures a firm and stable hold for prolonged use.
Yes, the Lokbox joint can be dismantled and reused in another drawer, provided that the expandable plugs are still in good condition and the new installation is compatible with its fixing system.
Plastic with a grey finish provides good resistance to wear and tear and moisture, as well as being a lightweight material that does not add extra weight to the drawer structure.
No specific maintenance is required, but it is recommended to periodically check the fixing of the expanding dowels and clean the surface with a dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation.
The slim rectangular siphon guard is designed to conceal the view of the siphon in bathroom furniture, optimising the interior space and preventing objects from falling out.
Due to the fact there is separate assembly on the drawer, you can mount the Concept rails on other models of drawers. However, it is not advisable, as each drawer has its own rails and its own machining distances.
In order to assemble a kitchen drawer with hinges on the unit doors (hinged doors) it is necessary to use hinges with an opening angle of 165ª or to use spacers, doing so means there will be enough space to pull out the drawer.
Yes, the Lokbox mechanism is used to fasten the bottom of the drawer to the front part without preventing adjustment of it. It is compatible with the Concept, Slim and Vantage-Q drawers or any drawer. It is especially recommended for very wide drawers used in the furnishings of kitchens, bathrooms, lounges and even inside wardrobes. However, you need to take into account that the installation dimensions change. See diagram.
    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Lokbox mechanism.

    The railing is made of painted aluminium, which ensures corrosion resistance and durability in high humidity environments.
    Yes, it is compatible with full-extension systems, improving functionality and access to interior drawers.
    It is recommended to use self-drilling screws or specific brackets compatible with the drawer to ensure a firm fixing.
    The 1.12 metre length allows the weight to be distributed evenly, avoiding deformation and improving the stability of the contents.
    This template set is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawers.
    Templates allow precise marking of the position of the drawer front attachments, eliminating the need for manual measurements.
    The kit includes only the marking templates, specifically designed to facilitate the installation process.
    The inserts are made of durable plastic, ensuring durability and precision during use.
    No pre-measurement is necessary, as the templates are designed for direct and precise marking without additional calculations.
    This front attachment kit is compatible with 105 mm high front panels.
    Installation is carried out by attaching the hooks to the sides of the panel with screws, ensuring a secure and stable fastening.
    The high quality plastic ensures excellent strength, durability against daily use and ease of cleaning, while maintaining a like-new appearance over time.
    No additional tools are required, as assembly is simple using the included screws.
    This system is characterised by its high resistance, even under intensive use, and offers optimum stability in the assembly of the drawer front panel.
    This attachment set is designed for standard thickness front panels compatible with the Concept system.
    Yes, the hooks allow precise adjustment of the front panel, ensuring perfect alignment in the drawer.
    High-strength plastic construction and robust design ensure optimum performance in high-performance applications.
    No, installation is simple and only requires basic tools such as a screwdriver.
    Yes, these couplings are fully compatible with other components of the Concept system, ensuring efficient integration.
    This set of hooks is compatible with interior drawers with a height of 138 mm.
    It uses screws to fix the front panel to the drawer, ensuring stable and secure immobilisation.
    They are made of high quality white plastic, offering durability, resistance over time and a clean aesthetic finish.
    No, the couplings are designed to require no changes or adjustments once correctly installed.
    They facilitate the stable fixing of the front panel, allowing the internal space of the drawer to be optimised and improving its functionality.
    The front profile is fixed to the Concept inner drawer by means of screwed connections, which ensure a stable and durable connection.
    The profile is strong and lightweight thanks to its high quality aluminium construction, which provides a balance between robustness and low weight.
    Yes, the white or anthracite grey painted front profile is designed to blend perfectly with different decor styles and finishes.
    This profile is compatible with Concept internal drawers of different heights depending on the system used, including options with or without railing.
    Aluminium provides high durability to the front profile, as it resists continuous use, the passage of time and retains its appearance without deformation or oxidation.
    The front attachment uses a screw fixing system, which ensures a firm and secure connection to the drawer rail.
    The screw allows the hook to be fixed to the drawer rail, ensuring that it remains stable and supports the weight of the objects without any misalignment.
    The plastic from which the hitch is made is tough, allowing it to withstand the test of time and maintain its functionality without warping or cracking.
    This attachment is compatible with handrails specifically designed for Concept drawer systems, providing an efficient and stable attachment.
    Its compact and reinforced design allows for easy installation and high durability, ensuring that it withstands continuous use and does not wear out easily.
    The rear attachment of the railings is designed to be compatible with standard boards without the need for machining.
    Standard depths available are 270 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm and 500 mm.
    The square rails ensure that items inside the drawers do not shift around, maximising storage and organisation.
    Yes, the painted finish of steel railings provides adequate corrosion resistance, making them ideal for wet environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
    No, this model is designed for direct installation without the need for machining on the panel.
    The kit includes 2 aluminium profiles, 4 plastic side adapters, 4 plastic dividers and assembly instructions.
    The profiles are made of aluminium, and the side adapters are made of plastic with a painted finish, which guarantees strength, lightness and a functional design.
    The kit is initially designed for depths of 350 mm, but is not compatible with depths shallower than this.
    It is compatible with square rails from the Vertex and Concept range, 178 mm Vertex drawer sides, 185 mm Concept sides and straight ribs of other heights such as 13 mm.
    The widths are adjusted using the included aluminium profiles, which allow the length to be modified according to the requirements of the drawer.
    The design of the fixture directly covers the side edges of the rear panel, eliminating the need for additional machining on the part.
    With this set of rear hooks and a rail, it is possible to configure double or half-height drawers, adapting to different storage needs.
    They are made of plastic with a durable finish, ensuring strength, lightness and an aesthetic appearance in keeping with the design of the drawer.
    No, the accessory allows manual height adjustment without additional effort, offering an intuitive and efficient installation.
    The tray adjustment system is sliding and can be adapted to the length of the cutlery inside the drawer, and can be installed directly and without the need for tools.
    This plate is compatible with the drawers of the Vertex, Concept and Convex ranges.
    Installation is simple, as the plate is fitted to the side of the drawer by means of a clip located in the lower area, ensuring a firm and quick fixing.
    Yes, the front of the plate can be screen-printed with a customised logo or design according to the customer's needs.
    The plate is made of polypropylene with a finish available in various colours, such as white, grey and anthracite grey.
    Yes, the plate can be installed on the left or right side of the drawer, as required.
    Yes, it is 100% compatible.
    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Vertex railings.

    Yes, as long as you have a 13 mm wide square railing , or a straight rib with a minimum internal height of 135 mm and width of 13 mm. If I have a 800 mm wide module, and a 16 mm thick side panel.
    The formula is: internal module width -70. For this particular case, the internal width of the module will be 800 - 32 = 768 mm. From this measurement we subtract 70 to get the length to cut the profiles = 666 mm.
    Here we will show you how to assemble a Vertex/Concept drawer with the Tecnotool-Pro machine; you will see that it is very simple and very fast thanks to its automatic side stapling system. You will be able to assemble large series of drawers.

    The kit incorporates 40 self-adhesive silicone drops, which are placed on the base of each tray to prevent movement during the opening or closing of the drawer, ensuring stability without the need for mechanical fixing.
    Yes, the spacers that are user for assembling kitchen Vertex, Concept and Vantage drawers are the same as hinges on unit doors (hinged doors).
    The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish of the sides of the Concept drawer is approximately 7043. The RAL code of the white finish of the sides of the Concept drawer is approximately 9003.
    This 25 mm thick spacer is compatible with the following interior drawers: Vertex, Concept and Vantage.
    The spacer is intended for assembling a drawer inside a unit with a hinged door. It can also be used in cabinet interiors with a sliding door with loss of opening.
    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Concept drawer.

    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Concept inner drawer.

    The 138 mm Concept rib acts as an add-on part to provide additional support for Concept drawers. It is specifically designed for left-side mounting.
    The rib has a height of 138 mm and a depth of 350 mm. Its robust design ensures stability and additional support, contributing to the durability of the drawer.
    It is made of high-quality steel with an anthracite grey finish. This material and finish guarantee resistance to wear and tear and a modern aesthetic appearance.
    The assembly of the rib is carried out using screws, which are placed in the front and rear parts of the drawer. It is a simple process and requires no prior preparation or specialised tools.
    The packaging includes a total of 20 units. The rib is compatible with the Concept drawer system and is designed to fit your components without the need for additional adjustments.
    The 138 mm Concept rib is an add-on part designed to provide additional support and stability for Concept drawer systems. It is intended exclusively for mounting on the right-hand side of the drawer.
    The rib has a height of 138 mm and available depths of 350 mm or 450 mm, depending on the version selected. Its robust design allows for additional support and improves the drawer's resistance to daily loads.
    It is made of high-quality steel with an anthracite grey finish. This material guarantees durability, wear resistance and modern aesthetics.
    The assembly of the rib is carried out by fixing it to the drawer using screws, which are installed in the front and rear parts. It is a simple procedure that requires no specialised tools or prior preparation.
    The packaging contains 20 units per pack. Available depths are 350 mm (SKU 3107435) and 450 mm (SKU 3107635), adapting to different storage needs.
    The hook set is designed to attach the drawer front to the ribs, providing a secure, strong and simple connection. It is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawer systems.
    The parts are made of sheet steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides high corrosion resistance and durability.
    This product includes two mounting methods: a screw mounting method and a snap-on mounting method, allowing it to be adapted to different installation needs. The kit includes 4 x 4x20 mm screws and a set of hooks.
    It is designed for the following drawer heights: Vertex: 83 mm, 133 mm. Concept: 105 mm, 138 mm. Convex: 90 mm, 128 mm.
    Secure fixing is achieved by means of a robust design that allows the hitch to be installed inside the side of the drawer, fixing it firmly to the front of the drawer, ensuring stability and strength even with prolonged use.
    The Concept slide has a load capacity of up to 30 kg, making it ideal for medium to large drawers in kitchen, bathroom and general storage furniture.
    It incorporates a soft-close system that reduces the impact when closing the drawer, providing a smooth and silent movement, which improves the user experience and prolongs the life of the mechanism.
    It is available in depths of 350 mm and 500 mm. The choice depends on the size of the drawer and the space available in the cabinet where it will be installed.
    The guide is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which guarantees a high resistance to corrosion and wear, ensuring a long service life even in heavy-duty environments.
    It is installed on the left side of the drawer with screws. The drawer rib is placed on top of the slide to allow sliding. No specialised tools are required for assembly, but it is essential to align the slide correctly to ensure optimum sliding.
    The kit includes full-extension slides with soft close, a set of ribs, a set of front hooks for the outer drawer, screws and assembly instructions.
    The drawer has a load capacity of up to 50 kg. Its slides have a full-extension and soft-close system, allowing for smooth and silent sliding.
    The mounting system allows eccentric adjustment of the front panel with an adjustment of ±2 mm vertically and ±1 mm horizontally, which facilitates precise alignment.
    It is available in white and anthracite grey painted finishes. Its components are made from steel, which guarantees strength and durability.
    To complete the assembly, it is only necessary to have the boards cut to the correct size for the bottom, back and border of the drawer.
    The 105 mm Concept rib is a side panel designed to provide stability and support to the drawer, forming an essential part of its structure and allowing constant use without deformation.
    It is available in depths of 350 mm (SKU 3106035) and 450 mm (SKU 3106235). The choice depends on the size of the drawer and the required installation space.
    It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish, which guarantees high resistance to wear and tear, structural stability and a modern design that integrates easily into different types of furniture.
    The installation is carried out on the right-hand side of the drawer by means of fixings, ensuring that the drawer is properly secured. Depending on the assembly, other components such as guides, hooks and boards may be necessary to complete the structure.
    It is ideal for medium sized drawers, providing a balance between strength and storage capacity in kitchen, bathroom and office furniture.
    Unlike standard slides, the Concept slide incorporates a soft closing system that avoids abrupt shocks when closing the drawer, offering a more controlled and silent movement.
    Soft-close reduces impact when closing the drawer, minimising wear and tear on both the slide and the cabinet structure, prolonging its life and maintaining smooth operation.
    Yes, the Concept rail allows for minor adjustments after installation to improve alignment. It is important to ensure that both slides are level to avoid uneven sliding.
    It is recommended to clean the guides periodically with a dry or slightly damp cloth to remove dust and to avoid accumulations of dirt that could affect their sliding. It is not necessary to use lubricants.
    The choice between 350 mm and 450 mm depends on the size of the drawer and the space available in the cabinet. For deeper drawers, the 450 mm version makes better use of the storage space.
    The 105 mm Concept rib is an essential side panel for assembling the drawer structure, providing additional stability and support to ensure durability in daily use.
    It is installed on the left side of the caisson and helps to reinforce the structure, preventing deformation and ensuring smooth operation by supporting the movement of the caisson.
    This rib is available in a depth of 350 mm (SKU 3106735). The choice of depth depends on the size of the drawer and the space available in the cabinet.
    It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish, which provides high resistance to wear and tear and a sleek, modern design that blends in easily with different styles of furniture.
    This rib is designed specifically for the Concept drawer system, so its compatibility with other models will depend on the manufacturer's specifications and the design of the furniture.
    The Lokbox joint is ideal for wide drawer widths where a secure bottom to border fixing is required without compromising adjustability or requiring pre-machining.
    Although its load capacity depends on the design of the drawer and the border material, its fixing with expandable cleats ensures a firm and stable hold for prolonged use.
    Yes, the Lokbox joint can be dismantled and reused in another drawer, provided that the expandable plugs are still in good condition and the new installation is compatible with its fixing system.
    Plastic with a grey finish provides good resistance to wear and tear and moisture, as well as being a lightweight material that does not add extra weight to the drawer structure.
    No specific maintenance is required, but it is recommended to periodically check the fixing of the expanding dowels and clean the surface with a dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation.
    The total extraction system with soft closing allows complete access to the inside of the drawer, facilitating organisation and avoiding sudden knocks when closing it, which prolongs the useful life of the unit.
    The 105 mm height is ideal for medium storage drawers, allowing efficient space allocation without compromising accessibility to the stored items.
    The white painted finish offers a clean and minimalist design, while the anthracite grey provides a more modern and elegant look, adapting to different styles of furniture.
    Yes, the drawer assembly allows for minor adjustments to improve the alignment of the drawer, ensuring precise closing and optimal slide operation.
    The choice of drawer depth depends on available cabinet space and storage needs, with options from 270 mm to 500 mm for versatility.
    The slim rectangular siphon guard is designed to conceal the view of the siphon in bathroom furniture, optimising the interior space and preventing objects from falling out.
    The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish of the sides of the Concept kitchen, household and bathroom drawer is approximately 7043. The RAL code of the white finish of the sides of the Concept kitchen, household and bathroom drawer is approximately 9003. Although it is necessary to bear in mind that the white silk colour of said drawer is metallized and the RAL codes are for flat colours.
    The board cutting dimension and the position of the hook on the front are different. However, the hole pattern of the guide rail is the same for the Concept, Vantage-Q and Slim drawers.
    Due to the fact there is separate assembly on the drawer, you can mount the Concept rails on other models of drawers. However, it is not advisable, as each drawer has its own rails and its own machining distances.
    In order to assemble a kitchen drawer with hinges on the unit doors (hinged doors) it is necessary to use hinges with an opening angle of 165ª or to use spacers, doing so means there will be enough space to pull out the drawer.
    Yes, the Lokbox mechanism is used to fasten the bottom of the drawer to the front part without preventing adjustment of it. It is compatible with the Concept, Slim and Vantage-Q drawers or any drawer. It is especially recommended for very wide drawers used in the furnishings of kitchens, bathrooms, lounges and even inside wardrobes. However, you need to take into account that the installation dimensions change. See diagram.
      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Lokbox mechanism.

      This template set is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawers.
      Templates allow precise marking of the position of the drawer front attachments, eliminating the need for manual measurements.
      The kit includes only the marking templates, specifically designed to facilitate the installation process.
      The inserts are made of durable plastic, ensuring durability and precision during use.
      No pre-measurement is necessary, as the templates are designed for direct and precise marking without additional calculations.
      The front attachment uses a screw fixing system, which ensures a firm and secure connection to the drawer rail.
      The screw allows the hook to be fixed to the drawer rail, ensuring that it remains stable and supports the weight of the objects without any misalignment.
      The plastic from which the hitch is made is tough, allowing it to withstand the test of time and maintain its functionality without warping or cracking.
      This attachment is compatible with handrails specifically designed for Concept drawer systems, providing an efficient and stable attachment.
      Its compact and reinforced design allows for easy installation and high durability, ensuring that it withstands continuous use and does not wear out easily.
      The rear attachment of the railings is designed to be compatible with standard boards without the need for machining.
      Standard depths available are 270 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm and 500 mm.
      The square rails ensure that items inside the drawers do not shift around, maximising storage and organisation.
      Yes, the painted finish of steel railings provides adequate corrosion resistance, making them ideal for wet environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
      No, this model is designed for direct installation without the need for machining on the panel.
      The kit includes 2 aluminium profiles, 4 plastic side adapters, 4 plastic dividers and assembly instructions.
      The profiles are made of aluminium, and the side adapters are made of plastic with a painted finish, which guarantees strength, lightness and a functional design.
      The kit is initially designed for depths of 350 mm, but is not compatible with depths shallower than this.
      It is compatible with square rails from the Vertex and Concept range, 178 mm Vertex drawer sides, 185 mm Concept sides and straight ribs of other heights such as 13 mm.
      The widths are adjusted using the included aluminium profiles, which allow the length to be modified according to the requirements of the drawer.
      The trim plate is designed to cover the access to the drawer front attachment and adjustment system, improving both aesthetics and functionality.
      Yes, the cover plate is suitable for mounting on both the left and right side of the drawer.
      It is made of plastic, which guarantees lightness, durability and a clean, uniform finish.
      The cover plate covers the access to the coupling and regulation system, protecting and concealing it for a more aesthetic and functional design.
      It is available in three finishes: white, grey and anthracite grey, which can be aesthetically integrated with different drawer designs.
      The design of the fixture directly covers the side edges of the rear panel, eliminating the need for additional machining on the part.
      With this set of rear hooks and a rail, it is possible to configure double or half-height drawers, adapting to different storage needs.
      They are made of plastic with a durable finish, ensuring strength, lightness and an aesthetic appearance in keeping with the design of the drawer.
      No, the accessory allows manual height adjustment without additional effort, offering an intuitive and efficient installation.
      The tray adjustment system is sliding and can be adapted to the length of the cutlery inside the drawer, and can be installed directly and without the need for tools.
      This plate is compatible with the drawers of the Vertex, Concept and Convex ranges.
      Installation is simple, as the plate is fitted to the side of the drawer by means of a clip located in the lower area, ensuring a firm and quick fixing.
      Yes, the front of the plate can be screen-printed with a customised logo or design according to the customer's needs.
      The plate is made of polypropylene with a finish available in various colours, such as white, grey and anthracite grey.
      Yes, the plate can be installed on the left or right side of the drawer, as required.
      Yes, it is 100% compatible.
      Yes, as long as you have a 13 mm wide square railing , or a straight rib with a minimum internal height of 135 mm and width of 13 mm. If I have a 800 mm wide module, and a 16 mm thick side panel.
      The formula is: internal module width -70. For this particular case, the internal width of the module will be 800 - 32 = 768 mm. From this measurement we subtract 70 to get the length to cut the profiles = 666 mm.
      The kit incorporates 40 self-adhesive silicone drops, which are placed on the base of each tray to prevent movement during the opening or closing of the drawer, ensuring stability without the need for mechanical fixing.
      The hook set is designed to attach the drawer front to the ribs, providing a secure, strong and simple connection. It is compatible with Vertex, Concept and Convex drawer systems.
      The parts are made of sheet steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides high corrosion resistance and durability.
      This product includes two mounting methods: a screw mounting method and a snap-on mounting method, allowing it to be adapted to different installation needs. The kit includes 4 x 4x20 mm screws and a set of hooks.
      It is designed for the following drawer heights: Vertex: 83 mm, 133 mm. Concept: 105 mm, 138 mm. Convex: 90 mm, 128 mm.
      Secure fixing is achieved by means of a robust design that allows the hitch to be installed inside the side of the drawer, fixing it firmly to the front of the drawer, ensuring stability and strength even with prolonged use.
      The Lokbox joint is ideal for wide drawer widths where a secure bottom to border fixing is required without compromising adjustability or requiring pre-machining.
      Although its load capacity depends on the design of the drawer and the border material, its fixing with expandable cleats ensures a firm and stable hold for prolonged use.
      Yes, the Lokbox joint can be dismantled and reused in another drawer, provided that the expandable plugs are still in good condition and the new installation is compatible with its fixing system.
      Plastic with a grey finish provides good resistance to wear and tear and moisture, as well as being a lightweight material that does not add extra weight to the drawer structure.
      No specific maintenance is required, but it is recommended to periodically check the fixing of the expanding dowels and clean the surface with a dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation.
      The slim rectangular siphon guard is designed to conceal the view of the siphon in bathroom furniture, optimising the interior space and preventing objects from falling out.
      Due to the fact there is separate assembly on the drawer, you can mount the Concept rails on other models of drawers. However, it is not advisable, as each drawer has its own rails and its own machining distances.
      Yes, the Lokbox mechanism is used to fasten the bottom of the drawer to the front part without preventing adjustment of it. It is compatible with the Concept, Slim and Vantage-Q drawers or any drawer. It is especially recommended for very wide drawers used in the furnishings of kitchens, bathrooms, lounges and even inside wardrobes. However, you need to take into account that the installation dimensions change. See diagram.
        Yes, the drawer measurements, including its dimensions and machining, are fully compatible. This allows customers to mount the Silver partial pull-out slides with push to open function and the Silver soft-close partial pull-out slides on the same drawer. However, they are not compatible with the Slippe partial pull-out slides with push to open function.
        The Silver concealed partial-extension slides can carry a maximum load of 25 kg.
        They include a soft closing system that uses a shock absorbing piston, which guarantees a silent and fluid closing of the drawer, avoiding abrupt shocks.
        They offer a vertical adjustment of ±5 mm, which facilitates the precise adjustment of the drawer position in the cabinet.
        The rollers are made of delrin, a high quality material that ensures smooth running and precise guidance in both horizontal and vertical directions.
        Silver concealed slides are available in depths of 240 mm, 290 mm, 340 mm, 390 mm, 440 mm, 540 mm, 640 mm and 690 mm.
        These slides are compatible with drawer depths of 240 mm, 290 mm, 340 mm, 390 mm, 440 mm and 490 mm, depending on the model selected.
        The push system allows the drawer to eject automatically when pressure is applied to the front of the drawer, eliminating the need for handles.
        These guides offer a vertical adjustment range of ±5 mm for precise adjustment.
        The locking pivot ensures that the drawer does not unintentionally dismount from the slide and maintains its stability.
        These slides have a maximum load capacity of 25 kg.
        The Silver concealed slide set supports a maximum load of 30 kg, ideal for home furniture.
        These slides include a locking pivot mounted on the slide itself to secure the position of the drawer and prevent unintentional disassembly.
        They offer a vertical adjustment of ±4.5 mm, which facilitates the precise adjustment of the drawer.
        They are made of steel, which guarantees durability, strength and a smooth and quiet operation thanks to the high quality delrin bearings.
        This model is available in depth lengths of 240 mm, 290 mm, 340 mm, 390 mm, 440 mm, 490 mm, 540 mm and 590 mm to suit various furniture design needs.
        Kit includes: 2 side metal ribs and mounting hardware. It is designed for easy integration with Simplex drawer systems.
        The ribs are made of high-strength steel, available in white painted and anthracite grey finishes. Both finishes guarantee durability, corrosion resistance and aesthetic design.
        The system is designed for drawers with a height of 86 mm and multiple depths: 290 mm, 340 mm, 400 mm and 440 mm. Compatible with full-extension slides and Simplex soft close systems.
        Yes, installation is quick and easy. No special tools are required. Just assemble the ribs with the slides and fix them to the front of the drawer with the included screws.
        The system supports up to 35 kg per drawer, ideal for residential and commercial applications.
        Yes, the drawer’s width and depth measures are the same. Only the lock pin machining is in a different position.
        The following video shows how to assemble such a box in a simple way:

          The front attachment kit is designed specifically for the 141 mm high Vantage-Q internal drawer. It is compatible with square side rails, allowing the installation of front panels in internal storage systems.
          This product requires direct mounting on the side and front panels of the drawer. It is recommended to be installed on clean, flat surfaces using the included fixings. The modular design allows for precise adjustment to ensure a tight and aligned installation.
          The set is made of high quality plastic with a grey or white finish. This material combines lightness with excellent impact resistance, guaranteeing durability in everyday environments.
          The design of the hooks ensures a robust fixing between the front panel and the side rails. In addition, it acts as a reinforcement in the corner of the drawer, preventing unwanted movement and ensuring stability over time.
          This accessory is designed according to Emuca quality standards to ensure reliability. Although no specific international standards are specified, its optimised design minimises risks of assembly and use, providing safety in storage facilities.
          The Vantage-Q drawer kit supports a load capacity of up to 40 kg. The slides are designed with a push system for smooth and silent opening, ensuring a smooth glide.
          The drawer ribs are equipped with staples designed to be fixed to the bottom of the drawer by machine, ensuring precision and robustness in assembly. They are compatible with any module width.
          The drawer allows a vertical adjustment of ±2 mm and a horizontal adjustment of ±1.5 mm in the front fixing, facilitating precise adjustments for a perfect installation.
          The materials used in the kit include epoxy painted steel, finished in white (RAL 9003) and grey (RAL 9006). These materials offer high resistance to wear and an excellent aesthetic finish.
          The product code includes all the elements required for the assembly of an 83 mm high external drawer: runners, ribs, rear hooking set and a front hooking set for the external drawer. For complete installation, no additional components are required.
          Vantage-Q slides incorporate a soft-close system that minimises resistance to use and provides a smooth, quiet glide, improving drawer comfort and durability.
          These slides can carry loads of up to 35 kg, making them ideal for kitchen, bathroom and storage furniture that requires reliable sliding under medium loads.
          They are available in depths of 270 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm and 450 mm, allowing them to be adapted to different drawer sizes according to the user's needs.
          They are made of steel with a bright zinc-plated finish, which ensures high corrosion resistance and a modern aesthetic appearance. The material provides a long service life even in heavy-duty environments.
          Installation is carried out by fixing the slides to the cabinet and the drawer with screws. It is important to make sure that both slides are level and aligned to ensure smooth sliding and to avoid misalignment of the lock.
          The set of side rails improves storage in the drawers, allowing objects to be placed in an organised manner and preventing them from shifting during use.
          These rails are available in depths of 270 mm (SKU 3015725) and 300 mm (SKU 3015825). The choice depends on the size of the drawer and compatibility with the drawer structure.
          They are made of plastic and aluminium, with a metallised aluminium finish. These materials offer a combination of strength, lightness and modern aesthetics.
          For their installation, it is necessary to have the specific rear and front brackets that allow them to be correctly fixed to the structure of the box.
          These rails are designed for Vantage-Q drawers and are available in different lengths (from 270 mm to 500 mm) to suit different drawer depths.
          Unlike other fastening systems, this set offers a bolt-on installation that ensures a firm and long-lasting hold, preventing misalignment with prolonged use.
          Yes, the hooks can be removed if necessary, but it is recommended to do so carefully to avoid damaging the front panel of the drawer.
          This clip-on set is mainly used in kitchen, bathroom and office furniture, where a secure fixing of the outer drawer front panel is required.
          The load capacity will depend on the drawer in which it is installed, but as they are made of high-strength steel, they can withstand intensive use without compromising the stability of the furniture.
          No specific maintenance is required. However, it is recommended to periodically check the tightness of the bolts to ensure that the coupling continues to provide an optimum fit.
          Vantage-Q ribs are made of steel for strength and durability. In addition, their design allows for precise assembly, ensuring stability in the drawer structure.
          The 83 mm height is ideal for medium-sized drawers, providing a balance between storage capacity and compact design for kitchen, bathroom and office furniture.
          Yes, the ribs allow for minor adjustments after installation to improve the alignment of the drawer, ensuring correct closing and smooth operation.
          They do not require specific maintenance, although it is recommended to clean them periodically with a dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation and to ensure a good aesthetic appearance.
          The choice of finish depends on the design of the furniture and aesthetic preferences. The white finish is ideal for a cleaner, more minimalist style, while the aluminium finish offers a modern, industrial look.
          Vantage-Q ribs are made of steel for strength and durability. In addition, their design allows for precise assembly, ensuring stability in the drawer structure.
          The 83 mm height is ideal for medium-sized drawers, providing a balance between storage capacity and compact design for kitchen, bathroom and office furniture.
          Yes, the ribs allow for minor adjustments after installation to improve the alignment of the drawer, ensuring correct closing and smooth operation.
          They do not require specific maintenance, although it is recommended to clean them periodically with a dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation and to ensure a good aesthetic appearance.
          The choice of finish depends on the design of the furniture and aesthetic preferences. The white finish is ideal for a cleaner, more minimalist style, while the aluminium finish offers a modern, industrial look.
          The set of side rails serves as a limit to prevent objects inside the drawer from falling over the sides, without adding extra weight or affecting the comfort of use.
          They are made of steel or plastic, offering durability and an aesthetic design. They are available in white painted and aluminium painted finishes, allowing them to be combined with different styles of furniture.
          Available in depths of 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm and 550 mm. The choice depends on the size of the drawer and the desired storage capacity.
          For installation, rear and front hooks are required to fix them correctly to the drawer structure, ensuring stability and functionality.
          These rails are designed for higher drawers and are recommended for use in storage systems compatible with square rails, such as the Vantage-Q model.
          The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Vantage-Q drawer.

          Yes, the bottom and the back of the Vantage-Q drawer have the same measurements for both the soft closing runners and the push runners.
          The minimum unit depth required to install a Vantage-Q exterior drawer with push is calculated with the formula: Minimum depth = Depth + 38 mm. In this case the minimum unit depth needed will be 500 + 38 = 538 mm.
          The minimum unit depth required to install a Vantage-Q interior drawer with push is calculated with the formula: Min. depth = Depth + 44 mm. In this case the minimum unit depth needed will be 500 + 44 = 544 mm.
          The RAL code of the white finish of the sides of the Vantage-Q kitchen drawer is approximately 9003. The RAL code of the grey finish of the sides of the Vantage-Q kitchen drawer is approximately 9006.
          In order to plan the design of a kitchen drawer unit with Vantage-Q drawers, we need to bear in mind several parameters, this work is made easier with a help table to configure those units. This calculation table makes it possible to calculate the position of the guides, depending on the dimensions of the unit and the number of drawers. Also, it makes it possible to choose different heights of drawer, consequently it calculates the height of the façade of each of them within the same unit.
          Download document
          We have different heights of sides and accessories that make it possible to create different types of drawers. You can design inner and exterior drawers, with a large capacity for saucepans, with rounded or square rails, with inside accessories and even glass sides.
            The railing is made of painted aluminium, which ensures corrosion resistance and durability in high humidity environments.
            Yes, it is compatible with full-extension systems, improving functionality and access to interior drawers.
            It is recommended to use self-drilling screws or specific brackets compatible with the drawer to ensure a firm fixing.
            The 1.12 metre length allows the weight to be distributed evenly, avoiding deformation and improving the stability of the contents.
            The white painted aluminium finish offers a modern and easy to clean design, ideal for environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
            The design of the fixture directly covers the side edges of the rear panel, eliminating the need for additional machining on the part.
            With this set of rear hooks and a rail, it is possible to configure double or half-height drawers, adapting to different storage needs.
            They are made of plastic with a durable finish, ensuring strength, lightness and an aesthetic appearance in keeping with the design of the drawer.
            No, the accessory allows manual height adjustment without additional effort, offering an intuitive and efficient installation.
            The kit incorporates 40 self-adhesive silicone drops, which are placed on the base of each tray to prevent movement during the opening or closing of the drawer, ensuring stability without the need for mechanical fixing.
            The kit includes soft-close full-extension slides, a set of ribs, a set of rear hooks, a set of front hooks and screws for mounting.
            This drawer supports up to 40 kg load. Its slides allow full-extension with soft closing, which guarantees smooth sliding and no jerky bumps when closing.
            It is made of painted steel with a metallic grey RAL 7045 finish, which provides strength, durability and a modern aesthetic for different styles of furniture.
            Yes, it is necessary to purchase the cut-to-size boards for the bottom, back and border of the drawer separately, as they are not included in the kit.
            It is ideal for use in kitchens and bathrooms, providing a sturdy, stylish and easy to install storage system with a smooth and robust opening for everyday use.
              The damped self-closing system allows the drawer to close smoothly and silently, avoiding sudden knocks and reducing wear and tear on both the runners and the structure of the furniture.
                The guide to be assembled should be 500mm deep.
                Emuca drawer runners are designed to offer precise, stable and silent sliding, even under intensive use. Manufactured in high-strength steel with anti-corrosion finishes, they have different load capacities and full or partial extension configurations, adapting to kitchens, cabinets and technical furniture. They also incorporate soft-close options and push systems, as well as tight manufacturing tolerances that facilitate reliable installation and a long service life in professional environments.
                The following video shows how to assemble runners for Silver drawer.

                The following video shows how to adjust runners for Silver drawer.

                Yes, the drawer measures are the same in the Silver and Slippe with partial and/or total extension with clips.
                No, the drawer measures are different between.
                No, the drawer length is 10 mm longer in the case of the Silver rail. Also, the position of the adjustment and locking pivot is different.
                Yes, the drawer measurements, including its dimensions and machining, are fully compatible. This allows customers to mount the Silver total pull-out slides with push to open function and the Silver soft-close total pull-out slides on the same drawer. However, they are not compatible with the Slippe total pull-out slides with push to open function.
                Yes, the drawer measurements, including its dimensions and machining, are fully compatible. This allows customers to mount the Silver partial pull-out slides with push to open function and the Silver soft-close partial pull-out slides on the same drawer. However, they are not compatible with the Slippe partial pull-out slides with push to open function.
                The locking pivots that are mounted on the Silver guide rails are designed in order to easily fasten the drawers to the guide rails, thus preventing them from falling during transportation or handling. These pivots avoid the use of additional screws and for their assembly you only need a small hole in the side of the drawer. In this manner the drawer can be assembled and disassembled as many times as you wish.
                Maximum load capacity: Silver slides have a load capacity of up to 30 kg, which makes them ideal for domestic drawers with a considerable load.
                Available adjustments: The guides allow adjustment in three directions: vertical (+3 mm), horizontal (+1.5 mm) and in depth (+3 mm), facilitating precise installation and a perfect fit.
                Smooth closing: The self-closing system and the damping piston integrated in both slides prevent sudden shocks, prolonging the life of the drawer and offering a silent and smooth closing.
                Depth compatibility: These slides are available in a variety of sizes, including depths of 290, 340, 390, 440, 490, 540 and 590 mm, adapting to different design needs.
                Durability of design: They are made of zinc-plated steel, which ensures corrosion resistance and high durability, even under intensive use.
                The soft closing system is guaranteed by a damping piston integrated in both guides, providing a smooth and silent sliding.
                These slides have a maximum load capacity of 30 kg.
                They offer a vertical adjustment of ±4.5 mm, allowing precise adjustment of the drawer position.
                The rollers are made of delrin, a high quality material that ensures smooth running and optimum guidance in both horizontal and vertical directions.
                The slides are available in depths of 250 mm, 300 mm, 350 mm, 400 mm, 450 mm, 500 mm and 550 mm.
                The push-opening system allows the drawer to open automatically with a slight pressure on the front, eliminating the need for handles.
                These slides have a locking pivot mounted on the slide itself, ensuring that the drawer remains closed until operated.
                The slides offer a vertical adjustment range of ±4.5 mm for precise drawer adjustment.
                The rollers are made of delrin, a high quality material that guarantees smooth and quiet running and optimum guidance in both horizontal and vertical directions.
                These full-extension slides have a maximum load capacity of 30 kg.
                Silver L concealed slides are 340 mm deep and offer partial-extension, allowing efficient access to the drawer contents.
                Silver L slides have a load capacity of 25 kg and are supplied in separate left and right hand versions.
                These slides include an integrated locking pivot that prevents unintentional dismantling of the drawer, guaranteeing safety and stability.
                They offer a vertical adjustment of +5 mm, which facilitates a precise adjustment of the drawer level in relation to the cabinet.
                They are made of steel with a zinc plated finish, providing durability, corrosion resistance and a professional appearance.
                The slides use high quality Delrin rollers that allow a smooth and quiet running, reducing friction and noise during the opening and closing of the drawer.
                These slides are compatible with drawers of different widths, provided they comply with the specified depth of 300 mm and are within the maximum load capacity of 30 kg.
                The hooking system is installed in the base of the drawer and is connected to the slides by means of a click. This design ensures quick and secure attachment and allows the drawer to be easily removed if necessary.
                They do not require regular maintenance due to their robust design and resistant materials. However, regular cleaning is recommended to prevent the accumulation of dust or dirt that can affect operation.
                These slides are tested for strength and durability, and meet recognised industry standards, such as load testing and opening/closing cycles, to ensure performance under continuous use.
                Maintenance required: These slides require minimal maintenance. It is recommended to clean the tracks regularly with a dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation and to apply a specific hardware lubricant if any sliding resistance is felt.
                Compatibility with customised designs: The slides are compatible with customised drawers as long as they comply with the technical specifications, such as a depth of 290 mm, a maximum weight of 25 kg and internal dimensions in accordance with the slide fixing system.
                Locking pivot stability: The locking pivot ensures that the drawer remains completely fixed and level even when fully open, providing a safe user experience and preventing unwanted movement.
                Compatibility with additional locking systems: These slides already have an integrated soft closing system, but can be supplemented with other automation systems if they are compatible with standard full extension slides.
                Durability Guarantee: These slides are manufactured from high quality steel and finished in chrome, offering corrosion resistance and a guarantee of optimum performance even after years of frequent use. Specific warranty may vary by distributor.
                  No, this runner has different drawer mechanisms, as well as a different length.
                  Partial pull-out allows the drawer to slide only part of the way out, while full pull-out allows full access to the inside of the drawer.
                  Brave slides can carry up to 20 kg of load, making them ideal for storage drawers in kitchens, bathrooms, offices and other frequently used furniture.
                  These slides are available in depths from 300 mm to 500 mm. The choice of the right size depends on the size of the furniture and the space required for the drawer.
                  The soft closing system incorporates a damping piston that reduces the speed of closing, avoiding sudden knocks and prolonging the useful life of the drawer and the cabinet.
                  No, it is necessary to choose the specific version for each side of the drawer, as there are models for installation on the left side and models for the right side.
                    The RAL code of the white finish of the rails for T30 drawers is approximately 9001. The RAL code of the black finish of the rails for T30 drawers is approximately 9005. The RAL code of the grey finish of the rails for T30 drawers is approximately 9022
                    T30M slides are designed for machine mounting and provide a smooth and stable glide, making them ideal for kitchen and office furniture.
                    These slides can carry a combined load of up to 15 kg and are therefore recommended for light drawers in domestic and commercial applications.
                    They are installed using screws and have 5 mm long holes for fasteners, which facilitates precise and secure mounting.
                    They are available in white, aluminium painted and black painted finishes. Each finish offers aesthetic and strength advantages depending on the design of the furniture.
                    Yes, it is necessary to select the correct version for each side of the drawer, as there are specific models for the left and right side.
                    The Mago manual machine allows you to assemble drawers quickly and efficiently, making it easy to bend the flanges of the ribs and fix them to the side of the drawer.
                    It uses compressed air to actuate a trigger that automatically bends the tabs of the rib, ensuring it is secured to the side flap of the drawer without the need for additional tools.
                    Unlike other manual methods, this machine speeds up assembly, improves accuracy and reduces physical effort, which optimises production in carpentry workshops.
                    It is ideal for carpentry and furniture workshops, where large volumes of drawers need to be assembled quickly and accurately.
                    It has no limitations on the depth or width of the drawer, as its design allows it to adapt to any size without affecting the quality of the assembly.
                      These slides are 37 mm high and provide a smooth and stable glide and are made of zinc-plated steel for strength and durability.
                      They can hold up to 25 kg in weight, making them ideal for kitchen and office furniture requiring medium drawer loads.
                      They are available in lengths of 300 mm, 400 mm and 500 mm. The choice depends on the size of the drawer and the space available in the cabinet.
                      They are easily installed with screws and feature 5.2 mm diameter holes, plus elongated 4.5 x 10 mm holes to facilitate fixing adjustments.
                      They are compatible with most standard drawers, but it is important to check the height and mounting space to ensure correct installation.
                      Full-extension allows full access to the inside of the drawer, facilitating organisation and unobstructed space utilisation.
                      The push mechanism allows the drawer to be opened by simply pressing it, eliminating the need for handles and offering a cleaner and more functional design.
                      These slides can carry up to 30 kg of load, making them ideal for kitchen and office furniture where stability and strength are required.
                      They are available in lengths from 300 mm to 600 mm. The choice depends on the size of the drawer and the space available in the cabinet.
                      They are installed by means of screws fixed to the drawer and have a trigger that allows the slide to be removed for easy assembly and maintenance.
                      Full-extension allows full access to the contents of the drawer, facilitating organisation and avoiding inaccessible areas, unlike partial extraction, which limits access.
                      These slides hold up to 30 kg per set, making them ideal for kitchen, bathroom and office furniture where stability, strength and smooth gliding are required.
                      They are available in lengths from 250 mm to 600 mm, with zinc plated and black painted steel finishes, allowing them to be adapted to different styles of furniture.
                      The trigger system allows the slide to be easily removed, facilitating installation, maintenance or replacement of the drawer without the need for additional tools.
                      The cabinet must have adequate space for the installation of the slides and a sturdy structure that allows them to be fixed correctly, ensuring optimum operation of the drawer.
                      The brackets allow a more stable and secure fixing of the slides to the furniture, ensuring a precise assembly and a better distribution of the load in the drawer.
                      Ball bearings provide smoother and quieter sliding, reducing friction and increasing the durability of the slide compared to other systems such as nylon or roller slides.
                      These slides have a load capacity of up to 30 kg, making them ideal for kitchen, bathroom and office furniture where full access to the drawer is required without compromising stability.
                      The trigger system allows the slide to be removed quickly and easily, facilitating installation, maintenance and cleaning of the furniture without the need for additional tools.
                      They are available in lengths from 300 mm to 600 mm. The choice depends on the size of the drawer and the space available in the cabinet, ensuring optimum performance.
                      These slides feature full-extension, ball bearings and a load capacity of up to 35 kg, making them perfect for kitchen, office and storage drawers where strength and full access to contents is required.
                      The soft-close system uses a damping piston in both slides to reduce the impact when closing the drawer, avoiding sudden knocks and extending the life of the unit.
                      They can support up to 35 kg per slide set and are therefore recommended for heavy duty furniture such as kitchens, filing cabinets and heavy storage furniture.
                      The zinc plated steel finish offers corrosion resistance and a shiny metallic appearance, while the black painted finish provides a modern, understated aesthetic with an extra layer of protection against wear and tear.
                      To dismantle the drawer, the trigger system located on the runners must be activated, allowing the drawer to be released from the cabinet structure quickly and without the need for tools.
                      These slides have a load capacity of up to 68 kg, whereas standard slides support around 30-35 kg. Their reinforced design and high quality ball bearings allow them to be used in more demanding applications.
                      The height of 51 mm provides a larger contact surface with the cabinet, which increases stability and reduces drawer twisting, especially in wide or heavy drawers.
                      Full-extension allows the drawer to open fully, providing unrestricted access to its contents, which is especially useful in work or storage environments where heavy objects are handled.
                      These slides include a trigger system that allows the drawer to be removed quickly and easily, which facilitates maintenance or cleaning tasks without the need for additional tools.
                      They are ideal for industrial furniture, high capacity filing cabinets, workshop furniture and storage in kitchens or areas where heavy loads need to be supported in a stable and safe manner.
                        Depending on the overlap you can choose one of these hinges: Full overlay hinge: If you want to overlap practically the full side of the unit. Half overlay hinge: If you want to overlap half the side of the unit. Insert hinge: If you want the door to be inlaid hand therefore for the side of the unit to be seen.
                        Once you have chosen the type of hinge that you are going to use (straight, elbow or super elbow) you will have a formula for calculating the base or plates. This formula will the type B = 14 + D - O, where the variables are: B = Height of the base or plates. D = Drill distance from the hinge. S = Door overlap with the side. For example: We have a door with a thickness of 22mm, an overlap with a side of 15 mm (S) and a distance from the drill of 3 mm (D), we also know that the thickness of the unit board is 16 mm. As the overlap is large, we will use the straight hinge. The formula of the straight hinge is B = 14 + D - O. We know the values D = 3 and S = 15. Replacing in the formula: B = 14 + 3 - 15 = 17 - 15 = 2. So B = 2, with the straight hinge and the base is 2
                        The quantity of hinges needs for each door will depend on the width and height of the door, as well as the material that it is manufactured out of. In fact, it can vary in some specific cases. The adjoined diagram can be used as a reference. where L is the distance between the hinges.
                        The X91/X92 hinge insert has a diameter of 10x11 mm and a specific height of 2 mm (or other options depending on the model). It is designed to guarantee a firm fixation by means of a clip system, which allows a perfect and easy adjustment to the hinge insert. These features ensure a precise and professional installation.
                        For proper installation, pre-drilling to the following specifications is required: 32 mm distance between holes. 37 mm distance from the edge of the door to the first hole. 11 mm deep holes. These dimensions ensure that the supplement fits perfectly and guarantee the stability of the hinge.
                        The snap-on coupling system allows quick connection without the need for additional tools. This mechanism facilitates the assembly and disassembly of the supplement, which reduces installation time. It also ensures a secure and stable fixing, minimising the risk of misalignment over time, which is not as easily achieved with traditional fixing methods such as screws.
                        Yes, the insert is designed to be compatible with door thicknesses from 14mm to 24mm, making it suitable for most standard furniture used in kitchens, bathrooms and other spaces.
                        The supplement is made of high-quality steel with nickel-plated finish (or titanium, depending on the model). These materials offer high resistance to corrosion and wear, even in wet environments such as kitchens and bathrooms. This design ensures a long service life and reliable performance, even in demanding conditions.
                        The eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to the position of the cabinet door, ensuring precise alignment even in cases of uneven surfaces or minimal differences in cabinet edges.
                        This supplement integrates with X91/X92 hinges using a mixed mounting system, which combines ease of automatic attachment with additional security when using screws, optimising both installation and long-term performance.
                        The compact design of the insert makes it easy to install in furniture with limited space, such as kitchen cabinets and small cupboards, where every millimetre counts to ensure a clean and professional fit.
                        The 5x9.5 mm diameter is designed to ensure a stable connection and a secure hold in the furniture and is compatible with common drilling standards in the furniture industry.
                        The nickel-plated steel construction ensures resistance against corrosion and wear, providing a durable and visually appealing addition, especially in furniture exposed to damp environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                        The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                        The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                        The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                        This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                        The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                        The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                        The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                        The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                        This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                        The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                        The Euro X91/X92 supplement is distinguished by its compact and functional design, made of high-strength steel with a nickel-plated finish. In addition, it offers a 0-height adjustment, ideal for standard configurations without the need to modify the height of the cabinet.
                        The 0-height adjustment allows the X91/X92 hinges to be installed on furniture without altering the predetermined alignment of the doors, simplifying assembly and ensuring a precise and functional installation.
                        Its compact design facilitates its use in kitchen and office furniture, where space is limited. This supplement provides a firm and stable support, ensuring a long-lasting connection between the hinge and the furniture.
                        To ensure correct installation, holes must be drilled at a distance of 32 mm from each other and 37 mm from the inside edge of the door, using the included screws with a depth of 12 mm.
                        The nickel-plated steel is highly resistant to corrosion and wear, making it ideal for applications in demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms. In addition, its finish enhances the aesthetics and ensures a long service life of the supplement.
                        The drilling depth of 12 mm ensures a deep and stable fixing, preventing misalignment even on doors subject to continuous use or high dynamic loads.
                        For a secure fixing, it is important to check the compatibility of the insert with the thickness of the board and to adjust the drilling tolerances according to the material to avoid breakage or misalignment.
                        The 37 mm distance from the inner edge allows a mounting that respects the standard tolerances, guaranteeing a correct alignment of the hinge with the supplement and the furniture.
                        The design of the insert distributes the forces generated by the door movement, reducing stress on the fixing points and extending the durability of the system in high usage projects.
                        The nickel-plated finish protects the supplement against corrosion and abrasion, ensuring long-lasting functionality in environments such as kitchens, where chemicals and moisture are common.
                        Eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to be made to door alignment, improving accuracy in projects where minimum tolerances are critical to furniture design.
                        To ensure the stability of the supplement, the holes must have a diameter of 5 mm, a depth of 12 mm and a standard spacing of 32 mm between anchor points.
                        Euro screws provide a solid fixing design, ensuring a stable mounting that withstands dynamic loads without compromising the integrity of the system on heavy duty doors.
                        The 0-height allows for a standard installation that facilitates the precise alignment of the doors, ensuring that they fit perfectly into the furniture frame without the need for additional modifications.
                        The nickel-plated steel used in this supplement meets quality standards that guarantee corrosion resistance, durability in frequently used environments and professional aesthetics in technical furniture applications.
                        The eccentric adjustment allows a ±2 mm adjustment, ensuring fine control of door alignment, which is essential for high precision and technical design projects.
                        Drilling must be carried out with a 32 mm spacing between screws and a distance of 37 mm from the inner edge of the door, ensuring a solid and stable anchorage for the supplement.
                        The 0-height adjustment facilitates the exact alignment of doors on standard furniture, eliminating the need for additional modifications and ensuring fast and accurate installation.
                        The nickel or titanium finish provides superior corrosion resistance, which protects the supplement against external agents, as well as improving its durability in continuous use environments such as kitchens and offices.
                        This supplement is ideal for kitchen and office furniture, as it allows precise adjustment of the doors, maintaining their stability even in applications where frequent and constant use is required.
                        The X91R straight hinge is compatible with door thicknesses between 16 and 22 mm, ensuring smooth and secure closing in furniture applications with these thicknesses.
                        It offers adjustments in three dimensions: height, depth and lateral alignment, allowing precise installation, correcting misalignments and optimising the aesthetics of the furniture.
                        Yes, it is necessary to use specific shims. The X91 and X92 shims are fully compatible with this hinge and are recommended for optimal mounting.
                        The Ø35 mm cup is fixed by means of screws, offering stability and resistance over time, as well as maximising contact with the surface of the furniture for a secure fit.
                        The damped closing of this hinge reduces the impact when closing, preventing noise and prolonging the life of the doors, unlike a non-damped closing that does not control the closing speed.
                        The X91R elbow hinge features soft closing with damping and a three-dimensional adjustment range of ±3 mm in depth, making it ideal for door thicknesses from 16 to 22 mm.
                        The three-dimensional depth adjustment allows correction of misalignments up to ±3 mm, facilitating exact adjustment for professional installation and guaranteeing optimum opening and closing.
                        It offers a cushioned closing system, reducing impacts when closing, minimising noise and increasing the durability of the furniture, ideal for high use applications in kitchens and bathrooms.
                        It is compatible with the X91 and X92 inserts, which facilitate stable mounting and allow the alignment and aesthetics of the furniture to be maintained.
                        The Ø35 mm cup has standard dimensions that guarantee a secure and resistant fit, optimising the fixing to the furniture with greater stability and durability.
                        This supplement offers an eccentric adjustment range of ±1.5 mm, allowing fine adjustment for precise alignment and optimised door closure in the cabinet.
                        It is compatible with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, but cannot be used with 90° arm hinges, which should be considered when selecting system components.
                        It is recommended to use the screws supplied with the supplement, which are specifically designed to ensure safe installation and prevent damage to the furniture material.
                        The concealed design of the supplement, being under the hinge arm, enhances the aesthetics of the cabinet and avoids interference with other components, maintaining a clean and professional appearance.
                        The nickel-plated or titanium finish provides increased resistance to corrosion and wear, which is ideal for applications in kitchens or bathrooms where exposure to moisture is frequent.
                        The supplement allows a height adjustment with a tolerance of ±1.5 mm, which facilitates a precise alignment of the doors, ensuring an optimal closing and an impeccable aesthetics of the furniture.
                        No, this supplement is not compatible with plastic hinge covers, as it is designed to work directly with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, optimising their integration and functionality.
                        For the correct installation, it is necessary to carry out a machining on the furniture with dimensions of Ø10 x 10 mm, ensuring a firm and stable fastening of the supplement to the module.
                        The design with concealed fixing under the hinge arm enhances the aesthetics of the furniture by eliminating visible elements, which is ideal for premium projects where attention to detail is essential.
                        The 10x10 mm diameter allows a more compact and specific installation in furniture modules, ensuring a secure fixing and avoiding interference with other internal components.
                        This hinge is compatible with door thicknesses between 16 and 22 mm, meeting standard furniture design requirements.
                        The hinge allows three-dimensional adjustments: ±3 mm in depth, which ensures optimal alignment of the door after installation.
                        The integrated damped closure provides a smooth and silent movement when closing the door, increasing the durability of the furniture by avoiding sudden knocks.
                        This hinge is specifically designed for use with the X91/X92 supplements, ensuring a perfect fit and efficient assembly.
                        Nickel-plated steel offers high resistance to corrosion and wear, ensuring a long service life and a professional aesthetic finish.
                        The depth adjustment range is ±3 mm, while the supplement offers a vertical adjustment of ±2 mm, ensuring perfect door alignment.
                        No, the clip system is designed for quick and easy installation without the need for special tools.
                        The damping piston provides a gradual resistance that reduces the impact of closing, ensuring a quiet and smooth movement even on heavy doors.
                        The eccentric adjustment allows precision adjustments to correct minor misalignments in doors, optimising their functionality and final appearance.
                        Yes, the 105° opening angle is ideal for furniture with limited space, as it allows full access without interfering with walls or internal elements.
                          Yes, the hinges and accessories come with Ø4x16 mm screws with the same titanium finish.
                          The soft closing system is integrated by means of a damping piston that guarantees a controlled and silent closing of the doors, avoiding sudden knocks and prolonging the useful life of both the hinge and the furniture. This system is ideal for applications in kitchens, wardrobes and furniture where a comfortable and long-lasting use is a priority.
                          The X91 hinge is compatible with door thicknesses between 14 mm and 24 mm. The drilling range of the cup is 3 to 7 mm, while the diameter of the cup is 35 mm. These dimensions ensure a precise fit on a wide variety of standard doors in the furniture industry.
                          The X91 hinge can be adjusted three-dimensionally by means of adjusting screws: Height: Adjustment via the mounting base. Side: Adjustment via eccentric screw for precise alignment corrections. Depth: Direct adjustment for a better fit between door and frame. This ensures a professional installation, even in cases of small surface irregularities.
                          The X91 hinge is made of nickel-plated steel, ensuring corrosion resistance and excellent mechanical performance. In addition, it has been tested to withstand prolonged opening and closing cycles under intensive use, meeting the quality standards of the furniture industry.
                          Yes, the X91 hinge is designed to support the weight of standard doors up to 24 mm thick, thanks to its strong steel construction and adjustment system that ensures secure support. For larger or heavier doors, additional hinges are recommended for optimal load distribution.
                          The X91/X92 hinge insert has a diameter of 10x11 mm and a specific height of 2 mm (or other options depending on the model). It is designed to guarantee a firm fixation by means of a clip system, which allows a perfect and easy adjustment to the hinge insert. These features ensure a precise and professional installation.
                          For proper installation, pre-drilling to the following specifications is required: 32 mm distance between holes. 37 mm distance from the edge of the door to the first hole. 11 mm deep holes. These dimensions ensure that the supplement fits perfectly and guarantee the stability of the hinge.
                          The snap-on coupling system allows quick connection without the need for additional tools. This mechanism facilitates the assembly and disassembly of the supplement, which reduces installation time. It also ensures a secure and stable fixing, minimising the risk of misalignment over time, which is not as easily achieved with traditional fixing methods such as screws.
                          Yes, the insert is designed to be compatible with door thicknesses from 14mm to 24mm, making it suitable for most standard furniture used in kitchens, bathrooms and other spaces.
                          The supplement is made of high-quality steel with nickel-plated finish (or titanium, depending on the model). These materials offer high resistance to corrosion and wear, even in wet environments such as kitchens and bathrooms. This design ensures a long service life and reliable performance, even in demanding conditions.
                          The 165° opening allows the door to be fully recessed into the cabinet frame, providing greater accessibility to the cabinet interior. This is especially useful in kitchen, bathroom or storage furniture where a wide opening is required.
                          The damping piston ensures a smooth and controlled closing, reducing impacts and prolonging the life of the hinge and the furniture. It also improves the user experience by avoiding annoying noises when closing the door.
                          This hinge is ideal for furniture where full access to the interior is needed, such as corner cabinets, kitchen furniture or storage with large compartments. Its design allows smooth and precise movement, even on large or heavy doors.
                          The automatic clip system makes it easy to attach the hinge to the supplement without the need for additional tools. This system simplifies installation and ensures a stable and secure fixing, reducing the time and effort required for assembly.
                          The hinge is made of high quality steel with nickel-plated or titanium finish, providing resistance to corrosion and wear. These materials guarantee a long service life even in heavy use environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                          The set includes 20 X91 straight hinges, 20 0-height supplements to be screwed on and all screws required for assembly. It is designed to fit kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, offering a complete solution for projects requiring smooth closing and precise adjustment.
                          The soft closing with damping piston allows a controlled and silent movement when closing the door, reducing impacts and prolonging the life of the hinge and the furniture. This system also improves the user experience, avoiding annoying noises.
                          The installation is carried out with the automatic clip system that facilitates the assembly of the hinge to the supplement. Basic tools are required, such as a drill for pre-drilling 35 mm diameter holes in the cup and standard screws for attaching the supplements to the table top.
                          For installation, a pre-drilled hole of 35 mm diameter and 3 to 7 mm deep must be drilled in the cup. The hinges are compatible with door thicknesses from 14 to 24 mm. The included inserts are fastened with 5 x 12 mm screws, suitable for standard panels.
                          These hinges are manufactured from high quality steel with nickel-plated or titanium finishes, ensuring resistance to corrosion and wear. In addition, they offer a robust design with three-dimensional adjustment, making them ideal for heavy-duty environments such as commercial kitchens, high-traffic bathrooms and offices.
                          The X91 hinges with 45° angle arm are specifically designed for corner furniture, allowing a perfect fit in configurations where doors are at oblique angles. This improves accessibility and optimises available space.
                          The 45° angle of the arm allows the doors to integrate seamlessly into corner configurations, facilitating uniform closure and aesthetic alignment. This is ideal for making the most of complex spaces, such as corner cabinets in kitchens or bathrooms.
                          Installation requires pre-drilling of 35 mm diameter and 3 to 7 mm deep holes in the cup. The automatic clip system allows the hinge to be attached to the supplement quickly and easily. The included screws make it easy to attach the hinge to the table top, guaranteeing precise installation.
                          The soft closing with damping piston ensures that the door closes in a controlled and silent manner, reducing wear and tear on components and avoiding sudden knocks. This system enhances the user experience and prolongs the life of the furniture.
                          These hinges are made of nickel-plated steel, which makes them resistant to corrosion and wear. They include a three-dimensional adjustment system by means of an eccentric screw, which allows height, sideways and depth adjustment for a perfect and durable assembly.
                          The X91 90° angle arm hinges feature a specialised design for corner and corner furniture, allowing precise and efficient installation in complex configurations. Their adjustability and soft-close system make them superior to standard models.
                          The 110° opening angle allows full access to the inside of the furniture, optimising functionality and facilitating daily use. This is especially useful in high-traffic furniture, such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                          These hinges feature an automatic clip system, which facilitates mounting to the supplement without the need for complex tools. In addition, the included screws and adjustable design simplify the installation process, reducing the time and effort required.
                          Their angled design allows corner furniture doors to open and close smoothly, making the best use of space. This makes them ideal for configurations where traditional hinges are not practical.
                          They include a three-dimensional adjustment system using eccentric screws, which allows the height, side and depth of the door to be adjusted. This ensures perfect assembly, even on uneven surfaces or furniture with tight tolerances.
                          The X91 straight hinge with 165° opening is ideal for kitchen and bathroom furniture because it allows full access to the inside of the furniture, improving functionality and facilitating use in spaces with a high frequency of opening.
                          The soft-close system reduces the impact of the doors closing, eliminating sudden bumps and rattles. It also prolongs the life of the furniture and improves the user experience compared to hinges without damping.
                          This hinge is compatible with door thicknesses from 14 to 26 mm and requires 35 mm diameter holes in the cup and a range of 3 to 7 mm depth, ensuring a precise and secure fit.
                          The automatic clip system simplifies assembly, allowing the hinge to be attached to the supplement quickly and without additional tools. This significantly reduces installation time and effort.
                          The depth adjustment by means of an eccentric screw allows precise adjustments, correcting possible misalignments and ensuring that the door closes perfectly aligned with the furniture, even on uneven surfaces.
                          The X91 elbow hinge with soft close improves the functionality of the furniture by ensuring a controlled and silent movement, prolonging the life of the furniture and offering a more comfortable and secure closure.
                          This hinge is suitable for standard door thicknesses between 14 and 24 mm, making it versatile for most furniture in kitchens, bathrooms and offices.
                          Precise adjustment is achieved thanks to the three-dimensional adjustment, which allows the height, side and depth of the door to be adjusted, ensuring perfect alignment with the furniture.
                          The shock absorbing piston eliminates abrupt shocks during closing, providing a smoother user experience and preventing premature wear of furniture components.
                          The cup drilling range of 3 to 7 mm allows greater flexibility when installing the hinge, ensuring compatibility with different furniture designs and facilitating adjustments during assembly.
                          The eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to the position of the cabinet door, ensuring precise alignment even in cases of uneven surfaces or minimal differences in cabinet edges.
                          This supplement integrates with X91/X92 hinges using a mixed mounting system, which combines ease of automatic attachment with additional security when using screws, optimising both installation and long-term performance.
                          The compact design of the insert makes it easy to install in furniture with limited space, such as kitchen cabinets and small cupboards, where every millimetre counts to ensure a clean and professional fit.
                          The 5x9.5 mm diameter is designed to ensure a stable connection and a secure hold in the furniture and is compatible with common drilling standards in the furniture industry.
                          The nickel-plated steel construction ensures resistance against corrosion and wear, providing a durable and visually appealing addition, especially in furniture exposed to damp environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                          The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                          The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                          The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                          This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                          The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                          The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                          The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                          The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                          This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                          The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                          The X91 soft-close super elbow hinge is ideal for heavy-duty furniture thanks to its robust construction, shock absorbing piston and high-strength materials that withstand continuous use without losing functionality.
                          The super-cornered design allows maximum use of the interior space of the cabinet, ensuring an optimal opening of 105° and installation in complex configurations, such as corner cabinets or corner units.
                          The mounting is stable and durable thanks to the automatic clip-on system and the included screws. In addition, the drilling range of 3 to 7 mm ensures a firm hold in the 35 mm diameter cup.
                          Depth adjustment by means of an eccentric allows precise adjustments to ensure that the door is perfectly aligned with the frame, even on uneven surfaces or furniture with tight tolerances.
                          The soft closing system, integrated with a damping piston, prevents impacts when closing the door, protecting both the furniture components and the hinge itself, which significantly increases its durability.
                          The Euro X91/X92 supplement is distinguished by its compact and functional design, made of high-strength steel with a nickel-plated finish. In addition, it offers a 0-height adjustment, ideal for standard configurations without the need to modify the height of the cabinet.
                          The 0-height adjustment allows the X91/X92 hinges to be installed on furniture without altering the predetermined alignment of the doors, simplifying assembly and ensuring a precise and functional installation.
                          Its compact design facilitates its use in kitchen and office furniture, where space is limited. This supplement provides a firm and stable support, ensuring a long-lasting connection between the hinge and the furniture.
                          To ensure correct installation, holes must be drilled at a distance of 32 mm from each other and 37 mm from the inside edge of the door, using the included screws with a depth of 12 mm.
                          The nickel-plated steel is highly resistant to corrosion and wear, making it ideal for applications in demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms. In addition, its finish enhances the aesthetics and ensures a long service life of the supplement.
                          The 165° opening allows full access to the cabinet, improving functionality in applications where it is necessary to maximise space, such as corner cabinets or large storage cabinets.
                          The joint use of hinges and shims ensures secure support, improves door alignment and facilitates installation, especially in projects requiring high precision and durability.
                          Precise installation requires drilling holes 35 mm in diameter and 3 to 7 mm deep in the cup, ensuring that the doors are between 14 and 26 mm thick, and using the included screws to securely attach the shims and hinges.
                          The depth adjustment allows fine adjustments to be made to the position of the doors, correcting misalignments and ensuring that closing is smooth and functional, even on furniture with uneven surfaces.
                          Nickel-plated steel not only protects against corrosion and wear, but also provides an aesthetic finish, essential for furniture in wet or heavy use environments such as kitchens and offices.
                          The 45° arm design makes it easy to fit furniture in corners or nooks, maximising space utilisation and improving access to internal areas of the furniture.
                          The soft closing system protects the doors and hinges by avoiding abrupt impacts, prolonging their useful life. It also ensures quiet and comfortable movement, enhancing the user experience.
                          To install this hinge, it is necessary to verify that the doors have a thickness of 14 to 24 mm and to drill holes with a diameter of 35 mm and a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm. These specifications ensure a safe and functional installation.
                          The automatic assembly system simplifies installation by allowing the hinges to be attached to the insert quickly and accurately, reducing the time and effort required for assembly.
                          These hinges are ideal for furniture in demanding environments, such as kitchens and bathrooms, thanks to the corrosion and wear resistance offered by the titanium or nickel-plated finishes, as well as providing a modern aesthetic appearance.
                          The drilling depth of 12 mm ensures a deep and stable fixing, preventing misalignment even on doors subject to continuous use or high dynamic loads.
                          For a secure fixing, it is important to check the compatibility of the insert with the thickness of the board and to adjust the drilling tolerances according to the material to avoid breakage or misalignment.
                          The 37 mm distance from the inner edge allows a mounting that respects the standard tolerances, guaranteeing a correct alignment of the hinge with the supplement and the furniture.
                          The design of the insert distributes the forces generated by the door movement, reducing stress on the fixing points and extending the durability of the system in high usage projects.
                          The nickel-plated finish protects the supplement against corrosion and abrasion, ensuring long-lasting functionality in environments such as kitchens, where chemicals and moisture are common.
                          The 90° angle allows optimised access to furniture located in blind corners, ensuring efficient door movement without interference with other furniture structures.
                          The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustment of the depth, correcting misalignments in the installation and ensuring perfect alignment of the doors with the furniture frame.
                          To ensure optimum installation, holes should be drilled in the cup with a diameter of 35 mm, with a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm, ensuring compatibility with door thicknesses of 14 to 24 mm.
                          The automatic mounting system evenly distributes the loads on the hinge, improving its stability and reducing long-term wear and tear in projects with intensive use or frequent openings.
                          The nickel-plated or titanium finish provides superior corrosion and wear resistance, making the hinge ideal for kitchens and other environments where durability and professional aesthetics are required.
                          Eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to be made to door alignment, improving accuracy in projects where minimum tolerances are critical to furniture design.
                          To ensure the stability of the supplement, the holes must have a diameter of 5 mm, a depth of 12 mm and a standard spacing of 32 mm between anchor points.
                          Euro screws provide a solid fixing design, ensuring a stable mounting that withstands dynamic loads without compromising the integrity of the system on heavy duty doors.
                          The 0-height allows for a standard installation that facilitates the precise alignment of the doors, ensuring that they fit perfectly into the furniture frame without the need for additional modifications.
                          The nickel-plated steel used in this supplement meets quality standards that guarantee corrosion resistance, durability in frequently used environments and professional aesthetics in technical furniture applications.
                          In order to guarantee an optimal closing, the installation must include a 35 mm diameter cup hole, respecting a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm and ensuring compatibility with door thicknesses from 14 to 26 mm.
                          The damping piston controls the movement of the doors, ensuring smooth and quiet closing, which protects the hinges and prolongs the life of the furniture in heavy use environments.
                          Respecting the 3 to 7 mm drilling tolerances ensures that the hinge fits tightly into the cup, avoiding unwanted movement and guaranteeing a stable installation.
                          Three-dimensional adjustment allows height, side and depth adjustment, correcting misalignments and ensuring that the doors are perfectly aligned with the furniture frame, even in bespoke designs.
                          The nickel or titanium finish protects the hinge against corrosion and wear, offering a durable solution for applications in kitchens, bathrooms or environments with high humidity and continuous use.
                          The eccentric adjustment allows a ±2 mm adjustment, ensuring fine control of door alignment, which is essential for high precision and technical design projects.
                          Drilling must be carried out with a 32 mm spacing between screws and a distance of 37 mm from the inner edge of the door, ensuring a solid and stable anchorage for the supplement.
                          The 0-height adjustment facilitates the exact alignment of doors on standard furniture, eliminating the need for additional modifications and ensuring fast and accurate installation.
                          The nickel or titanium finish provides superior corrosion resistance, which protects the supplement against external agents, as well as improving its durability in continuous use environments such as kitchens and offices.
                          This supplement is ideal for kitchen and office furniture, as it allows precise adjustment of the doors, maintaining their stability even in applications where frequent and constant use is required.
                          The elbow design allows for a partial overlap of the door, ideal for furniture with corner configurations or where space needs to be maximised without interference.
                          To ensure a secure fit, Euro screws must be installed in holes 5 mm in diameter and 12 mm deep, respecting the specified distances to maintain the stability of the hinge.
                          Three-dimensional adjustment ensures precise alignment, correcting misalignments in height, depth and laterality, which is essential for furniture that is subject to continuous or frequent use.
                          For perfect closing, the damped system requires correct cup adjustment and installation of the hinge within the drilling range of 3 to 7 mm, ensuring a smooth and silent movement.
                          Compatibility with 5x12 mm diameter screws ensures solid fastening in pre-drilled boards, facilitating assembly in systems with drill racks and guaranteeing the structural stability of the furniture.
                          The X91 super elbow hinges are designed for full overlay doors, offering maximum coverage of the cabinet side and compatibility with three-dimensional adjustment systems.
                          The 105° opening angle allows wide and convenient access, ideal for corner or angled furniture that requires unrestricted movement.
                          Pre-drilling should include boreholes with a diameter of 35 mm and a depth range of 3 to 7 mm, ensuring a firm fixing and perfect alignment for stable mounting.
                          The eccentric adjustment facilitates fine adjustment in depth, making it possible to correct misalignments in door thicknesses from 14 to 24 mm, which is crucial for customised projects.
                          The clip-on mounting system speeds up the installation process by eliminating the need for additional tools, providing fast and secure attachment in high demand installations.
                          The installation must include a 35 mm diameter cup hole with a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm and respect a door thickness between 14 and 26 mm to ensure a precise fit.
                          The three-dimensional adjustment allows for height, side and depth adjustments, correcting misalignments and ensuring that the doors are perfectly aligned in technically demanding projects.
                          The shock absorbing piston ensures smooth and shock-free closing, reducing wear and tear on the hinges and protecting the furniture against repeated impacts in heavy use environments.
                          The board must be prepared with holes of 5 mm diameter and a depth of 12 mm, as well as a spacing of 32 mm between fixing points, to ensure the stability of the supplement.
                          The combination with 0-height supplements allows precise alignment of the doors, optimising their functionality and facilitating quick adjustments in modular and adaptable furniture design.
                          Nickel-plated steel provides excellent corrosion and wear resistance, making the hinges ideal for wet or greasy environments such as kitchens and bathrooms, prolonging their service life.
                          The drilling range of 3 to 7 mm ensures a stable fixing of the hinges, preventing misalignment of doors and allowing precise installation even in demanding configurations.
                          The correct functioning of the soft closing is guaranteed by the damping piston, which absorbs impacts when closing the door, reducing noise and protecting both the hinge and the furniture from intensive use.
                          The three-dimensional adjustment allows adjustments of +/-2 mm in height, side and depth, correcting misalignments and ensuring perfect closing even on doors with complex installation.
                          These hinges comply with international quality and resistance standards such as ISO 9001, ensuring durability and performance in furniture subjected to intensive use and demanding conditions.
                          This supplement offers an eccentric adjustment range of ±1.5 mm, allowing fine adjustment for precise alignment and optimised door closure in the cabinet.
                          It is compatible with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, but cannot be used with 90° arm hinges, which should be considered when selecting system components.
                          It is recommended to use the screws supplied with the supplement, which are specifically designed to ensure safe installation and prevent damage to the furniture material.
                          The concealed design of the supplement, being under the hinge arm, enhances the aesthetics of the cabinet and avoids interference with other components, maintaining a clean and professional appearance.
                          The nickel-plated or titanium finish provides increased resistance to corrosion and wear, which is ideal for applications in kitchens or bathrooms where exposure to moisture is frequent.
                          The supplement allows a height adjustment with a tolerance of ±1.5 mm, which facilitates a precise alignment of the doors, ensuring an optimal closing and an impeccable aesthetics of the furniture.
                          No, this supplement is not compatible with plastic hinge covers, as it is designed to work directly with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, optimising their integration and functionality.
                          For the correct installation, it is necessary to carry out a machining on the furniture with dimensions of Ø10 x 10 mm, ensuring a firm and stable fastening of the supplement to the module.
                          The design with concealed fixing under the hinge arm enhances the aesthetics of the furniture by eliminating visible elements, which is ideal for premium projects where attention to detail is essential.
                          The 10x10 mm diameter allows a more compact and specific installation in furniture modules, ensuring a secure fixing and avoiding interference with other internal components.
                          The hinge offers an opening angle of 155°, which allows full access to the inside of the module and avoids interference between the door and the furniture.
                          The clip system is installed by snapping the hinge onto the supplement quickly and without additional tools, simplifying the assembly process and facilitating disassembly.
                          The installation requires doors with a thickness of 16 to 24 mm and a pre-machined Ø35 mm for the cup, with a drilling distance of 3 to 7 mm from the edge.
                          The hinge allows three-dimensional adjustments: ±2 mm in depth and adjustment in height and horizontality, ensuring precise alignment after installation.
                          It is made of high quality nickel-plated steel, which ensures corrosion resistance, durability against continuous use and an aesthetic finish for any piece of furniture.
                          The hinges are compatible with door thicknesses between 14 and 24 mm, ensuring correct installation on a wide variety of furniture.
                          The straight supplement allows a height adjustment of ±1.5 mm by means of an included eccentric screw, ensuring precise levelling after installation.
                          The soft closing is achieved by a damping piston integrated in the hinge, which reduces impacts and ensures controlled door movement.
                          The required drilling range for the cup is from D = 3 to 7 mm, ensuring correct alignment and fixing to the furniture door.
                          Both hinges and shims are made of nickel-plated steel, a corrosion and wear resistant material with an aesthetic finish that guarantees long life and performance.
                          The set includes specific screws for fixing to 35 mm cups and screws for the supplement, compatible with standard boards and ensuring a firm and precise installation.
                          The X91 elbow hinge allows three-dimensional height, depth and lateral adjustments thanks to its integrated eccentric adjustment and automatic clip mounting system.
                          These hinges have an opening angle of 105°, ideal for ensuring accessibility and functionality in kitchen, office or cupboard furniture.
                          The straight supplement allows ±1.5 mm height adjustment by means of an eccentric screw and has a design that remains concealed under the hinge arm once installed.
                          No, this batch is specifically designed for doors with a thickness of 14 to 24 mm and is not compatible with thicker thicknesses.
                          The drilling range required to install the hinges is 3 to 7 mm from the edge of the furniture, while the straight supplement requires standard drillings of 35 mm diameter.
                          The X91 super bend hinges are designed to withstand standard loads in kitchen, bathroom or wardrobe furniture, ensuring optimum performance even with heavy doors.
                          The perfect alignment of the door is guaranteed by the three-dimensional adjustment (height, depth and side) and the eccentric screw of the supplement.
                          Yes, the soft-close system is ideal for intensive use, as the damping piston reduces wear and improves the durability of the mechanism.
                          The straight supplement of this batch is distinguished by its compact design, which is concealed under the hinge arm, and by its full compatibility with the X91 and X92 hinges.
                          Yes, the design of the Gola Top Profile makes it ideal for kitchens with a minimalist style, thanks to its clean finish and unobtrusive integration into the furniture.
                          The supplements or bases that are used along with the hinges have two holes for fastening to the furniture and a third hole for increasing the resistance of the hinge/supplement joint. It is especially designed for facilities that require more resistance such as on doors with pistons.
                            The X91N 90° arm hinge is specifically designed for doors with continuous edges, offering perfect integration with the furniture. Its construction ensures stability and compatibility with minimalist designs, providing a robust and aesthetically pleasing solution.
                            The automatic clip mechanism facilitates quick and secure attachment to the clamping insert without the need for additional tools. This simplifies the installation process and allows for more efficient fitting in less time.
                            The X91N hinge allows three-dimensional adjustments to ensure precise installation: Height: By means of the mounting base. Side: With an eccentric screw to correct misalignments. Depth: Direct adjustment to perfectly align the door with the furniture.
                            It is compatible with door thicknesses from 14 to 26 mm, with a cup drilling range of 3 to 7 mm and a standard cup diameter of 35 mm. These specifications ensure adaptable and accurate installation.
                            Yes, the X91N hinge is fully compatible with modern systems such as magnetic closures. Its design allows for functional and aesthetic integration, enhancing the user experience of the furniture.
                            The X91/X92 hinge insert has a diameter of 10x11 mm and a specific height of 2 mm (or other options depending on the model). It is designed to guarantee a firm fixation by means of a clip system, which allows a perfect and easy adjustment to the hinge insert. These features ensure a precise and professional installation.
                            For proper installation, pre-drilling to the following specifications is required: 32 mm distance between holes. 37 mm distance from the edge of the door to the first hole. 11 mm deep holes. These dimensions ensure that the supplement fits perfectly and guarantee the stability of the hinge.
                            The snap-on coupling system allows quick connection without the need for additional tools. This mechanism facilitates the assembly and disassembly of the supplement, which reduces installation time. It also ensures a secure and stable fixing, minimising the risk of misalignment over time, which is not as easily achieved with traditional fixing methods such as screws.
                            Yes, the insert is designed to be compatible with door thicknesses from 14mm to 24mm, making it suitable for most standard furniture used in kitchens, bathrooms and other spaces.
                            The supplement is made of high-quality steel with nickel-plated finish (or titanium, depending on the model). These materials offer high resistance to corrosion and wear, even in wet environments such as kitchens and bathrooms. This design ensures a long service life and reliable performance, even in demanding conditions.
                            The springless X91N hinge is compatible with magnetic closers and offers a 105° opening, making it ideal for doors that require smooth and controlled closing. It is easily attached to the supplement by means of an automatic clip, optimising installation and functionality.
                            To install this hinge correctly, it is necessary to work with door thicknesses between 14 mm and 24 mm. It is necessary to consider a cup drilling range of 3 to 7 mm, and the diameter of the cup should be 35 mm.
                            The automatic clip system allows quick and easy attachment to the clamping insert without the need for additional tools. This facilitates both initial installation and subsequent maintenance or adjustments.
                            The X91N hinge allows depth adjustment by means of an eccentric screw, ensuring a precise fit. This range of adjustments is ideal for correcting irregularities or ensuring a perfect fit between door and cabinet.
                            The hinge is made of high-quality steel with a nickel-plated finish (or titanium, depending on the model), which ensures high resistance to corrosion and wear, guaranteeing durability even in heavy-duty environments.
                            The X91N super bend hinge stands out for its specific design that allows for greater three-dimensional adjustment and precise engagement by means of an eccentric screw. Compared to standard hinges, this hinge provides greater installation flexibility and better performance on doors with complex angles or misalignments.
                            It is especially recommended for furniture with high precision doors that need to close perfectly aligned, such as kitchen and bathroom furniture, where tight spaces and alignments are critical. Its super bend design is ideal for these applications.
                            The hinge includes an automatic clip system that allows it to be easily attached to the supplement, reducing installation time. In addition, its three-dimensional adjustment simplifies final adjustments, eliminating the need for complicated disassembly.
                            The super elbow design offers a greater range of adjustment and allows the door to have a greater degree of clearance from the frame, ideal for configurations where internal cabinet space is limited. This ensures smooth and precise movement without obstruction.
                            Manufactured from steel with nickel plated or titanium finishes, the X91N super elbow hinge is designed to resist corrosion and wear. It includes an integrated spring that ensures smooth and controlled closing, providing a robust solution for heavy use environments such as commercial kitchens or high traffic washrooms.
                            The set includes 20 X91N straight hinges, 20 0-height supplements to be screwed on and all the screws required for assembly. This set makes it possible to equip furniture with a complete solution, ensuring compatibility between hinges and supplements, as well as facilitating installation in large or commercial projects.
                            The X91 and X91N hinges are similar in design, but the X91N is springless, allowing it to be used in combination with magnetic latches. Both offer 105° opening, three-dimensional adjustment and compatibility with 35 mm cups.
                            The 0-height supplements facilitate installation in furniture where no additional height adjustment is required. They are mounted using the automatic clip system, which ensures fast and stable fastening. These supplements improve the accuracy of alignment in projects where the furniture has standard dimensions.
                            These hinges are made of high quality steel with nickel-plated or titanium finishes, making them resistant to corrosion and wear. Their versatile design and adjustment options allow them to be used in kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, especially in demanding environments.
                            To ensure correct assembly, installers must pre-drill a hole 35 mm in diameter and 3 to 7 mm deep for the hinge cup. The hinges are compatible with door thicknesses from 14 to 24 mm and allow height, side and depth adjustment by means of eccentric screws. This ensures a professional and functional installation.
                            The springless X91N supercock hinge is perfect for furniture with magnetic closures because it allows controlled closing without additional resistance, ensuring a smooth user experience and compatibility with modern locking systems.
                            The absence of a spring eliminates the return force in the closure, making the hinge depend solely on the magnetic closure or other external mechanisms. This facilitates the design of more versatile and functional furniture.
                            To install this hinge, a pre-drilling of 35 mm in diameter and 3 to 7 mm deep must be carried out in the cup. The automatic clip system is then used to attach the hinge to the supplement, securing the fixing by means of eccentric screws.
                            The three-dimensional adjustment allows the height, depth and side of the door to be adjusted, ensuring perfect alignment with the furniture. This is especially useful for correcting misalignments and ensuring a professional finish.
                            Nickel-plated or titanium steel finishes not only provide corrosion resistance and durability, but also add an elegant aesthetic touch, enhancing the overall appearance of the furniture and adapting to different design styles.
                            The eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to the position of the cabinet door, ensuring precise alignment even in cases of uneven surfaces or minimal differences in cabinet edges.
                            This supplement integrates with X91/X92 hinges using a mixed mounting system, which combines ease of automatic attachment with additional security when using screws, optimising both installation and long-term performance.
                            The compact design of the insert makes it easy to install in furniture with limited space, such as kitchen cabinets and small cupboards, where every millimetre counts to ensure a clean and professional fit.
                            The 5x9.5 mm diameter is designed to ensure a stable connection and a secure hold in the furniture and is compatible with common drilling standards in the furniture industry.
                            The nickel-plated steel construction ensures resistance against corrosion and wear, providing a durable and visually appealing addition, especially in furniture exposed to damp environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                            The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                            The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                            The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                            This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                            The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                            The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                            The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                            The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                            This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                            The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                            The 165° opening X91N supercross hinge allows the door to be completely recessed and flush with the edge of the furniture, optimising aesthetics and functionality in kitchen, bathroom and storage furniture.
                            The automatic mounting system allows the hinge to be attached to the supplement quickly and easily, eliminating the need for additional tools, reducing installation time and ensuring a stable fixing.
                            To install this hinge, it is necessary to consider a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm and to use 35 mm diameter cups. It is compatible with doors from 14 to 26 mm thick, covering most market standards.
                            The three-dimensional adjustment allows the height, side and depth of the door to be adjusted with great precision, ensuring a professional finish and correcting possible misalignments during assembly.
                            Made of nickel-plated or titanium-finished steel, the hinge is highly resistant to corrosion and wear, ensuring reliable performance even in wet or heavy-duty environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                            The X91N elbow hinge is designed for corner units, where its adjustability and angular design allows for perfect integration, optimising space and improving functionality in kitchens and cupboards.
                            The automatic mounting system allows the hinge to be attached to the supplement quickly and without additional tools, reducing installation time and ensuring a stable connection.
                            This hinge is compatible with 35 mm diameter cups and a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm. In addition, it can be installed on doors with a thickness between 14 and 24 mm, making it versatile for most standard furniture.
                            The depth adjustment by means of an eccentric screw allows fine adjustments to be made, correcting possible misalignments and ensuring that the door is perfectly aligned with the furniture, even in complex installations.
                            The anti-corrosion nickel-plated steel finish provides excellent resistance to moisture and wear, ensuring the durability of the hinge in demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms. In addition, its professional aesthetics enhance the appearance of the furniture.
                            The Euro X91/X92 supplement is distinguished by its compact and functional design, made of high-strength steel with a nickel-plated finish. In addition, it offers a 0-height adjustment, ideal for standard configurations without the need to modify the height of the cabinet.
                            The 0-height adjustment allows the X91/X92 hinges to be installed on furniture without altering the predetermined alignment of the doors, simplifying assembly and ensuring a precise and functional installation.
                            Its compact design facilitates its use in kitchen and office furniture, where space is limited. This supplement provides a firm and stable support, ensuring a long-lasting connection between the hinge and the furniture.
                            To ensure correct installation, holes must be drilled at a distance of 32 mm from each other and 37 mm from the inside edge of the door, using the included screws with a depth of 12 mm.
                            The nickel-plated steel is highly resistant to corrosion and wear, making it ideal for applications in demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms. In addition, its finish enhances the aesthetics and ensures a long service life of the supplement.
                            The three-dimensional adjustment allows for height, side and depth adjustments, offering precise tolerances to correct misalignments and ensure accurate closing and opening in technically demanding projects.
                            The cup drilling range of 3 to 7 mm allows different door configurations to be accommodated, ensuring a stable connection and reducing stress on the hinge on heavier or frequently used doors.
                            To use this hinge with magnetic closures, it is necessary to ensure a door thickness of 14 to 24 mm and an exact alignment of the magnet, which allows an efficient closing without additional resistance due to the absence of a spring.
                            The absence of a spring eliminates the return force, which minimises wear and tear on doors with magnetic closers and ensures controlled movement, ideal for precision furniture or minimalist designs.
                            The nickel-plated steel or titanium finish protects the hinge against corrosion and wear in heavy-duty environments, prolonging its resistance to material fatigue and ensuring optimum long-term functionality.
                            The drilling range of 3 to 7 mm guarantees a precise fit of the cup, allowing an even load distribution and improving the stability of the hinge on doors from 14 to 24 mm thick.
                            Three-dimensional adjustment allows height, side and depth adjustment, correcting alignment errors and ensuring that the doors work perfectly, even in complex installations or with tight tolerances.
                            According to its design, the X91N hinge can withstand medium to high dynamic loads, ensuring its functionality in heavy duty furniture such as kitchens and offices, depending on the density of the door material and the quality of the installation.
                            The automatic assembly system minimises stresses at the fixing points, reducing the risk of deformation due to continuous use and increasing the durability of the assembly against repeated opening and closing cycles.
                            The nickel-plated steel finish meets technical standards that ensure resistance to corrosion and abrasion, providing reliable performance in wet or demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                            The 135° angle allows both doors to open wide and without interference, optimising access and functionality for furniture located in corners or complex configurations.
                            The automatic mounting system improves structural stability by ensuring a firm and uniform fixing, distributing loads efficiently across the double doors.
                            It is crucial to respect a door thickness range of 14 to 26 mm and a cup bore of 35 mm diameter with a depth of 3 to 7 mm to ensure a functional and durable installation.
                            The three-dimensional adjustment allows height, side and depth adjustment, correcting possible misalignments that may arise during installation, especially on double doors that require precise alignment.
                            The nickel finish protects against corrosion and abrasion, ensuring the durability of the hinge even in environments such as kitchens or bathrooms, where moisture and heavy use are constant factors.
                            The drilling depth of 12 mm ensures a deep and stable fixing, preventing misalignment even on doors subject to continuous use or high dynamic loads.
                            For a secure fixing, it is important to check the compatibility of the insert with the thickness of the board and to adjust the drilling tolerances according to the material to avoid breakage or misalignment.
                            The 37 mm distance from the inner edge allows a mounting that respects the standard tolerances, guaranteeing a correct alignment of the hinge with the supplement and the furniture.
                            The design of the insert distributes the forces generated by the door movement, reducing stress on the fixing points and extending the durability of the system in high usage projects.
                            The nickel-plated finish protects the supplement against corrosion and abrasion, ensuring long-lasting functionality in environments such as kitchens, where chemicals and moisture are common.
                            The 165° angle allows full opening of the door, optimising access to the entire interior of the cabinet, ideal for applications such as wardrobes and large storage units.
                            The three-dimensional adjustment offers height, side and depth adjustment, ensuring perfect alignment of the doors and correcting misalignments during installation on doors of different thicknesses.
                            The 35 mm diameter holes must be drilled to a depth of 3 to 7 mm, with an edge spacing of 3 to 7 mm, to ensure safe and stable mounting of the hinge.
                            The absence of a spring eliminates resistance during closing, providing a smooth and controlled movement, which is ideal for systems with magnetic closures or pushers.
                            The nickel-plated or titanium finish protects the hinge against corrosion, wear and tear and adverse environmental conditions, ensuring long-lasting functionality even in kitchens or bathrooms.
                            Eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to be made to door alignment, improving accuracy in projects where minimum tolerances are critical to furniture design.
                            To ensure the stability of the supplement, the holes must have a diameter of 5 mm, a depth of 12 mm and a standard spacing of 32 mm between anchor points.
                            Euro screws provide a solid fixing design, ensuring a stable mounting that withstands dynamic loads without compromising the integrity of the system on heavy duty doors.
                            The 0-height allows for a standard installation that facilitates the precise alignment of the doors, ensuring that they fit perfectly into the furniture frame without the need for additional modifications.
                            The nickel-plated steel used in this supplement meets quality standards that guarantee corrosion resistance, durability in frequently used environments and professional aesthetics in technical furniture applications.
                            The eccentric adjustment allows a ±2 mm adjustment, ensuring fine control of door alignment, which is essential for high precision and technical design projects.
                            Drilling must be carried out with a 32 mm spacing between screws and a distance of 37 mm from the inner edge of the door, ensuring a solid and stable anchorage for the supplement.
                            The 0-height adjustment facilitates the exact alignment of doors on standard furniture, eliminating the need for additional modifications and ensuring fast and accurate installation.
                            The nickel or titanium finish provides superior corrosion resistance, which protects the supplement against external agents, as well as improving its durability in continuous use environments such as kitchens and offices.
                            This supplement is ideal for kitchen and office furniture, as it allows precise adjustment of the doors, maintaining their stability even in applications where frequent and constant use is required.
                            The X91N elbow hinges are ideal for kitchen and bathroom furniture due to their nickel-plated steel construction, which makes them corrosion resistant, and their soft-close design, which reduces impact and prolongs their durability in frequently used environments.
                            For precise installation, a 35 mm diameter cup hole is required, with a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm, respecting the specifications of the Euro screws for the included inserts.
                            The three-dimensional adjustment allows for height, side and depth adjustments, correcting misalignments and ensuring perfect alignment between the door and the cabinet frame, even on furniture with tight tolerances.
                            The clip-on mounting system reduces installation times by allowing quick and secure attachment, eliminating the need for additional tools, making it an efficient solution for large-scale projects.
                            The 105° opening angle significantly improves accessibility by allowing convenient and unrestricted access to furniture, even in configurations such as corners or shared spaces.
                            X91N super elbow hinges are designed for full overlap doors, offering greater flexibility in tight spaces, unlike standard straight or elbow hinges which are ideal for partial overlap configurations.
                            The pre-drilling should be 35 mm in diameter and a depth range of 3 to 7 mm, ensuring a tight fit and avoiding misalignment in door thicknesses of 14 to 24 mm.
                            The damping piston ensures a smooth and silent closing, reducing impacts on the furniture and prolonging the life of both hinges and doors, especially in frequently used furniture.
                            The eccentric adjustment allows depth adjustments to be made with millimetre precision, ensuring that doors are perfectly aligned, even on furniture with customised or irregular designs.
                            For efficient installation, the drilling specifications must be respected and the Euro screws included must be used, ensuring the correct fixing of the supplements to the furniture and facilitating quick adjustments in large-scale projects.
                            This supplement offers an eccentric adjustment range of ±1.5 mm, allowing fine adjustment for precise alignment and optimised door closure in the cabinet.
                            It is compatible with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, but cannot be used with 90° arm hinges, which should be considered when selecting system components.
                            It is recommended to use the screws supplied with the supplement, which are specifically designed to ensure safe installation and prevent damage to the furniture material.
                            The concealed design of the supplement, being under the hinge arm, enhances the aesthetics of the cabinet and avoids interference with other components, maintaining a clean and professional appearance.
                            The nickel-plated or titanium finish provides increased resistance to corrosion and wear, which is ideal for applications in kitchens or bathrooms where exposure to moisture is frequent.
                            The supplement allows a height adjustment with a tolerance of ±1.5 mm, which facilitates a precise alignment of the doors, ensuring an optimal closing and an impeccable aesthetics of the furniture.
                            No, this supplement is not compatible with plastic hinge covers, as it is designed to work directly with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, optimising their integration and functionality.
                            For the correct installation, it is necessary to carry out a machining on the furniture with dimensions of Ø10 x 10 mm, ensuring a firm and stable fastening of the supplement to the module.
                            The design with concealed fixing under the hinge arm enhances the aesthetics of the furniture by eliminating visible elements, which is ideal for premium projects where attention to detail is essential.
                            The 10x10 mm diameter allows a more compact and specific installation in furniture modules, ensuring a secure fixing and avoiding interference with other internal components.
                            The main function of an unsprung hinge is to allow the use of push pieces to open the door with a push system in order to ensure a smoother opening of the door without the inertia generated by an inverted hinge. It can also be used in combination with soft-close hinges on doors with a great number of hinges in order to accelerate the closing speed of the door, since they are compatible with the entire X91 hinge family.
                              The X91/X92 hinge insert has a diameter of 10x11 mm and a specific height of 2 mm (or other options depending on the model). It is designed to guarantee a firm fixation by means of a clip system, which allows a perfect and easy adjustment to the hinge insert. These features ensure a precise and professional installation.
                              For proper installation, pre-drilling to the following specifications is required: 32 mm distance between holes. 37 mm distance from the edge of the door to the first hole. 11 mm deep holes. These dimensions ensure that the supplement fits perfectly and guarantee the stability of the hinge.
                              The snap-on coupling system allows quick connection without the need for additional tools. This mechanism facilitates the assembly and disassembly of the supplement, which reduces installation time. It also ensures a secure and stable fixing, minimising the risk of misalignment over time, which is not as easily achieved with traditional fixing methods such as screws.
                              Yes, the insert is designed to be compatible with door thicknesses from 14mm to 24mm, making it suitable for most standard furniture used in kitchens, bathrooms and other spaces.
                              The supplement is made of high-quality steel with nickel-plated finish (or titanium, depending on the model). These materials offer high resistance to corrosion and wear, even in wet environments such as kitchens and bathrooms. This design ensures a long service life and reliable performance, even in demanding conditions.
                              The eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to the position of the cabinet door, ensuring precise alignment even in cases of uneven surfaces or minimal differences in cabinet edges.
                              This supplement integrates with X91/X92 hinges using a mixed mounting system, which combines ease of automatic attachment with additional security when using screws, optimising both installation and long-term performance.
                              The compact design of the insert makes it easy to install in furniture with limited space, such as kitchen cabinets and small cupboards, where every millimetre counts to ensure a clean and professional fit.
                              The 5x9.5 mm diameter is designed to ensure a stable connection and a secure hold in the furniture and is compatible with common drilling standards in the furniture industry.
                              The nickel-plated steel construction ensures resistance against corrosion and wear, providing a durable and visually appealing addition, especially in furniture exposed to damp environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                              The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                              The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                              The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                              This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                              The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                              The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                              The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                              The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                              This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                              The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                              The Euro X91/X92 supplement is distinguished by its compact and functional design, made of high-strength steel with a nickel-plated finish. In addition, it offers a 0-height adjustment, ideal for standard configurations without the need to modify the height of the cabinet.
                              The 0-height adjustment allows the X91/X92 hinges to be installed on furniture without altering the predetermined alignment of the doors, simplifying assembly and ensuring a precise and functional installation.
                              Its compact design facilitates its use in kitchen and office furniture, where space is limited. This supplement provides a firm and stable support, ensuring a long-lasting connection between the hinge and the furniture.
                              To ensure correct installation, holes must be drilled at a distance of 32 mm from each other and 37 mm from the inside edge of the door, using the included screws with a depth of 12 mm.
                              The nickel-plated steel is highly resistant to corrosion and wear, making it ideal for applications in demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms. In addition, its finish enhances the aesthetics and ensures a long service life of the supplement.
                              The drilling depth of 12 mm ensures a deep and stable fixing, preventing misalignment even on doors subject to continuous use or high dynamic loads.
                              For a secure fixing, it is important to check the compatibility of the insert with the thickness of the board and to adjust the drilling tolerances according to the material to avoid breakage or misalignment.
                              The 37 mm distance from the inner edge allows a mounting that respects the standard tolerances, guaranteeing a correct alignment of the hinge with the supplement and the furniture.
                              The design of the insert distributes the forces generated by the door movement, reducing stress on the fixing points and extending the durability of the system in high usage projects.
                              The nickel-plated finish protects the supplement against corrosion and abrasion, ensuring long-lasting functionality in environments such as kitchens, where chemicals and moisture are common.
                              Eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to be made to door alignment, improving accuracy in projects where minimum tolerances are critical to furniture design.
                              To ensure the stability of the supplement, the holes must have a diameter of 5 mm, a depth of 12 mm and a standard spacing of 32 mm between anchor points.
                              Euro screws provide a solid fixing design, ensuring a stable mounting that withstands dynamic loads without compromising the integrity of the system on heavy duty doors.
                              The 0-height allows for a standard installation that facilitates the precise alignment of the doors, ensuring that they fit perfectly into the furniture frame without the need for additional modifications.
                              The nickel-plated steel used in this supplement meets quality standards that guarantee corrosion resistance, durability in frequently used environments and professional aesthetics in technical furniture applications.
                              The eccentric adjustment allows a ±2 mm adjustment, ensuring fine control of door alignment, which is essential for high precision and technical design projects.
                              Drilling must be carried out with a 32 mm spacing between screws and a distance of 37 mm from the inner edge of the door, ensuring a solid and stable anchorage for the supplement.
                              The 0-height adjustment facilitates the exact alignment of doors on standard furniture, eliminating the need for additional modifications and ensuring fast and accurate installation.
                              The nickel or titanium finish provides superior corrosion resistance, which protects the supplement against external agents, as well as improving its durability in continuous use environments such as kitchens and offices.
                              This supplement is ideal for kitchen and office furniture, as it allows precise adjustment of the doors, maintaining their stability even in applications where frequent and constant use is required.
                              Installation requires 35 mm diameter holes with a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm, ensuring that the doors are 14 to 24 mm thick to guarantee a secure and stable fixing.
                              The cushioned closure reduces the impact when closing the doors, prolonging the life of the hinges and improving the user experience thanks to a smooth and silent movement.
                              The clip-on mounting system allows for quick installation without additional tools, improving coupling accuracy and significantly reducing the time required to complete the assembly.
                              The three-dimensional adjustment allows height, side and depth adjustment, correcting misalignments in the installation and ensuring that the doors are perfectly aligned with the furniture frame.
                              The 105° opening angle is ideal for furniture that requires wide and convenient access, such as kitchen cabinets, bathrooms and storage furniture in residential and commercial environments.
                              The drilling range of 3 to 7 mm ensures optimum fit between hinge and cup, providing structural stability and precise alignment for compatible doors.
                              The cushioned closure avoids sudden impacts when closing, protecting both the hinge and the door, prolonging its life and improving the user experience thanks to a silent movement.
                              The elbow design allows a partial overlap of the door, ideal for furniture with angular configurations or corner designs that require a specific solution to optimise space.
                              The three-dimensional adjustment allows precise height, side and depth adjustments, ensuring professional installation and perfect alignments on doors of different thicknesses.
                              The 105° opening angle is ideal for kitchen, bathroom and storage furniture, where convenient and wide access is needed, without interference with adjacent structures.
                              The X92 super bend hinge is specifically designed for overlapping doors or closed angle configurations, offering an optimised design to maximise space and ease of assembly.
                              The drilling of the cup should be carried out with a diameter of 35 mm and a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm, respecting the tolerances to ensure a stable and functional fastening.
                              The super elbow design allows for the mounting of overlapping doors, ideal for corner furniture or configurations in limited spaces where doors need specific adjustment for proper operation.
                              Soft close minimises impact and noise when closing doors, prolonging the life of the hinge and improving the user experience on furniture with constant use.
                              The 105° opening angle facilitates full access to furniture in tight spaces, such as corners or shared storage areas, without interfering with its functionality.
                              Installation requires a 35 mm diameter hole for the cup and a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm, ensuring compatibility with door thicknesses from 14 to 24 mm for a secure and functional fit.
                              The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments in depth and alignment, correcting misalignments and ensuring a professional installation in projects where tolerances are minimal.
                              The 105° opening angle improves accessibility, allowing wide and convenient access to furniture, ideal for environments such as kitchens and offices with shared or intensively used spaces.
                              The clip-on mounting system significantly reduces installation time by allowing quick and secure attachment, ensuring structural stability and ease of assembly without additional tools.
                              This design is ideal for furniture where a total overlap of the doors with the side of the furniture is required, optimising the use of space and improving aesthetics in modern or minimalist configurations.
                              The X92 elbow hinges are designed to fit perfectly on doors from 14 to 24 mm thick thanks to their three-dimensional adjustment system and standard 35 mm cup, ensuring an optimal and stable fit.
                              The clip-on mounting system allows for quick installation without additional tools, ensuring precise fastening and reducing assembly times on large volume projects.
                              The three-dimensional adjustment offers +/-2 mm height and side adjustments, as well as depth adjustments, allowing you to correct misalignments and ensure a perfect seal on custom-designed furniture.
                              The soft closing system avoids sudden impacts by cushioning the movement of the door, protecting both the hinge and the structure of the furniture, and prolonging the life of both components.
                              Pre-drilling should be carried out with a diameter of 35 mm, a depth of 3 to 7 mm and a centre-to-centre distance of 32 mm, which ensures a solid and precise fixing of the shims.
                              The 35 mm cup provides a larger contact area, increasing stability and allowing for a robust and durable installation in door thicknesses from 14 to 24 mm.
                              The depth adjustment by means of an eccentric screw allows precise control of the door position, correcting possible misalignments and ensuring a uniform and aesthetic closure.
                              The soft closing system automatically adapts to doors of different thicknesses, absorbing impacts and providing a controlled closure, ideal for intensive use in kitchen furniture and cupboards.
                              The clip mounting significantly reduces installation times, offering secure fixing without the need for additional tools, making it ideal for large-scale professional projects.
                              To install the 0-height supplements, pre-drilled holes with a diameter of 35 mm, a depth of 12 mm and a centre-to-centre spacing of 32 mm must be drilled to ensure optimum and aligned fastening.
                              This supplement offers an eccentric adjustment range of ±1.5 mm, allowing fine adjustment for precise alignment and optimised door closure in the cabinet.
                              It is compatible with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, but cannot be used with 90° arm hinges, which should be considered when selecting system components.
                              It is recommended to use the screws supplied with the supplement, which are specifically designed to ensure safe installation and prevent damage to the furniture material.
                              The concealed design of the supplement, being under the hinge arm, enhances the aesthetics of the cabinet and avoids interference with other components, maintaining a clean and professional appearance.
                              The nickel-plated or titanium finish provides increased resistance to corrosion and wear, which is ideal for applications in kitchens or bathrooms where exposure to moisture is frequent.
                              The supplement allows a height adjustment with a tolerance of ±1.5 mm, which facilitates a precise alignment of the doors, ensuring an optimal closing and an impeccable aesthetics of the furniture.
                              No, this supplement is not compatible with plastic hinge covers, as it is designed to work directly with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, optimising their integration and functionality.
                              For the correct installation, it is necessary to carry out a machining on the furniture with dimensions of Ø10 x 10 mm, ensuring a firm and stable fastening of the supplement to the module.
                              The design with concealed fixing under the hinge arm enhances the aesthetics of the furniture by eliminating visible elements, which is ideal for premium projects where attention to detail is essential.
                              The 10x10 mm diameter allows a more compact and specific installation in furniture modules, ensuring a secure fixing and avoiding interference with other internal components.
                                The X91/X92 hinge insert has a diameter of 10x11 mm and a specific height of 2 mm (or other options depending on the model). It is designed to guarantee a firm fixation by means of a clip system, which allows a perfect and easy adjustment to the hinge insert. These features ensure a precise and professional installation.
                                For proper installation, pre-drilling to the following specifications is required: 32 mm distance between holes. 37 mm distance from the edge of the door to the first hole. 11 mm deep holes. These dimensions ensure that the supplement fits perfectly and guarantee the stability of the hinge.
                                The snap-on coupling system allows quick connection without the need for additional tools. This mechanism facilitates the assembly and disassembly of the supplement, which reduces installation time. It also ensures a secure and stable fixing, minimising the risk of misalignment over time, which is not as easily achieved with traditional fixing methods such as screws.
                                Yes, the insert is designed to be compatible with door thicknesses from 14mm to 24mm, making it suitable for most standard furniture used in kitchens, bathrooms and other spaces.
                                The supplement is made of high-quality steel with nickel-plated finish (or titanium, depending on the model). These materials offer high resistance to corrosion and wear, even in wet environments such as kitchens and bathrooms. This design ensures a long service life and reliable performance, even in demanding conditions.
                                The eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to the position of the cabinet door, ensuring precise alignment even in cases of uneven surfaces or minimal differences in cabinet edges.
                                This supplement integrates with X91/X92 hinges using a mixed mounting system, which combines ease of automatic attachment with additional security when using screws, optimising both installation and long-term performance.
                                The compact design of the insert makes it easy to install in furniture with limited space, such as kitchen cabinets and small cupboards, where every millimetre counts to ensure a clean and professional fit.
                                The 5x9.5 mm diameter is designed to ensure a stable connection and a secure hold in the furniture and is compatible with common drilling standards in the furniture industry.
                                The nickel-plated steel construction ensures resistance against corrosion and wear, providing a durable and visually appealing addition, especially in furniture exposed to damp environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                                The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                                The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                                The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                                This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                                The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                                The eccentric adjustment allows precise adjustments to be made to the door position, ensuring exact alignment with the furniture. This is essential for furniture where tolerances must be kept to a minimum.
                                The snap-in installation system with integrated ramps eliminates the need for additional screws, facilitating fast and secure assembly. This simplifies the installer's work and ensures a firm hold.
                                The 10x11 mm diameter ensures compatibility with standard bore holes and a stable connection to the furniture board, providing suitable support for X91/X92 hinges.
                                This supplement is ideal for furniture such as kitchen and bathroom cabinets, where a precise fit and sturdy mounting is required on doors with high daily use.
                                The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the insert, but also protects it against corrosion, increasing its lifespan and making it easier to clean in wet or high traffic environments.
                                The Euro X91/X92 supplement is distinguished by its compact and functional design, made of high-strength steel with a nickel-plated finish. In addition, it offers a 0-height adjustment, ideal for standard configurations without the need to modify the height of the cabinet.
                                The 0-height adjustment allows the X91/X92 hinges to be installed on furniture without altering the predetermined alignment of the doors, simplifying assembly and ensuring a precise and functional installation.
                                Its compact design facilitates its use in kitchen and office furniture, where space is limited. This supplement provides a firm and stable support, ensuring a long-lasting connection between the hinge and the furniture.
                                To ensure correct installation, holes must be drilled at a distance of 32 mm from each other and 37 mm from the inside edge of the door, using the included screws with a depth of 12 mm.
                                The nickel-plated steel is highly resistant to corrosion and wear, making it ideal for applications in demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms. In addition, its finish enhances the aesthetics and ensures a long service life of the supplement.
                                The drilling depth of 12 mm ensures a deep and stable fixing, preventing misalignment even on doors subject to continuous use or high dynamic loads.
                                For a secure fixing, it is important to check the compatibility of the insert with the thickness of the board and to adjust the drilling tolerances according to the material to avoid breakage or misalignment.
                                The 37 mm distance from the inner edge allows a mounting that respects the standard tolerances, guaranteeing a correct alignment of the hinge with the supplement and the furniture.
                                The design of the insert distributes the forces generated by the door movement, reducing stress on the fixing points and extending the durability of the system in high usage projects.
                                The nickel-plated finish protects the supplement against corrosion and abrasion, ensuring long-lasting functionality in environments such as kitchens, where chemicals and moisture are common.
                                Eccentric adjustment allows fine adjustments to be made to door alignment, improving accuracy in projects where minimum tolerances are critical to furniture design.
                                To ensure the stability of the supplement, the holes must have a diameter of 5 mm, a depth of 12 mm and a standard spacing of 32 mm between anchor points.
                                Euro screws provide a solid fixing design, ensuring a stable mounting that withstands dynamic loads without compromising the integrity of the system on heavy duty doors.
                                The 0-height allows for a standard installation that facilitates the precise alignment of the doors, ensuring that they fit perfectly into the furniture frame without the need for additional modifications.
                                The nickel-plated steel used in this supplement meets quality standards that guarantee corrosion resistance, durability in frequently used environments and professional aesthetics in technical furniture applications.
                                The eccentric adjustment allows a ±2 mm adjustment, ensuring fine control of door alignment, which is essential for high precision and technical design projects.
                                Drilling must be carried out with a 32 mm spacing between screws and a distance of 37 mm from the inner edge of the door, ensuring a solid and stable anchorage for the supplement.
                                The 0-height adjustment facilitates the exact alignment of doors on standard furniture, eliminating the need for additional modifications and ensuring fast and accurate installation.
                                The nickel or titanium finish provides superior corrosion resistance, which protects the supplement against external agents, as well as improving its durability in continuous use environments such as kitchens and offices.
                                This supplement is ideal for kitchen and office furniture, as it allows precise adjustment of the doors, maintaining their stability even in applications where frequent and constant use is required.
                                The 35 mm cup is an industry standard, offering an optimal balance between stability and compatibility with different door thicknesses, guaranteeing a safe and sturdy installation.
                                The drilling range of 3 to 7 mm allows for flexibility in installation, adapting to different types of doors and ensuring a precise fit without compromising stability.
                                To ensure proper fastening, it is necessary to respect the drilling specifications of the shims, using Euro screws with a centre-to-centre distance of 32 mm and an entry depth of 12 mm.
                                The spring-loaded latch is designed to absorb impact and reduce wear and tear, providing smooth, controlled closing even on doors that are subject to frequent opening and closing.
                                In furniture with irregular finishes, the X92N hinges allow for depth, height and lateral adjustments by means of their three-dimensional adjustment, ensuring perfect closure and precise alignment.
                                This supplement offers an eccentric adjustment range of ±1.5 mm, allowing fine adjustment for precise alignment and optimised door closure in the cabinet.
                                It is compatible with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, but cannot be used with 90° arm hinges, which should be considered when selecting system components.
                                It is recommended to use the screws supplied with the supplement, which are specifically designed to ensure safe installation and prevent damage to the furniture material.
                                The concealed design of the supplement, being under the hinge arm, enhances the aesthetics of the cabinet and avoids interference with other components, maintaining a clean and professional appearance.
                                The nickel-plated or titanium finish provides increased resistance to corrosion and wear, which is ideal for applications in kitchens or bathrooms where exposure to moisture is frequent.
                                The supplement allows a height adjustment with a tolerance of ±1.5 mm, which facilitates a precise alignment of the doors, ensuring an optimal closing and an impeccable aesthetics of the furniture.
                                No, this supplement is not compatible with plastic hinge covers, as it is designed to work directly with X91, X92 and X91R hinges, optimising their integration and functionality.
                                For the correct installation, it is necessary to carry out a machining on the furniture with dimensions of Ø10 x 10 mm, ensuring a firm and stable fastening of the supplement to the module.
                                The design with concealed fixing under the hinge arm enhances the aesthetics of the furniture by eliminating visible elements, which is ideal for premium projects where attention to detail is essential.
                                The 10x10 mm diameter allows a more compact and specific installation in furniture modules, ensuring a secure fixing and avoiding interference with other internal components.
                                  A tightening torque of 3-4 Nm is recommended for secure fastening without damaging the wood or the hinge.
                                  It is made of steel with a nickel-plated finish, which provides resistance to rust and wear in humid environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                  It uses an integrated hydraulic piston, designed to withstand up to 80,000 opening and closing cycles, ensuring long-lasting and stable operation.
                                  The diameter of the cup is Ø35 mm, with a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm from the edge of the door. A tolerance of ±0.2 mm in drilling is recommended for optimum fit.
                                  The hinge is designed to support doors up to 4 kg per unit. For heavier doors, it is recommended to install multiple hinges evenly distributed.
                                    Yes, the overlaps are calculated using the same formulas.
                                    The supplement allows the X71 hinge to be securely attached to the furniture and offers a height adjustment of ±2 mm, which facilitates precise adjustments to the door alignment.
                                    It is made of steel with a nickel-plated finish, which gives it high resistance to rust and a long service life in humid environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                    It is fixed by means of Ø3.5 mm screws, ensuring a firm and stable connection between the supplement and the door panel.
                                    This model is specifically designed for X71 hinges, ensuring optimal installation and reliable performance in combination with these hinges.
                                    A supplement is required for each hinge installed on the door to ensure proper fastening and adjustment.
                                    This supplement allows the X71 Euro hinge to be securely attached to the furniture and is eccentrically adjustable, which facilitates the precise adjustment of the door.
                                    The X71 Euro supplement has an eccentric adjustment system that allows fine adjustments of the hinge position, ensuring optimum door alignment.
                                    It is designed for use with X71 Euro hinges, especially those requiring a clip or automatic mounting system.
                                    It is fixed by means of screws, which provides a firm and stable attachment to the furniture structure.
                                    It is made of nickel-plated steel, which gives it high corrosion resistance and durability in frequently used environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                      The snap-on hinge allows quick installation without the need for additional tools, while the screw-on hinge offers a more traditional screw fixing, providing greater security in certain applications.
                                      The hinge allows three-dimensional adjustment in the horizontal, vertical and depth axes, which facilitates the precise alignment of doors and the correction of misalignments during installation.
                                      The differentiated spring mechanism improves the smoothness of the closing and ensures uniform pressure on the door, avoiding sudden movements or misalignment with continuous use.
                                      This hinge is recommended for door and panel thicknesses between 14 and 23 mm, making it versatile for different types of kitchen, bathroom and office furniture.
                                      Its 110° opening range allows wide access to the inside of the cabinet, making it easy to handle objects without obstruction when opening the door.
                                      The bolt-on hinge requires screw fixing, whereas the snap-on hinge allows faster screwless assembly, making installation easier.
                                      The X95 straight hinge is three-dimensionally adjustable to improve the fit and joint in the door.
                                      Recommended for use on doors with a thickness between 14 mm and 23 mm.
                                      This hinge allows a 110° opening, ideal for kitchen cabinets and furniture in general.
                                      The cup drilling range is 3 to 8 mm, with a standard circumference of 35 mm.
                                      The X95 Supplement is a support base that enhances the functionality of X95 hinges, providing a better fit and stability at installation.
                                      It is specifically designed for use with the bolt-on X95 series hinges.
                                      It offers ±2 mm height adjustment by means of coloured holes for optimum adjustment.
                                      It is fixed with screws to the door panel, with a spacing of 32 mm and 37 mm from the inner edge of the door.
                                      It is made of nickel-plated steel, which guarantees high strength and durability.
                                      This supplement allows a precise adjustment of ±2 mm, which facilitates the alignment of the door without the need to dismantle the hinge.
                                      The use of Ø 6.3 x 14 mm screws is recommended on surfaces with an entry hole of Ø 5 mm, ensuring a firm and secure fixing.
                                      Manufactured from nickel-plated steel, the supplement increases the durability and stability of the X95 Euro hinge, reducing wear and improving load distribution.
                                      This supplement is specifically designed for the X95 Euro series, optimising its performance and ensuring proper mounting.
                                      Yes, it can be used in conjunction with other three-dimensional hinge adjustment solutions, provided they are compatible with the X95 Euro system.
                                      It is installed by means of screws, ensuring a firm hold on the panel. The cup has a diameter of 35 mm and the drilling range is 3 to 8 mm, which facilitates mounting in different configurations.
                                      It is designed for door thicknesses between 14 mm and 23 mm, providing a precise fit on adjoining furniture thanks to its steep angle design (super elbow).
                                      The X95 super-corner hinge allows a 110° opening, guaranteeing a fluid and wide movement for greater accessibility in the cabinet.
                                      Yes, it is three-dimensionally adjustable, allowing for height, depth and lateral alignment adjustments for precise mounting.
                                      It is made of steel with a nickel-plated finish, which makes it resistant to corrosion and wear, as well as offering a modern and professional aesthetic.
                                      The hinge allows three-dimensional adjustment of the door position in height, depth and sideways, ensuring optimum alignment.
                                      The mounting is bayonet-mounted, which facilitates quick and safe installation on the corresponding supplement.
                                      The cup requires a diameter of 35 mm and a drilling range of 4 to 7 mm, which allows a firm and stable clamping.
                                      Yes, it is designed to be installed on doors between 14 and 22 mm thick, offering a versatile solution for different types of furniture.
                                      It has an integrated spring that acts in the closing direction, ensuring a controlled and safe movement of the door.
                                      The hinge allows an opening angle of 95°, ensuring a wide and comfortable access to the inside of the cabinet.
                                      Yes, it allows three-dimensional adjustment to correct height, depth and lateral alignment, achieving a precise fit in the installation.
                                      The use of Ø4 x 16 mm screws is recommended for secure fastening on wooden or laminated board surfaces.
                                      No, this hinge does not include a cushioned latch. However, its robust design provides a secure and firm closure.
                                      It is made of nickel-plated steel, which provides high corrosion resistance and an aesthetic design suitable for kitchen and office furniture.
                                      The X95 hinge allows +2 mm / -2 mm adjustments in height, side and depth, which facilitates precise alignment of the door in the cabinet.
                                      The hinge cup has a diameter of 35 mm, with a drilling range of 3 to 7 mm to ensure a proper fit in the door.
                                      This X95 hinge model has a spring in the closing direction, which ensures a safe and smooth closing of the door.
                                      It is recommended to use Ø4x16 mm or Ø3.5x16 mm screws, depending on the door material and the desired fixing strength.
                                      This hinge is mainly designed for wooden doors from 14 to 22 mm thick, but with specific adapters it can be used on doors with an aluminium profile.
                                      For proper weight distribution and smooth movement, it is recommended to install hinges with a minimum gap of 250 mm to 300 mm, depending on the size and weight of the door.
                                      The use of 3.5 x 16 mm or 4 x 16 mm flat head screws is recommended for optimum fastening in wood or MDF boards.
                                      The 165° X95 hinge is designed to withstand loads of up to 5 kg per hinge, so it is recommended to use a minimum of two hinges for standard doors and to add more hinges for heavier doors.
                                      Yes, the 165° X95 hinge can be combined with push-to-open systems and additional dampers, depending on the hinge mechanism and the supplements used.
                                      No, the opening angle is fixed at 165°, but the hinge allows three-dimensional adjustment in height, depth and sideways for precise door adjustment.
                                      The elbow hinge allows the door to partially retract into the cabinet when closed, preventing it from protruding out to the side. It is ideal for furniture with partially overlapping doors or in applications with multiple doors in a row.
                                      The X95 hinge allows adjustment in three directions: Height by means of the mounting base. Depth with the eccentric screw on the cup. Sideways with the lateral adjustment screw.
                                      It is designed for wooden or MDF doors with a thickness of 14 to 26 mm and a cup bore of Ø35 mm.
                                      Yes, the 165° X95 hinge can be integrated with additional dampers for softer closing or push-to-open systems to eliminate the need for handles.
                                      The bore diameter should be 35 mm, with a depth of 11.5 mm and an edge clearance of 3 to 7 mm, depending on the required fit.
                                      The height of the supplement affects the alignment of the door with the furniture: Height -2 mm: Allows lower adjustment for doors that need alignment correction. Height 0 mm: Maintains the standard hinge position with no change in height. Height 2 mm: Slightly raises the hinge position, useful for alignment or levelling adjustments.
                                      This supplement is compatible with wooden doors and other materials from 14 to 26 mm thick, in combination with X95 hinges.
                                      The diameter of the screw determines the type of fastening and stability of the insert in the door. A diameter of 5x9.5 mm provides a firm and secure fixing, ensuring better resistance to loads and mechanical stresses.
                                      Yes, it is specifically designed to work with X95 hinges, ensuring optimum installation with height adjustment and three-dimensional alignment.
                                      The nickel-plated finish provides increased corrosion and wear resistance, ensuring greater durability in wet or frequently used environments.
                                      This supplement allows a firmer and more secure attachment of X95 snap-on hinges, improving their stability and alignment on the door.
                                      Yes, it is specifically designed to work with X95 snap-on hinges, ensuring easy and efficient installation.
                                      The installation is carried out by means of a pressure system, without the need for additional screws, which allows a quick and safe assembly.
                                      The nickel-plated finish improves corrosion and wear resistance, providing greater durability in heavy use or wet environments.
                                      Yes, it optimises the functionality of the hinge by providing a more stable and secure base, preventing misalignment with prolonged use.
                                        The X50 hinge has a Ø35 mm short arm cup and is installed using 6 mm screws at a spacing of 48 mm.
                                        It is designed for doors between 14 mm and 23 mm thick, providing a secure and stable fit.
                                        It is three-dimensionally adjustable, allowing for height, width and depth adjustments, facilitating precise installation.
                                        The cup drilling range is D = 3 to 8 mm, ensuring compatibility with different mounting configurations.
                                        The X50 hinge allows an opening angle of 105°, which facilitates easy access to the inside of the cabinet.
                                        The part offers an additional height of 3 mm, with a suitable accuracy of fit to ensure optimum door alignment.
                                        It allows a fixed height adjustment of +3 mm, facilitating the adjustment of the door without the need to modify the body of the unit.
                                        Made of high-strength nickel-plated steel, the supplement withstands the mechanical stresses generated by frequent use of the hinge without deformation or play.
                                        We recommend the use of: Flat head screw Ø4 x 16 mm Tallow drop head screw Ø4 x 15 mm or Ø3.5 x 16 mm to ensure a stable and secure fixing to the furniture material.
                                        No, the supplement is designed to maintain the same load capacity as the X50 hinge, as its nickel-plated steel structure prevents deformation under weight.
                                          The X12 hinge allows precise adjustments by eccentric adjustment: Height: ±2 mm Depth: ±2 mm Side: ±1 mm This guarantees perfect alignment of the door even in installations with small variations.
                                          For fixing the X12 hinge, screws with a diameter of 3.5 to 4 mm and a length of 12 to 16 mm are recommended, depending on the furniture material.
                                          A properly installed X12 hinge can support up to 8 kg per unit. It is recommended to install at least two hinges on doors up to 600 mm high and three or more on larger doors.
                                          This hinge is designed for doors from 12 to 18 mm thick. If the door is thicker than this, the hinge cup may not align properly and affect the opening and closing of the door.
                                          No, the X12 hinge is designed exclusively for wooden doors or derivatives. For glass, specific hinges with pressure or adhesive fixing are required.
                                          The X12 elbow hinge is designed for partially overlapping doors, which means that the door covers only part of the side of the furniture. In contrast, the X12 straight hinge is used for fully overlapping doors.
                                          The X12 elbow hinge has a 26 mm diameter cup and allows a 95° opening angle, which facilitates easy access to the inside of the furniture.
                                          No, the X12 elbow hinge is specifically designed for doors 12 to 18 mm thick. If the door is thinner or thicker, the installation may not be suitable and may affect alignment and locking.
                                          Screws with a diameter of 3.5 to 4 mm and a length of 12 to 16 mm are recommended, depending on the furniture material.
                                          The three-dimensional adjustment allows the following settings: Height: ±2 mm Depth: ±2 mm Sideways: ±1 mm These adjustments help to correct any misalignment after assembly.
                                          The X12 super elbow hinge is designed for furniture where the door must fully retract into the furniture frame. In contrast, the X12 elbow hinge allows the door to partially overlap the side of the furniture.
                                          The X12 super elbow hinge has a 26 mm diameter cup and an opening angle of 95°, providing convenient access to the furniture.
                                          Snap-on (clip): SKU Model 1271607, facilitates quick installation without the need for additional tools. Screw-on: SKU Model 1270507, for traditional screw installation.
                                          Yes, this hinge allows three-dimensional adjustment, which facilitates perfect alignment of the door: Height: ±2 mm Depth: ±2 mm Side: ±1 mm
                                          It is recommended to install it on doors with a thickness between 12 and 18 mm, as a smaller or larger thickness could affect its correct functioning.
                                          The X12 supplement allows the height of the X12 hinge to be adjusted to correct the alignment of the door. It is particularly useful when the door is not perfectly aligned with the furniture after initial installation.
                                          This model is available in two versions: Height -2 mm (SKU 1270607): Reduces the hinge position by 2 mm. Height 0 mm (SKU 1270707): Maintains the standard position without changing the height.
                                          It is designed for use with X12 hinges that require a 26 mm diameter cup, ensuring accurate installation on wooden doors.
                                          It is fixed to the furniture with screws. The X12 hinge is mounted on the supplement, adjusting the desired height. It allows small corrections to be made to the alignment of the door without dismantling the entire hinge.
                                          It is made of steel with a nickel-plated finish, which provides high corrosion resistance and increased durability in kitchen, office and home furniture.
                                          The X12 Euro supplement is specifically designed for hinges with Euro system, which allows faster fastening by means of pre-installed screws and adjustment by means of eccentrics.
                                          Height -2 mm (SKU 1270807): Reduces the height of the hinge by 2 mm. Height 0 mm (SKU 1270907): Maintains the standard height without modification.
                                          This supplement is compatible with X12 hinges with Ø26 mm cup, used on wooden doors. Its adjustment system is ideal for hinges with Euro mounting, ensuring fast and accurate installation.
                                          It is attached to the furniture using the integrated screws. The hinge is mounted directly on the supplement and is adjusted by means of the eccentric adjustment. Its mounting system facilitates adjustments without the need to dismantle the hinge.
                                          It is constructed of steel with a nickel-plated finish, which provides high corrosion resistance and increased durability in kitchen, office and home furniture.
                                          The supplement is designed to support the standard X12 hinge load, allowing an even distribution of the door weight. However, the final strength will depend on the type of material it is installed in and the number of hinges used.
                                          This supplement is compatible with wooden doors between 12 and 18 mm thick, as it is specifically designed for use with Ø26 mm X12 cup hinges.
                                          The height of the supplement affects the positioning of the hinge and the alignment of the door: Height -2 mm: Allows adjustments to correct minor door misalignments. Height 0 mm: Maintains standard alignment with no change in hinge position.
                                          Not recommended, as it is specifically designed for the X12 hinge series with Ø26 mm cup. For compatibility with other hinges, it is best to consult the manufacturer's specifications.
                                          The supplement allows for three-dimensional adjustment, which facilitates perfect alignment of the door through height, side and depth adjustments when used with compatible hinges.
                                            The hinge is specifically designed for interior glass doors, providing a smooth and safe opening system.
                                            The hinge allows a maximum opening angle of 110°, offering a wide and comfortable opening.
                                            It is made of zamak, an alloy of aluminium, magnesium and copper, which gives it high strength, durability and the ability to withstand heavy weights.
                                            Installation is simple and only requires the use of screws and a screwdriver to press-fit to the inside of the door.
                                            The hinge is available in two finishes: bright chrome and matt chrome, both ideal for combining with different styles of furniture.
                                            This hinge is specifically designed for interior glass doors, providing secure installation and smooth opening.
                                            The maximum opening angle of the hinge is 110°, which allows a wide and comfortable opening.
                                            It is made of zamak, an alloy of aluminium, magnesium and copper, which gives it high strength, durability and the ability to withstand heavy weights.
                                            Installation is simple and only requires the use of screws and a screwdriver to press and fix it correctly on the inside of the door.
                                            The hinge is available in polished chrome and matt chrome finishes, allowing it to integrate with different styles of furniture and décor.
                                            The hinges are designed for glass doors with a thickness between 4 mm and 5 mm, ensuring a secure fit by means of a pressure screw.
                                            Installation is done by fixing the hinge in the centre of the cabinet and tightening the glass with the included grub screw. No drilling of the glass is required.
                                            They are made of zamak, a high-strength alloy, with a bright chrome finish for elegant aesthetics and durability.
                                            Yes, the kit includes a right hand hinge and a left hand hinge, ensuring a complete assembly for the glass door.
                                            No, this hinge model does not have a soft-close or damping system. It is recommended to use other accessories if this functionality is desired.
                                            It is not recommended for use on tempered glass, as this material does not allow drilling and the installation of these hinges requires prior drilling at the base of the furniture.
                                            These hinges are designed for lightweight glass doors from 4 to 6 mm thick, although the load capacity will depend on the size and weight of the glass used.
                                            Yes, their steel construction with a metallic grey finish makes them resistant to moisture, which makes them suitable for furniture in humid environments such as bathrooms.
                                            These hinges do not include a self-closing mechanism. If this function is required, it is necessary to supplement them with a damping or soft closing system.
                                            Yes, the hinges allow the door to be removed by loosening the grub screws, facilitating maintenance or replacement of the glass without the need to completely remove the hinge.
                                            The hinge has a size of 0.37 mm x 56 mm when assembled, which makes it ideal for furniture with small dimensions.
                                            The hinge allows a 3 mm adjustment, which facilitates installation in different material thicknesses without compromising the accuracy of the fit.
                                            It is made of zamak, an alloy of magnesium, aluminium and copper, which gives it high tensile strength and durability. In addition, its nickel-plated finish protects against corrosion and wear.
                                            Installation is simple and quick by screwing. The use of a precision screwdriver is recommended to ensure an optimum fit without damaging the furniture material.
                                            Yes, its design is optimised to provide a soft and secure closure, making it ideal for frequently used furniture, especially those that require delicate opening and closing.
                                            This hinge is specifically designed for glass doors with a thickness between 4 and 6 mm, providing a firm and stable hold.
                                            To install the bushing, it is necessary to drill a 9 mm hole in the base of the furniture where it will be placed. Then, the hinge is fixed by pressing the glass with screws, ensuring that it does not move.
                                            It is made of stainless steel with an aluminium painted finish, giving it greater resistance to corrosion and an aesthetically pleasing design.
                                            Each package contains 200 pieces, divided into 100 hinges for the right side and 100 for the left side.
                                            It does not require intensive maintenance, but it is recommended to clean periodically with a dry cloth or a specific metal cleaner to maintain its appearance and functionality.
                                              It is specifically designed for the installation of cup hinges and fastening hardware on furniture, providing precise and secure screwing into wood and wood-based materials.
                                              It has an extra fine pozidrive thread, which guarantees an excellent fixation without damaging the material, ideal for joints where a strong and precise fixation is required.
                                              The nickel-plated finish provides high resistance to rust and corrosion, ideal for installations in humid environments such as kitchens and bathrooms, prolonging the life of the hardware.
                                              The screw is available in 3.5 mm diameters with lengths of 16 mm or 19 mm, in packs of 1000 or 2000 units, facilitating its use in large volume projects.
                                              It is recommended that a compatible screwdriver or pozidrive tip is used to ensure accurate insertion and to prevent wear to the screw head during assembly.
                                              Compatible with all X91, X91N, X91R and X95 series hinges. For X92 and X92N hinges, it is only compatible with the straight hinge.
                                              Its main function is to improve the aesthetics of the hinge assembly, as well as to provide protection for the hinge and make it easier to clean.
                                              The installation is carried out by means of a clip system, which allows a quick installation without additional tools.
                                              It is made of high quality steel and is available in nickel-plated and titanium finishes, allowing it to be integrated into different styles of furniture.
                                              Yes, it is possible to request personalisation of the plate. For further details, it is recommended to consult the conditions with the supplier.
                                              It is compatible with X91, X91N, X91R, X92 and X92N hinges with a 35 mm diameter cup.
                                              Improves the aesthetics of the furniture, covering the hinge cup, and also protects the screws from dust and dirt accumulation.
                                              Installation is very simple: once the hinge is mounted, simply snap the plate onto the clip, without the need for additional tools.
                                              It is made of strong, durable steel and is available in two finishes: nickel-plated and titanium.
                                              Each package contains 400 pieces of the trim plate.
                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble a lifting piston.

                                                We have a table for calculating the weight of a door, which is necessary to know when choosing guy ropes and measurements. Depending on the material of the door, as well as its dimensions, the result will be the weight of the door (kg) that you can use to calculate to the necessary strength of the measure (Kg x cm).
                                                Download document
                                                A kilogram-force or kilopond, is the force exerted by 1 kg of mass by standard gravity on the earth's surface which is 9.80665 m / s2. 1 kp = 1 kgf = 1 kg × 9,80665 m / s² = 9,80665 (kg x m) /s² = 9,80665 N Therefore, kilogram-force or kilopond is what a mass of 1 kg weighs on the earth's surface. That is to say, a kilogram-force or kilopond amounts to 9.80665 N. We use the concept of kilogram-force to specify the characteristics of dampers or pistons in our catalogue, however it is necessary to bear in mind that there are times when you can use one concept or another.
                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Miniwinch system.

                                                The Miniwinch folding door system can be installed in both wooden and aluminium doors. You only need to consider that it needs a door with A+10 where A is the side thickness of the furniture. For example, if the side thickness of the furniture is 19 mm, the door will be fitted at 29 mm. If the aluminium profile is 45 mm wide, it can be fitted because it can go inside the profile. We can also use the Ankor hinge in this combination, because it can fit easily.
                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Microwinch system.

                                                The choice of a system for fold-down doors using a steel cable, like Microwinch or Miniwinch, depends on the height and weight of the door. To do so, you simply need to follow these simple steps:1. Check the height and the weight of the door. 2. Once you have obtained the values, look up the selection table. Depending on the weight of the door, you will be able to choose one fold-down system or another. Also, the table will indicate the number of systems needed for said door (x 1 or x2).
                                                The Microwinch folding door system can be installed in both wooden and aluminium doors. You only need to consider that it needs a door with A+13 where A is the side thickness of the furniture. For example, if the side thickness of the furniture is 19 mm, the door will be fitted at 32 mm. If the aluminium profile is 45 mm wide, it can be fitted because it can go inside the profile. We can also use the Ankor hinge in this combination, because it can fit easily.
                                                We have a table for calculating the pistons or dampners, where you can obtain a response with the furniture data. The choice will depend on the width and the height of the door, as well as the material it is manufactured out of, in addition to the stroke of the piston or damper itself. The result will be the number of pistons or dampners and the necessary strength of each one.
                                                Download document
                                                For the same force required in both folding and lift up doors, we recommend that you only use a single piston or damper in a door with a width of less than 450 mm, and that you use two pistons or dampers for a door that is wider than 450 mm.
                                                The choice of a system for Agile lifting doors depends on the height and the weight of the furniture door. To do so, you simply need to follow these simple steps: 1. Check the height and weight of the furniture door. 2. Once you have obtained the values you need to calculate the strength of the spring, S = H * (W + 2 * Wh), in terms of: H = Height of the door in mm. W = Weight of the door in kg. Wh = Weight of the handle in kg. You can choose the lifting system according to what interval the strength of spring S falls under. The LOW interval is between 580 and 1,250, MEDIUM between 960 and 2,040, HIGH between 1,800 and 3,500, and EXTRA HIGH 3,200 y 9,000. For example, we have a door with a height of 400 mm and a weight of 5 kg, with a handle that weighs 0.22 kg. The strength of the spring would be S = 400 * (5 + 2 * 0.22) = 2,176. Therefore, we would choose the HIGH strength range because it is in the interval of 1,800 to 3,500.
                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Agile system.

                                                The choice of a system for Agile One lifting doors depends on the height and the weight of the furniture door. To do so, you simply need to follow these simple steps: 1. Check the height and weight of the furniture door. 2. Once you have obtained the values you need to calculate the strength of the spring, S = H * (W + 2 * Wh), in terms of: H = Height of the door in mm. W = Weight of the door in kg. Wh = Weight of the handle in kg. You can choose the lifting system according to what interval the strength of spring S falls under. The MEDIUM interval is between 500 and 1,500, HIGH between 960 and 2,350. For example, we have a door with a height of 400 mm and a weight of 5 kg, with a handle that weighs 0.22 kg. The strength of the spring would be S = 200 * (5 + 2 * 0.22) = 1,088. Therefore, we would choose the HIGH strength range because it is in the interval of 960 and 2,350.
                                                The kit contains: 2 surface covers and 2 gear covers. This set ensures a complete and aesthetic installation for the mechanism.
                                                It is designed for surface mounting of the Uno mechanism, providing a clean and visible integration into the furniture design.
                                                Yes, the kit is compatible with all models of the Uno mechanism, ensuring a precise and functional fit.
                                                The covers are made of high-strength plastic, which provides durability, light weight and protection against shocks and impacts.
                                                No, the kit includes all the necessary components for assembly and can be easily installed with standard hand tools such as a screwdriver.
                                                The mechanism raises the surface 13,5 cm from the table.
                                                The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                The piston hitch is installed on the inside of the module, bolting it to the door frame to hold the opening piston securely.
                                                The nickel-plated finish provides increased corrosion and wear resistance, which prolongs the life of the coupling and maintains its aesthetic appearance.
                                                This latch is compatible with aluminium doors and wooden or aluminium PLUS 7-8-10 models, designed for piston opening systems.
                                                Its design provides precise piston adjustment, ensuring that the piston does not shift or run over time, improving the stability and functionality of the system.
                                                The packaging includes 100 units of piston clamps, recommended for projects requiring multiple fixing points on kitchen, bathroom or office furniture.
                                                Yes, it is compatible with pistons designed for wood and aluminium lift-up doors, specifically PLUS series models 4-11-14-15-16-17-18-19.
                                                This latch is designed for wooden and aluminium doors. For glass doors, it is recommended to use a specific model for that material.
                                                Yes, the coupling is fixed with screws on the inside of the cabinet module to ensure a firm hold of the piston.
                                                It is made of steel with a nickel-plated finish, which gives it high resistance to corrosion and greater durability in kitchen and bathroom furniture.
                                                Its main function is to serve as a fixing point for the piston, improving its stability and operation, but it is not designed to support the weight of the door on its own.
                                                This latch is designed to be screwed directly onto the inside of the module and is compatible with lifting pistons used on aluminium or wooden doors of the PLUS 7-8-10 series.
                                                It is optimised for aluminium doors with standard thicknesses, ensuring a firm, distortion-free fixation on thick profiles compatible with lifting piston systems.
                                                The hitch is designed to provide structural support and stability to the piston, allowing the use in furniture with vertical opening doors with pistons designed for loads depending on the model of piston used.
                                                The coupling has elongated holes to allow for precise installation adjustments. The use of standard diameter self-tapping screws is recommended for fixing to aluminium or wood.
                                                Made of nickel-plated steel, it offers high resistance to corrosion and wear. Its finish meets the corrosion protection standards used in the metal furniture industry.
                                                This hitch is designed to support pistons with a maximum load of 8 kg, ensuring stability and firmness in its installation.
                                                Yes, it is designed to be used with vertical and lift-up opening pistons, provided that they are fitted with a mounting system that is compatible with side latches.
                                                Installation is quick and easy, as no specialised tools are required. It is screwed directly onto the inside of the module, allowing for a stable fit.
                                                It is made of nickel-plated steel for corrosion resistance and durability, ideal for kitchen and office environments where moisture can be a critical factor.
                                                Its design is compact and unobtrusive, optimised for lateral screw mounting on aluminium or wooden surfaces. Its mounting format ensures that the piston is correctly aligned without unwanted movement.
                                                It is designed for use with NSDX compasses with drop absorption, providing a firm and stable hold on wooden hinged doors.
                                                It is installed on the inside of the module where the compass will be fixed, ensuring that the door is securely fastened without displacement or misalignment.
                                                It is made of nickel-plated steel, which ensures corrosion resistance, durability and secure mounting without deformation with continuous use.
                                                The use of screws is recommended to secure it firmly to the furniture structure, ensuring correct alignment with the NSDX compass.
                                                Each pack contains 20 pieces with nickel-plated finish.
                                                This coupling is designed for hinged or lift-up doors, where the piston is fixed to the side of the furniture to ensure correct operation.
                                                It is recommended to fix it with 3 mm diameter screws inside the module, thus ensuring a firm and stable fastening.
                                                It is made of nickel-plated steel, which provides corrosion resistance, durability and an attractive finish.
                                                Its function is to provide a firm support point for the piston on lift and folding doors, preventing it from moving or shifting in use.
                                                Each package contains 100 units of the coupling.
                                                The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                Yes, although the use of two devices provides greater stability when opening. In addition, it is recommended to use two lifting systems on doors over 1 metre wide.
                                                HOW TO CALCULATE THE MOUNTING:Add E+1 to calculate A and X, being E the thickness of the board.• For wooden and aluminium doors.• For overhangs other than 15 mm, calculate value A+15-overhang.• For doors wider than 450 mm the use of 2 springs is recommended.CALCULATING STRENGTH OF STAY:F: Force supported by piston in kg.P: Weight of door in kg.H: Height of door in mm.B: Fixing point of piston in mm.F = (P x H x 0,6) / BCALCULATING WEIGHT OF DOOR:P = Weight of the door in kg.H = Height of the door in cm.A = Width of the door in cm.e = Thickness of the door in cm.d = Density of door material.Particle board: d = 0,72 kg/dm3.MDF: d = 0,75 kg/dm3.Glass: d = 2,54 kg/dm3.P = (H x A x E x D) / 1000
                                                  The Revalock child safety lock for doors and drawers is ideal for preserving child safety, as it prevents children from being able to open furniture. Among other things, it is very useful for installing in caravans or boats, ensuring they are locked. Its installation and functioning is very simple, a magnet (key) deactivates the lock and makes it open. It is also possible to block it, so it stops working and it is not necessary to have a key to open it. This is very useful when it is no longer necessary.
                                                  The following video shows how you can easily install the the contemporary child safety lock, Revalock.

                                                  Yes, the Revalock safety locks have a template for the installation of each lock and an assembly instructions sheet for each packaging box.
                                                  It uses a magnetic system that allows the automatic lock to be activated or deactivated without the need for a visible lock, while maintaining the external aesthetics of the module.
                                                  The kit contains 1 lock and accessories for installation, packaged in a box of 25 units.
                                                  Assembly is very simple thanks to a guide sticker that marks the exact machining points and the position of the lock, facilitating installation.
                                                  It is made of white plastic and incorporates internal metal parts to ensure the reliability of the system.
                                                  To open the door, simply approach the magnetic key to the lock from the outside, allowing discreet and secure operation.
                                                  The key has an internal magnet that allows the magnetic locking system of the Revalock lock to be activated or deactivated from the outside of the dashboard, guaranteeing secure access without visible elements.
                                                  It is particularly suitable for locking systems on kitchen units or other furniture where access restriction is desired, as a child safety measure or to keep the contents out of unauthorised reach.
                                                  The key has a circular handle-like shape, which makes it easy to handle. It can also be conveniently stored out of reach of children to prevent unwanted access.
                                                  It is made of white plastic, which makes it light and easy to handle, suitable for frequent use without damage.
                                                  The product comes in packs of 25 units, ideal for multiple installations or replacement in furniture projects with Revalock locks.
                                                  The Revalock lock is designed to work on doors or drawer fronts with thicknesses between 13 mm and 40 mm, guaranteeing a solid anchorage and correct activation of the magnetic system from the outside.
                                                  This lock requires a calibrated magnetic key that exerts the necessary force to unlock the latch. The use of generic magnets is not recommended as they may not provide adequate attraction and may compromise the functionality of the system.
                                                  Yes, the key included in the kit can operate all Revalock system locks, making it easy to implement on multiple pieces of furniture without the need for duplicate keys.
                                                  Fixing is by means of screws included in the blister pack. Assembly is simple and does not require complex machining, although for precise alignment it is recommended to use the adhesive installation template provided in the kit.
                                                  Yes, the blister pack contains 2 locks, 1 magnetic key, mounting screws and adhesive marking template, allowing immediate installation without the need for additional components.
                                                  The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Push Lite lock.

                                                  It can be used with any Push magnetic closure. It can also be used as a door stop.
                                                  Screws with a maximum head of Ø5 mm are recommended for installation.
                                                  This magnetic lock has a holding force of 3.2 kg, ensuring that the door remains securely closed.
                                                  The magnet is screwed to the surface of the cabinet. The magnet is placed inside the cabinet and the metal plate on the door.
                                                  It is ideal for furniture with hinged doors in kitchens, bathrooms, wardrobes and other interior furniture where a secure and discreet closure is required.
                                                  It is made of steel and plastic with a white finish, which gives it strength and aesthetic integration into different types of furniture.
                                                  Yes, each lot includes 20 magnetic closures and 20 metal plates for installation.
                                                    Incorporating Emuca wardrobe accessories into your storage system allows you to enjoy superior organisation and improved accessibility. By keeping garments and accessories neatly organised, you save time and reduce the stress of searching for what you need. In addition, the high quality and attractive design of these accessories add a touch of sophistication to your wardrobe, enhancing not only its functionality but also its overall appearance.
                                                    The following video shows how you can easily install the Zero system.

                                                    The following video shows how you can easily install the Zero system.

                                                    The following video shows how you can easily install the Zero system.

                                                    The following video shows how you can easily install the Zero system.

                                                    The following video shows how you can easily install the Zero system.

                                                    The following video shows how you can easily install the Zero system.

                                                    I can use the Zero cable profile together with Zero cables and connectors to illuminate the shelves, using the lighting that best suits my design or I can backlight the structure by integrating the LED strips in the vertical profiles using the diffuser profile.
                                                    Structures fixed only to the wall with 4 anchors (2 Zero wall anchors per vertical profile) support less weight and it is not recommended to load them with more than 80 kg for a structure of 2 vertical profiles with 4 wall anchors. It is very important that the wall fastening is done properly according to the type of surface where the structure will be installed.
                                                    The profile has a rectangular section of 64 x 22 mm, which gives it high structural strength, allowing the assembly of shelves, cabinets or robust modular systems with a minimalist and professional aesthetic.
                                                    Thanks to its design and the Zero fixing system, the profile can support more than 100 kg per mounting point, provided it is installed correctly with the recommended accessories and brackets.
                                                    The profile can be easily cut to size with standard aluminium tools such as disc saws or miter saws. No special tools are required for assembly, as the Zero accessories allow assembly without the need for drilling or visible screws.
                                                    It can be used with wood panels, glass, melamine boards or metal rods, allowing it to be adapted to multiple configurations such as open wardrobes, dressing rooms, hanging areas or designer shelving.
                                                    The profile is available in stone grey (RAL 7048) and textured black (RAL 9005) painted finishes, both on aluminium. These finishes offer high scratch resistance and good integration with contemporary or technical furniture projects.
                                                    Each kit includes: 1 wall mounting, 1 leveller, 1 profile connector, 1 profile cover, Complete screws: 4 screws Ø4x30, 4 dowels Ø6x30, 4 screws Ø3.5x16
                                                    The leveller makes it possible to correct small deviations in level when mounting the profile from the ground, guaranteeing a perfectly vertical structure without the need for shims or external adjustments. It is essential for installations on uneven surfaces.
                                                    Requires direct fixing to wall and floor, using the included plugs and screws. Surfaces must be masonry, concrete or structural board, ensuring a firm fixing to support loads of up to 100 kg per module.
                                                    Yes, the kit components can be disassembled and reused, provided the zamak and anchor points have not been damaged. It is ideal for demountable structures or changing modular configurations.
                                                    The kit is designed for Zero rectangular profiles used in modular structures. It is compatible with textured black painted finish (RAL 9005), and integrates seamlessly with other elements of the Zero system.
                                                    This piece acts as an anchoring element between the structural profile and the wall, providing stability and structural strength to the entire installation. It is essential for vertical fixings or floor-wall combinations.
                                                    It is made of zamak with a textured painted finish (available in stone grey or black RAL 9005). The textured finish improves aesthetic integration and surface durability.
                                                    Includes 2 screws Ø4x30 and 2 plugs Ø6x30. Only a standard screwdriver is needed, as no special tools or additional adjustment systems are required. Installation is quick and straightforward.
                                                    When combined with the profile and the rest of the Zero system, it can support loads of more than 100 kg per module, provided it is correctly anchored to structural walls such as brick, concrete or reinforced technical board.
                                                    Yes, this part is fully compatible with floor-to-wall, wall-to-wall configurations or in combination with levellers. This allows it to adapt to multiple layouts and distribution needs without compromising the stability of the assembly.
                                                    This piece allows two or more Zero profiles to be connected in a firm and aligned manner, facilitating the creation of three-dimensional structures such as frames, corner pieces or "L", "T" or "U" configurations, without the need for welding or machining.
                                                    The connection is made by means of two Ø3.5x25 screws, which are inserted directly into the profiles. Only a standard screwdriver is required, without the need for specific tools or additional adjustments.
                                                    Yes, the piece is designed for the union of 2 or 3 profiles in modular configurations, which allows greater versatility in the design of structures for cupboards, shelving or room dividers.
                                                    It is made of zamak and available in stone grey (RAL 7048) and textured black (RAL 9005), which guarantees both structural strength and aesthetic integration with the Zero system profiles.
                                                    The part ensures a stable load transmission between profiles, maintaining the rigidity of the assembly and supporting the weight of shelves or hanging bars. It is ideal for installations requiring high load-bearing capacity and assembly precision.
                                                    The leveller compensates for unevenness of up to 10 mm in floor-to-ceiling installations, ensuring the verticality and stability of Zero structures. It is especially useful in installations without wall fixing or on uneven surfaces.
                                                    Yes, the leveller is designed for both floor and ceiling mounting, offering maximum versatility. Its adjustable base allows the final height of the profile to be adjusted without the need for cutting or shimming.
                                                    It is made of zamak (internal structure and screws) to guarantee mechanical resistance, and technical grey plastic to protect surfaces and facilitate adjustment. The felt prevents scratches on delicate floors.
                                                    The leveller not only allows for height adjustment, but also transmits loads correctly to the floor or ceiling, maintaining the Zero system's load capacity of over 100 kg per module, provided it is installed according to specifications.
                                                    The leveller offers a vertical adjustment range of up to 10 mm by means of an internal thread system. Fine adjustment is made with the included Allen key, allowing precise levelling without dismantling the structure.
                                                    The brackets are designed for wooden shelves that are integrated with the Zero profile. Although the boards are not included in the kit, they must fit the inside width of the Zero profile and be of a thickness that allows secure screwing (usually between 16 and 25 mm).
                                                    The kit allows the installation of 5 shelves and contains: 5 sets of brackets (10 units), 20 screws Ø3.5x16 mm, 20 cover caps, All the elements necessary for assembly are included, except for the boards and profiles.
                                                    Each bracket is screwed directly to the wooden shelf and mounted on the Zero structural profile. No adjustments or special tools are required: a screwdriver and precise measurement of the shelf level is all that is needed.
                                                    When installed correctly, each shelf can support more than 100 kg per module, in accordance with the strength of the Zero system, provided that suitable boards are used and the profile anchorage is secured.
                                                    This batch is available in stone grey painted (RAL 7048) and textured black painted (RAL 9005), matching perfectly with the Zero profiles in the same finish to maintain a uniform and professional aesthetic.
                                                    This kit is designed for mounting tempered glass shelves on Zero system profiles. The glass must have a suitable thickness and be machined or with polished edges, depending on the final design.
                                                    Each batch allows for the installation of 5 glass shelves and includes: 5 sets of metal brackets, 20 accessory covers for embellishment and safety. Glass shelves and Zero profiles are purchased separately.
                                                    The brackets are fitted directly onto the Zero profile without the need for adjustment tools. The design of the system allows fast, precise installation without drilling into the glass, thanks to an internal clamp.
                                                    Each shelf, correctly installed in the Zero system, can support more than 100 kg per module, provided that the glass has the appropriate thickness and treatment (recommended: tempered safety glass).
                                                    Available in stone grey (RAL 7048) and textured black (RAL 9005), both on zamak, the design and finish of these brackets ensure premium visual integration in domestic, commercial and contract environments.
                                                    This set allows a complete module (such as cabinets, drawer units or closed structures) to be attached to the Zero profile system, providing a strong and aesthetic connection without the need for additional drilling of the profiles.
                                                    Kit includes: 1 set of brackets (2 pieces), 4 screws Ø3.5x16 mm, 2 M6 screws, 4 cover caps. All the necessary elements for a quick and professional installation.
                                                    No, installation is carried out without special tools. The bracket can be adjusted without tools, allowing the module position to be precisely adjusted, even after the profile has been fixed.
                                                    It is compatible with modules made of wood, melamine or technical board, which are integrated into the modular structure of the Zero system. Ideal for base cabinets, drawer units or shelving with a closed body.
                                                    Available in stone grey (RAL 7048) and textured black (RAL 9005), the brackets are made of zamak with high mechanical strength, and their design with trim caps ensures discreet and elegant integration into high-end projects.
                                                    This kit is designed to install a Luxe type hanging bar on the Zero modular profile. It is fixed by means of a lateral support, with a top cover that ensures stability and aesthetics.
                                                    The kit includes: 2 hanging rod holders, 1 set of tube fittings, 1 set of cover caps. This allows a stable fixation of the bar at two points and a professional finish.
                                                    No, the system is designed to fit without special tools. Installation is carried out on the Zero profile and does not require drilling or dismantling of components, which speeds up assembly on site or in the workshop.
                                                    Combined with a Luxe rail and the correctly anchored Zero system, it can support loads of up to 100 kg per module, ideal for wardrobes, dressing rooms and contract furniture.
                                                    The brackets are available in stone grey (RAL 7048) and textured black (RAL 9005). Made of zamak, they combine robustness with an unobtrusive appearance, integrating perfectly into contemporary or minimalist design furniture.
                                                    This kit is designed to assemble 3 wooden shelves and 1 additional module, and includes: 3 sets of shelf supports, 1 set of module supports, 16 screws Ø3.5x16 mm, 16 cover caps, Assembly instructions. Profiles, boards and modules are not included.
                                                    Zero profiles and compatible wooden or module shelves must be purchased separately. The recommended profile codes are: 7023649 (stone grey), 7023749 (textured black).
                                                    Yes, the Zero system allows adjustment without tools or disassembly. The position of the shelves or module can be easily moved and repositioned, making it ideal for flexible or reconfigurable installations.
                                                    The kit is compatible with wooden or melamine shelves and modules, as long as they have the appropriate dimensions and machining to integrate with Zero profiles. The assembly is carried out directly on the profile without additional drilling.
                                                    It is available in stone grey (RAL 7048) and textured black (RAL 9005). Both finishes are designed to visually and functionally integrate with Zero profiles in the same colour, ensuring a consistent and professional aesthetic.
                                                    The included bar is 1 metre long, compatible with Zero system brackets. It is made of steel or aluminium, depending on system specifications, and is suitable for use with medium-high loads. The diameter or cross-section is optimised to fit the specific brackets without play.
                                                    This kit requires Zero profiles (part numbers 7023649 or 7023749) and the shelf and module boards, which are not included. The structural elements of the furniture must be adapted to the Zero anchoring system.
                                                    It allows for quick installation, with no adjustment tools or disassembly required, while maintaining the load capacity of the Zero system (over 100 kg per module) and offering configuration flexibility.
                                                    Ideal for creating mixed and matching compositions: Closed storage space (module) Open area with shelf Hanging area with metal rod Perfect for dressing rooms, wardrobe areas or modular design furniture.
                                                    Available in stone grey (RAL 7048) and textured black (RAL 9005), both on zamak, they integrate perfectly with the Zero profiles in the same finish to maintain a unified and professional aesthetic.
                                                    The included bar has a length of 1,003 mm, which allows exact compensation for the tension-free fitting between profiles. This measurement already provides for the necessary clearance to fit the brackets and to avoid friction or lateral pressure.
                                                    Each shelf, correctly installed, can support more than 100 kg per module, provided that the load is evenly distributed and the boards are of adequate thickness and density.
                                                    Fixing is carried out directly on the Zero profile using screws Ø3.5x16 mm, included in the kit. No special tools are required, and there is no need to drill the profile, which speeds up assembly and protects the structure.
                                                    Yes, the system allows readjustment without disassembly of the assembly. The brackets can be moved to another height or section within the profile, allowing a dynamic and adaptable configuration to design changes or end customer needs.
                                                    Although it is optimised for wooden boards or derivatives, it can also be adapted to melamine, compact or even metallised panels, provided that they allow secure screwing. The bar is compatible with standard hangers and can be integrated into mixed-use projects (textile + storage).
                                                    Its function is to close and conceal the end of the Zero profile, preventing the exposed face from being exposed and improving the visual finish of the assembly.
                                                    The plug is placed at the end of the Zero profile, ensuring a clean finish on open or visible structures.
                                                    It is made of plastic, which makes it easy to install and light and resistant for use in furniture structures.
                                                    It is available in black and stone grey, allowing it to be combined with Zero profiles in the same colour.
                                                    Each unit includes 1 cap. The packaging is available in packs of 20 units per batch.
                                                    This tool is designed for quick and easy height adjustment or disassembly of Zero system accessories.
                                                    It can be stored in the Zero profile itself, even in non-visible areas, so that it is always available without risk of loss.
                                                    It is made of black plastic and zinc-plated steel, which guarantees durability, lightness and resistance to frequent use.
                                                    No, the product stands out for its ease of use, ideal for professional installers and also for users looking for a specific Zero system tool.
                                                    Each batch contains 1 tool, and the packaging is available in packs of 8 pieces.
                                                    It is designed to backlight Zero profiles using LED strips, providing an even diffusion of light from the rear of the profile.
                                                    The profile is compatible with the Lynx LED strip, although neither the strip nor the connection accessories are included in the product.
                                                    The installation is frontally on the profile, specifically on the rear side, and can even be carried out after the structure has been assembled.
                                                    It has a length of 1.1 metres and is made of polycarbonate with a white finish, which favours light diffusion and aesthetic integration.
                                                    Each unit contains 1 diffuser profile. The packaging is available in batches of 20 units.
                                                    It is designed to locate and conceal the installation cables, facilitating a clean installation in the Zero system.
                                                    Installation is from the front on the profile at the rear. It can also be installed retrospectively, once the structure has been assembled.
                                                    The profile incorporates flexible tabs that allow the cables to pass through and at the same time prevent them from slipping out, without the need for additional fixings.
                                                    It is available in lengths of 1.1 metres and 2.9 metres.
                                                    It is made of plastic with a black finish, ensuring a discreet and robust installation within the Zero modular system.
                                                    Each cable is 500 mm long and uses a "Y" shaped connector, which allows multiple cables to be interconnected to feed multiple shelves.
                                                    The kit is compatible with LED lighting systems from 12V DC to 24V DC, with a total output of 48W/96W.
                                                    It includes a black heat-shrinkable profile, designed to conceal wiring in visible or exposed areas of the structure.
                                                    Yes, it is specifically intended to illuminate shelves or modules within the Zero modular system. It must be used with Lynx LED strips (not included).
                                                    They are made of plastic, which facilitates a safe and light installation within the modular system.
                                                    The kit includes: 2 x 900 mm profiles 4 profiles of 127 mm 3 sets of wooden shelf supports Fixing components, joints and 1 tool for adjusting accessories
                                                    The mounting is wall-mounted, with no need for tools to adjust or disassemble the accessories thanks to the tool included in the kit.
                                                    It is designed for wooden shelves with a depth of 330 mm, and allows a maximum height of 900 mm for the complete structure.
                                                    The structure offers a load capacity of up to 80 kg, guaranteeing stability in domestic or commercial applications.
                                                    The profiles are made of aluminium, the fittings of zamak, and the finish is textured stone grey (RAL 7048) or textured black (RAL 9005), depending on the variant chosen.
                                                    The kit allows the assembly of two structures with one independent opening each or a structure with three independent openings, combining Zero profiles with wall fixings.
                                                    Each structure supports up to 80 kg maximum load, thanks to the zamak joints and fixings.
                                                    The kit contains: 2 accessories for profile connection 2 wall fixing accessories 2 cover plates for vertical profiles Screws, dowels and an Allen key
                                                    No, Zero profiles and accessories such as shelf supports (wood, glass or bars) are purchased separately.
                                                    They are made of zamak with a textured stone grey (RAL 7048) or textured black painted finish, depending on the reference chosen.
                                                    It allows the Zero profile to be fixed to the floor and ceiling, and is used to form a continuous vertical structure in installations without wall fixing.
                                                    The leveller allows a height adjustment of 10 mm, which facilitates precise adjustment to the ceiling or floor.
                                                    It is made of zamak with a textured stone grey painted finish (RAL 7048) and grey plastic, providing robustness and uniform aesthetics.
                                                    Includes: 1 leveller 2 screws Ø4x30 2 plugs Ø6x30 1 cover 1 Allen key 1 circular felt for the base
                                                    It is ideal for free-standing Zero structures with floor-ceiling fixing, especially as room dividers in homes, offices or shops.
                                                    The profile has a length of 2.16 m and can be cut to size to fit the desired width of the shelf within the Zero system.
                                                    The bracket set ref. 7023149 is required for correct mounting of the profile as a shelf in the Zero modular structure.
                                                    According to UNE EN 16122:2013, the shelf can support a maximum weight of 120 kg, being 1.2 m the recommended length per shelf to reach this capacity.
                                                    Yes, the profile includes a cavity at the bottom designed to install an LED strip, allowing the shelf to be illuminated from below.
                                                    It is made of aluminium, with a textured stone grey (RAL 7048) or textured black painted finish, depending on the selected variant.
                                                    Includes: 2 profiles of 2,900 mm 4 rectangular levellers 4 cover caps 4 protective felts 8 dowels Ø6x30 mm Mounting screws 1 adjusting tool
                                                    It is designed for floor-to-ceiling fixing, with simple installation. Suitable for openings up to 3,010 mm ± 20 mm.
                                                    Each shelf or module can support more than 100 kg, making it ideal for robust, heavy-duty solutions.
                                                    No, the system allows the position of the shelves to be adjusted without dismantling any element and without special tools, thanks to its design and the adjustment tool included.
                                                    The profiles are made of aluminium and the fixing accessories are made of zamak. The finish is textured black RAL 9005, suitable for demanding and decorative environments.
                                                    The shelf is designed for mounting with a maximum gap of 1.081 metres between two Zero profiles, and its effective length is 1.07 m.
                                                    According to UNE EN 16122:2013, the shelf can support up to 100 kg of evenly distributed load.
                                                    Kit includes: 2 shelf profiles 1.07 m, 1 Lynx-W profile 1.07 m, 2 shelf supports, 2 ribs to form the shelf, 2 system locking brackets, 2 M4x12 screws, 8 aluminium threaded screws Ø3.5x19 black and 4 plastic caps.
                                                    Yes, it includes a Lynx-W profile ready to add an LED diffuser of the same size or can be used as a decorative cover if you do not wish to install lighting.
                                                    The kit includes system locking brackets that prevent the shelf from unintentionally moving up or down once installed.
                                                    The system allows a tilt adjustment of up to 120°, with 5 possible levels: 12°, 24°, 36°, 48° and 60°, in both directions.
                                                    The kit includes 2 shelf supports, 2 hooks, 4 wood screws Ø3,5x16 mm and 4 plastic caps.
                                                    No, the system is supplied without wooden shelf, only the mounting accessories are included.
                                                    The brackets are made of steel and zamak with a stone grey (RAL 7048) or textured black painted finish, depending on the model.
                                                    The tilt is adjusted by means of a knurled bolt included in the bracket, allowing the desired angle to be set precisely.
                                                    Yes, this system allows height adjustment along the entire length of the Zero profile thanks to the fixings integrated in the plates.
                                                    The fixings are made of steel and zamak, with a textured black painted finish (RAL 9005).
                                                    The kit includes 2 plates, 8 M4x12 mm screws and 4 plastic caps, ready for mounting on the Zero modular structure.
                                                    Yes, the system is valid for any Hang hanger width.
                                                    The Zero fixings included in the kit lock the system to prevent unwanted upward or downward movement.
                                                    The system is suitable for installation in openings up to 3,140 mm ± 20 mm when fixed directly between floor and ceiling.
                                                    Including 2 profiles of 2900 mm, 4 circular levellers, 4 cover caps, 4 protective felts, 8 dowels of Ø6 mm, 8 mounting screws and 1 adjusting tool.
                                                    The profiles are made of aluminium and the connection and support accessories are made of zamak, with a textured stone grey painted finish (RAL 7048).
                                                    No, installation is simple and requires no special tools or dismantling of height adjustment elements.
                                                    The Zero system with floor-ceiling fixing allows a load capacity of more than 100 kg per shelf/module, thanks to its reinforced lashing mechanism.
                                                    Each set contains: 1 wall mounting, 1 leveller, 1 profile connector, 1 profile cover, 4 screws Ø4×30, 4 dowels Ø6×30, 4 screws Ø3,5×16 and the necessary accessories for installation.
                                                    It is designed for the "L" assembly of the Zero modular system, fixing the profile to both the floor and the wall.
                                                    The components are made of zamak with a textured stone grey finish (RAL 7048) and grey plastic.
                                                    No, the Zero system is characterised by assembly without the need for special tools or disassembly of components.
                                                    The system can support more than 100 kg per shelf or module, increasing the clamping force as weight is added.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                      Yes, we recommend fully charging the battery of the Castor luminaire before installation. Although some batteries may be partially charged upon arrival, the charge will be minimal and simply for testing purposes. Therefore, a fully charged battery should be used for installation.
                                                      The Castor battery-powered light has a range of 700 lighting cycles per charge before the batteries run out.
                                                      The battery of the Castor light is recharged with a mobile charger. The charger needs to have a type B micro USB connector and should at least supply 5V DC. This battery is located on the side support with a cover, which must be taken off in order to recharge it. Likewise, it has an LED indicator that goes from red to green when charging is complete after an approximate period of 4 hours.
                                                      The battery has an LED indicator that goes from red to green when charging is complete after an approximate period of 4 hours.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                      The frame is designed for enclosures with an internal recess of 623 mm to 1075 mm, depending on the selected reference. The minimum depth required is 450 mm.
                                                      The clipping system facilitates installation without the need for complex tools. Screwing to the side of the enclosure is all that is required, which reduces assembly time.
                                                      Yes, the frame includes soft-close, partial-extension slides, ideal for smooth and quiet movement when opening or closing the cabinet accessory.
                                                      It is made of aluminium and plastic with a textured painted finish in black or stone grey, ensuring durability and a modern aesthetic.
                                                      Each package includes: 1 frame, 1 set of guides, 1 set of cover caps, 8 fixing screws Ø4x16 mm.
                                                      The use of the side spacer is necessary when the enclosure door coincides with the location of the frame and can collide with it, especially in enclosures with sliding or hinged doors.
                                                      A compatible screwdriver is required to install the Ø4x25 mm and Ø4x40 mm screws, according to the mounting specifications. No additional tools are required.
                                                      The spacer is 25 mm thick, which is the necessary distance to avoid collisions between the frame and the side of the enclosure.
                                                      This spacer is designed exclusively for the Hack pull-out frame, guaranteeing optimum compatibility with its slides.
                                                      Multiple spacers can be installed in a single enclosure if multiple Hack racks are used. Each package includes the components required for the installation of a single spacer.
                                                      The drawer is available in two heights: 482 mm (M60) and 782 mm (M90). These dimensions are suitable for module widths of 600 mm, 800 mm and 900 mm.
                                                      The drawer is easily installed using the 6 plastic parts included in the package, which ensure a firm and secure connection to the frame.
                                                      Yes, the wire drawer is designed to combine perfectly with the different Hack accessories, allowing you to create customised configurations for wardrobes and dressing rooms.
                                                      The drawer is made of painted steel, which gives it a high strength and load capacity suitable for clothing and accessories. The maximum capacity depends on the Hack frame with which it is installed.
                                                      Yes, the drawer is available in textured black and stone grey painted finishes, allowing you to choose the one that best suits the aesthetics of your wardrobe.
                                                      The shoe drawer is available in two heights: 482 mm (M60) and 782 mm (M90), compatible with 600 mm, 800 mm and 900 mm wide Hack modules, with a minimum depth of 450 mm.
                                                      The anchoring system is based on 6 high-strength plastic parts that secure the attachment to the frame by means of screws. This guarantees structural stability even under maximum loads.
                                                      The painted finish, either textured black or stone grey, is designed to resist abrasions and maintain its appearance under heavy use in residential and commercial applications.
                                                      It is made of powder-coated steel, which provides corrosion resistance and excellent mechanical behaviour against impact and deformation.
                                                      The modular design allows the drawer to be combined with different Hack accessories, adjusting the space configuration to optimise storage according to the size of the modules and the number of shoes.
                                                      The maximum recommended load for trouser rods depends on the type of installation and frame support, but they generally support up to 5 kg per rod without compromising stability or deformation.
                                                      Cabinet modules must have a Hack compatible frame, with internal dimensions suitable for the correct positioning of the rods, and ensure that the fixing surface is flat and strong.
                                                      Cutting or modifying the rods is not recommended as it may compromise their structural integrity and coating. In case of adjustments, it is preferable to use solutions custom-designed by the manufacturer.
                                                      Plastic end caps reduce noise by preventing direct contact of the metal with the frame and ensure a smooth glide during frequent use of the system, enhancing the user experience.
                                                      Yes, the rods are compatible with additional accessories such as Hack System organiser trays and other elements designed to optimise space in wardrobes and dressing rooms.
                                                      No, the organiser drawer does not include a damping system, but it can be installed in Hack racks with soft-close slides to minimise noise and shock when closing.
                                                      Yes, the design of the Hack frame makes it possible to combine the organiser drawer with other accessories, such as the trouser rack or wire basket, as long as the internal dimensions of the wardrobe module are respected.
                                                      The drawer is made of wood with a textile covering and, although it is resistant to moderate wear and tear, it is recommended to avoid sharp or abrasive objects that could damage the surface.
                                                      The texture of velvet requires careful maintenance. It is ideal to use a soft brush or lint roller to keep it clean and dust free.
                                                      The drawer can be installed in cabinet modules without doors, but to protect the contents and prevent dust accumulation, a closed module or a module with doors is recommended.
                                                      The auxiliary tray measures 396x120x146 mm, providing a compact but efficient space for storing small garments, accessories or similar items.
                                                      The tray is easily mounted on the Hack pull-out frame and is fully compatible with other accessories such as the trouser rods, shoe rack and organiser drawer, creating a versatile modular system.
                                                      It is made of plastic with a semi-transparent finish, making it resistant to moisture, easy to clean and suitable for use in a variety of locations, such as the bathroom or dressing room.
                                                      Yes, the tray can be used as a stand-alone item. It is ideal as a toy holder in children's rooms, an organiser in bathrooms or even for storing cleaning products.
                                                      The tray is designed to support the typical weight of lightweight garments and accessories. Its design optimises weight distribution, ensuring stability when attached to the Hack frame.
                                                      The Hack side shoe rack incorporates concealed slides with partial pull-out and soft close systems, providing a smooth glide and avoiding bumps when closing.
                                                      The trays can be adjusted in horizontal or 90° inclined positions. Adjustment is made by means of a simple clamping mechanism included with the trays.
                                                      It is available in left or right hand mounting versions. Installation varies according to the model selected, but both include a set of specific guides and screws to facilitate assembly.
                                                      The shoe rack is designed to support the typical weight of footwear stored on the three tilting trays. Its design optimises efficient organisation and access to footwear in confined spaces.
                                                      Made from steel with a textured painted finish, the Hack side shoe rack is resistant to moisture and wear and tear, ensuring long-lasting use in wardrobes and dressing rooms.
                                                      The tray dividers are attached to the base by means of a magnetic strip, allowing them to be positioned and adjusted securely and flexibly according to the user's needs.
                                                      The tray has a width of 483 mm (M60) and includes dividers designed to fit perfectly into the space available in 600, 800 and 900 mm Hack modules. This optimises storage by creating dedicated compartments.
                                                      The tray is built to support common wardrobe loads such as clothing and accessories. It is recommended to be installed on the Hack frame to ensure correct weight distribution and prolong its life.
                                                      The dividers can be arranged both vertically and horizontally thanks to their modular design and the magnetic strip on the base. This allows specific configurations for storing items such as shoes, accessories or folded clothes.
                                                      Manufactured from steel with a textured painted finish, the tray offers high resistance to moisture and wear and tear, making it ideal for heavy duty applications in walk-in wardrobes and cupboards.
                                                      The organiser basket has an ideal capacity for storing garments and objects. Its specific dimensions are 350x240 mm, optimised to fit Hack racks.
                                                      Yes, the organiser basket is compatible with trays and racks from the Hack system, allowing for versatile and functional integration into wardrobes and dressing rooms.
                                                      It is made of fabric with a grey textile effect finish, which gives it strength and an elegant design, suitable for everyday use in dressing rooms and wardrobes.
                                                      It is recommended to clean the basket with a damp cloth to preserve the grey textile finish. Do not machine wash or tumble dry to avoid damage to the material.
                                                      The folding design of the basket saves space when not in use, making it easy to transport and store without compromising its functionality.
                                                      The frame has an adjustment range for cabinet interiors of 560 to 594 mm in the M60 module and 760 to 794 mm in the M90 module, with a minimum cabinet depth of 450 mm.
                                                      The shoe rack offers enough space to organise several pairs of shoes, optimising the interior of the wardrobe and allowing combinations with other accessories from the Hack system.
                                                      The frame is made of aluminium and plastic with a painted finish, while the shoe rack is made of steel with a textured finish, guaranteeing strength and an elegant design.
                                                      The soft closing system integrated in the slides ensures a controlled and silent sliding, preventing knocks and increasing the lifespan of the shoe rack.
                                                      The kit includes all the necessary components: 1 frame with guides, 1 wire shoe rack and 8 screws (Ø4x16mm). No additional tools are required for installation, making assembly easier.
                                                      The adjustment range of the frame makes it possible to adapt to enclosure widths between 560 mm and 594 mm for the 600 mm module. Installation accuracy is ensured by using the included fixing screws and adjusting the frame to the available space according to the side guides.
                                                      The wire crate is designed to support a maximum load of 20 kg. The frame structure, made of aluminium and high-strength plastic, distributes the weight evenly and ensures optimum performance even with intensive use.
                                                      The finish of the drawer and frame has a textured painted coating that offers high resistance to corrosion and wear, ideal for wet environments or constant use. This treatment protects the materials from scratches and ensures durability.
                                                      The assembly of the frame slides is carried out by fixing them to the furniture using screws Ø4x16 mm included in the kit. The slides have a soft closing system that facilitates alignment during assembly and ensures smooth opening and closing.
                                                      The sliding and soft closing system complies with European furniture quality standards, ensuring a minimum durability of 60,000 opening and closing cycles. This guarantees efficient performance and reduces noise in daily use.
                                                      The kit's frame allows an adjustment range of 560 mm to 594 mm, ensuring compatibility with 600 mm enclosure modules.
                                                      The organiser drawer has a maximum load capacity of 20 kg. The frame distributes the weight evenly thanks to its aluminium and reinforced plastic construction, preventing deformation and ensuring stability.
                                                      The drawer and frame finishes are painted with a textured coating that provides high resistance to wear, scratches and corrosion, as well as offering an aesthetic design suitable for different environments.
                                                      The frame slides are fixed to the furniture using the Ø4x16 mm screws included in the kit. They incorporate a soft-close system that facilitates precise adjustment during installation and ensures smooth and silent movement.
                                                      The frame guides meet European quality standards to withstand 60,000 opening and closing cycles, ensuring long life and optimum performance in frequently used applications.
                                                      The kit frame is adjustable to fit enclosure modules with an internal width of 560 mm to 594 mm, ideal for standard 600 mm modules.
                                                      The tray is made of steel with textured finishes, while the frame combines aluminium and reinforced plastic. These materials guarantee high wear resistance, structural stability and modern aesthetics.
                                                      The tray includes steel dividers that attach magnetically to its base, allowing custom configurations for vertical or horizontal organisation of garments and accessories. This makes it easy to adapt to different storage needs.
                                                      The frame slides feature a soft closing system that provides smooth, quiet and safe movement, protecting the stored items and ensuring comfortable and long-lasting use.
                                                      The kit includes a frame, a metal tray with dividers, a set of guides and the screws necessary for assembly. Installation is simple and is carried out by fixing the rails to the inside of the cabinet with the screws supplied.
                                                      The frame is adjustable to fit enclosure modules with an internal width of 560 mm to 594 mm, complying with 600 mm module standards.
                                                      The rods are made of aluminium with high-quality plastic finials, while the frame combines aluminium and textured plastic, ensuring durability, lightness and resistance to wear and tear.
                                                      The stability of the trouser rods is ensured by a design that allows them to fit firmly into the frame, preventing displacement during use.
                                                      The soft-close guide system provides a smooth and quiet glide, protecting garments and improving the wearing experience by avoiding jerky movements.
                                                      The kit includes an adjustable frame, seven trouser rods, a set of runners and the necessary screws. Assembly is simple, as all that is required is to fix the slides to the inside of the wardrobe and adjust the frame to the desired width.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Luxe supports.

                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Luxe supports.

                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Luxe supports.

                                                      According to the ISO standard: 7170:2005 Emuca supports can take a maximum weight of 40 kg per metre evenly distributed.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Sling wardrobe lifts.

                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Moka accessories.

                                                      The gap between the side of the module and the frame / rails of the Moka closet or dressing room interior accessories is 9mm.
                                                      Yes, the high density ABS plastic base resists moisture and can be integrated with rubber anti-vibration bases or raised PVC bases, ideal for use in industrial kitchens or wet laboratories.
                                                      Yes, you simply need to respect the minimum installation depth of the Moka runners and carry out the assembly with the clips that are supplied.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Hang Moka wardrobe lifts.

                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the lateral pull-out tie rack.

                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the pull-out hanging rail Moka.

                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the pull-out mirror Moka.

                                                      The Moka mirror is assembled on the side of a unit and needs a minimum width of 225 mm in order for the mirror to be extractable and rotating.
                                                      Yes, this mirror has 45 mm guides with bearings and a trigger for detaching it. It also has free rotation up to 180º so you can position it comfortably. It is easy and quick to install, without mechanisms, simply by screwing it into the unit. To make it even easier, it comes with the screws required for assembly.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the pull out lateral shoe rack Moka.

                                                      Yes, the trouser holder is available in two models, for assembly on either the right hand side or left hand side of the wardrobe, and to that end there are different codes. This completes the range of furnishing and storage options for your wardrobe or dressing room.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the extractable shoe rack.

                                                      The RAL of the finish of the accessories for inside Moka wardrobes and dressing rooms is approximately 8019.
                                                      Yes, the Self trouser holder stands out for its ease of installation and because it can change sides easily. In order to change the position of the trouser holder it is only necessary to unscrew the central body and separate it from the runners in order to change side, and unscrew the cylindrical handle and put it on the other side. This trouser rail incorporates 37 mm full-extension ball bearing runners with a gentle sliding movement and a handle for pulling out of the furniture. Also, it has eleven chrome steel bars with non-slip rubbers for hanging trousers on.
                                                      According to the ISO: 7170:2005 standard, the bracket for circular hanging bars or round tubes can tolerate a maximum weight of 40 kg/metro uniformly spread out.
                                                      The finishes for these supports are RAL9006 for the aluminium colour and RAL8019 for the Moka colour.
                                                      The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish of the Sling is approximately 7005. The RAL code of the white finish of Sling is approximately 9003.
                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the pull out lateral shoe rack.

                                                      We would like to remind you that in the case of folding-door or hinged-door assembly, the hanger must go with the lateral supplement.
                                                      It is made of steel with a painted or anodised finish and high-strength plastic components, making it highly durable and resistant to corrosion in damp environments such as dressing rooms or bathroom cabinets.
                                                      No, the rods have a fixed arrangement, optimised for hanging trousers without slipping. However, their spacing allows other garments such as scarves or belts to be hung.
                                                      It does not include its own damping system, but is compatible with soft-close hinges on the cabinet, which can improve the user experience if the cabinet has such slides.
                                                      It is recommended to use Ø4 mm x 16 mm screws (included) and a Phillips screwdriver for installation in the base of the cabinet or side of the module.
                                                      A minimum depth of 500 mm is recommended to guarantee the correct extraction of the 450 mm offered by the mechanism.
                                                      It is designed to form a 90° angle in dressing room or wardrobe installations using Silk wardrobe rails.
                                                      It is made of plastic with a painted finish, which gives it lightness, strength and a modern aesthetic.
                                                      The mounting is made on the top of the bracket by means of an M6 screw, which is included in the kit.
                                                      It is specifically designed for Silk wardrobe rails, so compatibility with other systems is not guaranteed.
                                                      Each package contains 20 corner brackets and includes M6x40 mounting screws.
                                                      The bar is telescopic and adjustable in different models, with widths ranging from 450 mm to 1150 mm, depending on the selected reference.
                                                      The folding hanger can hold a maximum load of 12 kg, making it ideal for hanging clothes and other items in the wardrobe.
                                                      It is mounted on the side panels of the cabinet or cupboard. For cabinets with hinged doors, we recommend the use of the Hang side extension (codes 7085025, 7085107, 7085107 and 7085049).
                                                      It is made of steel and plastic, with finishes in chrome, mocha painted, black painted and stone grey painted, to adapt to different styles of wardrobes.
                                                      It has a soft damping system with automatic return, which makes it easy to access the higher areas of the cabinet without effort.
                                                      It is designed to provide additional support on wardrobe rails, preventing bending, but the overall capacity will depend on the rail used and the load distribution.
                                                      This bracket is specifically designed for rectangular Luxe bars, it is not compatible with round bars without additional adapters.
                                                      Yes, if the bar is long or further reinforcement is required, multiple brackets can be installed at the necessary attachment points.
                                                      For installations longer than 1 metre, it is recommended to install a central support every 50-60 cm to ensure stability.
                                                      The kit includes the M6x40 screw, but if installing on special surfaces (such as plaster or light boards), the use of reinforcement plugs (not included) is recommended.
                                                      The clamp is designed to fit standard wardrobe rails with a diameter of up to 17 mm thick in its clamping area.
                                                      No, the clamp has a snap-on design that allows it to be attached without the need for additional screws or adhesives.
                                                      Thanks to its double hook design and tight pressure, the clamp maintains a firm grip on the bar, preventing slippage. However, for heavy loads, it is recommended to distribute the weight using several clamps.
                                                      The bar can support up to 40 kg per metre, according to ISO:7170:205, provided that the weight is evenly distributed and suitable supports are used.
                                                      The use of Luxe brackets specifically designed for this bar is recommended, ensuring a stable and sturdy mounting.
                                                      The bar must be installed with compatible Luxe brackets, which can be screwed to the sides of the cabinet or to the internal structure of the cabinet.
                                                      The rod is available in 2.35 m and 3.90 m lengths. It has a rectangular cross-section, specifically designed for modern wardrobes.
                                                      Yes, the bar is compatible with the accessories of the Moka range, allowing for greater customisation and functionality in the cabinet.
                                                      It is recommended that the side panel be at least 16 mm thick to ensure a firm hold and to avoid deformation over time.
                                                      No, these brackets are designed for fixed installation. To adjust the height, it is necessary to define the correct position before mounting.
                                                      These brackets are specific for 30x15 mm section bars. For round bars, brackets designed for this profile must be used.
                                                      The assembly is embedded in the side of the furniture, which provides greater strength and stability to the structure.
                                                      Each lot contains 50 side brackets, ideal for multiple cabinet installations or large volume projects.
                                                      It is designed to support an approximate weight of 5-7 kg, depending on the material and thickness of the panel where it is installed.
                                                      When retracted, the hanger is 110.8 mm long and when fully extended, it is 168 mm long.
                                                      It is not recommended to install it on panels with a thickness of less than 16 mm, as it may not fit properly and may affect the stability of the hanger.
                                                      A 14.2 mm diameter hole is required to correctly fit the hanger into the side panel of the enclosure.
                                                      The basket has a height of 463 mm, a width of 355 mm and a depth of 457 mm, making it ideal for installation in cabinets.
                                                      It has 4 tabs at the top that allow it to be attached to a bracket or cabinet structure without the need for additional tools.
                                                      Delivered ready to use, no additional assembly required.
                                                      It is removable and has two side handles for easy handling and transport.
                                                      It has a steel frame with a mocha painted finish for durability, and the walls, floor and lid are made of heavy-duty white fabric, making it easier to clean and lighter in weight.
                                                      The dividers allow the hanger to be installed on the side of the wardrobe, ensuring that it is aligned and that the hangers have the necessary space to move unhindered.
                                                      They are easily installed by means of a click-and-lock system, without the need for additional tools.
                                                      They are made of durable plastic and are available in all Hang folding hanger finishes, such as anodised aluminium, mocha and black.
                                                      The spacers are designed to be installed in standard cabinet sides with standard thicknesses, typically between 16 mm and 19 mm.
                                                      No, the spacers do not alter the load capacity of the hanger, as their function is only alignment and lateral fixation.
                                                      The frame is adjustable and can be adapted to an internal cabinet gap between 564 mm and 614 mm, allowing for flexibility in installation.
                                                      It incorporates concealed full-extension slides with soft closing, which allows a smooth and silent sliding, avoiding abrupt knocks when closing.
                                                      A minimum cabinet depth of 480 mm is required to ensure optimum installation and operation of the shoe rack.
                                                      No, the automatic clipping system allows for quick and easy installation without the need for additional tools.
                                                      Yes, the concealed full-extension slides allow easy access to the entire contents of the shoe rack without the need to bend down or force it out.
                                                      It is made of steel with welded wire and has a mocha coloured painted finish, ensuring durability, strength and an aesthetic design compatible with modern cabinets.
                                                      It is mounted by means of the tabs on its four corners, which allow it to be easily anchored to any compatible bracket in the cabinet.
                                                      It is available in three sizes according to width: 475 mm, 675 mm and 775 mm. The drawer height is 173 mm and the sides measure 454 mm each.
                                                      The frame incorporates concealed full-extension runners with a soft-close system that prevents sudden shocks when closing the basket.
                                                      Yes, the frame is adjustable in width, allowing it to be adapted to an internal cabinet gap of 564 to 614 mm.
                                                      Installation requires a minimum cabinet depth of 480 mm.
                                                      The frame is bolted to the sides of the cabinet and features an automatic clipping system for easy installation of the basket.
                                                      Yes, it can be combined with other storage systems and accessories for wardrobes, such as shoe racks or pull-out hangers from the same line.
                                                      It is installed by recessed mounting on the side of the cabinet, ensuring a firm hold.
                                                      It is recommended to install it on side panels at least 16 mm thick to ensure stability and strength.
                                                      The slide frame can be adapted to the internal cabinet recesses between 564 and 614 mm, allowing flexible installation according to the dimensions of the cabinet.
                                                      No, the soft closing with cushioning ensures a smooth and controlled movement, avoiding sudden bumps when closing the drawer.
                                                      It is recommended to install on boards of 16 mm or more to ensure a firm fixation and to avoid deformation.
                                                      The frame is installed by means of an automatic clipping system, which makes it easy to assemble and disassemble without the need for additional tools.
                                                      The jewellery drawer is made of wood with interior compartments, while the slide frame is made of mocha painted aluminium, guaranteeing strength and durability.
                                                      The bar is compatible with Ø28mm brackets, ensuring a firm and stable fit for installation.
                                                      According to ISO: 7170:205, the bar and supports can carry up to 40 kg per metre of evenly distributed load.
                                                      No, the bar is supplied without additional accessories. Compatible brackets and screws must be purchased separately.
                                                      Available finishes include Titanium (RAL 7049), Black (RAL 9011), Matt Anodised and Moka (RAL 8019), each designed to match different styles of furniture.
                                                      Yes, although it is primarily designed for residential furniture, its load capacity and strength allow it to be used in shops, fitting rooms and commercial storage as long as the load limits and distances between supports are respected.
                                                      This bracket is made of high-strength zamak, which allows it to withstand loads of up to 40 kg/m, provided that the bar and side supports are correctly installed.
                                                      M5x38 mm screws are included for fixing to the top. It is recommended to ensure that the mounting surface can withstand the distributed load.
                                                      It is specifically designed for Ø28mm round bars, regardless of whether they are made of aluminium, steel or similar materials of the same size.
                                                      The bracket must be fixed to the top of the enclosure with the screws supplied and ensure that the rod is correctly aligned and fitted into the central bracket to avoid displacement.
                                                      Yes, the design of the central bracket allows for a secure and removable attachment, making it easy to replace or adjust the bar if necessary.
                                                      A minimum internal width of 700 mm is recommended for optimum installation and to ensure correct movement of the pull-out system.
                                                      It incorporates full extension guides with ball bearings, designed for smooth movement.
                                                      The 9 rods per side are fixed and are equipped with plastic anti-slip stops to prevent the trousers from slipping.
                                                      It is not adjustable in width. It has fixed dimensions of 665 mm width and 470 mm depth, so compatibility with the enclosure should be checked before installation.
                                                      It is made of chrome-plated steel with wire rods, which guarantees durability and withstands daily use without deformation.
                                                      This bar is compatible with specific side and central brackets for 30x15 mm oval bars, ensuring a correct fixing in the cabinet.
                                                      According to ISO: 7170:205, the bar can support up to 40 kg per metre with the load evenly distributed.
                                                      The bar is fixed using specific lateral or central brackets for 30x15 mm bars. It is recommended to install it with sturdy screws to ensure stability.
                                                      Yes, it is suitable for built-in wardrobes and dressing rooms, provided that suitable brackets are used and a firm installation on the sides of the furniture is ensured.
                                                      An internal recess of 564-614 mm width and a minimum depth of 480 mm is required for proper installation.
                                                      The frame is screwed to the sides of the cabinet. Its concealed, full-extension, soft-close runners make it easy to move the drawer.
                                                      Yes, the frame is adjustable in width, allowing it to be adapted to the space available inside the cabinet.
                                                      No, this kit is designed to work with its own adjustable slide frame and automatic clipping system, so it is not interchangeable with other standard slides.
                                                      The soft closing system avoids abrupt shocks when closing the drawer, as the slides have an absorption mechanism that slows down the closing in the last centimetres.
                                                      The frame is fixed to the sides of the cabinet with screws. The slides include an automatic clipping system that facilitates installation and allows easy removal if necessary.
                                                      It is compatible with enclosures with an internal opening of 564-614 mm wide and a minimum depth of 480 mm.
                                                      The rods are fixed and are designed to hold trousers securely, preventing them from slipping or falling.
                                                      The rods are made of steel with a mocha painted finish, while the frame is made of painted aluminium to ensure strength and durability.
                                                      Yes, the slides are fully extractable and soft-close, which avoids sudden shocks and prolongs the life of the mechanism.
                                                      No, this bracket is specifically designed for Ø28mm bars and is not compatible with different diameters.
                                                      The bracket is screwed to the side of the furniture, and the plastic part is snapped in place, preventing it from being easily removed.
                                                      To calculate the exact size of the bar, subtract 6 mm from the size of the gap between the side supports.
                                                      It is recommended to use Ø3.5mm wood screws for a secure and stable fixing.
                                                      It is made of zamak and plastic to ensure strength and a firm hold on the bar.
                                                      It is compatible with 30x15mm section bars, so it is not recommended for use with bars of other dimensions.
                                                      The bracket is mounted into the side of the cabinet, ensuring a firm and stable hold.
                                                      It is made of zamak, a material offering high mechanical strength and durability, with a nickel-plated or aluminium painted finish.
                                                      No, the packaging only includes the side bracket, so the screws must be purchased separately.
                                                      Yes, it is suitable for wooden furniture and can be installed on metal structures with the appropriate screws.
                                                      They allow the Sling hanger to be installed on the side of the wardrobe, ensuring that the hanger is tilted forwards and optimising space for hangers.
                                                      They are fixed to the bottom of the wardrobe as a hanger stop. No complex tools are required for mounting.
                                                      They are made of sturdy plastic and are available in all the finishes of the Sling hanger.
                                                      Each package contains 1 set of spacers, sufficient for one installation.
                                                      Installation is done by screwing the bracket to the side of the cabinet.
                                                      It is made of zamak with a nickel-plated finish, which makes it highly resistant and durable.
                                                      There is no mention of screws being included, so it is recommended that screws suitable for the wood or installation surface be used.
                                                      Each package contains 1 side support. There are also options to buy in batches of 500 units.
                                                      It is screwed to the top of the enclosure using an M6 screw.
                                                      The gap between the side of the module and the frame / rails of the Hack interior cabinet or walk-in closet accessories is a minimum of 20mm.
                                                      It is made of zamak with a nickel-plated or painted aluminium finish, which guarantees strength and durability.
                                                      Each lot contains 10 central brackets for wardrobe rails.
                                                      No, the bracket is specifically designed for 30x15 mm oval bars, so it is not compatible with round bars or other dimensions.
                                                      A minimum depth of 250 mm is recommended, ensuring that the bar does not interfere with interior storage.
                                                      No, this bracket is designed for screw mounting on wood, MDF or melamine. For metal surfaces, specific fixings would be required.
                                                      Yes, it is recommended that the bracket be pre-milled to a depth of 3 mm to ensure that the bracket is correctly embedded in the side surface of the enclosure.
                                                      The rods are made of aluminium, with high-strength plastic ends for durability and safety.
                                                      Each rod is 459 mm long from end to end.
                                                      Yes, the rods can be used together with hanging clips for additional garments.
                                                      Yes, the mocha finish RAL 8019 is designed to match other cabinet accessories.
                                                      The lot includes 7 trouser rods ready for installation.
                                                      It is compatible with Silk rectangular rods designed for cabinets.
                                                      It is made of high-strength plastic, with a black painted or aluminium finish.
                                                      It is mounted on the top of the enclosure by means of an M6 screw, which is included in the packaging.
                                                      Each package contains 20 brackets with mounting screws.
                                                      An M6x40 mm screw is included, designed to secure the top fixing of the bracket.
                                                      It has a height of 65 mm and a depth of 456 mm at the sides. Available in three widths: 483 mm, 683 mm and 783 mm.
                                                      483 mm: 11 compartments. 683 mm: 16 compartments. 783 mm: 19 compartments.
                                                      Made of high quality wood with a walnut finish, providing strength and elegance.
                                                      Yes, the drawer can be installed on slide systems compatible with Moka cabinets, making it easy to pull out and access.
                                                      No, the drawer comes ready to install easily, with no additional assembly required.
                                                      It is made of welded stainless steel, which guarantees high strength and durability. It has a mocha RAL 8019 painted finish, ideal for combining with wooden furniture.
                                                      The wire crate is designed to withstand a uniform load of up to 15 kg, depending on the type of support and installation system used.
                                                      Its design incorporates 4 tabs (one on each corner) for easy attachment to compatible brackets in the enclosure.
                                                      Each package includes 2 units ready for use.
                                                      Yes, provided the cabinet has adequate internal space for the drawer size (475 mm, 675 mm or 775 mm wide and 201 mm high). It is also compatible with standard cabinet structures with flange fixing systems.
                                                      It uses ball bearing slides with smooth and silent sliding, allowing it to be easily removed.
                                                      The mirror surface is 1000 mm x 340 mm and the module requires a minimum depth of 380 mm for installation.
                                                      Yes, the mirror is reversible and can be installed on either the right or left side of the cabinet.
                                                      It can pivot up to 180° on its stand to adjust its position comfortably.
                                                      No, the assembly is simple and without machining. It is simply screwed to the furniture with the included screws.
                                                      It has a height of 50 mm, a length of 455 mm and a width of 99 mm.
                                                      It is made of strong plastic for flexibility and durability, with a mocha painted aluminium frame.
                                                      The tray includes flanges at the ends for better attachment to any overhead cabinet brackets.
                                                      Not completely. Delivered ready to install, but requires assembly of some minor parts.
                                                      It is compatible with overhead cabinet brackets and is designed to integrate with interior cabinet organiser systems.
                                                      To obtain the correct rod length, subtract 11 mm from the enclosure or module opening dimension.
                                                      They are made of sturdy plastic with a painted finish in aluminium, mocha or textured black.
                                                      It is compatible exclusively with Luxe rectangular rods for wardrobes.
                                                      No, the kit does not include cover caps, but the design of the bracket minimises the visibility of the screws after installation.
                                                      The load capacity depends on the bar used and the fixing, but in general it is recommended not to exceed 40 kg/m, according to ISO 7170:205.
                                                      These spacers are designed to fit multiple pull-out cabinet systems, thanks to their design with 13 holes of different diameters that allow for versatile fixing.
                                                      Depending on the installation position, the spacer adds between 22.7 mm and 25 mm in height, helping to level or adjust the pull-out system inside the enclosure.
                                                      They are made of ultra-light and resistant plastic, with a moka RAL 8019 finish, which makes them durable and able to support the weight of the removable mechanisms without deformation.
                                                      It is recommended to use wood or metal threaded screws with a diameter of 3.5 mm to 4 mm, depending on the type of furniture and the pull-out to which they are attached.
                                                      Its function is to adjust the position and height of pull-out systems in cabinets, ensuring correct operation and avoiding friction or misalignment with other parts of the furniture.
                                                      This frame can support up to 30 kg of weight, ensuring a smooth and crevice-free glide.
                                                      The frame is available in 11 height options, ranging from 564 mm to 1114 mm. The minimum cabinet depth must be 480 mm.
                                                      It uses full-extension slides with soft closing, which ensures quiet sliding and avoids sudden shocks when closing.
                                                      It is made of plastic and aluminium, which provides strength, lightness and an elegant mocha-coloured finish that matches different styles of furniture.
                                                      It is delivered completely disassembled, but with all components and screws included, ready for quick and easy installation.
                                                      It is available in three widths: 475 mm, 675 mm and 775 mm. The height is 124 mm and the depth is 452 mm.
                                                      It is made of steel painted in moka colour, which guarantees resistance to knocks and falls, as well as combining with wooden furniture.
                                                      The drawer includes ventilation slits in its structure, allowing air circulation and preventing the accumulation of humidity in the garments.
                                                      It is delivered unassembled, with all the components and screws necessary for its installation.
                                                      Yes, it is compatible with slide systems for full or partial extraction, depending on the configuration of the enclosure.
                                                      It is compatible with Luxe rectangular wardrobe rails, allowing installation at a 90° angle.
                                                      It is made of zamak and available in titanium, textured black painted, aluminium painted and mocha painted finishes.
                                                      The mounting is done at the top with an M6 screw, which is included in the package.
                                                      Each unit includes 1 angle bracket and the necessary mounting screws.
                                                      The hanger has a maximum load capacity of 12 kg, which allows several garments to be hung without affecting its function.
                                                      Its width is adjustable from 600 mm to 830 mm, allowing it to be adapted to different cabinet sizes.
                                                      Yes, it can be installed either on the side wall of the wardrobe or on the back wall, depending on the configuration of the wardrobe or dressing room.
                                                      The hanger incorporates a damped return system, providing a smooth and controlled movement when lowering and raising.
                                                      The product comes complete with all screws and hardware required for mounting, making it easy to install without the need for additional accessories.
                                                      Installation requires a minimum internal cabinet depth of 430 mm to ensure full gliding of the system without interference.
                                                      This accessory is designed to support the usual weight of several clothes hangers, thanks to its aluminium structure. It is recommended not to exceed a distributed load of 12-15 kg in order to preserve the proper functioning of the extraction system.
                                                      The hanger is supplied with self-tapping screws suitable for melamine or wood boards. Mounting is carried out laterally to the sides of the cabinet, using 4 screws per unit.
                                                      Yes, although it is designed for wardrobe interiors, it can also be installed in open structures or walk-in closets without doors as long as the minimum required depth is respected.
                                                      No, the hanger has a fixed length of 350 mm. For narrower modules, it is recommended to check the available space beforehand or consult specific models with adjustable measurements.
                                                      The useful internal width of the module must be between 564 and 594 mm, and the minimum cabinet depth must be 480 mm.
                                                      The frame includes concealed full-extension slides with soft-close and self-clipping system, allowing for quick installation without additional tools.
                                                      Yes, the frame has an adjustment system that allows it to be adapted to different sizes within the specified range (564-594 mm).
                                                      The shoe drawer and frame are made of mocha-coloured painted aluminium, which guarantees an elegant look for wardrobe interiors.
                                                      It is designed to store everyday footwear, thanks to its ventilated base and open structure that facilitates ventilation.
                                                      It is designed for side mounting in wardrobes or dressing rooms, specifically for left-handed use. It is fixed to the inside side of the module by means of the included screws.
                                                      It includes concealed full-extension slides with soft close, allowing for a smooth and quiet glide, ideal for high standard environments such as premium walk-in closets or bespoke furniture.
                                                      Yes, its compact design allows it to be installed in standard cabinet side modules, maximising vertical space and improving storage capacity.
                                                      Currently the kit includes the 4 necessary trays and there is no indication of separate sales. For large installations or customisations, it is recommended to contact the technical service or sales department.
                                                      The cabinet must have a minimum usable depth of 460 mm to allow the rack with trays to slide in completely.
                                                      Installation requires a minimum usable depth of 445 mm, equivalent to the length of the hanger, to ensure complete sliding and correct functioning of the guide system.
                                                      The hanger is designed to be screwed directly to the sides of the module. It includes the necessary screws and does not require additional fasteners.
                                                      Yes, the hanger integrates full-extension slides with soft closing, allowing a smooth and silent movement, with no bumps when closing.
                                                      Yes, the compact and symmetrical design makes it compatible with standard and customised modules, as long as they comply with the minimum depth. It is ideal for both built-in wardrobes and open-plan dressing rooms.
                                                      The hanger is delivered pre-assembled and only needs to be screwed to the module. It includes all necessary screws for quick and secure installation.
                                                      The recommended minimum installation depth is 445 mm, which ensures optimal operation of the full extraction system.
                                                      It is made of aluminium and high quality plastic with a mocha painted finish, which makes it resistant to daily friction, structurally light and durable for intensive use in walk-in wardrobes or fitted wardrobes.
                                                      This accessory features full pull-out runners and soft closing, ensuring smooth, quiet and vibration-free sliding even when loaded.
                                                      Yes, the tie rack is delivered with all the necessary screws. The system is ready to install directly, without the need for prior machining of the module.
                                                      Yes, it is designed to integrate aesthetically with products from the Moka line (such as pull-out hangers and shoe racks), maintaining visual coherence in terms of finishes and dimensions.
                                                      The mirror measures 1130 mm high x 440 mm wide. A minimum depth of 70 mm is required on the side of the enclosure to accommodate the ball bearing slides correctly and allow them to be removed without interference.
                                                      Yes, the anchoring system is reversible, so the mirror can be installed on either the left or right side of the cabinet, optimising access according to the layout of the furniture.
                                                      Yes, the mirror base has two integrated auxiliary trays for small items such as jewellery, watches or accessories, adding to the functionality of the system.
                                                      Yes, the ball bearing slides allow complete extraction, leaving the mirror fully accessible and visible outside the enclosure, with the possibility of turning on its support axis for a more comfortable adjustment in daily use.
                                                      A minimum internal depth of 460 mm is recommended to allow the trouser holder to be fully extracted and to ensure optimal operation without interference.
                                                      No. The folding system has been designed with reinforced anchorage points, ensuring high durability and resistance to intensive use in domestic or contract environments.
                                                      The symmetrical design allows installation on either the left or right side of the enclosure, using self-tapping screws for panel mounting.
                                                      No. The folding system has been designed with reinforced anchorage points, ensuring high durability and resistance to intensive use in domestic or contract environments.
                                                      This model incorporates a folding arm system with a rotating axle, which allows for easy and effortless removal and folding.
                                                      The shoe rack can be fixed directly to one side of the wardrobe or between two sides. It can also be installed at the back or side, depending on the design of the module.
                                                      It is made of chrome-plated steel and plastic with a metallic grey finish. This combination guarantees structural strength, durability in daily use and modern aesthetics.
                                                      Yes, the kit includes all the screws necessary for fixing in the various mounting configurations (side or side-to-side).
                                                      The module must have a minimum depth of 302 mm and an inside width according to the selected hanger length (available in 300, 350, 400 and 450 mm).
                                                      This hanger is equipped with ball bearing slides that allow a smooth and long-lasting pull-out, facilitating full access to the hangers in the wardrobe without friction or blockage.
                                                      Installation is by lateral screwing on the inside sides of the enclosure. Screws are included in the packaging for quick and safe installation.
                                                      This model has 11 tie hooks and 5 belt hooks, allowing tidy and accessible storage in tight spaces.
                                                      The system is installed on the side of the enclosure module by means of screws and does not require special templates or prior machining.
                                                      Yes, but a minimum usable depth of at least 430 mm is recommended to ensure complete and convenient removal of the attachment.
                                                      The Self tie rack incorporates concealed, smooth-gliding metal slides, which allow smooth and silent opening, facilitating access to the contents.
                                                      It is made of steel with chrome-plated finish and aluminium painted plastic, which guarantees a strong, light and durable structure for daily use.
                                                      The trouser rack is equipped with full-extension ball bearing slides, which provide a smooth and quiet glide. Supports up to 10 kg load.
                                                      Yes, its design is reversible: it can be installed on either the right or left side of the unit, facilitating its integration into any wardrobe or dressing room configuration.
                                                      The elastic bands prevent the trousers from slipping off accidentally, providing a secure hold without damaging the fabrics.
                                                      The product includes standard mounting hardware. No specialised tools are required: it is screwed directly to the side of the furniture.
                                                      It is made of high-quality steel and available in four finishes: chrome, titanium, painted black and stone grey. All offer high resistance to daily wear and tear.
                                                      The system has an adjustable telescopic rod that allows it to be adjusted to interior widths of between 450 and 1150 mm, depending on the reference chosen. This makes it compatible with multiple cabinet configurations.
                                                      It is easily installed by screwing it onto the side panels of the module or cabinet. Mounting hardware is included and does not require specialised tools.
                                                      The Sling folding hanger is designed to support up to 12 kg of static load, thanks to its reinforced metal structure and cushioned return system.
                                                      It is available in chrome, white or titanium finish. In addition, each unit includes cover caps to hide the fixing screws and improve the interior aesthetics of the enclosure.
                                                      Yes, the Sling hanger incorporates a cushioned return system that provides a smooth and controlled descent, avoiding knocks or sudden movements that could damage the furniture or its contents.
                                                      A minimum internal depth of 480 mm is recommended to ensure that the shoe rack can be pulled out completely and comfortably without interference with the wardrobe door.
                                                      Yes, the design allows for an indistinct installation on both sides of the cabinet, which optimises the versatility of the product according to the distribution of the interior space.
                                                      The shoe rack is screwed directly to the side of the module using the screws provided. The instructions detail the anchoring points and the use of precision tools is recommended for secure fastening.
                                                      It is made of steel with an aluminium painted finish and high quality plastic components, which guarantees a strong, light and durable structure, ideal for frequent use in wardrobe and dressing room furniture.
                                                      Yes, it is fully compatible with other pull-out accessories from Emuca's Keeper or Self range, such as trouser racks, hangers or tie racks, facilitating the creation of modular dressing room solutions.
                                                      The tie rack can hold up to 30 ties, but is not designed to support heavy garments. To ensure its durability, it is recommended that it is not overloaded beyond its intended use for lightweight accessories.
                                                      The design allows for installation on either the right or left side of the module, making it versatile to suit different interior configurations.
                                                      The system is fixed by means of self-tapping screws included.
                                                      A minimum depth of 450 mm is recommended, allowing the accessory to be fully extracted without interference or blockage from the rear of the enclosure.
                                                      The aluminium is treated with a matt anodised finish, which provides a soft touch, greater durability and a modern aesthetic in keeping with high-end furniture.
                                                      Yes, it is fully compatible with other Self accessories such as the trouser rack, mirror or pull-out hanger. They all have the same design line and standard depth for joint use.
                                                      To ensure optimal functioning of the full-extension slides, the module must have a minimum depth of 800 mm.
                                                      Installation is carried out using the screws provided. It is fixed laterally to the furniture boards, which should have a recommended minimum thickness of 16 mm for secure fastening.
                                                      The hanger includes full-extension metal runners, with a useful stroke of 650 mm, allowing the bar to be fully extracted for easy access to garments.
                                                      This hanger is designed for a medium load. It supports approximately 8 to 10 hangers with clothes, ensuring smooth movement without compromising the durability of the runners.
                                                      It is necessary to use the supplement when installing the hinged hanger in cabinets with hinged doors, as it compensates for the thickness of the hinges to ensure correct alignment and operation of the hanger.
                                                      One supplement is required on each side of the hanger. In total, two units per cabinet are required for a symmetrical and functional installation.
                                                      Installation is by direct bolting to the side panel of the enclosure. The kit includes all necessary screws for fast and secure mounting.
                                                      Yes, the side extension is available in titanium, aluminium painted and white finishes, so it can be aesthetically combined with the different models of Sling folding hangers.
                                                      It is made of high-strength plastic with a painted finish, which guarantees lightness, durability and resistance to daily wear and tear, ideal for intensive use in wardrobes and dressing rooms.
                                                      These brackets are designed for 30x15 mm cross-section bars, offering a precise and stable fit inside the enclosure.
                                                      To obtain the cutting length of the bar, subtract 7 mm from the overall dimension of the internal enclosure opening, which ensures correct mounting between the two brackets.
                                                      Yes, the set includes M6x40 screws specifically for top mounting, ensuring a solid and secure fixing.
                                                      Yes, the kit incorporates a left and a right hand bracket, allowing the installation of a complete bar with support at both ends.
                                                      The system can be installed in two ways: Side, by means of Ø3.5 mm wood threaded screw. Top, with M6 screw, for more robust fixings. Both methods are contemplated according to the design of the module and the needs of the project.
                                                      The system is specifically designed for cabinet rails with a rectangular cross-section of 30x15 mm, which ensures compatibility with the Silk product line. This section ensures the necessary rigidity to withstand daily use and the indicated load.
                                                      According to ISO: 7170:2005, each rod installed with its respective brackets can support up to 40 kg/metre evenly distributed. This capacity makes it ideal for heavy duty cabinets in home or contract projects.
                                                      The side brackets allow two installation configurations: screwed to the sides of the module with a Ø3.5mm wood screw or top mounted with an M6 screw, adapting to different cabinet designs.
                                                      The set includes 2 tubes, 4 side brackets, 2 centre brackets and mounting hardware. The brackets are fitted with coextruded PVC non-slip rubbers to improve the grip of the hangers and prevent them from slipping.
                                                      Each bar can support up to 40 kg per linear metre, with the load evenly distributed, according to ISO 7170:205. To guarantee this resistance, the supports must be installed correctly on stable and reinforced surfaces.
                                                      The brackets are designed for direct lateral attachment using standard hardware.
                                                      Yes, although the kit includes only lateral supports, it is possible to add central supports compatible with 30x15 mm profile to reinforce installations with greater length or concentrated load.
                                                      The bars are made of steel with a highly corrosion-resistant chrome-plated finish. The included side brackets are made of zamak with nickel-plated finish, which provides excellent mechanical and aesthetic performance.
                                                      The complete system complies with ISO 7170:205, supporting up to 40 kg per linear metre with the load evenly distributed.
                                                      Each bar has an oval cross-section of 30x15 mm and is available in three lengths: 0.75 m, 0.95 m and 1.15 m.
                                                      The included side brackets are designed for screw fixing (not included) and are fitted directly to the side panels of the enclosure. The bracket design provides a firm and secure hold of the bar, allowing quick and accurate mounting in professional environments.
                                                      Yes, the brackets are designed to be installed on chipboard, MDF or solid wood, provided that they have a minimum thickness that allows secure fastening with screws. It is recommended to use screws suitable for each type of material to ensure proper fastening.
                                                      The brackets are fastened with M5x38 mm screws (included in the kit) and are compatible with boards from 16 to 30 mm thick, ensuring safe and versatile installation in cabinets made of MDF, chipboard or solid wood.
                                                      Each bar and its supports can withstand a maximum load of 40 kg/metre evenly distributed, in accordance with the international standard ISO 7170:205, offering maximum reliability for professional furniture.
                                                      Both kits include 2 aluminium bars of 28 mm diameter, but the 1150 mm kit incorporates 2 additional central supports that reinforce the structure, ideal for installations that require greater stability and payload.
                                                      The bars are made of painted aluminium (mocha, black or matt anodised), a light and easy-to-machine material. The brackets are made of zamak, guaranteeing durability, rigidity and excellent mechanical behaviour.
                                                      This system is available in mocha painted, black painted, titanium painted and matt anodised finishes, allowing its aesthetic integration in contemporary or customised design cabinets. Its chromatic variety makes it easy to combine with other metal components or furniture fittings.
                                                      These brackets are specifically designed for rectangular Luxe bars. For a perfect fit, subtract 10 mm from the centre-to-centre distance of the brackets to calculate the exact length of the bar, ensuring a secure, backlash-free fit.
                                                      Fixing is by means of an M6x40 screw at the top, which provides a robust fixing. The screws are included in the kit, facilitating direct installation in structures prepared for M6 threads.
                                                      Luxe brackets are available in Titanium, Textured Black, Stone Grey, Aluminium and Moka finishes, allowing them to be aesthetically integrated into custom projects and contemporary or premium design cabinets.
                                                      To ensure precise assembly, 3 mm must be subtracted from the interaxis dimension of the brackets when cutting the bar. This tolerance ensures that the bar fits without tension or play, optimising its durability and functionality.
                                                      The kit includes M5x38 mm screws, suitable for top installation in boards with sufficient thickness to thread or fasten anchors. Recommended for installation in materials such as MDF, chipboard or wood at least 16 mm thick.
                                                      They are designed for lateral fixing (left and right) and are suitable for standard bar lengths (up to 1.15 m). For longer spans or intensive use, it is recommended to combine with compatible centre brackets to avoid bending of the bar.
                                                      The brackets are available in Titanium, Black, Aluminium and Moka finishes, allowing them to be aesthetically integrated with other hardware and metal elements of the furniture. They are ideal for projects where design and functionality must be aligned.
                                                      These brackets are designed exclusively for Ø28 mm round bars. The use of bars with a different diameter (e. G. Ø25 or Ø30 mm) may cause play, misalignment or impossibility of installation, affecting both the safety and the aesthetics of the assembly.
                                                      The Silk wardrobe rail can support up to 40 kg per linear metre, with evenly distributed load, in accordance with ISO: 7170:205, making it suitable for heavy duty applications in wardrobes and dressing rooms.
                                                      The bar incorporates a semi-rigid PVC rubber top, designed to reduce the noise of the hangers when hanging and moving them, improving the user experience and protecting both the hangers and the profile surface.
                                                      It is designed to be combined with Emuca's Keeper or Self support systems, allowing for functional and aesthetic integration into custom-designed modular wardrobe or dressing room projects.
                                                      It is available in two finishes: black painted and matt anodised. Both offer wear and corrosion resistance, but the anodised finish provides greater protection against wet environments or high traffic applications.
                                                      The Silk bar has a rectangular profile with rounded edges, ideal for stable attachment of hangers and modern aesthetics. This design also allows for a larger contact surface with accessories and improves structural rigidity.
                                                      The central support provides an intermediate structural reinforcement, preventing bending or deformation of the bar in installations longer than 1 metre. It is especially recommended when a high load or intensive use is foreseen.
                                                      It is fixed to the top of the enclosure by means of an M6 screw. This type of thread provides a robust and secure fastening, ideal for professional or high-end furniture.
                                                      Yes, the bracket is specifically designed for 30x15 mm oval section bars, and is compatible with all models of this size, regardless of their finish or length.
                                                      It is made of zamak with an aluminium painted finish, which guarantees excellent mechanical resistance, durability and aesthetic finish. It is ideal for projects that demand technical and visual quality in all components of the enclosure.
                                                      Installation is carried out on the side of the cabinet module using screws included in the kit. The system uses ball bearing slides to facilitate partial sliding of the trouser rack and ensure a robust and durable installation.
                                                      The left or right hand side refers to the side of the cabinet where the trouser rack is fixed. It is important to select the correct version according to the cabinet layout, as the system is not reversible once assembled.
                                                      Its construction with chrome-plated steel rods and metal ball guides makes it suitable for frequent use and medium loads, typical in high-end residential environments or contract projects.
                                                      The integrated rubbers on each rod prevent the trousers from slipping or falling down when opening or closing the system, offering greater stability and protection for delicate garments or slippery materials.
                                                      It is not designed for adjustments after installation. To ensure an optimal result, it is recommended to mark and check the alignment before final screwing, especially when combined with other enclosure interior accessories.
                                                      This bracket is specifically designed for cabinet rails with an oval cross-section of 30x15 mm, ensuring a precise and secure fit without the need for adapters.
                                                      The bracket is mounted recessed in the side panel of the cabinet, requiring a customised cavity to be milled or drilled. This type of mounting ensures clean aesthetics and excellent structural strength.
                                                      Yes, it can be combined with specific central supports for 30x15 mm bars in long or high load installations. This allows alignment to be maintained and prevents excessive bending of the bar over 1000 mm.
                                                      The hanger is attached using two concealed screws included in the kit. It is easily installed with a standard screwdriver, without the need for special tools or additional anchoring systems.
                                                      It is made of high quality hypoallergenic rubber, which makes it resistant to moisture, scratches and daily use. This material is ideal for installations in children's environments due to its safety and durability.
                                                      Can be installed on plasterboard, wood, chipboard or painted surfaces, provided that the appropriate plugs and screws are used. Not recommended for soft or non-structural surfaces without reinforcement.
                                                      Yes, in addition to the black painted finish, it is also available in blue, which allows it to adapt to different styles of decoration in children's bedrooms or play areas.
                                                      Each hanger is installed by means of two visible screws included in the delivery. Installation is carried out with a conventional screwdriver, without the need for special tools, and is suitable for walls made of wood, plaster or technical boards.
                                                      They are made of high-strength aluminium, which gives them excellent resistance to corrosion, lightness and durability in wet areas such as bathrooms or laundry rooms. In addition, their black painted finish guarantees high resistance to scratching.
                                                      Yes, in addition to the black painted finish, it is also available in a matt anodised finish, which allows it to be integrated into more neutral or technical decorative styles, such as office or contract furniture.
                                                      Yes, its compact size and simple fixing make it compatible with modular structures or pre-drilled boards, which are widely used in modular wardrobes, walk-in wardrobes or vertical storage systems.
                                                      The set includes 7 wall hangers and the necessary installation screws for mounting. Supplied as a complete set, ready to install.
                                                      The kit includes screws Ø 4.5x40 mm and plugs Ø 5x30 mm, suitable for quick and safe installation on suitable surfaces.
                                                      The hanger is made of zamak, a resistant and easy to clean material, ideal for home applications such as bathrooms, bedrooms or wardrobes.
                                                      This model is available in chrome and black painted finish, allowing it to adapt to different styles of interior decoration.
                                                      It is designed to be adaptable to any room in the home, such as bedrooms, bathrooms or wardrobes, helping to save space by being wall-mounted.
                                                      The product is supplied with 1 wall hanger and the screws required for installation.
                                                      This model includes 3 coat racks integrated in a single piece, ideal for organising coats or accessories in different areas of the home.
                                                      It is made of steel, a hard-wearing and easy-to-clean material, suitable for both domestic and public environments.
                                                      The Hamilton hanger is available in black paint and satin nickel, allowing it to be adapted to different interior styles.
                                                      It can be installed in bedrooms, bathrooms, wardrobes or common areas of the home. It is also suitable for public spaces such as offices, libraries or restaurants.
                                                      Includes 2 x 1150 mm tubes, 4 side brackets, 2 central brackets and the screws required for installation.
                                                      It is mounted on the top of the cabinet with the included M6x40 mm screws, which fix the side brackets.
                                                      According to ISO: 7170:205, the bars can support up to 40 kg per linear metre with evenly distributed load.
                                                      The bars are available in 750 mm and 1150 mm lengths. Each tube is fitted with a co-extruded PVC rubber which reduces noise when hanging and moving the hangers.
                                                      The tubes and supports are made of aluminium and plastic, with a painted finish in stone grey (RAL 7048) or textured black, depending on the model.
                                                      It depends on several factors, but the goal is to achieve a balance between capacity, proper drape of the trousers, and ease of use when pulling out the trouser rack. Below are the most suitable recommended dimensions:

                                                      • Height: recommended 950mm, minimum 600mm, ideal between 800 and 1,000mm.
                                                      • Width: recommended 600mm, minimum 450mm, ideal between 600 and 800mm.
                                                      • Depth: recommended 500mm, minimum 500mm, ideal between 450 and 750mm.
                                                      The trouser rods are designed solely as a support element, so they are not fixed to the frame. It is important to note that if you try to remove only the trousers, the rod will move and may become displaced, as it is not securely fixed. For correct use, it is recommended to:

                                                      • Remove the rod together with the trousers.
                                                      • Separate the trousers from the rod.
                                                      • Place the rod back into the frame.
                                                      The minimum cabinet depth required to install the hanger is 455 mm.
                                                      The minimum cabinet depth required to install the tie rack is 436 mm.
                                                      Quartz products have an approximate RAL colour of 7039.
                                                        The shelf support for a gap slot of 32 mm has two through holes, which enable access through a screw and a manual tool. This makes it possible to fasten the board if that is required, especially in assemblies with very wide continuous shelves.
                                                        Yes, the structure must be fixed to the wall in all cases to avoid it tipping over.
                                                        They are made of white painted steel, which provides great resistance, durability and a neutral aesthetic to adapt to different environments.
                                                        They must be screwed to the wall using the pre-drilled fixing points. The brackets are then easily slotted into the profile grooves.
                                                        They are compatible with single slotted shelf brackets with 50 mm pitch, designed to support wooden or glass shelves.
                                                        They are ideal for wardrobes, dressing rooms, laundry rooms, offices and shops, where a modular and adjustable shelving system is required.
                                                        It is recommended to use 6 mm diameter screws with dowels suitable for the type of wall to ensure a secure fixing.
                                                        They are available in three lengths: 951 mm, 2064 mm and 2229 mm.
                                                        They are made of steel with a white painted finish, which guarantees resistance and neutral aesthetics for different applications.
                                                        These are double slotted rack profiles with a 32 mm pitch, designed for use with Jagmet shelf brackets to allow the installation of wooden or glass shelves.
                                                        Each batch contains 10 profiles ready for installation.
                                                        They are ideal for wardrobes, dressing rooms, pantries and laundry rooms, allowing the creation of modular shelves with height adjustment.
                                                        Each bracket can support up to 27 kg, provided it is properly installed on a firm wall and combined with compatible rack profiles.
                                                        They are compatible with Jagmet's 32 mm pitch double groove profile, widely used in modular adjustable shelving installations.
                                                        Each lot includes 20 shelf brackets, making it easy to source for multiple installations or large commercial or residential furniture projects.
                                                        The brackets have a height of 52 mm and a straight design that allows installation at 90° to the profile, ensuring perpendicular support of the shelf and preventing slippage.
                                                        They are designed to be used exclusively with Jagmet single groove 50 mm pitch profiles.
                                                        They are compatible with both wooden and glass shelves, as long as the shelf depth is 200 mm.
                                                        The maximum load per pair is 40 kg, ensuring a robust structure for intensive storage applications.
                                                        They must be fixed to vertical profiles mounted on the wall. Recommended for use on solid surfaces such as chipboard, melamine or masonry walls for a firm hold.
                                                        The finish is white painted, which provides a clean finish ideal for interior applications such as dressing rooms, kitchens or laundry areas.
                                                        This kit allows the installation of 3 wooden shelves, using the included bracket sets.
                                                        Each 230 mm long bracket can support up to 27 kg per shelf, providing a robust structure for domestic or professional use.
                                                        All the elements of the kit are made of steel with a white painted finish, which makes them highly resistant and durable.
                                                        The system is designed to be fixed to the wall using the screws and plugs included. The 1 m profiles have a single groove, compatible with other Jagmet accessories to extend the composition.
                                                        The kit includes: 2 profiles, 1 metre long 3 sets of 230 mm brackets (right and left) 12 screws Ø4,5x60 mm 12 dowels Ø6x35 mm for wall fixing
                                                        This lot is designed to install four wooden shelves, by using the included bracket sets.
                                                        The 230 mm long brackets can hold a load of up to 27 kg per shelf, provided that the fasteners supplied are used.
                                                        The wall mounting is made by means of metal plates that allow a safe and direct installation. No profiles are included, but separate plates for each support point.
                                                        All components are made of white lacquered steel, which offers high mechanical strength and clean aesthetics for interiors of wardrobes, dressing rooms or storage areas.
                                                        This kit includes: 8 fixing plates 4 sets of 230 mm brackets (right and left) 32 screws Ø4,2x32 mm 32 wall plugs Ø6x30 mm for wall mounting
                                                        It is compatible with Jagmet rack profiles: Single groove with 50 mm pitch Double groove with 32 mm pitch
                                                        Each basket measures 789 x 354 x 116 mm, giving a capacity of approximately 32 litres per unit.
                                                        All components are made of white lacquered steel, which gives the system high strength and a uniform aesthetic finish for interior furnishings.
                                                        This kit is designed to create shelves with removable wire baskets, ideal for inside wardrobes, dressing rooms, laundry rooms or pantries.
                                                        The set contains: 2 removable wire baskets 2 sets of brackets (one for each basket, with left and right brackets)
                                                        The set contains: 2 removable wire baskets 2 sets of brackets (one for each basket, with left and right brackets)
                                                        It is compatible with Jagmet rack profiles: Single groove with 50 mm pitch Double groove with 32 mm pitch
                                                        Each basket measures 789 x 354 x 116 mm, giving a capacity of approximately 32 litres per unit.
                                                        All components are made of white lacquered steel, which gives the system high strength and a uniform aesthetic finish for interior furnishings.
                                                        This kit is designed to create shelves with removable wire baskets, ideal for inside wardrobes, dressing rooms, laundry rooms or pantries.
                                                        Each bar supports a maximum load of 10 kg, according to product specifications.
                                                        Each bar has dimensions of Ø27 x 815 mm, which makes it suitable for interior cabinet spaces.
                                                        It is compatible with Jagmet wire baskets and their shelf supports, integrating as part of the same modular system.
                                                        The components are made of white lacquered steel, offering high resistance and uniform aesthetics for the interior of wardrobes, dressing rooms or pantries.
                                                        The kit contains: 2 x 815 mm bars 2 sets of brackets (right and left) 2 sets of end caps
                                                        Each hanger measures 321 mm in length in extended position, allowing several hangers to be hung without interfering with each other.
                                                        It is suitable for space-saving areas such as walk-in wardrobes, wardrobes or laundry rooms, where a temporary, collapsible storage solution is needed.
                                                        Including 4 screws Ø4.8x42 mm and plugs Ø8x40 mm, suitable for fixing to solid walls such as brick, concrete or solid partition walls.
                                                        Installation is carried out using the screws and plugs included. No additional accessories are required, and it is fixed directly to the wall.
                                                        The design includes holes for inserting the hangers, which allows the hanger to be swung towards the wall without the hangers sliding or falling off during movement.
                                                          The Rhodes cabinet handle has a length of 2.3 metres, suitable for large cabinet doors.
                                                          The Rhodes handle is made from aluminium with a black painted or matt anodised finish, ensuring durability and a modern design.
                                                          Yes, the Rhodes handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically on 18 to 20 mm thick boards.
                                                          To install the Rhodes handle it is necessary to pre-machine 25x7 mm to embed the handle into the edge of the panel.
                                                          Yes, the handle includes the screws necessary for its assembly, facilitating installation in furniture.
                                                          The following video shows how the Even truss is assembled.

                                                          It is adjusted by means of a lever mechanism in the centre of the tensioner, allowing the tension to be adjusted to one side or the other for precise alignment.
                                                          Yes, small holes must be drilled to fix the ends of the turnbuckle to the door and frame cover.
                                                          Yes, the packaging contains the complete tensioner, fixing parts and adjustment mechanism for easy and precise installation.
                                                          Thanks to its lever adjustment system in the centre, it allows the door to be tensioned to one side or the other until the desired alignment is achieved.
                                                          Yes, it is compatible with different door thicknesses as long as they are from the Even series, as the brackets allow it to be fixed without compromising the structure.
                                                          It is compatible with 19 to 20 mm thick doors.
                                                          The profile is fixed by means of a 3.7 mm centre groove, which makes it easy to mount and align on the door.
                                                          The profile has a width of 47 mm in the vertical part and 25.7 mm in the horizontal part, which allows an aesthetic and functional integration into the furniture design.
                                                          Yes, it can be combined with other accessories and profiles from the Free range to achieve a uniform and functional wardrobe design.
                                                          No, the packaging includes only the profiles.
                                                          This profile reinforces the door structure, preventing deformation and maintaining alignment, especially on large doors.
                                                          It is designed for doors with an exact thickness of 16 mm, ensuring a precise and secure fit.
                                                          It is primarily designed for hinged doors, but can be adapted to sliding doors if the structure allows it and the thickness is 16 mm.
                                                          Yes, as it is made of steel, it provides greater structural resistance, avoiding deformation of the door and absorbing impacts better.
                                                          It is designed for 18 mm thick cabinet doors, ensuring a proper fit without additional modifications.
                                                          No additional accessories are included in the packaging. Installation is carried out without additional assembly, but may require fasteners depending on the enclosure structure.
                                                          It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which provides corrosion resistance, light weight and durability.
                                                          Its main function is to prevent dust and dirt from entering sliding doors, as well as to improve insulation and reduce noise when the door is closed.
                                                          It is easy to install thanks to its built-in adhesive tape. Simply clean the door surface thoroughly, remove the adhesive protection and press the profile firmly into position.
                                                          Yes, the material can be easily cut with suitable tools to the exact length of the sliding door.
                                                          It is available in three different heights: 7 mm, 9 mm and 17 mm, with three lengths: 125 m, 300 m and 400 m, allowing it to be adapted to different sliding door systems.
                                                          It is made of durable plastic with a grey painted finish and fabric with a 4 mm nozzle. Its design ensures durability and resistance to wear and tear from frequent use.
                                                          It is compatible with sliding doors of furniture and wardrobes, helping to prevent the entry of dust and dirt.
                                                          Installation is simple, as the adhesive is included in the base. Simply cut to the desired length with scissors and attach to a clean, dry surface.
                                                          It is available in 7 mm, 9 mm and 17 mm. The choice depends on the space between the door and the frame where the weatherstripping is to be installed.
                                                          Yes, it can be cut to length without affecting its performance. The material is flexible and can be adapted to different lengths.
                                                          Yes, the Even tensioner can be cut at both ends to achieve the desired size.
                                                          No, once removed, the adhesive loses its effectiveness. If reinstallation is required, it is recommended to replace it with a new one.
                                                          It is designed for board thicknesses greater than 15 mm and it is advisable to mount 2 tensioners per door when the width is greater than 600 mm.

                                                          This profile is 47 mm high, with a 20.4 mm horizontal part without a flange and a 25.7 mm flange on the other horizontal part.
                                                          It is compatible with panels or glass between 19 mm and 20 mm thick.
                                                          It should be cut to the required size and fixed to the cabinet structure, ensuring that the flange and the horizontal part fit correctly into the door.
                                                          It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which gives it strength and an elegant finish.
                                                          It is available in 2.35 metres and 2.7 metres in length.
                                                          The Free Rapid handle profile is compatible with door thicknesses between 19 mm and 20 mm for an optimum fit.
                                                          No, the profile is supplied without accessories. It is recommended to purchase screws and fasteners according to the type of door and the desired installation system.
                                                          The profile is fitted to the edge of the door and secured with adhesives or concealed screws depending on the preferred mounting system.
                                                          Yes, it has a 25.7 mm horizontal flange, which facilitates installation and improves the stability of the profile on the door.
                                                          Yes, it can be installed on doors using soft closing hinges, as its design does not interfere with the damping mechanism.
                                                          It is made of matt anodised aluminium, giving it corrosion resistance and a high quality aesthetic finish.
                                                          It is 2.35 metres long, with dimensions of 7.5 mm vertically and 5.5 mm horizontally.
                                                          It is designed for edge finishes on cupboard and furniture tops, providing an aesthetic finish and a better grip.
                                                          Thanks to its T-shape and central flange, the profile is pressed into the material, ensuring a firm installation.
                                                          Each package includes 25 pieces of 2.35 metre long Face T-profiles.
                                                          It is 47 mm high and 43 mm wide. The square handle area measures 10 mm high x 18.6 mm wide.
                                                          It is compatible with doors from 19 mm to 20 mm thick.
                                                          No, it is only necessary to make a straight cut in the aluminium profile, without additional machining.
                                                          Available in 2.35 m and 2.9 m bars.
                                                          It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which gives it an elegant and durable finish.
                                                          It is available in three lengths: 175 mm, 225 mm and 375 mm, with different heights of 5 mm, 7 mm and 9 mm depending on the model.
                                                          It is press-fitted into the sliding door profile, thanks to its C-shaped design, which allows for a secure fit.
                                                          The profile is 1.3 mm thick overall, except for the nozzle, which is 4 mm wide by 1 mm thick.
                                                          It is ideal for sliding wardrobe doors, providing an airtight seal to keep out dust.
                                                          It has a length of 2,355 mm, with a cross-section of 20 mm high and 19 mm wide.
                                                          It is made of stainless steel, with a painted aluminium finish that mimics anodising for a sleek appearance and durability.
                                                          It is compatible with doors with a minimum thickness of 16 mm.
                                                          It is held in place by a 15 mm vertical flange, with a Ø6.5 mm hole in the 20 mm longitudinal section to facilitate mounting.
                                                          Supplied in kits of 10 units, ready for installation.
                                                          The door or drawer must have a total thickness of 18 mm for the profile to fit correctly and securely.
                                                          No special machining is required. It is fixed by pressure or by means of adhesives or screws, depending on the design of the furniture and the professional. The shape of the profile allows easy integration into the door edge.
                                                          It has an open rectangle design, 10 mm high x 25.7 mm wide at the visible part. The complete handle is 30 mm high and 46 mm wide including the fixing flange.
                                                          Each unit is 2.8 metres long. Supplied in packs of 10 units, ready to cut and adapt for mass production projects or customised installations.
                                                          The packaging contains 10 units of Adige profiles, each 2.8 metres long, ready for direct installation in manufacturing processes or on-site assembly.
                                                            For the assembly of Free Face profile hands for board of 19-20 mm alongside the Space+ sliding door system, it is necessary to choose an outside runner with a thickness of 30 mm and adhesive spacer cod. 4000820. For the assembly ofFree Face 2 profile hands for board of 19-20 mm alongside the Space+ sliding door system, it is necessary to choose an outside runner with a thickness of 23 mm.
                                                            For the assembly of the Free poor alongside the Space + sliding door system, it is necessary to choose an outside runner with a thickness of 30 mm.
                                                            Although the he adjustable, visible, hanging Neco sliding system allows for a maximum door thickness of 30 mm, the fittings and profiles of the Free aluminium door do not allow for the assembly of this sliding door system.
                                                            The lot includes 25 handles made of aluminium with the necessary screws for their correct installation.
                                                            The Picanya handle has a length of 45 mm and an interaxis of 32 mm, making it ideal for a wide variety of furniture applications.
                                                            The handle is available in matt anodised, gloss anodised, black anodised and stainless steel anodised finishes.
                                                            Yes, the Picanya handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, depending on the needs of the furniture design.
                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                            The Tulip1 handle is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish.
                                                            The handle is available in lengths of 126 mm and 158 mm.
                                                            No, this handle uses a high quality self-adhesive strip that requires no machining or screws.
                                                            It is compatible with drawer fronts and cabinet doors with a minimum thickness of 19 mm.
                                                            Yes, the included adhesive is of high quality, guaranteeing a secure and long-lasting attachment to the edge of the furniture.
                                                            The Chiva handle is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish.
                                                            It is available in lengths of 62 mm, 94 mm, 126 mm and 158 mm.
                                                            No, this model includes a high quality self-adhesive strip that requires no machining or screws for installation.
                                                            It is suitable for drawer fronts and cabinet doors with a minimum thickness of 19 mm.
                                                            Yes, the high-quality adhesive guarantees a long-lasting and secure attachment to the edge of the furniture.
                                                            The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                            According to the number of doors that comprise your wardrobe you can choose between different types of Free aluminium vertical profiles (A, B or C) to obtain different combinations of doors. Type A. Central door used to create wardrobes with three doors. Created with two handle profiles. Type B. Outer door used to create wardrobes with two or four doors. Created with a handle profile and a handle cover profile. Type C. Inside door used to create wardrobes with two or four doors. Created with a vertical profile and a handle profile.
                                                            The following sketch shows details of the machining that should be carried out for the bracket of the Plus 4-4E-11-16-18 aluminium profiles.
                                                            The following sketch shows details of the machining that should be carried out for the bracket of the Plus 14 aluminium profiles.
                                                            The following sketch shows details of the machining that should be carried out for the bracket of the Plus 7 aluminium profiles.
                                                            This kit allows a solid T-shaped joint to be made between the vertical and horizontal crossbars of the Free wardrobe doors, allowing different panes or panels to be assembled within the same door.
                                                            The crossbars can accommodate 4 mm thick glass and 10 or 11 mm thick boards, ensuring a secure and firm fit.
                                                            It is made of steel and zamak, which provides structural strength and durability, ensuring a robust joint in the doors.
                                                            Installation is simple and quick, as the kit includes all the necessary parts for assembly, which is carried out using the included screws to fix the joint between the crossbars.
                                                            Yes, the system allows the joint to be dismantled if adjustments or changes need to be made to the glass or panels without affecting the door structure.
                                                            The V-shape allows the glass to be held securely and prevents it from moving or being damaged inside the profile.
                                                            It is made of strong, flexible plastic, which makes it easy to install and ensures optimum glass retention.
                                                            Yes, the material can be easily cut to fit the length required for the installation.
                                                            It is installed by snapping the glass into the profile and securing it with the V-shaped glazing bead.
                                                            Yes, it can be removed and reinstalled without compromising its functionality, provided that care is taken not to damage the glass or the profile.
                                                            We recommend the use of 4 mm thick glass, with polished edges for a perfect fit.
                                                            No, the profile is supplied without fasteners, therefore, beading and brackets must be purchased separately.
                                                            Yes, a fixing bead is required to hold the glass in place, and connecting brackets are needed to assemble the structure.
                                                            It is assembled by means of connecting brackets and fixed with screws or specific adhesives depending on the application.
                                                            It is made of extruded aluminium with a matt anodised or textured black painted finish, giving it an elegant design.
                                                            They are compatible with 4 mm glass and 10 to 11 mm thick boards, ensuring a firm and stable installation.
                                                            The carriages are fitted to the top and bottom of the door using the hardware included in the kit.
                                                            It is recommended to use a screwdriver and drill to fix the screws in position.
                                                            No, this kit does not include a brake or damping system. If soft closing is required, it is necessary to complement it with a Space+ compatible damping system.
                                                            These brackets allow aluminium profiles to be joined together to make display cabinets or cabinet doors, providing stability and strength to the structure.
                                                            The use of a suitable screwdriver is recommended for the screws provided, and in some cases a drill for pre-drilling if the profile requires it.
                                                            They are made of high-strength steel, guaranteeing durability and stability in the assembled structure.
                                                            Yes, each kit includes 4 brackets and 8 screws, ready for installation on Plus 4, Plus 11 and Plus 14 profiles.
                                                            The brackets are designed for use with Plus 4, Plus 11 and Plus 14 profiles, which accept glass up to 4 mm thick.
                                                            The brackets are made of high-strength steel to ensure durability and stability of the structure.
                                                            This kit is specifically designed for Plus 7 profiles, so compatibility with other profiles is not guaranteed.
                                                            Includes black painted or zinc-plated screws, depending on the selected part number, to ensure a firm hold on installation.
                                                            Each kit includes 10 sets, with 4 brackets and 8 screws per set, allowing for multiple installations.
                                                            Yes, provided that the glass is mounted in a Plus 7 profile and the appropriate fixing accessories are used.
                                                            This profile is designed for 4 mm thick glass.
                                                            Subtract 6 mm from the overall size of the door to calculate the correct glass size.
                                                            It is specifically designed for the Plus 4 system, so its compatibility with other systems will depend on its dimensions and fixing method.
                                                            The use of angle brackets is recommended to ensure stability and correct alignment of the installation.
                                                            It is available in matt anodised and textured black paint, both with high wear resistance.
                                                            Subtract 27 mm from the overall size of the door to determine the exact size of the glass to be installed.
                                                            The profile is designed to accommodate 4 mm thick glass.
                                                            The Free profiles are compatible with 4 mm glass and 10 or 11 mm thick boards, without the need for additional machining.
                                                            For vertical profiles, the measurement is equal to the height of the door (H). For horizontal profiles, 20 mm must be subtracted from the total width of the door.
                                                            No, these profiles are designed to require no machining. It is only necessary to make a straight cut in the aluminium profile before assembly.
                                                            The use of a 4 mm glass anvil (SKU 7920021) is recommended for a secure hold.
                                                            They are compatible with the Space+ sliding system, making them ideal for cabinets with aluminium sliding doors.
                                                            It is designed for 4 mm thick glass with a polished edge.
                                                            Fixing is done by means of double-sided adhesive tape (not included). It is recommended to use opaque glass to hide the adhesive.
                                                            Yes, a glazing bead is required to accommodate the glass and connecting brackets to assemble the structure.
                                                            Subtract 4 mm from the overall size of the door to obtain the correct glass size.
                                                            It is made of extruded aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which guarantees strength and durability.
                                                            It is compatible with 4 mm and 7 mm thick glass, ensuring a tight fit within the Plus 4 and Plus 7 profiles.
                                                            The glazing bead has 4 inner tabs that hold the glass in place without the need for additional adhesives.
                                                            Yes, it is available in black and grey, allowing it to be combined with different profile finishes.
                                                            Supplied in 2.35 m and 3.9 m bars. Yes, they can be cut to size according to the size of the glass and the profile.
                                                            No, its slim design and black or grey finishes allow for discreet integration with the profiles, without affecting the aesthetics of the whole.
                                                            No, no machining is required. Only a straight cut of the aluminium profile is required for assembly.
                                                            It is compatible with 4 mm glass doors or 10 and 11 mm thick panels.
                                                            The profiles are made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish for durability and uniform aesthetics.
                                                            No, the kit does not include connecting fittings. Only the profiles required for the structural assembly of the door are supplied.
                                                              Emuca sliding systems are designed to provide smooth and silent movement, even for large and heavy doors, thanks to high-quality bearings and aluminium profiles. They include soft-closing options, height and lateral adjustment, and both top-hung and bottom-supported solutions, allowing them to adapt to different furniture designs. They are also designed for efficient installation in professional joinery, with robust components that ensure durability and reliable performance in residential, contract and industrial projects.
                                                              The handle is made of aluminium with anodised or painted finishes, which guarantees high resistance to corrosion, durability and an aesthetic design adapted to different styles of furniture.
                                                              Yes, the Sharp 18 handle is compatible with sliding door systems such as Placard 74, and is specifically designed for installation on 18 mm thick boards.
                                                              The handle is available in 2.5 m and 2.9 m lengths, allowing it to be cut and adjusted to fit different cabinet configurations.
                                                              The sliding door system combined with the Sharp 18 handle supports a maximum weight of 70 kg per door, providing stability and security in daily use.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The Placard HK16/18 crossbar provides rigidity and stability to the sliding wardrobe, preventing deformation in daily use. In addition, it serves as a reinforcement to support the weight of the doors and ensures smooth operation in sliding door systems.
                                                              It is available in white painted, black painted and matte anodised finishes, with lengths of 1.15 m and 2.35 m. These options allow it to be customised according to the design and configuration of the furniture.
                                                              The crossbar is specifically designed for 16 mm and 18 mm boards. During installation, it is important to check the thickness of the doors and adjust the fixing screws according to the grooves in the profile to ensure a firm and aligned joint.
                                                              Manufactured from high quality aluminium, the HK16/18 Placard crossbar is corrosion and wear resistant. Its robust design and available finishes ensure long-lasting performance even in heavy-duty environments.
                                                              To preserve its appearance and functionality, clean regularly with a soft cloth and soapy water, avoiding abrasives or corrosive chemicals that may damage the painted or anodised finish. Periodically inspect the fixing points to ensure that the crossbar is correctly adjusted.
                                                              The Wave 16 handle is specifically designed for 16 mm thick boards. It is essential that the board is straight, without irregularities, and compatible with the profiles used in Placard 74 systems.
                                                              This handle is available in 2.35 m and 2.7 m lengths, in white painted, black painted and matt anodised finishes. These options offer flexibility to suit different furniture styles and designs.
                                                              The handle design includes an ergonomic grip function that makes it easy to open and close the doors. In addition, the robust construction enhances the durability of the system, especially in frequently used applications.
                                                              In Placard 74 systems, the Wave 16 handle does not require additional reinforcement if installed correctly on 16 mm boards. However, it must be ensured that the top and bottom profiles and carriages are correctly fixed to guarantee the stability of the system.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              This crossbar is compatible with board thicknesses between 18 mm and 22 mm, offering versatility for different sliding door designs. It can also be installed on 12 mm faces if a minimalist design is desired.
                                                              The asymmetrical design facilitates installation in thinner boards (12 mm) for a minimalist design. It also offers greater structural stability for boards up to 22 mm, providing rigidity and aesthetics in one product.
                                                              It is available in lengths of 2.35 m and comes in white painted, black painted and matt anodised finishes. Its asymmetrical design allows it to adapt to both modern styles and projects with more robust lines.
                                                              The HK18x12/22 Placard crossbar, in combination with the appropriate guide systems, is designed to securely support standard sliding doors, depending on the complementary hardware. For specific loads, it is recommended to consult the technical specifications of the complete system.
                                                              To maintain the painted or anodised finish, clean the header with a soft cloth and non-abrasive detergents. Avoid harsh chemicals and be sure to remove dirt in the areas of contact with the guides to ensure smooth sliding of the doors.
                                                              This crossbar is designed for 16 mm thick boards, providing a firm and stable structure for sliding door systems. It is ideal for projects where a slim and functional design is required.
                                                              The design of the U16x14 crossbar provides rigidity to the sliding doors, reducing the possibility of deformation during use. It also acts as an additional reinforcement that improves the overall stability of the system.
                                                              The crossbar is installed directly on the top or bottom edge of the 16 mm board using specific screws. It is crucial to correctly level the structure to ensure a perfect fit and smooth sliding.
                                                              The crossbar is available in white painted, black painted, matt anodised and gold anodised finishes. These options allow for easy integration into modern, classic or customised designs.
                                                              The crossbar complies with European quality and resistance standards in aluminium, guaranteeing high performance in daily use and offering a long service life thanks to its resistance to corrosion and wear.
                                                              This track is compatible with door thicknesses of 10 mm, 16 mm, 18 mm and 19 mm, guaranteeing precise sliding and a perfect fit in Placard sliding systems.
                                                              It is available in lengths of 2.35 m and 3.9 m, with finishes such as white painted, black painted, anthracite grey, matt anodised and gold anodised, adapting to different design styles and functional needs.
                                                              Installation is carried out by fixing the rail to the base of the enclosure, ensuring adequate levelling to avoid unevenness that could affect sliding. It is compatible with the cover profile and the guide system for a complete assembly.
                                                              The system can support a maximum weight of 70 kg per door, provided that compatible Placard system hardware and profiles are used.
                                                              It is recommended to clean the track regularly with a soft cloth to remove dust and debris that may interfere with the movement of the doors. Avoid abrasive products that may damage the aluminium finish.
                                                              This crossbar is compatible with board thicknesses from 12 mm to 22 mm. Its dimensions are 19.4 mm wide and 12 mm high, making it ideal for cabinets with different sliding door configurations.
                                                              The installation is done by fixing it to the edge of the panel using standard tools. The design of the crossbar protects the door edges and improves the structural rigidity of the system.
                                                              It is available in white painted, black painted, anthracite grey and matt anodised finishes. These finishes not only offer corrosion resistance, but also allow the crossbar to be combined with different styles of furniture.
                                                              The transom does not directly support the weight of the doors, but contributes significantly to the structural rigidity of the sliding door system, protecting the edges of the panel and improving its durability in combination with the profiles and hardware of the Placard system.
                                                              Aluminium provides high resistance to wear and corrosion, ensuring the durability of the product even in heavy-duty environments. In addition, it is a lightweight material that facilitates assembly.
                                                              This handle is designed for 19 mm thick boards, ensuring a perfect fit and optimal sliding on Placard 74 sliding door systems.
                                                              The handle has a length of 2.25 m or 2.7 m, and is available in white painted, black painted and matt anodised finishes, offering options to match different styles of furniture.
                                                              Installation requires machining the edge of the board to fit the handle. It is fixed with screws suitable for the material, ensuring a firm and stable installation.
                                                              The design incorporates an ergonomic grip zone that makes it easier to open and close the doors. It also enhances the user experience by ensuring comfort and functionality.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The brake is designed to hold the door at the end of its travel, preventing sudden knocks and ensuring that it remains securely in place, protecting both the door and the furniture.
                                                              It is made of hard-wearing plastic with a grey finish, making it durable and able to withstand constant use, as well as being discreetly integrated into sliding door systems.
                                                              The brake is placed on the top or bottom rail, depending on the design of the system. Installation is simple and requires no specialised tools, ensuring that the door stops precisely at the desired point.
                                                              Yes, the Placard brake can be fitted to cabinets with two or three sliding doors. In three-leaf systems, it is fitted at the locking points to prevent the centre door from becoming loose or misaligned.
                                                              We can fit the soft closing device at the opening and a brake cod. 6102021 at the closing of the door. This prevents the central door from becoming loose when it is closed or open.
                                                              For a 2 metre wide cabinet, it is recommended to use 2 clips per rail. If the cabinet is longer than 2 metres, it is suggested to use 3 clips per rail to ensure stability and functionality.
                                                              The clips are designed to be compatible with aluminium profiles and systems using Placard model rails, adapting to a variety of materials as long as they follow the system standard.
                                                              The Placard clip ensures a completely concealed installation, enhancing the aesthetics of the system. In addition, its high-quality black plastic design provides resistance to wear and tear and ease of assembly.
                                                              The installation of the clip does not require any specific tools, as it is fixed by snapping it onto the corresponding rail. However, it is recommended to check the fit with a levelling tool to ensure correct alignment.
                                                              These bottom rails are used in conjunction with the Placard sliding door system and a clip-on fixing system. Both rails are very easy to assemble and more economical because no cover is required to hide the fixing screws. The difference is that the first bottom rail is available for 10mm, 16mm and 18mm thick boards, and the second rail is designed for easy flush mounting on the edge of the cabinet for 10mm and 16mm thick boards.
                                                              This profile is designed for glass thicknesses of 8 to 10 mm, ensuring a perfect fit and secure fixing.
                                                              No, installation is by pressure using the specific components of the Placard system. However, it is recommended to check that the glass is correctly positioned to avoid unwanted movement.
                                                              Yes, the 2.35 m profile can be cut using suitable tools, such as an aluminium saw, to fit the dimensions of the glass or enclosure.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                              Installation of the system requires fixing the top rail and bottom rail (aluminium) directly to the enclosure structure. The rails must be cut to the specific enclosure size using suitable tools. The system includes 4 clips which are used to correctly position the profiles and ensure safe and stable mounting.
                                                              The rails are available in 2.35 m, 3 m and 3.9 m lengths. Finishes include white painted, black painted, matt anodised and natural anodised to suit different styles and design requirements.
                                                              Easy mounting system with clips to simplify installation. Aluminium material that provides high resistance to corrosion. Versatility in finishes and sizes to suit different design styles. Compatibility with bottom reduction systems, ideal for modern enclosures.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The system is made entirely of aluminium, a lightweight, corrosion-resistant and durable material. This ensures smooth operation of the sliding doors and minimal maintenance, even in environments with high humidity or temperature changes.
                                                              The Placard U10x16 crossbar is used to provide greater stability and structural reinforcement to sliding door systems, allowing for smooth and safe sliding.
                                                              The crossbar has a length of 2.35 m, a profile of 10x16 mm and a thickness of 1.5 mm.
                                                              It is made of matt anodised or painted aluminium (black or white), guaranteeing resistance to wear and tear and a high quality finish.
                                                              Yes, the crossbar is compatible with Placard sliding door systems and other similar models using this type of reinforcement.
                                                              Yes, the transom can be cut with standard tools to fit the specific dimensions of the cabinet or door.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                              We can fit the soft closing device at the opening and a brake cod. 6102021 at the closing of the door. This prevents the central door from becoming loose when it is closed or open.
                                                              This kit is compatible with door thicknesses of 16 mm, 18 mm and 19 mm, ideal for standard sliding wardrobes.
                                                              The kit includes 2 devices, 2 brakes, 8 screws and 1 Allen key for easy assembly.
                                                              The hardware kit for the Placard 74 system has a maximum load capacity of 30 kg, ensuring smooth and safe sliding.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                              The profile is suitable for glass doors up to 2.35 metres long and 16 mm thick.
                                                              No, this profile is specifically designed for doors with a thickness of 16 mm, guaranteeing a perfect and secure fit.
                                                              The T24 profile is designed to provide top and bottom support for sliding glass doors, ensuring stability and smooth operation in the Placard 74 system.
                                                              The package includes a 2.35 m long matt anodised aluminium profile, ready for installation.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The Wave 19 handle is specifically designed for cabinets with aluminium sliding doors and a panel thickness of 19 mm.
                                                              It is made of high quality aluminium with a white painted finish, giving it durability and an elegant design.
                                                              The handle is fixed directly to the aluminium profile of the Placard 74 system, ensuring a stable and secure installation.
                                                              Yes, it includes all the necessary components for installation, such as the profile and the tools required for proper assembly.
                                                              The main function of the Placard UB14x4 crossbar is to provide greater stability to sliding doors, avoiding oscillations during opening and closing.
                                                              The crossbar is made of aluminium, a strong and lightweight material that does not add extra weight to the cabinet structure.
                                                              The crossbar has a length of 2.35 m and 2.9 m, which makes it suitable for standard sized cabinets in Placard systems.
                                                              Yes, the aluminium used is treated to provide corrosion and wear resistance, prolonging its service life.
                                                              Installation is carried out by fixing the crossbar to the structure of the Placard sliding door system. It is recommended to follow the manufacturer's instructions to ensure correct installation.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The Sharp 16 handle has an ergonomic grip function and provides robustness and strength when opening and closing sliding doors in Placard systems.
                                                              It is made of high quality aluminium with a painted finish available in colours such as white, black, matt and gold, ensuring corrosion resistance and a modern aesthetic design.
                                                              The handle has a length of 2.7 m and 2.35 m, which makes it suitable for large cabinets, and can be cut to size according to customer requirements.
                                                              Yes, it is compatible with the Placard 74 sliding door system and other similar systems that require a robust and functional handle design.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The Style 16 handle is designed to provide a robust and ergonomic grip when opening and closing sliding doors, ensuring strength and durability.
                                                              It is made of aluminium and is available in white painted and matt anodised finishes, offering modern design and corrosion resistance.
                                                              The handle has a standard length of 2.7 metres, allowing it to be adapted to doors of different dimensions by cutting to size according to the customer's needs.
                                                              Yes, the Style 16 handle is compatible with Placard sliding door systems, especially the Placard 74 system, and other similar systems.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The Placard U19x14 crossbar is designed to protect the panel edges and reinforce the structure of sliding doors, as well as improve the stability of the system.
                                                              It is made of aluminium, with available finishes such as anthracite grey, matt anodised, white painted and black painted, to adapt to different styles and needs.
                                                              The crossbar is available in 2.35 m and 4 m lengths, allowing it to be cut to size to suit specific door dimensions.
                                                              Yes, the U19x14 transom is compatible with Placard sliding door systems, providing additional support to ensure a smooth and stable closing.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                              The kit is made of high quality steel and plastic, ensuring corrosion resistance, durability and optimum performance in indoor environments.
                                                              The Placard 74 wheel 50 hardware kit supports a maximum weight of 70 kg, ensuring durability and functionality for frequently used sliding doors.
                                                              This kit is compatible with sliding wardrobe doors using the Placard 74 system. It is recommended for board thicknesses of 19 mm, 18 mm, 16 mm and 10 mm.
                                                              The Placard trolley is made from a combination of high quality steel and plastic, ensuring strength, durability and a discreet design.
                                                              The trolley can carry a maximum load of up to 70 kg, making it suitable for large and heavy cabinets.
                                                              It is compatible with sliding wardrobe doors with a board thickness of 19 mm, adapting to the Emuca Placard system.
                                                              The installation of the trolley is simple and is carried out by fixing it to the upper and lower profile of the sliding door. It includes the necessary elements to ensure its correct fixing.
                                                              Yes, this trolley includes an anti-slip system that ensures smooth and safe movement during daily use.
                                                              The Placard trim profile is designed to provide protection for the edges of glass doors, ensuring an airtight and aesthetic seal within the Placard sliding system.
                                                              It can be easily adapted to different thicknesses of glass or boards.
                                                              It is made of high quality plastic with a grey finish, ensuring durability, flexibility and resistance to continuous use.
                                                              Installation is simple: the profile is fitted directly onto the edges of the glass door before inserting it into the sliding system. No additional tools are required.
                                                              Yes, the profile is designed to help absorb light impacts, protecting the edges of the glass door against chipping and damage.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The Canal Placard 74 top track is a component designed to guide sliding doors in a bottom-running wardrobe system. It provides additional support for smooth and safe door movement.
                                                              The rail has a length of 2.5 m and 3.9 m, adapting to different installation dimensions.
                                                              Installation is carried out by fixing the rail to the top of the enclosure using screws. It is important to follow the included instructions to ensure proper and durable installation.
                                                              It is made of high quality aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which ensures high corrosion resistance, elegant design and a long service life.
                                                              The rail can support a maximum weight of 70 kg per door, making it ideal for robust cabinets.
                                                              Door thicknesses of 10mm, 16mm, 18mm and 19mm are possible, providing flexibility in furniture design.
                                                              It is available in lengths of 2.35 m and 3.9 m, adapting to different cabinet sizes.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The Placard 74 bottom rail is made of aluminium, which guarantees high strength and durability.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                              There are two types of hardware used to make glass doors in the Placard sliding wardrobe system: - Plastic wedges. They are pressed into the handle profiles together with the glass, using four wedges on each side of the door and the whole assembly is held in place. It is also recommended to use the trim profile (cod. 4001621 / 7917121) for the rest of the handle profile and for the crossbar if it has one. - The screws. They are used to screw the upper and lower profiles of the door to the handles, to the carriages and runners and to the Slowmove soft closing system. These screws are of the appropriate length so as not to damage the glass.
                                                              The kit includes 8 wedges and 16 3x9.5 mm screws, designed to hold the glass panels in place and secure their position in the Placard sliding system.
                                                              The parts are 12 mm deep and 6 mm high and are compatible with 4 mm thick panels with 6 mm and 12 mm spacing, as well as 10 mm thick panels with 6 mm spacing.
                                                              This kit is compatible with glass panels of different thicknesses, specifically 4 mm and 10 mm, according to the specifications of the Placard sliding system.
                                                              The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                              The handle design includes a U-profile that finishes the door at the top and bottom, ensuring a hermetic longitudinal seal that enhances the aesthetics and functionality of the furniture.
                                                              The handle is fitted by inserting it over the sides of the board, ensuring a tight fit and a professional finish on cabinets with 19 mm thick boards.
                                                              The profiles are 2.35 m, 2.70 m and 2.9 m long and are designed to be cut to size according to specific installation requirements.
                                                              The kit includes 2 Sharp 19 handles, length 2.35 m, 1 U-profile 19x14, length 2.35 m and 1 dust cover for a complete and functional installation.
                                                              No, the included hardware and components are designed for direct installation without the need for panel cut-outs, which facilitates assembly and reduces installation time.
                                                              The soft closing system includes hydraulic piston devices that allow a soft and silent closing, avoiding abrupt knocks at the end of the door travel. This improves safety and prolongs the life of the mechanism.
                                                              The kit includes an adjustment system in the bottom rail that allows the doors to be precisely levelled and secured in position once installed. This makes it easy to correct any unevenness in the mounting surface.
                                                              The fittings are made of steel and aluminium with anodised or white painted finishes, ensuring high corrosion resistance and a durable appearance even in humid environments.
                                                              The Placard H16x12/22 crossbar is compatible with boards with a maximum thickness of 16 mm.
                                                              The anodised aluminium finish offers high resistance to corrosion and wear, protecting the profile against external factors such as humidity and scratches, as well as improving its aesthetics.
                                                              To install the asymmetric profile, simply decide on the desired orientation: the 12 mm face for a slimmer design or the 22 mm face for a more robust look, making sure to fix it correctly to the board.
                                                              It is recommended to use a thin-cutting saw for aluminium, ensuring a clean and precise cut. It is ideal to protect the cutting area with masking tape to prevent damage to the anodised finish.
                                                              This crossbar is ideal for projects such as sliding doors, wardrobes and room dividers, providing structural stability and an aesthetic design in 16 mm boards.
                                                              Compatible boards must be 16, 18 or 19 mm thick to ensure proper assembly with Placard 74 hardware.
                                                              The brakes have a damping system that reduces the impact when the door closes. To install them correctly, they must be fixed in the position indicated in the instructions, aligning them with the carriages to ensure a smooth closing.
                                                              Trolleys and skates require periodic cleaning to remove accumulated dust and dirt from the wheels and tracks. It is recommended to apply specific lubricant for sliding mechanisms at least every 6 months.
                                                              The "Channel" model is recommended for designs with recessed rails, while the "Classic" model is ideal for doors with external rails. The choice depends on the structural design of the furniture or sliding door.
                                                              Tools needed include a screwdriver, a drill with bits suitable for the board material, a tape measure and a level to ensure correct alignment of the hardware.
                                                              Compatible thicknesses are 16, 18 and 19 mm, ensuring a perfect fit between profiles, rails and boards.
                                                              The anti-derailment system consists of an integrated spring in the bottom carriage and an adjustable anti-jump stop in the top runner. It is installed at both ends of the system to ensure that the doors do not slip out of the track during use.
                                                              The adjustment system allows the height to be adjusted by up to ±5 mm to level the doors after installation. This is done by adjusting the screws located on the lower carriages.
                                                              The soft closing device includes a hydraulic piston and a progressive braking system. It is designed to withstand up to 30 kg per door and ensures safe and quiet closing.
                                                              Yes, both profiles and rails are supplied in 2.35 m dimensions and can be cut to size according to the dimensions of the furniture using suitable cutting tools.
                                                              The maximum load capacity of the Placard 74 trolley is 70 kg per door. This capacity is due to its 45 mm diameter wheel and the robust materials of manufacture, such as steel and plastic, which guarantee strength and durability.
                                                              It is compatible with channel bottom rail systems such as Placard 74, Placard 81 and Placard 90, provided that the rail is suitable for wheels with a diameter of 45 mm.
                                                              The locking/unlocking system ensures that the trolley is fixed to the rail during installation, preventing unexpected movements. It is activated by a trigger mechanism that automatically locks when placed on the rail and can be deactivated for subsequent adjustments.
                                                              The height adjustment is carried out by means of a screw on the carriage, allowing the wheel to be raised or lowered by up to 10 mm. This makes it easier to level the door and to adapt to different cabinet heights.
                                                              The trolley is made of zinc-plated steel, which provides corrosion resistance, and high-quality plastic, which reduces noise and ensures smooth running. These materials combine durability and functionality in long-term use.
                                                              The Placard 74 trolley kit is designed for sliding doors weighing up to 70 kg and has 45 mm diameter wheels to ensure smooth and quiet running. It is made of zinc-plated steel and plastic for durability and corrosion resistance.
                                                              This kit is compatible with channel bottom rail systems such as Placard 74, Placard 81 and Placard 90. The rails must be suitable for 45 mm wheels and must be installed accurately to avoid misalignment.
                                                              The locking/unlocking system facilitates the fixing of the trolleys during assembly, avoiding unwanted movements. In addition, the lock can be deactivated once the trolley is in place, guaranteeing safety and comfort during adjustment.
                                                              The height adjustment is carried out by means of a screw which allows the position of the wheel to be changed by up to 10 mm. This ensures precise levelling of the door, even in cases of unevenness in the floor or cabinet structure.
                                                              The kit includes 2 trolleys, 8 fixing screws for the trolleys, 6 screws and 6 dowels with a diameter of 6 mm for fixing the top track to the ceiling. These components ensure a robust and stable installation, supporting a load capacity of up to 70 kg per door (35 kg per trolley).
                                                              The kit includes 45 mm diameter wheel undercarriages, designed to support sliding doors up to 70 kg. They are made of zinc plated steel and plastic, with a brake system that provides a smooth and secure closing.
                                                              It is compatible with channel bottom rail systems such as Placard 74. The integration of the brake ensures controlled sliding, preventing sudden movements and providing greater safety when closing the doors.
                                                              The height adjustment is made by means of a screw that allows to change the position of the carriage up to 10 mm, offering flexibility to level doors of different sizes and to correct unevenness in the installation.
                                                              The integrated brake guarantees a progressive and silent closing, avoiding impacts at the end of the door travel. This protects both the structure and the users, increasing durability and comfort in daily use.
                                                              The kit includes 2 undercarriages, 2 upper runners, 2 brakes, 12 screws, 6 x 6 mm fixing plugs and an Allen key for adjusting the components, ensuring quick and precise assembly.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                              The RAL number of the white finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL code of the black finish is approximately 9005.
                                                              The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                              There are two types of fittings that are used to fit glass doors on the Placard sliding system for wardrobes: - Plastic wedges. They are put into the handle profiles using pressure along with the glass, using four wedges on each side of the door and leaving the set fastened. It is also recommended to use the fitting profile (code. 4001621 / 7917121) for the rest of the handle profile and the crossbeam if there is one. - Screws. They are used to screw the upper and lower profiles of the door to the handles, to the runners and the rollers and to the Slowmove closing. These screws are a correct length in order not to damage the glass.
                                                              Its main function is to cover the visible upper part of the bottom rail of the Canal system, protecting the bearing raceway from dust and dirt. This not only improves the aesthetics of the furniture, but also prolongs the service life of the running system and facilitates maintenance.
                                                              The cover profile is snapped onto the channel after the bottom guide has been installed. Its design facilitates stable fastening without the need for screws. It can be removed for cleaning or maintenance purposes, provided that the enclosure base is accessible without obstruction.
                                                              Yes, the profile is made of extruded aluminium with painted or anodised coating, which allows clean cuts with precision tools (mitre saw with aluminium disc). It is recommended to deburr the edges to avoid snagging during assembly.
                                                              Yes, the Placard 74 system allows different panel thicknesses to be used in the same cabinet, and the cover profile is equally suitable for melamine, framed glass or MDF doors. Its flat design maintains a uniform aesthetic regardless of the type of door leaf used.
                                                              Simply clean the surface with a soft cloth and a neutral product. In high use environments (commercial or contract), it is recommended to check the profile periodically to ensure that it is firmly fixed and that there is no build-up of debris in the bottom channel.
                                                              The track is designed to accommodate Ø16, Ø18 and Ø19 mm flat-bottom castors, allowing the most suitable bearing to be chosen according to the type of board, door weight and interior finish of the enclosure. This versatility guarantees smooth and silent movement without the need for additional adjustment.
                                                              Yes, the Placard 74 Classic bottom rail can be fixed directly to level floors of built-in or modular cabinets. In these cases, fixing with structural adhesive or concealed hardware is recommended if access below is limited.
                                                              The classic track is visible in the base of the enclosure and is installed on the surface, while the channel system is embedded in the base and allows the run to be covered with a cover profile. The classic track is easier to install and replace, ideal for retrofitting or subsequent changes.
                                                              It is essential to make a clean cut with an aluminium mitre saw, deburr the ends and ensure that the resulting section respects the symmetry of the profile. Any deformation can cause jamming or premature wear of the wheels.
                                                              Yes, as long as the height of the drawers allows free movement of the door in front. The classic rail does not take up volume inside the module, which facilitates its use in designs that integrate mixed modules without modifying the existing structure.
                                                              It is designed for 4 mm thick glass with a polished edge.
                                                              Fixing is done by means of double-sided adhesive tape (not included). It is recommended to use opaque glass to hide the adhesive.
                                                              Yes, a glazing bead is required to accommodate the glass and connecting brackets to assemble the structure.
                                                              Subtract 4 mm from the overall size of the door to obtain the correct glass size.
                                                              It is made of extruded aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which guarantees strength and durability.
                                                                The Style 10 handle has the following dimensions: 42 mm wide, 28 mm high and a length of 2.35 metres. It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which gives it lightness, strength and a highly durable aesthetic finish.
                                                                This model is specifically designed for 10 mm thick sliding doors. It is compatible with built-in or sliding wardrobe systems using similar profiles.
                                                                Installation requires basic tools such as an aluminium cut-off saw (in case of length adjustments), a drill for fastening, and a screwdriver or equivalent tool for assembly with appropriate hardware. Be sure to follow the instructions for the Placard sliding system for precise adjustment.
                                                                Yes, the handle can be cut to size using specialised aluminium tools, such as thin-cutting saws. Careful cutting is recommended to keep the edges smooth and to avoid damage to the anodised finish. Be sure to measure accurately before fitting.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                This profile is available in 2.35 m and 3 m lengths, with a total height of 16 mm and a thickness of 35 mm. It is compatible with 16 mm, 18 mm and 19 mm boards, making it suitable for a wide variety of sliding doors in Placard systems.
                                                                Installation requires tools such as a drill, a saw for precise cutting of the aluminium and a level to ensure a correct fit. It is important that the surface is clean and smooth before fixing the profile to ensure an optimal finish and to avoid possible deformations.
                                                                The matt anodised finish provides high corrosion resistance, a smooth feel and a modern look. It also minimises the appearance of fingerprints and scratches, ensuring long-lasting durability even under heavy use.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                To maintain its appearance and functionality, clean the profile regularly with a soft cloth and non-abrasive detergents. Avoid using acidic cleaners or chemicals that may damage the anodised finish. In case of dust accumulation, a soft bristle brush is recommended.
                                                                The Sharp 16 handle is designed for cabinets with sliding doors made of 16 mm thick boards. It is ideal for sliding door systems where a minimalist and modern design is required.
                                                                This profile is available in 2.35 m and 2.7 m lengths. Its design includes an ergonomic grip zone at the back, which makes it easy to open and close the doors.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                The Sharp 16 handle is fixed directly to the edge of the 16 mm board using standard tools such as drill and screws. It is recommended to check the measurements beforehand to ensure that the handle is correctly aligned with the guide system.
                                                                Clean the handle regularly with a soft cloth and warm water with neutral soap. Avoid abrasive chemicals or tools that may damage the anodised finish. Periodically inspect the fixing points to ensure that the handle is securely fastened and in good working condition.
                                                                The Quad 18 handle is designed for 18 mm thick boards, which ensures a precise and stable fit. It is recommended to check the board measurements prior to installation to ensure compatibility.
                                                                The Quad 18 handle has a length of 2.35 m and is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish. This design combines durability with modern aesthetics, ideal for sliding door systems.
                                                                Installation is carried out by machining the top of the panel. It is fixed using standard tools and specific screws, ensuring a perfect fit in the corresponding guide system.
                                                                The matt anodised finish provides corrosion and wear resistance, as well as a uniform and elegant appearance. This makes it suitable for residential and industrial environments with frequent use.
                                                                To prolong the life of the handle, clean it with a soft cloth and neutral soapy water, avoiding abrasive products or tools that may scratch the anodised finish. Periodically inspect the fixing points to ensure that the handle remains secure and functional.
                                                                This track is specifically designed for Placard sliding wardrobe door systems, compatible with panels of different thicknesses and systems that require precise and smooth bottom guidance.
                                                                The rail is available in lengths of 2.35 m and 3.9 m, with white painted and matt anodised finishes.
                                                                Installation is carried out by fixing the track to the floor or cabinet base using screws or adhesives according to the system specifications. Correct levelling of the rail is essential to ensure optimum sliding of the doors.
                                                                Aluminium provides high corrosion resistance, light weight and an aesthetic finish that remains in perfect condition over time. In addition, its design allows the sliding doors to slide silently and smoothly.
                                                                For maintenance, wipe regularly with a dry or slightly damp cloth to remove dust and dirt. Avoid using abrasive chemicals that may damage the finish. Make sure there are no obstructions in the grooves that interfere with the sliding of the doors.
                                                                The kit includes hardware, profiles and soft closing devices designed for double sliding door cabinets. It is compatible with board thicknesses of 16 mm and 18 mm, providing a complete solution for Placard systems.
                                                                The system is designed to withstand a maximum weight of 30 kg per door, ensuring smooth and safe sliding, even in frequently used applications.
                                                                The top and bottom profiles are supplied in a length of 2.35 m, but can be cut to size to suit the enclosure structure. This allows the system to be customised to the specific dimensions of each project.
                                                                The soft close is installed at the end of the bottom rail, using the devices included in the kit. Its assembly is intuitive and guarantees a cushioned movement that avoids knocks when closing the doors.
                                                                The steel ball bearings provide smooth and quiet running and optimise the functionality of the system. In addition, they guarantee a long service life and wear resistance under continuous use.
                                                                The brake is designed to hold the door at the end of its travel, preventing sudden knocks and ensuring that it remains securely in place, protecting both the door and the furniture.
                                                                It is made of hard-wearing plastic with a grey finish, making it durable and able to withstand constant use, as well as being discreetly integrated into sliding door systems.
                                                                The brake is placed on the top or bottom rail, depending on the design of the system. Installation is simple and requires no specialised tools, ensuring that the door stops precisely at the desired point.
                                                                Yes, the Placard brake can be fitted to cabinets with two or three sliding doors. In three-leaf systems, it is fitted at the locking points to prevent the centre door from becoming loose or misaligned.
                                                                We can fit the soft closing device at the opening and a brake cod. 6102021 at the closing of the door. This prevents the central door from becoming loose when it is closed or open.
                                                                The Wave 16 handle is specifically designed for 16 mm thick panels, guaranteeing a perfect fit and stable installation on sliding doors.
                                                                It is available in lengths of 2.25 m and 2.7 m, with finishes such as white painted, black painted and matt anodised, allowing it to be combined with different styles of cabinets.
                                                                Installation requires machining the edge of the panel and fixing the handle using standard tools. The design allows for secure mounting and makes it easy to open and close the doors.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                The Wave 16 and Wave 16 E handle profiles for sliding doors have the same design and the same geometry for 16 mm thick boards. The difference is that the Wave 16 E handle profile is thinner and therefore more economical.
                                                                The system is designed to withstand a maximum weight of up to 50 kg per door, guaranteeing smooth and safe sliding thanks to its high quality components.
                                                                The kit is compatible with both wooden and glass doors as long as they are 10 mm thick. For glass doors, an additional adapter may be required (not included).
                                                                Basic tools such as a drill with aluminium or wood drill bits, spirit level, screwdriver, and tape measure are needed to ensure accurate installation of profiles and fittings.
                                                                Yes, the system allows fine height adjustment by means of the screws on the carriage feet, which facilitates alignment and levelling of the door after installation.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                For a 2 metre wide cabinet, it is recommended to use 2 clips per rail. If the cabinet is longer than 2 metres, it is suggested to use 3 clips per rail to ensure stability and functionality.
                                                                The clips are designed to be compatible with aluminium profiles and systems using Placard model rails, adapting to a variety of materials as long as they follow the system standard.
                                                                The Placard clip ensures a completely concealed installation, enhancing the aesthetics of the system. In addition, its high-quality black plastic design provides resistance to wear and tear and ease of assembly.
                                                                The installation of the clip does not require any specific tools, as it is fixed by snapping it onto the corresponding rail. However, it is recommended to check the fit with a levelling tool to ensure correct alignment.
                                                                These bottom rails are used in conjunction with the Placard sliding door system and a clip-on fixing system. Both rails are very easy to assemble and more economical because no cover is required to hide the fixing screws. The difference is that the first bottom rail is available for 10mm, 16mm and 18mm thick boards, and the second rail is designed for easy flush mounting on the edge of the cabinet for 10mm and 16mm thick boards.
                                                                This kit is compatible with boards having a thickness of 10 to 16 mm, ensuring a correct fit and optimal sliding.
                                                                The trolleys are fitted with ball bearings that ensure smooth and quiet movement and high durability even under heavy use.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                Yes, it is possible to put a brake on the central door of a 3-door Placard wardrobe. However, the opening of the central door must be taken into account when applying the brake, as it can only have a brake in one direction, but the door can be opened in both directions. The following sketch shows the position of the brakes on the track according to the opening direction of the sliding doors.
                                                                This track is designed for sliding door systems from the Placard range, compatible with wooden or glass doors when using the appropriate hardware and components from this series.
                                                                Yes, the 2.35 m rail can be cut to size using suitable tools, such as an aluminium saw, to fit the required enclosure size.
                                                                In combination with Placard trolleys and hardware, this track can support doors weighing up to 50 kg, provided it is installed correctly.
                                                                It is recommended to leave a gap of at least 35 mm to allow for the correct installation of the track and to facilitate the movement of trolleys and sliding doors.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                This profile is designed for glass thicknesses of 8 to 10 mm, ensuring a perfect fit and secure fixing.
                                                                No, installation is by pressure using the specific components of the Placard system. However, it is recommended to check that the glass is correctly positioned to avoid unwanted movement.
                                                                Yes, the 2.35 m profile can be cut using suitable tools, such as an aluminium saw, to fit the dimensions of the glass or enclosure.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                Yes, the Picard Classic bottom rail is fully compatible with other accessories in the Picard range, such as top tracks and sliding door runners. The compatibility of the system ensures efficient assembly and optimum operation of the assembly, providing smooth sliding and an integrated design.
                                                                The Picard Classic bottom rail has a length of 2.35 m, ideal for large cabinets. If it needs to be adjusted to custom sizes, it can be cut with tools suitable for aluminium, such as a non-ferrous metal disc saw. It is important to cut accurately to avoid distortions that affect the sliding of the doors.
                                                                The Picard Classic bottom rail is designed to be installed on the underside of standard thickness boards. It is recommended that a channel be machined into the 10 mm, 16 mm, 18 mm boards.
                                                                This track is designed for sliding wardrobe doors in two-leaf systems, allowing smooth and silent sliding. It is compatible with doors made of wood, MDF or aluminium, as long as they conform to the recommended channel and weight for optimum use.
                                                                The matt anodised finish provides resistance to corrosion, wear and scratches, ensuring greater durability even in wet or high-use environments. In addition, this finish ensures a modern and uniform aesthetic, ideal for high-end furniture applications.
                                                                The rails are made of matt anodised aluminium, which guarantees durability and corrosion resistance.
                                                                The set includes a 3.9 m top rail, a 3.9 m bottom rail and a 3.9 m cover profile.
                                                                Yes, this system is compatible with sliding doors from the Placard B8 range and other similar systems, provided that the dimensions are compatible.
                                                                No, Placard rails can be installed using standard tools, without the need for specialised equipment.
                                                                The cover profile is used to cover and protect the visible edges of the rails, providing a clean and professional finish.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                The profile is suitable for glass doors up to 2.35 metres long and 16 mm thick.
                                                                No, this profile is specifically designed for doors with a thickness of 16 mm, guaranteeing a perfect and secure fit.
                                                                The T24 profile is designed to provide top and bottom support for sliding glass doors, ensuring stability and smooth operation in the Placard 74 system.
                                                                The package includes a 2.35 m long matt anodised aluminium profile, ready for installation.
                                                                No, it is only valid for the Placard 81 system.
                                                                The Deep 18 handle is designed to offer an aesthetic and functional solution for cabinet doors, providing a comfortable grip and enhancing the user experience.
                                                                Its modern design with a matt anodised finish ensures corrosion resistance and a stylish appearance. In addition, the mounting is simple and unobtrusive, ideal for indoor applications.
                                                                The handle is available in 2.35 m, 2.5 m and 2.9 m lengths with a 33 mm front profile and a width of 21 mm. Its matt anodised finish provides durability and style.
                                                                The packaging includes a handle profile, with individual protection to prevent damage during transport. Packed in packs of 8 pieces.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                The kit is made of high quality steel and plastic, ensuring corrosion resistance, durability and optimum performance in indoor environments.
                                                                The Placard 74 wheel 50 hardware kit supports a maximum weight of 70 kg, ensuring durability and functionality for frequently used sliding doors.
                                                                This kit is compatible with sliding wardrobe doors using the Placard 74 system. It is recommended for board thicknesses of 19 mm, 18 mm, 16 mm and 10 mm.
                                                                The Placard trolley is made from a combination of high quality steel and plastic, ensuring strength, durability and a discreet design.
                                                                The trolley can carry a maximum load of up to 70 kg, making it suitable for large and heavy cabinets.
                                                                It is compatible with sliding wardrobe doors with a board thickness of 19 mm, adapting to the Emuca Placard system.
                                                                The installation of the trolley is simple and is carried out by fixing it to the upper and lower profile of the sliding door. It includes the necessary elements to ensure its correct fixing.
                                                                Yes, this trolley includes an anti-slip system that ensures smooth and safe movement during daily use.
                                                                The Placard trim profile is designed to provide protection for the edges of glass doors, ensuring an airtight and aesthetic seal within the Placard sliding system.
                                                                It can be easily adapted to different thicknesses of glass or boards.
                                                                It is made of high quality plastic with a grey finish, ensuring durability, flexibility and resistance to continuous use.
                                                                Installation is simple: the profile is fitted directly onto the edges of the glass door before inserting it into the sliding system. No additional tools are required.
                                                                Yes, the profile is designed to help absorb light impacts, protecting the edges of the glass door against chipping and damage.
                                                                These bottom rails are used in conjunction with the Placard sliding door system and a clip-on fixing system. Both rails are very easy to assemble and more economical because no cover is required to hide the fixing screws. The difference is that the first bottom rail is available for 10mm, 16mm and 18mm thick boards, and the second rail is designed for easy flush mounting on the edge of the cabinet for 10mm and 16mm thick boards.
                                                                The rail is made of high quality aluminium and has a matt anodised finish, ensuring durability, corrosion resistance and a stylish design.
                                                                The rail is installed by screwing it to the cabinet. It is recommended to place it on the base of the cabinet, following the instructions provided to ensure a correct fit.
                                                                The track dimensions are 2.35 m and 3.9 m long, with a design optimised to fit perfectly into the Placard sliding door system.
                                                                The Placard bottom rail from Canal Clip is an essential part for the installation of sliding doors. Its function is to guide the doors and ensure smooth and safe sliding.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                The Wave 16 and Wave 16 E handle profiles for sliding doors have the same design and the same geometry for 16 mm thick boards. The difference is that the Wave 16 E handle profile is thinner and therefore more economical.
                                                                The Wave 16 handle has a white painted or matt anodised finish, providing modern aesthetics and corrosion resistance.
                                                                The Wave 16 handle is installed by fixing it to the edge of the sliding door using the screws included in the packaging. Make sure that the profile is correctly aligned before screwing to ensure a perfect fit.
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                There are two types of hardware used to make glass doors in the Placard sliding wardrobe system: - Plastic wedges. They are pressed into the handle profiles together with the glass, using four wedges on each side of the door and the whole assembly is held in place. It is also recommended to use the trim profile (cod. 4001621 / 7917121) for the rest of the handle profile and for the crossbar if it has one. - The screws. They are used to screw the upper and lower profiles of the door to the handles, to the carriages and runners and to the Slowmove soft closing system. These screws are of the appropriate length so as not to damage the glass.
                                                                The kit includes 8 wedges and 16 3x9.5 mm screws, designed to hold the glass panels in place and secure their position in the Placard sliding system.
                                                                The parts are 12 mm deep and 6 mm high and are compatible with 4 mm thick panels with 6 mm and 12 mm spacing, as well as 10 mm thick panels with 6 mm spacing.
                                                                This kit is compatible with glass panels of different thicknesses, specifically 4 mm and 10 mm, according to the specifications of the Placard sliding system.
                                                                The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                The track is made of high quality aluminium, which guarantees strength, durability and smooth sliding of the sliding doors.
                                                                The internal channels of the rail have overall dimensions of 81 mm wide and 40 mm high, allowing perfect coupling with the sliding mechanism.
                                                                The track is available in 2.35 m and 3.9 m lengths in white painted and matt anodised finishes, providing options for different styles and needs.
                                                                Installation is carried out by screwing the rail to the top inner side of the cabinet, ensuring a firm and functional assembly.
                                                                Yes, it is possible to install additional handles on the panels, provided they are compatible with the 16 mm thickness. It is recommended to drill accurately and use suitable screws to avoid damaging the material.
                                                                The system is designed to withstand a maximum weight of 30 kg per door. Exceeding this limit could compromise the smooth sliding and durability of the hardware. It is important to respect the specifications for optimum performance.
                                                                Yes, the steel ball bearing bearing system ensures smooth and durable sliding, even with intensive use. This design minimises wear and reduces noise when opening and closing the doors.
                                                                Basic tools such as a drill, screwdriver, tape measure, level and a saw to cut the aluminium profiles to size, if necessary, are required for installation. Tools are not included in the kit.
                                                                Yes, the kit is suitable for built-in wardrobes, provided that the dimensions of the space allow the installation of the included top and bottom rails, which have a maximum length of 2.35 metres.
                                                                The kit is designed for boards with a thickness of 18 mm. It is important that this measurement is respected to ensure the correct installation and operation of the system.
                                                                The system includes a ±5 mm height adjustment mechanism on the bottom wheels, allowing the doors to be precisely aligned after installation.
                                                                The hardware system supports a maximum weight of 30 kg per door. It is recommended not to exceed this limit to ensure optimum sliding and to avoid damage to the mechanism.
                                                                The kit includes profiles and rails with a length of 2.35m. These are designed to be cut to size according to the specific needs of the enclosure, ensuring a customised installation.
                                                                The soft closing mechanism includes a spring dampening system that prevents sudden shocks when closing the doors, prolonging the life of the system and improving safety in daily use.
                                                                A saw is required to cut the handle to the desired length, as well as basic tools such as a drill and screws to attach it to the 16 mm board.
                                                                Yes, the Wave 16E handle is specifically designed for use with the Placard 61 sliding door system, providing an integrated and aesthetically coherent solution.
                                                                It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which guarantees durability, corrosion resistance and a modern and elegant finish.
                                                                The handle has a length of 2.8 m. It can easily be cut to size to suit the height or specific design of the cabinet doors.
                                                                The handle is designed for boards with a thickness of 16 mm, ensuring precise fixing and uniform aesthetics.
                                                                Yes, its design allows for easy installation using basic tools such as a cut-to-length saw, a drill and a screwdriver.
                                                                No, the handle does not include screws. It is recommended to use screws suitable for the thickness of the board (18 mm) and the material of the cabinet for a secure fixing.
                                                                The handle does not require special maintenance. It is recommended to clean it periodically with a damp cloth and avoid using abrasive products that may damage the anodised finish.
                                                                Yes, although it is specifically designed for the Placard 61 system, it can be adapted to other systems as long as the board dimensions and profiles are compatible.
                                                                The handle has a length of 2.8 m. It can be cut to the required length using tools such as a saw to adapt it to the specific cabinet design.
                                                                The slim profile design maximises visual space, achieving a modern, minimalist style, ideal for contemporary cabinets.
                                                                The handle is made of aluminium, which makes it light but strong. This makes it easy to handle and install without compromising durability.
                                                                No, this handle is specifically designed for Placard 61 sliding doors and is therefore not recommended for hinged doors.
                                                                A thin-cutting saw for aluminium and a ruler or tape measure are required to ensure precise cuts to the desired size.
                                                                The Sharp 18E handle is specifically designed for boards with a thickness of 18 mm, ensuring a perfect fit and a clean finish.
                                                                The maximum load capacity of the Placard 74 trolley is 70 kg per door. This capacity is due to its 45 mm diameter wheel and the robust materials of manufacture, such as steel and plastic, which guarantee strength and durability.
                                                                It is compatible with channel bottom rail systems such as Placard 74, Placard 81 and Placard 90, provided that the rail is suitable for wheels with a diameter of 45 mm.
                                                                The locking/unlocking system ensures that the trolley is fixed to the rail during installation, preventing unexpected movements. It is activated by a trigger mechanism that automatically locks when placed on the rail and can be deactivated for subsequent adjustments.
                                                                The height adjustment is carried out by means of a screw on the carriage, allowing the wheel to be raised or lowered by up to 10 mm. This makes it easier to level the door and to adapt to different cabinet heights.
                                                                The trolley is made of zinc-plated steel, which provides corrosion resistance, and high-quality plastic, which reduces noise and ensures smooth running. These materials combine durability and functionality in long-term use.
                                                                The Placard 74 trolley kit is designed for sliding doors weighing up to 70 kg and has 45 mm diameter wheels to ensure smooth and quiet running. It is made of zinc-plated steel and plastic for durability and corrosion resistance.
                                                                This kit is compatible with channel bottom rail systems such as Placard 74, Placard 81 and Placard 90. The rails must be suitable for 45 mm wheels and must be installed accurately to avoid misalignment.
                                                                The locking/unlocking system facilitates the fixing of the trolleys during assembly, avoiding unwanted movements. In addition, the lock can be deactivated once the trolley is in place, guaranteeing safety and comfort during adjustment.
                                                                The height adjustment is carried out by means of a screw which allows the position of the wheel to be changed by up to 10 mm. This ensures precise levelling of the door, even in cases of unevenness in the floor or cabinet structure.
                                                                The kit includes 2 trolleys, 8 fixing screws for the trolleys, 6 screws and 6 dowels with a diameter of 6 mm for fixing the top track to the ceiling. These components ensure a robust and stable installation, supporting a load capacity of up to 70 kg per door (35 kg per trolley).
                                                                The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                In order to set up a wardrobe using the Placard sliding doors system, you need to take several parameters into account, we make this task easier with a help table in order to configure the wardrobes. This calculation table makes it possible to calculate the length of handles and bars depending on the dimensions of the wardrobe, as well as the side of the board or glass in the doors.
                                                                These lower rails are used along with the Placard sliding door system and a fastening with a clip system. Both rails are very easy to assemble and more cost-effective thanks to the fact that a cover is not required to hide the fastening screws. The difference is that the first lower rail is available for boards of a 10mm, 16mm and 18mm thickness, and the second rail is designed for easy flush mounting on the edge of the furniture for 10 mm and 16 mm thick board.
                                                                The RAL number of the white finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL code of the black finish is approximately 9005.
                                                                The Wave 16 and Wave 16 E handle profiles for creating sliding doors have the same design and the same geometry for 16 mm thick board. The difference is that the Wave 16 E handle profile has a reduced thickness and is therefore more cost-effective.
                                                                The Wave 18 and Wave 18 E handle profiles for creating sliding doors have the same design and the same geometry for 18 mm thick board. The difference resides in the fact that the Wave 18 E handle profile has a reduced thickness and is therefore more cost-effective.
                                                                No, it is only compatible for the Placard 81 system.
                                                                Yes, it is possible to put a brake on the central door of a 3 door Placard wardrobe. However, it is necessary to take into account the opening of the central door in order to put the brake in, as it is only possible to have the brake in one direction. In the following diagram you can see the position of the brakes on the rail depending on the opening direction of the sliding doors.
                                                                The Slowmove soft closing system for Placard can be assembled on 2-door and 3-door wardrobes: For 2-door wardrobes you can install Slowmove soft closing on the opening as well as the closing of all the doors. However, on 3-door wardrobes you can install Slowmove soft closing only on the outer door for opening. For closing, it can be installed on all of the doors (inside and outside) depending on the closing movement.
                                                                We can put a smooth closing device on the opening and a code 6102021 brake on the door closure. This will make sure the central door is not loose when closed or open.
                                                                The minimum recommended width that a door should have in order to mount soft Slowmove closing for Placard is 650 mm.
                                                                Yes, the new Slowmove system is compatible with the old upper rails as long as the old calculation measurement for the height of the door for Placard wardrobes is maintained.
                                                                There are two types of fittings that are used to fit glass doors on the Placard sliding system for wardrobes: - Plastic wedges. They are put into the handle profiles using pressure along with the glass, using four wedges on each side of the door and leaving the set fastened. It is also recommended to use the fitting profile (code. 4001621 / 7917121) for the rest of the handle profile and the crossbeam if there is one. - Screws. They are used to screw the upper and lower profiles of the door to the handles, to the runners and the rollers and to the Slowmove closing. These screws are a correct length in order not to damage the glass.
                                                                It is designed for 4 mm thick glass with a polished edge.
                                                                Fixing is done by means of double-sided adhesive tape (not included). It is recommended to use opaque glass to hide the adhesive.
                                                                Yes, a glazing bead is required to accommodate the glass and connecting brackets to assemble the structure.
                                                                Subtract 4 mm from the overall size of the door to obtain the correct glass size.
                                                                It is made of extruded aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which guarantees strength and durability.
                                                                  The channel Placard bottom rail is available in lengths of 2.35 m and 3.9 m, allowing it to be adapted to different door and cabinet sizes.
                                                                  The rail is made of matt anodised aluminium, which guarantees high corrosion resistance and a modern and durable appearance.
                                                                  The rail is fixed to the underside of the cabinet by means of screws, using the holes already provided. It is designed to facilitate installation and ensure alignment of the sliding doors.
                                                                  The track is compatible with Placard system sliding doors, designed for board thicknesses of 16 mm. It supports doors up to 70 kg, offering a smooth and stable movement.
                                                                  The track has a channel design with a height of 5.5 mm and a width of 66 mm, providing precise guidance for the doors. Its aluminium construction ensures stability and strength.
                                                                  The Vall 19 handle is designed to be installed on 19 mm thick doors. It is essential that the surface is flat and compatible with the aluminium profile to ensure a stable fixing. It is recommended to check that the edges of the door are level and free of irregularities to avoid deviations during assembly.
                                                                  The Vall 19 handle is available in lengths of 2.25 m and 2.7 m, with a front area of 35 mm wide and 35 mm total depth. It is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which guarantees durability, corrosion resistance and a modern aesthetic that adapts to multiple styles of furniture.
                                                                  For installation, a drill with aluminium-specific drill bits, a saw for cutting profiles (in case of length adjustment), a square for measuring precise angles and screws suitable for the enclosure material are required. It is crucial to use tools that do not damage the anodised finish.
                                                                  The handle is manufactured under strict quality standards in anodised aluminium, complying with European standards of corrosion resistance and safety for furniture. In addition, its ergonomic design ensures comfortable use without sharp edges that could pose a risk.
                                                                  Maintenance is minimal thanks to the matt anodised finish, which offers resistance to wear and tear. It is recommended to clean with a damp cloth and neutral detergents, avoiding abrasive products that may damage the anodising. To maintain its appearance, avoid contact with corrosive chemicals.
                                                                  This profile is available in 2.35 m and 3 m lengths, with a total height of 16 mm and a thickness of 35 mm. It is compatible with 16 mm, 18 mm and 19 mm boards, making it suitable for a wide variety of sliding doors in Placard systems.
                                                                  Installation requires tools such as a drill, a saw for precise cutting of the aluminium and a level to ensure a correct fit. It is important that the surface is clean and smooth before fixing the profile to ensure an optimal finish and to avoid possible deformations.
                                                                  The matt anodised finish provides high corrosion resistance, a smooth feel and a modern look. It also minimises the appearance of fingerprints and scratches, ensuring long-lasting durability even under heavy use.
                                                                  The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                  To maintain its appearance and functionality, clean the profile regularly with a soft cloth and non-abrasive detergents. Avoid using acidic cleaners or chemicals that may damage the anodised finish. In case of dust accumulation, a soft bristle brush is recommended.
                                                                  Yes, the 2.7 metre aluminium profiles can be cut to size using suitable tools, such as a hacksaw with a fine blade, ensuring a clean and precise cut.
                                                                  This kit is designed for boards with a thickness of 19 mm, which ensures a perfect fit of the hardware and optimal sliding of the door.
                                                                  Yes, the kit includes 2 brakes, which allow a smooth and controlled closing, avoiding knocks and prolonging the life of the system.
                                                                  The system is designed to support a maximum weight of 50 kg per door, ensuring safe and smooth movement.
                                                                  The matt anodised finish provides increased resistance to wear and corrosion, as well as a sleek, modern aesthetic that integrates easily into contemporary designs.
                                                                  The Line 19 handle is designed for cabinets with a thickness of 19 mm. To install it correctly, it must be inserted into a machined channel in the panel with a depth of 36 mm and a width of 20 mm. Precise machining is essential to ensure a stable and aesthetically pleasing installation.
                                                                  Thanks to its compact design and the use of anodised aluminium, the Line 19 handle is designed to withstand intensive daily use without deformation or loss of functionality. Although its strength depends on proper installation, it is optimised for constant opening and closing of cabinets, even in high-traffic environments such as offices or kitchens.
                                                                  Yes, the Line 19 handle can be cut to size to fit the specific length of your application. It is recommended to cut with tools suitable for aluminium, such as a circular saw with a disc for non-ferrous metals, and to ensure clean edges to maintain functionality and aesthetics.
                                                                  The Line 19 handle meets European quality standards for furniture accessories, guaranteeing durability and safety in use. Its matt anodised finish meets corrosion and wear resistance standards, ensuring a uniform appearance and a long service life even in wet or high friction environments.
                                                                  The Line 19 handle is made of matt anodised aluminium, which gives it high corrosion resistance, durability against wear and tear and an elegant finish. This material is both lightweight and robust, ideal for heavy-duty furniture applications such as kitchens or high-end cabinets.
                                                                  The Placard 90 rail set is made of matt anodised aluminium, which guarantees durability and corrosion resistance.
                                                                  It includes a 3 m top rail, a 3 m bottom rail and a 3 m bottom rail cover.
                                                                  The upper rail is screwed to the cabinet, while the lower rail cover is fitted to the lower rail with a simple click.
                                                                  This system is compatible with wooden or glass sliding doors up to 19 mm thick.
                                                                  The finish available for this product is matt anodised, ideal for a modern and resistant design.
                                                                  The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                  The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                  Yes, it is possible to put a brake on the central door of a 3-door Placard wardrobe. However, the opening of the central door must be taken into account when applying the brake, as it can only have a brake in one direction, but the door can be opened in both directions. The following sketch shows the position of the brakes on the track according to the opening direction of the sliding doors:
                                                                  The Placard 90 wheel 50 hardware kit has a maximum load capacity of 70 kg per door, ensuring safe use even on larger doors.
                                                                  Installation is carried out by attaching the upper and lower carriages to the cabinet doors, while the brakes are fitted to ensure smooth closing. All parts are easily attached using the included screws.
                                                                  The 19mm Placard skid is suitable for cabinet sliding door systems using compatible rails, especially those designed for board thicknesses up to 19mm.
                                                                  The Placard runner is installed by attaching it to the bottom profile of the sliding door system. It is necessary to insert it correctly into the rail track and ensure that it is correctly adjusted to ensure smooth movement.
                                                                  The skate wheels are made of durable plastic with an additional coating that improves durability and reduces wear and tear during frequent use.
                                                                  Frequent maintenance is not required. However, it is advisable to clean the wheels and rails periodically to remove dust and debris that may affect gliding.
                                                                  The packaging includes 100 skates, each carefully packed to avoid damage during transport.
                                                                  The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                  Yes, the handle includes the necessary components for installation, ensuring quick and precise fitting on the Placard sliding door system.
                                                                  It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which gives it a high resistance to corrosion, a modern and durable finish, as well as a minimalist design that enhances the aesthetics of the cabinet.
                                                                  The handle has a total length of 2.7 m and is designed for 19 mm thick doors. Its specific dimensions ensure a perfect fit and optimum functionality.
                                                                  To install the Hill 19 handle, it must be fixed to the edge of the corresponding door or leaf, ensuring that it fits correctly into the profiles of the Placard system, following the manufacturer's specifications.
                                                                  The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                  The rail is made of high quality aluminium, which guarantees strength and durability.
                                                                  This model is available in lengths of 2.35 m and 3.9 m, adapting to different furniture sizes.
                                                                  The rail has a matt anodised finish, providing a modern design and corrosion protection.
                                                                  The rail is fixed directly to the inside of the cabinet, using channels specifically designed for ease of installation.
                                                                  This kit is specifically designed for 19 mm thick boards. To ensure correct operation, it is not recommended for use on thicker or thinner boards, as this may compromise the stability of the installation.
                                                                  The kit includes handles and hardware for a door up to 2.7 metres in length. If a shorter door is required, the aluminium profiles can be cut to size to fit the desired size.
                                                                  The kit is designed for sliding doors installed on wood or chipboard surfaces compatible with 19 mm thick boards. It is important to ensure that the surface is smooth, level and strong enough to support the weight of the door.
                                                                  The kit includes 2 integrated brakes that ensure a smooth and controlled closing of the door, avoiding sudden impacts. This system improves safety and prolongs the life of both the hardware and the panel.
                                                                  Yes, the aluminium profile included in the kit has a length of 2.7 metres and can be cut to the desired length to fit shorter doors, always using suitable tools to ensure a clean cut.
                                                                  No, this kit is specifically designed for doors made of 19 mm thick boards. For glass doors you would need adapters or kits specifically designed for that material.
                                                                  The aluminium profile has a matt anodised finish, which gives it high resistance to corrosion, wear and tear and a uniform aesthetic appearance that lasts over time.
                                                                  The kit includes 2 x 2.7 m Vall 19 pulls, 1 dust cover, 2 Channel trolleys, 2 Channel runners and 2 brakes. It does not include tools or specific fixing hardware, which must be selected according to the type of mounting surface.
                                                                  It is recommended to periodically clean the rails and carriages to remove dust and debris that may affect sliding. In addition, it is advisable to lightly lubricate the moving mechanisms with a suitable product every 6 months.
                                                                  The Placard 90 system is distinguished by its steel ball bearings that guarantee a smooth and long-lasting glide, as well as profiles made of matt anodised aluminium, which improves resistance to corrosion and wear.
                                                                  The system allows a levelling adjustment of up to 5 mm on the bottom rail by means of the included levelling mechanism, ensuring precise installation even on uneven surfaces.
                                                                  No, this kit is designed exclusively for 19 mm thick boards. For other thicknesses, it would be necessary to use an adapted system or modify the components, which is not recommended.
                                                                  Yes, the kit includes a U-shaped cross profile designed to reinforce the door structure and facilitate the installation of the handles. No additional accessories are required for this assembly.
                                                                  The matt anodised finish makes it easy to clean and maintain as it is stain and wear resistant. It is recommended to clean with a soft cloth and non-abrasive products to preserve its appearance.
                                                                  The lid is fixed by means of a precision mechanism that ensures a perfect fit together with the included screws, preventing displacement or misalignment.
                                                                  The brake is designed to hold the door at the end of its travel, preventing sudden knocks and ensuring that it remains securely in place, protecting both the door and the furniture.
                                                                  It is made of hard-wearing plastic with a grey finish, making it durable and able to withstand constant use, as well as being discreetly integrated into sliding door systems.
                                                                  The brake is placed on the top or bottom rail, depending on the design of the system. Installation is simple and requires no specialised tools, ensuring that the door stops precisely at the desired point.
                                                                  Yes, the Placard brake can be fitted to cabinets with two or three sliding doors. In three-leaf systems, it is fitted at the locking points to prevent the centre door from becoming loose or misaligned.
                                                                  We can fit the soft closing device at the opening and a brake cod. 6102021 at the closing of the door. This prevents the central door from becoming loose when it is closed or open.
                                                                  The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                  The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                  The kit is made of high quality steel and plastic, ensuring corrosion resistance, durability and optimum performance in indoor environments.
                                                                  The Placard 74 wheel 50 hardware kit supports a maximum weight of 70 kg, ensuring durability and functionality for frequently used sliding doors.
                                                                  This kit is compatible with sliding wardrobe doors using the Placard 74 system. It is recommended for board thicknesses of 19 mm, 18 mm, 16 mm and 10 mm.
                                                                  The Placard trolley is made from a combination of high quality steel and plastic, ensuring strength, durability and a discreet design.
                                                                  The trolley can carry a maximum load of up to 70 kg, making it suitable for large and heavy cabinets.
                                                                  It is compatible with sliding wardrobe doors with a board thickness of 19 mm, adapting to the Emuca Placard system.
                                                                  The installation of the trolley is simple and is carried out by fixing it to the upper and lower profile of the sliding door. It includes the necessary elements to ensure its correct fixing.
                                                                  Yes, this trolley includes an anti-slip system that ensures smooth and safe movement during daily use.
                                                                  The maximum load capacity of the Placard 74 trolley is 70 kg per door. This capacity is due to its 45 mm diameter wheel and the robust materials of manufacture, such as steel and plastic, which guarantee strength and durability.
                                                                  It is compatible with channel bottom rail systems such as Placard 74, Placard 81 and Placard 90, provided that the rail is suitable for wheels with a diameter of 45 mm.
                                                                  The locking/unlocking system ensures that the trolley is fixed to the rail during installation, preventing unexpected movements. It is activated by a trigger mechanism that automatically locks when placed on the rail and can be deactivated for subsequent adjustments.
                                                                  The height adjustment is carried out by means of a screw on the carriage, allowing the wheel to be raised or lowered by up to 10 mm. This makes it easier to level the door and to adapt to different cabinet heights.
                                                                  The trolley is made of zinc-plated steel, which provides corrosion resistance, and high-quality plastic, which reduces noise and ensures smooth running. These materials combine durability and functionality in long-term use.
                                                                  The Placard 74 trolley kit is designed for sliding doors weighing up to 70 kg and has 45 mm diameter wheels to ensure smooth and quiet running. It is made of zinc-plated steel and plastic for durability and corrosion resistance.
                                                                  This kit is compatible with channel bottom rail systems such as Placard 74, Placard 81 and Placard 90. The rails must be suitable for 45 mm wheels and must be installed accurately to avoid misalignment.
                                                                  The locking/unlocking system facilitates the fixing of the trolleys during assembly, avoiding unwanted movements. In addition, the lock can be deactivated once the trolley is in place, guaranteeing safety and comfort during adjustment.
                                                                  The height adjustment is carried out by means of a screw which allows the position of the wheel to be changed by up to 10 mm. This ensures precise levelling of the door, even in cases of unevenness in the floor or cabinet structure.
                                                                  The kit includes 2 trolleys, 8 fixing screws for the trolleys, 6 screws and 6 dowels with a diameter of 6 mm for fixing the top track to the ceiling. These components ensure a robust and stable installation, supporting a load capacity of up to 70 kg per door (35 kg per trolley).
                                                                  No, for situations where you want to reinforce the attachment of the profile, you can place two clips at each end with a lower spacing. The remaining clips can be installed at an equivalent distance even if it is slightly greater than 500mm. Example of reinforced mounting:
                                                                  The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                  In order to mount the sliders on doors it is possible to use different screw options, always bearing in mind the board thickness of the door: - Euro screws. In this case it is necessary to machine a 5mm diameter hole into the door. For example, for a door thickness of 19 mm we will choose the code. 5044007 with a length of 17 mm. - Self-tapping screws. They can have a 4mm diameter which do not require machining on the board. For example, for a board of 19 mm we will choose a 4 x 20 mm screw with the code. 8218605 or 5032405.
                                                                  The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                  For the assembly of Adige handle profiles for 18 mm board along with the Space + sliding doors, it is necessary to choose an outside runner with a thickness of 23 mm.
                                                                  These spacers guarantee a correct connection between parts during the assembly of sliding doors. They are placed to level and align the assembly, avoiding displacements or misalignments between panels.
                                                                  They are designed to be used together with the handle profiles, the upper and lower carriage and the dust cover. They are applied directly to the panel without the need for machining.
                                                                  The spacer uses a pressure sensitive adhesive (PSA) pre-applied to one side. It is only required to remove the protector and press firmly onto the clean, dry surface.
                                                                  They must be fitted prior to assembly of the profiles to ensure alignment and stability of the parts during assembly of the door assembly.
                                                                  They are made of high-density technical felt, with sufficient thickness to compensate for manufacturing tolerances without warping. Each spacer is flat and rectangular, designed to fit the profile.
                                                                  This system acts as a closing damper for sliding doors, reducing the impact at the end of the run and ensuring a smooth and controlled movement without bouncing or sudden bumps. Ideal for protecting both the doors and the cabinet structure.
                                                                  It is designed to integrate with Emuca's Space system overhead trolley system. It attaches easily to the mechanism without the need for additional machining.
                                                                  The kit is optimised for doors up to 50 kg per door leaf. If a higher capacity is required, the reinforced version for 85 kg should be chosen.
                                                                  No. The design of the brake allows it to be activated by the natural movement of the door, so it is not necessary to place the door in a specific area for the brake to act correctly.
                                                                  The packaging includes 4 parts (2 activation brakes + 2 anchor brakes) and is prepared for 2 sliding doors. The system is also available in versions for 3 doors and different load ranges (25, 50 and 85 kg).
                                                                  It fits the 23 mm, 30 mm and 35 mm outer carriages of the Space sliding system, adapting perfectly to their dimensions without interfering with the sliding system.
                                                                  Its function is to block the entry of dust from the top between the door and the frame, improving interior cleanliness and increasing the durability of the system.
                                                                  The installation is done by means of a double-sided adhesive tape included, which allows it to be easily fixed to the upper edge of the exterior doors, without the need for machining.
                                                                  It is made of natural anodised aluminium, which guarantees high corrosion resistance, uniform aesthetics and compatibility with Space system profiles.
                                                                  Available in lengths of 900 mm and 1350 mm. The choice depends on the width of the outer leaf; for doors larger than 900 mm, the 1350 mm version is recommended to cover the entire top edge.
                                                                  The Space top track is inserted into a 17.7 mm wide groove. This housing allows the profile to be fixed stably and allows the system to slide without interference. No additional fastenings are required if the appropriate machining is carried out.
                                                                  This track is specifically designed for Emuca Space sliding doors. It is recommended for use in conjunction with the upper and lower carriages, guides and brakes of the same system to ensure optimum, deviation-free operation.
                                                                  The natural aluminium finish offers clean, professional aesthetics, high corrosion resistance and excellent mechanical durability. In addition, its low weight makes it easy to cut and install for industrial projects or customised workshop work.
                                                                  The rail is supplied in lengths of 2.35 metres and is packaged in packs of 8 units. This format is designed for easy storage, transport and application in mass production projects or professional installations.
                                                                  Yes, the Space top track is designed to integrate Space system brakes. Assembly is simple and is carried out on the same track, without the need for additional machining, allowing smooth and controlled closing of the sliding doors.
                                                                  This system is compatible with sliding cabinet doors using the Emuca Space system in both 2- and 3-leaf configurations. Doors must have the Space system specific top track to properly accommodate the brakes.
                                                                  The brake engages in the upper profile and acts on the carriage, damping the final movement of the door and holding it in a fixed position. This reduces impact, prevents bouncing and improves safety and closing comfort, especially in frequently used furniture.
                                                                  No, the system is designed for installation without additional machining. The brake is installed directly on the top rail of the Space system and acts by pressure on the carriage. It is supplied with screws and Allen key for uncomplicated fitting.
                                                                  Yes, it is essential to have the Space system specific top track and the corresponding carriages. The brake kit cannot be installed in isolation, as it needs to interact mechanically with these components to function properly.
                                                                  To fix the rails of the Space+ sliding door system, we recommend using 4 x 25 mm screws (code 5032505) for 16, 18 and 19 mm modules.
                                                                  The Clip Space reinforced track incorporates a more robust geometry and an extruded aluminium profile with greater structural inertia, allowing it to support doors of up to 15 kg without deformation. In addition, it is optimised for both screw and clip mounting, facilitating its installation in modular or demountable projects.
                                                                  Clip mounting reduces installation time and avoids damaging the profile finish. It is ideal for demountable furniture or for applications where subsequent access to internal components is required. The system also allows tool-less disassembly in frequent maintenance environments.
                                                                  This rail is fully compatible with the brake and soft closing systems of the Space system. It has internal cavities and optimised profiling to house the brakes without interfering with the passage of the trolleys, ensuring a clean and functional integration of the complete system.
                                                                  It is recommended to use a cutting-off machine with a high-precision tungsten carbide disc, with slow feed and cooling if possible. After cutting, any burrs should be cleaned to avoid damage to the carriages or brakes. Do not apply lubricants that alter the anodising of the profile.
                                                                  The extended length of 3.9 m makes it possible to cover larger openings or double installations without the need for splices. This reduces the likelihood of misalignment, improves aesthetics and ensures a uniform glide along the entire cabinet structure.
                                                                  The Clip Space bottom rail is installed without visible fixings, which improves the aesthetics of the module and eliminates the risk of mechanical interference. Its clip fixing ensures a firm fit and allows quick replacement in maintenance environments or modular furniture upgrades.
                                                                  Thanks to its wrap-around profile and press-fit design, the bottom rail remains perfectly aligned and fixed in its housing. In addition, its inner geometry precisely guides the lower bearings, reducing vibrations and ensuring a straight and smooth trajectory.
                                                                  Minimal maintenance is required. It is recommended to periodically clean the channel with a dry cloth or compressed air to remove particles. No lubrication is required as the bearing contact with the anodised aluminium already provides a smooth and quiet running.
                                                                  Yes, the profile can be cut precisely using a thin disc cut-off machine for aluminium. It is important to deburr the ends after cutting to prevent damage to the wheels and to ensure that the clip fit remains intact. It is recommended to always measure with an assembly tolerance.
                                                                  Yes, it is designed to integrate seamlessly with the brake systems in the Space programme, allowing smooth closure without the need to modify the profile. The rail design facilitates the passage of the damping system without interfering with the path of the lower bearing.
                                                                  The use of clips reduces installation time by up to 40% compared to screw assembly. This translates into greater efficiency in production lines or on-site assembly, eliminating the need for power tools and reducing the margin of error in placement.
                                                                  Clips require housings with tolerances of ±0.1 mm to ensure a firm and durable press fit. This is especially relevant in CNC manufactured modules or demountable furniture systems where repeatability and accuracy are critical.
                                                                  Thanks to their high-strength polyamide construction, the clips absorb vibrations and keep their shape without loosening with frequent use. They are ideal for cabinets with sliding doors in high traffic areas or commercial use, as they combine mechanical strength with structural flexibility.
                                                                  This system can also be applied to existing cabinets, provided that the profile housing is accessible. It is a very useful solution for refurbishments or technical upgrades where you want to improve the performance of the cabinet without completely replacing the structure.
                                                                  The upper clip is optimised to withstand vertical traction and keep the profile aligned in ceilings or enclosure lids. The bottom clip, on the other hand, is designed to withstand axial pressure from the base, allowing for clean installation in plinths. Its visual coding also facilitates error-free assembly.
                                                                  The set guarantees dimensional and aesthetic compatibility between the top and bottom rail, optimises planning times and reduces assembly errors. In addition, the joint supply facilitates logistics and ensures that both profiles have the same alloy, treatment and surface finish.
                                                                  The extended length makes it possible to cover double modules or wide openings without the need for splices, which improves the stability of the system and avoids friction points. It is particularly useful for full-wall cabinets or large sliding fronts.
                                                                  Yes, thanks to its compatibility with clip and brake systems, it allows alignment adjustments and component replacement without disassembling the entire module. This facilitates maintenance in high traffic installations or environments where modularity and quick replacement is required.
                                                                  The design of the upper profile allows the integration of LED strips on the inside of the module without interfering with the door travel. The lower part can also be used for discreet plinth lighting solutions, sensors or magnetic dampers, depending on the project.
                                                                  It is recommended to transport the profiles in a horizontal position, on flat surfaces and protected with foam or cardboard to avoid deformation. On site or in the workshop, the profiles should be handled with gloves and avoid supporting them at specific points in order to maintain the straightness of the profile during assembly.
                                                                    The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                    The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                    The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                    The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                    An adhesive felt is supplied with the Soft Neco soft closing system, it should be mounted on the actuator of the door, unless you have a handle that is in that zone.
                                                                    Yes, you should always mount the adhesive felt on the actuator of the Soft Neco soft close door when the adjustable Neco sliding door system is used. In the un-adjustable system, it is not necessary to use it.
                                                                    The Neco trolley system is designed for panel thicknesses up to 23 mm, allowing precise and safe assembly in both 2 and 3 sliding door configurations.
                                                                    The kit includes a "slow" damped closing system that ensures smooth, quiet and safe closing of the doors, improving the user experience and the durability of the furniture.
                                                                    Yes. The system is adjustable in height, which makes it possible to correct unevenness or small deviations in the assembly without the need to dismantle the whole assembly.
                                                                    The trolleys are made of steel and high-strength technical plastic, which guarantees a long service life even in heavy-duty installations. The robust design supports stable and precise operation.
                                                                    2-door kit (SKU 6023210) includes hardware for 1 interior and 1 exterior. The 3-door kit (SKU 6023220) includes hardware for 2 interior and 1 exterior. Both are supplied with hardware and all necessary components.
                                                                    Assembly is by means of a suspended top rail and concealed bottom rail. A 10 mm deep by 69 mm wide recess needs to be machined in the cabinet to install the bottom carriages.
                                                                    The system supports up to 50 kg per leaf, provided that the board thickness is max. 23 mm and the specified fittings are used.
                                                                    Yes, the kit incorporates a "slow" soft closing system that allows a smooth movement and avoids sudden knocks, improving the user experience and the durability of the furniture.
                                                                    The trolleys are made of steel, which guarantees maximum mechanical strength and excellent performance in heavy-duty installations.
                                                                    The kit includes all the hardware to assemble 2 doors (1 inside + 1 outside) or 3 doors (2 inside + 1 outside), depending on the selected reference.
                                                                    The profile has a height of 50.6 mm and a width of 28 mm, optimised for a firm hold of the cabinet top and smooth running of the trolleys.
                                                                    It is designed to be installed at the top of the cabinet interior, ideal for hanging sliding door configurations. Compatible with Neco 1 and 2 door systems.
                                                                    The rail is manufactured from extruded aluminium with a matt anodised finish, ensuring friction resistance and durability in demanding environments.
                                                                    Hanging Neco trolleys incorporating ball bearings are used for quiet and effortless movement along the double slide channel.
                                                                    The profile is mechanically fixed into the module by means of screws, ensuring a stable fixation for panel thicknesses between 16 and 23 mm (depending on the trolley system).
                                                                    The Neco system is designed for 16 mm thick non-unitized wood panels. It allows independent doors without the need for a central assembly.
                                                                    This kit supports a maximum load of 50 kg per door, ideal for residential and commercial applications with heavy panels.
                                                                    The lower carriages have steel ball bearings for high smoothness and durability. The upper and lower runners come in 2300 mm aluminium profiles, ready to be cut to size.
                                                                    Neco brakes are installed directly without the need for prior machining. They are adjustable and allow the closing force to be adapted according to the weight and size of the door.
                                                                    In addition to its lateral and vertical adjustment by means of eccentrics, it incorporates an anti-derailment system and an adjustable brake without drilling. Its assembly is simple and robust, suitable for demanding projects.
                                                                    It is compatible with the Neco system with concealed track for sliding doors. It can be used in 1 or 2-leaf configurations and is suitable for installations with soft-close mechanism.
                                                                    The profile is made of high-strength technical plastic, with a load-bearing capacity of up to 50 kg per leaf. Its dimensions are: 14 mm high, 30.5 mm wide and 2,350 mm long.
                                                                    No, the rail is installed by screwing it directly to the base of the furniture, without the need for special machining. The kit includes the screws required for assembly.
                                                                    Yes, the rail can be cut to size on site using standard carpentry tools. A clean cut is recommended to maintain sliding performance.
                                                                    The grey plastic provides a neutral, unobtrusive finish, compatible with many furniture designs. In addition, it is a self-supporting, anti-corrosive and low-friction material, ideal for prolonged use without maintenance.
                                                                    This rail is designed for top supported installation, fitting directly onto the module without the need for machining or screw fixing. It is compatible with Neco concealed sliding systems.
                                                                    The rail has a "T" shape with a height of 52 mm on one side and 56 mm on the opposite side. The width of the profile is 32 mm, and its total length is 2.35 m.
                                                                    It is compatible with Neco sliding door trolley kits and the Soft Neco mechanism. These components slide in the track channels quietly and efficiently.
                                                                    Yes, the profile is made of extruded aluminium, so it can be easily cut to size with suitable tools, maintaining a clean finish to ensure the functionality of the system.
                                                                    The natural aluminium finish offers a durable, corrosion-resistant surface with excellent gliding properties. Its neutral aesthetic makes it ideal for integration into modern or technical cabinets.
                                                                    It is designed for external sliding doors with installation on the top track supported by the Neco system. It is suitable for both built-in wardrobes and dressing rooms with a wooden structure.
                                                                    The soft-close mechanism is installed in the top of the enclosure, operating when the door's final travel is actuated. The system is concealed in the top profile without interfering with the exterior design.
                                                                    It includes metal components in steel with a zinc-plated finish for maximum strength, and precision plastic parts in white to guide the frictionless closing and prevent damage to the structure of the furniture.
                                                                    It provides a soft and silent closing, protecting the structure of the furniture and avoiding sudden knocks when closing. It also improves the feeling of quality perceived by the end user.
                                                                    This kit is designed for a single external door. For projects with more leaves it is necessary to purchase a kit for each unit to be installed.
                                                                    This kit is designed for sliding doors with a thickness of 21 mm, and includes configurations for 2 or 3 doors (interior and exterior), with top hung and bottom hung rails.
                                                                    No. This model is not adjustable, so special precision in the measurement and machining of the module is recommended. The fixing is direct with the screws included.
                                                                    The kit uses trolleys with ball bearings in their axles, guaranteeing smooth and durable sliding. In addition, it includes fixing clips for plates and anti-derailment systems on each door.
                                                                    The system is designed to hold up to 50 kg per door, ideal for MDF or chipboard with veneer, without deformation or loss of stability.
                                                                    Each kit contains all the metal components and hardware necessary for the complete assembly of the trolleys, plates, fixing clips, as well as the upper and lower guide system. It does not include the rails and soft brakes, which must be purchased separately.
                                                                    It is designed to be installed in cabinets with 21 mm thick panels, without the need for height adjustment systems. It is fixed by means of standard screws included in the kit.
                                                                    The system is prepared for 2 or 3 doors, with distribution of 1 inner + 1 outer leaf (or 2 inner + 1 outer in the case of SKU 6051620), allowing sliding without interference between leaves.
                                                                    This kit supports up to 50 kg per leaf, thanks to the metal ball bearings mounted on steel plates, guaranteeing a smooth and safe movement.
                                                                    The boards must have a fixed thickness of 21 mm. It is not recommended to use it in lower or higher thicknesses, as this will compromise the stability of the system and the correct fitting of the fittings.
                                                                    No, this kit is the version without brake or soft-close system. For a cushioned closure it is necessary to opt for the Neco kit with soft-close or regulation, compatible with the same type of rails.
                                                                    The Neco rail can be installed on melamine, MDF or chipboard surfaces. The use of structural adhesive or appropriate screws is recommended depending on the type of support. The base of the rail allows a flush fit to the bottom of the module, optimising the visual finish and the stability of the assembly.
                                                                    This track is specifically designed for the bottom guide sliding door system and is compatible with the Emuca Placard model door system. It must be used in conjunction with a top profile and bottom wheels that fit into the 15mm wide channel of the track.
                                                                    Combined with the Placard system components, this rail can support a load of up to approximately 50 kg per door, provided that the recommendations for mounting, wheel centring and module levelling are observed.
                                                                    The rail is made of matt anodised aluminium, which provides excellent resistance to corrosion, scratching and frictional wear. This makes it a durable choice for heavy duty applications in both domestic and contract environments.
                                                                    Each package includes 8 units of rails, each with a length of 2.35 metres. This makes it easy to optimise cutting and assembly in large volume projects or industrial installations.
                                                                    Doors should be at least 16 mm thick and wide enough to adequately accommodate the actuator and brake. It is recommended that the weight per door should not exceed 50 kg to ensure smooth, efficient closing without sliding interference.
                                                                    Yes, the system is designed for quick assembly without the need for complex machining. It is fixed directly to the top of the door using screws, and the damping system is integrated using the included plastic brackets.
                                                                    The kit is optimised for use with the Neco top track. It is not recommended for use with other non-Emuca track systems as it may compromise the alignment of the actuator and the effectiveness of the soft close system.
                                                                    The Soft Neco soft close system is supplied with an adhesive felt, which must be mounted on the door actuator, unless we have a handle that encroaches on this area.
                                                                    Yes, we will always mount the adhesive felt on the door actuator of the Neco Soft Soft close door when using the Neco sliding door system with regulation. In the system without regulation it is not necessary to use it.
                                                                    This track requires a groove in the base of the cabinet with a minimum depth of 5 mm and a width of between 15 mm and 32 mm, which allows a stable installation without the need for complex machining. It is essential to respect these tolerances in order to avoid misalignments when moving the door.
                                                                    This track is designed for use with dual track undercarriage systems compatible with exposed guideways. It is recommended that wheels with plastic or rubber treads are used to minimise wear on the inside channel of the plastic track and to ensure quiet running.
                                                                    Yes, the rail is made of high-strength technical plastic with a grey finish, specially formulated to withstand moderate loads and prolonged use. Although it does not have the durability of aluminium, it is ideal for domestic applications or light, frequently used furniture.
                                                                    The product is supplied in units of 2.35 m in length and each package contains 8 pieces. This format is optimised for cut-to-size and repetitive assemblies, facilitating logistics in industrial projects or multiple installations.
                                                                    It is recommended to store the rails in a horizontal position and protected from sources of heat or excessive humidity. During installation, it is essential to fix it without applying tension, respecting the cutting length and avoiding bending that could affect the guidance of the sliding doors.
                                                                    The system includes carriages with ±3 mm height adjustment by means of eccentric screws. This feature facilitates the alignment of the doors after installation, improving the final aesthetics and making it possible to compensate for irregularities in the furniture or floor.
                                                                    The kit is compatible with doors up to 23 mm thick. It is ideal for standard melamine or solid wood panels, provided that the specified thickness limit is respected to ensure correct operation of the system.
                                                                    Each trolley is designed to carry a load of up to 50 kg combined, ensuring smooth and safe movement in medium-duty residential or contract applications. It is essential to use both trolleys per door to distribute the weight correctly.
                                                                    The trolleys are made of steel and high-strength technical plastic. This combination ensures a robust structure with durable sliding components, ideal for continuous use without loss of performance over time.
                                                                    The kit includes the necessary components to assemble 2 or 3 sliding doors (depending on the reference): upper and lower carriages, stops, guides, fixings and screws. Everything is supplied in a single package, which facilitates logistics and reduces errors on site.
                                                                    An unregulated system like this reduces set-up times and assembly errors by eliminating the need for subsequent calibration. It is ideal for standard production lines or repetitive installations where accuracy comes directly from CNC machining of the furniture.
                                                                    For smooth operation in unregulated systems, the recommended tolerances are ±0.2 mm in the milling of slide and guideway housings, and perfect alignment between top and bottom rail. Dimensional accuracy is key to avoid chafing or blocking.
                                                                    The thickness of the door influences the stability and movement absorption. In thicknesses of 25 mm, good structural rigidity is achieved, while 35 mm provides greater strength for tall or wide doors. Both thicknesses are included in the kits available for this system.
                                                                    The trolleys are designed with wheels made of high-strength technical plastic material to reduce rolling noise. In addition, the concealed mounting of the bottom rail avoids direct contact with the floor, which reduces vibrations and improves the smoothness of the movement at each opening.
                                                                    Yes, thanks to its compact and concealed design, this system allows LED lighting to be incorporated into the base or top of the module without interference. In addition, as it does not have mechanical regulation, it is more predictable for automation applications in doors with opening or assisted closing sensors.
                                                                    As it is fully integrated into the module, it improves the aesthetics of the furniture as there are no visible profiles. It also reduces the accumulation of dust or dirt in accessible areas, ideal for high-end furniture, integrated kitchens or minimalist design spaces.
                                                                    The profile is specifically designed to accommodate the wheels of the Neco trolley set, guaranteeing precise, backlash-free guidance. The geometry adjustment avoids vibrations, allowing smooth running even in modules with tight tolerances.
                                                                    Yes, it can be cut with an aluminium mitre saw. It is recommended to make a clean cut, deburr the ends and avoid deformation in the wheel contact area. This ensures that the bearing continues to work without interruption or jamming.
                                                                    Its load capacity, combined with the Neco trolleys (up to 50 kg), makes it perfectly suitable for high or frequently used doors. It is made of high-strength extruded aluminium and maintains its shape under prolonged stress without deforming.
                                                                    The track is compatible with Neco brake systems designed for interior integration. These are housed directly in the rail without affecting the wheel pitch. This allows an invisible design to be maintained without sacrificing the functionality of the soft close.
                                                                      The kit includes 2 soft closing devices, designed to dampen the movement of a sliding door, ensuring a controlled and silent closing.
                                                                      The Flow inverted soft close is designed for symmetrical sliding doors, allowing installation on both top and bottom profiles, increasing its versatility compared to other systems that only work in one direction.
                                                                      Yes, the system is compatible with 30 kg and 50 kg doors, ensuring optimum performance and adapting to the needs of various furniture projects.
                                                                      The system does not require frequent maintenance due to its high quality materials, but it is recommended to periodically check the fastening of the screws and clean the guides to avoid dust accumulation.
                                                                      No, the soft close can be installed directly on the guide profiles without the need for pre-machining, which makes it easy to install in different types of enclosures.
                                                                      The kit includes: 1 set of soft closing devices Installation accessories It is designed for sliding doors up to 30 kg, providing a controlled and quiet closing.
                                                                      The system is compatible with wooden or glass sliding doors, provided they have a maximum weight of 30 kg and are designed for guide systems compatible with the Flow kit.
                                                                      The kit is made of steel and high-strength plastic, guaranteeing durability and optimum performance over time.
                                                                      The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                      No, the mechanism is pre-configured to provide a soft and cushioned closing action, specifically designed for doors weighing up to 30 kg.
                                                                      The product includes: 1 rail for top or bottom mounting. It is specifically designed for the Flow sliding door system.
                                                                      The rail is made of high-strength aluminium and is available in two finishes: Matt anodised. Black anodised. Both finishes offer durability, corrosion resistance and a modern aesthetic design.
                                                                      Yes, the track is versatile and can be installed on either the top or the bottom of the door, allowing a recessed mounting that optimises space and improves the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                      No, this rail is designed exclusively for use with the Flow soft closing system, ensuring a perfect fit and a smooth glide.
                                                                      The rail has a standard length of 2.35m. It can be easily cut to length using basic cutting tools to suit different installation configurations.
                                                                      Kit includes: 1 set of sliding carriages. Skids to ensure smooth and stable movement. Mounting screws. It is designed for easy installation on Flow sliding door systems.
                                                                      This system is designed to support doors weighing up to 50 kg, providing a controlled and quiet sliding action.
                                                                      No, this kit is exclusively compatible with the Flow system, ensuring a perfect fit and optimal performance.
                                                                      The trolleys are equipped with high quality bearings for smooth running. In addition, they include an adjustment system with locks to fix the position and ensure stability.
                                                                      No, the kit includes all necessary screws and can be easily installed with standard hand tools such as a screwdriver.
                                                                      The brake ensures a smooth and controlled closing of the sliding doors, avoiding sudden shocks and improving the safety and durability of the system.
                                                                      The brake is 68 mm long, 19 mm high and 12 mm wide, allowing for easy installation in the track without taking up much space or interfering with the operation of the doors.
                                                                      No, this brake is designed specifically for the Flow system and requires Flow caps for installation, ensuring compatibility and optimum performance.
                                                                      It is made of high-strength grey plastic, which makes it light but robust, ensuring a long service life and easy maintenance.
                                                                      The packaging includes 40 units, making it easy to use for multiple or large installation projects.
                                                                      The cover improves the aesthetic finish of the track, prevents dust accumulation and increases safety by covering the exposed ends of the Flow sliding door system.
                                                                      A drill bit of 16 mm diameter and 13 mm depth is required to drill the mounting hole. Its design allows for quick assembly and disassembly by means of a snap-in anchor.
                                                                      No, these covers are designed exclusively for the Flow sliding door system, guaranteeing a perfect fit and optimum functionality.
                                                                      The lid has an overall size of 19 mm wide, 17 mm deep and 15 mm high. Its compact shape ensures a discreet and elegant finish.
                                                                      The packaging contains 40 units, ideal for multiple installations or large projects that require a uniform finish on all rails.
                                                                      No, the kit does not include the panels. It only provides the hardware, profiles and accessories necessary for the assembly of the sliding door system.
                                                                      The system uses top and bottom guides with ball bearings, which allows for smooth and quiet sliding. In addition, it has a 6 mm height adjustment for adjusting the position of the doors.
                                                                      Yes, the system allows for subsequent adjustments thanks to the integrated adjustment of the carriages. This facilitates the precise alignment of the doors even after installation.
                                                                      The system is designed to support doors weighing up to 30 kg, ensuring safe and stable operation.
                                                                      No, the system uses 2.35 m anodised aluminium profiles that are identical for the top and bottom guide, simplifying installation.
                                                                      The rail is installed directly onto the enclosure surface by means of plastic clips, without the need for pre-machining, which facilitates fast and efficient assembly.
                                                                      Yes, it is designed to be compatible with soft-close devices and Flow system brakes, providing safe and quiet sliding.
                                                                      The track is designed for doors with a maximum weight of 50 kg and a thickness of up to 20 mm, making it ideal for large and robust doors.
                                                                      Yes, the rail can be cut to size to suit specific enclosure configurations while maintaining functionality and aesthetics.
                                                                      It is made of aluminium with a black painted or matt anodised finish, providing high durability, corrosion resistance and a modern aesthetic finish.
                                                                      The bottom rail is designed to guide the doors supported at the bottom of the cabinet, while the top rail supports the doors at the top. Both use the same mounting system with plastic clips.
                                                                      No, this model is designed for surface mounting only. If flush mounting is required, other Flow system specific options should be considered.
                                                                      The rail is fixed by means of plastic clips that are screwed to the surface of the furniture, eliminating the need for pre-machining and facilitating installation.
                                                                      Yes, the track is compatible with doors up to 20 mm thick, providing versatility for different cabinet designs.
                                                                      Yes, it is designed to support doors with a maximum weight of 50 kg, guaranteeing stability and safe sliding.
                                                                      The clips ensure stable fixing of Flow rails in surface mounting, eliminating the need to machine the boards and simplifying installation.
                                                                      The clips are installed 28 mm from the front of the board to ensure precise alignment and a clean finish.
                                                                      It is recommended to install 2 clips per cabinet if the rail length is less than 2 metres and 3 clips if the rail length exceeds 2 metres, ensuring additional stability.
                                                                      Yes, the packaging includes the necessary screws for fixing the clips, facilitating quick and complete assembly.
                                                                      The clips are made of durable grey plastic, providing durability, light weight and a discreet finish that is hidden after installation.
                                                                      The kit is designed to install wooden sliding doors with top runners, suitable for cabinets with 16 mm thick boards. It does not require pre-machining and is easily fixed using clips included in the kit. The top and bottom runners have a length of 2.35 metres, allowing them to be used in large wardrobes.
                                                                      The system is designed to support doors weighing up to 30 kg each, ensuring smooth and safe operation. This makes it ideal for heavy duty enclosures in domestic or commercial environments.
                                                                      The system includes a soft-close mechanism integrated into the carriages, which reduces the impact of closing the doors and improves the life of the slides. Matt anodised materials ensure corrosion resistance and a durable appearance.
                                                                      The kit is designed for quick and easy installation without the need for specialised tools. Only a screwdriver is required to attach the clips and assemble the guides, making assembly easy for carpenters and distributors.
                                                                      The Flow system includes components designed to ensure safe use, such as the carriages with cushioned locking and deformation-resistant slides. Although no specific certification is detailed in the data sheet, the materials and design meet the usual quality standards in the furniture industry.
                                                                      The Flow 2 trolley system is designed to support wooden doors up to 50 kg, providing smooth and safe sliding thanks to its steel and reinforced plastic components.
                                                                      The trolleys include an adjustment block that allows height adjustment within a range of 9 mm, facilitating precise levelling of the doors without the need to dismantle the system.
                                                                      Yes, the Flow 2 system allows the installation of an additional soft close mechanism, compatible for both 30 kg and 50 kg doors, optimising the user experience and reducing the impact when closing.
                                                                      The carriages can be installed in two ways: by pre-machining the surface of the furniture or directly on the guide profiles, adapting to different assembly requirements.
                                                                      The system combines steel and high-strength plastic in the carriages, which ensures durability, stability and optimum gliding. The materials are wear-resistant, even in intensive applications.
                                                                      The Flow inverted soft close allows the closing of a sliding door to be cushioned, avoiding abrupt impacts and ensuring a smooth and silent movement, ideal for applications in domestic and professional environments.
                                                                      Yes, this soft close is compatible with Flow 2 sliding systems for 30 kg and 50 kg doors, offering simple and effective integration with the corresponding top and bottom profiles.
                                                                      Installation requires only a 2 mm hex spanner to attach the devices to the system, facilitating quick and uncomplicated assembly.
                                                                      Yes, the system is designed to be installed symmetrically on both the right and left side, adapting to different sliding door configurations.
                                                                      The soft close is made of high quality steel and plastic, ensuring wear resistance, durability and reliable performance in continuous use.
                                                                      The rail has a total width of 10 mm and a height of 7 mm. It is designed to fit into a 10 mm wide by 6.9 mm high machining on the top or bottom of the cabinet. These dimensions ensure precise integration and optimal sliding.
                                                                      The Ready track is intended for light to medium weight sliding doors in applications such as wardrobes, dressing rooms or modular furniture. It is recommended for use with hardware systems compatible with mortise profile.
                                                                      The profiles are press-fitted into a machined groove, without the need for additional screws. Their design allows for invisible and clean fastening, facilitating final assembly.
                                                                      The rail is made of matt anodised aluminium, which gives it excellent resistance to wear, oxidation and abrasion. It is ideal for frequently used environments due to its lightness, robustness and professional aesthetics.
                                                                      Only a milling machine or CNC is required to groove the furniture. No screws, adhesives or special tools are required to fix the rail.
                                                                      For a complete installation, the top and bottom rail of the Glider sliding system must also be available, as the brake is integrated into these components.
                                                                      The brakes are made of high-quality technical plastic, which guarantees mechanical strength, dimensional stability and a long service life even in frequently used environments.
                                                                      Its function is to cushion the closing of the sliding door, avoiding sudden knocks, protecting the furniture and offering a quieter and more controlled closing.
                                                                      Yes, the kit includes 2 brakes and an Allen key, allowing installation at both ends of the sliding door for symmetrical operation.
                                                                      The Glider braking system is designed to work in conjunction with the top and bottom rails of the Emuca Glider sliding system, ensuring full compatibility within the range.
                                                                      This kit allows the installation of 1 or 2 sliding doors with a maximum weight of 20 kg per door leaf, thanks to its undercarriages with heavy duty wheels.
                                                                      A Ø35 mm hole needs to be drilled in the bottom of the door, with a minimum depth of 14 mm, to accommodate the bottom carriages.
                                                                      The system allows ±1.5 mm adjustment from the carriage, facilitating fine adjustment of the alignment between doors once installed.
                                                                      The kit includes the necessary components to assemble 1 sliding door and incorporates lower carriages with wheels and 2 upper guides.
                                                                      The fittings are made of steel and technical plastic, ensuring durability, wear resistance and quiet operation of the sliding system.
                                                                      The guide is 10 mm thick and has a total width of 88 mm, designed to fit perfectly with the Clipo 15 interior sliding door system.
                                                                      It is made of high-strength technical plastic with a grey finish, which ensures a long service life and excellent dimensional stability.
                                                                      Yes, this guide has been designed to work in conjunction with the Clipo 15 trolley set for both single and double door configurations.
                                                                      The profile is supplied in a length of 2 metres and is designed to be cut to size according to the furniture design.
                                                                      The Clipo 15 system is installed without the need for complex tools or special machining. The slide is fixed to the base of the furniture and allows quick and error-free assembly thanks to its direct fitting system.
                                                                      The rail is installed by a tool-free system using integrated clips. It is designed to be pre-assembled on 19 mm thick boards and is fixed to the top of the cabinet with a minimum depth of 103 mm.
                                                                      The Clipo 16 system has integrated soft closing technology that improves the opening and closing experience, increasing the comfort of use and reducing the final impact.
                                                                      The rail is 2 metres long, with 15 mm wide x 15.6 mm deep sections. The inner part is designed to accommodate the clip system and sliding carriages.
                                                                      Suitable for top mounted interior wooden sliding doors. Ideal for walk-in wardrobes or wardrobes where a discreet integration without visible bottom guides is required.
                                                                      No, the product only includes the top rail profile. The sliding and braking mechanisms must be purchased separately within the Clipo 16 range.
                                                                      It is designed for wooden sliding doors of the Clipo 15 system. It requires boards with a minimum thickness of 19 mm for stable and strong anchoring.
                                                                      The profile is milled on the side and is installed by means of pressure secured by the lateral grooves. No complex tools are required, which facilitates fast and firm assembly.
                                                                      It is made of extruded aluminium with a natural finish, which provides high corrosion resistance and mechanical stability in daily use.
                                                                      The rail must be inserted into a 12 x 12 mm recess in the top or bottom of the board for optimal socket fixing.
                                                                      Yes, it can be used for both single and double door configurations, as long as the thicknesses and anchorages required by the Clipo 15 system are respected.
                                                                      In order to get the door to sit flush with the unit, with the Gilder sliding system, you need to take into account the dimensions of the following diagram:
                                                                      The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                      Each wheel must be inserted into a Ø15 mm hole previously drilled in the door, with a depth of 11 mm. The hole must be centred and drilled with a 35 mm diameter drill bit.
                                                                      This kit is designed for sliding doors up to 20 kg. For higher loads, Emuca has specific solutions with ball bearings and damping.
                                                                      Yes. The design of the Glider top rollers incorporates an adjustment system that allows the height of the door to be adjusted within a range of up to 4 mm.
                                                                      The wheels are made of technical plastic with a metal axle, and the anchoring system uses zamak. This combination guarantees wear resistance and quiet running.
                                                                      The package includes 1 set of carriages (top and bottom), 4 self-tapping screws and fasteners. It is suitable for 1 sliding door only.
                                                                      The kit is designed for doors from 16 mm to 19 mm thick, without the need for machining the door edge.
                                                                      This kit must be combined with the Clipo 16 wood top and bottom rail, made of aluminium and available in 2 m lengths, designed for snap-on mounting.
                                                                      The system supports up to 15 kg per leaf and is ideal for sliding doors on base units or drawer units with manual opening.
                                                                      Yes, it includes a retaining clip that acts as a mechanical lock to hold the door securely in position and prevent unintentional opening.
                                                                      Yes, the kit allows a manual adjustment of ±1.5 mm on the carriages, which facilitates the correct alignment of the doors after assembly.
                                                                      The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                      The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                      The Glider track is fitted into a 17 mm wide by 7 mm deep groove in the base of the module. This machining ensures that the door is perfectly aligned and concealed, favouring a minimalist and functional design.
                                                                      Matt anodised aluminium provides high resistance to abrasion, corrosion and frictional wear. In addition, it improves bearing sliding, reduces noise and maintains a professional appearance even in heavy-duty applications.
                                                                      Yes, the Glider track is compatible with soft closing systems when used in combination with specific Glider sliding system hardware. It is important to check that the dampers are correctly aligned with the door travel and the bottom profile.
                                                                      The track comes in units of 2.35 metres in length and is supplied in packs of 20 units. This format facilitates logistical planning, storage and cutting to size in mass production projects or contract installations.
                                                                      Periodic cleaning of the track channel with a dry cloth to remove dust or debris is recommended. In addition, it is advisable to check the alignment of the guides and to check the integrity of the bearings at least once a year in frequently used installations.
                                                                      The selection is made according to the door weight. There are two soft closing ranges, one for doors up to 8 kg and one for doors from 8 to 16 kg.
                                                                      The Clipo 15 system is designed for completely concealed installation, without the need for visible machining on the outside of the furniture. This makes it an ideal solution for kit furniture or minimalist design, where clean aesthetics and no exposed hardware is a priority.
                                                                      Thanks to its compatibility with thicknesses between 16 and 19 mm and its load capacity of up to 15 kg per door leaf, it is an optimal choice for lightweight doors in melamine, MDF or thin plywood, without compromising the stability or smooth gliding of the door.
                                                                      The press-fit assembly allows for quick and error-free installation, reducing time on production lines and on-site assembly. In addition, it eliminates the need for specific tools, which favours its use in modular or DIY furniture.
                                                                      Yes, the Clipo 15 does not interfere with the installation of LED strips, light profiles or opening sensors, as all components are concealed in the upper part of the module. This makes it particularly attractive for functional furniture projects with integrated technology.
                                                                      The Clipo 15 allows a height adjustment of ±1.5 mm by means of its integrated adjustment system. This functionality is key to correcting minor deviations after installation, ensuring perfect alignment between doors and interference-free closing.
                                                                      The matt anodising protects the profile against oxidation and improves scratch resistance. In addition, as it is made of aluminium, it offers controlled thermal expansion, which is key in large format enclosures or installations close to heat sources, avoiding deformations or structural noises.
                                                                      No, this profile is designed exclusively for straight applications. Due to its internal structure and function as a precision bearing guide, it is not recommended to bend it or manipulate its geometry, as this will affect the performance of the sliding system.
                                                                      The Glider system with brake allows a progressive and silent closing, avoiding knocks and prolonging the life of the components. The direct integration of the brake in the upper rail eliminates visible elements and improves the functional design of the cabinet.
                                                                      Yes, thanks to its anodised aluminium construction, this rail is resistant to humidity and steam without rusting or losing rigidity. It is a reliable solution for furniture in kitchens or built-in cabinets in well-ventilated bathrooms.
                                                                      The profile is available in lengths of 2.35 m and in packs of 20 units, which makes it easy to cut to size using automatic cutting machines. In addition, the machining required on the module is standard and can be replicated by CNC, ideal for assembly line production or modular manufacturing processes.
                                                                      The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                                      The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                                        The system is compatible with doors up to 20 kg and 25 kg, with adjustable heights between 1200 mm and 2200 mm. The load capacity varies depending on the model selected (Push or Pull).
                                                                        It is necessary to combine this kit with the push or pull system, vertical profiles, sliding rails and optional reinforcement or centring profiles to ensure a complete and functional assembly.
                                                                        Yes, the system allows the doors to be concealed in lateral spaces of the unit or between walls, optimising the use of space and maintaining a clean and elegant aesthetic.
                                                                        The system includes cup hinges with and without soft closing, glides, dampers and mounting hardware, ensuring smooth and quiet sliding.
                                                                        Made of steel, aluminium and plastic, the system guarantees high durability, wear resistance and ease of installation thanks to pre-assembled components.
                                                                        The system supports folding doors with loads of 20 kg and 25 kg per leaf. Compatible heights range from 1200 mm to 2700 mm, with panel thicknesses between 18 mm and 26 mm.
                                                                        Yes, to be combined with the basic hardware kit, slide rails, vertical profile and, optionally, reinforcement profiles and centring strips.
                                                                        No, the system uses a push-to-open mechanism, eliminating the need for handles. Opening is assisted and door adjustment is intuitive and accessible.
                                                                        It includes pre-assembled components that speed up assembly, allowing for quick and precise installation. In addition, the system is designed to conceal the doors in the side of the cabinet or between walls.
                                                                        Made of steel, aluminium and plastic, the system offers high strength, durability and a modern finish. Its design optimises the use of space while maintaining a clean aesthetic.
                                                                        The system supports folding doors with loads of 20 kg and 25 kg, and adjustable heights between 1200 mm and 2700 mm, with board thicknesses between 18 mm and 26 mm.
                                                                        Yes, it is necessary to combine this kit with the basic hardware set, the rails, the vertical profile and, optionally, reinforcement profiles and centring strips.
                                                                        No, the system uses a pull-to-open mechanism with assisted opening and soft closing, eliminating the need for handles.
                                                                        The system includes pre-assembled components, facilitating faster and more precise installation. In addition, the doors can be adjusted in an intuitive and accessible way.
                                                                        Made of steel, aluminium and plastic, the system offers high durability, wear resistance and an optimised design to take advantage of the space on the side of the cabinet or between walls.
                                                                        The track set serves as a guide to ensure smooth and precise movement of folding and retractable sliding doors, ensuring efficient sliding during opening and closing.
                                                                        It is compatible with doors up to 20 kg and 25 kg per leaf, with adjustable heights between 1200-2200 mm and 1900-2700 mm, depending on the model selected.
                                                                        Yes, it must be combined with the basic hardware set, the opening system (Push or Pull) and the vertical profile. Reinforcement and centring profiles are optional accessories.
                                                                        Made of matt anodised aluminium, it provides high strength, durability and an aesthetic finish, as well as optimising the use of space inside the module.
                                                                        Yes, the system can be installed both in modules and between walls, adapting to different configurations to optimise the design of the furniture.
                                                                        The vertical profiles act as a link between the upper and lower guide rails, ensuring the correct functioning of the folding and folding door system.
                                                                        It is compatible with doors weighing up to 20 kg or 25 kg, depending on the model, and heights ranging from 1200 mm to 2700 mm, with board thicknesses between 18 mm and 26 mm.
                                                                        Yes, the product includes two lengths of profiles that can be adapted according to the height of the door, allowing flexible configurations for different applications.
                                                                        It is essential to combine it with the basic hardware set, the opening system (Push or Pull) and the rail set. Reinforcement and centring profiles are optional to increase stability.
                                                                        It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which provides high durability, wear resistance and a modern finish that enhances the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                        The main function of the upper reinforcement profile is to reinforce the structure of the sliding system, guaranteeing greater stability and durability during use.
                                                                        The profile is 2765 mm long, 65 mm high and 100 mm wide. Its design allows for even load distribution, facilitating smoother sliding of doors and reducing wear and tear on hardware.
                                                                        Yes, it must be combined with the basic hardware set, the opening systems (Push or Pull), the vertical profile and the rail set to complete the installation.
                                                                        Yes, it is compatible with door thicknesses between 18 mm and 26 mm and heights adjustable according to the Folding Concepta3 system, optimising the structural performance for each configuration.
                                                                        Manufactured from matt anodised aluminium, it provides corrosion resistance, long-lasting durability and a modern finish that combines aesthetics and functionality.
                                                                        The bottom profile acts as a guide to prevent the doors from swinging and to ensure stable sliding. The centring devices ensure precise alignment of the doors during closing.
                                                                        The bottom profile has a length of 1360 mm and each package includes one unit of the product, designed for easy installation in Folding Concepta3 systems.
                                                                        Yes, the profile is compatible with board thicknesses between 18 mm and 26 mm, allowing it to be adapted to different sliding door configurations.
                                                                        The centring devices align and stabilise the doors during movement, preventing lateral displacements and improving closing accuracy.
                                                                        It is made of matt anodised aluminium, offering high wear resistance, long-lasting durability and an elegant design that complements the aesthetics of the Folding Concepta3 system.
                                                                        The Twofold system is ideal for small spaces or where full access to the interior of the unit is required without taking up front surface area, such as in laundry cupboards, pantries, hidden shelving or compact office furniture.
                                                                        The integration of the hinges into the carriage itself allows perfect alignment between the leaves, reduces the amount of hardware required and improves the stability of the assembly, facilitating faster and more precise installation.
                                                                        It is advisable to provide a minimum depth of 325 mm, to use boards of high dimensional stability and to respect the necessary margin between the door and the side of the module to allow correct folding and sliding without friction.
                                                                        Yes, the system allows the leaves to be disassembled by releasing the trolley, which is very useful in projects requiring maintenance, transport or replacement of components. The modular design facilitates intervention without disassembling the entire module.
                                                                        Periodically check the tightness of the hinges, apply dry lubricant to the bearings if noise is detected and make sure that there are no particles on the sliding guide. Avoid using abrasive products on the nickel-plated finish of the carriage.
                                                                        The undercarriage acts as a support and stabilisation point for folding door leaves. Its design with 4 cascading wheels distributes the weight better, prevents door wobbling and provides a more controlled opening and closing movement.
                                                                        It is especially recommended for higher doors, less rigid structures or where a firmer and more controlled opening is required. It is also essential when the system is mounted without an external bottom guide, as it provides internal support without the need for a visible channel.
                                                                        The trolley can be installed with concealed recessing in the base of the module, allowing it to maintain a clean aesthetic without visible elements. This feature makes it an excellent choice for modern, integrated or minimalist furniture.
                                                                        The system is designed to operate on flat, rigid surfaces. It is recommended to avoid uneven floors or low density bases that may cause play or vibration. A well levelled base significantly improves the sliding accuracy.
                                                                        It is recommended to clean the raceway regularly and check the condition of the wheels. No lubricant is necessary if kept free of debris. For heavy duty installations, it is advisable to check the tightness of the anchorage every 12 months.
                                                                        The Twofold central hinge is made of high-strength technical plastic, which allows for quicker assembly without complex machining. It also reduces the overall weight of the assembly, improves the aesthetics of the enclosure interior and maintains excellent durability in heavy-duty applications.
                                                                        Yes, the screw fixing design allows micro-adjustments to be made to the alignment after the doors have been fitted. This makes it easy to correct any deviations, even after initial assembly, without dismantling the entire system.
                                                                        The hinge should be mounted with the long side towards the upper leaf to facilitate the natural rotation of the assembly when opening and folding. Incorrect positioning can lead to blockages or unnecessary stress on the hinge. It is important to follow the recommended orientation for smooth folding.
                                                                        On tall or heavy doors, the centre hinge can be supplemented with magnetic stops or concealed dampers to assist closing. It is also possible to add a second intermediate fixing point or use the optional metal hinge when a more rigid connection is required.
                                                                        No lubrication is required. Periodic cleaning with a dry cloth is sufficient to prevent dust accumulation in the joint area. It is recommended to check the tightness of screws at least once a year in frequently used installations.
                                                                        This track is specifically designed to be fixed to the ceiling of the enclosure from below, acting as a top guide without the need for complex machining. Its design allows clean integration into tall modules, offering greater stability in folding doors without encroaching on usable space.
                                                                        It is recommended to use Ø3.5x15 mm countersunk screws, evenly distributed along the rail. It is important to fix the profile on a solid board surface or internal reinforcements, avoiding areas with pre-drilled holes that could weaken the anchorage.
                                                                        Yes, thanks to its straight profile and ceiling mounting, it allows the integration of LED strips on the sides of the enclosure without interference. It can also be combined with automatic opening sensors to activate the lighting when the folding doors are unfolded.
                                                                        The matt anodising provides greater resistance to corrosion and friction wear, maintaining a professional aesthetic even with intensive use. It is ideal for furniture in demanding environments such as kitchens, offices or contract projects where durability is key.
                                                                        Yes, the profile can be cut with suitable tools such as a mitre saw with an aluminium disc. After cutting, it is recommended to remove burrs to protect the wheels of the Twofold system and to maintain a smooth, blockage-free glide.
                                                                        Allows 2 folding sliding doors to be integrated into a small space without the need for a visible bottom rail. The soft closing system optimises the user experience in tall cupboards or integrated in laundry, kitchen or utility rooms, allowing full access without frontal interference.
                                                                        The new guide profile has been redesigned to provide precise soft closing without the need for counterweights or external mechanisms. This reduces the space required, improves the lateral stability of the blades and eliminates the end stroke common in non-braked systems.
                                                                        It is recommended to use boards between 16 and 19 mm thick, with good structural rigidity. Clean milling is essential to accommodate hinges and hardware, and close tolerances must be maintained to ensure correct alignment of carriages in combined movements.
                                                                        Yes, the system is optimised for workshop or on-site assembly using standard tools. The elements fit precisely thanks to templates or visual references that allow manual marking without the need for industrial tooling.
                                                                        Avoid accumulation of dust on the profiles and check the condition of the brake annually. No lubrication is required if kept clean, but in wet or heavily used areas it is recommended to apply dry lubricant preventively to the piston contact areas.
                                                                        The maximum dimensions per door are 2400 high and 500 wide (per door leaf).
                                                                        The Twofold system offers the versatility of sliding well when assembled with and without a lower guide. Whether it is used depends on the type of wardrobe in which the system is mounted.
                                                                        The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                        The most common practice is to place the lateral hinges in alignment with the central ones. However, for closets with really heavy doors, two of the concealed hinges can be placed at the top of the closet to increase resistance and stability.
                                                                        Yes, the mechanism is different in the doors that have soft close hinges.
                                                                        The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                                        The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                                        The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                                        The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                                        This profile is designed for glass thicknesses of 8 to 10 mm, ensuring a perfect fit and secure fixing.
                                                                        No, installation is by pressure using the specific components of the Placard system. However, it is recommended to check that the glass is correctly positioned to avoid unwanted movement.
                                                                        Yes, the 2.35 m profile can be cut using suitable tools, such as an aluminium saw, to fit the dimensions of the glass or enclosure.
                                                                        The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                        The following video shows how the sliding wardrobe door system is assembled.
                                                                        For surface mounting, the door must be at least 35 mm thick, while for flush mounting it must be at least 40 mm thick.
                                                                        The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                        Carriage sets are selected depending on the door weight. Two weight ranges, one for doors up to 40kg and one for doors from 40kg to 80kg, are available for soft-close systems.
                                                                        The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                        The Pasadena handle has a 180 mm spindle and a total length of 240 mm.
                                                                        It is made of steel with a textured black finish, giving it durability and a sleek design.
                                                                        Yes, it is necessary to drill holes on the outside of the door to attach the handle correctly. The design facilitates a comfortable and secure grip.
                                                                        It is compatible with wooden doors between 35 and 45 mm thick, designed for sliding door systems.
                                                                        The kit includes an exterior handle, mounting plate and screws, all individually packaged to prevent damage during transport.
                                                                        These covers allow the ends of the Railway system profile to be closed off, improving the visual finish, preventing the ingress of dirt and protecting the sliding system.
                                                                        They bolt directly to the top rail mechanism of the Railway system, and are complemented by the front cover of the same system for total aesthetic integration.
                                                                        Each side cover is 53 mm wide, 89.6 mm high and 5 mm thick, compatible with the standard Railway system.
                                                                        They are made of high-strength grey technical plastic, which guarantees durability, dust resistance and ease of assembly.
                                                                        Yes, they incorporate a small internal fold that favours the precise coupling with the front cover, avoiding displacements or vibrations.
                                                                        The system can be installed on ceilings or walls. For wall anchoring, the 5 anchors included are required, compatible with partition walls from 18 to 40 mm thick. No prior machining is required.
                                                                        Each kit supports up to 80 kg per leaf thanks to its heavy duty ball bearing carriages, with ±10 mm height adjustment and anti-slide system.
                                                                        It includes a soft-close mechanism pre-installed on the trolleys that ensures a soft closing of the doors without bouncing or impact.
                                                                        The anodised aluminium rail is supplied with a length of 2,000 mm and can be cut to size on site if required. It also includes a 2,000 mm front cover to conceal the sliding system.
                                                                        The kit contains: 1 top rail, 1 front cover, 1 set of carriages with brake, 5 wall anchors and 1 set of grey plastic side covers for aesthetic finishing of the system.
                                                                        The front cover enhances the final aesthetic finish of the wall mounted sliding door system by concealing the guides and protecting the mechanism from dust and dirt.
                                                                        It has a length of 2 m, a height of 89 mm and a thickness of 14 mm. It is compatible exclusively with the Railway wall mounting system.
                                                                        It is fixed by means of a snap-in system, without the need for additional fittings, which makes it easy to install in wall installations.
                                                                        It is made of matt anodised aluminium, which guarantees high resistance to corrosion and a homogeneous aesthetics with the rest of the system.
                                                                        Yes, aluminium allows clean and precise cutting with standard tools, making it easy to adapt to multiple width configurations.
                                                                        This kit is designed for sliding doors hung in wood, compatible with the Railway ceiling mounting system. It is ideal for boards from 18 to 40 mm thick.
                                                                        The kit includes all fittings and fixings required for the assembly of 1 sliding door with integrated brake, including carriages, brake, bottom guide, fixings and adjustment tool.
                                                                        The brake is automatically activated on closing, providing a cushioned movement without the need to machine the rail. Protects the furniture and enhances the user experience.
                                                                        It incorporates 4-wheel carriages with ball bearings that guarantee smooth, silent and stable sliding. In addition, they allow height adjustment of up to 10 mm.
                                                                        No. The included guide is designed to work with a standard bottom groove, and allows the door to remain stable during opening and closing without additional machining.
                                                                        It is designed for wall mounting the top rail of the Railway system on suspended sliding doors. It is particularly useful when it is not desired to fix the rail to the ceiling or when a solution with a visible and accessible finish is required.
                                                                        Yes, its design has been optimised to fit perfectly with the top rails of the Railway system, allowing a firm and stable fixing of the top profile to the wall.
                                                                        The bracket measures 43.3 mm wide × 63.5 mm high. It is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish, offering durability and a modern and uniform aesthetic with the rest of the elements of the system.
                                                                        It is installed by screwing directly to the wall. The system is fast and safe, and also allows the subsequent assembly of the front covers to conceal the fittings and improve the aesthetics.
                                                                        The packaging contains 5 individual anchors, ready to be used together with the Railway system and the corresponding profiles and covers.
                                                                        The rail is installed by bolting directly to the ceiling or top panel of the enclosure. Its profile allows the use of additional anchors to improve rigidity in hanging installations.
                                                                        The rail has a cross section of 42.5 mm high x 54.5 mm wide. It is designed to integrate directly into the Railway system of suspended overhead trolleys, ensuring stability of travel.
                                                                        Yes, provided the appropriate Railway trolleys are used, it can support doors up to 80 kg per door leaf, ensuring smooth and safe guidance.
                                                                        Yes, the 2 m and 3.9 m versions can be easily cut to the desired length with standard tools, always respecting the squareness for correct sliding of the trolleys.
                                                                        The profile is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which gives it resistance to corrosion, durability and a neutral aesthetic that can be adapted to any type of furniture.
                                                                        The Railway system is designed for suspended installation, fixed directly to the ceiling or to an overhead structural panel. It is recommended for installation on solid surfaces such as solid wood, structural boards or metal profiles, with fixings suitable for the type of support and weight of the door.
                                                                        The kit is designed for wooden doors with a minimum thickness of 18 mm. The system is suitable for solid doors as well as for technical panels, provided that the installation tolerances of the wheel system and the integrated damper are observed.
                                                                        Two versions of the Railway kit are available: one for doors up to 40 kg and one for doors from 40 to 80 kg. Both versions include sealed ball bearing trolleys and a shock absorbing brake that ensures controlled closing even with large doors.
                                                                        The kit includes 4 castors, shock absorbing brake, fixings, bottom guide and tools such as Allen key. Standard tools such as drill, screwdriver and level are required for installation. No special machining of the door is required, which speeds up installation.
                                                                        Yes, Railway trolleys allow height adjustment to correct any deviations after the door has been hung. This functionality facilitates alignment and ensures optimum operation of the soft close and friction-free travel.
                                                                        The Barn system allows installation without machining inside the module, which reduces assembly times and avoids structural errors. In addition, it provides decorative and functional value when integrated as a design element, ideal for rustic, industrial or modern projects with exposed aesthetics.
                                                                        Yes, for double door installations, the kit can be duplicated. It is important to ensure the alignment of the profiles and to leave adequate clearance between the two leaves to avoid interference during opening and closing.
                                                                        It is not recommended to fix directly on plasterboard without structural reinforcement. To guarantee safety and correct operation, it is advisable to install on brick or concrete walls or to add an internal wooden frame anchored to the metal profiles of the partition.
                                                                        Periodically check the tightness of bolts, ensure that the wheels do not accumulate dust or debris, and apply dry lubricant to the rotating axle if excessive noise or friction is detected. Black epoxy painted steel is highly resistant, but direct exposure to persistent moisture should be avoided.
                                                                        The Barn system is designed as a free-opening solution without built-in soft closing. However, it can be combined with external damping accessories or concealed brake guides if they are correctly integrated behind the panel, adapted to the final door travel.
                                                                        Its compact design hides the soft close inside the rail, offering a damping system without visual impact. This makes it an ideal solution for spaces where clean, minimalist design is key, without sacrificing the functionality of assisted closing.
                                                                        The doors must be machined at the top edges to accommodate the carriage and the embedded damping system. No visible front perforations are required, which improves the aesthetics of the assembly and speeds up the series production process.
                                                                        It is essential to reinforce the false ceiling structure with a wooden or metal substructure to support the load of the track and door. The system must be fixed to continuous structural elements, not directly to the plasterboard, to ensure safe and stable operation.
                                                                        The soft close is optimised for doors up to 40 kg and minimum door thicknesses of 35 mm. Using lighter or thinner doors may decrease the braking efficiency, while heavier doors require the top version of the kit or an additional reinforced latch.
                                                                        Yes, the system allows integration with automation solutions using magnetic or presence sensors, as its mechanical operation is silent and does not interfere with electronic devices. It is ideal for smart architecture or advanced retail projects.
                                                                        The system includes a brake with progressive damping that acts on the last centimetres of the stroke, allowing a smooth closing, without bumps or recoil. This feature enhances the user experience and protects the structure of the furniture in the long term.
                                                                        The brake has been tested to exceed more than 50,000 opening and closing cycles without loss of performance. This makes it suitable for frequently used installations such as kitchen cabinets, offices or partitions in residential and commercial spaces.
                                                                        The system is designed to be integrated into new installations, but can be adapted to existing installations as long as the track is compatible. Its modular design allows the door to be disassembled and the brake incorporated without replacing the rest of the hardware.
                                                                        No, the Railway Retrac brake is factory calibrated to activate in the last 80 mm of travel. Its behaviour is constant, which guarantees reliability in multiple installations or in series production without the need for adjustments per door.
                                                                        In cases where a thinner door is required, it is recommended that an additional rail or profile be added to ensure the correct fit of the trolley and brake. This maintains stability and allows the functionality of the Railway Retrac system to be retained without modifying the hardware.
                                                                        The flush mounting allows the profile and the hardware system to be completely hidden, achieving a clean and continuous aesthetic finish. It is ideal for high-end architectural projects, hotels or premium homes where design without visible elements is a priority.
                                                                        It is recommended to leave a slot with a tolerance of ±1 mm to the outer width of the track to allow for insertion and removal if necessary. The alignment must be perfect, as any deviation may affect the movement of the hung door system.
                                                                        Yes, as it is a technical rail with a clean geometry, it can house linear magnetic sensors or adapt to home automation systems with assisted opening. Its integration in false ceilings favours the concealment of wiring and facilitates connection to home automation control systems.
                                                                        Matt anodising provides a protective coating that is resistant to moisture, scratching and oxidation, ideal for projects near wet or high traffic areas. Its durability is superior to standard lacquering and maintains aesthetics in demanding conditions.
                                                                        Yes, the profile can be easily cut with an aluminium disc cutter. It is essential to remove burrs after cutting and to keep the profile clean at the ends so as not to compromise the passage of the carriage and the effectiveness of the integrated brake.
                                                                        The Wall system allows assembly without the need for building work or fitting into partition walls, facilitating quick and clean installation. As no bottom guide is required, the continuity of the flooring is maintained and any architectural barrier is avoided, making it ideal for accessibility projects or light refurbishments.
                                                                        Yes, the soft-close mechanism allows precise adjustment of both the braking force and the final closing position. This can be done by accessing the system from the side without dismantling the door, ideal for fine-tuning the movement according to the weight of the panel.
                                                                        The use of a long spirit level and shims between the top rail and the wall is recommended. The Wall system includes a bottom guide that compensates for small vertical deviations of the door leaf during travel, ensuring a swing-free and shock-free closing.
                                                                        The Wall system is designed to integrate with panels up to 40 mm, making it compatible with rustic, minimalist or contemporary doors. By concealing hardware and brackets, it enhances the aesthetics of natural or lacquered wood without visible elements.
                                                                        Yes, provided that the track fixing area is reinforced with metal structure or wooden frames behind the plasterboard. The anchoring must be made in solid elements to guarantee the support of the suspended door and to avoid bending with repeated use.
                                                                        The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                        The following video shows how the sliding door system for wardrobes is assembled.

                                                                        In the commonly used door thicknesses of 40 mm and 45 mm, the clearance between the door and the wall is 14.8 mm and 12.3 mm respectively.
                                                                        The required opening width depends directly on the length of the track used. In this case, the Barn system for suspended wooden sliding doors features a 2,000 mm (2-meter) track, and we recommend: That this system is suitable for openings approximately 700 to 1,000 mm wide. Technical explanation: The 2,000 mm track allows for the full travel of a door panel up to approximately 1,000 mm wide. For the opening to function properly, the door must be able to slide completely out of the opening. Therefore, the door width is usually equal to or slightly greater than the opening width (to ensure proper overlap and coverage). Example: 800 mm opening → recommended door: 850–900 mm → 2 m guide rail suitable. This range covers the most common door widths in residential settings, ensuring proper system operation.
                                                                        To ensure the Barn system is installed correctly, we recommend leaving a minimum clearance of approximately 150–200 mm between the ceiling and the opening. This space is required to accommodate: the top rail, the mounting brackets, the sliding carriages, and the door’s installation clearance. Furthermore, it is important to ensure that the door does not scrape the floor and that there is sufficient clearance for installation and adjustment.
                                                                        If it is mounted in the option with mechanised door, the distance is 10mm.
                                                                          Emuca kitchen accessories are designed to improve ergonomics and space optimisation, integrating seamlessly into standard kitchen units. They are manufactured from durable materials such as steel and aluminium, with long-lasting finishes resistant to moisture and intensive use. They include solutions such as pull-out baskets, corner units, waste sorting bins and internal organisers, with high load-capacity slides and soft-close options, ensuring reliable operation and a long service life in both professional and high-end domestic kitchen projects.
                                                                          The Gola system allows modern, handle-free kitchens to be fitted using aluminium or plastic profiles. To install it, you must ensure that the Gola profiles and their accessories are correctly aligned in the kitchen furniture modules.
                                                                          Gola joint fittings are designed to create an aesthetic continuity in horizontal or upper profiles, while straight cut joint fittings are intended for non-angled terminations.
                                                                          The kit includes 8 accessories for the Gola top profile, providing everything needed for a complete installation.
                                                                          The Gola kit accessories are made of high quality, durable plastic, ensuring durability and a professional finish.
                                                                          Available finishes include white, black, grey and anthracite grey, adapting to different kitchen styles.
                                                                          The MAW (Maximum Allowable Weight) of the Gola profile system finishes depends on their correct installation and the components used, guaranteeing stability in standard kitchen furniture.
                                                                          The Gola system is installed in kitchen units with top, bottom and vertical profiles. Be sure to follow the included assembly instructions to ensure proper alignment and a clean finish.
                                                                          It is recommended to leave a gap of at least 2 mm between the door and the profile to ensure a smooth opening without chafing.
                                                                          To integrate appliances with the Gola system, it is important to use the appropriate vertical and horizontal profiles, ensuring that they do not interfere with the dimensions of the appliance.
                                                                          The PMA (Maximum Weight Allowance) of the Gola profile system finishes ensures stability and strength in kitchen furniture designed for standard use.
                                                                          The Gola Top profile is installed by fitting and requires a 3 mm pre-milling of the board to fit perfectly. The manufacturer's instructions must also be followed to ensure correct fixing.
                                                                          This profile is compatible with table tops with a thickness of 18 mm, ensuring perfect integration into modern kitchen furniture.
                                                                          Yes, the design of the Gola Top Profile makes it ideal for kitchens with a minimalist style, thanks to its clean finish and unobtrusive integration into the furniture.
                                                                          The long bracket 8 is an anchoring piece that secures the Gola profile to the kitchen unit, providing stability and safety in the installation.
                                                                          It is made of high-strength grey plastic, guaranteeing durability and a perfect fit.
                                                                          The number of brackets required depends on the length of the Gola profile. For a secure fixing, it is recommended to use at least two brackets per profile.
                                                                          Yes, this bracket is compatible with boards of different thicknesses, including boards up to 19 mm thick.
                                                                          The central Gola profile is designed to be discreetly integrated into the central part of the kitchen units, offering a clean and modern look. Its main function is to allow convenient access to drawers and doors without the need for external handles.
                                                                          The central Gola profile is made of aluminium with finishes such as white painted, matt anodised or gold anodised, ensuring strength and durability.
                                                                          The central Gola profile has a length of 2.35 metres, ideal for fitting a wide variety of kitchen units.
                                                                          The central Gola Profile design provides a modern, linear aesthetic, eliminating the need for external handles and facilitating cleaning by reducing edges and surfaces exposed to dust.
                                                                          Accessories such as brackets, end caps and brackets are fully compatible with the Central Gola Profile, making installation easy and allowing for custom configurations.
                                                                          The short bracket A for Gola profile is designed to fix and correctly position the Gola profile on top of the kitchen units, providing stability and support in its installation.
                                                                          The short holder A is made of high quality grey plastic, guaranteeing durability and strength.
                                                                          Yes, the short bracket A is compatible with various kitchen furniture configurations using the Gola profile system.
                                                                          The packaging of the short bracket A includes a total of 40 units, ideal for large-scale installation projects.
                                                                          Yes, the short bracket A is designed to offer high resistance to wear and corrosion, ensuring optimum performance in kitchen environments.
                                                                          The central vertical curved Gola profile is designed for installation in handle-free kitchen fronts, especially in tall units and pantry cabinets. It provides convenient access and modern aesthetics by eliminating visible handles.
                                                                          The profile has a standard length of 2.35 metres, although it can be cut to any desired length to suit the needs of the furniture.
                                                                          The profile is made of high quality aluminium with a white painted finish, which guarantees durability and resistance to wear and tear.
                                                                          Yes, the Gola profile can be cut to size using suitable tools, allowing it to be adapted to different furniture projects.
                                                                          The packaging includes a central vertical curved Gola profile with protection against scratches or damage during transport.
                                                                          The bracket with expansion screw is designed to secure the mounting of the Gola profile to the furniture module, providing a safe and strong system.
                                                                          The expansion screw allows the bracket to be firmly fixed to the profile and the module, ensuring a stable and reliable installation in different configurations.
                                                                          Yes, this bracket is compatible with all Gola profile systems used in kitchen units and furniture.
                                                                          The bracket is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, ensuring durability and corrosion resistance.
                                                                          The packaging includes 50 units of brackets with expansion screws, ready for installation in furniture projects.
                                                                          The Gola inner corner is designed to allow the upper Gola profiles to be joined at the inner corners, ensuring a perfect fit.
                                                                          The main function of the angle is to ensure seamless visual integration and firm connections between the upper Gola profiles.
                                                                          Yes, this angle is compatible with all Gola top profiles used in kitchen furniture.
                                                                          The angle is made of aluminium with a white painted finish for strength and durability.
                                                                          The packaging includes 1 angle bracket, 1 hexagonal spanner and 4 screws for installation.
                                                                          The cover for Gola central profile has the function of sealing the side parts of the profile, providing an aesthetic finish and protecting it from friction or damage.
                                                                          Yes, this cover is specifically designed to be compatible with all central Gola profiles used in kitchen systems.
                                                                          It is made of high quality aluminium with a white painted finish, which guarantees strength and durability.
                                                                          The packaging includes a closed cover for the central profile, a hexagonal spanner and two screws required for correct installation.
                                                                          The lid is fixed by means of a precision mechanism that ensures a perfect fit together with the included screws, preventing displacement or misalignment.
                                                                          The Gola Top profile facilitates the opening of handle-free doors, providing a modern and minimalist aesthetic.
                                                                          Yes, the Gola Top profile is designed to fit 16 mm and 19 mm thick boards, ensuring its versatility.
                                                                          It is made of high quality aluminium with a white painted finish, guaranteeing durability and resistance.
                                                                          The Gola Top profile has a length of 2.35 metres and an elongated design with an outer overhang of 18 mm.
                                                                          The packaging includes a Gola Top profile, ideal for completing the Gola system in kitchen furniture.
                                                                          The accessories of the Gola central profile kit are used on the ends of the profiles to provide a perfect and professional finish to the furniture.
                                                                          Yes, the fittings are very easy to install, as they require no screws and snap together for quick and secure mounting.
                                                                          The kit includes 8 accessories specifically designed to fit the Gola central profile.
                                                                          They are made of sturdy plastic, guaranteeing durability and aesthetic appeal.
                                                                          The accessories are available in white, black, grey and anthracite grey finishes to match the furniture design.
                                                                          The Gola curved vertical side profile is designed to be integrated into handle-less kitchen fronts, optimising the opening of doors in pantry columns or cupboards.
                                                                          The profile has a length of 2.35 metres and can be cut to size to suit different kitchen projects.
                                                                          Yes, installation is simple, thanks to a direct anchoring method and sliders that facilitate assembly.
                                                                          It is made of high quality aluminium, guaranteeing long-term durability and strength.
                                                                          The Gola curved vertical side profile is available in white, black, anthracite, matt anodised, gold anodised and stainless steel anodised finishes.
                                                                          The Gola top profile cover serves the purpose of sealing the side parts of the profile, providing an aesthetic and functional finish.
                                                                          The cover is specifically designed to fit Gola profiles with dimensions of 54x52.6 mm.
                                                                          Yes, installation is simple thanks to an anchoring system with two screws included that ensure a precise and firm fit.
                                                                          It is made of high quality aluminium, which guarantees strength and durability in daily use.
                                                                          This cover is available in various finishes, such as white, black, anthracite, matt anodised, gold anodised and stainless steel anodised.
                                                                          The Gola oven profile is specifically designed for kitchen units with built-in ovens, providing perfect integration between the appliance and the unit.
                                                                          The profile has a length of 580 mm, ideal for covering the height of the oven in combination with the side profiles.
                                                                          The product includes a Gola profile and screws to ensure quick and easy assembly.
                                                                          It is made of high quality aluminium, which guarantees strength and durability in kitchen environments.
                                                                          It is available in finishes such as anthracite grey, matt anodised and stainless steel anodised to match different kitchen styles.
                                                                          The kit includes 2 x 2.35 metre Gola profiles, 2 sets of Gola accessories and 2 brackets with screws for the profiles, providing everything you need for a complete installation.
                                                                          It is designed for kitchen furniture with handle-less fronts, providing a modern and functional design.
                                                                          The included profiles are each 2.35 metres long and can be adapted to modules of different dimensions.
                                                                          This kit facilitates assembly thanks to the included accessories and brackets, reducing installation time and guaranteeing a precise fit.
                                                                          The profiles are made of high quality aluminium, which ensures strength, durability and a flawless finish.
                                                                          The kit includes 2 x 2.35 metre Gola profiles, 2 sets of Gola accessories and 2 brackets with screws, providing everything you need for a complete installation.
                                                                          It is suitable for kitchen furniture with handle-less fronts, providing a modern and functional design.
                                                                          The included profiles have a length of 2.35 metres, ideal for fitting into standard kitchen units.
                                                                          The kit facilitates assembly thanks to the included accessories, simplifying installation and guaranteeing a perfect fit.
                                                                          The profiles are made of high quality aluminium, which ensures durability, strength and a flawless finish.
                                                                          The Gola-R profile includes a 2.35 metre long top profile and is compatible with the corresponding accessories such as brackets and screws.
                                                                          It is ideal for kitchen units with handle-less fronts, providing a functional and aesthetic solution for opening the units.
                                                                          The profile has a length of 2.35 metres, which makes it perfect for fitting into standard kitchen units.
                                                                          Accessories such as Gola profile brackets and expansion screws are required for a complete and secure installation.
                                                                          It is made of high quality aluminium with a matt painted finish, ensuring durability and strength.
                                                                          The central Gola-R profile includes a 2.35 metre long profile and is compatible with the corresponding accessories such as brackets and screws.
                                                                          It is ideal for kitchen units with handle-less fronts, offering a functional and aesthetic solution for opening the units.
                                                                          The profile has a length of 2.35 metres, which makes it perfect for fitting into standard kitchen units.
                                                                          Accessories such as Gola profile brackets and expansion screws are required to ensure a complete and safe installation.
                                                                          It is made of high quality aluminium with a matt painted finish, ensuring durability and strength.
                                                                          The kit includes 8 accessories for the Gola-R top profile, designed to ensure a perfect finish at the end of the furniture assembly.
                                                                          These fittings are used for the ends of profiles, ensuring a precise fit and a clean finish on kitchen furniture.
                                                                          No, the fittings are designed to be press-fitted, so no screws or tools are required for installation.
                                                                          They are made of high-quality, resistant plastic, ensuring durability and impeccable aesthetics.
                                                                          Yes, these accessories are compatible with all available Gola-R profile finishes, including matt white, black and matt anodised.
                                                                          The kit includes 8 accessories specifically designed for the Gola-R central profile, guaranteeing a perfect finish at the ends of the furniture.
                                                                          These accessories allow you to seal and finish off the ends of the Gola-R central profile, ensuring a clean and professional finish to your kitchen furniture.
                                                                          The fittings are press-fitted without the need for screws or additional tools, making them quick and easy to assemble.
                                                                          They are made of high quality, durable plastic, designed to provide durability and maintain impeccable aesthetics.
                                                                          Yes, the accessories are compatible with all available Gola-R profile finishes, such as matt white, black and matt anodised.
                                                                          The RAL code of the white finish of the profiles system Gola is approximately 9003. The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish of the the profiles system Gola is approximately 7043. The RAL code of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily assemble the profile system Gola.

                                                                          In order to install the Gola profiles on a unit it is recommended to have gap measurements for being able to open the drawer or the door. These measurements are for guidance purposes and may vary depending on the overlaps. For an upper Gola profile it is recommended to have a 37 mm gap, and for a central Gola profile a 40 mm gap is recommended. The image shows a vertical view of the side of the unit.
                                                                          In order to install a Gola horizontal profile system in aluminium, it is necessary to use type A or B joining supports. These supports do not have handles and they make it easy to anchor or move the horizontal profiles simply and comfortably. Their pressure mounting or direct screwing requires machining of Ø10 mm in the side of the furniture. The difference between them is the distance between the edge of the machining to the centre of the drill hole. For the A support, it is 15 mm and for B it is 19.7 mm, both are valid for fastening the upper profile as well as the central profile. Depending on the distance of the machining that you want. you can choose one support or the other.
                                                                          The Gola system joining accessories are created using plastic (grey or white finish), and also, the accessories that are positioned on corners or corner edges require the profile to have a mitre joint. On the contrary, the straight cut accessories are created from matt silver anodized aluminium, and also, with all of them the profile only needs a straight cut, therefore preparation is easier.
                                                                          Household appliances that can be integrated are completely compatible with the Gola profile system (with or without bumper). Thanks to that compatibility, household appliances remain hidden, thus adding a sense of continuity to kitchen furniture. In order to facilitate the work of manufacturers and assemblers, it is only necessary to bear in mind that the sum of the height along with the base, needs to be greater than the height of the household appliance along with the upper Gola profile that is used. Also, the attached document shows details with practical examples.
                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Gola profile for ovens.

                                                                            The set includes 2 x 2.35 m long plinth bars, 2 x 90 degree joints and 2 x flexible joints for customised installation.
                                                                            The plinths are made of sturdy plastic with black or anodised finish, while the connecting fittings are made of highly durable plastic.
                                                                            Yes, the skirtings can be easily cut to fit the specific measurements of your kitchen, ensuring a perfect fit.
                                                                            This batch of skirtings is available in a height of 100 mm and a length of 2.35 m per bar, allowing for different design needs.
                                                                            Installation is simple, using the included joint fittings. These ensure stable mounting, either in 90-degree corners or with the flexible joints for other configurations.
                                                                            The Plasline flexible angle is used to join skirtings in corners with different angle configurations, ensuring an aesthetic and functional joint.
                                                                            The flexible angle allows bending between 60° and 180°, making it versatile for a variety of skirting applications.
                                                                            It is made of sturdy plastic and aluminium, with durable finishes that combine functionality and design.
                                                                            Yes, the flexible angle is coated with scratch and wear resistant paint, which ensures durability in daily use.
                                                                            The packaging includes 20 units of flexible angles, ideal for complete plinth installations in the kitchen.
                                                                            Plasline extensions allow you to join and extend kitchen plinths, adapting to units of different heights and ensuring uniform visual integration.
                                                                            They are compatible with 100 mm, 120 mm, 150 mm and 180 mm socket heights.
                                                                            They are made of plastic and satin anodised aluminium, offering strength and a quality finish.
                                                                            No, Plasline extensions come ready to install and do not require any additional adjustments or trimming to fit compatible sockets.
                                                                            The packaging includes 10 extension units, ideal for large-scale kitchen projects.
                                                                            The Plasline 90 degree angle for Plasline skirting boards allows skirting boards to be securely and aesthetically joined at internal corners, ensuring a solid connection and a uniform visual finish.
                                                                            It is compatible with plinth heights of 100 mm, 120 mm, 150 mm and 180 mm, adapting to different kitchen configurations.
                                                                            It is made of high quality plastic and anodised aluminium, ensuring strength, durability and an attractive visual finish.
                                                                            No, the 90 degree angle is designed to be installed directly without the need for additional adjustments or cut-outs.
                                                                            Each pack includes 20 units of 90 degree angles, ideal for kitchen skirting installation projects.
                                                                            The Plasline kitchen skirting board consists of an aluminium sheet with a lacquered finish and an internal plastic section, which guarantees strength and lightness.
                                                                            This plinth is available in lengths of 2.35 m and 3.9 m, and heights of 100 mm, 120 mm, 150 mm and 180 mm, adapting to various kitchen configurations.
                                                                            Models 8060312, 8060512 and 8060112 feature a high-quality glossy white lacquer finish with an approximate RAL reference of 9003, composed of an aluminium sheet and a protective plastic coating. Model 8060115 features a matte white finish with an approximate RAL reference of 9016.
                                                                            Yes, this skirting includes bottom tabs designed to ensure a perfect finish for assembly and installation.
                                                                            Thanks to its lacquered finish and aluminium construction, the plinth is highly resistant to knocks and scratches, ensuring long-lasting durability in daily use.
                                                                            This system complies with the European standards UNE-EN 12520:2016 and UNE-EN 14749:2016+A1:2022 in terms of stability, durability and safety for domestic and professional furniture.
                                                                            Yes, thanks to the double base design (fastening and recessing), they can be used both in modules with a continuous base and with plinths with edge or side fastening by means of a clip, offering high compatibility.
                                                                            The Bone foot allows a height adjustment from 98 mm to 140 mm by means of an integrated thread. Adjustment can be made even after assembly using a spanner or tube from the inside.
                                                                            For fixing to metal profiles, a tightening torque of 6-8 Nm is recommended using an M10 screw with self-locking nut or threaded rivet, guaranteeing firmness without deforming the technical polymer.
                                                                            Yes, the high density ABS plastic base resists moisture and can be integrated with rubber anti-vibration bases or raised PVC bases, ideal for use in industrial kitchens or wet laboratories.
                                                                            It is available in three different heights: 100 mm, 120 mm and 150 mm, compatible with Noline kitchen plinths.
                                                                            This model covers a section of 30 mm × 30 mm. The corner is designed with a smooth and elegant curve that adds aesthetics and functionality to the plinth.
                                                                            The bracket has a "Y" shaped flange on the back which allows easy and secure attachment to the socket without the need for additional tools.
                                                                            It is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish, providing high strength and a quality decorative finish.
                                                                            Supplied in packs of 20 units, making it easy to use for serial assembly projects or multiple installations.
                                                                            The Mixline topknot has a length of 3.9 metres and is packaged in 10 pieces.
                                                                            It is made of semi-flexible plastic parts, which adapt to the surface, and a satin anodised aluminium coating on the front, which improves the strength and aesthetics of the product.
                                                                            The top prevents liquids from coming into contact with the back of the furniture, protecting the modules from possible leaks or water damage.
                                                                            Installation is simple and quick, but it is recommended that it is carried out by two people and that trims are used to ensure an airtight finish and prevent leaks.
                                                                            It is suggested not to leave any holes through which water could leak, especially when joining several pieces of the coping.
                                                                            This accessory is used to connect the Albeam crossbar profile and the Albeam bumper profile on kitchen furniture.
                                                                            It is available in two versions: a press-fit version and a bolt-on version, both of which allow for a firm and movement-free coupling.
                                                                            The press fitting has dimensions of 26,9 mm wide × 48,5 mm high.
                                                                            It is made of durable grey plastic, providing a precise fit without damaging the profiles or allowing play.
                                                                            Each unit includes the fitting and is delivered in packs of 100 units. In the case of the screwed fitting, it is supplied with installation screws Ø3.5×25 mm.
                                                                            The kit includes 8 grey plastic fittings designed to facilitate the assembly of Plasline triangular copings. Each part has a structural and fixing function to ensure a precise and secure assembly of each part of the coping.
                                                                            The accessories are made of semi-flexible grey plastic. This material offers an excellent adaptation to the surfaces, protects the installation materials and avoids friction or wear between the top and the wall, extending the life of the assembly.
                                                                            They are intended to secure the attachment of the coping to the surface, prevent leakage of liquids and eliminate direct contact between the coping and the wall. In addition, they guarantee a clean, stable and durable assembly, even in demanding environments such as kitchens.
                                                                            No, it is designed exclusively for the Plasline Grey triangular top. The parts of the kit are adapted in shape and dimensions to fit this kitchen plinth system only.
                                                                            Yes, due to the small size of some parts, it is recommended to keep them out of the reach of small children, especially during assembly, to avoid the risk of improper handling.
                                                                            The plinth is designed with 11.2 mm rear flanges that facilitate mounting and ensure precise mating with compatible accessories. This feature streamlines installation and ensures clean integration with kitchen cabinets.
                                                                            It is made of high quality aluminium with a satin anodised finish, making it resistant to corrosion and deterioration. This finish also offers a sleek and modern look, ideal for professional or minimalist kitchens.
                                                                            It incorporates a lower tongue that allows a perfect fit to the floor, which prevents the passage of dust and liquids underneath the modules. This helps to maintain a clean kitchen and prolongs the life of the furniture.
                                                                            It is available in multiple combinations of height (from 60 mm to 165 mm) and length (2.35 m or 3.9 m). Selection will depend on project requirements and compatibility with Noline accessories, with which the plinth is designed to work.
                                                                            It is fully compatible with the products in the Noline range, enabling coordinated and efficient assembly. This includes profiles, corners and other accessories developed specifically for this kitchen plinth system.
                                                                            Each cope bar has a length of 2.35 m and a rectangular cross-section of 11 × 24 mm, which makes it compatible with conventional kitchen installations that require covering the junction between worktop and wall.
                                                                            The kit includes 2 top bars and 2 sets of installation accessories containing connectors, corner pieces, corner brackets and end caps. All made of grey plastic with satin anodised finish.
                                                                            Thanks to its integrated flexible seals and plastic coating, the coping effectively seals the joint between the worktop and the wall, preventing liquids from seeping in and dirt from accumulating.
                                                                            The satin anodised finish provides a clean, modern aesthetic finish that matches steel or aluminium appliances and furniture.
                                                                            No, the bars can be cut to size according to the kitchen design, and thanks to the included connectors, installation is quick, without the need for special machining.
                                                                            The 27.2 × 27.2 mm triangular-shaped, 2.35 m long, end caps provide effective coverage at worktop-to-wall junctions in kitchen installations.
                                                                            They are made of plastic with a satin anodised finish, guaranteeing durability in demanding environments such as domestic or industrial kitchens.
                                                                            It includes 2 complete sets of connectors, corner pieces, corner pieces and grey plastic end pieces, which facilitates a complete assembly without the need to purchase additional parts.
                                                                            Yes, the bars are supplied with protective plastic film, which prevents scratches or damage during transport and ensures a flawless finish when installed.
                                                                            It is recommended to install the coping between two people to ensure accuracy and to apply the end trims to ensure it is watertight against water seepage or debris build-up.
                                                                            The fittings are made of semi-flexible grey plastic, which allows a high adaptability to the angles of the furniture and a more precise installation, even on uneven surfaces.
                                                                            The pieces ensure that the ends of the coping are correctly fixed, preventing liquids from seeping in and damaging the material. They guarantee an effective seal to maintain the impermeability of the assembly.
                                                                            The kit includes 8 accessories per unit, in a packaging of 20 kits. Each kit provides all the necessary elements for the complete installation of a Mixline satin cope.
                                                                            Yes, they are designed for fast and safe assembly, without the need for complex tools, which optimises time for serial installations or large-scale projects.
                                                                            The profile is designed to horizontally join each side of the base unit, providing a solid and stable joint. It is especially useful for reinforcing modules that house ovens or sinks, preventing unwanted movement.
                                                                            It should be fixed to the top of the module, taking up as little space as possible. It is pressed into place with the connecting fitting and then screwed in place with Euro flat head or self-tapping screws Ø4.
                                                                            Yes, the profile is supplied in a length of 2350 mm and can easily be cut to the required project size with a straight cut.
                                                                            It is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish for corrosion resistance and uniform aesthetics, ideal for high quality kitchens.
                                                                            Yes, installation must be carried out in conjunction with the compatible connecting fittings, available in a press-fit or screw-fit version, ensuring maximum module stability.
                                                                            This accessory acts as a connecting piece for kitchen fittings, allowing to extend plinths or panels of the Noline line in a precise and aesthetic way, ensuring a complete integration between components.
                                                                            The extension has a length of 150 mm and a width of 20 mm. Its design includes a groove that allows a firm grip on plinths or boards, facilitating assembly without play.
                                                                            Yes, the design of the extension is specifically designed to match the products of the Noline line, ensuring aesthetic and functional continuity.
                                                                            The packaging includes 20 units, which facilitates stock management and the execution of professional installations in modular kitchens or large contract projects.
                                                                            The adjustable angle allows an opening of between 30° and 180°, offering great flexibility in installation. This feature facilitates adjustment at different corner junctions, optimising installation without compromising the visual finish.
                                                                            Available in heights of 60, 80, 100, 120, 150 and 165 mm. Each package contains 10 pieces of the adjustable angle.
                                                                            The product incorporates skirting gaskets on both wings. These joints are located on the inside face of the angle, ensuring a continuous, clean and professional external appearance.
                                                                            It is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish. It makes it a durable solution even in damp kitchen environments.
                                                                            It is particularly suitable for kitchen baseboards, allowing precise installation in corners and junctions without the need for complex cuts, guaranteeing a functional and aesthetic seal.
                                                                            The profile is installed using built-in adhesive, without the need for tools. It is essential to properly clean and fix the surface before installation to ensure optimum adhesion.
                                                                            It is designed to be fixed in areas exposed to impact, such as corners, edges of low furniture or walls, preventing knocks in areas of frequent traffic or handling.
                                                                            The bumper is made of semi-flexible plastic, which allows it to absorb impacts and protect surfaces without deteriorating, ideal for intensive work areas in industrial or commercial kitchens.
                                                                            It has a length of 56 metres per unit. Thanks to its flexibility and direct adhesion, it can be easily cut and adapted to different sizes or corners without the need for prior machining.
                                                                            It is advisable to properly prepare the surface by removing dust and debris, accurately measure the impact area and press the profile firmly into place to ensure an efficient seal.
                                                                            The top has a length of 2.35 metres. The product is delivered in packs of 25 units, facilitating logistics management for large installations or industrial projects.
                                                                            Due to its length, it is recommended that assembly is carried out by two people to ensure correct positioning. The material is lightweight, but the size requires careful handling to avoid twisting.
                                                                            Yes, each piece has an adjustment system that allows small movements once the top is fixed, thus ensuring a precise adaptation to the furniture and a continuous sealing.
                                                                            Thanks to its rectangular design and waterproof materials, the coping provides a watertight finish that protects the junction between the worktop and the wall, preventing the penetration of liquids, dust and other debris.
                                                                            It is suitable for kitchen furniture, especially on worktops where protection against humidity is required. Its functional design and satin finish make it compatible with kitchens with modern aesthetics and clean lines.
                                                                            These accessories are designed to securely fix the Miniline rectangular top to the kitchen furniture, guaranteeing a precise seal that prevents displacement due to impacts and water seepage that could damage worktops.
                                                                            The accessories must be positioned and secured according to the instructions in the manual. It is essential to secure each part in position to avoid any unwanted movement during daily use.
                                                                            They are made of semi-flexible grey plastic, which allows an adaptable fit to all types of surfaces. This material provides resistance to deformation, durability against impacts and stability against humidity, keeping the top in position.
                                                                            Each kit contains 10 fixing accessories for rectangular cups. The commercial packaging is in sets of 20 kits, and due to their size it is recommended to keep them out of the reach of children under 7 years of age.
                                                                            This kit has been specifically designed for Miniline rectangular shaped codends. Its geometry, coupling type and flexibility are optimised for this model, so it is not recommended for use with other types of codends.
                                                                            The installation must be carried out in direct contact with the kitchen wall, avoiding any space that could allow water filtration. To achieve a perfect fit, it is recommended to use trims that seal the spaces between the coping and the wall. Due to its length, it is recommended that the installation is carried out by two people.
                                                                            The top is made of plastic with a satin anodised finish. This finish provides high resistance to wear and tear due to daily use, preventing deterioration of the material due to contact with liquids or splashes common in the kitchen.
                                                                            The cups are press-fitted with the aid of trims and base profiles, which ensure a firm grip. Although it is possible to dismantle them, it is not recommended to do so frequently, as this may affect the tightness of the system or deform the material.
                                                                            Both models are made of plastic with a satin anodised finish and share the same triangular design and functionality. The main difference is the length: the 2.35 m is intended for standard or smaller scale projects, while the 3.9 m is ideal for continuous linear installations, reducing the need for joints.
                                                                            Its main function is to assemble the module by horizontally joining the sides, providing a strong and resistant fit that prevents displacement, especially in modules for sinks or areas with an oven.
                                                                            Installation is by direct screwing using the included accessories (brackets, screws Ø3.5x25 mm and Ø4x20 mm), ensuring a quick and stable connection between the sides of the module.
                                                                            Yes, both the four 1157 mm cross-member profiles and the bumper can be easily cut to the desired length by means of a straight cut, allowing precise customisation of the assembly.
                                                                            The crossbar profile is made of matt anodised aluminium, while the brackets and bumpers are made of grey plastic, ensuring corrosion resistance and a professional aesthetic finish.
                                                                            It is ideal for mounting low modules that require maximum structural rigidity in areas of intensive use, such as under sinks or industrial kitchens, where it is crucial to avoid module movement.
                                                                              The bin has a capacity of 13 litres, making it suitable for domestic use and recycling in small spaces.
                                                                              Yes, the cube is compatible with both left and right opening doors, adapting to different furniture configurations.
                                                                              The cabinet must have a minimum internal width of 400 mm in order to install the recycling bin correctly.
                                                                              Yes, the system is designed so that the bin lid opens automatically when the cabinet door is opened, making it easy to use.
                                                                              The bucket is made of sturdy plastic with white, grey or stainless steel finishes, ensuring durability and modern aesthetics.
                                                                              The container has a total capacity of 28 litres, distributed in two bins of 14 litres each, ideal for waste separation.
                                                                              The kitchen module must have sufficient interior space for the system, with a manual pull-out in a 320 mm movement.
                                                                              Yes, the system includes two 14-litre buckets, a common lid and a base for mounting, ensuring a perfect fit inside the cabinet.
                                                                              The containers are made of durable grey plastic, guaranteeing durability and ease of cleaning.
                                                                              Yes, this system is designed to be installed in hinged door modules and is suitable for kitchens with standard configuration.
                                                                              Containers with bottom fixing and automatic extraction need to be larger than the width of the container. In other words, the joining and opening mechanism needs to occupy more space than the width of the container. Always make sure you measure the minimum size of the module and check the interior space.
                                                                              The system includes two containers of 16 litres each, providing a total capacity of 32 litres, ideal for the separation of household waste.
                                                                              The containers are made of sturdy plastic and stainless steel, which guarantees durability, easy cleaning and a modern design suitable for any kitchen.
                                                                              Yes, the system is designed so that the containers open automatically when removed, facilitating access and daily use.
                                                                              Yes, the system includes everything necessary for its installation: a frame with guides, screws and two containers with a common lid and base for its adjustment.
                                                                              The container has a total capacity of 28 litres, distributed in two bins of 14 litres each, ideal for waste separation.
                                                                              The kitchen module must have sufficient interior space for the system, with a manual pull-out in a 320 mm movement.
                                                                              Yes, the system includes two 14-litre buckets, a common lid and a base for mounting, ensuring a perfect fit inside the cabinet.
                                                                              The containers are made of durable grey plastic, guaranteeing durability and ease of cleaning.
                                                                              Yes, this system is designed to be installed in hinged door modules and is suitable for kitchens with standard configuration.
                                                                              The container has a total capacity of 16 litres, ideal for domestic use and recycling in small spaces.
                                                                              The module must have sufficient space for bottom fixing and be compatible with standard kitchen furniture sizes.
                                                                              Yes, the system includes a lid that opens automatically when the container is manually removed.
                                                                              The container is made of durable grey plastic, providing durability and easy cleaning.
                                                                              The system includes a 16-litre beaker, a mounting base, an automatic lid and the screws required for installation.
                                                                              The following video shows how you can easily assemble a Recycle extractable waste container for doors.

                                                                              Yes, the Recycle container be assembled on either a right or left-hand side door. You simply have to follow the assembly instructions, along with the assembly template.
                                                                              It is mounted on the base of the unit by means of 4 screws Ø4 x 25 mm included in the set.
                                                                              This container or dustbin needs a 270 mm free space inside the kitchen module or unit.

                                                                              The container includes a cover with a compartment for an odour-neutralising tablet, along with a citrus-scented tablet that helps to neutralise unpleasant odours. This system keeps the inside of the drawer fresh for approximately up to two months, depending on how often it is used.

                                                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                The unit on which the Titane hinged column is installed requires at least 4 hinges for the column to work properly. To this end, we recommend installing the column with soft-close hinges X91 or X92.
                                                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                All of the Shelvo racks for kitchen corner units are capable of supporting up to 20kg of weight.
                                                                                The minimum door size for installing a half-moon Shelvo rack in a kitchen unit will depend on the diameter of rack chosen: - For racks of 650 mm diameter, the minimum door size is 400 mm. - For racks of 750mm diameter, the minimum door size is 450 mm.
                                                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                No, a Supra bottle rack can only be assembled on the left-hand side, as you have the guide rails on the left-hand side.
                                                                                The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                The unit on which the Supra hinged column is installed requires at least 4 hinges for the column to work properly. To this end, we recommend installing the column with soft-close hinges X91 or C91E.
                                                                                The Supra trolley has optimised dimensions: height 487 mm, width 245 mm and depth 470 mm. It is compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick boards.
                                                                                It is installed directly on the base of the module by means of total extraction guides and cushioned closing system. The kit includes a basket with frame, bread bag, set of guides and mounting screws.
                                                                                The system is adjustable in three axes: depth (±1.5 mm), horizontal (±2.25 mm) and height (±7.5 mm), facilitating precise installation in different configurations.
                                                                                It has a load capacity of up to 25 kg, suitable for storing food, kitchen utensils and other items safely and efficiently.
                                                                                It is made of steel with a chrome finish, which gives it strength, durability and a professional finish for kitchen base units.
                                                                                This trolley has optimised dimensions of height 487 mm, width 245 mm and depth 470 mm, compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm boards.
                                                                                The kit includes a basket with frame, a bread bag, a set of full-extension slides with soft closing and mounting screws.
                                                                                It is installed directly on the base of the module. Its adjustment system allows adjustments in depth (±1.5 mm), horizontality (±2.25 mm) and height (±7.5 mm), guaranteeing precise installation.
                                                                                The load capacity is up to 25 kg, allowing you to store kitchen utensils and food safely and efficiently.
                                                                                It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish, combining strength, design and durability for use in kitchen base units.
                                                                                The trolley has a height of 487 mm, a width of 245 mm and a depth of 470 mm. It is compatible with 300 mm wide modules and is suitable for 16, 18 and 19 mm boards.
                                                                                Includes a basket with frame, a set of full-extension slides with cushioned closure and the screws required for assembly.
                                                                                The border adjustment system allows adjustments in depth (±1.5 mm), horizontality (±2.25 mm) and height (±7.5 mm), facilitating precise and adaptable integration into different kitchen configurations.
                                                                                It has full-extension roller guides with soft closing, which ensure smooth and comfortable sliding. It has a load capacity of up to 25 kg.
                                                                                It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish, making it ideal for modern kitchens looking for a functional, discreet and elegant aesthetic.
                                                                                The trolley has a height of 487 mm, a width of 245 mm and a depth of 470 mm. It is compatible with 300 mm wide modules and 16, 18 and 19 mm boards.
                                                                                Includes one basket with frame, one set of full-extension slides with cushioned locking and mounting screws.
                                                                                The trolley is mounted directly on the module base by means of full-extension slides with cushioned locking, which facilitates precise and silent installation.
                                                                                It allows adjustments in depth (±1.5 mm), horizontality (±2.25 mm) and height (±7.5 mm), making it adaptable to different kitchen configurations.
                                                                                It can hold up to 25 kg and is made of steel with a chrome finish, ideal for efficient and safe daily use in modern kitchens.
                                                                                This bracket is designed to hang on an aluminium profile, providing a clean and functional mounting without the need for wall or surface fixing.
                                                                                It has a non-slip EPDM base that prevents the tablet from sliding or slipping while it is resting on it.
                                                                                It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish, providing strength, durability and a modern aesthetic.
                                                                                The tablet can be positioned either vertically or horizontally, offering flexibility for different uses in kitchens or workspaces.
                                                                                The stand features protective anti-shock tears on the back to protect the tablet during use or handling.
                                                                                The cutlery holder consists of a flat steel structure with an anthracite grey finish and a stainless steel bucket with a chrome-plated finish.
                                                                                The hub of the cutlery tray has a diameter of 118 mm.
                                                                                It is designed to hang on an aluminium profile fixed to the wall, allowing a clean and functional installation without taking up space on the worktop.
                                                                                It includes protective anti-shock tears on the back of the accessory, improving its fixation and stability on the profile.
                                                                                This design brings a modern and minimalist aesthetic, adapted to modern kitchens, and matches the rest of the accessories in the Titane range.
                                                                                A module width of 400 mm, a minimum height of 1800 mm and a minimum depth of 480 mm is required.
                                                                                It includes 5 baskets that automatically move outwards by means of a mechanism synchronised with the opening of the door.
                                                                                Yes, the column can be installed on both left and right opening doors.
                                                                                The total load capacity is 40 kg and it is recommended to use at least four hinges per module for proper installation.
                                                                                It is made of steel with a chrome finish. The bases of the baskets are made of melamine with PVC edging.
                                                                                These hooks are designed to be hung on aluminium profiles fixed to the wall, such as those used in kitchen organisation systems. Their structure allows quick and stable integration into flat profiles without the need for tools.
                                                                                They are made of steel with a flat steel structure, which makes them highly resistant to daily use. The anthracite grey finish provides durability and a modern aesthetic in keeping with industrial kitchens or contemporary design.
                                                                                They are ideal for hanging kitchen utensils, cloths and other light, frequently used accessories. Their shape allows them to be held securely without the risk of accidental slipping.
                                                                                The set includes 5 hanging hooks, presented together for easy installation and replacement in furniture projects or renovation of kitchen spaces.
                                                                                These hooks are part of a range of accessories optimised for aluminium profiles, such as shelves, roll holders or tablet holders. They can be easily combined to maximise vertical space utilisation in professional or domestic kitchens.
                                                                                The stand has 5 storage lines, each with a length of 320 mm, which allows you to organise several glasses per line, optimising the space inside the cabinet.
                                                                                It is designed for mounting on the underside of shelves, the interior ceiling of cabinets or even under counters in both residential and commercial environments (kitchens, bars or restaurants).
                                                                                Installation is by means of screws, which are included in the kit. This fastening system guarantees a firm and secure hold, even in long or intensive use installations.
                                                                                Its design is suitable for all types of glasses: wine, champagne, cocktail, beer or similar. The space between the lines allows you to hang glasses with a stand in a stable manner and without the risk of slipping.
                                                                                The chrome-plated steel offers high strength and a shiny aesthetic finish that blends in with modern kitchens. It also makes it easy to clean and prolongs the life of the product in wet conditions.
                                                                                Each divider is 500 mm wide by 310 mm deep, so the cabinet or shelf must be at least 310 mm deep for proper installation.
                                                                                The dividers are fixed by means of screwed clips with no fixed position, allowing them to be installed either at the back or at the bottom of the unit. This versatility makes it easy to adapt them to different storage configurations.
                                                                                They are made of steel with a chrome-plated finish, which gives them corrosion resistance and a shiny finish that goes well with high-end kitchen or storage furniture.
                                                                                Yes, the kit includes 4 metal spacers, fixing clips and screws, allowing immediate installation without the need to purchase additional components.
                                                                                They are ideal for use in industrial kitchens, storage cupboards, shop shelves or office organisation spaces, allowing spaces to be compartmentalised in a robust and aesthetically pleasing way.
                                                                                The holder has a total length of 280 mm and has 4 storage lines, which allows you to organise several cups in a practical and efficient way depending on the type and size of the model.
                                                                                There must be a free bottom surface (such as a shelf, cabinet base or countertop) that allows the bracket to be bolted to and is at least 280 mm deep.
                                                                                Installation is simple and is carried out by screwing the bracket directly to the inside of the furniture, whether on shelves, cupboards or under counters. The necessary screws are included.
                                                                                It is made of chrome-plated steel, which ensures easy cleaning, and a shiny finish that makes it compatible with domestic or professional kitchen environments.
                                                                                Yes, because of its durability, ease of access and compact design, it is ideal for bars, restaurants or industrial kitchens that need to optimise storage space for glassware.
                                                                                The stand has a 340 mm long storage line, which allows it to hold wine, champagne, cocktail or cognac glasses, optimising space without compromising access.
                                                                                Installation is by means of the included screws, fixing the bracket directly to the inside of the furniture, under shelves or counters.
                                                                                It is compatible with wooden or melamine furniture and can be installed on shelves or bases with a clearance of at least 340 mm depth for functional use.
                                                                                The chrome-plated steel finish provides rust resistance and ease of cleaning, ideal for professional or domestic kitchens with high usage and hygienic requirements.
                                                                                Yes, thanks to its compact design, easy installation and resistance to intensive use, it is ideal for catering, bars or self-service areas where functional organisation of glassware is required.
                                                                                This column is designed for kitchen units with a width of 400 mm, a minimum height of 1800 mm and a depth of 480 mm, ensuring compatibility with tall and deep units.
                                                                                Extraction is carried out automatically by means of a mechanical arm that connects the door to the structure. This allows the 5 baskets to slide outwards when the door is opened (up to 120° opening) for easy access.
                                                                                The system has a load capacity of up to 40 kg in total. The use of at least 4 hinges per module is recommended to ensure stable and safe operation.
                                                                                It is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish, which provides excellent strength and durability. The base of the baskets is made of anthracite grey melamine, ideal for resisting humidity and facilitating cleaning.
                                                                                Yes, the 5 trays included are made of flat wire and can be easily attached or detached, making them easy to clean or replace if necessary.
                                                                                The knife holder is designed to hang directly on an aluminium profile fixed to the wall. Installation requires no additional tools, thanks to the suspension system with rear hooks and design compatible with concealed mounting profiles.
                                                                                It has an adaptable plastic fibre interior, which allows knives of different shapes and sizes to be inserted safely and securely without moving inside the holder. Its dimensions are 227 × 104 mm.
                                                                                It is made from flat steel with an exterior structure in anthracite grey and interior plastic fibre. This combination provides high durability and ease of cleaning in demanding environments such as the kitchen.
                                                                                The back of the unit is fitted with impact-resistant protective tears that prevent damage to both the furniture and the stand, guaranteeing safe assembly and preventing accidental slipping.
                                                                                Yes, the anthracite grey finish not only provides a modern aesthetic and uniformity with other Titane solutions, but also offers resistance to wear, scratches and surface corrosion in humid or temperature-changing environments.
                                                                                The module must be at least 505 mm deep and the interior must be between 864 and 964 mm wide to ensure proper operation of the system.
                                                                                The total capacity of the system is 32 kg, distributed over 4 individual trays, allowing you to store utensils, food or other kitchen items in a safe and organised manner.
                                                                                It includes a three-dimensional door adjustment system, which facilitates precise adjustment in height, depth and front alignment of the front of the unit.
                                                                                It is made of anthracite grey painted steel for the metal structures, combined with matching painted wood applications for a uniform aesthetic finish.
                                                                                Thanks to its compact and well-proportioned design, the system can be easily installed by one person, allowing quick and easy fixing without the need for special tools.
                                                                                This accessory is designed to be hung on an aluminium profile fixed to the wall, without the need to screw directly onto the surface of the furniture, facilitating a clean and aesthetic installation.
                                                                                It is made of flat steel with an anthracite grey finish, which gives it high resistance, durability and modern aesthetics, ideal for demanding environments such as professional or intensive domestic kitchens.
                                                                                It has three separate shelves designed to hold standard rolls of kitchen roll, film and aluminium foil, allowing quick and organised access to each.
                                                                                Yes, it incorporates protective anti-shock tears on the back of the accessory to ensure a firm hold on the profile and prevent accidental movement.
                                                                                Yes, it is part of the modular range of accessories for hanging on the Titane profile, which allows it to be combined with shelves, knife holders, tablet holders, cutlery trays or other kitchen accessories from the same range.
                                                                                The profile is fixed to the wall by means of concealed brackets included in the kit, ensuring a clean and stable fixing. It is recommended to mount on resistant surfaces that guarantee the grip of the dowels Ø6 mm and screws supplied.
                                                                                It includes 3 adjustable brackets with ±5 mm adjustment, allowing the profile to be aligned to ensure a perfectly horizontal installation, even on walls with small irregularities.
                                                                                Yes, the 1.1 m long profile can easily be cut to size by straight cutting, allowing it to be adapted to smaller spaces or special kitchen configurations.
                                                                                This profile is designed for the Titane modular range and includes compatibility with shelves, roll holders, hooks, knife holders, cutlery holders and tablet holders, all designed to hang directly without additional tools.
                                                                                It is made of aluminium and zamak with an anthracite grey finish, which provides high resistance and a modern design, ideal for contemporary kitchen furniture projects and intensive use.
                                                                                For proper installation, the module must have a minimum width of 900 mm, a door of 450 mm and a minimum internal depth of 490 mm. The internal height of the module must be between 620 mm and 780 mm.
                                                                                This model is available in left or right hand versions and can be mounted with either a 90° arm hinge or a straight hinge. It also incorporates a soft-close system for quiet and safe sliding.
                                                                                The system consists of 2 independent trays with chrome-plated round rod, each with a load capacity of 20 kg, for a total of 40 kg per complete system.
                                                                                The trays have an adjustment system that allows them to be easily adjusted in height, adapting them to the end user's organisational needs.
                                                                                The corner mechanism is made of chrome-plated steel and the base of the trays is made of white melamine, which offers strength and durability in kitchen environments.
                                                                                The Shelvo system can be installed in corner kitchen units with a total height between 650 mm and 770 mm. It is specifically designed for 800 mm modules and allows precise adjustment thanks to its adjustable central bar.
                                                                                Each tray has a diameter of 710 mm and a maximum load capacity of 20 kg. This allows small kitchen items to be stored safely, without compromising the stability of the system.
                                                                                The matt anodised aluminium bar allows the trays to be fixed at two different heights according to the user's needs. In addition, it is possible to install only the lower tray or add the upper tray with positioner for a more customised configuration.
                                                                                The kit includes 2 trays, 1 aluminium bar and connecting pieces. It does not require additional parts for assembly and allows easy installation without the need for special tools, making it an efficient solution for optimising space in kitchen units.
                                                                                These trays are designed to be installed inside furniture, cabinets or walls with the screws included. The kit incorporates brackets and fittings that allow direct fixing to wooden surfaces or derivatives, ensuring a stable hold.
                                                                                Yes, they are made of high-strength white plastic, which makes them suitable for use in wet environments such as bathrooms or kitchens. Their surface is easy to clean and does not deteriorate with regular exposure to steam.
                                                                                Yes, thanks to the screw mounting system, the trays can be easily removed for cleaning or relocation to another area of the furniture, without affecting their functionality or damaging the installation surface.
                                                                                Totally. Its 350 mm format allows for modular placement inside wardrobes, so that several trays can be installed vertically or in parallel, maximising storage and internal organisation of the furniture.
                                                                                Maintenance is minimal. Periodic cleaning with damp cloths and neutral products is recommended. As they are made of white plastic, they do not rust or deteriorate with regular use, even in humid areas.
                                                                                Installation requires a minimum height of 650 mm and can be adjusted up to 770 mm. The distance between shelves can be adjusted between 365 and 413 mm. These dimensions guarantee a suitable integration in kitchen units of 800 mm and 900 mm.
                                                                                The central bar is fixed by means of a telescopic system with connecting pieces included in the kit, which allow it to be attached to the ceiling and base of the module. No special tools are required for assembly and instructions are included.
                                                                                The trays are made of white or grey polyethylene, a recyclable, antistatic, impact and UV-resistant material. Their design guarantees long durability even in kitchens with intensive use.
                                                                                The height can be adjusted manually without the need for tools. The included positioner allows the desired height to be set to suit the objects stored and the configuration of the module.
                                                                                Each tray can carry up to 20 kg of distributed load, making it ideal for both domestic and commercial kitchens. Although no certification is specified, the materials and design meet common standards of professional quality and durability.
                                                                                The system is designed for 800 mm and 900 mm wide modules, with a minimum internal height of 550 mm. The recommended minimum depth is 390 mm and allows installation with R325 or R375 axle, depending on the model.
                                                                                Yes, the system allows partial or total extraction of the lower tray when the door is opened, improving access to the bottom of the unit and optimising ergonomics in corner units.
                                                                                The system allows the trays to be installed at different heights thanks to its central bar with movable connecting pieces. This flexibility makes it possible to adapt to the content or interior design of the module, without the need for special tools.
                                                                                The trays are made of recyclable polyethylene, antistatic and resistant to impact and UV rays. This composition guarantees optimum performance in demanding environments such as professional kitchens.
                                                                                Each tray supports up to 20 kg distributed load. No additional reinforcement is required as long as the installation instructions included in the kit are followed.
                                                                                For proper installation, a minimum cabinet depth of at least 300 mm for the 280 mm model and 430 mm for the 410 mm model is recommended, ensuring that the bracket is fully seated without protruding.
                                                                                The bracket is attached using screws included in the kit. The holes must be drilled in the base of the module or in the bottom of the shelf, using industry standard tools.
                                                                                This system is compatible with wine, champagne, cocktail and cognac glasses, with a standard diameter base. The single-line structure allows 2 to 3 glasses to be safely stored, depending on the model and type of glass.
                                                                                Yes, the stand is made of chrome-plated steel, a material resistant to humidity and intensive use, which makes it suitable for professional kitchens, guaranteeing durability and aesthetics without corrosion.
                                                                                Minimal maintenance is required: periodic cleaning with a dry or slightly damp cloth is sufficient. Do not use abrasive products or detergents containing chlorine.
                                                                                It shall be a low module at least 900 mm wide, with a minimum door of 450 mm, a minimum internal depth of 490 mm and an internal height between 620 mm and 780 mm.
                                                                                Can be installed with straight hinge or 90° arm hinge, without the need for additional special fittings.
                                                                                Each tray can hold up to 20 kg, ideal for storing kitchen utensils, food or small appliances.
                                                                                It incorporates individual height adjustment per tray, which allows an ergonomic and stable configuration according to the user's needs.
                                                                                Yes, it is available in two versions: right hand (SKU 8946035) and left hand (SKU 8946135), adapting to the configuration of the furniture.
                                                                                Each shelf measures 27 cm wide x 11 cm high x 9.7 cm deep. These dimensions allow for convenient storage of standard spice and condiment jars.
                                                                                Each shelf is installed individually by means of two screws, which allows a direct and stable fastening on vertical surfaces as well as inside modules.
                                                                                Yes, the product is made up of 3 independent shelves, which allows them to be installed at the desired height and spacing, depending on the user's needs or the space available.
                                                                                They are suitable for fixing to the inside of standard kitchen cabinets or directly to smooth walls. It is recommended that the surface supports screws.
                                                                                Yes, the lot includes the mounting screws to secure the three shelves, so no additional hardware is required for installation.
                                                                                The shelves measure 32 cm (W) x 8.5 cm (H) x 8.5 cm (D), while the profiles measure 35 cm (W) x 54.6 cm (H) x 9.8 cm (D).
                                                                                It is made of flat steel rod with an anthracite grey finish, which guarantees high durability, wear resistance and a modern aesthetic suitable for designer kitchens.
                                                                                Both the profiles and the shelves are fixed by means of the included screws. The profiles have multiple holes that allow the vertical position of each shelf to be adjusted as required.
                                                                                Yes, the kit is versatile and can be installed both on the wall and inside kitchen cabinets, allowing for flexible integration into different projects.
                                                                                Each kit includes 3 shelves, 2 perforated metal profiles and all screws required for installation.
                                                                                The hanger can withstand a recommended maximum weight of 6 kg, provided it is installed on clean, smooth, non-porous surfaces.
                                                                                It is suitable for surfaces such as melamine, lacquered wood, glass, tile or metal, provided they are clean and dry. Not recommended for rough, porous or painted walls.
                                                                                Yes, the adhesive is strong-setting but removable, so it can be removed carefully without damaging the surface. To facilitate the process, heat can be applied with a hairdryer before peeling it off.
                                                                                The main bar is approximately 34 cm long and has 5 evenly distributed movable hooks, allowing you to adjust its position according to the size of the utensil.
                                                                                Yes, it is made of stainless steel, which makes it suitable for environments such as kitchens or laundry rooms, where resistance to rust is essential.
                                                                                For the 300 mm model, a minimum internal width of 225 mm and a minimum depth of 480 mm is required. For the 400 mm model, the inside width must be 335 mm.
                                                                                The complete system supports a maximum load of 30 kg, distributed between the 3 metal baskets. An evenly distributed load is recommended to ensure the proper functioning of the damped closure.
                                                                                It includes 2 roller guides with full extraction and soft closing system, which allows a smooth and silent movement, ideal for high traffic kitchens.
                                                                                Yes, the design incorporates height-adjustable baskets, allowing the space to be adapted to different sizes of stored products or utensils.
                                                                                The kit includes screws, guides, fixing hardware and 3 metal baskets, as well as the necessary components for direct anchoring of the door to the frame.
                                                                                The complete mechanism supports up to 30 kg of distributed load, which is equivalent to 7.5 kg for each of its 4 chrome-plated steel baskets, guaranteeing strength and durability even in intensive use.
                                                                                Yes, the system can be installed with both right-hand and left-hand opening, making it versatile for projects with different corner unit configurations.
                                                                                A minimum cabinet depth of 530 mm, a minimum height of 600 mm and a door width of 450 mm are required, which are standard dimensions in professional modular kitchens.
                                                                                Thanks to its articulated structure, the system allows the complete extraction of the frame and the 4 baskets, facilitating full front access to the stored utensils or products.
                                                                                Yes, it incorporates a soft-close mechanism that guarantees a controlled and silent movement when closing the frame, avoiding knocks and increasing the useful life of the furniture.
                                                                                The system is designed to hold up to 30 kg total load, distributed between the 2 metal baskets, making it ideal for storing bottles, jars or other heavy kitchen items.
                                                                                For correct installation, the cabinet must have a minimum internal width of 112 mm and a minimum depth of 460 mm, compatible with 150 or 200 mm modules.
                                                                                Yes, it is compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm side panels, which makes it easy to integrate into standard kitchen furniture.
                                                                                It includes 2 roller guides with full extraction and soft-close that ensure smooth sliding, avoiding slamming and extending the life of the system.
                                                                                The bottle rack is screwed to the left-hand side of the unit and can be installed quickly using the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                It includes partial-extension ball bearing slides, which allow smooth and reliable sliding, but with less total opening compared to full-extension models.
                                                                                A minimum internal width of 112 mm and a minimum depth of 474 mm is required for a correct and safe installation.
                                                                                This model can be mounted on both sides of the unit, which allows for versatility in its installation according to the layout of the space.
                                                                                The kit is delivered with 1 pull-out bottle rack, set of ball bearing slides and mounting screws, ready for quick and professional installation.
                                                                                This bottle rack supports a maximum load of 15 kg, distributed between the two metal baskets, making it ideal for auxiliary modules or areas of less intensive use.
                                                                                The system supports a total load of up to 30 kg, distributed between its two metal baskets. Includes 3 plastic dividers for internal organisation in the lower basket.
                                                                                Suitable for modules with a minimum internal width of 112 mm and a minimum depth of 460 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm boards.
                                                                                It incorporates full-extension roller runners with a damped closing system, which allows for smooth, slam-free sliding, ideal for quiet, high-use cooking.
                                                                                The mounting is on the left side of the cabinet, which must be taken into account to ensure a functional and ergonomic installation.
                                                                                The structure is made of steel with an anthracite grey finish and the dividers are made of high-strength grey plastic, which guarantees durability and modern aesthetics.
                                                                                The module must have a minimum internal width of 400 mm and a minimum depth of 480 mm to ensure optimal functioning of the guide system.
                                                                                The pull-out trolley supports a total load of up to 30 kg, distributed among the three adjustable baskets.
                                                                                The system has 2 roller guides with full extraction and soft close, which provide a silent sliding and prevent slamming.
                                                                                Yes, the chrome baskets are height adjustable, allowing for greater versatility in adapting the trolley to different types of products and utensils.
                                                                                It is fixed to the left-hand side of the unit, ensuring structural stability and efficient use of space.
                                                                                This wine rack requires a minimum internal width of 112 mm, a minimum depth of 460 mm and a clear height of 800 mm in the kitchen base unit.
                                                                                The installation is carried out on the inside left side of the cabinet by means of 2 roller runners with full extension and soft closing system, which guarantees a smooth and shock-free sliding.
                                                                                This bottle rack holds up to 30 kg total load, ideal for the safe storage of bottles and other heavy pantry products.
                                                                                Includes 1 pull-out bottle rack, set of full-extension runners, door fixing screws and 3 basket spacers, facilitating direct installation without the need for additional accessories.
                                                                                It allows full access to the 3 baskets of the bottle rack without effort, and thanks to the cushioned closure, it avoids knocking when closing it, guaranteeing greater durability and comfort of use.
                                                                                The module must have a minimum internal width of 112 mm, a minimum depth of 460 mm and a minimum usable height of 800 mm.
                                                                                It is compatible with furniture made of 16, 18 and 19 mm thick boards, which covers most standard configurations on the market.
                                                                                It supports a maximum load of up to 30 kg, distributed between its 3 storage levels, making it ideal for bottles and heavy products.
                                                                                The bottle rack is fixed laterally to the left side of the module by means of 2 roller guides with full extension and soft closing. The assembly is completed with screws included.
                                                                                It ensures smooth and silent sliding during use, avoids slamming and allows full access to the 3 baskets, improving ergonomics and functionality in confined spaces.
                                                                                The system is designed to hold up to 25 kg total load, distributed between the 2 metal baskets, making it ideal for storing bottles, jars or other heavy kitchen items.
                                                                                Yes, it is compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm side panels, which makes it easy to integrate into standard kitchen furniture.
                                                                                It includes guides with full extraction and soft-close that ensure smooth sliding, avoiding slamming and extending the life of the system.
                                                                                The bottle rack is screwed to the left-hand side of the unit and can be installed quickly using the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                The system allows three-dimensional adjustment of the door: ±3.5 mm in depth, ±4 mm in lateral adjustment and +6 mm in height. This flexibility facilitates precise installation in different types of furniture, preventing misalignment and friction.
                                                                                It is compatible with corner modules with a front width of between 900 and 1100 mm. It requires a minimum depth of 550 mm and a side door space of between 400 and 450 mm. The total width of the cabinet can vary between 862 and 1068 mm depending on the configuration.
                                                                                The system supports up to 28 kg in total, distributed between four heavy-duty metal baskets. Ideal for storing heavy utensils, pantry items or small appliances.
                                                                                This corner unit is available in two different versions depending on the direction of the door opening, to suit the configuration of the kitchen cabinet. You can choose between the right-hand opening model (when the unit is on the right-hand side of the corner) or the left-hand opening model (when the unit is on the left-hand side). It is essential to select the correct version according to the layout of the corner unit, as the system is not reversible.
                                                                                The cabinet door must be between 400 and 450 mm wide to ensure optimal integration of the system. These dimensions allow the pull-out mechanism to be anchored correctly and ensure that the unit rotates smoothly without interference. Installation outside this range could compromise the functionality of the system and its alignment with the rest of the cabinet.
                                                                                The innovative 5-dimensional adjustment system allows the door to be adjusted in height (±2.5 mm), horizontally (±2 mm) and in depth (+3 mm), ensuring precise integration with the front of the cabinet and a uniform appearance.
                                                                                The system is designed to support up to 30 kg of total load, distributed among its metal trays, making it ideal for storing utensils, jars, and other kitchen items.
                                                                                The innovative 5-dimensional adjustment system allows the door to be adjusted, ensuring precise integration with the front of the cabinet.
                                                                                Depending on the selected model, it requires a unit with a width of 150 or 200 mm, height of 700 or 800 mm, and a minimum depth of 460 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Depending on the selected model, it requires a unit with a width of 300 or 400 mm, height of 700 or 800 mm, and a minimum depth of 460 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Depending on the selected model, it requires a unit with a width of 300 or 400 mm, height of 700 mm, and a minimum depth of 460 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Requires a unit with a width of 300 mm, height of 700 mm, and a minimum depth of 460 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Requires a unit with a minimum width of 862 mm, height of 620–768 mm, and a minimum depth of 500 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Requires a unit with a width of 800 mm, height of 620–768 mm, and a minimum depth of 500 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Requires a unit with a width of 800 mm, height of 620–768 mm, and a minimum depth of 500 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Requires a unit with a minimum width of 630 mm, minimum height of 575 mm, and a minimum depth of 488 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Requires a unit with a width of 862–1,068 mm, minimum height of 520 mm, and a minimum depth of 537 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Depending on the selected model, it requires a unit with a width of 400 mm, height of 1,430–1,730 or 1,780–2,080 mm, and a minimum depth of 480 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                Depending on the selected model, it requires a unit with a width of 450 or 600 mm, minimum height of 1,480 or 1,780 mm, and a minimum depth of 550 mm. Compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick panels. Supplied with drilling template and screws for easy installation.
                                                                                The system is designed to support up to 25 kg of total load, distributed among its metal trays, making it ideal for storing bottles, jars and other kitchen products.
                                                                                The system is designed to support up to 30 kg of total load, distributed among its metal trays, making it ideal for storing utensils, jars and other kitchen products.
                                                                                The system is designed to support up to 20 kg of load per tray (2 x 20 kg), making it ideal for storing utensils, small appliances and other kitchen items.
                                                                                The system is designed to support a load of 7.5 kg per tray, making it ideal for storing utensils, small appliances and other kitchen items.
                                                                                The system is designed to support a load of 6 kg per small tray located on the door and 8 kg per large tray located inside, making it ideal for storing utensils and other kitchen items.
                                                                                The system is designed to support a load of 8 kg per tray, making it ideal for storing utensils, small appliances and other kitchen items.
                                                                                The system is designed to support a load of 3 kg per small tray located on the door and 5 kg per large tray located inside, making it ideal for storing utensils and other kitchen items.
                                                                                The guides are fixed to the left side of the cabinet, allowing for quick installation with the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                The guides are fixed to both sides of the cabinet, but at different heights, for greater stability, allowing for quick installation with the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                The guides are fixed to the bottom of the cabinet, allowing for quick installation with the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                The top guide is fixed to the right side and the bottom guide to the left side, allowing for quick installation with the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                The shaft is easily fixed to the module thanks to its height adjustment, allowing for quick installation with the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                It allows for both left-hand and right-hand opening, with quick installation using the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                The innovative 3-dimensional adjustment system allows the door to be adjusted in height (±6 mm), horizontally (±4 mm) and in depth (+3.5 mm), ensuring precise integration with the front of the cabinet and a uniform appearance.
                                                                                It is easily fixed to the module thanks to its height adjustment, allowing quick installation with the screws included in the kit.
                                                                                  The following video shows how you can easily install a Holdy hanger.

                                                                                  The double bracket allows the LevaFix system hangers to be attached to the wall, ensuring a sturdy fixing for tall modules and facilitating the even distribution of the furniture load.
                                                                                  The plate measures 110 mm long by 24 mm wide and is 1.8 mm thick, providing mechanical stability for vertical loads in high modules.
                                                                                  It has holes with a diameter of 6.5 mm, compatible with standard mounting screws used in wall installations for kitchen and bathroom furniture.
                                                                                  No, the plate has been designed for direct wall mounting in conjunction with LevaFix hangers, offering an all-in-one solution that does not require additional reinforcement.
                                                                                  Natural steel provides high structural strength, durability against wear and excellent compatibility with dry or technical indoor environments.
                                                                                  The Hook system is certified according to UNI 16776 standard to support up to 70 kg per set of hangers, guaranteeing safety and reliability in kitchen, bathroom or household overhead units.
                                                                                  It offers a height adjustment of 15 mm and a depth adjustment of 43 mm, which facilitates the precise alignment of the module with the wall and the levelling between adjacent modules, optimising the assembly process.
                                                                                  The set of 5 kits contains: 5 right hangers, 5 left hangers, 5 right covers, 5 left covers, 5 mounting brackets and the necessary screws for fixing, allowing up to 5 modules to be fitted.
                                                                                  The included covers allow the hangers to be covered once installed, offering an aesthetically pleasing, clean and professional solution, ideal for both bespoke furniture and mass production.
                                                                                  Yes, the Hook system allows assembly without the need to machine the back of the module, which simplifies assembly and improves efficiency in industrial and professional installations.
                                                                                  The Holdy cover has a decorative and concealing function, as it is placed over the hangers to hide the fixing elements, improving the final aesthetics of the piece of furniture without interfering with the hanger adjustment system.
                                                                                  Holdy covers are designed to be installed on right or left hangers, so it is essential to select the corresponding model according to the orientation of the hanger installed in the module.
                                                                                  The covers are available in white, light grey and anthracite grey, allowing harmonious visual integration with different furniture finishes. This promotes a cleaner and more uniform design in visible installations.
                                                                                  The plastic used is light and resistant, ideal for maintaining the fixation on the hanger without overloading the structure. In addition, it offers an aesthetic finish suitable for kitchen or bathroom environments where durability and low maintenance are required.
                                                                                  The product is packaged in packs of 400 units, which makes it particularly suitable for industrial projects, serial installations and professional distribution in large quantities.
                                                                                  The Holdy hanger is designed to withstand loads of up to 65 kg, making it a robust and safe solution for overhead locker units in kitchens, bathrooms and the home.
                                                                                  The system is screwed to the side of the module and anchored to the wall by means of a metal plate, which guarantees a firm, adjustable and durable fixing.
                                                                                  The front adjustment allows the position of the module to be adjusted in depth and height, which optimises the aesthetic and functional alignment of the furniture without the need for disassembly.
                                                                                  The mounting is concealed inside the module, while on the wall it can be covered with decorative covers, which significantly improves aesthetics without compromising functionality.
                                                                                  The system includes right or left hangers, with an anchor base that allows for 18 mm height and 8.5 mm depth adjustments, offering flexibility for multiple top module configurations.
                                                                                  The Strong 32 mm bracket provides advanced adjustment of the module position in all three directions (height, depth and side), which is ideal for demanding assemblies where perfect alignment of the cabinet to the wall is required.
                                                                                  To install the Strong 32 mm bracket, the cabinet must have a minimum distance of 32 mm from the wall. This allows the bracket and hanger to work together without interference.
                                                                                  Fixing the Strong 32 mm bracket requires screws with a diameter of 8.2 mm. It has three fixing holes to ensure a secure hold even in heavy applications.
                                                                                  This bracket is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which gives it high mechanical strength and corrosion protection, ideal for demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                                                                                  The bracket is supplied in boxes of 25 units, allowing efficient installation in industrial or mass production environments, with precise control over available stock.
                                                                                  The cover cap is designed to completely cover and conceal the Hook hanger once fitted, enhancing the aesthetics of the furniture without compromising access or operation of the fastening system.
                                                                                  No, this cover has been manufactured specifically for Hook top hanger units. Its fit is optimised for this model, ensuring perfect integration into kitchen, bathroom and household cabinets.
                                                                                  Yes, it is available in left and right hand versions, which allows a symmetrical and correct installation according to the position of the hanger in the cabinet.
                                                                                  The anthracite grey finish offers a modern and discreet appearance, ideal for combining with modern design furniture. In addition, the plastic material ensures resistance to wear and tear without visual deterioration.
                                                                                  The Hook hanger cover comes in packs of 200 pieces per hand (left or right), optimising its use in production lines or large-scale furniture projects.
                                                                                  The Levelup 1 hanger can support up to 65 kg per unit, making it ideal for large or heavy overhead units in kitchens, bathrooms and home furnishings.
                                                                                  This model includes a height adjustment of 18 mm and a depth adjustment of 18 mm, which allows a precise adjustment of the module once installed, facilitating the levelling of the furniture.
                                                                                  It is fixed to the sides and back of the module with screws, and is completely concealed when the unit is closed, with only one visible point on the inside.
                                                                                  To fix the module to the wall using the Levelup 1 hanger, it is essential to use the Levelup 1 plate, which acts as a complementary structural support.
                                                                                  Yes, the Levelup 1 hanger is manufactured in accordance with the UNE-EN 15939 standard for furniture, guaranteeing European standards in terms of durability, strength and structural safety.
                                                                                  The plug is designed to cover the machining on the back of the module where the Levelup 1 concealed hanger is housed. It not only conceals the system, but also protects the hanger adjustment screws and enhances the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                                  The plug has an outer diameter of 20 mm, an inner diameter of 18 mm and a thickness of 3 mm. It is designed to be pressed into the back of the module, which allows for quick installation without special tools.
                                                                                  Yes, the design allows the plug to be easily removed and replaced, making it easy to access the hanger adjustment screws should post-installation adjustments be required.
                                                                                  It is made of zamak with a nickel-plated finish. This material provides high mechanical resistance, protection against corrosion and a clean and professional metallic finish, ideal for kitchen, bathroom or household modules.
                                                                                  The plug is available in nickel plated and white finish. Supplied in packs of 1000 units, intended for production environments or industrial furniture assembly.
                                                                                  The Hook hanger is tested to support 70 kg per hanger unit, in accordance with UNI 10767, which regulates safety requirements for furniture suspension systems. A standard module usually incorporates two hangers, giving a total capacity of 140 kg per module (70 kg + 70 kg). This ensures a safe and stable installation for upper kitchen, bathroom and home furniture.
                                                                                  Fixing is done by screwing from the inside of the module, which provides a stable joint. In addition, its installation allows it to be concealed with covers once assembled, improving the aesthetics of the assembly.
                                                                                  The hanger has a double adjustment: it allows a height adjustment of ±5 mm and a depth adjustment on the front of the module, facilitating a precise alignment of the unit with respect to the wall.
                                                                                  Yes, this hanger is available in left and right versions. Its combined use allows symmetrical mounting of the module, ensuring stability and efficient fixing at both ends.
                                                                                  Once installed, the system can be covered with customised trim covers, which hide the screws and adjustment elements, achieving a clean and discreet finish inside the cabinet.
                                                                                  It is designed for hanging tall kitchen, bathroom or home furniture units that are fixed to the wall by means of hangers.
                                                                                  It is installed directly on the wall using plugs and screws suitable for the type of surface. It does not require additional tools beyond the basic ones for fixing.
                                                                                  Yes, it can be easily divided thanks to the pre-cut areas every 50 mm, adapting to the exact size of the module.
                                                                                  The design with pre-cut areas every 50 mm allows customisation of the length without tools, facilitating quick and clean installation.
                                                                                  The packaging includes 10 units of profiles of 2 metres each.
                                                                                  The Levelup 3 hanger supports up to 65 kg per unit, making it ideal for tall units in kitchens and bathrooms where high strength and safety are required.
                                                                                  Allows height adjustment of 18 mm and depth adjustment of 16 mm, facilitating precise adjustment of the module once installed. It is pressure-fitted into Ø 10 mm holes.
                                                                                  Yes, when mounted on the outside of the module and fixed to the wall, it is compulsory to use an additional plate for correct fastening.
                                                                                  It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which makes it corrosion resistant, making it suitable for demanding environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                  Yes, its design allows for installation on either the left or right side of the module, making it versatile for multiple configurations.
                                                                                  What load capacity does the system support and how is it distributed?
                                                                                  What tools and machining are necessary for its installation?
                                                                                  Where is the hanger installed and what type of wall anchor is used?
                                                                                  How is the position of the module adjusted once it is hung?
                                                                                  What materials make up the kit and what advantages does it offer in demanding environments?
                                                                                    These slides allow installation in modules with a width between 450 and 1200 mm and a minimum depth of 560 mm, facilitating their use in multiple table configurations.
                                                                                    The maximum load capacity of the Shot system is up to 80 kg, allowing it to support a solid and functional support surface.
                                                                                    The slides are fitted with a locking system when open, thus preventing unintentional closing during use.
                                                                                    Yes, the system includes mounting screws for quick installation without the need for additional accessories.
                                                                                    The slides are made of extruded aluminium and have a stainless steel anodised finish, ideal for kitchen environments and modern furniture.
                                                                                    The rails are suitable for modules with a maximum width of 900 mm and a minimum depth of 540 mm.
                                                                                    The system allows a load capacity of up to 60 kg, ideal for creating a stable and functional folding table surface.
                                                                                    The slide has a total length of 895 mm, which allows the table to be extended from a concealed module in a drawer.
                                                                                    The system includes hinged guides for joining the panels, mounting screws and installation instruction sheet.
                                                                                    The slides are made of extruded aluminium and feature a stainless steel anodised finish, ensuring durability and aesthetics in kitchen or office spaces.
                                                                                    The slides have a length of 705 mm and are designed for kitchen environments. They are ideal for a folding table that can be extended from a drawer.
                                                                                    The module should have a width of 450 to 1200 mm and a minimum depth of 500 mm to ensure the stability and functionality of the system.
                                                                                    The system allows a surface of 705 mm to be extended and supports a load of up to 60 kg, making it suitable for everyday functional use.
                                                                                    The system includes the hinged extension rails for connecting the panels, screws and mounting instructions sheet. Support panels are not included.
                                                                                    The slides are manufactured from extruded aluminium with a stainless steel anodised finish, providing corrosion resistance and modern aesthetics for high-end kitchens.
                                                                                    The slide is suitable for module widths of 900 mm, with a minimum depth of 540 mm, allowing it to be installed in multiple kitchen configurations.
                                                                                    The system allows the extension of an auxiliary work surface of up to 500 mm from inside a drawer, ideal for compact kitchen environments.
                                                                                    This guide supports up to 40 kg, provided that it is used in combination with a bottom support profile and the installation recommendations are observed.
                                                                                    Includes screws and complete assembly instructions. In addition, it has a locking system that is activated upon opening to prevent unintentional closing during use.
                                                                                    The stainless steel anodised finish on the extruded aluminium provides excellent wear resistance and a modern, professional aesthetic for demanding kitchens.
                                                                                    The system is suitable for module widths from 1000 mm to a minimum of 450 mm, allowing it to be installed in shelving, living room furniture, home-office and other multifunctional environments.
                                                                                    The system allows a useful extension of 370 mm for an additional concealed auxiliary surface that can be quickly and easily lifted from the cabinet.
                                                                                    The guide offers a load capacity of up to 40 kg, ensuring stability and safety for auxiliary work surfaces.
                                                                                    The kit includes anodised extruded aluminium guides, screws and full installation instructions. It also incorporates a locking system to prevent accidental closure.
                                                                                    Yes, it is designed to be concealed within a drawer or shelf type module, leaving the support surface fully retracted and ready to be deployed when required.
                                                                                    The system allows the extension of a folding table up to a length of 1380 mm with the help of 3 table tops and an integrated double telescopic leg.
                                                                                    Thanks to their compact and extendable design, Party slides can be installed in modules with a width of 900 mm and a minimum depth of 560 mm, making them suitable for kitchen, living and outdoor furniture.
                                                                                    The slides offer a load capacity of up to 100 kg, ideal for robust and functional auxiliary folding surfaces.
                                                                                    The Party system includes telescopic slides, a double aluminium folding leg, hinges for connecting panels, screws and a sheet with assembly instructions.
                                                                                    Yes, the slides are equipped with a locking system that prevents unintentional closing, guaranteeing the safety of the extended surface during use.
                                                                                    The Twice Top system allows a longitudinal displacement of a surface on a kitchen island or peninsula, offering a functional and discreet sliding support solution.
                                                                                    Enables the extension of a surface area up to 1200 mm with module widths from 600 to 900 mm.
                                                                                    The Twice Top system offers a load capacity of up to 60 kg, ideal for everyday tasks on kitchen work surfaces or auxiliary work.
                                                                                    Yes, the slides are equipped with a locking system that prevents accidental opening, ensuring greater safety during use.
                                                                                    Includes matt anodised aluminium slides, mounting screws, instructions, and all necessary hardware for correct installation. Top panel not included.
                                                                                    The Corner slide allows the diagonal displacement of a surface on a kitchen island or peninsula, facilitating a functional extension with a single movement.
                                                                                    The system is designed for boards with a maximum length of 900 mm and a minimum length of 300 mm.
                                                                                    The Corner system has a load capacity of up to 60 kg, making it ideal for frequent use in modern kitchens.
                                                                                    Yes, the slides are equipped with a locking system to prevent unintentional closing, ensuring safe and stable use.
                                                                                    Includes sliding rails made of extruded aluminium with stainless steel anodised finish, mounting screws and instructions for precise installation.
                                                                                    The system allows a longitudinal displacement and 180° rotation of the surface on a kitchen island or peninsula, ideal for flexible and functional use of space.
                                                                                    The system consists of a double aluminium folding leg, a system of sliding and rotating guides, and guide profiles that allow an extension of up to 960 mm.
                                                                                    It allows a minimum installation length of 600 mm and a maximum of 1500 mm, allowing great versatility to adapt to different kitchen or dining room designs.
                                                                                    The Setentta system is designed to withstand a load of up to 80 kg, guaranteeing strength and stability in daily use.
                                                                                    No, the boards that make up the movable surface are not included. The system includes the guide, the double folding leg, the connecting profiles and the mounting screws.
                                                                                    The system is suitable for modules between 300 and 1200 mm wide, with a minimum depth of 545 mm. It is designed to be installed in a compartment housing a pull-out drawer.
                                                                                    The slides allow a surface extension of up to 750 mm and support a maximum load of 60 kg, suitable for domestic use in kitchen or dining room environments.
                                                                                    Yes, the slides include a locking system when open, which prevents unintentional closing and improves safety during daily use.
                                                                                    The system is installed in a concealed compartment and secured with the included screws. Installation is easy thanks to its specific holes for bottom mounting.
                                                                                    The slides are made of extruded aluminium with a stainless steel anodised finish, providing modern aesthetics and excellent corrosion resistance.
                                                                                    The system supports a maximum load of 40 kg, ideal for auxiliary surfaces in the kitchen, home or office with versatile uses and stability requirements.
                                                                                    The slides are designed for installation in modules with a maximum width of 1200 mm and a minimum depth of 390 mm.
                                                                                    Yes, the Opla Folding-39 M120 system includes an aluminium profile that improves the stability of the assembly, especially when extending the auxiliary surface.
                                                                                    The product is supplied complete with mechanisms, anodised extruded aluminium rails, locking system, mounting screws and installation instructions.
                                                                                    The slides allow both the extension and quick lifting of a concealed auxiliary surface. This makes it ideal for applications where an accessible and functional work surface is required only when needed.
                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Shot mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Lunch mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Lunch+39 mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Oplà Top mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Oplà Folding+39 mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Party mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Corner mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Sestante mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Twice Top mechanism.

                                                                                    The following video shows how such a system is easily assembled:

                                                                                      Yes, for the assembly of the rectangular under sink insert it is necessary to make a 90º angle straight machining cut, although it is recommended to make a machining cut with a radius of 20 mm.
                                                                                      The rear hooks allow rails to be fitted to drawers without the need to machine the side edges of the rear panel, facilitating installation.
                                                                                      The plate holder can store up to 11 plates, optimising the available storage space by means of adjustable dividers that adapt to the size and shape of the plates.
                                                                                      Its dimensions are 120x470 mm, allowing it to fit most standard kitchen drawer sizes, ensuring a proper fit.
                                                                                      It is made of aluminium and ABS plastic, offering a combination of lightness, resistance to daily use and an elegant anthracite grey finish that stands out in modern designs.
                                                                                      Adjustable dividers hold dishes securely in place according to size and shape, preventing them from sliding, bumping or breaking during storage in the drawer.
                                                                                      This dish rack is ideal for kitchen drawers for organised and safe storage of dishes, especially in modern spaces that seek to combine functionality with design.
                                                                                      The breakfast bowl holder can hold up to 8 breakfast bowls, optimising the available storage space thanks to its adjustable dividers that organise the bowls efficiently.
                                                                                      The dimensions of the holder are 90x470 mm, which makes it compatible with most standard sizes of kitchen drawers.
                                                                                      It is made of aluminium and ABS plastic, materials that provide lightness, resistance to daily use and an elegant finish in anthracite grey.
                                                                                      Adjustable dividers adapt to the size and shape of the bags, securing them firmly to prevent them from slipping or breaking during storage.
                                                                                      This bowl holder offers a functional and modern design, optimising space and guaranteeing the safety of bowls, ideal for keeping kitchen drawers organised in a practical and aesthetically pleasing way.
                                                                                      The plate rack can store plates stacked on its columns, which optimises the available storage space in the kitchen drawers efficiently and safely.
                                                                                      Its dimensions are 159x468 mm, making it compatible with most standard kitchen drawer sizes.
                                                                                      It is made of aluminium and ABS plastic, materials that offer lightness, resistance to daily use and a modern design with an anthracite grey finish.
                                                                                      Adjustable columns and dividers allow you to organise plates according to size and shape, keeping them steady to prevent slipping or breaking while in storage.
                                                                                      This vertical plate rack offers more compact organisation and saves drawer space by storing plates in a stacked manner, improving accessibility and safety compared to horizontal options.
                                                                                      The tray adjustment system is sliding and can be adapted to the length of the cutlery inside the drawer, and can be installed directly and without the need for tools.
                                                                                      Phenolic laminate provides water resistance, anti-bacterial properties and durability against wear and tear, making it ideal for kitchen environments exposed to moisture.
                                                                                      Yes, the organiser is compatible with drawers of different depths as long as they respect the minimum dimensions of 100x470 mm.
                                                                                      The organiser is designed to withstand high humidity conditions thanks to the phenolic laminate, which protects it from deformation and corrosion and prolongs its life.
                                                                                      It does not include a specific anti-slip mechanism, but its design adjusted to the dimensions of the drawer ensures that it remains fixed during use.
                                                                                      The adjustable tray can be adapted to different cutlery lengths, maximising the space available and keeping cutlery organised.
                                                                                      Phenolic laminate offers high water resistance, anti-bacterial properties and corrosion protection, ideal for extended life in kitchen conditions.
                                                                                      The organiser is only compatible with drawers having a minimum length of 470 mm, ensuring a proper fit to its dimensions.
                                                                                      Stability is ensured by the design of the organiser to fit the internal dimensions of the drawer, eliminating movement during normal use.
                                                                                      Yes, the design with adjustable tray and dedicated dividers keeps cutlery accessible and organised, preventing slippage thanks to the firm structure.
                                                                                      The adjustable tray can be repositioned within the organiser to ensure that the spice jars are held securely in place and at the optimum inclination for use.
                                                                                      The organiser holds up to 6 spice jars, keeping them safe and organised.
                                                                                      The slope of the organiser ensures that the jars are easily visible and accessible, allowing for quick and effortless grabbing.
                                                                                      Phenolic laminate offers water resistance, anti-bacterial properties and corrosion durability, ideal for use in kitchen environments.
                                                                                      The dimensions of the organiser (150x470mm) make it compatible with most standard kitchen drawer sizes.
                                                                                      It is made of steel and phenolic laminate, which offers water resistance, anti-bacterial properties and durability against corrosion.
                                                                                      Yes, its design allows it to be easily placed inside the drawer without the need for additional tools, adapting to standard dimensions.
                                                                                      Knives of various lengths can be used thanks to its adjustable tray, ensuring that it can be used with a wide variety of utensils.
                                                                                      The knives are held securely in place by adjustable spacers that prevent movement or slipping during use of the drawer.
                                                                                      It is compatible with full and partial extraction systems, maximising its functionality in different types of drawers.
                                                                                      The anti-slip mat is ideal for protecting the bottom of drawers, preventing objects from slipping, reducing noise and keeping the surface in good condition.
                                                                                      It is made of durable plastic with a textile-effect finish, which provides stability and decorative aesthetics.
                                                                                      Yes, the mat is supplied in roll format and can be easily cut to fit the exact size of the drawer.
                                                                                      This mat prevents slipping, reduces noise when opening and closing the drawer and is easy to clean, offering a practical and functional solution.
                                                                                      The mat is available in various finishes, including white, grey and anthracite grey, to suit different decorating styles.
                                                                                      The Optima cutlery tray finishes are of high quality, with a design that ensures strength and durability, adapting to various kitchen styles.
                                                                                      Yes, the Optima cutlery tray is compatible with both Vantage-Q and Slim drawer systems, provided the module and size are compatible.
                                                                                      Optima cutlery trays are made of high-quality, resistant plastic, guaranteeing durability and ease of cleaning.
                                                                                      No, Optima cutlery trays are not designed to be cut, but are available in various sizes to fit different drawer sizes.
                                                                                      The modular design of the Optima cutlery tray allows you to reorganise kitchen utensils efficiently, maximising the space available inside the drawer.
                                                                                      The D. L. of the Optima cutlery tray finishes is of high quality, ensuring strength and durability for long-lasting use.
                                                                                      The Optima Vantage cutlery tray is available in sizes compatible with drawers 400 mm wide and 450 mm deep.
                                                                                      Yes, the Optima Vantage cutlery tray is made of durable plastic that has been treated to protect it from contact with moisture.
                                                                                      The design of the Optima Vantage cutlery tray allows for efficient organisation of kitchen utensils and tools, maximising the space available in the drawer.
                                                                                      To clean the Optima Vantage cutlery tray, simply use a damp cloth and mild detergent. It is recommended to dry it thoroughly after cleaning.
                                                                                      The anti-slip mat is a practical solution to protect the bottom of drawers from scratches, stains and debris build-up, keeping them in good condition at all times.
                                                                                      The mat prevents objects from shifting inside the drawer during opening and closing, reducing noise and ensuring stability for utensils and small objects.
                                                                                      Yes, the mat can be easily cut with scissors or a cutter to perfectly fit the dimensions of any drawer.
                                                                                      The surface has an anti-slip stippled design which ensures that objects are held in place, preventing unexpected movements.
                                                                                      The mat is made of high-quality, resistant plastic, which guarantees its durability against moisture and wear and tear from daily use.
                                                                                      The Optima Vantage cutlery tray is compatible with standard width module drawers of 600 mm and 900 mm, with a depth of 500 mm and 16 mm thick board.
                                                                                      Yes, the Optima Vantage cutlery tray can be easily trimmed to fit the specific dimensions of the drawer, providing a customised installation.
                                                                                      It is made of high-quality, hard-wearing grey plastic, designed for durability and ease of cleaning.
                                                                                      Yes, the material used in the cutlery tray is resistant to moisture and daily wear and tear, ensuring longevity in kitchen environments.
                                                                                      The cutlery tray design includes a precise fit to keep it stable inside the drawer, preventing movement during use.
                                                                                      The Optima Universal cutlery tray is compatible with drawer modules between 400 mm and 900 mm wide, with depths between 450 mm and 500 mm and board thicknesses between 16 mm and 19 mm.
                                                                                      Yes, the Optima Universal cutlery tray can be cut to fit depths between 449 mm and 482 mm and widths between 360 mm and 336 mm, allowing a customised installation according to the dimensions of the drawer.
                                                                                      The cutlery tray is made of high-quality grey plastic, which guarantees durability, strength and easy cleaning in daily use.
                                                                                      The cutlery tray has compartments designed to store knives, spoons, forks and other kitchen utensils, maximising the space inside the drawer.
                                                                                      The design of the Optima Universal cutlery tray allows for a precise fit inside the drawer, ensuring it stays in place even during frequent use.
                                                                                      The Optima Vantage cutlery tray is compatible with drawers of standard module widths of 600 mm and 900 mm, with a depth of 500 mm and a board thickness of 16 mm.
                                                                                      Yes, the Optima Vantage cutlery tray can be easily trimmed to fit the specific dimensions of the drawer, providing a customised installation.
                                                                                      It is made of high-quality, hard-wearing grey plastic, designed for durability and ease of cleaning.
                                                                                      Yes, the material used in the cutlery tray is resistant to moisture and daily wear and tear, ensuring longevity in kitchen environments.
                                                                                      The cutlery tray design includes a precise fit to keep it stable inside the drawer, preventing movement during use.
                                                                                      The Optima Vertex/Concept cutlery tray is compatible with drawers of module widths between 500 mm and 900 mm and a depth of 450 mm with a board thickness of 18 mm.
                                                                                      Yes, the cutlery tray is designed to adapt to different depths, allowing a customised installation according to the size of the drawer.
                                                                                      It is made of high quality anthracite grey plastic, designed for durability and ease of cleaning.
                                                                                      Yes, the cutlery tray material is resistant to moisture and daily wear and tear, ensuring long-lasting use in the kitchen.
                                                                                      The cutlery tray features a precise design that fits snugly inside the drawer, ensuring stability and preventing movement during use.
                                                                                      The bottom protector is made of aluminium with a textured finish, ideal for resisting moisture and ensuring durability in use.
                                                                                      Yes, this protector is designed to be resistant to moisture, daily wear and tear and possible liquid leakage.
                                                                                      Yes, the bottom protector can be easily trimmed to fit the specific dimensions of your module.
                                                                                      The protector is compatible with modules 600 mm wide and standard depths of 564x507 mm or 530x196 mm depending on the model.
                                                                                      It is installed directly onto the base of the module, making sure it fits snugly to protect the inside of the cabinet from leaks or liquids.
                                                                                      The bottom protector is made of an aluminium foil and a plastic layer, which ensures strength and adaptability.
                                                                                      This protector is compatible with modules with a width of 600 mm, a depth of 580 mm and a board thickness of 16 mm.
                                                                                      Yes, the protector can be easily trimmed to fit other module sizes, allowing for customised installation.
                                                                                      The product is designed to prevent the accumulation of moisture and dirt in the base units, protecting the bottom of the cabinet from damage.
                                                                                      Thanks to its high-quality materials, the bottom protector is resistant to daily wear and tear, guaranteeing a long service life.
                                                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Inox plate racks.

                                                                                      The distance between the rods of the dish draining rack is 18 mm. Each of the rods is 7 mm wide.
                                                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the oven grille.

                                                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the microwave frame.

                                                                                      The following video shows how you can easily assemble the abovementioned storage system in a kitchen.

                                                                                      Sut blinds can be adapted to different heights with a maximum height of 1500 mm. To do that, you simple need to cut the side rails and not fully unroll the blind. You need to bear in mind that the minimum gap for housing the blind box is 175 mm. However, the width of the Sut blind cannot be modified or cut, as this affects the pulling in mechanism of the blind.
                                                                                      The RAL code of the white finish of the Optima cutlery holder is approximately 9003. The RAL code of the grey finish of the Optima cutlery holder is approximately 7001. The RAL code of the anthracite grey finish of the Optima cutlery holder is approximately 7043.
                                                                                      The Optima cutlery holder has a wide range of models and sizes. The cutlery holder intended for the Vantage-Q drawer is not compatible with the Slim drawer. as a a cutlery holder model exists for the Slim drawer. Both models have the same depth but not the same width, specifically, the cutlery holders for the Slim drawer are 6 mm narrower than the cutlery holders for the Vantage-Q drawer.
                                                                                      We have protectors designed for assembly in kitchen floor units and in sink floor units. They are produced using natural textured aluminium with a plastic strip around the border that protects the unit from small leaks or from cleaning products. These protections are sized for 16 mm and 18 mm board, for special measurements consult the conditions.
                                                                                      Yes, it's very easy. Simply use a ruler and cutter to trim the sink protector to the size you want. Run the cutter along the line several times, then bend along the cut and you can cut the aluminium panel.
                                                                                      The following video shows how you can easily install the ironing board.

                                                                                      The following video shows how you can easily install the ironing board.

                                                                                      The organiser is fixed with screws (not included) to the shelf of the cabinet or to the base of the drawer. This installation ensures a firm hold that prevents the contents from shifting during opening or closing.
                                                                                      It is designed to hold up to 13 plates with a maximum diameter of 25 cm, making it compatible with standard tableware used in residential and collective kitchens.
                                                                                      The dimensions of the set are 350 mm long by 270 mm wide, allowing it to be integrated into kitchen modules or drawers without compromising functional space.
                                                                                      The product is made of high quality plastic, which provides resistance to continuous use, ease of cleaning and a light weight that facilitates both transport and installation.
                                                                                      The kit consists of 2 side covers and 2 central blocks, which allows a firm hold of the plates in an upright position to avoid breakage during use or transport inside the cabinet.
                                                                                      The Sut roller shutter system can cover modules up to 900 mm wide and 1500 mm high. The adjustment to different heights is carried out by changing the length of the guide rails easily and precisely.
                                                                                      The roller shutter kit includes the aluminium roller shutter slat, the top cover with fastener and the side covers. The guides must be purchased separately, as they are adjustable in length according to the needs of the module.
                                                                                      It is made of extruded aluminium with a matt anodised finish, giving it a professional feel and a modern aesthetic that is ideal for kitchen or office environments.
                                                                                      Assembly is straightforward: the roller shutter roller is fixed to the module and then the guides with their respective covers are inserted. No additional machining is required, which facilitates clean and efficient installation.
                                                                                      Yes, the roller shutter allows the winding and unwinding force to be adjusted via the roller system, which facilitates its use in high-frequency installations.
                                                                                      For proper installation, the module must have a minimum internal recess of 380 mm wide and 450 mm deep. This ensures that the table can be folded in and out without interference.
                                                                                      Yes, the mechanism incorporates an integrated locking system that allows the board to be fixed in any swivel position, providing stability during ironing.
                                                                                      The table uses partial extraction ball bearing slides, which ensure a smooth, stable and quiet glide, even with frequent use. These guides are designed to withstand the usual load without deformation.
                                                                                      Yes, the board is supplied with a removable textile cover, which facilitates regular cleaning or replacement in case of wear and tear.
                                                                                      The system is installed by screwing directly onto the cabinet shelf. The kit includes the necessary fixing screws, together with assembly instructions to facilitate professional installation.
                                                                                      Yes, the integrated telescopic slide, made of aluminium with nylon wheels, allows full extraction, providing full access to the cloths without obstructions.
                                                                                      Each arm can pivot up to 90° from its base position, allowing ergonomic distribution of towels according to the space available.
                                                                                      For the 3-arm model (length 440 mm), we recommend an interior clearance of at least 450 mm depth and 60 mm clear height to allow the arms to rotate fully.
                                                                                      The dish drainer is made of AISI 430 stainless steel, a material resistant to oxidation in kitchen environments with high humidity. This guarantees durability against frequent contact with water, vapours and detergents, ideal for installation in domestic or industrial kitchen furniture.
                                                                                      The system includes 8 lateral fixing clamps, which allow the trays to be precisely adjusted to the cabinet in a specific range depending on the model (e. G. 385-420 mm for 450 modules). This type of side fixing provides a firm hold without the need for screwing to the back of the cabinet.
                                                                                      Periodic cleaning with a damp cloth and neutral detergents is recommended. It is important to avoid abrasive or chlorine products, as they may damage the passive layer of the steel. To maintain the original shine, specific products for stainless steel can be used.
                                                                                      Yes, thanks to its lateral adjustment system using tensioners, this dish drainer is compatible with custom-made modules as long as they respect the width dimensions established in each reference.
                                                                                      Yes, the trays for plates, glasses and the drip tray can be easily removed for cleaning or replacement, without the need to dismantle the whole unit. This facilitates regular maintenance in kitchens with intensive use.
                                                                                      For optimal installation, the module should have a minimum depth of 500 mm and an internal width of between 360 mm and 520 mm.
                                                                                      The fastening is carried out by means of screws included in the set. The system is anchored directly to the base of the module, guaranteeing a firm and durable fastening without the need for additional machining.
                                                                                      It is made of steel with a white painted finish, which gives it a clean aesthetic, high resistance to wear and tear.
                                                                                      Yes, the cover can be removed for washing or replacement. It is designed for ease of maintenance and to fit compatible standard size covers (945 × 310 mm).
                                                                                      Yes, the system has metal guides with a full-extension stop, which lock the board when fully extended, providing stability during use.
                                                                                      No tools are required. The system is fully extendable by manual adjustment, allowing precise adjustment to each type of plate.
                                                                                      It is made of high quality technical plastic, with good impact resistance and weight deformation, ideal for intensive use in kitchen environments.
                                                                                      Yes, the plate holder has a base with a non-slip internal structure that improves stability during transport and prevents shifting on shelves or in drawers.
                                                                                      Although it has no explicit load limit, its design supports without deformation up to 10-12 standard size porcelain dishes, equivalent to a weight of approximately 8-10 kg.
                                                                                      It is not stackable, but can be combined modularly with other plate racks in the same drawer to compartmentalise dishes according to size and frequency of use.
                                                                                      This frame is designed to fit microwave ovens in 600 mm wide modules, being compatible with appliances up to 600 mm wide by 400 mm high, adjustable by cutting out the integrated grille.
                                                                                      Yes, it is supplied with mounting screws, positioning plugs and trim caps, facilitating quick and professional installation without the need for additional components.
                                                                                      Yes, the design incorporates a weakened grille that allows easy trimming of the internal louvres to achieve an exact fit to the size of the appliance.
                                                                                      Yes, the product includes a step-by-step installation guide, including measurements and recommendations for adjusting the grille cutout and positioning of the appliance.
                                                                                      It is designed for fixed and permanent installation, although it can be dismantled if the microwave needs to be replaced, without compromising the structural integrity of the frame.
                                                                                      It is designed to fit into standard 600 mm wide kitchen units, allowing precise integration into base units or oven columns.
                                                                                      The slats are made of extruded aluminium, which guarantees excellent mechanical strength, lightness and corrosion resistance, ideal for high temperature environments.
                                                                                      The mounting is carried out by means of 2 lateral brackets included, which allow an easy mounting without special tools, only with a conventional screwdriver.
                                                                                      Yes, the system allows quick assembly and disassembly of the slats, facilitating maintenance without the need to remove the entire structure of the furniture.
                                                                                      It is available in versions compatible with 16 mm and 18 mm thick boards, which allows it to adapt to the most common standards in kitchen furniture.
                                                                                      The base has been designed for installation in 600 mm wide modules, typical in kitchens to integrate refrigerators.
                                                                                      It has strategic perforations that ensure proper air circulation in the lower part of the integrated refrigerator, improving its efficiency and preventing overheating.
                                                                                      It incorporates holes for direct fixing of the kitchen feet, as well as adjustment locks for quick assembly to the furniture without the need for special tools.
                                                                                      The base is delivered without additional accessories, as it is attached directly to the module and does not require any special fittings.
                                                                                      The hanger is installed using screws and plugs included in the kit. Fixing is simple and is designed to ensure a firm hold even in high use areas such as kitchens or storage rooms.
                                                                                      Each recess has self-adjusting rolling balls that adapt to the thickness of the handle (brooms, mops, dustpans), allowing a firm grip without the need to exert too much pressure.
                                                                                      Unlocking is manual and very intuitive: just lift the handle of the tool slightly, releasing the pressure on the rollers and allowing it to be easily removed.
                                                                                      The hanger measures 33 cm long, 6.2 cm wide and 8.3 cm thick, ideal for small spaces or behind cupboard doors.
                                                                                      The hanger can hold up to 9 utensils simultaneously, combining 5 lower hooks and 4 upper recesses for different types of handles.
                                                                                      The bar is installed using double-sided, high-adhesion adhesive tape along its entire length, allowing it to be mounted without drilling on smooth surfaces such as melamine, lacquered wood or glass.
                                                                                      Yes, the design of the bar allows for both vertical and horizontal mounting, making it easy to adapt to different spaces and styles of professional or domestic kitchens.
                                                                                      The bar has a length of 400 mm, a height of 40 mm and a thickness of 15 mm, which provides a usable surface suitable for several knives or metal utensils.
                                                                                      It is equipped with a high-strength internal magnet, inserted into the core of the stainless steel profile, designed to secure knives of different sizes securely without risk of falling.
                                                                                      It is suitable for scissors, tweezers, peelers, spatulas and other light to medium metal utensils containing sufficient ferric content to be attracted by the magnet.
                                                                                      The basket measures 380 mm long x 305 mm wide x 500 mm high and is designed for installation in 450 mm wide modules.
                                                                                      The basket comes with boards compatible with 16 mm, 18 mm and 19 mm board thicknesses, making it adaptable to most standard configurations in kitchen or laundry furniture.
                                                                                      No, the basket comes with its own hinged mechanism, so no additional hinges are required. The supplied kit also includes the template for easy assembly.
                                                                                      Yes, the design of the folding system allows a complete and ergonomic opening, optimising access to the inside of the basket and facilitating the loading and unloading of laundry.
                                                                                      The body of the basket is made of high-strength white plastic, while the anchoring plates are made of white painted steel, ensuring a combination of lightness and durability.
                                                                                      It has dimensions of 330 x 520 mm. It is suitable for sinks of similar size or larger. It is recommended to pre-measure the inside width of the sink to ensure a proper fit.
                                                                                      It can hold up to 14 kg in weight, so it can be safely used for household plates, glasses, pots and pans.
                                                                                      Yes, it is designed to withstand extreme temperatures between -30°C and +230°C, making it suitable for use as a trivet for hot or even frozen utensils.
                                                                                      The flexible design with steel rods and anti-slip silicone coating allows it to rest securely on the worktop or sink without the need for additional fixings.
                                                                                      This model can be folded and rolled up, which optimises space when not in use. It can also be used as an auxiliary surface for cooking or defrosting, unlike the fixed models.
                                                                                      It is designed to be installed in 450 mm wide modules and is compatible with 16, 18 and 19 mm thick boards.
                                                                                      The dimensions of the basket are 250 mm (length) x 380 mm (width) x 500 mm (height). It is recommended to check that the internal clearance of the module is sufficient to allow the system to be tilted without interference.
                                                                                      It includes a folding mechanism that allows the door of the unit to be opened, facilitating access to the inside of the basket. This system is installed directly on the door using screws.
                                                                                      The basket is delivered disassembled, and includes screws, assembly instructions and the necessary folding system for installation.
                                                                                      Yes, the folding system allows reversible installation, so it can be mounted to open to the left or right depending on the design of the furniture.
                                                                                      The dish drainer is 435 mm wide x 270 mm deep x 275 mm high, so at least 450 mm of usable worktop space is recommended to ensure comfortable, interference-free use.
                                                                                      It is designed with two storage levels: the upper level holds upright plates and the lower level holds cups, bowls or other utensils of lower height. The lower tray acts as a drip tray, protecting the work surface.
                                                                                      No, this model does not require installation. It is a tabletop product, which allows it to be easily moved or removed for cleaning or reconfiguration of the space.
                                                                                      The tray is made of white plastic, removable and easy to clean. It is designed to collect the drained water, avoiding stains or damage to the worktop.
                                                                                      It is recommended to clean with a damp cloth and neutral detergent, avoiding abrasive products or metallic sponges that could damage the chrome coating.
                                                                                      It is exclusively compatible with the Iron pull-out (SKU 8037512) and Iron folding 180° (SKU 8080020) models, both belonging to the kitchen furniture integration system.
                                                                                      The cover has a maximum dimension of 950 mm long x 300 mm wide, which fits perfectly to the ironing surfaces of both models.
                                                                                      It is made of 100% cotton, which provides high thermal resistance, good breathability and durability in prolonged use with steam irons.
                                                                                      It has an adjustment system with elastic knots at the bottom, which facilitates quick assembly and ensures a firm fit without shifting during use.
                                                                                      The cotton used is designed to withstand the high temperatures common in domestic irons, allowing even heat distribution without visible deterioration.
                                                                                      They are designed for modules with a minimum width of 600 mm and can be installed in drawers with a useful height of up to 140 mm, allowing optimal integration into kitchen or bathroom furniture.
                                                                                      The kit includes 2 large bins 220 x 300 mm and 2 small bins 220 x 150 mm, optimised for sectional organisation within the drawer.
                                                                                      They are made of high-strength ABS plastic with an anthracite grey or white finish. This material provides great durability, impact resistance and anti-scratch finish.
                                                                                      Yes, the kits are modular and can be combined with each other, allowing you to customise the interior layout of the drawer according to the type of utensils or items to be organised.
                                                                                      The cubes are free standing, allowing them to be easily rearranged according to the needs of use without permanent fixings.
                                                                                      A cabinet with a minimum depth of 460 mm and a minimum width (internal recess) of 310 mm is required for proper installation.
                                                                                      The board incorporates 45 mm ball guides with Soft damping system, which ensure a smooth, quiet and safe glide.
                                                                                      Installation is simple: just screw the guide to the side of the module and fix the bars to the base of the shelf, without any additional mechanisms.
                                                                                      Yes, it has a bar locking system to keep the board fixed in any position during use.
                                                                                      It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, and includes a removable grey textile cover, easy to remove for cleaning or replacement.
                                                                                      The bracket has compact dimensions of 200 mm x 200 mm x 380 mm, allowing it to be easily installed inside cabinets, doors or walls, even in confined spaces.
                                                                                      It is designed to hold electric irons, ironing boards and auxiliary accessories, thanks to its upper metal basket and lower fastening hooks.
                                                                                      Yes, the kit includes mounting screws. Installation is simple and straightforward on the wall or inside the cabinet, without the need for special tools.
                                                                                      Yes, the lower hooks are designed to hold standard ironing boards, ensuring that they are securely fixed in place and prevent them from sliding out of place when the cabinet is opened.
                                                                                      The curved metal hooks secure the ironing board by the legs or base, preventing it from sliding or falling into the wardrobe.
                                                                                      The installation requires a module with a minimum depth of 500 mm and a clear height of at least 162 mm. The inside width of the module must be 40 cm or more.
                                                                                      It incorporates a system of telescopic profiles with smooth extraction, which allows a silent and controlled sliding, ideal for kitchen or laundry modules.
                                                                                      The board offers a 920 mm long x 330 mm wide ironing surface, providing a comfortable and spacious area for frequent domestic use.
                                                                                      Yes, it has a safety clipping system that locks the board when fully open, preventing accidental displacement during use.
                                                                                      The front handle makes it easy to slide and remove the board from the module, as well as serving as a support point to hold it comfortably when opening it.
                                                                                      The plate capacity varies depending on the specific model of Suprastar plate rack: M60: up to 20 standard plates M70: up to 24 standard plates M80: up to 28 standard plates M90: up to 32 standard plates In addition, each model includes an additional tray for containers, allowing for optimised use of vertical space in tall kitchen cabinets. This configuration ensures efficient and safe distribution of kitchenware within the module.
                                                                                      It is made of steel with an aluminium painted finish, which makes it highly resistant to rust. The anchors are made of plastic and the drip tray is made of transparent plastic, preventing deterioration due to contact with water.
                                                                                      The assembly is carried out by screwing the anchors directly to the inside of the furniture, and includes the screws and 4 plastic strips to ensure the stability of the assembly.
                                                                                      The product is delivered with all components separately: 1 plate tray, 1 cup tray, 1 drip tray, 4 fixing strips and screws for individual assembly.
                                                                                      It is compatible with most 700 mm wide kitchen modules, especially European modular furniture, making it ideal for integration into mass production or refurbishment projects.
                                                                                      The kit incorporates 40 self-adhesive silicone drops, which are placed on the base of each tray to prevent movement during the opening or closing of the drawer, ensuring stability without the need for mechanical fixing.
                                                                                      They are made of heavy-duty transparent plastic, which makes the contents easily visible, enhances product durability and withstands heavy use in domestic or commercial environments.
                                                                                      Yes, the design allows cubes to be stacked and combined between different kits, which is ideal for projects where modularity and adaptability in drawer distribution is required.
                                                                                      The kit includes 6 cubes of 75x75x54 mm, 3 cubes of 75x151x54 mm and 1 cube of 153x153x54 mm, which allows a flexible and customisable layout according to the width of the drawer, facilitating its integration in customised projects.
                                                                                      Yes, its waterproof material and closed design make it ideal for use in damp environments such as kitchens and bathrooms, preventing moisture build-up or deterioration.
                                                                                      It can be installed on a wall or on a piece of furniture, by direct fixing with screws and plugs included. It does not require machining, which simplifies its assembly on different surfaces.
                                                                                      A flat, sturdy surface with a clear width of at least 500 mm must be guaranteed to allow for full deployment of the board (dimensions: 980 x 310 mm).
                                                                                      It includes a mechanical locking system that allows the board to be fixed at 180° in any position, ensuring stability while ironing at any angle.
                                                                                      It is manufactured with a white painted steel frame and a wooden base, which ensures a long service life and structural stability under intensive use.
                                                                                      Yes, its tilting and swivelling system allows to adjust the horizontal or inclined position, adapting to small spaces or ergonomic locations depending on the type of user or environment.
                                                                                      The RAL of the white finish of the siphon guard is approximately 9003. The RAL code for the grey finish of the siphon guard is approximately 7045. The RAL code for the anthracite grey finish of the siphon guard is approximately 7043.
                                                                                      Yes, it can be combined with a wide range of our undermount recycling buckets. Please refer to the table below for compatibility:
                                                                                      The hanger is attached using two concealed screws included in the kit. It is easily installed with a standard screwdriver, without the need for special tools or additional anchoring systems.
                                                                                      It is made of high quality hypoallergenic rubber, which makes it resistant to moisture, scratches and daily use. This material is ideal for installations in children's environments due to its safety and durability.
                                                                                      Can be installed on plasterboard, wood, chipboard or painted surfaces, provided that the appropriate plugs and screws are used. Not recommended for soft or non-structural surfaces without reinforcement.
                                                                                      Yes, in addition to the black painted finish, it is also available in blue, which allows it to adapt to different styles of decoration in children's bedrooms or play areas.
                                                                                      Each hanger is installed by means of two visible screws included in the delivery. Installation is carried out with a conventional screwdriver, without the need for special tools, and is suitable for walls made of wood, plaster or technical boards.
                                                                                      They are made of high-strength aluminium, which gives them excellent resistance to corrosion, lightness and durability in wet areas such as bathrooms or laundry rooms. In addition, their black painted finish guarantees high resistance to scratching.
                                                                                      Yes, in addition to the black painted finish, it is also available in a matt anodised finish, which allows it to be integrated into more neutral or technical decorative styles, such as office or contract furniture.
                                                                                      Yes, its compact size and simple fixing make it compatible with modular structures or pre-drilled boards, which are widely used in modular wardrobes, walk-in wardrobes or vertical storage systems.
                                                                                      The set includes 7 wall hangers and the necessary installation screws for mounting. Supplied as a complete set, ready to install.
                                                                                      The kit includes screws Ø 4.5x40 mm and plugs Ø 5x30 mm, suitable for quick and safe installation on suitable surfaces.
                                                                                      The hanger is made of zamak, a resistant and easy to clean material, ideal for home applications such as bathrooms, bedrooms or wardrobes.
                                                                                      This model is available in chrome and black painted finish, allowing it to adapt to different styles of interior decoration.
                                                                                      It is designed to be adaptable to any room in the home, such as bedrooms, bathrooms or wardrobes, helping to save space by being wall-mounted.
                                                                                      The product is supplied with 1 wall hanger and the screws required for installation.
                                                                                      This model includes 3 coat racks integrated in a single piece, ideal for organising coats or accessories in different areas of the home.
                                                                                      It is made of steel, a hard-wearing and easy-to-clean material, suitable for both domestic and public environments.
                                                                                      The Hamilton hanger is available in black paint and satin nickel, allowing it to be adapted to different interior styles.
                                                                                      It can be installed in bedrooms, bathrooms, wardrobes or common areas of the home. It is also suitable for public spaces such as offices, libraries or restaurants.
                                                                                      The rectangular siphon saver is suitable for kitchen and bathroom drawers, especially for installations under sinks and washbasins of the Concept model.
                                                                                      The product is made of high quality plastic, which makes it resistant to daily use, durable in the long term and easy to maintain.
                                                                                      To install the siphon saver, it must be attached to the rear of the drawer using the screws provided. The process is quick and requires no specialised tools or preparation.
                                                                                      The siphon saver optimises space by concealing the siphon and allowing efficient storage inside the drawer, leaving more room to organise other items.
                                                                                      The siphon saver is available in three finishes: grey (SKU 3044221), white (SKU 3044215) and anthracite grey (SKU 3044223), allowing it to be integrated into different styles of furniture.
                                                                                      The curved trap saver is designed specifically for washbasins and is mainly used in bathroom furniture, while the rectangular trap saver is more suitable for kitchen areas or sinks. The curved design is better suited to confined spaces and bathroom traps.
                                                                                      The curved design optimises space in the drawers under the washbasin, allowing for a more discreet and efficient installation. In addition, its shape favours organisation in furniture with more intrusive siphons.
                                                                                      It is made of high-quality plastic and is available in three finishes: white (SKU 3044315), grey (SKU 3044321), and anthracite grey (SKU 3044323), offering aesthetic and functional options.
                                                                                      Yes, this siphon saver is compatible with most standard bathroom furniture, thanks to its versatile design and easy adjustment to the available space.
                                                                                      Installation is simple: it is fixed directly to the back of the drawer with screws. No specialised tools are required, and its design allows for quick and safe assembly.
                                                                                      The rectangular siphon saver makes better use of the space in a bathroom drawer by preventing the siphon from clogging, providing a more organised and functional storage area.
                                                                                      It is easy to install and is fixed to the back of the drawer with screws. It does not require specialised tools and can be easily adjusted for correct positioning.
                                                                                      It is made of high quality plastic and is available in three finishes: white (SKU 3044115), grey (SKU 3044121) and anthracite grey (SKU 3044123), allowing it to adapt to different furniture designs.
                                                                                      By concealing the siphon within its structure, the siphon saver frees up useful space inside the drawer, allowing objects to be stored more efficiently and without wasting volume.
                                                                                      Each package includes 6 units, making it easy to purchase for multiple bathroom furniture installation projects. Available in three colours to match different styles.
                                                                                      The siphon saver allows a gap to be left at the back of the drawer to facilitate the passage of the sink drain pipe, optimising storage space.
                                                                                      It is available in sizes 200 mm, 350 mm and 550 mm wide, with finishes in white, aluminium and anthracite grey, allowing it to adapt to different styles of furniture.
                                                                                      Installation is simple and is carried out by fixing the part with screws to the drawer. A screwdriver is recommended to ensure a firm hold. Screws are not included in the kit.
                                                                                      It is ideal for kitchen and bathroom furniture, especially in drawers under sinks or washbasins where free space is required for pipework.
                                                                                      It is made of steel, which provides high resistance to moisture and durability in environments of frequent use, avoiding deformation or damage over time.
                                                                                      The slim rectangular siphon guard is designed to conceal the view of the siphon in bathroom furniture, optimising the interior space and preventing objects from falling out.
                                                                                      It can be installed in any drawer with a rear panel thickness of 16 mm and a minimum depth of 250 mm, ensuring stable and functional integration.
                                                                                      It is made of plastic and available in anthracite grey, grey and white finishes, allowing it to be combined with different styles of bathroom furniture.
                                                                                      It is easy to install by screwing it to the back of the drawer, without the need to machine the bottom, which facilitates assembly without the need for specialised tools.
                                                                                      The thin-walled design allows for a more aesthetic and discreet integration into the drawer, maximising interior space without adding unnecessary bulk.
                                                                                      The H56 siphon saver is distinguished by its reduced height of 56 mm and its thin-walled design, which allows for a more discreet and efficient integration into the interior of the drawer.
                                                                                      It is ideal for drawers with a reduced rear panel height of 56 mm and a panel thickness of 16 mm, and can be fitted in drawers with a minimum depth of 250 mm.
                                                                                      It is made of high quality plastic and is available in white, grey and anthracite grey finishes, which allows it to adapt to different styles of bathroom furniture.
                                                                                      It is installed by screwing it to the back of the drawer, without the need to machine the bottom. It is quick and easy to fix, without the need for specialised tools.
                                                                                      Its reduced height allows a better optimisation of the space in the drawer, maximising storage capacity without interfering with the structure of the furniture.
                                                                                        M8 or M8x1 refers to the metric thread and thread pitch of a screw. In the European market the 1.25 mm thread is common and it is named M8. On the contrary, when dealing with a fine 1 mm screw thread, M8X1 is used. In the Italian market a different name is used, 8MA for M8 and 8MB for M8X1.
                                                                                        The joining systems for furniture found in our catalogue are organised in this list according to their strength, from strongest to least strong: * **Eccentric Ø35.** They are used for joining beams on beds or similar furniture that requires stronger joints. * **Rostro.** They are mainly used on wardrobes or furniture where the aesthetic is of great importance, thanks to their innovative design. * **System.** They are used on a wide range of wardrobes and pieces of furniture. * **Eccentric.** They are applied to the majority of home furniture.
                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install a Strong hanger.

                                                                                        The bottom Strong 32 mm bracket is designed to offer greater adjustment of the position of the unit horizontally and vertically. However, for this unit bracket, it is necessary to have the back part at a minimum distance of 32 mm in relation to the fastening wall. The bottom Strong 3 mm bracket has less adjustment and the back part has to be kept a minimum distance of 3 mm from the fastening wall.
                                                                                        The double bracket allows the LevaFix system hangers to be attached to the wall, ensuring a sturdy fixing for tall modules and facilitating the even distribution of the furniture load.
                                                                                        The plate measures 110 mm long by 24 mm wide and is 1.8 mm thick, providing mechanical stability for vertical loads in high modules.
                                                                                        It has holes with a diameter of 6.5 mm, compatible with standard mounting screws used in wall installations for kitchen and bathroom furniture.
                                                                                        No, the plate has been designed for direct wall mounting in conjunction with LevaFix hangers, offering an all-in-one solution that does not require additional reinforcement.
                                                                                        Natural steel provides high structural strength, durability against wear and excellent compatibility with dry or technical indoor environments.
                                                                                        The Hook system is certified according to UNI 16776 standard to support up to 70 kg per set of hangers, guaranteeing safety and reliability in kitchen, bathroom or household overhead units.
                                                                                        It offers a height adjustment of 15 mm and a depth adjustment of 43 mm, which facilitates the precise alignment of the module with the wall and the levelling between adjacent modules, optimising the assembly process.
                                                                                        The set of 5 kits contains: 5 right hangers, 5 left hangers, 5 right covers, 5 left covers, 5 mounting brackets and the necessary screws for fixing, allowing up to 5 modules to be fitted.
                                                                                        The included covers allow the hangers to be covered once installed, offering an aesthetically pleasing, clean and professional solution, ideal for both bespoke furniture and mass production.
                                                                                        Yes, the Hook system allows assembly without the need to machine the back of the module, which simplifies assembly and improves efficiency in industrial and professional installations.
                                                                                        The Holdy cover has a decorative and concealing function, as it is placed over the hangers to hide the fixing elements, improving the final aesthetics of the piece of furniture without interfering with the hanger adjustment system.
                                                                                        Holdy covers are designed to be installed on right or left hangers, so it is essential to select the corresponding model according to the orientation of the hanger installed in the module.
                                                                                        The covers are available in white, light grey and anthracite grey, allowing harmonious visual integration with different furniture finishes. This promotes a cleaner and more uniform design in visible installations.
                                                                                        The plastic used is light and resistant, ideal for maintaining the fixation on the hanger without overloading the structure. In addition, it offers an aesthetic finish suitable for kitchen or bathroom environments where durability and low maintenance are required.
                                                                                        The product is packaged in packs of 400 units, which makes it particularly suitable for industrial projects, serial installations and professional distribution in large quantities.
                                                                                        The Strong 3 mm bottom support offers a maximum adjustment of 5.5 mm in depth and 6 mm in height, allowing the position of the suspended bottom module to be precisely adjusted for perfect levelling.
                                                                                        It is essential that the back of the module has a minimum clearance of 3 mm to the fixing wall. This distance ensures that the bracket can be positioned correctly without interference.
                                                                                        The bracket has a width of 42 mm in the fixing area, a height of 135 mm and a base of 54 mm. These dimensions ensure a firm and secure attachment to suspended lower modules, optimising the load and stability of the assembly.
                                                                                        The fixing hole is designed for 8 mm diameter screws, ensuring a robust attachment to the module and facilitating fast and precise mounting.
                                                                                        The bracket is made of steel with a zinc plated finish, making it corrosion resistant and durable in demanding environments. Supplied in batches of 25 units, suitable for industrial installations or large-scale carpentry projects.
                                                                                        The Holdy hanger is designed to withstand loads of up to 65 kg, making it a robust and safe solution for overhead locker units in kitchens, bathrooms and the home.
                                                                                        The system is screwed to the side of the module and anchored to the wall by means of a metal plate, which guarantees a firm, adjustable and durable fixing.
                                                                                        The front adjustment allows the position of the module to be adjusted in depth and height, which optimises the aesthetic and functional alignment of the furniture without the need for disassembly.
                                                                                        The mounting is concealed inside the module, while on the wall it can be covered with decorative covers, which significantly improves aesthetics without compromising functionality.
                                                                                        The system includes right or left hangers, with an anchor base that allows for 18 mm height and 8.5 mm depth adjustments, offering flexibility for multiple top module configurations.
                                                                                        The Strong hanger can carry loads of up to 240 kg (120 kg per hanger), complying with EN 15939 under type B test frame. This makes it an ideal solution for heavy duty suspended furniture.
                                                                                        This hanger is compatible with any type of suspended kitchen, bathroom or auxiliary furniture, offering a versatile and robust solution for installations where maximum security and resistance are required.
                                                                                        To install the hanger, machining is required on the module for anchoring at the top and fixing the plate. In addition, the back must be 3 mm from the wall to allow the correct use of the lower brackets (not included).
                                                                                        The Strong system offers triple adjustment (height, depth and sideways), which allows precise adjustment of the module even after installation, without the need to dismantle it. Its zinc-plated steel structure makes it corrosion resistant and long-lasting.
                                                                                        The hanger is available in packs of 50 units, with a zinc-plated finish that guarantees resistance to oxidation, facilitating its handling in professional assembly lines and installations in demanding environments.
                                                                                        The Strong 32 mm bracket provides advanced adjustment of the module position in all three directions (height, depth and side), which is ideal for demanding assemblies where perfect alignment of the cabinet to the wall is required.
                                                                                        To install the Strong 32 mm bracket, the cabinet must have a minimum distance of 32 mm from the wall. This allows the bracket and hanger to work together without interference.
                                                                                        Fixing the Strong 32 mm bracket requires screws with a diameter of 8.2 mm. It has three fixing holes to ensure a secure hold even in heavy applications.
                                                                                        This bracket is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which gives it high mechanical strength and corrosion protection, ideal for demanding environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                                                                                        The bracket is supplied in boxes of 25 units, allowing efficient installation in industrial or mass production environments, with precise control over available stock.
                                                                                        The cover cap is designed to completely cover and conceal the Hook hanger once fitted, enhancing the aesthetics of the furniture without compromising access or operation of the fastening system.
                                                                                        No, this cover has been manufactured specifically for Hook top hanger units. Its fit is optimised for this model, ensuring perfect integration into kitchen, bathroom and household cabinets.
                                                                                        Yes, it is available in left and right hand versions, which allows a symmetrical and correct installation according to the position of the hanger in the cabinet.
                                                                                        The anthracite grey finish offers a modern and discreet appearance, ideal for combining with modern design furniture. In addition, the plastic material ensures resistance to wear and tear without visual deterioration.
                                                                                        The Hook hanger cover comes in packs of 200 pieces per hand (left or right), optimising its use in production lines or large-scale furniture projects.
                                                                                        The Levelup 1 hanger can support up to 65 kg per unit, making it ideal for large or heavy overhead units in kitchens, bathrooms and home furnishings.
                                                                                        This model includes a height adjustment of 18 mm and a depth adjustment of 18 mm, which allows a precise adjustment of the module once installed, facilitating the levelling of the furniture.
                                                                                        It is fixed to the sides and back of the module with screws, and is completely concealed when the unit is closed, with only one visible point on the inside.
                                                                                        To fix the module to the wall using the Levelup 1 hanger, it is essential to use the Levelup 1 plate, which acts as a complementary structural support.
                                                                                        Yes, the Levelup 1 hanger is manufactured in accordance with the UNE-EN 15939 standard for furniture, guaranteeing European standards in terms of durability, strength and structural safety.
                                                                                        The plug is designed to cover the machining on the back of the module where the Levelup 1 concealed hanger is housed. It not only conceals the system, but also protects the hanger adjustment screws and enhances the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                                        The plug has an outer diameter of 20 mm, an inner diameter of 18 mm and a thickness of 3 mm. It is designed to be pressed into the back of the module, which allows for quick installation without special tools.
                                                                                        Yes, the design allows the plug to be easily removed and replaced, making it easy to access the hanger adjustment screws should post-installation adjustments be required.
                                                                                        It is made of zamak with a nickel-plated finish. This material provides high mechanical resistance, protection against corrosion and a clean and professional metallic finish, ideal for kitchen, bathroom or household modules.
                                                                                        The plug is available in nickel plated and white finish. Supplied in packs of 1000 units, intended for production environments or industrial furniture assembly.
                                                                                        The Hook hanger is tested to support 70 kg per hanger unit, in accordance with UNI 10767, which regulates safety requirements for furniture suspension systems. A standard module usually incorporates two hangers, giving a total capacity of 140 kg per module (70 kg + 70 kg). This ensures a safe and stable installation for upper kitchen, bathroom and home furniture.
                                                                                        Fixing is done by screwing from the inside of the module, which provides a stable joint. In addition, its installation allows it to be concealed with covers once assembled, improving the aesthetics of the assembly.
                                                                                        The hanger has a double adjustment: it allows a height adjustment of ±5 mm and a depth adjustment on the front of the module, facilitating a precise alignment of the unit with respect to the wall.
                                                                                        Yes, this hanger is available in left and right versions. Its combined use allows symmetrical mounting of the module, ensuring stability and efficient fixing at both ends.
                                                                                        Once installed, the system can be covered with customised trim covers, which hide the screws and adjustment elements, achieving a clean and discreet finish inside the cabinet.
                                                                                        The plate must be fixed to the wall with 4 screws in 2 columns and 2 rows, with a distance of 42 mm between screws. This arrangement ensures the necessary structural strength for lower module suspension systems.
                                                                                        The plate measures 60 mm long by 13 mm deep, and is installed in a recessed manner. Its concealed design allows for an aesthetic finish with no visible elements from the outside of the module once installed.
                                                                                        The plate is specifically designed to work with Strong system hangers, allowing a stable and secure suspension. The curvature of the part facilitates direct assembly with Strong system hangers.
                                                                                        The Strong 32 mm bracket offers greater module height adjustability, while the Strong 3 mm bracket is intended for installations where a more compact fixing is required. The choice depends on the distance between the back of the module and the wall.
                                                                                        Made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, the plate offers high tensile strength and durability against corrosion. Its integration into the Strong system ensures reliable support for suspended base units, ideal for kitchen and bathroom environments.
                                                                                        It is designed for hanging tall kitchen, bathroom or home furniture units that are fixed to the wall by means of hangers.
                                                                                        It is installed directly on the wall using plugs and screws suitable for the type of surface. It does not require additional tools beyond the basic ones for fixing.
                                                                                        Yes, it can be easily divided thanks to the pre-cut areas every 50 mm, adapting to the exact size of the module.
                                                                                        The design with pre-cut areas every 50 mm allows customisation of the length without tools, facilitating quick and clean installation.
                                                                                        The packaging includes 10 units of profiles of 2 metres each.
                                                                                        The Levelup 3 hanger supports up to 65 kg per unit, making it ideal for tall units in kitchens and bathrooms where high strength and safety are required.
                                                                                        Allows height adjustment of 18 mm and depth adjustment of 16 mm, facilitating precise adjustment of the module once installed. It is pressure-fitted into Ø 10 mm holes.
                                                                                        Yes, when mounted on the outside of the module and fixed to the wall, it is compulsory to use an additional plate for correct fastening.
                                                                                        It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which makes it corrosion resistant, making it suitable for demanding environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                        Yes, its design allows for installation on either the left or right side of the module, making it versatile for multiple configurations.
                                                                                        It is very simple – the Hook brackets that fix the profile to the wall have a height regulation of ±5 mm. These brackets have two screws – one of them attaches the module to the wall, and the other regulates the height and ensures it is fully horizontal.
                                                                                        What load capacity does the system support and how is it distributed?
                                                                                        What tools and machining are necessary for its installation?
                                                                                        Where is the hanger installed and what type of wall anchor is used?
                                                                                        How is the position of the module adjusted once it is hung?
                                                                                        What materials make up the kit and what advantages does it offer in demanding environments?
                                                                                          In order to know if a screw is compatible with a nut or stud bolt are compatible, we have to look at the internal thread of the screw and at the thread of the nut or stud bolt, which must coincide. For example, if we choose a nut or stud boy with a 6 metric screw thread (M6), the screw also has to have an internal metric thread of 6 (M6).
                                                                                          To ensure precise mounting, a guide bore of Ø7 mm with a minimum depth of 14 mm is recommended. The maximum permissible clearance is ±0.1 mm in order to maintain the correct coupling with the T15 eccentric and to avoid unwanted movements after assembly.
                                                                                          Yes, the design of the double hinged pin has been optimised to fit both Ø15 mm and Ø18 mm eccentrics. The intermediate joint facilitates aligned insertion and improves adaptability to different joint configurations in knock-down furniture.
                                                                                          Made of high-strength zinc-plated steel, this bolt withstands a tensile load of over 700 N when properly assembled with T15 eccentrics. It is ideal for structural applications in kitchen units, cabinets or office furniture with high mechanical demands.
                                                                                          The 15.5 mm movable arm compensates for small machining misalignments and is particularly useful in configurations where panels are not perfectly square. It facilitates assembly even on production lines with slight deviation tolerances.
                                                                                          It is not recommended for use in thicknesses less than 16 mm, as the retention of the eccentric and the minimum insertion depth of the bolt would not guarantee the necessary structural strength. For thin boards, specific shallow depth fittings should be used.
                                                                                          For safe installation, the table top should be machined with a Ø20 mm hole to a controlled depth of 12.5 mm. This recess must be 1 mm from the panel edge to ensure the correct fit of the piston protrusion ring.
                                                                                          The plunger is part of the System 16 coupling system and is designed to mate directly with a compatible eccentric, without the need for additional hardware. Adjustment is by axial pressure and rotation, providing a robust and removable joint.
                                                                                          Recommended for use on chipboard, MDF or melamine boards 25 mm thick. For hardwoods or composite materials it is advisable to check the machining tolerance, as the hardness of the material may affect the accuracy of the fit.
                                                                                          The recommended tolerance for the bore diameter is ±0.1 mm. An out-of-tolerance bore may compromise the stability of the assembly or create clearances that affect the attachment of the eccentric to the plunger.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish provides corrosion protection and improves the mechanical strength of the zamak. This is especially important in high humidity environments or in heavy duty furniture where long term structural durability is required.
                                                                                          This bolt is specifically designed for use with 25 mm diameter eccentrics in furniture joining systems. Its compatibility ensures a solid, fast and secure joint in all types of furniture.
                                                                                          The bolt thread has an overall length of 38 mm and a diameter of 7 mm, which allows for efficient assembly with 12 mm thick boards, offering versatility in standard furniture configurations.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish of the bolt provides excellent protection against corrosion and oxidation, ideal for ensuring the durability of the hardware in environments with high mechanical and environmental resistance requirements.
                                                                                          The countersunk head allows a precise fit with the eccentric, optimising the tightening torque and improving the aesthetic finish of the assembly, as it is perfectly flush with the fitting.
                                                                                          The bolt is supplied in industrial packaging of 2,500 units, facilitating supply on production lines or assembly lines with high component turnover.
                                                                                          The double bolt allows for solid joints between pieces of furniture, especially in configurations that require simultaneous vertical and horizontal fastening, optimising the assembly and structural strength of the module.
                                                                                          Its design allows for a more even load distribution, improves joint stability and reduces the number of parts required when joining two components with a single element.
                                                                                          The bolt has an overall length of 62 mm and a diameter of 6 mm. Each end incorporates holes for 6 mm bolts and an end housing for 10 mm head bolts.
                                                                                          It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides high resistance to oxidation, ideal for humid environments or industrial applications with high mechanical demands.
                                                                                          The product is delivered in packs of 1000 units, facilitating its management and replacement for manufacturers, industrial carpenters and furniture distributors.
                                                                                          Thanks to its ring design and nickel-plated Zamak construction, this eccentric provides increased mechanical strength and structural reliability in furniture joints. It is ideal for applications where maximum backlash-free clamping is required, even after multiple assembly and disassembly cycles.
                                                                                          It is installed in 18 mm thick boards with a hole diameter of 15 mm. The fixing bolt must have a protruding section of Ø8 mm. Its design allows a centred fixing with lateral or axial fixing screw, depending on the system configuration.
                                                                                          Yes, it is compatible with articulated and expandable joint systems such as T15 and K12 bolts, making it a versatile solution for modular structures, shelving or demountable cabinets.
                                                                                          Its nickel-plated finish provides rust resistance, durability against humid environments and a professional finish on the inside of furniture. Ideal for carpentry projects that require a clean aesthetic even inside visible structures.
                                                                                          Yes, this eccentric is supplied in packaging of 1250 units, ideal for manufacturers, industrial assemblers and carpentries that work with volume, allowing an optimisation in stock management and assembly logistics.
                                                                                          A hole with a diameter of 25 mm and a depth of 12 mm is recommended to adequately accommodate the eccentric and to ensure a firm and secure fit in the table top.
                                                                                          The housing for the locking system must be located at a distance of 33.5 mm from the centre of the hole, which allows correct anchoring of the associated bolt and ensures the stability of the joint.
                                                                                          This eccentric is designed to be used together with the eccentric bolt Ø25 mm, forming an efficient and fast joining system for furniture modules, such as cupboards and shelves.
                                                                                          Natural Zamak offers excellent mechanical strength, durability and dimensional accuracy, ideal for joints subjected to load stresses or repeated assembly and disassembly.
                                                                                          It is recommended for the assembly of modular furniture, kitchens, wardrobes and storage solutions where a hidden, solid and aesthetically discreet joint is required, optimising assembly processes in series.
                                                                                          This bolt is specifically designed to achieve invisible and structurally sound joints in bed, wardrobe and kitchen unit assemblies. It is ideal for use in configurations that require maximum strength with no visible elements on the outside of the furniture.
                                                                                          The solid bolt has a diameter of 6 mm and a total length of 33 mm, making it easy to mount in robust structures. In addition, it has an M6 thread and is installed in a ø6 mm hole, offering precision and strength.
                                                                                          It is optimised to work in conjunction with K12 cams, ensuring a firm and stable hold on heavy duty furniture. This combination allows for concealed internal fastenings without compromising the aesthetics of the design.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish provides a protective coating against corrosion and rust, making it ideal for wet environments or kitchens. This treatment prolongs the life of the hardware and maintains its functionality in demanding conditions.
                                                                                          The solid bolt comes in boxes of 2,500 units, which allows for efficient stock management in industrial operations and large assembly lines, reducing logistics costs and optimising production times.
                                                                                          The plastic coating provides a double function: it improves the fixing by reducing play during assembly and acts as an insulator that protects the joint against vibration or noise. In addition, it improves sliding during assembly with eccentrics.
                                                                                          It is specifically designed for use with the K12 eccentric, forming a strong and secure jointing system for kitchen units, wardrobes and beds. The bolt end fits into the standardised eccentric housing.
                                                                                          The bolt has a total length of 33 mm, with an anchorage area of 17 mm in the cabinet and a shank diameter of 6 mm. These dimensions optimise the load distribution in transverse joints without compromising the structural stability of the module.
                                                                                          Zinc plated finish provides effective protection against rust, ideal for wet environments or where durability is required. Increases component life without affecting fit tolerances or compatibility with standard hardware.
                                                                                          This bolt is widely used in furniture assembly on production lines, especially in kitchen modules, bed frames and demountable cabinets. The 2500-unit packaging makes it easy to supply for high-volume industrial projects.
                                                                                          The zinc plated finish provides excellent rust and corrosion resistance, which is especially useful in wet environments or with exposure to chemicals common in kitchen or bathroom environments.
                                                                                          This screw is specifically designed for boards between 16 and 18 mm thick, ensuring precise fastening without compromising the integrity of the material or the fastening system.
                                                                                          The design includes an optimised thread for easy insertion into the corresponding housing, and a tapered head that allows a perfect fit at board level, facilitating automated assembly.
                                                                                          It is manufactured to integrate with the System Ø15 mm coupling system, forming part of a robust solution for invisible joints in demountable or pre-assembled furniture.
                                                                                          It is supplied in boxes of 1000 units, which allows high availability on production lines and reduces the frequency of replenishment, optimising logistics and time costs in large facilities.
                                                                                          The M6 ring bolt is made of zinc-plated steel, which provides excellent mechanical and rust resistance. Its design with fine thread and ring on the end makes it ideal for strong, removable joints with K12 eccentrics.
                                                                                          This bolt has a total length of 33 mm, with an M6 fine thread body and a ring diameter of 7.7 mm, ensuring precise compatibility with 15 mm diameter eccentrics such as K12. Its fine thread facilitates a tight fit on boards of varying thickness.
                                                                                          It is especially useful in joining systems for highly demanding furniture, such as beds, wardrobes, tables and frequently used structures. Its high strength allows safe assembly in dismountable and modular furniture.
                                                                                          For assembly, we recommend the use of precision tools that allow drilling holes of Ø6 mm for the thread and Ø7.7 mm for the ring socket. It is essential to use an eccentric model K12 to complete the connection system.
                                                                                          The bolt comes in packs of 2500 units, designed for furniture manufacturers, industrial carpenters and wholesale distributors who require large volumes with maximum assembly efficiency.
                                                                                          The eccentric system provides a strong and effective fixing with the possibility of dismantling, ideal for robust structures such as beds or wardrobes. Its design avoids the need for visible screws, improving the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                                          A Ø35 mm diameter and 13 mm deep bore is required to accommodate the eccentric cam, plus additional machining for the bolt and nut. Fixing is by means of an internally rotating eccentric cam.
                                                                                          The set consists of eccentric and nut in natural zamak, bolt in zinc plated turned steel for high mechanical resistance and cover in white plastic for an aesthetic and discreet cover.
                                                                                          It is designed for boards with a minimum thickness of 20 mm, guaranteeing a firm joint without risk of weakening. It is ideal for home and contract furniture requiring strong and durable joints.
                                                                                          The kit contains 10 eccentrics, 10 bolts, 10 nuts and 10 caps, allowing up to 10 robust and aesthetically pleasing connections to be made without the need to purchase additional components.
                                                                                          This bolt has been specifically designed for use with Ø12 eccentrics, ensuring a firm and secure fixing in furniture structures such as wardrobes or beds.
                                                                                          The bolt has a thread diameter of 6 mm and a total length of 42 mm. These dimensions make it ideal for invisible joints, offering good penetration and anchorage without compromising the structure.
                                                                                          It is recommended to install this bolt in boards with a minimum thickness of 12 mm, which ensures optimum resistance to tensile stresses and prevents the material from weakening.
                                                                                          It is made of zamak with a natural finish, an alloy that provides high hardness, good mechanical strength and excellent corrosion resistance in indoor environments.
                                                                                          It has a PZ 2 head, allowing the use of standard Pozidriv screwdrivers for fast, ergonomic and safe installation without the need for special tools.
                                                                                          The T15 plug is specifically used to cover the bore of the T15 system's Ø15 mm ring reinforced eccentric, providing a secure finish and protecting the internal mechanism of the joint.
                                                                                          This plug is only compatible with the reinforced eccentric with Ø15 mm T15 ring. It is not compatible with other models such as the eccentric 8054501, which must be taken into account when planning the assembly.
                                                                                          It is made entirely of plastic, which makes it lightweight, easy to install and suitable for integration in furniture solutions with aesthetic and functional requirements.
                                                                                          In addition to covering the eccentric system, the cap improves the appearance of the furniture by concealing visible screws or fittings, providing a clean and uniform surface finish.
                                                                                          Depending on the SKU available, it is available in a white or black finish, which allows it to adapt to different shades and styles of furniture without compromising the aesthetics of the whole.
                                                                                          This bolt allows invisible joints to be made in structures such as beds, wardrobes or shelves, facilitating 90-degree corner connections without the fittings being visible from the outside of the furniture.
                                                                                          It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which gives it high resistance to mechanical stress, durability and effective corrosion protection, ideal for intensive use in professional furniture.
                                                                                          Assembly requires the use of an eccentric compatible with the System Ø10 coupling system, as well as a hole in the panel with a diameter of 6 mm, a height of 38 mm and a free area of 23 mm for the correct location of the bolt.
                                                                                          It is especially useful in applications that demand high visual discretion and structural strength, such as solid wood beds, modular design cabinets or factory-assembled shelving.
                                                                                          The bolt comes in industrial packaging of 1,000 units, optimised for the supply of wholesalers, manufacturers or specialised workshops that require volume and logistical efficiency.
                                                                                          The plunger acts as a support and internal fixing piece that ensures the correct union between the board and the elements of the joining system. Its metallic design and zinc-plated finish guarantee stability and mechanical resistance.
                                                                                          This model is designed to integrate perfectly with metal bases such as Say 4 and Say 8, allowing different mounting configurations for panel thicknesses of 16 mm.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish provides an anti-corrosion coating that protects the part against humid or harsh environments, improving its durability in intensive manufacturing environments or prolonged transport.
                                                                                          The plunger is supplied in 1,000 or 1,125 pieces per box, ideal for large accounts, production lines or technical distribution of professional furniture fittings.
                                                                                          For optimum performance, we recommend the use of the complete Say 4 or Say 8 system, which includes the necessary support bases and screws for robust fastening to 16 mm boards.
                                                                                          The Spiral pin is designed as a key component of the closed tek coupling system. Its function is to generate support from inside the panel and to transmit the clamping force through the corresponding spiral coupling.
                                                                                          This bolt is manufactured from turned steel with a zinc plated finish, has a diameter of M6 and a total length of 59 mm. It is designed to provide high strength and durability for structural joints in furniture.
                                                                                          The M6x59 Spiral bolt is exclusively compatible with the Ø15 mm diameter Spiral coupling made of zamak. The combination ensures efficient fastening in technical furniture structures.
                                                                                          Assembly must be carried out by inserting the bolt into a through or press-fit hole in the board, respecting the 6 mm diameter and exposing the thread to be connected to the Spiral coupling.
                                                                                          Each presentation contains 500 units, which facilitates its use in production lines, contract furnishing projects or industrial facilities with a high volume of assemblies.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish provides effective protection against rust and corrosion, which is essential to ensure the durability of the joining system even in wet environments.
                                                                                          This plunger is optimised for 14 to 18 mm thick boards and allows precise insertion into a 7 mm diameter hole, with an overall length of 12.5 mm, facilitating its use in multiple furniture assembly formats.
                                                                                          The plunger acts as the bolt receiving point within the System 10 system, ensuring a firm hold in furniture structures through quick and precise insertion, without the need for special tools.
                                                                                          The metallic steel body offers high mechanical strength and prolongs the life of the joint assembly, making it especially useful in industrial, contract or high traffic applications.
                                                                                          Each presentation includes 2,000 units, making it ideal for furniture manufacturers, wholesalers and assembly lines requiring efficient, large-scale assembly solutions.
                                                                                          The facing holes allow a double connection between pieces, providing greater structural stability. They are strategically positioned to fix furniture boards or cabinets from both ends.
                                                                                          A minimum depth of 10 mm per end is recommended to ensure optimum clamping. The total length of the bolt is 80 mm, therefore it is essential to respect the machining tolerances for accurate insertion.
                                                                                          The zinc plated finish provides excellent protection against corrosion and wear, making it ideal for demanding indoor applications, especially in environments with moderate humidity or high handling areas.
                                                                                          A cylindrical bore with a standard diameter of Ø6 mm is required at both ends. Accurate drilling depth and centring are key to ensure a symmetrical and backlash-free fastening.
                                                                                          The System Ø16 double bolt is available in packs of 250 units, optimised for production lines and assembly of modules, beds or structures requiring robust parallel joints.
                                                                                          For optimum installation, it is necessary to drill a Ø 10.5 mm bore to allow for the precise seating of the plunger body, ensuring a firm and secure fit for the connection of the connecting system.
                                                                                          The zinc plated finish provides a layer of corrosion protection that significantly improves the durability of zamak in wet environments or demanding industrial assembly conditions.
                                                                                          This plunger is designed to work with System 16 compatible bolts, offering precise and secure engagement. Its diameter and height allow a robust connection with M10 and equivalent bolts.
                                                                                          It is designed for boards with a thickness of 25 mm, which ensures the necessary structural rigidity for integration in concealed or demountable joining systems in furniture.
                                                                                          It is supplied in packs of 1000 units, which makes it ideal for furniture manufacturers, industrial joinery or distributors working in large-scale production.
                                                                                          The bolt is driven from both sides into a vertical panel, passing through it to create a joint between two horizontal panels. This design provides a concealed fixing ideal for modular cabinet or shelving systems.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish protects the base steel against corrosion and rust, providing a durable solution even in environments with some exposure to moisture, without compromising the strength of the fixing.
                                                                                          The bolt is 60 mm long with a diameter of 7 mm, which makes it compatible with the System Ø14 coupling and suitable for panels with a distance of 40 mm between fixing centres. Its design ensures precise and secure mounting.
                                                                                          When used in conjunction with the System Ø14 coupling trims and screws, the bolt provides a semi-permanent joint, ideal for installations requiring firmness but with the possibility of disassembly for maintenance or replacement.
                                                                                          The bolt is supplied in packs of 500 units, which allows cost optimisation and ensures availability for high volume projects, especially in industrial environments, professional carpentry or modular manufacturing.
                                                                                          The EU M8x1 thread provides a precise and secure fit with the Ø14 system bolts, optimising mechanical strength and ensuring a stable fixing in structures subject to dynamic loads or frequent use.
                                                                                          This screw is designed for board thicknesses from 14 to 22 mm, ensuring compatibility with a length of 8.5 mm or 10 mm depending on the model. This makes it ideal for manufacturers working with different thicknesses without the need for multiple references.
                                                                                          Zinc plating provides rust protection, which is crucial for kitchen, office and contract furniture applications where exposure to moisture and chemicals can compromise the integrity of the joining system.
                                                                                          It acts as an anchor piece that firmly connects the bolt to the eccentric, ensuring a tight seal and preventing movement or misalignment. It is essential in systems where the joint must not loosen over time.
                                                                                          It is supplied in packs of 1000 units, which allows for high logistical efficiency and immediate availability in mass production processes, reducing operating costs and supply times.
                                                                                          The T12 eccentric has been specifically designed to join boards up to 12 mm thick, guaranteeing a safe and compact assembly of light furniture such as drawers, dividers or thin shelves.
                                                                                          To ensure correct alignment with the corresponding bolt, the T12 eccentric requires a Ø6 mm bore with a suitable depth and a distance of 30.5 mm from the end of the board to the centre of the hole.
                                                                                          It is made of zamak, an alloy that is highly resistant to mechanical wear, and has a zinc-plated finish for improved corrosion protection, making it ideal for wet or exposed environments.
                                                                                          It must be used with the T12 eccentric bolt (SKU 5034501), whose thread and length are optimised to fit precisely into the system, ensuring a firm and durable fixation without backlash.
                                                                                          Yes, it is supplied in packs of 2,500 units, which is ideal for industrial processes and manufacturers who need large volumes with standardisation in quality and performance.
                                                                                          For a correct installation of the double 90° bolt, the board must have a Ø 8.5 mm cavity to allow precise positioning of the bolt in the edge of the panel.
                                                                                          The bolt head has a design of Ø 6 x 4 mm, which allows it to be correctly inserted into the corresponding hole of the connecting element, optimising the angular assembly of the furniture.
                                                                                          The bolt has a total length of 77 mm. From the centre of the connecting hole to the end of the bolt is 65 mm, which ensures a firm connection in corners of cabinets or modular structures.
                                                                                          The use of a Forstner or twist drill with depth stop is recommended to ensure accurate drilling to Ø 14 mm to properly seat the body of the bolt in the assembly area.
                                                                                          Packing in batches of 250 units allows manufacturers and distributors to efficiently manage inventory, making it easy to integrate the bolt into continuous production lines or large-scale orders.
                                                                                          Zamak provides an excellent combination of hardness and wear resistance, allowing mechanical behaviour similar to steel with the added advantage of easier casting and machining, ideal for precise assembly systems such as System 16.
                                                                                          Its main function is to firmly secure the joint between panels by means of its insertion in the System 016 eccentrics, guaranteeing structural stability and facilitating the assembly and disassembly of the furniture without loss of fastening.
                                                                                          The screw has a length of 12 mm, M5/0 thread and PH-2 head, which ensures compatibility with common tools and precise insertion into 22 mm thick boards, as stated in the specifications.
                                                                                          The zinc plated finish acts as a barrier against corrosion, which extends the life of the screw even in humid environments or where condensation occurs, making this screw a reliable choice for kitchen, bathroom or office furniture installations.
                                                                                          With standard packaging of 1000 units per batch, this screw is ideal for industrial production lines and serial assembly, optimising logistics and ensuring continuous availability in furniture manufacturing environments.
                                                                                          The Rostro system allows a much stronger and more secure fastening, with a higher tightening capacity than an eccentric or Fix coupling. Furthermore, its installation is completely concealed, offering impeccable aesthetics in visible solutions such as wardrobes and bookcases.
                                                                                          The tensioning system of the Rostro coupling is operated with an Allen key No. 4 and is accessed through a Ø6 mm hole in the dashboard, which allows the mechanism to be completely hidden from view.
                                                                                          Its machining is very simple and similar to that of an eccentric, which facilitates its implementation without the need for specialised machinery or complex processes in the workshop or production line.
                                                                                          Yes, the Rostro system is compatible with the Normal 430 leveller, which allows the integration of adjustment solutions without sacrificing the aesthetics and functionality of the furniture.
                                                                                          The Rostro coupling is specially designed for cabinets, bookcases and exposed shelf systems, where a robust, aesthetically pleasing and completely concealed connection is required.
                                                                                          For installation it is necessary to drill a 15 mm diameter hole in the panel and a Ø8 mm hole to insert the bolt, which is connected to the eccentric from the edge of the panel. This configuration allows a strong and concealed connection between pieces.
                                                                                          The T15 eccentric is compatible with the following bolts: Hinged bolt for T15 eccentric Ø15, expandable bolt Fit Ø10, double bolt for T15 eccentric Ø15 and expandable bolt Fit Ø8. This provides flexibility in the joint system according to the furniture design.
                                                                                          Natural Zamak offers excellent mechanical strength, high dimensional stability and superior durability against wear, making it a robust solution for demanding assemblies in the furniture sector.
                                                                                          This piece is designed for boards of at least 13 mm thickness, ensuring a correct accommodation of the fastening system without compromising the structural strength of the joint.
                                                                                          The Ø15 mm design improves the gripping capacity and load distribution on the panel, resulting in a firmer anchorage and increased reliability in applications requiring repetitive or demanding mounting.
                                                                                          The Big Ø35 bolt has a total length of 49 mm, which allows a firm and deep connection in the panels. This length promotes a solid connection between pieces of furniture, especially on shelves that require high strength.
                                                                                          This bolt has an EU M8 thread that offers compatibility with a wide range of Big Ø35 eccentrics. The thread ensures a secure anchorage that does not loosen easily over time or with frequent use of the furniture.
                                                                                          It is necessary to drill a Ø9 mm hole to correctly accommodate the threaded part and ensure a stable fixing. This machining facilitates precise installation in panels with the correct dimensions.
                                                                                          It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides excellent resistance to traction, wear and corrosion. This surface treatment guarantees durability in humid or demanding environments.
                                                                                          The packaging in 500 units facilitates the supply of production lines or for industrial projects, reducing logistics times and guaranteeing immediate availability during series assembly.
                                                                                          The plunger is designed to lock the System Ø14 system bolt securely, allowing concealed assembly between panels. Its mechanism ensures a solid and precise fixing, ideal for solutions where an invisible but robust joint is required.
                                                                                          For correct installation, a 14 mm diameter hole must be drilled to a depth appropriate to the model, taking into account that the top of the plunger is 7 mm from the surface and its total height is 12 mm.
                                                                                          Zamak provides mechanical strength similar to steel, while the zinc-plated finish offers excellent protection against corrosion and rust, making it an ideal solution for demanding and long-lasting applications.
                                                                                          The plunger is available in versions for 16, 18 and 20 mm boards, adapting to different mounting requirements. Variations affect the installation depth and housing dimensions, while maintaining compatibility with the System Ø14 system.
                                                                                          This component is presented in packs of 1000 units, which favours the supply in mass production processes, minimising replenishment times and facilitating stock management in industrial or wholesale distribution environments.
                                                                                          The Big Ø35 eccentric stands out due to its larger size and clamping capacity, specially designed for the Big Ø35 bolt. This makes it ideal for large-format, robust furniture structures where a stronger and more durable fastening system is required.
                                                                                          To install the Big Ø35 eccentric, a 35 mm diameter hole must be drilled, with a depth that allows the part to be completely housed, taking into account its 17 mm height. The channel for the passage of the bolt must have a distance of 9.5 mm from the top.
                                                                                          Both finishes provide high corrosion resistance, however, natural zamak has a more neutral and uniform aesthetic for applications where the surface finish is not visible. Zinc plating adds an extra layer of protection for more demanding environments.
                                                                                          No, this part is specially designed to work in conjunction with the Big Ø35 bolt, so its compatibility is limited to specific joining systems that require high structural strength in furniture assembly.
                                                                                          The Big Ø35 eccentric is available in packs of 250 units, facilitating its management in automated production lines and optimising stock for distributors and manufacturers who require components in large volumes.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish provides the bolt with excellent protection against rust and corrosion, making it a reliable choice for installations in environments with variations in humidity or intensive industrial conditions.
                                                                                          This bolt is installed by pressing it into a drilled hole. It has a diameter of 7 mm, a total length of 28.5 mm and an EU M6 thread, which guarantees a precise fit in System 10 systems with a board thickness of up to 18.5 mm.
                                                                                          It is designed for invisible joints in furniture structures such as beds, shelves and wardrobes. Its robust and discreet design ensures structural stability without compromising the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                                          This bolt is fully compatible with System 10 joining systems and requires machined holes for precise assembly. Its use with specific eccentric or tensioning elements allows assembly without the need for complex tools.
                                                                                          The System 10 hitch bolt is delivered in packs of 1000 units, which facilitates logistics and supply in large-scale assembly lines in the furniture industry.
                                                                                          In addition to concealing the eccentric and improving the aesthetics of the furniture, this plastic cap has a flange that locks the Big 35 eccentric, thus preventing it from moving or loosening due to vibrations or handling over time.
                                                                                          This plug is exclusively designed to be compatible with the Big 35 eccentric, fitting perfectly to ensure an aesthetic and functional fixation within the joint system.
                                                                                          The plug has a diameter of 42 mm and a thickness of only 1 mm, which allows a flush installation. The anchor flange is 12 mm long, which ensures a firm fixation inside the eccentric.
                                                                                          It is ideal for home or contract furniture using the Big 35 eccentric system, especially in visible applications where it is desirable to conceal hardware and maintain a clean, professional design.
                                                                                          The Big 35 eccentric stopper is supplied in packs of 500 units, which is optimal for industrial processes and furniture manufacturers requiring large volumes in an efficient manner.
                                                                                          The plug is designed to be press-fitted into 16 mm diameter holes, concealing and protecting the attachment point of the coupling system. It offers an aesthetic and safe solution for furniture assembly.
                                                                                          It has a white plastic finish that allows it to be discreetly integrated into light-coloured structures. It is also available in a brown version for greater aesthetic adaptability to different furniture colours.
                                                                                          No. The plug has a circular protrusion at the rear of the plug to allow tool-free press-fit installation, facilitating serial assembly in industrial environments.
                                                                                          The board must have a 16 mm diameter hole, suitable for the System 16 range of couplings. The plug is designed to fit perfectly into this drilling standard.
                                                                                          It is ideal for use in kitchen furniture, cabinets and modular systems where effective concealment of mechanisms is desired. It also improves the final aesthetic finish and prevents accumulation of dust or debris in the bore.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish gives the screw excellent resistance to corrosion and rust, making it a durable and safe choice for furniture structures exposed to moisture or aggressive environments.
                                                                                          It is specifically designed to be used on boards with a thickness of 25 mm, allowing a firm and optimal fixing when working in conjunction with System Ø16 fastening systems.
                                                                                          This screw has a PH-2 head, which allows installation with standard screwdrivers or power tools compatible with Phillips #2 bits, optimising professional assembly.
                                                                                          Combined with the plungers and bolts of the System Ø16 coupling system, they guarantee secure, durable and precise connections, providing an effective structural solution even for furniture under constant load.
                                                                                          The screw is 13 mm long and is manufactured with a thread compatible with M10 hardware. Its design is optimised to ensure perfect alignment inside the corresponding hitch system.
                                                                                          The T15 eccentric requires a 15 mm diameter housing in the table top for proper installation, ensuring a firm and discreet assembly in wooden furniture.
                                                                                          For proper mounting, the thread must be at a distance of 7 mm from the edge of the board, allowing a secure fixing with the corresponding bolt.
                                                                                          This model is available in three different finishes: natural zamak, zinc-plated and nickel-plated. This makes it possible to adapt to both functional and aesthetic criteria of the furniture.
                                                                                          The T15 eccentric is compatible with board thicknesses of 15 and 16 mm, making it versatile for multiple configurations in cabinets, shelving and modular furniture.
                                                                                          Its main function is to lock the embedded bolt in the wood to ensure a hidden, strong and resistant joint, optimising the aesthetics and rigidity of the assembled structure.
                                                                                          This screw is specifically designed to be used with the System Ø14 coupling system bolts, guaranteeing a solid and secure joint in 18 mm thick boards.
                                                                                          The screw has a zinc-plated finish that acts as a protective coating, preventing rust and increasing the durability of the part in environments with humidity or prolonged exposure.
                                                                                          It has an EU M8 thread, which facilitates its precise attachment to compatible metal parts or brackets, improving the fastening without the need for additional fastening systems.
                                                                                          The screw has a total length of 13 mm and a diameter of 10 mm. It is ideal for installations in furniture where robust mounting is required, especially in cabinets, tall units and concealed assembled structures.
                                                                                          It comes in packs of 1,000 units, which facilitates logistics management and makes it ideal for use in production lines, industrial carpentry workshops and wholesale distributors.
                                                                                          This eccentric is designed for use in 19 mm or 25 mm thick boards, offering a robust fixing thanks to its reinforcement system and its optimised size for secure clamping.
                                                                                          For precise installation, a Ø15 mm hole needs to be drilled in the panel, thus ensuring the correct housing of the system and its alignment with the corresponding bolts.
                                                                                          The reinforced eccentric is ideal for use in conjunction with hinged and expandable bolts from the T15 and K12 ranges, maximising joint strength and facilitating professional assembly.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish provides increased protection against corrosion and rust, extending the life of the part even in demanding environments such as industrial kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                          This model is offered in packs of 2,500 units (natural and zinc-plated Zamak) or 1,250 units for the 25 mm reinforced model, allowing for efficient management of mass production projects.
                                                                                          The double-jointed design allows for variable angle joints in wood panels, adapting to multiple assembly configurations. This makes it ideal for custom assemblies or structures with non-orthogonal inclinations.
                                                                                          This bolt has been specifically designed to work with the components of the 10 mm hitch system, such as the corresponding plungers and bolts, ensuring a secure, aligned and robust assembly.
                                                                                          Manufactured from turned steel with a zinc plated finish, it offers high mechanical strength and excellent protection against rust and corrosion, making it a reliable choice for industrial applications and professional carpentry.
                                                                                          The bolt body has a diameter of 7 mm and a total length of 89 mm. The joint is located right in the middle, facilitating precise installation with fixing points at both ends.
                                                                                          It comes in packs of 500 units, which allows an optimum supply in medium volume projects, reducing supply time and facilitating management in warehouses or workshops.
                                                                                          This bolt is designed to join panels that form a 90° right angle, ideal for furniture and cabinet corners, providing a strong anchorage in square configurations.
                                                                                          The bolt has a diameter of 10 mm, with a 77 mm arm for the inner joint and a 65 mm arm for the outer joint, which provides a secure anchorage in boards with Ø16 mm holes.
                                                                                          It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which ensures mechanical strength and corrosion protection in heavy-duty applications or environments with moderate humidity.
                                                                                          Its angled design allows perpendicular panels to be joined together without the need for additional structures, optimising interior space and maintaining solid joints in hard-to-reach areas.
                                                                                          The 90° double bolt is available in packs of 200 units, making it easy to integrate into industrial production lines, modular furniture assembly and wholesale distribution.
                                                                                          This plunger has been specifically designed to be used with M8x1 threaded hook-in screws, which ensures a robust and precise connection between panels in the System 14 and 18 system.
                                                                                          The pre-bore must have a diameter of 16 mm and a depth of 15.6 mm for the plunger to fit correctly and be 9 mm away from the centre of the bolt hole, thus ensuring accurate alignment.
                                                                                          The use of zamak provides high mechanical strength, while the zinc-plated finish protects against corrosion, making it a durable solution for applications in demanding environments.
                                                                                          Yes, its compact design allows it to be integrated into the panel, concealing the junction point and guaranteeing an aesthetic finish, ideal for high-end furniture or visible installations.
                                                                                          The plunger with ring is available in packs of 1000 pieces, allowing efficient supply for production lines, distributors and high volume assembly.
                                                                                          This bolt has an M6 thread which ensures a solid fixing and is compatible with System Ø15 mm coupling system nuts. This standard is common in technical assemblies of modular furniture.
                                                                                          The bolt has a length of 48.5 mm and a body diameter of 7 mm, which allows for a precise fit in the specified joining systems without compromising the structural integrity of the module.
                                                                                          Zamak provides high resistance to mechanical stress, while the zinc-plated finish improves its corrosion resistance, guaranteeing durability in environments of intensive use.
                                                                                          No special tools are required; the bolt design is optimised for efficient assembly according to the instructions in chapter 4 of the coupling system catalogue, making it easy to integrate into production lines.
                                                                                          The product is supplied in packs of 1000 units, ideal to meet the demands of mass production or for distributors working with large assembly volumes.
                                                                                          This screw is available with Allen 3, Allen 6 and PZ2 heads. The Allen 3 head is recommended for more precise assemblies with lower torque, while Allen 6 and PZ2 are more versatile for general and automatic applications in production lines.
                                                                                          This screw allows installation in 12 mm boards and in an adjustable range of 14-16-18-22-26 mm, guaranteeing a secure grip on a wide variety of board thicknesses within modular or bespoke projects.
                                                                                          The screw is manufactured from steel with a zinc plated or black zinc plated finish, providing excellent protection against rust and corrosion, ideal for use in kitchens, bathrooms and industrial environments with high humidity.
                                                                                          It is designed to work in conjunction with System 10 coupling systems, being compatible with pins, double hinged pins and ring plungers from the same system, facilitating a robust and uniform integration.
                                                                                          What is the packaging format and how is it adapted to large productions?
                                                                                          This bolt has an M6 thread, which allows it to be perfectly matched with nuts or fasteners from the same system. It is designed for precise integration into System 16 furniture assembly solutions.
                                                                                          The body of the bolt measures 27 mm long by 9 mm high from the head, while the splice hole is 20 mm from the end. These dimensions ensure secure and uniform mounting in board structures.
                                                                                          The bolt has a zinc plated finish which improves its corrosion resistance and prolongs its durability in wet or exposed environments such as kitchens or bathrooms. It also provides a clean, professional finish to the assembly.
                                                                                          The bolt connection hole is calibrated to a diameter of 10 mm, ensuring precise mating with the System 16 receiving parts and preventing movement or misalignment of the structural assembly.
                                                                                          It is recommended for solid joints in cabinet or module boards where precision and structural rigidity are required. Ideal for carpenters and fabricators working with the System 16 modular assembly system.
                                                                                          The nut must be pressed into a pre-drilled hole with a depth of 13 mm and a diameter of 17.3 mm. These dimensions guarantee a firm and secure seat for the workpiece in the panel.
                                                                                          The part has an internal metric diameter of 10.1 mm, which allows for a solid connection with bolts or compatible fastening systems, ensuring stability in structural joints.
                                                                                          It is recommended to use this nut in conjunction with Rotsup levellers and Rosto couplers, which have been specifically designed to ensure accurate and durable installation of the assembly.
                                                                                          The natural zamak finish provides good mechanical and corrosion resistance without the need for additional coatings. It is ideal for concealed applications where reliability is required rather than visible aesthetics.
                                                                                          It is designed to form part of structural joining systems in furniture modules, especially in cabinets, bases and structures where a concealed, robust and aligned fixing with professional solutions is required.
                                                                                          The Fit 8 expandable bolt offers superior grip thanks to its expansion system that is activated by inserting an eccentric. This allows for tight, aesthetic and play-free joints, ideal for modular and discreetly assembled furniture.
                                                                                          It is made of zinc-plated steel, which provides mechanical strength and corrosion protection, and plastic on the expandable part, which facilitates installation without compromising the fixing.
                                                                                          The bolt has a diameter of 8 mm, an overall length of 31.6 mm or 21.6 mm (depending on the model) and a specially designed end compatible with eccentrics. It is essential to check the drilling depth and compatibility with the connection system.
                                                                                          This bolt is designed for eccentric connection systems. Its special end allows a perfect fit in the counterpart, offering high stability without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                          It comes in boxes of 2,500 units, ideal for furniture manufacturers, industrial carpentry and distributors who work in serial assembly processes or ready-to-assemble furniture kits.
                                                                                          The bolt has a head of Ø9 mm and a body of Ø7 mm, which guarantees a secure anchorage inside the joint bore. This difference in diameters allows the bolt to be perfectly fixed without play, ensuring a solid and stable joint in the furniture.
                                                                                          This bolt has been designed to work with an EU M6 threaded nut, which means that any nut used with it must have an internal metric thread of 6 mm to ensure compatibility and correct fixing of the assembly.
                                                                                          For proper installation, a Ø7.5 mm drill hole and a minimum depth of 20 mm is required. This ensures that the bolt is correctly inserted into the board, maintaining the firmness and stability of the joint.
                                                                                          The bolt is made of steel and has a zinc-plated coating that effectively protects it against rust and corrosion, making it ideal for applications in environments where moisture or contact with chemicals may compromise the durability of the joining system.
                                                                                          Thanks to its robust design and corrosion-resistant finish, this bolt is ideal for in-line furniture assemblies with the System Ø14 coupling system. It is recommended for use in industrial joinery, assembly of kitchen units, cabinets or office furniture, where a solid and discreet internal fixing is required.
                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish provides a layer of corrosion protection that enhances the durability of the double bolt in wet or frequently used environments. This makes it a reliable choice for bed frames, tables and cabinets that require long term, durable joints.
                                                                                          This model is specially designed to work with T15 or T15 type eccentrics, offering a precise and secure fit for the assembly of furniture components, with no play and excellent clamping capacity.
                                                                                          The double bolt can be installed in 16 mm and 19 mm thick boards, which are the standard thicknesses in modular furniture manufacturing, allowing for easy integration into automated production processes.
                                                                                          It is essential to drill a 7 mm diameter hole with a depth that ensures the correct fit of the bolt without compromising the stability of the board. It is also recommended to check the alignment with the eccentric to ensure a firm assembly.
                                                                                          The T15 double bolt for eccentric cams is presented in boxes of 500 units, facilitating stock management on production lines and wholesale distributors. Its format is ideal for large-scale furniture assembly and manufacturing projects.
                                                                                            This bracket is designed for joining boards in cabinets, furniture and similar structures. Thanks to its 5 mm thickness and 6 mm diameter holes, it offers great compatibility with wood, chipboard and MDF boards commonly used in professional carpentry.
                                                                                            The zinc-plated coating protects the bracket against corrosion and wear due to moisture or frequent handling. It is ideal for indoor installations with durability requirements, such as kitchens, dressing rooms or storage modules.
                                                                                            Although no maximum load is specified, its 34x25 mm cross-section steel design with a thickness of 5 mm allows for high mechanical strength in structural connections, especially in combination with suitable bolts and perimeter mounting.
                                                                                            For efficient fastening, screws with a diameter of 6 mm, compatible with the holes in the bracket, are recommended. The length will depend on the thickness of the board to be joined, ensuring a firm fixing without penetrating the panel.
                                                                                            The industrial presentation of 1000 units allows distributors, carpenters and manufacturers to work efficiently on large volume projects, reducing logistical costs and ensuring constant availability on production lines.
                                                                                            The fastener is designed for flat glass panels with a maximum thickness of 6.5 mm. Its structure easily adapts to glass used in showcases, shelving and decorative furniture without requiring complex machining.
                                                                                            Installation is by screwing in, using the included retaining screw. The design ensures a firm fit of the glass thanks to the inner nut and the clamping groove which distributes the pressure evenly.
                                                                                            Yes, the system incorporates a 7 mm high support base and a 15 mm fixing body, which allows stable retention of the glass even in situations of slight movement, preventing slippage or vibration noises.
                                                                                            The transparent finish allows the fastener to be visually integrated into the furniture without altering the aesthetics of the whole. It is ideal for applications where visibility of the fastening system should be minimal or non-existent.
                                                                                            The product is packaged in 1000 units, facilitating its use in furniture production lines, commercial showcases and large-scale carpentry. This presentation allows to maintain efficient inventory and reduce logistic costs.
                                                                                            The triangular design of the fastener allows secure mounting at the corners of skirtings, providing greater structural rigidity in corner areas. Its geometry is optimised for angled fixings, maximising strength and reducing torsional stresses.
                                                                                            The fastener is installed by means of a hole through the centre of one of its faces from side to side. The piece is inserted into the plinth by means of pressure or screws, using the through hole to attach it to the frame or base of the furniture.
                                                                                            The internal steel structure provides mechanical strength, while the white plastic coating prevents friction noise and enhances the aesthetics of the finish. This combination ensures durability without compromising the visual appearance.
                                                                                            It is especially recommended for fixing skirting boards in modular kitchens, bathroom furniture or cabinet systems that require a discreet and firm solution in corners or corners. Its pre-assembled design makes it ideal for quick assembly on production lines.
                                                                                            The product is delivered in packaging of 1000 units, which makes it highly efficient for automated assembly lines or large installations. This volume minimises logistical disruptions and optimises installation costs per unit.
                                                                                            This bolt acts as an adjustment piece and final grip on minifix joints, allowing precision adjustment to be made on shelves or panels where close tolerances are required in the final assembly.
                                                                                            The bolt is designed to work with eccentrics using a 6 mm shank and M6 collar, fitting perfectly into Ø4.2 mm holes with a recommended depth of 10 mm.
                                                                                            The zinc-plated coating improves resistance to moisture and rust, making it ideal for applications in kitchen and bathroom furniture or areas with varying levels of humidity.
                                                                                            This bolt is supplied in packs of 250 units, facilitating its management in assembly lines and industrial assembly with high product turnover and the need for logistical efficiency.
                                                                                            The body of the bolt must be placed in a Ø4.2 mm machined hole, which guarantees the correct anchoring inside the board without deformation or play, allowing a firm and precise joint.
                                                                                            This lot contains wood strands with a diameter of 8 mm and a length of 35 mm, suitable for press joints in wooden boards.
                                                                                            Yes, it is essential to pre-drill both in diameter and depth to ensure a precise and effective connection between the pieces of wood.
                                                                                            The strands are made of beech wood, known for its hardness and excellent mechanical behaviour in glue joints for professional carpentry applications.
                                                                                            These tufts are designed for pressure bonding, where the application of glue in the bore and in the tuft ensures a firm fixation, without the need for screws.
                                                                                            They are ideal for assemblies in furniture, cabinets, kitchen units, solid wood structures or panels where an invisible, strong and durable joint is required.
                                                                                            These brackets are designed for screw fixing to the furniture surface, providing sturdy 90° right-angle connections between wooden boards using conventional screws.
                                                                                            The brackets are made of sheet steel with a zinc-plated finish, which provides high mechanical strength, protection against rust and excellent performance in interior assemblies.
                                                                                            Each bracket measures 42 mm high by 42 mm wide and has a sheet thickness of 1.5 mm, which allows it to maintain rigidity in demanding joints without adding unnecessary bulk to the furniture.
                                                                                            It has 4 holes for fixing screws, allowing a secure and balanced mounting. Self-tapping screws with a diameter of up to 4.5 mm are recommended.
                                                                                            They are ideal for joining panels at right angles in structures such as cabinets, modules, shelving and other interior furniture. They are also frequently used in reinforcement and rapid assembly processes in production lines or craft assemblies.
                                                                                            These brackets are designed to join wooden boards at 90° right angles and are particularly useful for modular furniture, cupboards and shelving structures that require strong and durable reinforcement.
                                                                                            The zinc-plated finish provides excellent protection against rust and wear, making them ideal for both indoor environments and workshops where high mechanical durability is required.
                                                                                            These brackets measure 70 mm long by 22.5 mm high, and are made of 1.5 mm thick steel plate, ensuring rigidity and adequate structural support at the point of attachment.
                                                                                            They have 4 Ø4.5 mm mounting holes that allow the use of standard self-tapping wood screws, which facilitates quick installation without the need for pre-drilling in most applications.
                                                                                            The brackets are available in batches of 50 units or industrial packs of 500 units, making them suitable for both do-it-yourself and mass production requirements in professional environments.
                                                                                            T brackets allow for optimal right angle clamping, especially useful in the installation of shelving where it is required to fix the end of the board to a side or rear panel, improving structural stability.
                                                                                            These brackets are designed to be used with boards having a minimum thickness of 15 mm, which allows a secure fixing without risk of breakage or deformation of the support.
                                                                                            The recommended fastening system is with self-tapping screws suitable for the type of furniture material. The brackets have optimised fixing holes to facilitate quick and stable assembly.
                                                                                            The T-brackets have a length of 42 mm × 32 mm, a width of 20 mm and a thickness of 2 mm. These dimensions make them ideal for applications requiring compact and unobtrusive reinforcement without sacrificing strength.
                                                                                            They are available in zinc-plated and nickel-plated finishes, both with anti-rust properties. Zinc plating provides excellent protection against humidity, ideal for kitchens, bathrooms and demanding environments.
                                                                                            Nickel-plated zamak provides an excellent combination of mechanical strength and corrosion protection, ideal for demanding indoor furniture applications where durability and bright metal aesthetics are required.
                                                                                            They are specifically designed for 90° fastenings between wooden boards, providing solid and precise joints in modules, shelves or frames, both in domestic and contract environments.
                                                                                            The 2-hole format optimises mounting in areas with limited space, reducing installation time without compromising the strength of the fixing, ideal for compact structures or quick assembly.
                                                                                            Each bracket measures 20.5 x 20.7 mm, dimensions that allow precise installation at standard right angles and are compatible with a variety of board thicknesses used in modular furniture.
                                                                                            The batch includes 50 units with compact packaging, which allows for efficient inventory management and ensures immediate availability on production lines or in professional workshops.
                                                                                            This clamp is suitable for nail fixings in timber or board structures. Its design with teeth on both sides allows secure anchoring to hold parts in place without the need for complex machining.
                                                                                            The Ø 4 mm central hole allows the insertion of an additional screw to reinforce the mechanical fastening. Compatible with standard small diameter wood or chipboard screws.
                                                                                            The zinc-plated finish provides a layer of corrosion protection that improves the durability of the steel against moisture and rust, making it ideal for demanding mounting environments.
                                                                                            The clamp is 22 mm long and 18 mm wide. These compact dimensions make it ideal for invisible or space-saving mounting without compromising clamping force.
                                                                                            It is ideal for back fixing in cabinets, kitchen units, shelving or modular applications where concealed but strong fastening is required, especially in board or plywood structures.
                                                                                            The fixing plate is compatible with wooden panels and cabinets that require a strong right-angled joint, especially in structures where the joints need to be more securely reinforced.
                                                                                            It has four Ø 4 mm holes symmetrically distributed on each side, 25 mm apart, providing a balanced and solid hold.
                                                                                            Thanks to its zinc-plated finish, the plate is protected against rust and corrosion, which makes it particularly suitable for environments with humidity or exposure to temperature changes.
                                                                                            Yes, the 4 mm holes are compatible with standard wood screws, allowing quick installation without the need for special accessories.
                                                                                            The plate measures 40 mm on each side and has a thickness of 1 mm, offering an ideal balance between structural robustness and ease of mounting on flat surfaces.
                                                                                            The Normal 720 coupling is ideal for fixing skirting boards or any type of side, bottom or top trim on furniture, offering a discreet and effective solution adapted to the design of the furniture.
                                                                                            This system is fixed by pressing or clipping onto its corresponding bolt, which allows for quick installation without additional tools, facilitating assembly and disassembly during manufacturing or maintenance processes.
                                                                                            The coupler is designed to be compatible with standard bolts used in furniture joining systems, especially those designed for concealed and aesthetic solutions.
                                                                                            It is made entirely of steel, which guarantees high mechanical resistance. Its natural finish provides durability and optimal integration into metal structures without requiring additional treatments.
                                                                                            Yes, thanks to its clipping mechanism, the Normal 720 coupling allows solid but also easily removable joints, ideal for modular furniture that requires flexibility in configuration or transport.
                                                                                            This coupling is installed by being pressed directly into the wood by machining. Installation is simple and requires no screws, as its shape is optimised for a firm press fit.
                                                                                            It is made of high-strength plastic, ensuring durability and a long service life. The white finish provides a clean, unobtrusive appearance, ideal for applications where aesthetics are also important.
                                                                                            This component is designed to generate hidden joints in wooden boards at 90°, making it ideal for the assembly of furniture with joints that are not visible from the outside, which improves the final appearance of the furniture.
                                                                                            The product is supplied in packs of 2500 units, which makes it particularly suitable for industrial production, series assembly or large-volume contract projects.
                                                                                            The H12 mm Block System allows fast, tool-free fastening, optimising assembly times and reducing the use of visible screws. Its design also minimises the risk of misalignment over time.
                                                                                              The Fix 20 coupling secures and holds in position the Fix Ø20 model bolts within the joint system, achieving a firm and durable joint between the furniture panels.
                                                                                              This coupling is available in two versions: one for 16 mm boards with 8 mm infeed dimension, and one for 19 mm boards with 9.5 mm infeed dimension, optimising its adjustment according to the thickness of the furniture.
                                                                                              The nickel-plated finish on zamak offers corrosion resistance and a uniform metallic appearance, ensuring the durability of the component even in environments with moisture or heavy use.
                                                                                              The coupling is installed in a recess 8 mm high and 20 mm in diameter, pre-machined in the panel. Its insertion is precise thanks to the tight tolerances and standard dimensions of the fitting.
                                                                                              The Fix 20 coupler is supplied in packs of 1,000 units, ideal for manufacturers, assembly plants or distributors who work with large volumes and require efficient replenishment of technical fittings.
                                                                                              The Luna cup is designed for boards up to 16 mm thick, being compatible with the most common thicknesses in home or bathroom furniture shelves.
                                                                                              Requires pre-machining with a Ø20 mm diameter housing, which can be carried out on the underside of the module or shelf where the cup is to be inserted.
                                                                                              Yes, the compact design and white or brown plastic finish allow for unobtrusive integration into the furniture, ideal for both open and interior shelves.
                                                                                              It acts as a plug-in support for shelves and shelves, providing a secure connection without the need for screws, which facilitates the assembly and disassembly of the shelves.
                                                                                              The Luna cup offers a hidden and resistant joining system, avoiding visible fittings and improving the aesthetics of the furniture without compromising the stability of the shelf.
                                                                                              This bracket is designed for shelves using a Ø19 mm and Ø20 mm wedge joint system. It is compatible with 18 and 20 mm thick boards, facilitating its use in kitchen, home or office furniture with concealed mounting solutions.
                                                                                              The wedge system provides a robust and completely concealed fixing. It allows vertical and lateral fastening of the shelf without the need for visible screws, improving the aesthetics of the furniture and ensuring a firm and secure installation.
                                                                                              The base of the bracket measures 22 mm × 11.5 mm and is 2.2 mm thick. Its vertical fixing hole is Ø4 mm, while the hole for the wedge system is Ø7 mm. These dimensions allow precise and stable installation in predefined structures.
                                                                                              It is made of Zamak with a nickel-plated finish, which provides high mechanical resistance, durability against oxidation and a discreet and professional visual finish. Ideal for furniture exposed to frequent use or environments with moderate humidity.
                                                                                              Yes, the product is offered in industrial packaging of 2500 units, which makes it a cost-effective and efficient option for manufacturers, joiners and assemblers working in long production runs.
                                                                                              The bolt has a total length of 40 mm, of which 9 mm is inserted into the body of the furniture, providing a secure and stable fixing in standard board thicknesses, facilitating efficient serial installation.
                                                                                              This bolt features a metric thread that guarantees a firm hold when spliced with compatible eccentrics, such as the Luna eccentric, ensuring precision centring and resistance to tensile stresses.
                                                                                              It is recommended to drill a guide hole with a diameter of 6 mm and a minimum depth of 9 mm to properly accommodate the bolt without deforming the board, thus optimising the fit and reducing possible play.
                                                                                              The zinc-plated finish protects the bolt against corrosion and rust, especially useful in applications exposed to moisture or demanding mounting environments, ensuring a long service life of the fastening system.
                                                                                              The bolt is specifically designed for the Luna hooking system, providing an efficient and concealed locking mechanism that allows clean and removable joints in shelving and kitchen or bathroom units.
                                                                                              This system is designed for boards at least 16 mm thick, providing a secure fixing for shelves in cupboards, kitchens or general furniture.
                                                                                              The couplings require Ø20 mm holes with a minimum depth of 12.5 mm, ensuring a precise fit without compromising the structural integrity of the board.
                                                                                              The hitch is made of nickel-plated zamak, while the bolt is made of turned steel with a zinc-plated finish, a combination that ensures rust resistance and long-term durability.
                                                                                              The kit includes bolts of 8 mm and 11 mm in length and 6 mm or 8 mm in diameter, allowing for different mounting configurations depending on the design of the furniture or shelf.
                                                                                              The set contains 20 couplings and 20 bolts, presented in a format ideal for professional installations or mass production, with a nickel-plated finish for uniform aesthetics and corrosion protection.
                                                                                              This coupling is designed to provide precise clamping by means of pressure, ensuring a firm fit of the wedge bolt, which prevents displacement or misalignment in cabinet tops or pre-assembled modules.
                                                                                              The circular, finned design allows for a centred and stable insertion, optimising load distribution and preventing component rotation within the bore, which improves the structural performance of the assembly.
                                                                                              It is made of high-strength black plastic, which makes it lightweight, dielectrically insulated and durable for mounting conditions in both dry indoor and moderately humid environments.
                                                                                              The hole must be drilled to a minimum tolerance to allow for a press fit without the need for adhesives or additional tools. The system works optimally when the fit is millimetric.
                                                                                              The pack contains 2,500 units, making it ideal for industrial production lines, modular furniture manufacturers and wholesalers who require a fast, cost-effective and reliable assembly solution.
                                                                                              The bracket is fixed by means of a screw through a 6 mm diameter hole, ensuring a firm attachment to the vertical panel of the furniture.
                                                                                              The bracket has an 18 mm wide base, requires a 10 mm wide hole in the mounting area and a height from the base to the fixing hole of 8 mm.
                                                                                              Zamak is a metal alloy that provides high mechanical strength, durability against wear and a nickel-plated finish that enhances corrosion protection.
                                                                                              Yes, thanks to its Zamak construction and screw fixing design, this bracket is ideal for shelving or horizontal panels with strength requirements in professional carpentry applications.
                                                                                              The packaging includes 2,500 units, making it ideal for furniture manufacturers, industrial installers and distributors who require efficiency in high-volume projects.
                                                                                              The expansion tip has been designed to be used exclusively with the Wedge Coupling Brackets Ø19 and the Wedge Coupling Ø19 of the shelf connection system, ensuring precise and efficient integration.
                                                                                              It has a diameter of 3.5 mm and a maximum length of 25 mm. These dimensions allow a firm fastening that withstands tensile loads thanks to its all-steel construction, guaranteeing secure fastening.
                                                                                              The zinc plated finish provides additional protection against rust and corrosion, which is essential to ensure the durability of the component in high humidity or prolonged exposure environments.
                                                                                              No, it is installed by means of a pin in the Ø19 wedge system, without the need for special machining, which optimises time and costs for in-line assembly processes or customised projects.
                                                                                              The expansion tip is supplied in boxes of 10,000 units, ideal for mass production environments where a high volume of stock is required, thus reducing the frequency of replenishment and facilitating storage.
                                                                                              The Ø19 plastic tip stands out for its flexibility and light weight, which facilitates installation without heavy tools. In addition, its transparent design offers a cleaner and more discreet aesthetic for applications in visible furniture such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                                                                                              Thanks to its expandable design, the Ø19 plastic tip provides a firm and secure coupling with different board thicknesses, provided it is used in conjunction with the Ø19 coupling and wedge system. Its elasticity allows it to adapt precisely.
                                                                                              Installation requires a cylindrical housing to allow the plastic tip to be inserted into the holder. The rounded shape facilitates manual or automated assembly on production lines.
                                                                                              Yes, this tip has been specifically designed to work with the Ø19 Wedge Coupling and Coupling Brackets. This ensures full compatibility in installations that combine metal and plastic parts in the same structure.
                                                                                              This product is delivered in strings of 10,000 units, ideal for automated assembly lines and large-scale assembly processes. The strip format improves logistical efficiency and handling during installation.
                                                                                              The Luna press stud features an 8.3 mm long installation head, which is specifically designed to fit precisely into the cup system of the same model. Its stamped steel construction guarantees high resistance to frequent mechanical stress.
                                                                                              This bolt employs a pressure system that allows quick installation without complex tools, ideal for heavy-duty industrial processes. The thread design, with a depth of 10.3 mm, ensures a firm and durable anchorage in the board.
                                                                                              The zinc plated finish acts as an effective barrier against rust, improving the performance of the bolt in humid environments or demanding conditions. This results in increased durability of the installed assembly, especially in kitchen or bathroom cabinets.
                                                                                              This bolt is optimised for cup assembly in cabinets and is compatible with Luna systems. Its simple installation makes it an efficient choice for automated or semi-automated assembly lines in the professional furniture sector.
                                                                                              The Luna press stud for coupling is supplied in packs of 2,500 units, facilitating its integration in industrial processes with a high assembly turnover. This bulk presentation allows optimising supply and reducing replenishment times.
                                                                                              This bracket is specifically designed to work in conjunction with the Ø25 Wedge Hook, forming a robust connection system for shelves in technical and industrial furniture.
                                                                                              It is optimised for boards with a thickness of 25 mm, ensuring a firm and precise fit without the need for additional adapters or modifiers.
                                                                                              The support requires a Ø7 mm hole which expands to Ø6 mm in the part of the board closest to the surface. The base measures 22 mm x 11 mm with a thickness of 2 mm, providing structural stability.
                                                                                              The nickel-plated finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the substrate, but also offers protection against corrosion, wear and tear and damp environments, ideal for kitchens, bathrooms or commercial spaces.
                                                                                              The bracket is supplied in boxes of 2,000 units, making it ideal for distributors, industrial carpenters and furniture manufacturers who require high volumes of efficient installation.
                                                                                              The UniBlock cups are available in two versions covering board thicknesses from 16 to 19 mm and from 22 to 30 mm, which allows a great versatility of use in furniture of different characteristics.
                                                                                              The cup has a diameter of 18 mm and a height of 5 mm. Its 25 mm wide central base is designed for firm integration into the board. In addition, its channel area allows for precise and efficient mounting together with the central fixing screw.
                                                                                              The part is mostly made of high-strength and durable plastic, while the fixing screw is made of zamak, which guarantees a firm and secure anchorage for the horizontal brackets of the UniBlock system.
                                                                                              The packaging contains 2500 units, ideal for industrial projects, mass production or mass installations in contract environments such as offices, modular kitchens or shops.
                                                                                              The fastening is done by means of a zamak screw inserted in the central hole of the cup, which goes through the reinforcement channel and secures the support to the board in a precise, firm and wear-resistant way by repeated use.
                                                                                              The cup is designed to be installed in 14.5 mm high boards with a 6 mm hole diameter, leaving a distance of 31 mm from the end of the board to the centre of the splice hole. These dimensions are critical to ensure a secure and accurate fixing.
                                                                                              This cup can accommodate a bolt or wedge joint system, ensuring firm and stable mechanical connections. Its design facilitates the connection of horizontal shelves with vertical structures in wooden or chipboard furniture.
                                                                                              Made of zamak with a natural zamak finish, this cup provides high wear resistance and a long service life in demanding environments, such as commercial installations, technical carpentry and series production of modular furniture.
                                                                                              The mounting point should be located at a height of 14.5 mm from the base of the board, with a Ø6 mm hole and a distance of 31 mm from the edge. This geometry ensures functional alignment with the corresponding bolt for a backlash-free fit.
                                                                                              The product is delivered in boxes of 2,500 units, facilitating handling, assembly line supply and inventory control in continuous or high volume manufacturing processes.
                                                                                              To install the Miniluna cup correctly, it is necessary to drill a 15 mm diameter and 6 mm deep hole in one of the boards. In addition, a 15 mm x 6 mm arm must be used, which is inserted into the edge of the other board.
                                                                                              This system allows a clean and firm joint between two boards, functioning as a hidden support. Thanks to its design, the joint is practically imperceptible, ideal for applications where aesthetics is a priority.
                                                                                              The Miniluna cup is attached to pre-installed pins by means of a press fit. It is recommended to use bolts compatible with 15 mm diameter cups to ensure a perfect fit on 13 mm thick boards.
                                                                                              It is made of high-strength grey plastic, which makes it durable, lightweight and easy to assemble. Its finish provides stability to the joint, even in furniture that requires frequent assembly and disassembly.
                                                                                              The Miniluna cup measures 15 mm in diameter and 18 mm in length and is compatible with 13 mm thick boards. It is ideal for joining applications in home and office furniture where a compact and effective fixing solution is required.
                                                                                              It is recommended to use a flat head screw with a diameter of 3.5 or 4 mm, which ensures a firm and proper fixation without damaging the board material.
                                                                                              No, the UniBlock system allows fast and reliable assembly without the need for tools. Only a small insertion stroke is required, which optimises installation time on the assembly line.
                                                                                              This bracket is designed to be used exclusively with the UniBlock system cups. Together they allow invisible and firm joints to be made in boards of different thicknesses.
                                                                                              The UniBlock hook-on bracket is available for different board thicknesses: 16 mm, 19 mm, 25 mm and 30 mm, allowing a wide versatility for modular furniture projects.
                                                                                              The bracket is made of zamak with a nickel-plated or rust black finish. This treatment provides high resistance to corrosion, durability and an aesthetic finish in keeping with high-end furniture.
                                                                                              The cup acts as an indispensable element of the UniBlock system, providing a solid and secure connection between the brackets and the horizontal wooden panels. Its design facilitates assembly without compromising the stability of the furniture.
                                                                                              It is specifically designed for panel thicknesses between 16 and 19 mm. Its depth and internal geometry are optimised to ensure a perfect fit of the support inside the wood panel.
                                                                                              The cup combines a plastic body that provides insulation and lightness, together with a zamak reinforcement in the anchorage area, which improves mechanical resistance and prolongs its durability over time.
                                                                                              Installation requires drilling a Ø20 mm hole in the vertical panel to a depth of 13 mm, normally carried out with a CNC-controlled drill or automatic machinery to ensure mounting accuracy.
                                                                                              Delivered in packs of 2,500 units, it is ideal for large-scale production environments, industrial joinery or distributors requiring volume and logistical efficiency.
                                                                                              This coupling acts as a locking piece in wedge joint systems. Its design allows secure fixing from the outside, ensuring the structural stability of assembled furniture without the need for special tools.
                                                                                              The coupler is designed to work in conjunction with the Ø25 wedge coupler cup, ensuring a perfect fit on 25 mm thick boards with a 12.5 mm centre hole (model 8024307).
                                                                                              The black plastic used provides an excellent strength-to-weight ratio, frictional wear resistance and an unobtrusive finish, ideal for structures requiring concealed or aesthetic joints without sacrificing mechanical performance.
                                                                                              Installation is manual: once the corresponding cup is fixed to the board, the coupling is inserted from the rear, applying light pressure until the joint is locked by means of its specific shape that fits firmly into the cup.
                                                                                              This coupler is supplied in boxes of 2,000 units, making it an optimal solution for industrial carpenters, modular furniture manufacturers and hardware distributors who require efficiency in serial assembly processes.
                                                                                              The following video shows how you can easily assemble the Simply hidden shelf bracket.

                                                                                                Yes, this bracket makes it possible to block the shelf in order to turn the furniture with the shelf assembled, without falling, which facilitates transport. Likewise, the shelf can be assembled and disassembled easily without the need for tools, thanks to a manual closing plate that frees the steel pivot.
                                                                                                The Sekure bracket can be assembled and disassembled easily without the need for tools, thanks to a manual closing plate that frees the steel pivot. This pivot is put into the bracket, with the short 7.5 mm part remaining within the bracket and the longer 10 mm part is put into the side of the furniture. The plate of the bracket slides, makes it possible to lock the pivot in order to turn the furniture with the shelf assembled, without falling, which facilitates transport.
                                                                                                The bracket is designed to accommodate glass shelves with glass thicknesses between 6mm and 10mm. The clamping system with lugs provides a firm fit, provided the glass thickness is within this range and the edge has been bevelled or tempered for safety.
                                                                                                No, this bracket allows direct installation without the need to drill holes in the shelf. Adjustment is made by pressure and contact with the nickel-plated steel plug, which fits firmly under the shelf, preventing displacement during use.
                                                                                                Although it has been specifically designed for glass, it can be used with melamine or wood shelves with rounded edges up to 10 mm thick. In these cases, however, it is advisable to carry out prior fixing tests to check the stability of the assembly.
                                                                                                For 16 mm panels, the use of 4 x 16 mm screws with chipboard or melamine thread is recommended. It is important not to over-tighten, as this could deform the bracket or damage the nickel-plated coating. In industrial installations, the use of screwdrivers with torque limiters is recommended.
                                                                                                The bracket requires a 5 mm diameter and 8 mm deep drill hole for a correct fit on the side of the furniture, which allows a stable and concealed fixing of the shelf.
                                                                                                Its cylindrical design includes a Ø7.6 mm base that fits into the perforation and a 4 mm flange that protrudes to act as a fulcrum, ensuring stability without protruding over the edge of the shelf.
                                                                                                It is made of steel with a nickel-plated finish that provides resistance to rust, greater durability in humid environments and a discreet aesthetic compatible with any furniture finish.
                                                                                                The bracket is available in pack sizes of 100 and 5,000 units, making it ideal for both industrial series assembly and for replenishment in distribution warehouses.
                                                                                                The design is intended as a concealed support point for standard wooden shelves. For heavy loads or long shelves, it is recommended for use in conjunction with other reinforcement elements.
                                                                                                The scoop shape provides a wider and more stable support for the shelf, preventing slippage and reducing pressure points on the wood, which increases the durability of the furniture.
                                                                                                The bracket requires a minimum depth of 10 mm for secure fixing of the 5 mm diameter bolt, allowing firm anchoring in standard wood or melamine panels.
                                                                                                Nickel plating provides a corrosion and moisture resistant protective layer, ideal for environments such as kitchens, bathrooms or heavy duty furniture where high wear resistance is required.
                                                                                                The bracket has a total length of 18.5 mm from the base of the stem to the end of the support, allowing a compact installation without protruding excessively from the side of the furniture.
                                                                                                Yes, the bracket is designed for moderately loaded shelves in home and office furniture, provided that the diameter and mounting depth specifications are respected.
                                                                                                The bracket is designed for glass panels with a thickness of 4.5 mm, ensuring a firm fit without the need for additional adapters.
                                                                                                The bracket is pressed into a hole drilled in the side of the module. The stem is inserted 7 mm from the edge and secures the glass by means of its coupled shape with a 16 mm high support base.
                                                                                                The support base is 10 mm long and 16 mm high, providing a stable platform that prevents the glass panel from slipping.
                                                                                                Yes, this bracket is ideal for display cabinets, light shelving or decorative modules where a visually unobtrusive and effective fixing for glass shelves is required.
                                                                                                The product is presented in boxes of 2000 units, facilitating handling and replacement for furniture manufacturers, assemblers or professional installers.
                                                                                                The Evo bracket is fixed by means of a bolt to be embedded in a Ø5 mm truss, which allows a quick assembly without specific tools, ideal for modular shelving applications.
                                                                                                It is designed to accommodate glass shelves with a thickness of 6 to 8 mm, and includes a rubber protection on the top face to prevent slippage and damage to the glass.
                                                                                                Yes, it incorporates a locking mechanism with a plastic screw at the bottom that presses the glass from below, ensuring a firm hold even in environments with movement, such as bathrooms or kitchens.
                                                                                                Thanks to its firm fixing system and robust design in nickel-plated Zamak, the Evo bracket is suitable for hanging shelves, display cabinets or furniture exposed to moderate vertical stresses.
                                                                                                The nickel-plated finish not only provides a modern, shiny aesthetic appearance, but also improves resistance to oxidation and wear, prolonging the life of the bracket in humid environments.
                                                                                                The Evo bracket is designed for glass shelves with a thickness of 6 to 8 mm, providing a firm grip by means of a protective rubber that prevents slipping and vibrations.
                                                                                                This bracket uses a screw system with a plastic screw integrated in the lower part that facilitates the fastening of the glass to the bracket, offering security and stability to the assembly.
                                                                                                Yes, thanks to its fixing screw, the Evo bracket allows the module to be transported with the shelf mounted without any risk of displacement, which optimises the logistical and installation process.
                                                                                                It is available in nickel plated and rust black finish, both made of high quality zamak, with excellent resistance to oxidation and wear, ideal for bathroom or kitchen environments.
                                                                                                For correct support and weight distribution, it is recommended to use 4 Evo supports per glass shelf, one at each corner of the shelf.
                                                                                                This bracket uses a pressure screw with anti-slip rubber to firmly fix the glass shelf, which ensures a secure hold without damaging the material and allows for quick installation and removal.
                                                                                                The bracket is made of a combination of high-strength plastic and nickel-plated zamak, giving it durability, shiny aesthetics and corrosion resistance, ideal for wet environments such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                                                                                                The mounting base has a diameter of 20 mm and an overall height of 15 mm, making it a compact and discreet bracket that fits into shelving where minimal visual presence is required.
                                                                                                The San Remo bracket comes in kits of 1000 units, facilitating its use in production lines or high volume installations where efficiency and consistency in assembly is required.
                                                                                                The metal pin is manufactured from turned steel with a diameter of 3 mm and a length of 10 mm. This configuration provides a firm and precise insertion in standard 3 mm holes, offering excellent shear strength in light racking.
                                                                                                The bracket is available in a white finish and in a transparent version, allowing it to be aesthetically integrated into various furniture designs without compromising the functionality of the fastening system.
                                                                                                The bracket is 10 mm high and 12 mm deep, making it ideal for shelves where a discreet but effective fixing is required. Its compact dimensions maximise usable space in furniture interiors without visible interference.
                                                                                                Yes, the bracket is available in kits of 1000 and 100 units, facilitating its use in both one-off installations and industrial assembly line projects. Its bulk presentation optimises logistics and storage.
                                                                                                There are versions for 5 mm bore holes without bolt (plastic insert only), as well as 3 mm models with steel bolt. This makes it possible to adapt to different configurations depending on the module design or project requirements.
                                                                                                The bracket is designed to accommodate glass shelves up to 5 mm thick and is fitted with a metal screw and a plastic clamping piece to ensure a firm hold without damaging the material.
                                                                                                The bracket has a machined lower metal screw hole, which allows precise and secure mounting on vertical panels, ideal for display cabinets, bathroom furniture or sideboards with glass shelves.
                                                                                                Yes, thanks to the pressure screw and the tilting design of the inner plastic part, the glass can be removed without removing the support from the cabinet, facilitating maintenance or cleaning.
                                                                                                Nickel plating provides resistance to oxidation and improves the durability of the bracket in humid environments such as bathrooms or kitchens, as well as offering an aesthetic finish compatible with chrome plated fittings.
                                                                                                Due to its compact design and independent fixing, it is ideal for modular systems with interchangeable or adjustable shelves, offering flexibility for mounting on metal or wooden structures.
                                                                                                The bracket is designed to accommodate glass shelves with a maximum thickness of 8 mm, a length of up to 180 mm and a width of 130 mm. These specifications ensure correct support and load distribution.
                                                                                                A 5 mm diameter cylindrical hole is required for mounting the bracket. This design allows quick and secure installation in side panels of cabinets or display cabinets.
                                                                                                The nickel-plated zamak body provides structural strength and durability, while the plastic head prevents damage to the glass and ensures a non-slip grip. This combination maximises safety and service life.
                                                                                                The support is presented in packs of 1000 units, ideal for high rotation installations or industrial mass production. This presentation facilitates stock control and efficient warehouse replenishment.
                                                                                                Yes, thanks to its aesthetic nickel-plated finish and compact design, it is ideal for both display cabinets and domestic cupboards. Its visual discretion makes it a functional and decorative solution.
                                                                                                The bracket needs a Ø 10 mm hole to insert the main body, and a second Ø 8.5 mm hole for the adjusting pin that secures the shelf in its horizontal position.
                                                                                                The base of the bracket is semi-circular with a diameter of 14 mm, which provides a large contact surface that improves the load distribution and stability of the shelf.
                                                                                                The main body is 12 mm wide by 15.5 mm high, while the attachment piece is 8 mm wide. These dimensions allow for a precise and secure fit in standard wood panel configurations.
                                                                                                The nickel-plated finish not only improves the aesthetics of the component, but also increases its resistance to corrosion and wear, making it a durable solution for demanding environments.
                                                                                                Thanks to its robustness and professional finish, it is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, office furniture or serial carpentry installations, where discreet and resistant solutions are required with a high volume of units per packaging (2,000 units).
                                                                                                This bracket incorporates a top dowel that is recessed into the shelf and a vertical dowel for fixing to the panel. Both guarantee a firm and concealed fixing, specially designed for applications where aesthetics and safety are a priority.
                                                                                                The bracket has a 153 mm long by 10 mm wide fixing base. The vertical dowel measures Ø5 mm x 17 mm and the top dowel for the shelf is 7.6 mm long, allowing precise and secure mounting.
                                                                                                It is made of zamak with a nickel-plated finish, which gives it excellent mechanical and corrosion resistance. This material is ideal for furniture subject to frequent loads or environments with a certain humidity.
                                                                                                It is ideal for wooden shelving in cabinets, display cabinets or furniture where a robust, unobtrusive fixing is required with no visible screws. Its recessed design provides a professional finish in both residential and commercial projects.
                                                                                                Yes, the product is supplied in packs of 1,000 units, which makes it highly competitive for furniture manufacturers, wholesale distributors or carpentry shops operating in high turnover processes.
                                                                                                This bracket is compatible with wooden boards up to 25 cm wide and a maximum thickness of 16 mm. Its front design allows for a firm and aesthetically pleasing hold, especially in cabinet applications.
                                                                                                The upper flange acts as an additional safety mechanism, facilitating stable fixing of the table top from the front and preventing displacement during daily use.
                                                                                                This bracket is installed together with a nickel-plated piece that fixes the back of the shelf. The front bracket secures the visible part, improving the aesthetics and accessibility of the furniture.
                                                                                                The bracket is 25.5 mm high and 27.7 mm wide. These dimensions allow for an adequate load distribution on the front panel, provided that the maximum panel thickness limits are respected.
                                                                                                It is especially recommended for installations in cabinets and modular furniture where the visibility of the support requires a discreet and transparent finish, without compromising strength.
                                                                                                To install this bracket it is necessary to drill a Ø 5 mm hole in the vertical panel where the bracket's fastening bolt will be inserted.
                                                                                                The plastic pad is 3.5 mm thick and provides a firm and tight base that prevents the glass shelf from slipping or vibrating, improving the stability of the assembly.
                                                                                                The holder has a 15.75 mm long, 11 mm wide and 13.5 mm deep body. These dimensions make it compatible with most standard glass shelves.
                                                                                                It is ideal for glass shelves in bathroom furniture, display cabinets, living rooms or kitchens where a discreet, resistant and aesthetically pleasing nickel-plated finish is required.
                                                                                                The bracket is made of nickel-plated zamak for strength and durability, while the glass support area is made of transparent plastic to avoid scratches and to improve the aesthetics of the mounting.
                                                                                                The 21B bracket is installed by embedding the dowel into a vertical panel. This system does not require complex tools, as the dowel is inserted into a pre-drilled hole 10 mm in diameter and 14 mm in height, ensuring fast and efficient fixing.
                                                                                                The support area is 12 mm long and the dowel is 8 mm long with a diameter of 5 mm, which allows a safe and stable insertion of the glass without displacement during use.
                                                                                                The nickel-plated finish provides a layer of protection against corrosion and rust, improving the durability of the component even in wet environments or when exposed to cleaning products.
                                                                                                This bracket is designed to securely hold flat glass shelves, commonly used in display cabinets, bathroom furniture or home furnishings. The plastic base prevents direct contact between the metal and the glass, protecting it from damage.
                                                                                                The product is sold in batches of 1000 units, making it an ideal solution for manufacturers, distributors or large-scale installations requiring multiple media in an efficient manner.
                                                                                                The bracket incorporates a 5 mm diameter, 10 mm long plastic wedge that is pressed into the pre-machined hole in the side of the cabinet. This press-fit fixing ensures quick installation without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                It is designed to accommodate glass shelves with a thickness between 4 mm and 6 mm, securely fastened with a plastic screw included, preventing slippage and damage to the glass.
                                                                                                The body of the bracket measures 18 mm long by 8.7 mm high, allowing for unobtrusive integration into furniture structures while maintaining a high holding capacity without compromising on design.
                                                                                                The body is made of zamak, a tough alloy, and coated with a nickel-plated finish that offers excellent protection against corrosion and wear, ideal for wet or demanding environments.
                                                                                                The product is supplied in boxes of 1000 units, making it an efficient solution for joinery, furniture industries, technical distributors and manufacturers who require volume and reliability in their glass support systems.
                                                                                                This bracket is fixed to the furniture by screwing through a Ø 4.2 mm hole in the side, which provides a secure and firm installation. In addition, a plastic screw at the bottom ensures additional support for the glass shelf.
                                                                                                It is compatible with glass shelves with a thickness between 5 mm and 10 mm, thus adapting to different furniture configurations without compromising the stability of the system.
                                                                                                The bracket features a high quality 2 mm thick steel body, coated with a nickel-plated finish for improved corrosion resistance and durability in demanding environments.
                                                                                                The bracket has a height of 15 mm, which allows for discreet integration into shelving systems without affecting the aesthetics of the furniture, while maintaining a high load-bearing capacity and support.
                                                                                                Supplied in batches of 1000 units, it is ideal for distributors, furniture manufacturers, professional installers and joinery companies requiring efficient and robust solutions in large volumes.
                                                                                                For correct installation, a 10 mm deep, 3 mm diameter hole must be drilled in the vertical panel, ensuring the precise fit of the recessed section of the bracket.
                                                                                                The plastic strip acts as an anti-slip element, providing a secure base for the glass shelf and preventing accidental displacement or vibration.
                                                                                                The visible part of the bracket when mounted measures 10 mm in length by 9 mm in diameter, allowing a compact, functional and aesthetic design for unobtrusive installations.
                                                                                                It is made of nickel-plated steel with a plastic insert, which provides high resistance to corrosion, excellent durability and an aesthetic finish suitable for demanding environments such as bathrooms or kitchens.
                                                                                                The packaging contains 100 pieces of nickel-plated shelf bracket, ideal for professional projects or series installations that require technical consistency and time saving.
                                                                                                The suction cup is installed in a hole in the area that is recessed into the wood or panel. The hole should have a diameter of 5.5 mm and a depth of 5.5 mm for a proper fit.
                                                                                                The suction cup has a base diameter of Ø5.5 mm, a total length of 5.5 mm and a visible thickness of 3.2 mm, which allows a precise fixation of the glass without generating direct pressure or damaging the glass surface.
                                                                                                Its function is twofold: to position the glass panel securely and to avoid direct contact between the glass and the metal or wooden elements, preventing slippage or damage due to vibration or pressure.
                                                                                                This suction cup is particularly suitable for display cabinets, glass shelves or furniture structures that use glass panels and require concealed and secure mounting, without compromising aesthetics or insulation.
                                                                                                With a packaging of 3,000 units, this suction cup is ideal for serial installations, optimising logistics and ensuring continuous availability in production lines or large-scale projects.
                                                                                                This bracket is designed to accommodate glass panels with a thickness between 4 mm and 8 mm, guaranteeing a secure, backlash-free fit thanks to its L-shape and integrated plastic damping.
                                                                                                The vertical fixing hole shall have a diameter of 4 mm and be located in a 17 mm wide plate. The plate must allow for an anchorage depth of at least 13 mm to accommodate the entire bracket.
                                                                                                The nickel-plated zamak body provides mechanical strength and durability against corrosion, while the tough plastic in the area in contact with the glass provides cushioning and prevents slipping or damage.
                                                                                                The bracket forms a 90° angle bracket which, together with the vertical fixing hole, allows the bracket to be firmly anchored to the panel, while the plastic cup ensures that the glass is supported without movement.
                                                                                                The product is supplied in packs of 1000 units, which optimises procurement for furniture manufacturers and distributors who require volume assembly or continuous production lines.
                                                                                                The bracket is inserted into the panel by means of a 5 mm diameter hole, which is necessary to accommodate its metal spigot, ensuring a firm fixing without the need for additional screws.
                                                                                                The piece has a total length of 27 mm, a height of 12 mm and a width of 9 mm. The external visible part corresponding to the plastic cup has a length of 14 mm, ideal for maintaining a discreet aesthetic.
                                                                                                The steel provides structural strength and stability, while the clear plastic finish on the support area minimises the risk of slipping and protects the glass from scratches, ideal for display cabinets or visible shelving.
                                                                                                It is specifically designed for glass panels used in horizontal shelving. Its low profile design and secure support make it compatible with standard glass, requiring no additional adhesives or fixings.
                                                                                                It is supplied in packs of 1000 units, facilitating storage, handling and distribution in industrial environments or mass production projects that require consistency and continuous availability.
                                                                                                This bracket is designed to accommodate glass panels with a thickness between 4 mm and 8 mm, making it a versatile solution for different types of tempered glass shelving.
                                                                                                It is made of steel and plastic with a nickel-plated finish and a zamak base. This combination guarantees high corrosion resistance, excellent mechanical behaviour and modern aesthetics.
                                                                                                The bracket incorporates a 13 mm long semi-circular metal piece, which presses against the glass from the inside of the bracket, firmly securing the panel without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                Its minimalist and decorative design allows for aesthetic integration without visual interference in high-end furniture projects, offering a technical solution without sacrificing contemporary design.
                                                                                                The bracket is fixed by means of a screw that is inserted into the vertical panel. Additionally, it incorporates a dowel embedded in the horizontal panel, which reinforces the stability of the shelf in load-bearing applications.
                                                                                                The orientation dowel has a diameter of 5 mm and is inserted into a 5 mm diameter hole, helping to maintain the correct alignment of the shelf during installation.
                                                                                                The support area of the bracket has a 14 mm long and 12 mm wide base, providing a stable surface for the placement of horizontal wooden panels.
                                                                                                The bracket is made of steel and zamak, with a nickel-plated finish. This combination gives it mechanical strength, durability and corrosion protection, ideal for use in kitchen, home or office furniture.
                                                                                                The shelf bracket is packaged in packs of 1000 units, making it easy to store and use in mass production environments or professional furniture assembly.
                                                                                                The fastener is made of plastic, a material renowned for its strength, lightness and durability. In addition, its transparent finish allows for discreet aesthetic integration into the furniture without altering the visual design.
                                                                                                It is installed by press-fitting into a 5 mm diameter hole, pre-drilled in the furniture panel. Its conical shape ensures a stable fixing without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                Yes, it is designed for wooden shelves, providing firm support in applications such as cabinets, kitchen furniture or domestic shelving. Its design reduces the risk of damaging the board surface.
                                                                                                Its shape allows for quick and error-free insertion, ideal for repetitive industrial processes. The transparent finish provides an aesthetic and clean solution, highly valued by manufacturers and carpenters who prioritise visual detail.
                                                                                                The fastener is marketed in batches of 5000 units, allowing high availability in assembly lines and warehouses. This presentation is ideal for medium-high volume projects in the furniture sector.
                                                                                                This bracket is designed for the secure placement of glass panels with a thickness of between 4mm and 6mm, making it compatible with most standard tempered glass shelves used in home and office furniture.
                                                                                                The glass is fixed by means of a lower plastic screw that fits the panel optimally, ensuring that it is held in place without damaging it. This solution also allows for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                The main body of the bracket is made of zamak, a robust and warp-resistant material. Its nickel-plated finish enhances the aesthetics of the product and adds an extra layer of protection against corrosion.
                                                                                                The bracket has a total height of 14 mm, a depth of 18 mm and an extra thickness of 3 mm on the side for using countersunk screws. These dimensions allow a discreet and stable installation on vertical panels.
                                                                                                The stand is delivered in boxes of 1000 units, which makes it ideal for large volume furniture projects such as commercial installations, mass production of furniture or contract projects for hospitality and retail.
                                                                                                The locking system of the Sekure bracket prevents the shelf from shifting or falling when the furniture is turned over, which provides additional safety during transport and handling, especially in professional installations or large furniture projects.
                                                                                                No tools are required. The system incorporates a manual locking plate that allows the steel bolt to be easily fixed and released, making assembly and disassembly quick and easy, even in confined spaces.
                                                                                                The bracket is available in multiple finishes: white, grey, anthracite grey and brown plastic. It is also available in two diameters: 3 mm and 5 mm, adapting to different design and resistance needs.
                                                                                                In addition to the manual locking, the bracket has a double insert design that improves the fixation: the bolt goes 7.5 mm into the bracket and the longer part (10 mm) is on the side of the furniture, increasing its stability.
                                                                                                The Sekure bolt-on bracket is supplied in packs of 250 units, which makes it easy to implement in production lines, industrial joinery or large account installations.
                                                                                                This design allows for quick and versatile installation depending on the diameter of the available hole. By offering two pivot sizes, the installer can choose the most suitable option for the project without the need to modify the glass.
                                                                                                The bracket has an upper screw fastening system that effectively immobilises the glass, preventing accidental displacement, even on shelves with frequent use or moderate load.
                                                                                                The Portofino bracket is designed to hold glass shelves between 4 and 8 mm thick, making it a flexible solution for home furnishing, bathroom, kitchen or light commercial applications.
                                                                                                The body is made of zamak, a robust and durable alloy, and is available in two finishes: nickel-plated for a shiny metallic look and rust black for a more modern or industrial style.
                                                                                                The bracket is sold in packs of 500 units, making it easy to use in manufacturing environments or large-scale installations, optimising assembly times and inventory management.
                                                                                                The bracket is fitted into the side of the cabinet through a Ø 6 mm hole. No special tools are required other than a drill bit of the indicated diameter and a hammer for press-fitting.
                                                                                                Thanks to its nickel-plated zamak construction, the bracket offers high mechanical strength, ideal for domestic and light industrial shelves, guaranteeing stability on standard thickness boards without deformation.
                                                                                                The support is L-shaped and has a shelf that supports the board and a vertically oriented dowel that is inserted into a drill hole. This double fixing ensures firmness and prevents the shelf from sliding sideways.
                                                                                                The body measures 12 mm wide x 14 mm long, while the insertable dowel is 7.5 mm long and Ø 5 mm. This geometry makes it compatible with most modular furniture using solid wood or melamine shelves.
                                                                                                The support is presented in boxes of 1,000 units, designed for distributors, industrial carpentry and furniture manufacturers who require large volumes with easy storage and replenishment.
                                                                                                The bracket measures 11 mm high, 11 mm wide and 10 mm long, while the integrated bolt has a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 7 mm. These dimensions allow for a compact and unobtrusive installation, ideal for wooden shelves with aesthetic and functional requirements.
                                                                                                It is made of Zamak, an alloy of high hardness and durability, and finished with nickel plating that provides protection against corrosion. This makes it particularly suitable for applications in wet or heavy-duty environments such as kitchens, offices or commercial furniture.
                                                                                                The 5mm diameter bolt is completely concealed by being recessed into the board, enhancing the aesthetics of the furniture and minimising visible fixing points, ideal for contemporary or modular design furniture where appearance is key.
                                                                                                Thanks to its dimensions and robustness, this bracket can be installed on medium or high density boards (such as MDF or reinforced chipboard) and is ideal for standard thicknesses. Its nickel-plated fastening ensures a firm and secure connection even on furniture under load.
                                                                                                The product is presented in packs of 100 units, which facilitates stock management and supply in mass production projects or large commercial or domestic furniture installations.
                                                                                                For correct installation, a 75 mm deep hole must be drilled using a 3 mm diameter drill bit. This dimension ensures a firm and secure anchorage inside the board.
                                                                                                The bracket is inserted at its narrowest part by pressure until it is completely recessed. Once in place, its wider end is visible and ready to support the shelf.
                                                                                                The bracket is 16 mm long, with a diameter of 5 mm in the shelf-supporting part and 3 mm in the insertion area. These measurements optimise stability and weight resistance in thin boards.
                                                                                                It is made of steel with a nickel-plated finish, which gives it a high resistance to wear and corrosion. This finish also offers a professional and unobtrusive aesthetic for visible applications.
                                                                                                The metal bracket is designed to be used on wooden boards of at least 10 mm thickness, ensuring secure fastening without compromising the structural integrity of the furniture.
                                                                                                This bracket is designed to accommodate glass panels that can be inserted vertically. Compatibility depends on the thickness of the glass and the fit with the Ø6.3 mm by 10 mm long clamping area of the bracket.
                                                                                                Yes, it incorporates a plastic surface that acts as a shock absorber between the screw and the glass, preventing damage from direct pressure or vibrations and providing a more secure and durable fixing.
                                                                                                The screw comes with a 20 mm long body by 8 mm diameter and a Ø6.3 mm thread. It is screwed directly into the vertical panel or cabinet casing, which allows for quick mounting without additional accessories.
                                                                                                The bracket is finished in nickel plating, which gives it high corrosion resistance, durability against humidity and a neutral aesthetic finish that easily adapts to visible glass furniture.
                                                                                                No, it is only necessary to screw the bracket onto the panel using the built-in screw. For increased safety of the glass, it is recommended to use it in conjunction with an additional bracket.
                                                                                                The bracket is installed directly on the table top by means of a snap-in system. It is inserted into a groove and is concealed, providing a stable and invisible support for the shelf.
                                                                                                Its design allows the fastening mechanism to be completely hidden, providing a clean and professional aesthetic in the installation of the shelf, with no elements visible from the outside of the furniture.
                                                                                                It is designed to work in conjunction with the corresponding metal bracket, which is inserted from the front to ensure that the wooden boards are secured to the system.
                                                                                                It is ideal for wooden shelves in kitchens, living rooms or storage spaces where an aesthetically concealed and functionally safe installation solution is required.
                                                                                                It comes in packs of 5,000 units, allowing efficient use in large-scale installations for distributors, wholesalers or modular furniture manufacturers.
                                                                                                Thanks to its zamak material of construction, the 21A bracket offers excellent mechanical strength and durability similar to steel and is suitable for typical loads in horizontal wooden shelving applications in cabinets and professional furniture.
                                                                                                The bracket requires a Ø 5 mm diameter and 8 mm deep hole in the vertical panel where it will be fixed. The wooden panel to be installed must have a 10 mm wide by 12.5 mm long borehole to properly accommodate the fastening plug.
                                                                                                Yes, the nickel-plated finish not only provides a shiny, professional aesthetic, but also acts as protection against rust and corrosion, ensuring a long service life even in humid or demanding environments.
                                                                                                This bracket has been designed in the shape of a square for horizontal mounting, ideal for shelving. It is always installed on the vertical panel of the cabinet or cupboard, with the wing of the bracket at right angles to support the wooden shelf.
                                                                                                The 21A bracket is delivered in a standard package of 1000 units, optimised for distributors, furniture manufacturers and carpenters who require volume in production lines or large scale projects.
                                                                                                The bracket is installed by means of a Ø5 mm knurled bolt which is pressed laterally into the furniture and a second bolt which reinforces the support.
                                                                                                The main bolt is Ø5 mm and the design allows use with shelves of any thickness.
                                                                                                The use of 4 Beak brackets is recommended to fix a shelf correctly.
                                                                                                Yes, it is suitable for wooden shelves regardless of the thickness of the board.
                                                                                                It is made of zamak and available in nickel-plated or black zinc-plated finish, depending on the selected reference.
                                                                                                  Aguila brackets are designed for wooden or glass shelves with thicknesses from 4 to 40 mm, making them versatile for different configurations of domestic or commercial furniture.
                                                                                                  The maximum load capacity per pair of brackets is 40 kg, provided that the brackets are installed correctly and appropriate hardware is used for the type of wall.
                                                                                                  The Aguila bracket has a top cover and a bottom rubber band that allows the shelf to be firmly fixed without the need for machining, simply by exerting pressure on both surfaces.
                                                                                                  Yes, the brackets are made of zamak and plastic with an aluminium painted finish, offering excellent resistance to humidity and everyday use in kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                                  This support complies with the UNE-EN 14749:2006 standard for storage furniture in kitchens and bathrooms, guaranteeing its safety and performance in residential applications.
                                                                                                  Pelican brackets are designed to support up to 40 kg per pair of brackets, provided they are installed correctly on suitable surfaces and with compatible fixings. Their resistance has been verified in accordance with UNE EN 14323:2016.
                                                                                                  They are compatible with both wooden and glass shelves, as long as the thickness is between 3 mm and 40 mm. The design of the bottom cover allows a firm hold without the need for machining on the shelf.
                                                                                                  The black painted finish not only adds contemporary aesthetic value, but also improves corrosion resistance in indoor environments, making it ideal for kitchens, living rooms or areas of intensive domestic use.
                                                                                                  Each bracket includes screws and plugs designed to ensure a stable fixation on sturdy surfaces. It is essential to check the type of wall and use suitable anchors to ensure the indicated load capacity.
                                                                                                  The Pelícano stands out for its robust design, with a painted zamak body, designed for intensive use. Unlike the Eagle model, the Pelican allows a stronger hold for thicker shelves, while still offering an elegant decorative finish.
                                                                                                  The Míro brackets are designed to hold wooden or glass shelves with a thickness between 4 and 20 mm, thanks to their design with a top cover that fixes the shelf without special machining.
                                                                                                  According to the UNE-EN14350:2006 standard, each support can support up to 40 kg, which makes them suitable for both domestic and professional environments that require a firm and secure hold.
                                                                                                  This bracket is wall-mounted by means of plugs and screws included in the set, and its zamak body together with the plastic cover ensure a precise and aesthetic fixing.
                                                                                                  The aluminium painted finish, together with the plastic and metallic materials used, provides good resistance to humidity, although it is recommended to avoid prolonged exposure to direct water.
                                                                                                  The design of the Miro stand combines elegant curved lines with a concealed fixing system, allowing it to be integrated as a decorative element in visible rooms in the home or office without compromising the aesthetics of the environment.
                                                                                                  Azor brackets are designed for shelf thicknesses between 4 and 25 mm, making them compatible with a wide variety of shelves in both wood and glass.
                                                                                                  The Azor bracket is secured with the included screws and is elegantly concealed by an aluminium painted top cover, providing a clean and professional finish.
                                                                                                  The recommended load capacity per pair of Azor brackets is up to 40 kg, provided they are installed correctly on a brick wall or heavy duty surface.
                                                                                                  Yes, they are made of plastic and zamak with an aluminium painted finish, materials that offer good resistance to humidity, so they can be installed in kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                                  Yes, Azor supports comply with the UNE-EN 14360:2006 standard, which regulates the safety and performance requirements for hanging storage systems.
                                                                                                  These supports can hold shelves with a maximum recommended load of up to 40 kg, complying with the UNE-EN14320:2006 standard for household and kitchen components.
                                                                                                  The anti-slip design with rubber on the upper side of the bracket ensures a secure hold and prevents movement or slipping of the shelf, making it ideal for both glass and wood.
                                                                                                  The matt nickel painted finish not only enhances the aesthetics of the substrate, but also offers additional protection against rust and wear, ideal for wet or heavy use environments.
                                                                                                  They are compatible with wooden or glass shelves with thicknesses from 6 to 25 mm, which allows for great versatility in carpentry and modular furniture projects.
                                                                                                  The system includes plastic covers that allow the screws to be completely hidden, improving the final aesthetics and offering a clean and professional finish after installation.
                                                                                                  Each set of Shelf supports offers a maximum load capacity of 30 kg, suitable for domestic or decorative storage shelving.
                                                                                                  Installation is carried out by attaching the brackets to the side of the board and then to the wall using the screws and plugs included, without the need for additional elements.
                                                                                                  It is recommended to install 600 mm wide by 200 mm deep boards to ensure proper support and weight distribution.
                                                                                                  Additional bracing is not necessary as long as the manufacturer's installation and loading recommendations are followed.
                                                                                                  These stands are designed for applications in both domestic environments (kitchens, living rooms, bathrooms) and in small commercial or retail environments that require visually neat organisation.
                                                                                                  Each set of straight square tube brackets has a maximum load capacity of 10 kg per pair.
                                                                                                  It is recommended to fix a wooden board 600 mm long by 200 mm deep to ensure stability and functionality.
                                                                                                  Unlike the triangular bracket which maximises load bearing and stability, the straight square tube bracket offers a more modern linear aesthetic, ideal for decorative or medium duty shelving.
                                                                                                  Includes screws and plugs for fixing the bracket to the shelf and wall.
                                                                                                  Although it has a lower load-bearing capacity than the triangular version, it is designed for both decorative and functional purposes in everyday rooms.
                                                                                                  The maximum load capacity is 10 kg per set of brackets, which is sufficient for standard domestic shelving.
                                                                                                  The integrated hanger allows the stand to also be used as a coat rack, increasing functionality in small spaces such as hallways, bathrooms or kitchens.
                                                                                                  It is recommended to use 600 mm long by 200 mm deep boards for a safe and stable installation.
                                                                                                  The kit includes screws and mounting plugs for wall and shelf mounting. Wood screws (not included) can also be used if a more robust fixing is required.
                                                                                                  The hanger is attached using two concealed screws included in the kit. It is easily installed with a standard screwdriver, without the need for special tools or additional anchoring systems.
                                                                                                  It is made of high quality hypoallergenic rubber, which makes it resistant to moisture, scratches and daily use. This material is ideal for installations in children's environments due to its safety and durability.
                                                                                                  Can be installed on plasterboard, wood, chipboard or painted surfaces, provided that the appropriate plugs and screws are used. Not recommended for soft or non-structural surfaces without reinforcement.
                                                                                                  Yes, in addition to the black painted finish, it is also available in blue, which allows it to adapt to different styles of decoration in children's bedrooms or play areas.
                                                                                                  Each hanger is installed by means of two visible screws included in the delivery. Installation is carried out with a conventional screwdriver, without the need for special tools, and is suitable for walls made of wood, plaster or technical boards.
                                                                                                  They are made of high-strength aluminium, which gives them excellent resistance to corrosion, lightness and durability in wet areas such as bathrooms or laundry rooms. In addition, their black painted finish guarantees high resistance to scratching.
                                                                                                  Yes, in addition to the black painted finish, it is also available in a matt anodised finish, which allows it to be integrated into more neutral or technical decorative styles, such as office or contract furniture.
                                                                                                  Yes, its compact size and simple fixing make it compatible with modular structures or pre-drilled boards, which are widely used in modular wardrobes, walk-in wardrobes or vertical storage systems.
                                                                                                  The set includes 7 wall hangers and the necessary installation screws for mounting. Supplied as a complete set, ready to install.
                                                                                                  The kit includes screws Ø 4.5x40 mm and plugs Ø 5x30 mm, suitable for quick and safe installation on suitable surfaces.
                                                                                                  The hanger is made of zamak, a resistant and easy to clean material, ideal for home applications such as bathrooms, bedrooms or wardrobes.
                                                                                                  This model is available in chrome and black painted finish, allowing it to adapt to different styles of interior decoration.
                                                                                                  It is designed to be adaptable to any room in the home, such as bedrooms, bathrooms or wardrobes, helping to save space by being wall-mounted.
                                                                                                  The product is supplied with 1 wall hanger and the screws required for installation.
                                                                                                  This model includes 3 coat racks integrated in a single piece, ideal for organising coats or accessories in different areas of the home.
                                                                                                  It is made of steel, a hard-wearing and easy-to-clean material, suitable for both domestic and public environments.
                                                                                                  The Hamilton hanger is available in black paint and satin nickel, allowing it to be adapted to different interior styles.
                                                                                                  It can be installed in bedrooms, bathrooms, wardrobes or common areas of the home. It is also suitable for public spaces such as offices, libraries or restaurants.
                                                                                                    The diameter of hole that is used for the euro screws is 5 mm, as prior drilling is required to assemble those screws.
                                                                                                    It is recommended to use a Ø5 mm drill bit to ensure precise insertion of the Euro screw. The drill hole should have a minimum depth of 11 mm and should be drilled to tight tolerances to avoid looseness or breakage of the material.
                                                                                                    This screw is optimised for wood-based materials such as chipboard, MDF or melamine. Its design allows for strong fastening without the need for metal inserts, making it ideal for quick assembly of demountable furniture.
                                                                                                    Emuca Euro screws are manufactured to DIN standards and meet TSCA Title VI assembly system strength requirements, offering maximum compatibility with modular structures in kitchen and office furniture.
                                                                                                    The ideal torque for this screw is between 3.5 and 4 Nm. It is recommended to use torque-controlled screwdrivers to avoid head deformation or damage to the fastening material, especially in low-density boards.
                                                                                                    The zinc plated finish provides superior corrosion protection and improves screw adhesion in porous materials. It is ideal for applications in humid environments or furniture that require a long service life without surface rust.
                                                                                                    The M4 nut connection system is designed to fit into a drill hole with a precise diameter of 8 mm, which guarantees a firm hold in wooden or chipboard panels.
                                                                                                    The knurled design of the outer surface allows for increased friction during drawing, which prevents the nut from turning during tightening of the bolt, ensuring a solid and reliable mechanical connection.
                                                                                                    Installation should be by direct pressure on a precisely drilled hole in the panel. The press fit is key to maintaining axial alignment and avoiding displacement.
                                                                                                    This system is ideal for furniture applications where internal fixing is required that is not visible, such as demountable structures, concealed joints or lightly loaded accessory brackets.
                                                                                                    The M4 nut connector system is supplied in an industrial packaging of 2000 units, making it easy to handle and replenish for large-scale installations or assembly lines.
                                                                                                    This kit is ideal for demountable joints in furniture where precision and strength are required, especially in installations where wood, metal or composite materials are combined with standard 5 mm holes.
                                                                                                    The nuts require a bore with a diameter of 10 mm and a thickness of 1.2 mm to fully accommodate the body, ensuring a secure and aesthetic fastening from the opposite side of the bolt.
                                                                                                    The screw has a length of 14 mm, optimised for furniture structures with thin or medium-sized panels, allowing a firm fixing without protruding through the other side of the material.
                                                                                                    Both parts are made of nickel-plated steel, providing high corrosion resistance and a shiny aesthetic finish, suitable for both domestic and professional environments.
                                                                                                    The kit consists of 500 bolts and 500 nuts, packed together in a single package, ideal for series production or maintenance in carpentry or industrial assembly workshops.
                                                                                                    This nut is specially designed for applications where a robust fixing with a low mounting profile is required, such as compact furniture assemblies or metal structures where board thickness or access is limited.
                                                                                                    Its 1.2 mm thick extra-flat design minimises the volume occupied on the surface of the material, allowing for a cleaner, safer and more aesthetic finish, ideal for modules where the component must be concealed or flush.
                                                                                                    It is designed for use with standard pitch M4 screws. It is especially recommended for use in conjunction with M4 screws with nickel plated extra flat head to maintain consistency in finish and mounting tolerances.
                                                                                                    The nickel-plated steel body provides excellent mechanical strength as well as high protection against rust in humid environments or when subjected to wear and tear from continuous use or repeated assembly.
                                                                                                    This model is marketed in industrial presentations of 2,000 units, which allows for the optimisation of logistical and installation processes in mass production environments or the assembly of modular furniture.
                                                                                                    The screws are designed with a flat Allen head that requires the use of a hexagon socket spanner. This configuration ensures efficient torque transmission and secure installation without damaging the head.
                                                                                                    The zinc plated finish provides a layer of protection against corrosion and rust, ideal for furniture that is installed in damp or high traffic environments. This treatment also improves the durability of the screw over time.
                                                                                                    They are specially designed for joining furniture accessories and components. Thanks to their self-tapping capacity, they allow quick assembly without the need for pre-drilling, optimising production times.
                                                                                                    The screws have a thread diameter of 3 mm, which makes them ideal for precise fastenings in wood and wood-based materials. This standard diameter ensures compatibility with most fittings and brackets in the furniture industry.
                                                                                                    The 500-unit batch presentation allows for efficient inventory management, reducing the need for frequent replenishment. It is ideal for manufacturers, wholesalers and distributors who require consistent volume for assembly lines.
                                                                                                    This screw is optimised for strong joints in melamine or chipboard, where the fine thread pitch improves grip without requiring pre-machining. It is ideal for structural assemblies in modular furniture.
                                                                                                    The tapered head provides a clean, aesthetically pleasing and ergonomic finish, especially useful in visible applications. It also distributes pressure better over the surface of the material, reducing the risk of cracking in the boards.
                                                                                                    The 7 mm thread section allows for greater holding capacity in the body of the board, improving tensile and torsional strength. This geometry increases the durability of the assembly, even during disassembly and reassembly cycles.
                                                                                                    The nickel-plated finish offers excellent resistance to corrosion, making it easy to use in humid environments or under heavy use. In addition, it provides a shiny and homogeneous metallic aesthetic that enhances the quality perception of the furniture.
                                                                                                    The product comes in a packaging of 2000 units, ideal for production lines, assembly shops or large-scale distribution. This quantity allows optimisation of continuous supply in intensive assembly processes.
                                                                                                    It is specifically designed for the installation of cup hinges and fastening hardware on furniture, providing precise and secure screwing into wood and wood-based materials.
                                                                                                    It has an extra fine pozidrive thread, which guarantees an excellent fixation without damaging the material, ideal for joints where a strong and precise fixation is required.
                                                                                                    The nickel-plated finish provides high resistance to rust and corrosion, ideal for installations in humid environments such as kitchens and bathrooms, prolonging the life of the hardware.
                                                                                                    The screw is available in 3.5 mm diameters with lengths of 16 mm or 19 mm, in packs of 1000 or 2000 units, facilitating its use in large volume projects.
                                                                                                    It is recommended that a compatible screwdriver or pozidrive tip is used to ensure accurate insertion and to prevent wear to the screw head during assembly.
                                                                                                    The Pozidriv design provides a better engagement between the screwdriver and the screw, reducing the risk of slippage or wear during installation. This improves accuracy and safety in repetitive assembly or with power tools.
                                                                                                    Only a Pozidriv 2 compatible screwdriver is required for secure installation. No pre-drilling is necessary, as they are designed for direct fixing on wooden parts with a 5 mm diameter pre-drilled hole.
                                                                                                    These screws are suitable for connecting furniture fittings, especially in structures where a firm and stable fixing is required without the need for nuts or inserts. They are ideal for quick pre-assembly on production lines.
                                                                                                    The screws have a diameter of 6.2 mm and a total length of 13 mm, offering an optimum balance between penetration and strength for general purpose use in wood or chipboard up to 19 mm thick.
                                                                                                    The zinc-plated finish provides additional resistance against corrosion and rust, which is essential in humid environments or to extend the life of hardware in assemblies exposed to variable conditions.
                                                                                                    This tube acts as a reinforcement sleeve for M4 screw connections, ensuring a secure fixing in materials such as wood, melamine or composite boards. It is embedded in the board and allows for a firmer connection by correctly accommodating the screw.
                                                                                                    It is made of brass with a natural finish, which gives it excellent corrosion resistance and long life even in environments with variations in humidity or temperature, such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                                    The tube must be inserted into a pre-machined hole in the panel. The M4 screw is then inserted to complete the fixing. The process improves the accuracy of the assembly and reduces wear on the base material.
                                                                                                    This tube is ideal for M4 screws with extra flat head, which facilitates flush and secure fastening, minimising interference with other furniture parts or fittings.
                                                                                                    It provides greater mechanical strength in loaded joints, improves assembly repeatability in production runs and optimises the performance of metric bolts, preventing loosening due to wear or vibration.
                                                                                                    This screw is designed for joining accessories in the furniture sector, ideal for direct fastenings in wood or derivatives without the need for pre-drilling thanks to its self-tapping thread and sharp point.
                                                                                                    The flat head allows for flush installation, ideal for invisible assemblies or where a clean finish is required. The allen footprint offers high torque and reduced risk of slippage during installation.
                                                                                                    The zinc-plated coating provides excellent corrosion and wear resistance, ideal for installations in wet or mechanically demanding environments, such as kitchens or bathrooms.
                                                                                                    It is optimised for wood, chipboard, MDF or melamine materials. Its tapered thread allows efficient penetration and a firm grip without damaging the material.
                                                                                                    This model is available in 50 mm length and different finishes such as zinc-plated and black zinc-plated, which allows it to be adapted to both functional and aesthetic contexts in furniture installations.
                                                                                                    The zinc-plated plunger serves as an additional fastener for bolts located inside the furniture, securing the thread with strong pressure and facilitating solid connections in structures such as beds, wardrobes or shelves.
                                                                                                    It is installed horizontally embedded in the wood and can be tightened from the inside by means of a bolt, without the need for visible access from the outside of the piece of furniture.
                                                                                                    This plunger model has an M6 thread and a total length of 14 mm, optimised to provide firmness without compromising the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                                                    It is made of steel with a zinc-plated finish, which gives it excellent mechanical strength and corrosion protection, ideal for environments with humidity or intensive use.
                                                                                                    The lot includes 2000 units, and due to their compact size it is recommended to keep them out of the reach of children to avoid accidents during handling in the workshop or warehouse.
                                                                                                    The nut is made of durable plastic with a translucent finish, which guarantees good tensile and compressive strength in panel connection systems. In addition, its design allows for durable fastening without the need for metallic materials.
                                                                                                    For precise fastening, it is recommended to drill a hole with a diameter of 5 mm and an exact depth of 11 mm. These dimensions ensure a tight fit of the nut body in the panel without creating play.
                                                                                                    Yes, this connection system is perfectly compatible with chipboard or MDF, provided that the diameter and depth of the housing are respected. Its recessed design facilitates installation in these materials without compromising the fastening.
                                                                                                    The outer part is designed to be flush with the board surface, avoiding interference with the mounting of adjacent parts. It is recommended to insert with manual pressure or by means of a controlled pressure mounting tool.
                                                                                                    The plastic nut jointing system is offered in batches of 5000 units, ideal for furniture manufacturers, industrial joinery and large assemblers looking for efficient solutions for continuous assembly lines.
                                                                                                    The nut is designed for use with screws and holes with a diameter of 3.5 mm. This assembly ensures optimum fixing when the part is pressed into boards that accept 16.6 mm diameter holes, allowing a firm and secure connection.
                                                                                                    The nut is installed by pressing it into a cylindrical hole with a depth of 13.3 mm, which corresponds exactly to the height of the nut. This depth ensures that the part is completely aligned with the board surface.
                                                                                                    The zinc-plated finish protects the steel nut against corrosion and rust, making it ideal for furniture applications in humid or heavy-duty environments. This surface treatment prolongs the life of the part and maintains its mechanical strength.
                                                                                                    This system is ideal for concealed or reinforcement joints in cabinet modules, wooden structures or assembled components where screw fixing from the inside is required without compromising the external aesthetics.
                                                                                                    The product is packaged in packs of 1250 units, which is suitable for large production runs or continuous assembly on assembly lines. This presentation allows cost and time optimisation in high volume projects.
                                                                                                    This nut is designed for use with M6 metric thread bolts, such as the M6x12 bolt. Its internal plastic ball system improves grip and clamping when the bolt is inserted.
                                                                                                    For correct installation, a Ø8 mm drill hole and a machining depth of 12 mm are required. These dimensions ensure a firm and secure fit inside the panel.
                                                                                                    The plastic ball acts as an expansion mechanism that presses against the walls of the bore when the bolt is inserted, generating high tensile strength and preventing loosening with use.
                                                                                                    It is ideal for applications where concealed, high strength fixing is required, such as furniture frames, cabinet assemblies, shelving or joints requiring occasional disassembly.
                                                                                                    Natural brass provides excellent mechanical and corrosion resistance and ensures a long service life. Its use facilitates precise machining without compromising the stability of the clamping system.
                                                                                                    Installation requires a pre-drilled hole in the wooden board with a diameter of 5.5x7.5 mm. Once the hole has been drilled, the nut is pressed in using standard hand tools, without the need for additional fastening systems.
                                                                                                    Natural brass stands out for its high resistance to corrosion and oxidation, even in conditions of high humidity or temperature, guaranteeing durability and reliability in structural joints in furniture.
                                                                                                    It is specifically designed for use with M4 metric bolts, providing a solid and precise hold in multiple applications within furniture assembly.
                                                                                                    Yes, natural brass offers hygienic and chemical resistant properties, making it suitable for applications in sectors such as hospitality, laboratories or sanitary facilities where a secure and durable fixing is required.
                                                                                                    The product is available in batches of 1,000 units, which is ideal for carpenters, manufacturers and distributors who require large volumes for their assembly processes or production line integration.
                                                                                                    The flat head allows the screw to be completely flush with the surface of the board, giving a clean and professional aesthetic finish, ideal for visible applications in melamine or chipboard furniture.
                                                                                                    This screw is ideal for fastening in materials such as melamine, MDF or chipboard, thanks to its 6 mm fine pitch thread that ensures a firm grip without damaging the structure of the board.
                                                                                                    With a length of only 17 mm and a design that allows the screw head to be concealed, this model minimises the risk of contact with protruding edges, making it suitable for furniture in spaces frequented by children.
                                                                                                    For a safe and precise installation, it is recommended to drill a 5 mm diameter hole beforehand, ensuring the correct insertion and fastening of the screw without damaging the material.
                                                                                                    Both finishes improve corrosion and rust resistance. Zinc plating offers a high degree of protection and durability, while nickel plating adds additional aesthetic value for more visible applications.
                                                                                                    This nut is specifically designed to be assembled with M6 threaded bolts, forming a robust and secure joining system for furniture panels.
                                                                                                    It has a grooved segment in the body that prevents unintentional twisting once inserted, ensuring a firm fit without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                    The nickel-plated finish significantly improves corrosion and wear resistance and offers a shiny aesthetic ideal for visible or high-end assemblies.
                                                                                                    The nut has a 29 mm long body and a 7.6 mm diameter insertion end. The head has a diameter of 14 mm and is cross-milled for ease of fitting.
                                                                                                    It is ideal for invisible joints between wooden panels or derivatives, as it allows the assembly from the edge of the boards, hiding the system and preserving the aesthetics of the furniture.
                                                                                                    For proper installation, this nut requires a 10 mm diameter hole. The knurled design on the outside of the nut improves the grip once it has been pressed in.
                                                                                                    The recommended minimum depth is 5.7 mm and the maximum depth is 6.95 mm, thus allowing a correct insertion of the nut without damaging the board material.
                                                                                                    This nut is compatible with screws, bolts or studs with metric M6 thread. Its internal thread must match the metric of the component to be fastened.
                                                                                                    It is made of high-strength, durable technical plastic with a semi-transparent finish for discreet and secure installation.
                                                                                                    The M6 nut connection system is available in packs of 2,500 pieces, ideal for series production or professional furniture assembly.
                                                                                                    The spiked design allows the nut to lock firmly into the board, preventing rotation and ensuring a stable fixing for levelling feet and bolts, even under vibration or continuous load.
                                                                                                    This nut is designed to be pressed into a 12 mm diameter hole, ensuring proper fit without the need for adhesives or additional reinforcement.
                                                                                                    The part is compatible with M6, M8 and M10 metric thread bolts, each with different dimensions. Be sure to select the appropriate metric nut for correct engagement.
                                                                                                    This nut is ideal for applications where robust fixing is required on furniture with adjustable legs or on structures subjected to vertical loads, thanks to its resistance to twisting and ease of assembly.
                                                                                                    The product is supplied in packs of 1000 units, facilitating its use in industrial projects, mass production or large technical furniture installations.
                                                                                                    This nut is designed for use with M8 threaded bolts, which have a diameter of 8 mm. The maximum depth of the nut body is 18 mm, which ensures a firm and secure fixing inside the board.
                                                                                                    For proper installation, a bore with a diameter of 20 mm is required, corresponding to the diameter of the nut's cap flange, which allows for proper fit and stability in the material.
                                                                                                    The 20 mm diameter hat brim design provides a larger bearing surface, making assembly easier and offering a better grip. This improves the stability of the assembly and reduces the risk of movement or misalignment.
                                                                                                    In addition to the insertion diameter, it is important to consider the body width (10.77 mm) and the body length (18 mm). These values determine the minimum housing depth and the appropriate board thickness.
                                                                                                    The product is packaged in 1,000 units, ideal for mass production or industrial applications. The finish is zinc-plated, which improves resistance to oxidation and adds to the durability of the component.
                                                                                                    The extra-flat 1.2 mm high head allows for almost flush fixing to the surface of the furniture, ensuring clean aesthetics and no protrusions that could interfere with adjacent components or decorative elements.
                                                                                                    These screws are available in lengths of 8, 10, 12, 20, 25, 30 and 40 mm, allowing the professional to select the most suitable size for the type of board or joint to be made.
                                                                                                    The nickel plated extra flat M4 bolt is designed to work in conjunction with the extra flat head M4 nut to form an efficient and discreet fastening system for panels or light metal structures.
                                                                                                    It is manufactured from hard-wearing steel with a nickel-plated finish, providing excellent resistance to corrosion and mechanical wear, making it ideal for prolonged use in demanding environments such as kitchens, offices and heavy duty furniture.
                                                                                                    The extra flat M4 screws are supplied in boxes of 2,000 units, representing an efficient solution for distributors, furniture manufacturers and industrial carpenters who require volume and consistency in their assembly projects.
                                                                                                    This M6 screw has a Ø14 mm head with cross milling, which allows an excellent fit with standard Phillips tools. This design ensures effective torque transmission and quick installation without slippage.
                                                                                                    Thanks to its metric thread and nickel-plated steel construction, this screw is designed for joining boards from the outside. It is ideal for visible joints in home or office furniture where a sturdy and aesthetically pleasing fastening is required.
                                                                                                    The M6 screw is available in lengths of 14 mm, 20 mm, 22 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm, adapting to different board thicknesses and jointing requirements. The 20 mm model is a versatile option for standard joints.
                                                                                                    The nickel-plated finish provides high resistance to corrosion and oxidation, extending the life of the screw even in wet or high exposure environments. It also enhances the aesthetics of the screw, giving it a shiny, professional finish.
                                                                                                    This screw is ideal for professional carpentry, assembly of modular furniture, demountable structures and all types of assemblies where a strong fixing from the outside is required without compromising the design of the furniture.
                                                                                                      The bumper is designed to fit into a 5 mm diameter hole, ensuring a precise and secure fit on wooden boards or similar.
                                                                                                      Can be installed in wood, MDF, chipboard or other soft materials where a clean 5 mm hole can be drilled without damaging the internal structure.
                                                                                                      The T-shaped design ensures a larger contact surface when closing doors or drawers, offering better impact absorption and reducing noise on delicate furniture.
                                                                                                      The semi-transparent finish allows discreet visual integration with different colours and finishes of furniture, without compromising strength or durability.
                                                                                                      It is ideal for precision carpentry, kitchen, bathroom or bedroom furniture, and especially useful on furniture with doors that require additional protection on their closure to prevent wear or direct impact.
                                                                                                      It is recommended to use a 5 mm diameter drill bit to ensure a perfect fit of the plug into the wood or board, without the need for additional adhesives.
                                                                                                      The grooves allow for a tighter and more secure fit in the orifice, preventing displacement with continued use and facilitating a more efficient retention function.
                                                                                                      Yes, it is designed to also act as a light impact absorber, reducing noise and protecting the furniture from wear and tear due to frequent closing.
                                                                                                      The plug is compatible with melamine boards as well as solid wood or MDF, provided the bore is clean and of the correct diameter.
                                                                                                      The product comes in packs of 1000 units, which makes it ideal for mass production projects, modular furniture or large-scale installations.
                                                                                                      These caps are designed to cover standard diameter visible head screws in furniture and are specifically compatible with screws with a head diameter of 13 mm.
                                                                                                      Yes, the caps are made of plastic with high quality adhesive that ensures a long-lasting fixation on all types of furniture surfaces, both in dry indoor and everyday environments.
                                                                                                      For optimal adhesion, it is recommended to clean and dry the surface where the cover will be applied, removing any dust, grease or residues that may interfere with the bonding.
                                                                                                      The batch of 1,000 caps is ideal for mass production processes or industrial installations, allowing a large number of screws to be covered with a professional, uniform and clean finish.
                                                                                                      According to the product description, this specific batch is in white, but the Emuca range of adhesive covers includes white, beech, oak, grey and black finishes, covering both classic and modern styles.
                                                                                                      Thanks to its self-adhesive backing, this bumper sticks easily to clean, dry melamine, glass, metal, wood or plastic surfaces without the need for tools or drilling.
                                                                                                      The semi-transparent finish allows the bumper to blend discreetly into furniture of any colour or texture, ensuring effective protection without compromising the aesthetic design of the furniture.
                                                                                                      It is ideal for use in assembly lines for cabinets and doors, especially in kitchens, bathrooms or office furniture, where damping of the closure or subtle separation between components that may generate contact noise is required.
                                                                                                      The 10 mm model offers more contact surface and impact absorption and is therefore recommended for larger or heavier doors. The 7 mm is more discreet and suitable for lower load or reduced visibility applications.
                                                                                                      The presentation in packs of 2500 units allows efficient replenishment in industrial processes, optimising production times and reducing costs per unit. Ideal for distributors, manufacturers and workshops with high turnover.
                                                                                                      This bumper needs to be fitted into a pre-machined hole of 5 mm diameter, located in the upper part of the furniture or structure where it is desired to cushion the impact or limit the opening.
                                                                                                      The semi-transparent plastic material guarantees high resistance to intensive use, as well as visually integrating into all types of design without interfering with the furniture finish. It is also ideal for environments where aesthetic discretion is required.
                                                                                                      Its main function is to act as an internal stop that prevents a door or panel from hitting directly against the structure of the furniture, helping to absorb impacts and reduce noise or wear due to closing.
                                                                                                      Yes, it is fully compatible, as its internal retention design helps to limit travel without interfering with automatic opening mechanisms. Ideal for smooth and controlled closures.
                                                                                                      Packaging in batches of 5000 units is designed for large production lines or distributors with high turnover. It reduces the need for frequent replenishment and optimises factory assembly times.
                                                                                                      Its main function is to protect the furniture from impacts generated by closing doors, in addition to dampening noise. It acts as an absorption element, preventing damage due to repeated use.
                                                                                                      The circular bumper head is designed in the shape of a knurled screw to improve the clamping when clamping. This shape allows for quick and firm installation into 6mm diameter holes without the need for adhesives.
                                                                                                      It is made of plastic with a white finish. This allows it to be easily integrated into most furniture, whether in kitchen interiors, bathrooms or general cupboards.
                                                                                                      It is supplied in industrial batches of 5000 units, which is ideal for carpentry shops, furniture factories and distributors who require large volumes of stock for continuous installations.
                                                                                                      Yes, its unobtrusive and universal design allows it to be installed as a complement to most swing door systems, either on standard hinges or in solutions with additional damping.
                                                                                                      For installation it is necessary to pre-drill a hole in the panel with a 4.5 mm diameter drill bit. Once the hole has been drilled, the bumper is pressed into the machined housing.
                                                                                                      This bumper is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, office and home furniture in general where an effective damping of the closing of doors is required, avoiding noise and damage to the material.
                                                                                                      It is made of durable semi-transparent plastic, which provides high durability and unobtrusive aesthetic integration into light or neutral-coloured furniture.
                                                                                                      The product is marketed in packs of 5,000 units, ideal for manufacturers, carpentry shops and distributors who require a high turnover in serial assembly processes.
                                                                                                      In addition to cushioning the locks, it acts as a protective element by preventing direct contact between the door and the body of the furniture, which reduces wear and tear and prolongs the service life of the hardware.
                                                                                                      They are ideal for flat surfaces such as wooden floors, ceramic, vinyl or even tempered glass, thanks to the adhesive on the bottom base.
                                                                                                      The hemispherical shape offers discreet and effective protection, distributing the impact better and preventing damage to both the door and the contact surface.
                                                                                                      Each top has a small diameter of 42 mm, making them compact and perfect for spaces where a visually discreet top is desired.
                                                                                                      Yes, they can be easily removed if the adhesive is pre-heated. This minimises the risk of leaving residue or damaging the floor.
                                                                                                      They are made of plastic with a transparent finish, offering durability, impact resistance and a visually unobtrusive design.
                                                                                                      It is installed by means of an adhesive base located at the bottom that is easily fixed to the floor without the need for tools.
                                                                                                      The cylindrical shape allows for uniform impact distribution and unobtrusive aesthetics, making it ideal for spaces where it is desirable to minimise the visibility of the stop.
                                                                                                      Each stop has a compact diameter of 42 mm, making them suitable for confined spaces, passageways and interior doors.
                                                                                                      They are suitable for flat surfaces such as ceramic, wood, parquet, vinyl or PVC.
                                                                                                      They are made of high-strength transparent plastic, combining durability with a virtually invisible design.
                                                                                                      To install the bumper it is necessary to carry out a machining of Ø5 mm and 10 mm deep, in this way the bumper is correctly embedded in the panel.
                                                                                                        An LED light may flicker for several reasons, in order to know the cause, you must:Check that the LED light is connected to the correct type of converter, constant voltage or constant intensity. Check that the power of the converter is not less than the total power of the LED lights connected to the converter. Check that that the converter is not overheating. The converter needs to have a suitable operating temperature. The operating temperature is printed on the converter.
                                                                                                        If an LED light switches on and then switches off, it is because the converter is overheating. The most common reasons for the converter to overheat are a lack of ventilation in the place of installation or excessive power delivery. In this case the converter is providing all or more of the power that it can give and we will need to replace it with a more powerful converter.
                                                                                                        In an installation for home furniture, lights and components must comply with a series of characteristics:They must have class II insulation, be protected against electric changes through direct and indirect contact, an earth connection is not necessary. Or they can have class III insulation, and should therefore not be connected to an earth connection. Also, they have to be able to be installed on surfaces with materials that are not known to be inflammable, such is the case with wood. Or, they should be suitable for installing on surfaces that are normally inflammable.
                                                                                                        IP (Ingress Protection Rating) is the name given to the index of a light or component to protect itself or not be damaged by dust or water. For example, the ideal lights for lighting bathrooms have IP44 protection. The first digit of the index is the protection from solids and the second digit of the index is protection from liquids. Protection from solids: IP0X: Without protection. IP1X: Protection from objects larger than 50mm, for example a hand. IP2X: Protection from objects larger than 12.5mm, for example a finger. IP3X: Protection from objects larger than 2.5mm, for example a screwdriver. IP4X: Protection from objects larger than 1 mm, for example a cable. IP5X: Protection from dust, limited intake allowed. IP6X: Protection from concentrations of dust. No dust intake is allowed. Protection from liquids: IPX0: Without protection. IPX1: Protection from the fall of vertical liquids, limited intake allowed. IPX2: Protection from the vertical fall of water with the product inclining at a 15° vertical angle, limited intake allowed. IPX3: Protection from water spray at a 60° vertical angle, limited intake allowed. IPX4: Protection from liquid splashes in all directions, limited intake allowed. IPX5: Protection from jets of water, limited intake allowed. IPX6: Protection from strong jets of water, limited intake allowed. IPX7: Protection for immersion of 15cm to 1 m for 30 min, no water intake is allowed. IPX8: Protection for continuous immersion underwater.
                                                                                                        IP20 is the name given to the index that a light or component has to protect itself from objects larger than 12.5 mm, but without protection against liquids. In this case, said lighting would be suitable for assembly in home furniture.
                                                                                                        The main difference between colour temperatures on lights is their Kelvin degrees and light colour. - The temperature of cool white is between 5,100 and 7,000 Kelvin and it has a blueish colour. - The temperature of the natural colour is between 4,000 and 5,000 Kelvin and it has a neutral colour. - The temperature of warm white is between 3,000 and 3,900 Kelvin and it has an orangey colour.
                                                                                                        It is important to ensure that the LED converter is compatible with the total power of the strip. For a safe installation, it is recommended to calculate the power consumption based on the 9.6W/m and add 20% extra capacity to the converter.
                                                                                                        Yes, the LED strip can be cut every 3 LEDs. Cut only at the designated marks with insulated scissors and protect the exposed ends with suitable connectors or seal them to prevent short circuits.
                                                                                                        The strip uses 3M™ 300LSE double-coated adhesive tape, which ensures strong and durable adhesion on clean, smooth surfaces. It is important to clean the surface with alcohol prior to installation for best results.
                                                                                                        It is recommended not to exceed 5 metres per line without the use of signal amplification to avoid voltage drops that may affect the uniformity of brightness.
                                                                                                        The IP20 rating is suitable for indoor use where it is not exposed to splashing water or excessive humidity. Ideal for furniture, shelving or indoor lighting.
                                                                                                        The Lynx H connector has a power capacity of 48W for 12V DC LED strips and 96W for 24V DC LED strips. It is compatible with 8mm wide LED strips, ideal for decorative and functional lighting.
                                                                                                        Installation of the connector is simple. The end of the LED strip is placed into the connector and locked by a click mechanism that secures the connection. This allows a quick and reliable connection between sections of LED strips.
                                                                                                        The Lynx H connector has dimensions of 8 mm wide, 24.5 mm long and 7.9 mm deep, making it compact and easy to integrate into tight spaces, ensuring compatibility with standard 8 mm wide LED strips.
                                                                                                        The connector has a strong adhesive tape on the underside to secure it to surfaces, ensuring stability and preventing displacement during use.
                                                                                                        Although no certifications are specified in the data sheet, the robust design and click mechanism ensure a safe and reliable electrical connection, suitable for domestic and professional applications.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Premium LED strip has an output of 9.6 W/m and a luminous efficacy of 94 lm/W. It provides a luminous flux of 910 lm/m, ideal for continuous lighting applications over long lengths.
                                                                                                        It is powered by a 24V DC power supply and requires an LED converter (not included). Installation is simple thanks to the 15 cm cables soldered at both ends of the 10 m roll, making it easy to connect.
                                                                                                        The strip is available in two colour temperatures: natural white (4,000 K) and warm white (2,700 K). It has an illumination angle of 120°, suitable for uniform and wide-range illumination.
                                                                                                        It is dimmable and can be cut every 100 mm to suit different needs. This allows the length to be customised according to available space or specific applications.
                                                                                                        It is manufactured with a double-layer PCB for durability and thermal efficiency. In addition, it includes a 3M® 300LSE adhesive tape, which ensures secure and stable attachment to a variety of surfaces.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Premium LED strip has an output of 14.4 W/m, providing a high light output. It is designed for applications requiring powerful and uniform illumination.
                                                                                                        It is available in three colour temperatures: cool white (6,000 K) ideal for work or commercial areas, natural white (4,000 K) for balanced and versatile environments, and warm white (3,000 K) for cosy or decorative environments.
                                                                                                        The strip can be cut every 50 mm, allowing precise customisation according to the needs of the space. Each segment includes 3 LEDs arranged at a distance of 16.7 mm, ensuring uniform illumination along the entire length.
                                                                                                        It is made of durable plastic, with a uniform thickness of 8 mm for easy handling and installation. The design exposes the LED spotlights, maximising their light output.
                                                                                                        It offers an IP20 protection level, which makes it suitable for indoors and places protected from excessive dust. It is not suitable for wet areas or outdoors without additional protection measures.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Q connector supports a maximum power of 36W for 12V DC LED strips and 72W for 24V DC LED strips. It is compatible with 8mm wide LED strips, ideal for decorative or functional applications.
                                                                                                        Installation of the connector is simple: insert the LED strip into the ends of the connector, making sure to respect the positive/negative orientation. When the strip is inserted correctly, a "click" sound is generated to confirm the connection.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Q connector has dimensions of 10.5 mm wide, 20.8 mm long and a compact design, making it suitable for projects requiring discreet and precise connections on 8 mm LED strips.
                                                                                                        It is made of durable plastic, providing safety and durability of the connection. Its design ensures a firm and reliable installation, even in environments where LED strips are frequently handled.
                                                                                                        This connector is suitable for both 12V and 24V LED lighting systems, making it versatile for residential, commercial and decorative applications requiring continuity in the LED strip circuit.
                                                                                                        The Lynx flat profile has a U-shaped design with dimensions of 20.2 mm horizontal width, 10.9 mm vertical height and 11.6 mm internal depth. It incorporates tabs and protrusions on the sides for easy installation and fastening of LED strips.
                                                                                                        It is made of matt anodised aluminium, a material that combines lightness with high corrosion resistance. The anodised finish provides a modern and elegant appearance, ideal for decorative and functional applications.
                                                                                                        The profile is available in two lengths: 2.35 metres and 3.9 metres, offering flexibility to suit projects of different sizes and configurations.
                                                                                                        The LED strips are held in place by the profile's internal protrusions, which allow the strips to be held firmly in place, preventing displacement and facilitating their aesthetic integration.
                                                                                                        This profile is ideal for recessed lighting projects in furniture, ceilings or walls, where a discreet and professional installation of LED strips is required, providing a clean and functional finish.
                                                                                                        The Lynx flat diffuser profile is designed to completely cover the LED strips, allowing partial light to pass through thanks to its opaque white finish. This softens the illumination and eliminates visible light spots for a more uniform effect.
                                                                                                        It has dimensions of 17.5 mm horizontal width and 5.7 mm vertical height, allowing it to perfectly cover standard LED strips while integrating unobtrusively into the design.
                                                                                                        The diffuser profile is available in lengths of 2.35 metres and 3.9 metres, providing options to suit different project sizes.
                                                                                                        It is made of plastic with an opaque white finish, which offers strength and a clean design, suitable for decorative and functional applications.
                                                                                                        The package includes 20 units of the diffuser profile, ready for use. It is ideal for recessed or surface lighting projects in furniture, showcases and ceilings, where homogeneous and aesthetic lighting is sought.
                                                                                                        The accessory for recessing in aluminium profile with curved diffuser improves the final finish of the mounting, providing a clean and aesthetic closure to the profile where the LED strips are installed.
                                                                                                        The dimensions of the fitting are 12.7 mm high, 23 mm wide and 16.5 mm long overall. It is designed to fit perfectly into the 20 mm wide and 10 mm high profile channel.
                                                                                                        It is made of grey plastic, which is strong, durable and easy to clean. This ensures good performance and a uniform appearance in the lighting system.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple: the fitting is placed in the profile channel and the electrical connection cable of the LED strips is passed through it. Finally, the curved diffuser is press-fitted to complete the assembly.
                                                                                                        The pack includes 20 units of the accessory, ideal for projects requiring aesthetic finishes on aluminium profiles with curved diffusers, such as furniture, showcases or decorative structures.
                                                                                                        The "L" joint allows two LED strips to be connected at right angles, facilitating installations in corners or designs that require 90° turns. It is useful in furniture, display cabinets and structures where changes in lighting direction are required.
                                                                                                        The junction supports 12V DC and 24V DC LED strips with a maximum power of 48W (12V) and 96W (24V), ensuring compatibility with a wide range of LED strips.
                                                                                                        The dimensions of the junction are 8 mm thick in the run and 19 mm long in each direction, making it compact and suitable for 8 mm wide LED strips.
                                                                                                        It is made of plastic for flexibility and durability. It includes an adhesive on the bottom to fix the connection firmly and avoid displacement during use.
                                                                                                        The pack includes 10 units of L-shaped connectors with IP20 certification, making them dustproof. They are ideal for indoor LED lighting projects that require secure and aesthetically pleasing connections.
                                                                                                        The inclined profile has dimensions of 25 mm horizontal x 18.4 mm vertical at its highest section. Its 30° inclination facilitates installation on horizontal surfaces, providing an optimum angle for indirect lighting. It is compatible with wood, MDF, and other rigid materials, provided that screws or adhesives suitable for the base material are used.
                                                                                                        Matt anodised aluminium has excellent heat dissipation properties, helping to maintain an optimum temperature in LED strips and prolonging their lifetime. This is especially important in installations with continuous use or in enclosed spaces.
                                                                                                        The profile is compatible with standard LED strips up to 10 mm wide. The internal tabs ensure a firm fit, preventing displacement even in case of vibrations or frequent handling.
                                                                                                        To fix the profile, it is recommended to use the specific brackets available or high-strength adhesives. On flat surfaces, the lower flanges allow direct fixing, while on uneven surfaces it is ideal to pre-level the installation area to ensure stability.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profile complies with standard manufacturing and anodising standards, ensuring durability and corrosion resistance, which are key factors in indoor LED lighting applications.
                                                                                                        The Lynx profile has dimensions of 2.35 m in length, 18 mm in width and 10.7 mm in height. These dimensions make it compatible with LED strips up to 10 mm wide, ensuring a safe installation and a perfect fit for various lighting projects.
                                                                                                        It is made of matt anodised aluminium, a corrosion and wear resistant material, ideal for indoor applications. The anodised finish provides modern aesthetics and additional protection against damage.
                                                                                                        To fix the profile, the use of screws through the aluminium plate is recommended. These must be suitable for the type of surface (wood, MDF, or metal). It is suggested to pre-drill the material to avoid deformations.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profile is compatible with diffuser caps that fit perfectly into the profile design. The covers are installed by fitting them onto the ends of the profile, ensuring that they fit tightly and allow the light to pass through evenly.
                                                                                                        It is recommended to periodically clean the profile with a dry or slightly damp cloth to remove accumulated dust. Avoid using abrasive products that may damage the anodised finish. This ensures greater durability and maintains the quality of the lighting.
                                                                                                        The fitting is 11.6 mm high, 23 mm wide overall, and 16.5 mm long, with a small overhang of 5 mm to facilitate fitting to the profile. These measurements ensure a precise fit and a professional aesthetic finish for the Lynx profile.
                                                                                                        The kit is made of grey plastic, an impact resistant, durable and easy to clean material. This plastic is ideal for furniture applications due to its ability to maintain its shape and colour over time.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple: first, the LED strip cable is fed through the hole in the fixture; then the fixture is snapped onto the profile, ensuring that it is fixed, and finally it is placed in the channel made in the furniture for a clean finish.
                                                                                                        This kit is specifically designed for the Lynx recessed profile, ensuring perfect compatibility. It is not recommended for use with other profiles that do not belong to the same range.
                                                                                                        For maintenance, it is suggested to clean the accessory with a soft cloth and non-abrasive products to avoid damaging the finish. This will help to preserve both its functionality and aesthetic appearance for a longer period of time.
                                                                                                        The fixings are installed by screwing them directly to the furniture in the desired position. Once in place, the Lynx slanting profile snaps into place over the fixings, ensuring a firm and stable hold.
                                                                                                        The kit allows the electrical connection of the LED strips in three ways: under the side cover, through a hole at a 90 degree angle, or through the back of the profile. It is recommended to use a drill to drill the necessary holes in the profile, ensuring that the wiring is properly insulated and protected.
                                                                                                        All components are made of durable plastic, a lightweight and durable material that guarantees long-term performance. In addition, the grey finish provides a clean, unobtrusive look that matches the design of the profile.
                                                                                                        Yes, both side covers and fasteners can be reused in the event of removal or relocation, provided they are kept in good condition. This makes them ideal for projects requiring flexibility.
                                                                                                        The kit includes screws compatible with surfaces such as wood, MDF and other similar materials. The screws are designed to facilitate assembly, providing a secure fixing and preventing damage to the base material.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Basic LED strip has an output of 9.6 W/m, an efficiency of 69 lumens per watt and a total of 120 LEDs per metre. These specifications ensure uniform and high quality illumination for decorative or functional applications.
                                                                                                        The IP65 certification ensures that the LED strip is dust and splash water resistant, making it ideal for indoor applications and semi-covered areas such as kitchens, bathrooms or furniture that may be exposed to occasional moisture.
                                                                                                        The LED strip can be cut at marked intervals, usually every 25 mm, to suit the desired length. Connections can be made using specific connectors for LED strips or by soldering wires to the exposed contact points, ensuring adequate insulation.
                                                                                                        Cool white light (6000K) is ideal for environments where brighter and more functional lighting is desired, such as offices, kitchens or work areas. Warm white light (3000K) is more suitable for cosy environments, such as living rooms or bedrooms, where you want to create a relaxing atmosphere.
                                                                                                        For installation, it is recommended to use the adhesive tape included on the back of the strip, which is suitable for smooth and clean surfaces. In case of textured or difficult to adhere surfaces, additional fixings such as clips or aluminium profiles can be used to ensure a firm installation.
                                                                                                        The side covers are easily fitted to the ends of the Lynx profile using the screws included in the kit. Once fixed, the LED strip cables are passed through the designed space and the profiles are snapped into place.
                                                                                                        The kit includes screws suitable for mounting on surfaces such as wood, MDF and other similar materials. The screws are designed to provide a firm and stable fixing.
                                                                                                        The side covers are made of durable grey plastic, which ensures durability and ease of cleaning, as well as providing an aesthetic finish that blends in with the design of the profile and furniture.
                                                                                                        Yes, both covers and screws can be reused if the profile is dismantled or relocated, provided the components are in good condition. This makes them ideal for flexible or temporary installations.
                                                                                                        This kit improves the aesthetics of installations by covering the ends of the profile, providing a clean and professional finish. It also facilitates cable management and ensures that the profile stays in place with easy installation.
                                                                                                        Yes, it can be cut every 63 mm. It also shows cutting marks in one of the strip sides, since it has a more transparent area where the darker side shows the cutting areas. Since the strip has cables on the two sides, each strip has to be cut in 2 pieces, to have a cable on each side. If you need additional cuts, the waste can be used connecting the strip with the 8 mm Lynx Q or the Lynx H cable or by welding the strip.
                                                                                                        The Neonlynx LED strip has an output of 7.6 W/m, an efficiency of 49 lumens per watt, and 126 LEDs per metre. These features provide uniform, high quality illumination, ideal for both decorative and functional applications.
                                                                                                        The IP65 certification ensures that the LED strip is dust and water resistant, making it suitable for installations in wet locations such as bathrooms, kitchens or semi-covered areas. This ensures durability even under splashing conditions.
                                                                                                        La tira puede cortarse en intervalos marcados de 63 mm para adaptarse a las necesidades del proyecto. Los cortes deben realizarse con herramientas adecuadas para evitar daños, y las conexiones pueden hacerse utilizando conectores miniled, asegurando un correcto aislamiento.
                                                                                                        A 24V DC LED converter with sufficient capacity to handle the total power of the installed LED strip is recommended. For example, for a 3 metre roll (22.8 W), a converter that handles at least this power with an additional safety margin is required.
                                                                                                        The strip is made of high quality silicone, which ensures colour temperature stability and resistance to humid environments. This flexible material also allows installations in curved or straight shapes, increasing the possibilities of design and durability.
                                                                                                        This extension cable is suitable for connecting LED luminaires compatible with 12V DC and 24V DC systems. Its design ensures a stable electrical flow, maximising performance and preventing overloading of the connected luminaires.
                                                                                                        To install the cable, connect the male MINILED connector end to the converter and the female end to the luminaire. Make sure that the connectors are tight and that the polarity is correct before switching on the system.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to extend more than 2 metres using additional cables. It is recommended to use good quality, secure connectors and to verify that the system can support the additional distance without loss of voltage or power.
                                                                                                        MINILED connectors guarantee a firm and simple connection, preventing accidental disconnection. Each connector is polarised to ensure correct power transmission and avoid damage to the luminaires or the converter.
                                                                                                        During installation, avoid excessive bending or mechanical stress on the cable. Be sure to keep it away from sources of heat and excessive humidity to ensure its durability and safety in the electrical system.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Premium LED strip has an output of 4.8 W/m, a luminous flux of 539 lm/m and an efficiency of 112 lm/W. These features ensure efficient and high quality lighting in interior spaces.
                                                                                                        3M Adhesive Tape 300LSE provides a strong and durable hold, allowing the LED strip to adhere securely to smooth, clean surfaces, facilitating quick installation without the need for additional brackets.
                                                                                                        The LED strip can be cut at the marked intervals of 3 LEDs. It is recommended to use sharp scissors or specific cutters for LED strips, making sure to cut on the indicated marks in order not to damage the circuits.
                                                                                                        Thanks to its IP20 certification, this LED strip is ideal for indoor applications where there is no exposure to moisture or water, such as furniture, shelves, offices or work areas.
                                                                                                        A 12V DC LED converter is required. To calculate its capacity, multiply the power of the strip (4.8 W/m) by the total length of the installation. For example, for a 5 metre strip, a converter is required to support at least 24 W, with an additional margin for safety.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is totally compatible. Also, if they need a straight H joint of 8 mm (code 5061120), it may also be used because it is compatible with LED strip profiles and diffusers.
                                                                                                        The Lynx H cable is compatible with 8mm LED strips thanks to its compact design and specific MINILED connectors. In addition, it supports 12V DC (up to 36W) and 24V DC (up to 72W) systems, offering versatility in different applications.
                                                                                                        MINILED connectors provide a simple and secure connection by avoiding the need for soldering. Their design ensures a tight fit and prevents accidental disconnection during use.
                                                                                                        The transparent finish of the connector minimises interference with the luminous flux, allowing discreet integration with LED strips and enhancing the aesthetics of the installation.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to use this cable in longer lengths by connecting it to other compatible cables. However, it is recommended to ensure that the additional length does not cause a significant voltage drop that will affect the performance of the LED strips.
                                                                                                        During installation, the power supply must be disconnected and the correct polarity checked before making connections. In addition, avoid excessive bending of the cable or exposing it to mechanical stress to preserve its integrity.
                                                                                                        You can calculate the maximum power if you know the supply voltage of the 24V LED Lynx strips (24V DC) and the maximum amperage admitted by the Lynx H 24V cable (they are 3A). We calculate it with the following formula: Power (W) = Voltage (V) x Amperage (A)Example: P(W)= 24V x 3A = 72W, with the maximum power it can connect with the Lynx H 24V cable is 72W at 24V DC.
                                                                                                        The Lynx curved diffuser profile has a height of 17.4 mm, a width of 15.4 mm and a thickness of 5.9 mm. These dimensions allow the diffuser to fit perfectly over LED strips and to be securely clamped into the corresponding profile tabs.
                                                                                                        The transparent-opaque plastic provides homogeneous light diffusion, reducing glare and shadows, while hiding the direct view of the LEDs. This enhances aesthetics and creates a soft and pleasant illumination.
                                                                                                        Installation consists of placing the diffuser on the profile that houses the LED strip. This is done by pressure using the tabs of the profile as a support. No additional tools are required, but it is recommended to clean the surfaces before installation.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profile can be cut to size using tools such as precision saws or plastic cutters. It is important to make clean cuts and avoid edge damage to ensure a good fit.
                                                                                                        The curved design of the diffuser optimises light distribution, creating a more uniform effect and reducing bright spots. This makes it ideal for decorative and functional applications in furniture or interior spaces.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Basic LED strip is ideal for applications in furniture, shelving, work or decorative areas, where efficient and uniform illumination is needed. Its high efficiency makes it suitable for projects that require low energy consumption with excellent light quality.
                                                                                                        Cool white light (6000K) is perfect for functional spaces such as kitchens or offices, natural white light (4500K) offers balanced lighting ideal for living or sleeping areas, while warm light (3000K) is suitable for creating cosy atmospheres, such as in bedrooms or living rooms.
                                                                                                        Before installing the LED strip, it is recommended to clean the surface with a dry or slightly damp cloth to remove dust and grease. Make sure the surface is dry and smooth to maximise adhesion of the 3M tape.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to combine several rolls of LED strip by connecting them in series or in parallel. For this, compatible connectors must be used or the connection points must be soldered. Make sure that the LED converter has sufficient capacity to support the total combined power.
                                                                                                        To maintain the performance of the LED strip, clean it regularly with a dry cloth and avoid exposing it to moisture or excessive heat. Periodically check electrical connections to ensure safe and efficient operation.
                                                                                                        You can calculate the amperage of an installation if you know the feed voltage of 24 V LED Lynx (24V DC) and the power you wish to install. We calculate the data with the following formula: Amperage (A) = Power (W) / Voltage (V)Example: A= 72W / 24V = 3A, so the maximum power I can connect is 72W to 24V DC without exceeding the 3A admitted by 24V Lynx H cable.
                                                                                                        The Lynx recessed profile has a length of 2.35 m or 2.9 m, a width of 20 mm and a height of 10 mm. These dimensions allow standard LED strips up to 10 mm wide to be accommodated, ensuring a safe and efficient installation.
                                                                                                        The matt anodised finish provides increased resistance to corrosion and wear, ensuring the durability of the profile. It also enhances the aesthetics of the assembly with a modern and professional look.
                                                                                                        The profile is installed by embedding it in a piece of furniture by means of a recess or groove previously made with a milling machine or precision drill. The LED strip is then fitted, connected to the electrical system and the profile is closed with a diffuser cap, if applicable.
                                                                                                        This profile is compatible with most standard LED strips up to 10mm wide. It is recommended to use LED strips that offer a uniform luminous flux to maximise visual results.
                                                                                                        For a correct fit, make sure that the recess or groove has the correct dimensions. In addition, make all electrical connections before completely fixing the profile and use a suitable power converter to avoid overloading.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Premium LED Strip is suitable for both indoor and outdoor use thanks to its IP65 certification, which protects it against dust and splashes, and its slim 8mm design that makes it easy to install in tight spaces.
                                                                                                        IP65 certification ensures that the strip is dust and moisture resistant, making it ideal for bathrooms, kitchens or semi-covered areas, guaranteeing long-lasting performance in these conditions.
                                                                                                        To cut the LED strip, use sharp tools and cut at the indicated marks. When connecting segments, use specific connectors for LED strips or safe soldering, making sure to maintain correct polarity and protect the connections with adequate insulation.
                                                                                                        When combining several LED strips, it is essential to calculate the total power and select a 12V DC converter that can handle the load. It is also recommended to check the continuity of the connections to ensure smooth operation.
                                                                                                        To keep the LED strip in optimal condition, clean it with a dry cloth and avoid using abrasive products. Periodically inspect the electrical connections and ensure that the strip is installed on a clean and stable surface.
                                                                                                        The kit includes 3 clips to attach the aluminium profile to the cabinet and 2 side caps to close the ends, providing a secure installation and a professional aesthetic finish. The clips are placed over the LED strip in the trunking and hold the profile securely in place.
                                                                                                        This kit is specifically designed for the Lynx flat diffuser profile and is not compatible with other profile models in the Lynx range. Its design ensures a perfect fit with the corresponding profile.
                                                                                                        The brackets are fixed directly to the furniture channel. It is important to ensure that they are correctly aligned and securely fastened before the aluminium profile is pressed onto them.
                                                                                                        The kit's parts are made of durable grey plastic, which ensures durability and an unobtrusive appearance that matches different furniture designs. This material is also easy to clean and maintain.
                                                                                                        For a professional finish, first make the trunking in the cabinet to the precise measurements, fit the clips and LED strip in position, and finally fit the aluminium profile and side covers to complete the installation.
                                                                                                        Warm light (3000K) creates a cosy and relaxing atmosphere, ideal for bedrooms or living rooms. Daylight (4000K) is versatile and suitable for balanced spaces such as offices or rest areas. Cool light (6000K) offers more brightness, ideal for kitchens, workshops or work areas.
                                                                                                        Before installing the LED strip, clean the surface with a dry or slightly damp cloth to remove dust and grease. Make sure it is dry and smooth to maximise adhesion of the 3M tape.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to connect several LED strips in series or in parallel. However, the total power of the strips must be calculated and a 12V DC converter with sufficient capacity must be used to avoid overloading. It is also recommended to check the continuity of the connections.
                                                                                                        To keep the LED strip in optimal condition, periodically wipe it with a dry cloth and avoid exposing it to moisture or excessive heat. Inspect electrical connections regularly to ensure safe operation.
                                                                                                        The high efficiency of 124 lm/W makes it possible to illuminate large spaces with lower energy consumption, reducing electricity costs and providing uniform, high quality lighting. This is especially beneficial in projects with continuous use.
                                                                                                        The minimum hole diameter to be made is 7 mm for the male Miniled connector to go through. If you have a female connector, the hole has to be 9 mm.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The Lynx W diffuser profile is designed with precise dimensions to perfectly fit 8 mm wide LED strips, ensuring a secure installation and a movement-free fit within the Lynx W aluminium profiles.
                                                                                                        The translucent polycarbonate material allows for an even distribution of light, eliminating visible light spots and creating homogeneous illumination. It is also strong, durable and easy to clean.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Lynx W diffuser profile can be cut to size. For a clean and precise cut, it is recommended to use a fine-toothed saw or a specific cutting tool for polycarbonate.
                                                                                                        This diffuser profile is ideal for applications in home furniture, offices, kitchens and bedrooms, where integrated and discreet lighting is desired. It is perfect for cabinets, shelves and under kitchen furniture.
                                                                                                        By using the Lynx W diffuser profile, the light from the LED strips is evenly distributed, eliminating glare and improving the aesthetics of the lighting project. This results in soft and professional lighting in any space.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        To install the Lynx W profile, the furniture must be machined to a width of 14 mm and a depth of 11 mm. These dimensions guarantee a perfect and secure fit of the profile.
                                                                                                        The aluminium profile with painted or anodised finish offers high resistance to corrosion and wear. In addition, its finish enhances the aesthetics and can be combined with different styles of furniture.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Lynx W profile can be cut to size. It is recommended to use a thin-cutting saw or aluminium specific tools to obtain a clean cut and avoid deformation.
                                                                                                        This profile is ideal for lighting projects in kitchen furniture, wardrobes, offices and bedrooms. Its design allows discreet integration of LED strips, providing functional and decorative lighting.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W profile is designed to be compatible with Lynx Q and Z sensors and cables, ensuring easy installation and optimal operation of the lighting system.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W surface-mounted profile is installed using screws directly into the furniture. It is recommended to use a drill for pre-drilling and a screwdriver to tighten the screws.
                                                                                                        The painted or anodised finish provides corrosion resistance and high quality aesthetics. This makes it ideal for projects where design and durability are important.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profile can be cut to size. To ensure a clean cut, it is recommended to use a fine-toothed saw or a specialised aluminium tool and to protect the edges of the profile with adhesive tape during cutting.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W profile is compatible with 8 mm wide LED strips and accessories such as Lynx Q and Z sensors and cables, ensuring simple and functional integration.
                                                                                                        This profile is ideal for lighting projects in kitchen furniture, wardrobes, offices and bedrooms, offering a decorative and functional solution for surface lighting.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The fittings are designed as end caps for the Lynx W profile, providing a uniform finish and concealing visible connections. They also facilitate cable routing thanks to their grooved design.
                                                                                                        These fittings are small enough to integrate perfectly with 8mm wide LED profiles and strips and are compatible with Lynx Q and Z sensors and cables.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple: just insert the end caps into the ends of the Lynx W profile and feed the cables through the groove of the fitting. This ensures a tidy and functional electrical connection.
                                                                                                        They are available in white, black and grey finishes, allowing them to be combined with different styles of furniture to maintain a homogeneous aesthetic.
                                                                                                        These fixtures are ideal for home, office and bedroom furniture applications where integrated lighting and discreet, professional finishes are required.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W accessory kit includes two side covers and mounting screws. Their main function is to provide a uniform finish to the Lynx W surface profile and to facilitate the cable routing of the LED strips.
                                                                                                        The fixtures are designed for 8 mm wide LED strips, with a small footprint for perfect fit and easy integration into Lynx Q and Z profiles and systems.
                                                                                                        The lower cable outlet, equipped with a groove, allows the cables to be routed neatly and safely, facilitating the electrical connection and improving the aesthetics of the project.
                                                                                                        The accessories are available in white, black and grey finishes, offering versatility to match different furniture styles and maintain a cohesive design.
                                                                                                        Yes, installation is simple and requires no specialised tools. The package includes the screws required to attach the covers to the Lynx W surface profile, ensuring a quick and secure installation.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        COB (Chip On Board) technology eliminates visible spots in the light, providing uniform and continuous illumination, ideal for applications where an aesthetic and homogeneous finish is required.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Premium COB LED Strip requires a 24V DC converter for installation. This voltage ensures correct operation and efficient performance.
                                                                                                        The LED strip can be cut every 55.5 mm, allowing precise customisation to suit the needs of each project, maximising material utilisation.
                                                                                                        It is ideal for applications in built-in or surface furniture, especially in projects requiring continuous or curved lines, thanks to its flexibility and adaptability.
                                                                                                        The strip is made of a double-layer PCB and 3M® 300LSE adhesive tape, which guarantees a strong and stable fixation on aluminium surfaces or other compatible materials.
                                                                                                        Yes, they are compatible with all the accessories. Please note: Lynx Premium and Basic LED strips of 4.8 W/m, 9.6 W/m and 14.4 W/m are 8 mm wide, while the Lynx Premium LED strip of 28.8 W/m is 10 mm wide.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Z connector is compatible with LED strips operating at 12V DC or 24V DC, providing flexibility for different lighting applications.
                                                                                                        Its small dimensions make it perfect for joining 8 mm wide LED strips, ensuring an unobtrusive and efficient installation.
                                                                                                        The connector offers a solid and strong connection thanks to its metal connectors, designed to provide a secure and durable connection.
                                                                                                        The transparent finish minimises the reduction of luminous flux, allowing uniform illumination without visible interference in the final design.
                                                                                                        No additional tools are required to install the Lynx Z connector. The connection is made quickly and easily by aligning the LED strips and fitting them into the connector.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Z LED cable supports a maximum power rating of 36W at 12V DC (3A) and 72W at 24V DC (3A), offering versatility for various lighting configurations.
                                                                                                        The integrated MiniLED connector allows quick and secure connections without the need for additional tools, optimising installation time.
                                                                                                        The transparent finish minimises the reduction of luminous flux, ensuring uniform illumination without visual interference.
                                                                                                        This cable is compatible with 8mm wide LED strips, making it ideal for projects that use Lynx W profiles and require discreet and efficient connections.
                                                                                                        It is important to ensure that the connections are correctly aligned and that the ends are securely snapped into the MiniLED connector to avoid disconnection or loss of electrical signal.
                                                                                                        Yes, they are compatible with all the aluminium and diffuser profiles for LED strips.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W recessed profile requires 14 mm width and 11 mm depth machining in the cabinet for proper installation.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W diffuser profile is made of polycarbonate, which homogenises the light and eliminates visible spots, ensuring uniform illumination.
                                                                                                        This profile set is compatible with 8mm wide LED strips and is ideal for lighting projects in home furniture, offices, wardrobes and bedrooms.
                                                                                                        The recessed profile is made of aluminium with a matt RAL 9016 finish, while the diffuser profile is made of polycarbonate, materials that offer high durability and resistance to wear and tear.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profile can be cut to size. It is recommended to use a thin-cutting saw or a specialised aluminium tool for precise and clean cuts.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W surface profile set is installed by screwing it directly onto the surface of the furniture. It is a simple process that requires no additional machining.
                                                                                                        The Lynx W diffuser profile is made of polycarbonate, which allows a uniform diffusion of light, eliminating visible spots and providing homogeneous illumination.
                                                                                                        This profile set is compatible with 8mm wide LED strips and Lynx Q and Z sensors and cables, making it ideal for multiple lighting projects.
                                                                                                        The profiles are made of aluminium with matt finish RAL 9016 and polycarbonate, materials that guarantee high wear resistance and a long-lasting aesthetic appearance.
                                                                                                        Yes, profiles can be cut to size. It is recommended to use tools such as thin-cutting saws or specialised tools for aluminium and polycarbonate to obtain clean and precise cuts.
                                                                                                        You can calculate the maximum power if you know the supply voltage of the LED strips (12V DC) and the power that you want to install using the following formula: Amps (A) = Power (W) / Voltage (V)Example: A= 48W / 12Va A= 4AThe maximum power that I can connect is 48W at 12V DC.
                                                                                                        To install the Lynx profile set, a 20 mm wide and 11 mm deep cut-out in the cabinet is required.
                                                                                                        End caps for the profiles are not included in the kit and must be purchased separately.
                                                                                                        The matt anodised finish provides a corrosion and wear resistant surface, as well as an elegant and uniform appearance.
                                                                                                        Yes, profiles can be cut to size. It is recommended to use an aluminium thin-cutting saw or a specialised cutting tool to ensure precision and clean edges.
                                                                                                        Once the profile has been machined, it is embedded in the furniture. It does not require additional screws for fastening, as it is secured by pressure or tightening.
                                                                                                        The Lynx surface profile set is installed by screwing the aluminium profile directly to the surface of the furniture, which ensures simple and fast installation.
                                                                                                        The curved diffuser profile is 17.4 mm wide and 4.4 mm high, while the aluminium profile is 18 mm wide and 10.7 mm high. Both have a length of 2.35 m.
                                                                                                        End caps are not included in the kit and must be purchased separately if a more aesthetic finish is required.
                                                                                                        The matt anodised finish provides increased wear resistance, corrosion resistance and a modern and elegant look that suits different furniture designs.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profiles can be adjusted to specific dimensions by cutting them with specialised tools, such as a thin-cutting saw for aluminium or a precision hand-held cutting tool, ensuring clean, burr-free edges.
                                                                                                        No, it is only compatible for 8 mm wide LED strips
                                                                                                        The Lynx surface inclined profile set is compatible with 8 mm wide LED strips, ideal for decorative and functional lighting systems.
                                                                                                        The included aluminium profile has a slanted design that facilitates the orientation of the light towards the interior of the furniture or installation area, optimising the illumination.
                                                                                                        Yes, the curved diffuser profile is designed to homogenise the light emitted by the LED strips, eliminating visible spots and achieving uniform illumination.
                                                                                                        For installation, we recommend tools such as an electric screwdriver to screw the profile to the furniture and a thin-cutting saw to adjust the length of the profile if necessary.
                                                                                                        No, the kit does not include screws. These must be purchased separately to complete the assembly of the profiles on the furniture surface.
                                                                                                        No, only the Lynx H cables and connectors that are 8 mm wide are compatible with aluminium and diffuser profiles for LED strips.
                                                                                                        You can calculate the maximum power if you know the supply voltage of the LED strips (12V DC) and the power that you want to install using the following formula: Amps (A) = Power (W) / Voltage (V)Example: A= 60W / 12Va A= 5AThe maximum power that I can connect is 60W at 12V DC.
                                                                                                        The maximum recommended length of the installation of LED strips is indicated in our catalogue with a symbol on each LED strip. The table outlines the maximum recommended length if the power supply is only provided via one length (a converter). It also outlines the maximum recommended length if the power supply is provided via both ends (two converters) that multiply by two. Please note: To power the strip via both ends you need to create a special connection. Look up how can to ensure that the LED strip has the same brightness all along it.
                                                                                                        Download document
                                                                                                        LED strip cut length: The Lynx Premium LED strip can be cut every 3 LEDs (2.5 cm), which allows it to be adapted to different dimensions of furniture or cabinets.
                                                                                                        Operation of the DOOR and SWITCH sensors: DOOR Sensor: Detects the opening or closing of doors to automatically switch the lighting on or off. SWITCH sensor: Activated when you pass your hand over its detection range, allowing tactile control.
                                                                                                        Energy efficiency of the LED strip: The LED strip has an output of 9.6W/m and an efficiency of 84 lm/W, offering a luminous flux of 805 lm/m and uniform illumination with no visible spots.
                                                                                                        Input voltage compatibility: The kit includes converters that accept input voltages from 100-240V AC (50-60 Hz) and generate a constant 12V DC output, making it compatible with different markets.
                                                                                                        Ideal surfaces for installation: This kit is designed to be installed in wooden furniture, cabinets, or any flat surface where automatic lighting is needed. Its compact profile is ideal for indoor spaces.
                                                                                                        The Neonlynx LED strip is 6 mm wide and 6 mm deep, allowing for complete integration into furniture. It is available in lengths of 1, 3 and 5 m, with a flexible design that supports curved or straight shapes.
                                                                                                        Yes, thanks to its IP65 protection rating, the strip is water-resistant and suitable for installation in damp or outdoor locations.
                                                                                                        It requires a 24V DC power supply, for which an LED converter is necessary and is not included in the supply.
                                                                                                        The Neonlynx LED strip has an efficiency of 87lm/W and 90lm/W, emits a luminous flux of 210 lumens per metre, and has a power of 7.2 W/m.
                                                                                                        The converter is connected via the pre-installed power cable at both ends. The strip includes adhesive tape and fixing clips for installation on boards and does not require soldering thanks to its optimised design.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The Neonlynx H LED strip uses high quality silicone, which maintains light uniformity, protects against moisture and helps control colour temperature variation.
                                                                                                        It can be cut every 33 mm, which allows great versatility to adjust it to any size required in the installation.
                                                                                                        No additional connectors are included, but the strip has 1.5m power cables at both ends for easy connection.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is compatible with dimmer systems, optimising energy consumption according to the user's needs.
                                                                                                        In order to control the RGB LED strip you need an RGB controller with a radio frequency remote control. If in the facility there are two controllers they can both be controlled with a single remote as all the controllers have the same frequency.
                                                                                                        In order to choose the correct converted for an LED strip it is necessary to: - Know the type of converter that corresponds to the LED strip. In our catalogue we indicate on each light the type of converter or transformer that must be used with a series of icons. - Find out the total power required of the converter (6 W, 15 W, 30W, 50W, 72W, 100W, 200W). In order to calculate the power of a specific length of strip, it is necessary to know what the total power of the 5m roll is (our sale unit) and what is the length of it that we need for installation. For example:If a 5 m strip (a roll) has a power of 24 W and I need will be for the installation a 2 m strip: X= (2m x 24W) / 5m = 9,6W Therefore, I will choose the 15W converter. Attention, it is necessary to add up the consumption amounts of the different strip accessories if they are included in the fitting.
                                                                                                        Lynx Premium COB LED strip provides uniform illumination with no visible LED spots, ideal for creating continuous lines of light in decorative and functional applications.
                                                                                                        The strip requires a 12V DC LED converter for operation, as it is not included in the scope of delivery.
                                                                                                        The LED strip can be cut into segments every 25 mm, making it easy to customise according to the available space and installation.
                                                                                                        It is available in colour temperatures of 6,000K (cool white) and 2,700K (warm white), allowing it to adapt to different environments.
                                                                                                        It is manufactured on a double-layer PCB and equipped with 3M® 300LSE adhesive tape, which guarantees excellent adhesion to different surfaces and high durability.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Q LED cable supports a maximum load capacity of 12V DC - 3A (36W Max) and 24V DC - 3A (72W Max) and is compatible with MiniLED connections.
                                                                                                        This cable is designed with reduced dimensions to join 8 mm wide LED strips, ensuring a perfect fit and functionality.
                                                                                                        Its length is 1.5 m, which facilitates installation in different configurations, providing flexibility in lighting projects.
                                                                                                        The built-in connector allows for quick, easy and secure connection, reducing installation time and eliminating the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                        Yes, Lynx Q cable is fully compatible with Lynx W profiles and similar LED lighting systems, ensuring versatility in projects.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with Lynx 8mm wide LED strips and accessories such as Lynx Q and Z sensors and cables.
                                                                                                        Requires machining in the cabinet with a width of 14 mm and a depth of 11 mm.
                                                                                                        The side covers are made of white plastic, and the diffuser profile of white polycarbonate which homogenises the light. The recessed profile is made of painted or anodised aluminium, depending on the model.
                                                                                                        No, the LED strip is not included in the set.
                                                                                                        The bars are supplied in a length of 2.35 m, in a cardboard tube together with the side covers.
                                                                                                        Yes, the aluminium profile as well as the diffuser profile and side covers can be cut to the desired length using suitable tools, such as a hand saw or an aluminium cutter. This allows the system to be adapted to any length required for the installation.
                                                                                                        It does not affect the intensity significantly, but it does improve light distribution by avoiding bright spots, providing a more uniform and pleasant illumination.
                                                                                                        To install the profile, a screwdriver is required to fix the included screws, as well as a saw to cut the profile to size if necessary. A suitable drill bit is also recommended in case it is necessary to drill holes for cable routing.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profile design includes enough space to accommodate the connection cables to keep the installation tidy and unobtrusive, ideal for furniture and visible surfaces.
                                                                                                        Yes, the profile is made of aluminium and plastic, which makes it resistant to high humidity environments. However, it is recommended to use LED strips with adequate protection (such as IP65 or higher) to ensure the durability of the system in wet areas.
                                                                                                        The Lynx Z LED L-junction is compatible with 8mm wide SMD, COB and SOB LED strips in both 12V DC and 24V DC.
                                                                                                        This accessory allows LED strips to be connected at a 90° angle, offering solutions for corners or specific designs.
                                                                                                        It supports up to 5A of current throughput, reaching power ratings of 60W in 12V DC systems and 120W in 24V DC systems.
                                                                                                        It is made of transparent plastic, which avoids the generation of dark areas and improves the aesthetics of the assembly. In addition, it includes a metal lock that secures the connection and withstands high tensile forces without disconnecting.
                                                                                                        The package contains 1 L-joint specifically designed for easy corner connections of LED lighting systems.
                                                                                                        This fixture is compatible with 8mm wide SMD, COB and SOB LED strips, operating on 12V DC and 24V DC systems.
                                                                                                        It allows different shapes with bending angles from 0° to 180°, facilitating its use in complex installations or corners.
                                                                                                        The cable supports a current throughput of up to 5A, reaching power ratings of 60W at 12V DC and 120W at 24V DC.
                                                                                                        It stands out for its metal lock, which secures the connection to prevent disconnection, and its transparent plastic construction, which eliminates areas of darkness. In addition, it has a 50 mm long cable with differentiated colours to identify polarities.
                                                                                                        The package includes 1 x 50mm flexible Lynx Z LED cable, ready to be used for LED strip installation.
                                                                                                        The SOB Free-cut 8x3mm LED strip has a high-strength 3M® double-sided adhesive, ideal for installation on flat, clean surfaces. Application on aluminium, lacquered wood, glass or non-porous surfaces is recommended to ensure optimal fixation. For rough or textured surfaces, the use of aluminium profiles with structural adhesive is suggested.
                                                                                                        The LED strip can be cut every 6.9 mm without affecting its operation. For connection, we recommend using Lynx-Z Miniled cable, which allows for a secure connection without the need for soldering. This minimises material waste and facilitates installation in confined spaces.
                                                                                                        It complies with IP20 safety regulations, which means that it is protected against solid objects larger than 12.5 mm, but not against liquids. In addition, its silicone-coated SMD LED technology guarantees thermal stability and reduced UV emission, contributing to the safety of its installation in furniture and indoor spaces.
                                                                                                        The SOB Free-cut 8x3mm LED strip offers a power of 9.6 W/m with a luminous flux of 1240 lm/m. It is available in two colour temperatures: neutral white 4000K and warm white 2700K, which allows it to adapt to different environments and applications in furniture and decorative lighting.
                                                                                                        Yes, the SOB Free-cut 8x3mm LED strip is compatible with connectors and sensors (not included in the package) that allow on/off control and light intensity regulation. The use of compatible controllers with 24V DC power supply is recommended to ensure optimal performance.
                                                                                                        The MiniSOB 4.5x3mm LED Strip includes a 3M® double-sided adhesive, designed to guarantee a secure installation on flat, clean surfaces such as aluminium, lacquered wood and glass. For rough or textured surfaces, the use of aluminium profiles is recommended to improve adhesion and dissipate heat.
                                                                                                        The strip is supplied in lengths of 1m, 3m and 5m, all with a 1.5m power cable at both ends and Miniled connectors. This allows the strip to be cut to the necessary length and both ends reused without wasting material, facilitating installation in confined spaces.
                                                                                                        This strip is IP65 certified, meaning it is protected against dust and low-pressure water jets, making it suitable for installation in kitchen cabinets, bathrooms and other areas at risk of splashing. It is not submersible and should be installed in areas without direct exposure to excessive moisture.
                                                                                                        The MiniSOB 4.5x3mm LED Strip has a power rating of 7.2 W/m and a luminous flux of approximately 720 lm/m, ensuring uniform illumination without visible points of light. It is available in two colour temperatures: -Neutral white (4000K): ideal for functional and modern environments. -Warm white (2700K): recommended for cosy and decorative environments.
                                                                                                        Yes, the LED strip is compatible with connectors and sensors, except Lynx sensors. To regulate the intensity, the use of 24V DC controllers is recommended, ensuring optimal operation and greater control over the lighting.
                                                                                                        No, they do not include covers, which are sold separately. They only include the aluminium profile and the diffusor profile.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is a cuttable LED strip by its cutting area (every 55.5mm) and can be connected with a cable and even use a connecting fitting.
                                                                                                        It is designed to backlight Zero profiles using LED strips, providing an even diffusion of light from the rear of the profile.
                                                                                                        The profile is compatible with the Lynx LED strip, although neither the strip nor the connection accessories are included in the product.
                                                                                                        The installation is frontally on the profile, specifically on the rear side, and can even be carried out after the structure has been assembled.
                                                                                                        It has a length of 1.1 metres and is made of polycarbonate with a white finish, which favours light diffusion and aesthetic integration.
                                                                                                        Each unit contains 1 diffuser profile. The packaging is available in batches of 20 units.
                                                                                                        It is designed to locate and conceal the installation cables, facilitating a clean installation in the Zero system.
                                                                                                        Installation is from the front on the profile at the rear. It can also be installed retrospectively, once the structure has been assembled.
                                                                                                        The profile incorporates flexible tabs that allow the cables to pass through and at the same time prevent them from slipping out, without the need for additional fixings.
                                                                                                        It is available in lengths of 1.1 metres and 2.9 metres.
                                                                                                        It is made of plastic with a black finish, ensuring a discreet and robust installation within the Zero modular system.
                                                                                                        Each cable is 500 mm long and uses a "Y" shaped connector, which allows multiple cables to be interconnected to feed multiple shelves.
                                                                                                        The kit is compatible with LED lighting systems from 12V DC to 24V DC, with a total output of 48W/96W.
                                                                                                        It includes a black heat-shrinkable profile, designed to conceal wiring in visible or exposed areas of the structure.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is specifically intended to illuminate shelves or modules within the Zero modular system. It must be used with Lynx LED strips (not included).
                                                                                                        They are made of plastic, which facilitates a safe and light installation within the modular system.
                                                                                                        What type of controller is needed to adjust the colour temperature?
                                                                                                        Can the strip be cut to size and how is this done?
                                                                                                        What power and luminous flux does it offer?
                                                                                                        What is the adjustable colour temperature range?
                                                                                                        What type of adhesive is included for installation?
                                                                                                        Does the Lynx LED strip with colour temperature change require a controller to be able to use it?
                                                                                                        How is the LED strip properly installed on different types of surfaces?
                                                                                                        What advantages does SOB technology offer over conventional LED strips?
                                                                                                        How does it perform in terms of energy efficiency and luminous flux?
                                                                                                        What protection does it offer against environmental conditions?
                                                                                                        Can the MiniSOB strip be cut?
                                                                                                        What kind of cutting and customisation does the SOB Freecut LED strip allow?
                                                                                                        What is the connection compatibility and what advantages does the Lynx-Z Miniled system offer?
                                                                                                        What makes this strip different from others in terms of light uniformity?
                                                                                                        What performance does it offer in terms of light and energy?
                                                                                                        What are its installation and environmental resistance characteristics?
                                                                                                        Can the SOB Free-cut strip be cut?
                                                                                                        The LED strip can be cut every 25 mm, allowing for precise and customised installation according to project requirements. It can be easily reconnected thanks to the mini LED connectors included in the 1.5 m power cables located at both ends of the roll.
                                                                                                        Yes, the 4.5x8 Neonlynx V LED strip has been specifically designed to fit into the Luxe tube channel, thanks to its dimensions of 4.5 mm wide by 8 mm high. This ensures a clean installation, with no play and no need for additional fixings, ideal for lighting solutions embedded in furniture or decorative structures.
                                                                                                        It is recommended to first mount the LED strip on the Luxe tube before attaching the assembly to the furniture or surface.
                                                                                                        This cable is compatible with 6 mm wide LED strips, making it ideal for projects that use Neonlynx V 4x10 LED strips and require discreet and efficient connections.
                                                                                                        The LED strip is designed for recessed installation in a groove 12 mm wide and 5 mm deep, allowing a fully flush integration into the furniture. It is suitable for both straight and curved layouts, with a minimum bending radius of 25 mm, making it easy to adapt to corners and special shapes. Fixing is achieved by means of an integrated 3M technical adhesive, recommended for clean and degreased surfaces such as melamine, MDF, wood or aluminium.
                                                                                                        The system operates at 24V DC constant voltage. The LED strip has a power consumption of 7.6 W/m, reaching approximately 38 W over 5 m. The included Smart converter has a maximum power output of 60 W, allowing it to supply the complete strip and additional elements, provided the total permissible load is respected. It features 6 Miniled outputs, centralising the power supply of luminaires and sensors in a single installation.
                                                                                                        The strip is supplied in a continuous 5-metre roll and can be cut every 33 mm, allowing precise adaptation to custom-made projects. It includes 1.5 m power cables at both ends, facilitating connection to the converter. The Plug & Play system with Miniled connectors reduces installation time and minimises errors in professional installations.
                                                                                                        The Smart RF sensor operates by contactless proximity, with a detection range of 5 cm. It allows switching on and off with a quick gesture and dimming control (0–100%) through short or prolonged approaches. This device operates via radio frequency, with a range of up to 8 metres, and features a rechargeable lithium battery, eliminating the need for battery replacement.
                                                                                                        The LED strip is made of high-quality silicone with IP65 protection, making it resistant to humidity and splashes, while maintaining a stable natural colour temperature of 4,000 K even under demanding conditions. The Smart converter incorporates a polycarbonate housing and protection systems against overloads, overheating and short circuits, ensuring safe and reliable operation in professional and industrial installations.
                                                                                                        The LED strip is designed for recessed installation in a groove 4 mm wide and 11 mm deep, allowing a fully flush integration into the furniture. It is suitable for both straight and curved layouts, with a minimum bending radius of 32 mm, making it easy to adapt to corners and special shapes in materials such as melamine, MDF, wood or aluminium.
                                                                                                        The system operates at 24V DC constant voltage. The LED strip has a power rating of 7.6 W/m, reaching approximately 38 W over 5 m. The included Smart converter provides a maximum output of 60 W, allowing it to power the complete strip and additional elements, provided the total permissible load is respected. It incorporates 6 Miniled outputs, centralising the power supply of luminaires and sensors in a single installation.
                                                                                                        The strip is supplied in a continuous 5-metre roll and can be cut every 63 mm, allowing precise adaptation to bespoke projects. It includes 1.5 m power cables at each end, facilitating connection to the converter. The Plug & Play system with Miniled connectors reduces installation time and minimises errors in professional installations.
                                                                                                        The Smart RF sensor operates by detecting when a human body interferes within its 90° detection angle and a range of 2 m. It automatically switches the luminaire off 30 seconds after no movement is detected and keeps the light on while activity is present within its detection range. The device operates via radio frequency, with a range of up to 8 metres, and features a rechargeable lithium battery, eliminating the need for battery replacement.
                                                                                                        The LED strip is manufactured from high-quality silicone with IP65 protection, making it resistant to humidity and splashes, while maintaining a stable warm colour temperature of 2,700 K even under demanding conditions. The Smart converter incorporates a polycarbonate housing and protection systems against overloads, overheating and short circuits, ensuring safe and reliable operation in professional and industrial installations.
                                                                                                        The Neonlynx V 3x5 LED strip is designed for integration into 3,2 mm wide by 5,5 mm deep milled slots, allowing for a completely flush installation in solid wood, MDF or melamine-faced chipboard panels. For curved applications, a minimum curvature radius of 30 mm must be observed to avoid mechanical stress on the flexible board (PCB). It can be cut every 21 mm at the marked points, which facilitates its exact adaptation in serial production or custom projects. CNC machining is recommended to ensure consistent tolerances in industrial or contract projects.
                                                                                                        The Neonlynx V 3x5 LED strip operates exclusively at 24V DC, requiring a constant voltage LED converter. Its consumption is 14.8 W per metre, so in continuous linear installations it is essential to calculate the total power and add a safety margin of 15-20% to ensure the stability and durability of the system. It includes 1.5-metre power cables at both ends, with connectors ready for direct connection to the converter, optimising installation times without the need for additional soldering.
                                                                                                        The Neonlynx V 3x5 is made of high-quality silicone with an IP65 protection rating, making it suitable for damp areas such as kitchens, bathrooms or commercial furniture. Its protection against dust and splashes also provides thermal and chromatic stability, reducing preventive maintenance in high-traffic professional installations.
                                                                                                        With a power of 14.8 W/m, it offers continuous and homogeneous lighting without visible dots, ideal for premium furniture and integrated architectural solutions. It is available in 4,000K (neutral white) for work environments and commercial spaces, and in 2,700K (warm white) for residential or contract applications where a more comfortable atmosphere is required. This versatility allows distributors and specifiers to adapt the solution to the requirements of the project.
                                                                                                        To maximise the system's service life, it is recommended to ensure proper heat dissipation, especially in continuous or long installations, by using surfaces with adequate conductivity or compatible profiles. The strip can be easily reconnected after cutting using compatible accessories, facilitating on-site adjustments or corrective maintenance. It is also compatible with Emuca sensors and control systems (door opening, movement, etc.), allowing it to be integrated into technical and smart furniture solutions for large accounts and industry.
                                                                                                        The Crux-in-Q LED spotlight has an output of 1.8 W and consists of 24 LEDs that provide natural white light at 4,000 K. It is efficient for furniture lighting applications thanks to its low energy consumption.
                                                                                                        It is available in four finishes: white, black, aluminium and satin nickel. These finishes allow it to be easily integrated into different styles and designs of furniture, offering a versatile and elegant aesthetic.
                                                                                                        The spotlight has dimensions of 65.5 mm x 65.5 mm and a thickness of 12.9 mm. Its compact square design makes it easy to install in built-in furniture. The visible cover is only 2 mm thick for a discreet and professional finish.
                                                                                                        It operates with direct connection to AC 230V 50Hz, eliminating the need for an additional converter. This simplifies installation and reduces costs associated with additional electrical components.
                                                                                                        The spotlight is IP20 rated, making it suitable for use indoors and in dry environments such as cabinets, shelves and other furniture where it is not exposed to excessive moisture or dust.
                                                                                                        The Kuma flexible spotlight uses energy-saving LED technology with a power of 2.1 W and energy efficiency class A++. It offers a colour temperature of 4,000 K (natural white) and a luminous flux of 150 lm, ideal for reading and work applications.
                                                                                                        The integrated touch sensor allows the lamp to be switched on and off with a simple touch. In addition, with a long touch, the light intensity can be adjusted to suit different lighting needs.
                                                                                                        The flexible spotlight arm has a lighting angle of 180 degrees, allowing the position and direction of the light to be precisely adjusted. This makes it especially functional for activities that require spot and adjustable lighting.
                                                                                                        The two USB ports at the base of the spotlight are capable of simultaneously charging electronic devices such as mobile phones, tablets and other USB charging compatible equipment.
                                                                                                        The kit includes 1 LED luminaire, a 30W constant voltage converter, and fixing screws. Installation is simple and instructions are included, making it easy to mount on desks, bedheads or other surfaces.
                                                                                                        The Alcor LED Spotlight Kit has a power of 1.2 W per wall light and a luminous flux of 95 lm with a natural white colour temperature (4,000 K). It offers a 90 degree angle of illumination and has energy efficiency class A++.
                                                                                                        Installation is recessed and requires pre-machining with a diameter of 16 mm. The spotlights protrude only 1 mm from the surface for a discreet and professional design.
                                                                                                        The compact and decorative design of the spotlights allows them to be elegantly integrated into furniture and cabinets, providing functional lighting without compromising the aesthetics of the space.
                                                                                                        The kit includes 6 LED lamps, a 15W constant voltage converter, fixing screws and installation instructions. Each wall light has a 1.5 m cable, and the converter includes a 2 m cable for easy electrical connection.
                                                                                                        This kit is ideal for interior lighting of furniture, cabinets and display cabinets, providing efficient and decorative light in residential or commercial spaces.
                                                                                                        The Mizar LED spotlight offers a power of 2.5 W or 5.2 W depending on the model, with a natural white colour temperature of 4,000 K and a luminous flux of 200 lm. It has A+ energy efficiency, ideal for low consumption lighting.
                                                                                                        This spotlight does not require an additional converter, as it operates directly from a 230V AC connection. This simplifies installation and reduces the costs associated with additional components.
                                                                                                        It is available in two sizes: 66 mm and 84 mm in diameter. Its installation is recessed and requires a pre-drilling of 55 mm in diameter, facilitating its integration into furniture and wardrobes.
                                                                                                        The finishes available are satin nickel, matt black and painted aluminium. These finishes allow it to adapt to different decorative styles, from modern to classic.
                                                                                                        The spotlight is made of steel and plastic, which combines durability with lightness. Its design incorporates a diffuser that homogenises the light, providing uniform and pleasant illumination in any space.
                                                                                                        The Polaris LED spotlight offers a power of 1.2 W and emits natural white light with a colour temperature of 4,000 K. It provides efficient and pleasant lighting, suitable for work areas and decorative use.
                                                                                                        The spotlight has a diameter of 30 mm in its recessed area, 12.5 mm deep and 33 mm visible diameter. It requires pre-machining for recessed installation in furniture or surfaces.
                                                                                                        Its matt anodised aluminium construction provides corrosion resistance, durability and a modern design that blends in perfectly with different styles of furniture.
                                                                                                        The spotlight illuminates an area range of 1.25 metres, making it ideal for applications in kitchens, bathrooms, showcases and work areas where spot and uniform illumination is required.
                                                                                                        The package includes 6 units of LED spotlights, each with a 1.5 metre connection cable, plus the necessary components for mounting and installation. This makes it easy to use in projects that require multiple light points.
                                                                                                        IP44 is the name given to the index that a light or component has in order to protect itself against objects larger than 1 mm and that also have protection from liquid splashes in all directions. In this case, depending on the area where the lighting is located, it would be suitably for assembly in bathroom furniture.
                                                                                                        The Crux LED spotlight requires a stable 12V DC power supply. It is necessary to use a suitable converter that supports the total power of the installed spotlights, considering 1.8 W per unit.
                                                                                                        The spotlight is fixed to the furniture by means of its recessed design. It is important to drill a 60 mm diameter hole with suitable tools to ensure a perfect fit in materials such as wood, MDF or chipboard.
                                                                                                        A 12V DC LED converter with a watt rating greater than the total power of the installed spotlights is recommended. For example, for 6 spotlights, the converter should handle at least 10.8 W (1.8 W x 6) with an additional margin for safety.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to combine 4500K and 6000K lamps in the same installation. However, it is recommended to plan the distribution to avoid visual inconsistencies and to maintain harmony in the illuminated space.
                                                                                                        To maintain the performance of the spotlight, it is suggested to clean it periodically with a soft, dry cloth. Avoid using abrasive products that may damage the finishes and regularly check the electrical connections to ensure optimum performance.
                                                                                                        The integrated motion sensor detects movement within a range of 2 metres and at an angle of 120°. The light switches on automatically when motion is detected and switches off 30 seconds later if no further activity is detected.
                                                                                                        The 120° swivel mechanism allows the light beam to be directed to the desired area, making it easy to adjust even after installation, enhancing the customisation of lighting in furniture or shelving.
                                                                                                        The luminaire uses 3 AAA batteries (included in the package). With regular use, battery life may vary, but on average can last several weeks depending on how often the sensor is activated.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple: fix the mounting screws to the surface of the furniture using a screwdriver. Then fit the luminaire into the swivel bracket and place it in the desired position. Detailed instructions are included to facilitate the process.
                                                                                                        This luminaire is designed for indoor use and its IP20 certification indicates that it is not resistant to moisture. It is not recommended for use in wet areas or outdoors to avoid damage to the product.
                                                                                                        The Aquarius LED spotlight has an output of 7W, a luminous flux of 480 lumens and a cool white colour temperature of 6000K, providing bright and functional lighting for spaces such as bathrooms.
                                                                                                        The IP44 certification ensures that the spotlight is protected against splashing water and small solid objects, making it ideal for use in wet areas such as bathrooms.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple: the spotlight is supplied with the necessary screws to fix it to glass surfaces, table tops or furniture. Simply mark and drill the mounting points and tighten the screws to secure the spotlight in position.
                                                                                                        The opal diffuser distributes the light evenly and eliminates reflections or glare, creating a pleasant ambience and improving the aesthetics of the lighting.
                                                                                                        No, this LED spotlight does not need an additional converter, as it is designed to be connected directly to a 230V AC socket, simplifying installation and reducing additional costs.
                                                                                                        The integrated motion sensor detects motion within a range of 2 metres and at an angle of 120°. The luminaire automatically switches on when motion is detected and switches off after 30 seconds if no activity is detected.
                                                                                                        The luminaire uses a rechargeable lithium polymer battery with a capacity of 850 mAh. The estimated charging time is 2 to 2.5 hours using a 5V DC 1A charger with micro USB type B connector.
                                                                                                        The luminaire can be installed with screws on the surface of a piece of furniture or by means of an included adhesive magnet, allowing it to be easily removed for recharging. Both options are safe and practical.
                                                                                                        The charge status LED indicates that the battery is charging when it is on. When the LED turns off, the battery is fully charged and ready for use.
                                                                                                        This luminaire is ideal for transit areas such as corridors, wardrobes, laundry rooms or stairs, thanks to its compact design, natural white light (4000K) and motion sensor. Its simple installation and 360 cycles autonomy make it perfect for areas without direct access to electricity.
                                                                                                        The integrated front LED lighting of the Pegasus mirror has a colour temperature of 4000K, providing natural light that enhances visibility and brings out facial detail without creating distracting shadows.
                                                                                                        The mirror has an anti-corrosion treatment and an IP44 protection rating, which makes it resistant to moisture and splash water, ideal for wet environments such as the bathroom.
                                                                                                        The dimensions of the mirror are 600 x 700 mm, with a glass thickness of 4 mm, making it a compact and stylish solution for bathrooms of any size.
                                                                                                        The package includes the mirror, brackets, dowels, installation hooks and detailed instructions. A drill and screwdriver are recommended for safe installation.
                                                                                                        This mirror is perfect for residential and commercial bathrooms, thanks to its modern design, functional lighting and resistance to wet conditions, offering durability and style.
                                                                                                        The Cassiopeia mirror's integrated anti-fogging system prevents condensation from forming on the surface, keeping it clean and functional even in bathrooms with high humidity after hot showers.
                                                                                                        The decorative LED backlighting, with a colour temperature of 4000K, creates a warm and modern atmosphere, ideal for enhancing bathroom lighting without creating shadows and providing a sophisticated aesthetic design.
                                                                                                        The mirror has a diameter of 60 cm and a thickness of 4 mm, making it a compact and stylish solution for bathrooms of any size, from residential to commercial.
                                                                                                        The package includes the mirror, brackets, dowels, installation hooks and detailed instructions. A drill, levelling tool and screwdriver are recommended for installation.
                                                                                                        This mirror is ideal for domestic bathrooms and hotels, thanks to its resistance to moisture and splashes (IP44), combined with an elegant design that adapts to modern and minimalist styles.
                                                                                                        The Crux-in LED spotlight runs directly on AC 230V 50Hz, eliminating the need for a converter. This simplifies installation and makes it more efficient for furniture and interior spaces.
                                                                                                        Its dimensions are 65 mm in diameter at the base, with a thickness of 11.5 mm and a 1.4 mm flange for discreet recessing. Its compact design ensures a stable installation and a professional finish.
                                                                                                        The spotlight emits a cool white light of 6000K with a power of 1.8W and a luminous flux of 116 lm, providing a bright and suitable illumination for functional spaces such as kitchens, cupboards and offices.
                                                                                                        The package includes 1 LED luminaire, installation screws and bracket. It is recommended to have a drill and screwdriver to fix the spotlight securely to the furniture.
                                                                                                        This spotlight is ideal for applications in kitchen cabinets, cupboards, display cabinets and shelves, where functional lighting is needed. Its minimalist design and resistance (IP20) make it perfect for dry and protected interiors.
                                                                                                        No, the Gemini LED spotlight does not require a transformer, as it is powered directly by 230V AC.
                                                                                                        This LED spotlight features IP44 protection, making it resistant to moisture and splash water, ideal for bathroom environments.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Gemini spotlight is designed to be mounted on both furniture and glass surfaces, using the elements included in the mounting kit.
                                                                                                        The kit includes the luminaire, an IP44 junction box, screws and accessories required for installation on different surfaces.
                                                                                                        Yes, the opal diffuser homogenises the light emitted, eliminating bright spots and providing uniform and pleasant illumination.
                                                                                                        The Aries LED spotlight has dimensions of 300 mm in length, making it ideal for medium to large surfaces, fitting standard bathroom furniture and mirrors.
                                                                                                        No, the Aries LED spotlight does not require an additional converter, as it operates directly on 230V AC power, simplifying installation.
                                                                                                        The integrated opal diffuser homogenises the light, eliminating glare and shadows, ensuring uniform and pleasant illumination.
                                                                                                        Mounting is by means of a multi-functional attachment which allows the spotlight to be fixed to glass, wood or boards using the included screws and IP44 connection box.
                                                                                                        Yes, although the Aries spotlight is designed to be durable, it is possible to purchase compatible accessories and components in case of damage or wear and tear.
                                                                                                        The Virgo LED spotlight has a length of 300 mm, making it compatible with standard mirrors and furniture in bathrooms and other interior spaces.
                                                                                                        IP44 protection ensures that the spotlight is resistant to moisture and splash water, making it ideal for use in bathrooms or other wet areas.
                                                                                                        Yes, the spotlight includes all the elements necessary for installation, such as screws, multifunctional bracket and mounting instructions.
                                                                                                        The Virgo spotlight's mounting system is compatible with glass, wood or board surfaces, allowing it to be installed on a wide variety of furniture.
                                                                                                        Yes, the design and functionality of the Virgo spotlight also make it suitable for other environments such as kitchens or corridors, providing uniform and decorative lighting.
                                                                                                        The integrated motion sensor in the Kaus LED wall light has a detection range of 2 metres and an angle of 120°, allowing the luminaire to switch on automatically when it detects movement.
                                                                                                        The rechargeable battery has a capacity of 850mAh, providing a battery life of up to 400 power-on cycles of 18 seconds each. It is recharged via a micro USB Type-C cable (included), with a charging time of approximately 2 hours using a 5V DC 1A charger (not included).
                                                                                                        Yes, the Kaus LED wall light allows you to adjust the colour temperature between 3000K, 4000K and 6000K, with a simple touch of the sensor button to switch between the available options.
                                                                                                        The Kaus LED wall light does not require screws, as it is easily installed with the included adhesive metal bases. This allows a magnetic fixation that facilitates both installation and removal for recharging.
                                                                                                        The wall light's twilight sensor is activated when the ambient light is below 250 Lux, ensuring that the luminaire is only switched on when it is really needed, thus optimising battery consumption.
                                                                                                        The proximity touch sensor integrated in the Kaus LED wall light switches the luminaire on when it detects movement at a distance of 7 cm. To switch it off, simply wave your hand in front of the sensor again.
                                                                                                        The rechargeable battery has a capacity of 850mAh, offering a battery life of up to 400 power-on cycles of 20 seconds each. Charging time is approximately 2 hours using a conventional 5V DC 1A mobile phone charger (not included) and a micro USB type C cable (included).
                                                                                                        Yes, the wall light allows you to adjust the colour temperature between 3000K, 4000K and 6000K with a touch of the touch sensor. This allows it to adapt to different lighting needs.
                                                                                                        The package includes a rechargeable LED wall light, as well as adhesive metal bases and screws for optional mounting. It is easily installed by attaching it to metal surfaces or using the included adhesive tapes, without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                        The proximity sensor has a detection range of 7 cm and automatically switches off after detecting a second movement, optimising battery usage and ensuring efficient power consumption.
                                                                                                        The Rigel LED luminaire's vibration sensor is automatically activated when the drawer is opened by detecting movement, and switches off after 12 seconds without detecting additional vibrations.
                                                                                                        The rechargeable lithium polymer battery has a capacity of 850mAh, offering an autonomy of 600 power cycles per full charge. Charging time is approximately 2 hours using a 5V DC 0.5A USB charger and the included micro USB type B cable.
                                                                                                        The luminaire can be installed in two ways: With screws, for fixed mounting inside the drawer. With double-sided adhesive tape or adhesive magnet, allowing tool-free mounting and easy removal for recharging.
                                                                                                        Included in the package: a rechargeable LED luminaire, screws, adhesive magnet and double-sided adhesive tape. These options ensure quick and easy mounting without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                        No, this luminaire is designed for dry areas and is ideal for drawer or cabinet interiors. Its IP20 rating does not make it suitable for wet or outdoor environments.
                                                                                                        The Centaurus mirror features 4,000K decorative LED backlighting, which provides a uniform, shadow-free, natural white light, ideal for improving visibility in the bathroom or any space in the home.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Centaurus mirror is designed for wet environments, as it has an IP44 rating, making it resistant to moisture and splashing water.
                                                                                                        The dimensions of the mirror are 800 x 600 mm, with a glass thickness of 4 mm. In addition, a 1 metre long power cable is included.
                                                                                                        Yes, the design of the mirror allows it to be installed both vertically and horizontally, adapting to different space and style configurations.
                                                                                                        Package includes: 1 Centaurus mirror Mounting brackets and plugs Installation hooks Detailed installation instructions. This facilitates quick and safe installation.
                                                                                                        The Zeus mirror features decorative LED backlighting that projects a natural white 4,000K light, providing uniform, shadow-free illumination, ideal for bathrooms or decorative spaces.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Zeus mirror is designed for wet environments thanks to its IP44 protection rating, which makes it resistant to moisture and splashing water.
                                                                                                        The mirror has a diameter of 800 mm, a glass thickness of 4 mm and a 1 metre long power cable.
                                                                                                        The decorative frame of the mirror is made of aluminium, with a black lacquered finish, giving it an elegant and modern design.
                                                                                                        Package includes: 1 Zeus mirror Mounting brackets and plugs Installation hooks Detailed installation instructions. This ensures quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                        The integrated motion sensor has a detection range of 2 metres and an angle of 120°. The luminaire automatically switches off 18 seconds after motion is no longer detected.
                                                                                                        The 850mAh lithium polymer battery fully recharges in less than 2 hours using a 5V DC 1A USB charger (not included).
                                                                                                        No, the luminaire does not allow the light intensity to be adjusted manually, but the twilight sensor ensures that the luminaire switches on only when the ambient light is insufficient.
                                                                                                        The wall light is compatible with adhesive metal surfaces or with screws in materials such as wood or glass. The magnetic system facilitates installation and removal.
                                                                                                        The battery has an estimated autonomy of 400 on/off cycles per full charge, and its lifetime depends on usage and charging conditions.
                                                                                                        The proximity touch sensor is activated when you pass your hand over a distance of 7 cm, switching the luminaire on. If you swipe your hand again, it switches off automatically.
                                                                                                        The 850mAh rechargeable lithium polymer battery has a battery life of approximately 400 on/off cycles per full charge.
                                                                                                        The wall light can be easily attached to metal surfaces using the included magnetic adhesive bases. It can also be installed using screws for greater stability on non-metallic materials.
                                                                                                        Yes, the luminaire allows manual adjustment of the colour temperature between 3000K, 4000K and 6000K by pressing the dedicated button.
                                                                                                        The applique is recharged using a 5V DC 1A USB charger (not included) and a 30cm micro USB Type C cable (included). Full charge time is less than 2 hours.
                                                                                                        Yes, the luminaire is adjustable in length between 462 and 468 mm thanks to the lateral brackets, allowing it to be adapted to the width of the drawer or cabinet.
                                                                                                        The integrated proximity sensor allows the luminaire to switch on automatically when the drawer is opened and off when the drawer is closed, improving convenience and energy savings.
                                                                                                        No, the 500 mm cable entry profile is specifically designed to be installed at the rear of the drawer, ensuring that it does not interfere with the movement of the drawer.
                                                                                                        The luminaire is mainly made of matt anodised aluminium and plastic, guaranteeing durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                        The luminaire has an IP20 protection rating, making it ideal for installation in dry interior spaces such as cupboards or drawers.
                                                                                                        The Quasar LED luminaire has a fixed colour temperature of 4,000 K, ideal for creating a relaxing and comfortable atmosphere.
                                                                                                        The swivelling spotlight is controlled by an integrated touch switch with two modes: a short press for ambient light and a long press to activate the reading spotlight.
                                                                                                        The installation of the bracket on the headboard of the bed is simple, as it only requires fixing with screws (included in the package) and the necessary wiring.
                                                                                                        Yes, a 12V DC LED converter is required for operation, which is not included in the scope of delivery.
                                                                                                        The luminaire is made of anodised aluminium and high quality plastic, which guarantees strength and durability.
                                                                                                        The Algol flexible LED spotlight emits a natural white light with a colour temperature of 4,000 K, ideal for providing a relaxing and comfortable reading environment.
                                                                                                        The USB port (5V DC - 1A Max) allows you to charge electronic devices such as mobile phones, tablets or e-readers while using the luminaire.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple and is done by attaching the bracket to the headboard with the included screws. The spotlight can be easily adjusted to the desired location thanks to its flexibility.
                                                                                                        Yes, a 12V DC LED converter is required for operation, which is not included in the package.
                                                                                                        The spotlight is made of black textured plastic, which gives it a modern appearance and a flexible design for easy orientation.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Heracles mirror is designed to be installed in both vertical and horizontal orientation, adapting to different bathroom configurations.
                                                                                                        The mirror is 5 mm thick, which guarantees high resistance and durability against possible impacts.
                                                                                                        Yes, the integrated touch switch includes an anti-fogging function, which prevents condensation from building up on the front surface of the mirror.
                                                                                                        The mirror has an IP44 protection rating, which makes it resistant to moisture and splash water, ideal for wet environments such as bathrooms.
                                                                                                        The package includes 1 mirror, brackets, dowels, installation hooks and instruction manual.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Pyxis luminaire can be cut and connected to each LED individually, allowing it to be adjusted to the length required for the project.
                                                                                                        Requires pre-machining to embed it into the surface of the furniture, ensuring aesthetic and functional integration.
                                                                                                        No, the LED converter is not included in the scope of delivery, but is necessary for operation (24V DC).
                                                                                                        The luminaire includes 1 LED luminaire, 4 mounting clips, a 1.5 m cable with Miniled connection and a cover cap.
                                                                                                        The Miniled connection cable has a length of 1.5 metres, ideal for easy installation.
                                                                                                        The kit includes a cable with side cover, a 1.5 metre Miniled connector, a single cover cap and 3 mounting clips.
                                                                                                        Yes, this kit is designed to be compatible with the Pyxis luminaire by cutting and adjusting its length according to the needs of the project.
                                                                                                        The side cover with Miniled connector allows a quick and safe connection to the 24V DC converter, facilitating the mounting and integration of the luminaire.
                                                                                                        Yes, the kit includes mounting clips and all necessary accessories to complete the installation.
                                                                                                        The accessories are made of durable plastic, available in black or grey finishes to match the design of the space.
                                                                                                        The Mizar LED light features an integrated converter that connects to alternating current, so no additional converter is required.
                                                                                                        The Taurus LED spotlight offers a cool white light of 6,000K (also available in 5,700K) and has an opal diffuser that homogenises the light to avoid reflections and shadows.
                                                                                                        No, this spotlight does not require a transformer, as it operates directly on 230V AC.
                                                                                                        It can be easily installed on glass mirrors, on table tops or on the surface of furniture using the included screws and instructions.
                                                                                                        The spotlight has an IP44 protection rating, making it ideal for wet areas and splash resistant.
                                                                                                        Includes LED luminaire, screws and instructions for easy and safe mounting.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        Yes, we recommend fully charging the battery of the Castor luminaire before installation. Although some batteries may be partially charged upon arrival, the charge will be minimal and simply for testing purposes. Therefore, a fully charged battery should be used for installation.
                                                                                                        The Castor battery-powered light has a range of 700 lighting cycles per charge before the batteries run out.
                                                                                                        The battery of the Castor light is recharged with a mobile charger. The charger needs to have a type B micro USB connector and should at least supply 5V DC. This battery is located on the side support with a cover, which must be taken off in order to recharge it. Likewise, it has an LED indicator that goes from red to green when charging is complete after an approximate period of 4 hours.
                                                                                                        The battery has an LED indicator that goes from red to green when charging is complete after an approximate period of 4 hours.
                                                                                                        To install the Spot LED spotlight it is necessary to drill an 8 mm diameter hole in the furniture.
                                                                                                        This LED spotlight has a power of 0.3W and emits cool white light with a temperature of 6,000K, ideal for highlighting indoor or outdoor areas of furniture.
                                                                                                        Yes, this spotlight requires a constant voltage LED converter for proper operation.
                                                                                                        It is suitable for both indoor and outdoor furniture, integrating perfectly into modern furniture designs thanks to its chrome finish.
                                                                                                        The package includes 1 small LED luminaire and a 0.5 m long cable for easy installation.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The I-connector is specifically designed to join 24V DC Pyxis LED luminaires, facilitating installation in linear configurations.
                                                                                                        It allows the creation of longer luminaires by making use of surplus lengths of up to 5 metres.
                                                                                                        Its self-sealing design and metal connectors ensure a solid and stable connection, preventing slippage within the profile and guaranteeing the passage of current from one luminaire to another.
                                                                                                        It is made of transparent plastic and metal connectors. The transparent plastic maximises the luminous flux at the junction, while the metal connectors ensure efficient current transmission.
                                                                                                        No, its transparent plastic construction means that the passage of light at the joints is not affected, guaranteeing uniform illumination.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Crater light can be recharged with a mobile phone charger. The charger needs to have a type B micro USB connector and should at least supply 5V DC. The charging time will vary in accordance with the amperage of the charger, although it is recommended to use 5VDC 1A chargers, therefore the estimated charge time is 2 to 2.5 hours.
                                                                                                        The L connector is ideal for applications that require creating 90° angled junctions with the Pyxis 24V DC LED luminaire, perfect for perimeter lighting or corner designs.
                                                                                                        It is necessary to cut the profiles at 45° mitres to ensure a perfect fit at 90° joints.
                                                                                                        Allows luminaires up to 5 metres in length to be connected, optimising installation in angled designs.
                                                                                                        It is made of transparent plastic with metal connectors. The transparent plastic optimises the passage of light, while the metal connectors ensure efficient current transmission.
                                                                                                        No, the transparent design of the connector allows a uniform luminous flux to be maintained at the corner joints, maximising aesthetics and functionality.
                                                                                                        Yes, as the Volans light functions at 230V AC therefore it does not need any extra converter.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to recharge the Kraz light with a mobile phone charger. The charger needs to have a type B micro USB and should at least supply 5V DC.
                                                                                                        The charging time will vary depending on the amperage of the charger. It is recommended to use 5V DC 1A chargers, therefore the estimated charge time is 2 to 2.5 hrs.
                                                                                                        This light has a range of 360 switching cycles per charge before the battery runs out and it has an LED indicator that goes from red to green when the charge is complete following an approximate time of 2.5 hours.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the Pegasus illuminating bathroom mirror.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the Cassiopea backlit bathroom mirror.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to recharge the Kaus light with a mobile phone charger. The charger needs to have a type C micro USB and should at least supply 5V DC 1A.
                                                                                                        The charging time will vary depending on the amperage of the charger. It is recommended to use 5V DC 1A chargers, therefore the estimated charge time is 2 hrs.
                                                                                                        This light has a range of 400 switching cycles per charge before the battery runs out and it has an LED indicator that goes from red to green when the charge is complete following an approximate time of 2 hours.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to recharge the Rigel light with a mobile phone charger. The charger needs to have a type B micro USB and should at least supply 5V DC 0,5A.
                                                                                                        The charging time will vary depending on the amperage of the charger. It is recommended to use 5V DC 1A chargers, therefore the estimated charge time is 2 hrs.
                                                                                                        This light has a range of 600 switching cycles per charge before the battery runs out and it has an LED indicator that goes from red to green when the charge is complete following an approximate time of 2 hours.
                                                                                                        The thickness of the board that the sides of these modules can have is from 16 mm to 19 mm, as the luminaire includes lateral supports that adapt to the desired size.
                                                                                                        The transparent connector design, together with its recessed installation within the profile, allows for a continuous aesthetic without visual interruptions. As it does not require end caps, it is ideal for creating end-to-end luminaires with fully linear and discreet integration, adapting to customised projects where visual design is a priority.
                                                                                                        For proper integration, a Ø7mm through hole is required for the Miniled connector to pass through. This allows the cable to be completely hidden and ensures a clean, aligned installation.
                                                                                                        The clips must be placed on the underside of the profile before insertion into the cabinet. A minimum of three clips per lighting segment is recommended to ensure stability. Correct assembly prevents vibrations, displacement and accidental disconnections.
                                                                                                        The Miniled connector is designed to work exclusively with 24V DC converters. It is recommended to use stabilised power supplies that guarantee a constant voltage and power in accordance with the total consumption of the luminaire, respecting the 48W limit. The converter is not included.
                                                                                                        The cable is rated to withstand up to 48W at 24V DC. It is designed for use in low-voltage LED lighting systems, with connectors made of technical plastic that ensure stable electrical transmission without overheating under normal operating conditions.
                                                                                                        The transparent connector design, together with its recessed installation within the profile, allows for a continuous aesthetic without visual interruptions. As it does not require end caps, it is ideal for creating end-to-end luminaires with fully linear and discreet integration, adapting to customised projects where visual design is a priority.
                                                                                                        For proper integration, a Ø7mm through hole is required for the Miniled connector to pass through. This allows the cable to be completely hidden and ensures a clean, aligned installation.
                                                                                                        The clips must be screwed to the surface of the furniture and then the luminaire inserted. A minimum of three clips per luminaire segment is recommended to ensure stability. Correct assembly prevents vibrations, displacement and accidental disconnections.
                                                                                                        The Miniled connector is designed to work exclusively with 24V DC converters. It is recommended to use stabilised power supplies that guarantee a constant voltage and power in accordance with the total consumption of the luminaire, respecting the 48W limit. The converter is not included.
                                                                                                        The cable is rated to withstand up to 48W at 24V DC. It is designed for use in low-voltage LED lighting systems, with connectors made of technical plastic that ensure stable electrical transmission without overheating under normal operating conditions.
                                                                                                        For installation in furniture, the length of the luminaire +4 mm must be taken into account for precise mounting with the end caps. In addition, a Ø7mm through hole must be drilled for the Miniled connector to pass through.
                                                                                                        The clips must be screwed to the surface of the cabinet and then the luminaire inserted. A minimum of three clips per luminaire segment is recommended to ensure stability. Correct assembly prevents vibrations, displacement and accidental disconnections.
                                                                                                        Each accessory set includes a 1.5m power cable with Miniled connector, side cover, 3 clips and 3 screws. Installation consists of: 1. Place the cover with the cable and the end cap. Pass the cable through the Ø7mm hole. 2. Secure the clips to the cabinet and insert the profile into the clips until you hear a ‘click’ to indicate that it is locked in place. 3. Connect the 24V DC converter.
                                                                                                        The accessories are designed to work with a 24V DC power source and support a maximum load of 48W. The Miniled connector allows direct integration with standard transformers (not included). In installations with multiple lights, it is essential to calculate the total load and distribute it appropriately.
                                                                                                        Surface mounting leaves the profile visible, but thanks to its sleek design and availability in black or grey, it blends elegantly into any furniture. Unlike recessed mounting, it does not require milling, making for quick installation, ideal for modular furniture, commercial premises or express renovations.
                                                                                                        The infrared sensor has a detection range of 5 cm. To ensure accurate switching on/off or smooth dimming, it must be installed without any obstructions in front and with the detection plane facing outwards. It is recommended to avoid placing it in deep cavities or behind translucent materials that may interfere with the infrared signal.
                                                                                                        The sensor offers dual functionality: -Switching on/off with a brief hand movement of less than 5 cm (less than 0.5 seconds). -Intensity regulation (dimmer) with a prolonged movement (more than 1 second). The system incorporates light level memory, which allows the luminaire to turn on at the last intensity used, optimising comfort and energy efficiency.
                                                                                                        For installation, the sensor is inserted into the luminaire profile, which requires cutting the 22 mm white diffuser profile. In addition, a Ø7 mm through hole must be drilled for the Miniled connector. As for the machining of the cabinet, the length of the luminaire +4 mm must be taken into account for precise mounting with the end caps.
                                                                                                        Both sensors offer the same functions (ON/OFF, dimmer and memory), but the difference depends on the type of installation: -Recessed sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis recessed luminaire in the cabinet. Prior machining is required for installation. Its integration is ideal for high-end projects where a clean aesthetic with no visible elements is a priority. -Surface-mounted sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis surface-mounted luminaire. It is screwed directly onto the outside of the furniture. It is quicker to install and suitable for projects where ease of installation is required or machining is not possible. Although visible, its compact design maintains a discreet appearance.
                                                                                                        This sensor is designed for 24V DC systems and must be connected to a compatible converter via its Miniled connector. The maximum permissible load is 48W. The converter must have surge protection and be sized according to the total consumption of the connected luminaire.
                                                                                                        The infrared sensor has a detection range of 5cm. To ensure accurate switching on/off or smooth dimming, it must be installed without any obstructions in front of it and with the detection plane facing outwards. It is recommended to avoid placing it behind translucent materials that may interfere with the infrared signal.
                                                                                                        The sensor offers dual functionality: -Switching on/off with a brief hand movement of less than 5 cm (less than 0.5 seconds). -Intensity regulation (dimmer) with a prolonged approach (greater than 1 second). The system incorporates light level memory, which allows the luminaire to turn on at the last intensity used, optimising comfort and energy efficiency.
                                                                                                        To install, the sensor is inserted into the luminaire profile, which requires cutting the 22 mm white diffuser profile. In addition, a Ø7 mm through hole must be drilled for the Miniled connector. When installing in furniture, the length of the luminaire +4 mm must be taken into account for precise mounting with the end caps.
                                                                                                        Both sensors offer the same functions (ON/OFF, dimmer and memory), but the difference depends on the type of installation: -Recessed sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis recessed luminaire in furniture. Prior machining is required for installation. Its integration is ideal for high-end projects where a clean aesthetic with no visible elements is a priority. -Surface-mounted sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis surface-mounted luminaire. It is screwed directly onto the outside of the cabinet. It is quicker to install and suitable for projects where ease of installation is required or machining is not possible. Although visible, its compact design maintains a discreet appearance.
                                                                                                        This sensor is designed for 24V DC systems and must be connected to a compatible converter via its Miniled connector. The maximum permissible load is 48W. The converter must have surge protection and be sized according to the total consumption of the connected luminaire.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of up to 2m and an opening angle of 90°. To ensure its effectiveness, it must be installed with the sensor facing the user's passage area, without any front obstacles or side interference. It is ideal for installation on the fronts of cupboards, dressing rooms or passageways, ensuring accurate motion detection.
                                                                                                        The sensor incorporates a fixed 30-second timer: after detecting motion, the luminaire switches on automatically and remains active for 30 seconds after detection ceases.
                                                                                                        To install, the sensor is inserted into the luminaire profile, which requires cutting the 40 mm white diffuser profile. In addition, a Ø7 mm through hole must be drilled for the Miniled connector to pass through. When installing in furniture, the length of the luminaire +4 mm must be taken into account for precise mounting with the end caps.
                                                                                                        Both sensors offer the same functions, but the difference depends on the type of installation: -Recessed sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis recessed luminaire in furniture. Prior machining is required for installation. Its integration is ideal for high-end projects where a clean aesthetic with no visible elements is a priority. -Surface-mounted sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis surface-mounted luminaire. It is screwed directly onto the outside of the cabinet. It is quicker to install and suitable for projects where ease of installation is required or machining is not possible. Although visible, its compact design maintains a discreet appearance.
                                                                                                        This sensor is designed for 24V DC systems and must be connected to a compatible converter via its Miniled connector. The maximum permissible load is 48W. The converter must have surge protection and be sized according to the total consumption of the connected luminaire.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of up to 2m and an opening angle of 90°. To ensure its effectiveness, it must be installed with the sensor facing the user's passage area, without any front obstacles or side interference. It is ideal for installation on the fronts of cupboards, dressing rooms or passageways, ensuring accurate motion detection.
                                                                                                        The sensor incorporates a fixed 30-second timer: after detecting motion, the luminaire switches on automatically and remains active for 30 seconds after detection ceases
                                                                                                        To install, the sensor is inserted into the luminaire profile, which requires cutting the 40 mm white diffuser profile. In addition, a Ø7 mm through hole must be drilled for the Miniled connector to pass through. When installing in furniture, the length of the luminaire +4 mm must be taken into account for precise mounting with the end caps.
                                                                                                        Both sensors offer the same functions, but the difference depends on the type of installation: -Recessed sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis recessed luminaire in furniture. Prior machining is required for installation. Its integration is ideal for high-end projects where a clean aesthetic with no visible elements is a priority. -Surface-mounted sensor: designed for use with the Pyxis surface-mounted luminaire. It is screwed directly onto the outside of the furniture. It is quicker to install and suitable for projects where ease of installation is required or machining is not possible. Although visible, its compact design maintains a discreet appearance.
                                                                                                        This sensor is designed for 24V DC systems and must be connected to a compatible converter via its Miniled connector. The maximum permissible load is 48W. The converter must have surge protection and be sized according to the total consumption of the connected luminaire.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Pyxis LED luminaire can be cut as it is designed with sections that can be connected to each LED. This allows it to be adjusted precisely to the desired length without compromising performance. It is essential to make the cut outside the marked active areas and with suitable tools to avoid damaging the circuit.
                                                                                                        The luminaire includes an opal diffuser that homogenises the light and hides the LED points, reducing glare and improving aesthetics. It can be installed in a straight line or with a slight inclination to direct the light in a more functional way, ideal for rooms such as kitchens, cupboards or passageways.
                                                                                                        It works exclusively with 24V DC converters (not included). The maximum power supported by the luminaire is 48W, so the length of the connected LED strip must be calculated based on the consumption per metre (approximately 8W/m). It is recommended to use stabilised power supplies and protect the system against overloads.
                                                                                                        The luminaire is fixed with clips and screws included in the kit. Ø7 mm holes must be drilled for the Miniled connector to pass through and the clips must be secured in the desired position. Once assembled, the profile is pressed into place until you hear a click. Assembly is quick, clean and requires no milling.
                                                                                                        It is made of aluminium and technical plastic, which makes it lightweight, resistant and provides good heat dissipation. It is available in black or grey finishes, allowing it to be integrated into different styles of furniture, from modern designs to more technical or industrial solutions.
                                                                                                        The track must be installed by milling a groove 11 mm wide and 10 mm deep to ensure correct fixing and a fully integrated finish in the furniture. The 2.9 m profile is cuttable, making it easy to adapt to custom installations without compromising mechanical stability.
                                                                                                        The system operates with a constant voltage of 24V DC and supports a maximum power of 72W per powered section. A 24V DC driver and the corresponding Diwo power cable are required for operation. It's essential to respect the maximum recommended distance of 5 metres between the power source and the last luminaire to ensure a consistent current distribution and avoid voltage drop.
                                                                                                        The track has an IP20 protection rating, making it suitable for indoor use in dry environments only. It is not recommended for humid areas or locations exposed to dust or splashes. It complies with typical interior furniture and commercial display cabinet standards.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with Focus, Multidot, and Laser luminaires from the Diwo range. The system also supports a wide variety of modular accessories—including straight and angled connectors, end caps, and power cables—allowing for linear or angled configurations and facilitating quick installations without specialised tools.
                                                                                                        Yes, the 2.9 m profile is cuttable and can be trimmed with appropriate tools, such as aluminium disc saws. Cutting can be done at any point along the track since the internal conductive tracks are continuous. The system is polarity-free, allowing luminaires to be connected in either direction, simplifying installation.
                                                                                                        The system must be powered with a 24V DC driver and supports a maximum power of 72W. The included power cable is 1.8 m long and features a Miniled connector for a quick and secure connection to the electrified track. It is recommended to use compatible 24V DC LED drivers (such as Emuca's) and ensure a stable connection to avoid voltage drop or overload.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Diwo electrified track can be cut to fit the desired length. The cut must be made with suitable tools for aluminium, always following the indicated cutting zones. This kit is designed for installations of varying lengths and to make use of leftover track after cutting. The kit includes decorative end caps that cover the ends and ensure a safe and aesthetic finish.
                                                                                                        The kit includes 4 mounting clips designed to secure the track to rigid surfaces such as wood, MDF, melamine or aluminium. These clips allow for stable installation both horizontally and vertically. It is ideal for applications in furniture, display cabinets, kitchens, or contract installations, ensuring a professional assembly without system movement.
                                                                                                        The system supports a maximum electrical load of 72W at 24V DC, allowing multiple LED luminaires to be connected in series. It is designed to work with Emuca's LED drivers and is ideal for continuous lighting solutions in residential or commercial environments. It is recommended not to exceed 5 metres of track length to maintain stable voltage and efficient performance.
                                                                                                        This connector inserts directly into the Diwo electrified track profile, ensuring stable current transmission without the need for additional tools. The system is designed to prevent polarity errors and facilitate quick, secure connection in professional environments. The connection to the driver is made via a pre-mounted Miniled connector on the included 1.8 m cable.
                                                                                                        The Focus LED luminaire is designed to integrate into the 24V DC Diwo electrified track, with a maximum capacity of 72W per power source. Thanks to its quick connector, it can be installed without tools at any point on the track, allowing repositioning and reconfiguration depending on the project. For operation, a 24V DC driver, electrified track, and Diwo power cable are required.
                                                                                                        The body is made of black anodised aluminium, providing excellent passive thermal dissipation and ensuring durability. It is rated IP20, suitable for dry indoor environments such as display cases, shelves, counters, or exhibition areas.
                                                                                                        The luminaire includes a prismatic diffuser that concentrates the light into a 25° beam, ideal for spotlighting. The head can be rotated 360° horizontally, enabling precise adjustment of the lighting angle according to furniture or product layout.
                                                                                                        The warm white version (2,700K) provides 118 lumens with an efficiency of 78 lm/W, and the neutral white version (4,000K) delivers 122 lumens with 80 lm/W, both with a power consumption of only 1.5 W. These are highly efficient solutions for highlighting products or specific areas with low energy consumption.
                                                                                                        No, the Focus LED luminaire is designed with a polarity-free connection system, meaning it can be installed in any direction on the Diwo electrified track without worrying about polarity orientation. This feature greatly simplifies installation, reduces wiring errors, and speeds up work on projects with multiple lighting points or modular configurations.
                                                                                                        The Diwo Laser LED luminaire is easily installed via a quick connector at any point along the 24V DC electrified track. No tools are required, allowing direct integration into wardrobes, display cases, or shelves. For operation, a 24V DC driver, electrified track, and Diwo power cable are required.
                                                                                                        The Diwo electrified track supports up to 72W of total load per circuit at 24V DC. Each luminaire consumes 3W, allowing up to 24 units per track without exceeding capacity. It's crucial to consider the maximum cable distance (5 metres) to prevent voltage drops and maintain stable luminous output.
                                                                                                        Yes. The quick connection system allows individual luminaires to be installed, moved, or replaced without tools or electrical interruption. This reduces maintenance time and facilitates quick reconfiguration in modular furniture or dynamic commercial setups.
                                                                                                        The 120° beam angle allows for wide and even light distribution, preventing shadows and improving visibility across the furniture front. Thanks to the slightly inclined diffuser design, the luminaire directs light toward specific areas, optimising lighting of horizontal and vertical surfaces such as shelves, display cabinets, or back panels. This is especially useful in commercial or exhibition applications where products or materials need to be highlighted without glare or visible light points.
                                                                                                        The warm white version (2,700K) provides 65 lumens with an efficiency of 22 lm/W, and the neutral white version (4,000K) delivers 66 lumens with 23 lm/W, both with a power consumption of only 3 W. These are highly efficient solutions ideal for long-term use in commercial or continuous-display environments with low energy consumption.
                                                                                                        The Multidot LED luminaire is easily installed using a quick connector at any point along the 24V DC electrified track. No tools are needed, allowing direct integration into wardrobes, display cabinets, or shelves. For operation, a 24V DC driver, electrified track, and Diwo power cable are required.
                                                                                                        The luminaire is installed directly onto the Diwo electrified track using a tool-free quick connector. This system allows secure pressure mounting and facilitates repositioning or relocation of the luminaires according to space requirements without additional technical intervention.
                                                                                                        It is made of aluminium and technical plastic with a black anodised finish, providing excellent corrosion resistance, durability under heavy use, and a contemporary design ideal for commercial, retail, or contract applications.
                                                                                                        The luminaire incorporates 18 LED light points with prismatic diffusers that optimise beam distribution, achieving a 50° beam angle. This configuration enables precise and controlled lighting in specific areas, avoiding unnecessary light dispersion. It is ideal for highlighting products in display cases, work surfaces in technical furniture, or key areas in commercial and exhibition environments requiring high-definition directional lighting.
                                                                                                        The warm white version (2,700K) provides 251 lumens with an efficiency of 36 lm/W, and the neutral white version (4,000K) delivers 262 lumens with 36 lm/W, both with a power consumption of only 7 W. These are highly efficient solutions ideal for long-term use in commercial or continuous-display environments with low energy consumption.
                                                                                                        The connector supports a maximum power of 72W at 24V DC, ensuring a constant and safe electrical flow. This makes it suitable for powering continuous linear LED lighting systems in demanding applications such as technical furniture, display cabinets, or contract installations.
                                                                                                        Yes, the Diwo system allows custom cuts to the electrified profiles and joining them using the straight connector. It is essential to ensure precise cuts with clean, well-aligned edges to avoid electrical discontinuity or connection failures. Maintaining system polarity and ensuring a secure click-fit are also important.
                                                                                                        The connector is made of aluminium and technical plastic with a black anodised finish. These materials offer high mechanical resistance, lightweight construction, electrical insulation, and good corrosion resistance, ensuring durability in intensive-use or humid environments such as kitchens or commercial spaces.
                                                                                                        It is exclusively compatible with Diwo 24V DC electrified profiles and Emuca 24V DC LED drivers. Its design allows for quick, secure, tool-free integration, ideal for modular systems requiring electrical continuity between sections.
                                                                                                        A maximum continuous profile length of 5 metres per line is recommended, respecting the 72W per driver limit. Exceeding this distance may lead to voltage drops and reduced performance in connected LED luminaires.
                                                                                                        The connector is designed for 24V DC systems and supports a maximum power of 72W. This makes it suitable for professional lighting projects that require stable and continuous electrical performance.
                                                                                                        The articulated design of the connector allows angled or non-linear connections without cutting profiles. It is ideal for adapting to columns, corners, or directional changes, optimising installation and reducing material waste.
                                                                                                        It is made of aluminium and plastic with a black anodised finish, providing high mechanical resistance and corrosion protection, ensuring long life even in demanding environments.
                                                                                                        Yes, the connector has been developed to be fully compatible with Emuca's 24V DC LED drivers, ensuring a reliable connection within the Diwo electrified system.
                                                                                                        When using it with cut sections of the electrified track, ensure that the connector is properly inserted. This guarantees electrical continuity and installation safety, as the system features polarity-free connection.
                                                                                                        Pyxis LED luminaires are designed for recessed installation in wardrobes and furniture, requiring precise machining in accordance with the profile dimensions (10 mm wide and 10 mm deep). They are compatible with solid wood, MDF and standard wood-based panels commonly used in technical joinery. The LED profile can be cut to size, allowing adaptation to different lengths without compromising light uniformity or the electrical safety of the system.
                                                                                                        The Smart converter operates at a constant voltage of 24 V DC and delivers a maximum output of 60 W, sufficient to power the two Pyxis LED luminaires and the included PIR sensors. It features 6 Miniled outputs, enabling efficient load distribution and future expansions within the power limit. Its polycarbonate housing incorporates protection against overload, overheating and short circuits, ensuring reliable performance in professional installations.
                                                                                                        The included sensors use PIR technology to detect human movement, with a maximum range of 2 metres and a detection angle of 90°. The system automatically switches the lighting on when presence is detected and turns it off after a fixed 30-second delay without detection, optimising energy consumption and extending the service life of the LED system in heavily used wardrobes and dressing rooms.
                                                                                                        Pyxis LED luminaires feature low power consumption of 8 W per metre, delivering high energy efficiency. They are fitted with an opal diffuser that eliminates direct visibility of the LED points, providing uniform, glare-free lighting—an especially valued feature in premium furniture, contract projects and industrial applications.
                                                                                                        Supplying the kit fully assembled significantly reduces installation time and minimises assembly errors. The Plug & Play system, together with the 2-metre power cable fitted with a 90° angled Type C plug, facilitates integration into furniture with limited space. This solution is particularly advantageous for serial furniture manufacturers, premium distributors and industrial projects requiring speed, standardisation and technical reliability.
                                                                                                        The surface-mounted Pyxis LED luminaire is designed for direct installation onto furniture, without the need for complex machining, making it particularly suitable for wardrobes, shelving units and under wall-mounted kitchen cabinets. It is compatible with solid wood, MDF and wood-based panels, and its format allows it to be cut to size to precisely match the usable length of the furniture.
                                                                                                        The luminaire features a power consumption of 8 W per metre, delivering high energy efficiency. It incorporates an opal diffuser that eliminates the visibility of individual LED points, ensuring uniform, glare-free lighting—an essential requirement in premium furniture, dressing rooms and contract projects where visual comfort is a priority.
                                                                                                        The proximity sensor switch uses infrared technology with a detection range of up to 5 cm. It enables smooth switching on and off with a short hand movement (ON/OFF function) and light level adjustment with a longer approach (dimming function). In addition, it includes a luminance memory function, so the luminaire always switches on at the last brightness level selected by the user.
                                                                                                        The Smart converter supplies a constant 24 V DC output with a maximum power of 30 W, suitable for powering the Pyxis LED luminaire and the included proximity sensor. It features 6 Miniled outputs for organised wiring and allows for future expansions within the power limit. Its polycarbonate housing incorporates protection against overheating and short circuits, ensuring reliable operation in professional environments.
                                                                                                        The kit is supplied fully assembled, significantly reducing installation time and eliminating wiring errors in the workshop or on site. The Plug & Play system, together with the 2-metre power cable fitted with a 90° angled Type C plug, facilitates integration into furniture with limited space. This solution is particularly advantageous for serial furniture manufacturers, premium distributors and industrial projects requiring speed, standardisation and technical reliability.
                                                                                                        The adjustable Syrma LED light is designed to be recessed into the surface of the furniture through prior machining, ensuring it is fully integrated. Its easy installation is quick and straightforward thanks to the included mounting clips for fixing. Fixing is carried out using three included metal clips, which ensure a secure hold with no visible screws. It is suitable for installation in MDF, chipboard or solid wood, and machining tolerances should be respected to avoid play.
                                                                                                        The adjustable Syrma LED light operates exclusively at 24V DC and therefore requires an external LED driver (not included). In installations with multiple units, it is essential to correctly size the power supply by adding up the total installed wattage and applying a 15–20% safety margin to ensure electrical stability and extend the system’s service life. It includes a 1.5 m cable with a Miniled connector to facilitate quick connections in professional environments.
                                                                                                        Its rotating mechanism allows the beam to be angled up to 90°, optimising light direction inside wardrobes, display cabinets or kitchen units. This feature is particularly relevant in premium projects where precise control of light output and glare reduction are required.
                                                                                                        The adjustable Syrma LED light is manufactured from extruded aluminium with engineered plastic components and a black finish, providing mechanical strength and effective heat dissipation. It features a double PCB in its LED strip, improving thermal management and ensuring long-term stability of luminous performance. It has an IP20 rating, suitable for installation inside domestic and commercial furniture.
                                                                                                        The adjustable Syrma LED light is compatible with specific 24V DC LED drivers. It is also dimmable, allowing integration into projects with light intensity control, improving energy efficiency and adaptability in high-end residential environments or commercial spaces. In addition, its Miniled quick-connection system facilitates maintenance, replacement or extension operations without complex disassembly.
                                                                                                        The controller includes colour-coded wires to distinguish positive and negative. These are connected to the LED strips via AMP or Mini LED connectors and to the power supply via the included cables.
                                                                                                        Yes, this controller is compatible with 12V and 24V LED strips, as long as the total power does not exceed the capacity of the power supply used.
                                                                                                        The included cables have a length of 1.5 metres from the controller to the connection ends, facilitating installation in different configurations.
                                                                                                        The controller is made of durable materials and its design includes overload and short-circuit protection, ensuring safe and prolonged use.
                                                                                                        It uses AMP and Mini LED connectors, allowing fast and secure connection to compatible LED strips. These connectors are standard in LED lighting systems.
                                                                                                        The DOUBLE Point switch LED Sensor operates on an input range of 100-240V AC at 50-60 Hz, so no additional power converter is required. It can withstand a maximum load of 250W, ideal for LED lamps.
                                                                                                        The sensor is designed for recessed installation, with a visible diameter of 10.5 mm. It is suitable for wood, plastic or metal surfaces with a maximum thickness of 5 mm. It is recommended to use a specific drill bit to ensure a perfect fit.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a motion detection capability of up to 5 cm. This makes it ideal for applications where non-contact activation is required, such as in cabinets or drawers.
                                                                                                        The sensor body is made of high-strength plastic with a metallic grey finish that simulates aluminium. This provides durability, impact resistance and a discreet, modern aesthetic design.
                                                                                                        The sensor is UKCA and CE certified, ensuring compliance with EU and UK electrical and material safety regulations.
                                                                                                        If an LED light does not turn on it is because it needs more power than that provided by the converter or it may be due to a polarity problem. In this case lights connected to a direct current have to maintain polarity throughout the entire circuit (positive with positive and negative with negative).
                                                                                                        The Sensor LED Dot Ø16 supports a maximum power of 36 W for 12V DC luminaires and 72 W for 24V DC luminaires. Several luminaires can be connected via a single converter.
                                                                                                        The sensor is designed for recessed installation in furniture, with an installation diameter of 16 mm. It is easily fixed using the included 6-input AMP distributor, AMP connectors and screws.
                                                                                                        In addition to switching the luminaires on and off with a short press, the sensor allows the light intensity to be dimmed with a long press. It also includes a memory function that saves the last intensity selected.
                                                                                                        The sensor is made of plastic with an aluminium painted finish, providing wear resistance and a discreet, elegant design. The included 1.5m cable makes it easy to install in a variety of configurations.
                                                                                                        This product complies with safety certifications such as IP44, CE, and RoHS, ensuring splash water resistance, electromagnetic compatibility, and compliance with environmental and safety regulations.
                                                                                                        In order to choose the correct converter or transformer for each light, it is necessary to:1. - Know the type of converter or transformer that corresponds to each light (12V DC, 350 mA or 12V AC). In our catalogue we indicate on each light the type of converter or transformer that must be used through a series of icons.2. - Know the total necessary power (6 W, 15 W, etc.). Once you have chosen the type of converter you have to choose the power that is required. For that purpose, it is necessary to add up all the powers of the lights that you are going to connect to the same converter. For example, you have 4 Orion lights (code 7048162) each 3 W, the total power is therefore 12 W. It is recommended that the converters work at 80% of the maximum power that they withstand. Therefore, we will choose the 15 W LED converter (code 7001420). Likewise, the maximum number of lights that can be connected to the same converter is 6 units, as the AMP distributors have 6 connectors.
                                                                                                        The Crux Ring has an outer diameter of 65 mm and an inner diameter of 59.4 mm, making it compatible with Crux and Crux-in lamps. It is designed for a perfect fit with these LED spotlight models.
                                                                                                        It is made entirely of plastic with a polished metallic grey aluminium painted finish. This finish combines durability with an aesthetic design that simulates satin aluminium, providing a modern and elegant appearance.
                                                                                                        Installation of the Crux Ring is simple, thanks to the two screw holes at opposite ends, 45 mm apart. This allows for a secure and stable fixing.
                                                                                                        Its rounded and polished design makes it easy to integrate into lighting projects, providing a professional and aesthetically pleasing finish to the mounting of LED spotlights. In addition, its lightweight construction simplifies handling and installation.
                                                                                                        The package includes 6 units ready to install with Crux lamps. Each ring is precision-engineered to fit perfectly and comes in practical packaging for easy transport and storage.
                                                                                                        Yes, the converters with metal casing need to be earthed and include a specific terminal for connection.
                                                                                                        The power tolerance should be -20% in power supplies. That is to say, if the total power of lights connected to a single converter is 12 W, it is necessary to use a 15 W converter. However, if the installation surpasses 12 W, it is necessary to choose a more powerful converter, for example 30 W.
                                                                                                        The Point Door Double LED sensor works by proximity detection. It turns the LED light on and off when interference is detected in its range, such as when a cabinet door is opened or closed.
                                                                                                        It has a sensing range of 3 cm, making it ideal for applications in cabinets, drawers or other furniture where automatic switching is necessary when interacting with the space.
                                                                                                        The sensor design includes two compact and unobtrusive detectors, connected by 1.5 m long cables. This allows for easy and flexible installation in different furniture configurations.
                                                                                                        The sensor includes a power cable with TYPE B plug that connects directly to the converter. It is made of plastic with a painted aluminium finish, combining durability and aesthetics.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with LED luminaires up to 250 W and can be used in systems with separate modules, such as compartment cabinets or structures with segmented lighting.
                                                                                                        The RGB remote control has 10 buttons that allow you to turn the lights on and off, adjust the light intensity, change colours and set up effects using a touch wheel for the colours. It also has an LED indicator that shows the commands in use.
                                                                                                        The controller has a concave design with dimensions of 107 mm high, 59 mm wide and 9.2 mm thick, which improves its ergonomics and fit in the hand. Its white finish on the front and black on the back give it a modern and functional look.
                                                                                                        It has a range of up to 20 metres and is suitable for RGB LED strips, allowing convenient and versatile wireless control in residential or commercial installations.
                                                                                                        The package includes 1 remote control that can be connected to multiple LED strip controllers at the same time. It also includes the necessary items for immediate use.
                                                                                                        The remote control complies with certifications such as UKCA and CE, guaranteeing safety, quality and compatibility with current European regulations.
                                                                                                        The Point Switch Simple LED Sensor uses proximity sensing to automatically turn an LED light on and off. This occurs when interference is detected within its detection range.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 3 cm, making it suitable for applications such as cabinets, drawers or any space that requires automatic illumination when interacting with proximity.
                                                                                                        The compact design of the sensor, with a small sensor head and 1.5 m cables, allows for unobtrusive installation on furniture or other surfaces, optimising the available space.
                                                                                                        The sensor includes a power cable with TYPE B plug for direct connection to the converter. Its body is made of plastic with an aluminium painted finish, providing durability and aesthetics.
                                                                                                        The sensor operates on 100-240V AC input at 50-60 Hz and can control LED luminaires up to 250W. This makes it compatible with a wide range of lighting systems.
                                                                                                        The Dimmer remote control allows you to control the ON/OFF of the LED lights, adjust the light intensity with dedicated buttons and choose precise brightness levels using a touch wheel.
                                                                                                        It has an ergonomic design with a curved area that makes it easy to fit in the hands. Its compact dimensions of 107 mm high, 59 mm wide and 9.2 mm thick make it comfortable to handle.
                                                                                                        The controller has a range of up to 20 metres, ideal for controlling compatible LED strips, especially those that support dimming.
                                                                                                        It is made of plastic with white finish for the front and black for the back, offering a modern and contrasting design that enhances its aesthetics and functionality.
                                                                                                        The package includes a remote control ready to be connected to LED strip controllers. Its wireless design ensures easy and versatile use in lighting installations.
                                                                                                        The Point Motion Simple LED sensor detects the movement of a human body within its range and automatically switches on the connected LED lights. Once no motion is detected, the timer switches the lights off after 45 seconds.
                                                                                                        It has a detection range of up to 1.5 metres and a 90° angle of coverage, making it ideal for applications in cabinets, drawers or any space where automatic illumination is required when motion is detected.
                                                                                                        The built-in timer switches the lights off after 45 seconds without detecting motion, improving energy efficiency and reducing power consumption in environments with intermittent use.
                                                                                                        The package includes 1 sensor, a 6-input AMP distributor, AMP connectors and fixing screws. Installation can be surface or flush mounted, depending on the needs of the furniture or space.
                                                                                                        The sensor operates with 12V DC (36 W) and 24V DC (72 W) LED luminaires. This makes it compatible with a wide range of LED lighting systems, adapting to various configurations and environments.
                                                                                                        The nut has a length of 12 mm with an internal space designed to fit an 8.5 mm screw. The screw, on the other hand, has a thread length of 14 mm, allowing a firm and secure fixing in various materials such as wood, MDF or metal. Both components are made of stainless steel to ensure corrosion resistance.
                                                                                                        The chrome finish provides a sleek, modern look, similar to polished aluminium, and offers resistance to wear and oxidation, making it ideal for indoor applications with high visual exposure.
                                                                                                        To install the kit, the surface must be pre-drilled to a diameter suitable for metric M4. Then, the screw is inserted from one side, while the trim nut is placed on the visible side, ensuring a tight fit by threading.
                                                                                                        This kit is specifically compatible with the M4 metric. For other metrics, it is recommended to check alternative models designed to meet those specific requirements.
                                                                                                        It is recommended to clean the chrome finish with a soft cloth and non-abrasive products to avoid scratches. Avoid the use of harsh chemicals to maintain the shine and corrosion protection.
                                                                                                        The Red Eye 5 LED Sensor has a power rating of 500W, operates on 220-240V AC input at 50-60 Hz and is designed for lighting systems compatible with this specification. The 1.5 metre cable makes it easy to integrate into different configurations.
                                                                                                        The touch design allows the lights to be switched on and off with a light touch, ensuring an intuitive experience. Its metal sensor is highly sensitive, ensuring a reliable response even with frequent use.
                                                                                                        The sensor has compact dimensions: 90 mm long, 17 mm high and 40 mm wide, with a contact tip of Ø42.4 mm. This compact size makes it ideal for installation in small spaces or discreetly designed furniture.
                                                                                                        For connection, the sensor comes with pre-installed wiring that must be integrated with the 240V AC electrical system. It is recommended to turn off the power before installation and verify that the wiring is properly insulated and connected according to the technical manual.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor complies with international standards such as CE and RoHS, guaranteeing safety in use, energy efficiency and respect for the environment.
                                                                                                        The Micron LED Sensor allows the light intensity to be dimmed in a range of 5% to 100%, easily controlling the brightness via the integrated touch switch. This functionality allows the lighting to be customised according to the needs of the space.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with 12V DC and 24V DC electrical systems. The input and output are designed to support up to 24W at 12V DC and 48W at 24V DC, offering a wide versatility for different lighting applications.
                                                                                                        The sensor is IP44-rated, making it resistant to dust and exposure to liquids, such as small splashes. This feature ensures durability in indoor environments that may be subject to such conditions.
                                                                                                        The included AMP distributor has 6 inputs allowing up to 6 luminaires to be connected and controlled simultaneously. Its design facilitates quick connection via AMP connectors, ensuring a tidy and efficient installation.
                                                                                                        For installation, it is recommended to follow these steps: Verify that the electrical system operates within the 12V or 24V DC range. Connect the sensor and the AMP distributor using the supplied connectors, ensuring correct polarity. Fix the sensor on a suitable surface, avoiding areas with direct exposure to excessive moisture. Check that the luminaires are correctly connected before switching on the system.
                                                                                                        The SIMPLE LED Point Door Sensor uses a proximity sensing system that turns the LED luminaire on or off when it detects interference within a range of 3 cm, such as when a cabinet door is opened or closed. This system is designed to provide accurate and automatic activation.
                                                                                                        The sensor is designed to operate on 240V AC input at 50-60 Hz, supporting a maximum power of 250W. It is compatible with LED luminaires and ensures safe and efficient performance in domestic or commercial electrical systems.
                                                                                                        The cable with TYPE 8 plug allows the sensor to be connected directly to the converter without the need for additional adapters. This connection facilitates quick and safe integration into the lighting system.
                                                                                                        No, the sensor has a fixed detection range of 3 cm which cannot be adjusted. However, its compact design and predefined range make it ideal for specific applications, such as cabinets and furniture.
                                                                                                        The sensor is made of plastic with an aluminium painted finish, giving it resistance to wear and tear and a modern aesthetic that integrates easily into furniture design. In addition, its materials ensure durability in indoor environments.
                                                                                                        The AMP extension cable is designed for 12V DC LED systems and supports a maximum power of 60W. It is ideal for connecting LED luminaires to the converter in installations requiring up to 2 metres of extension.
                                                                                                        The AMP-type connection allows for quick and easy installation thanks to its connectors that ensure a firm and stable fit. It also minimises the risk of polarity errors, increasing the safety of the connection.
                                                                                                        Although it is possible to extend the length using additional connectors, it should be verified that the extension does not cause a voltage drop that will affect the performance of the luminaires. It is recommended that cables of the same specification are used to maintain the integrity of the system.
                                                                                                        The cable is made of flexible and resistant plastic with a black and red finish for easy identification of the poles. These materials ensure excellent durability and resistance to mechanical wear.
                                                                                                        Before installation, disconnect the power supply and make sure that the positive and negative poles are correctly connected. Avoid straining the cable or exposing it to heat sources that could compromise its integrity.
                                                                                                        The switch operates automatically when the enclosure door is opened, switching on the connected luminaire. When the door is closed, the switch switches the light off. This simple mechanism is efficient and unobtrusive.
                                                                                                        Yes, the switch is compatible with both hinged and sliding doors. For hinged doors, make sure that the switch is aligned with the furniture frame. In the case of sliding doors, it is important to locate it in a place where it does not interfere with the sliding of the door.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple: the switch is screwed to the surface of the furniture in the desired position. It is advisable to use a drill with a small drill bit for pre-drilling and a screwdriver to secure the installation.
                                                                                                        The switch is compatible with 230V AC and 50Hz luminaires. It can be used with LED strips and LED spotlights that meet these electrical specifications, ensuring a safe installation.
                                                                                                        The compact design makes it easy to integrate into discreet furniture without affecting the overall aesthetics. The black and white finishes allow the switch to be combined with different styles and colours of furniture, providing decorative versatility.
                                                                                                        Installation dimensions: The switches are designed to be recessed in a 21 mm diameter and 21 mm deep hole to ensure a precise fit.
                                                                                                        Materials of construction: The switches are made of durable plastic and are available in white, black or grey finishes, ideal for matching different styles of furniture.
                                                                                                        Electrical capacity: Each switch can handle up to 10A at 125VAC or 250VAC, making them suitable for energy efficient luminaires and domestic or office electrical systems.
                                                                                                        Compatibility: Yes, the switches are compatible with home or office furniture, being discreetly integrated into surfaces such as wood, plastic or similar.
                                                                                                        Package contents: The batch includes 10 switches of the same finish and specifications. Ideal for series installations or multiple furniture projects.
                                                                                                        This converter has a maximum power of 60W with 12V DC output, distributed among its 6 MiniLED outputs, allowing multiple LED devices to be connected simultaneously.
                                                                                                        The converter is designed with IP20 protection, ideal for dry areas, and features an efficient power factor that optimises energy consumption in lighting projects.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with Type C plugs and IEC 60320 C7 connectors, offering flexibility in connection via its 2 metre power cable. It also allows other cables for different plugs to be connected.
                                                                                                        With compact dimensions of only 16.5 mm thick, the converter can be easily concealed in narrow areas or behind furniture, maximising the available space.
                                                                                                        It incorporates protection against overloads, electrical interference and short circuits, ensuring safe and stable operation, even in heavy use scenarios.
                                                                                                        The sensor uses infrared technology with a detection range of 5 cm, offering precise, non-contact activation.
                                                                                                        It is ideal for applications in panels, headboards, kitchen furniture and different rooms in the home, thanks to its versatile and compact design.
                                                                                                        Installation requires a Ø8 mm drill hole in the surface of the material. Includes a 2.5 m cable and a 6-input MiniLED distributor for easy mounting.
                                                                                                        Supports 12V DC and 24V DC voltages, with a maximum power of 36W or 72W, depending on the connected LED system.
                                                                                                        It is protected against electrical and electromagnetic interference, ensuring stable operation even in environments with high levels of electrical noise.
                                                                                                        The sensor dims with a short press to switch the luminaires on/off and a long press to adjust the light level.
                                                                                                        Installation requires a Ø12 mm drill hole in the furniture. Includes a 1.5 m cable and a 6-input MiniLED distributor.
                                                                                                        It supports 12V DC and 24V DC voltages, with maximum power ratings of 36W for 12V and 72W for 24V.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor has a memory function that saves the last set intensity after switching it off.
                                                                                                        It is ideal for panels, headboards and furniture in general, integrating perfectly in different rooms of the home.
                                                                                                        The sensor requires an installation diameter of 14 mm to be recessed in the furniture.
                                                                                                        Yes, it includes a blue LED light that makes it easy to locate the sensor in the dark.
                                                                                                        12V DC or 24V DC luminaires can be connected, with maximum wattages of 36W (12V) and 72W (24V).
                                                                                                        Dimming is activated by a short press to switch on/off and a long press to adjust the light level.
                                                                                                        The sensor complies with IP44 protection measures and is designed for low power consumption, ensuring safety and efficiency.
                                                                                                        The sensor is compatible with 8mm wide LED strips operating at 12V DC or 24V DC.
                                                                                                        The control is done by a short press to switch on/off and a long press to adjust the light intensity level.
                                                                                                        Yes, it includes a mechanical switch to turn the blue LED beacon on or off if you do not want it to be active.
                                                                                                        The sensor is designed for 8 mm wide LED strips, ideal for integration into Lynx W profiles.
                                                                                                        The integrated connector allows a fast, safe and efficient connection, facilitating the installation of LED strips.
                                                                                                        The sensor automatically switches the light on when it detects movement of a human body within its detection range and switches it off after 30 seconds without detection.
                                                                                                        Detects motion in a range adjusted to human movement, ideal for profile and furniture applications.
                                                                                                        The light remains on for 30 seconds after motion detection ceases.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with 8 mm wide LED strips for both 12V DC and 24V DC systems.
                                                                                                        Includes a motion sensor, a MINILED distributor with 6 inputs, screws and a 1.5 m cable with Miniled connection.
                                                                                                        The distributor cable allows up to 6 LED luminaires to be connected and managed simultaneously via a single 12V or 24V sensor.
                                                                                                        It uses a Miniled connection, ideal for LED lighting systems compatible with this type of connection.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is fully compatible with Miniled sensors operating on 12V DC and 24V DC.
                                                                                                        The cable is 10 cm long, making it easy to connect several luminaires to a single sensor output.
                                                                                                        The kit includes 1 distribution cable with 6 outlets and 1 inlet with Miniled connection, made of plastic with black finish.
                                                                                                        The SMART 6W LED Converter is designed for energy efficiency and high power factor. It operates with an input of 220-240V AC (50-60Hz) and generates an output of 12V DC, ideal for LED luminaires. In addition, it has a compact design with a reduced thickness of only 16.5mm.
                                                                                                        This converter includes protection against overloads, short circuits and electromagnetic interference, ensuring stable, safe and compliant operation in accordance with European standards.
                                                                                                        It has 6 Miniled outlets compatible with IEC 60320 C7 connection, allowing efficient and safe connection for multiple luminaires.
                                                                                                        Yes, thanks to its compact and slim design, it is ideal for installation in back or hard-to-reach areas, such as under furniture or in concealed spaces.
                                                                                                        Yes, this converter complies with European safety standards, ensuring protection against electrical interference and offering reliable operation for domestic or professional use.
                                                                                                        The 15W SMART LED Converter has an input of 220-240V AC (50-60Hz) and output of 24V DC, which makes it ideal for LED luminaires with lower power requirements. In addition, its compact design with 16.5mm thickness sets it apart as it is suitable for narrow installation areas.
                                                                                                        It has 6 Miniled outlets, designed to facilitate the efficient connection of multiple LED luminaires. Each output uses IEC 60320 C7 connectors, allowing a stable and secure connection.
                                                                                                        Its Plug&Play design and its compatibility with centralised SMART sensors allow multiple luminaires to be easily connected and controlled. It is also ideal for both domestic and professional applications, adapting to different lighting configurations.
                                                                                                        It integrates protection against overloads, overheating and short circuits in the secondary, complying with European safety standards to guarantee stable and safe operation in all its applications.
                                                                                                        The power cable has a length of 2 metres, is equipped with a 90° angled Type C plug and an IEC 60320 C7 connector. This configuration optimises space and facilitates installation, even in hard-to-reach areas.
                                                                                                        The RF transmitter has a proximity sensor that works like a wireless switch that detects hand movement without direct contact. This allows you to turn the LED light on, off or adjust its intensity. It works wirelessly by sending a radio frequency signal to the Smart RF receiver (not included).
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 5 cm, allowing the LED light to be controlled without touching the device, offering convenience and practicality in use.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible to pair up to 10 receivers with one RF transmitter or link up to 10 transmitters to the same receiver. This allows several lights to be managed from a single transmitter or different transmitters depending on the needs of the space.
                                                                                                        The transmitter has a 500 mAh battery that is recharged via USB-C, using a standard 5V DC charger. The full charging time is approximately 25 minutes with a 5V 2A charger. A full charge provides up to 700 on/off cycles, or up to 18 months in standby mode if the transmitter is turned off using the integrated ON/OFF switch (recommended for prolonged periods of inactivity). The battery has a service life of approximately 500 full charge cycles.
                                                                                                        Installation is simple and can be done using double-sided adhesive tape or screws, both included in the package. This makes it easy to attach to furniture, walls or other surfaces.
                                                                                                        The RF transmitter has a motion sensor that detects the presence of a human body within its detection range. When activated, it turns on the light and automatically turns it off after 30 seconds if no further movement is detected. It works wirelessly by sending a radio frequency signal to the Smart RF receiver.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 90° and a length of 2 metres, allowing it to capture movement in a wide area. It keeps the light active while it detects presence within its range.
                                                                                                        It is possible to pair one transmitter with up to 10 receivers, and one receiver can be connected to up to 10 transmitters. This allows for flexible and practical management of multiple lights.
                                                                                                        The transmitter has a 500 mAh battery that is recharged via USB-C, using a standard 5V DC charger. The full charging time is approximately 25 minutes with a 5V 2A charger. A full charge provides up to 700 on/off cycles, or up to 18 months in standby mode if the transmitter is turned off using the integrated ON/OFF switch (recommended for prolonged periods of inactivity). The battery has a service life of approximately 500 full charge cycles.
                                                                                                        It is installed with double-sided adhesive tape or screws, both included. It is ideal for spaces such as hallways, staircases, dressing rooms and cupboards, where automatic switching is particularly useful and efficient.
                                                                                                        The RF transmitter has a proximity sensor that detects when a door opens or closes within a range of 5 cm, automatically turning the LED light on or off. It works wirelessly by sending a radio frequency signal to the Smart RF receiver (not included).
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 5 cm, allowing it to be installed in furniture with single or double doors. For double doors, the sensor lens is placed in the middle, so that each side detects the movement of one door or the other.
                                                                                                        Up to 10 receivers can be linked to one transmitter and 10 transmitters to one receiver, providing flexibility to manage multiple lights.
                                                                                                        The transmitter has a 500 mAh battery that is recharged via USB-C using a standard 5V DC charger. The full charging time is approximately 25 minutes with a 5V 2A charger. A full charge provides up to 700 on/off cycles, or up to 18 months in standby mode if the transmitter is turned off using the integrated ON/OFF switch (recommended for extended periods of inactivity). The battery has a service life of approximately 500 full charge cycles.
                                                                                                        It is installed with double-sided adhesive tape or screws, both included in the kit. Installation is simple and suitable for everyday cabinets or similar spaces.
                                                                                                        The RF receiver receives radio frequency signals emitted by the RF Smart emitters, controlling 12V DC or 24V DC LED luminaires. It has a maximum range of 5 metres.
                                                                                                        It is possible to link 1 transmitter with up to 6 receivers and 1 receiver with up to 6 transmitters, providing flexibility in multiple installations.
                                                                                                        To pair, simply press the pairing button on the receiver and then on the transmitter for 10 seconds. The same process is used to unpair.
                                                                                                        It can be installed concealed in different environments such as dressing rooms, kitchens, bedrooms or living rooms. It is versatile and discreet, suitable for various types of projects.
                                                                                                        The kit includes 1 receiver and a double-sided adhesive for quick and secure installation.
                                                                                                        The sensor detects motion within a range of 90° and up to 2.5 metres. The timer switches the luminaires off after 60 seconds without motion detection and restarts when motion is detected again.
                                                                                                        This sensor can be connected to a Smart converter to manage several luminaires simultaneously with a single sensor. It is compatible with 12V DC or 24V DC luminaires, supporting a maximum power of 36W for 12V DC and 72W for 24V DC.
                                                                                                        The sensor requires machining with a diameter of 12 mm to be integrated into the furniture. It is fixed by means of a mounting accessory and screws included.
                                                                                                        It includes a 1.5 m cable with Miniled connection and an additional 1 m for the lens. This facilitates integration into Miniled systems for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                        Ideal for passageways, dressing rooms, wardrobes, hallways and stairwells in homes or commercial facilities, providing comfort and energy efficiency through automatic switching on and off.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 10 cm and is activated when the furniture doors are opened or closed. It is ideal for furniture with double doors, as it is installed in the centre and controls the lighting regardless of which of the doors is opened or closed.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with 12V DC or 24V DC converters, supporting power ratings of 36W at 12V DC and 72W at 24V DC. It integrates with LED luminaires from Miniled systems.
                                                                                                        No machining required. Can be mounted directly onto the surface of the furniture using the included double-sided adhesive accessory or screwed for a more permanent fixing.
                                                                                                        It can be connected to a converter to manage up to 6 secondary luminaires with Miniled connection from a single sensor.
                                                                                                        This sensor is ideal for wardrobes, dressing rooms and other furniture that require automatic switching on and off when opening or closing their doors, offering convenience and energy efficiency.
                                                                                                        The sensor is activated by passing your hand in front of it, within a detection range of 6 cm. It allows the luminaire to be switched on and off, as well as adjusting the light intensity (dimmer mode) by a prolonged action.
                                                                                                        This sensor supports up to 36W in 12V DC systems and 72W in 24V DC systems, making it ideal for a wide variety of applications with LED luminaires.
                                                                                                        Yes, it is possible. Connected to a Smart converter, it can manage up to 6 secondary luminaires with Miniled connection, allowing all of them to be switched on and off at the same time.
                                                                                                        No complex machining is required. Its compact design allows it to be recessed in the furniture, occupying a diameter of only 8 mm.
                                                                                                        It is ideal for furniture in kitchens, wardrobes, dressing rooms and areas where simple LED lighting control with intensity adjustment is desired, offering convenience and energy efficiency.
                                                                                                        The app allows you to switch on, switch off, adjust the intensity (dimmer) and create customised scenes for different times of the day or home environments. In addition, voice commands can be sent.
                                                                                                        This receiver can control up to 5 LED luminaires connected via the Miniled connectors, ensuring simultaneous control.
                                                                                                        Yes, the receiver is compatible with Google Assistant and Alexa, allowing full control of the lights via voice commands.
                                                                                                        It can be paired with up to 6 RF transmitters. The process is simple: press the pairing button on the receiver and the transmitter for 10 seconds. To unpair, repeat the procedure.
                                                                                                        It is easily installed on the converter output with Miniled connections. Its compact design allows for concealed location with a maximum range of 5 metres from the RF transmitter.
                                                                                                        Combines the functionality of a hand switch and a proximity sensor for doors. This allows luminaires to be controlled by waving a hand in front of the sensor or by opening/closing a door, depending on the required configuration.
                                                                                                        It has a detection range of 10 cm. It is triggered automatically when it detects the user's hand or when it interferes with the sensor field when a door is opened or closed.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor can be connected to a Smart converter to control the simultaneous switching on and off of all connected luminaires. In this type of installation, the sensor manages a maximum power limit of 36W at 12V DC and 72W at 24V DC.
                                                                                                        It can manage up to 6 ports or secondary outputs via Miniled connections, allowing independent on/off switching of several luminaires with a single converter.
                                                                                                        The sensor can be surface mounted using a double-sided adhesive accessory or recessed into furniture thanks to its compact design. It includes a 1.5 m cable with Miniled connections and components for easy installation.
                                                                                                        This will depend on the power consumption of each connected LED luminaire, but in total should not exceed a maximum power of 200W.
                                                                                                        Yes, this transformer is designed with an overheating, overload and short-circuit protection system to ensure safe operation.
                                                                                                        The distributor has 6 outputs for quick and easy connection of LED luminaires via MINILED connectors.
                                                                                                        Yes, the transformer is equipped with an interchangeable cable that allows you to connect a different type of cable depending on the plug required in the target market.
                                                                                                        No, this transformer is designed for indoor use or dry areas (IP20). For wet areas, a transformer with a higher protection rating is required.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 1.5 metres in length with a coverage angle of 90°.
                                                                                                        No, the timer automatically switches off the luminaire 45 seconds after no motion is detected and is not adjustable.
                                                                                                        The sensor can be installed in Ø16 mm machining or screwed directly to the surface of the furniture using the included screws and accessories.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor is compatible and works correctly with 12V DC and 24V DC LED converters, supporting up to a maximum power of 250W.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor employs PIR technology, which provides high sensitivity and accuracy in detecting movement of a human body.
                                                                                                        The UK cable is designed with a UK Type G plug, ideal for the UK market.
                                                                                                        The cable length is 2 metres, offering flexibility in installation.
                                                                                                        Yes, the cable is compatible with all constant voltage converters available in the Emuca catalogue.
                                                                                                        It has class II protection, which ensures resistance to overheating and short circuits.
                                                                                                        The cable is made of plastic with a black finish, guaranteeing durability and resistance.
                                                                                                        It is suitable for high demand lighting applications requiring up to 7A of current, such as in dressing rooms, kitchens and commercial or residential environments.
                                                                                                        It offers a VH-2Y connection at the main end, designed to connect to the high power outputs of the Smart converters (60W, 80W, 90W and 100W).
                                                                                                        The terminal block allows quick, manual connection without the need for additional connectors, optimising current flow and improving efficiency.
                                                                                                        The cable supports a maximum current of 7A, ideal for 84W to 168W systems with voltages of 12V DC and 24V DC.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with Smart converters and 12V DC and 24V DC LED luminaires, used in various spaces such as dressing rooms, living rooms and kitchens.
                                                                                                        Suitable for surfaces such as wood (≤30 mm), plastic (≤22 mm), natural stone (≤20 mm) and glass (≤12 mm). Not compatible with metal surfaces or mirrors.
                                                                                                        It has a detection field of 30 mm and is activated by touching the installed surface, generating a tactile contact that controls the illumination.
                                                                                                        No, the sensor is not suitable for metal surfaces and mirrors due to interference with touch detection.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with 12V and 24V DC LED luminaires and Smart converters, including up to 6 ports or secondary outputs with Miniled connection.
                                                                                                        The dimmer function allows the light intensity to be adjusted by a long zoom, giving full control over the brightness.
                                                                                                        The sensor is activated by touch, switching the luminaire on or off. In addition, the light intensity can be adjusted with its dimmer function by maintaining contact with the sensor.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor has two lenses that function as independent switches, allowing luminaires to be controlled from either lens indistinctly.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with 12V or 24V DC LED luminaires and Smart converters. It also supports up to 6 secondary outputs with Miniled connection.
                                                                                                        It is ideal for bed headboards or areas where convenient tactile control is required, such as built-in furniture or areas with direct access to the lens.
                                                                                                        Includes a 1.5 m cable with Miniled connections and an additional 1 m cable for the lens. Installation is easy thanks to its compact dimensions and recessed design in 8 mm diameter furniture.
                                                                                                        The SIMPLE model has a single touch lens for switching on/off and adjusting the intensity of the luminaire. The DOUBLE model includes two independent lenses for greater control.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a diameter of 8 mm for embedding in furniture. A 1.5 m cable is included and requires a compact installation space.
                                                                                                        Supports up to 36W for 12V DC luminaires and up to 72W for 24V DC luminaires, depending on the Smart converter used.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor can be connected to a single Smart converter, allowing all luminaires connected to the converter to be controlled simultaneously.
                                                                                                        The kit includes the sensor with a 1.5 m cable with Miniled connection and an additional 1 m for the lens, plus components required for quick and safe installation.
                                                                                                        The sensor allows the luminaire to be switched on, off and dimmed by means of two independent lenses. It also has a dimmer function for precise brightness adjustment.
                                                                                                        The DOUBLE model includes two lenses that operate independently, allowing different luminaires or zones to be controlled from each lens. The SIMPLE model has only one lens for similar functions.
                                                                                                        Supports up to 36W for 12V DC luminaires and up to 72W for 24V DC luminaires, always connected to a compatible Smart converter.
                                                                                                        The sensor must be recessed in a piece of furniture with a diameter of 8 mm. It is connected to the Smart converter via Miniled cables and has a compact and simple mounting.
                                                                                                        The kit includes the sensor with two 1.5 m cables and an additional 1 m for each lens, Miniled connections and all necessary components for installation.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 6 cm, which allows it to be activated precisely when a hand is swiped or a door is opened, depending on the configuration.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor is fully compatible with 12V DC and 24V DC LED systems, supporting maximum power ratings of 36W at 12V DC and 72W at 24V DC.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a small sensor head (8 mm diameter) that can be easily embedded in the furniture by drilling a hole. It also includes all the necessary accessories for fixing.
                                                                                                        Yes, it can be connected to a Smart converter with control port, allowing simultaneous switching on and off of all connected luminaires. In addition, it supports connection to the 6 Miniled ports of the converter for independent control of the luminaires.
                                                                                                        The sensor is made of plastic with a black finish, providing durability and resistance. It also features low power consumption and protection against electrical and electromagnetic interference.
                                                                                                        The sensor has a detection range of 6 cm, designed to be activated when the cabinet door is opened or closed.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor is ideal for wardrobes with double hinged doors, as it can be installed in a single opening. It detects movement of either door, switching the luminaire on or off independently.
                                                                                                        The sensor supports up to 36W with 12V DC LED systems and up to 72W with 24V DC systems.
                                                                                                        The sensor has compact heads with a diameter of 8 mm which are recessed into the cabinet by drilling holes. It includes a 1.5 m cable with Miniled connections and an additional 1 m for easy installation.
                                                                                                        Yes, the sensor is connected to a Smart converter with control port, allowing simultaneous switching on and off of all connected luminaires.
                                                                                                        The RF transmitter has a touch sensor that acts as a switch to turn the light on or off when touched with your hand. It also has a dimmer function that allows you to adjust the light intensity with a short or long touch. It works wirelessly by sending a radio frequency signal to the Smart RF receiver (not included).
                                                                                                        The RF transmitter has a range of up to 8 metres, allowing it to be installed in hidden or hard-to-reach locations.
                                                                                                        Up to 10 RF receivers can be linked per transmitter, making it easy to control multiple lights simultaneously.
                                                                                                        The transmitter has a 500 mAh battery that is recharged via USB-C, using a standard 5V DC charger. The full charging time is approximately 25 minutes with a 5V 2A charger. A full charge provides up to 700 on/off cycles, or up to 18 months in standby mode if the transmitter is turned off using the integrated ON/OFF switch (recommended for prolonged periods of inactivity). The battery has a service life of approximately 500 full charge cycles.
                                                                                                        Yes, the transmitter is compatible with Smart converters and 12V DC or 24V DC LED luminaires, and is ideal for applications in kitchens, cupboards or bedrooms.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned LED lighting.

                                                                                                        The cover screw should be used if you do not have another metallic surface for activating the touch sensor, it is also the most preferred aesthetic option. However, the Red Eye 5 metal touch sensor can be connected to any metal item in order to activate the sensor, for example the light fitting itself.
                                                                                                        In order to assemble a switch easily you need to adhere to the following diagram:
                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the monochrome control with the LED light controller.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the CCT control with the LED light controller.

                                                                                                        The following video shows how you can easily install the RGB control with the LED light controller.

                                                                                                        Yes, you only need to press the MATCH button on the controller and the ON/OFF button on each remote to link it.
                                                                                                        Yes, just press the MATCH button on each controller and the 1,2,3 or 4 buttons on the controller to link it.
                                                                                                        One LED controller can be connected to 10 remote controls.
                                                                                                        One LED controller can be connected to 10 Wi-Fi modules.
                                                                                                        One remote control can be linked to 20 LED controllers.
                                                                                                        We have a KIT with cod. 5205020 that allows you to transform the AMP connections to Miniled in order to use it with this converter.
                                                                                                        The connection for this type of 230V AC sensor with this converter is very straightforward, it does not require tools or electrical know-how. The quick connection including both the cable and the converter should be simply used.
                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        The following video shows how this system works:

                                                                                                        What types of light fittings can the Revosens control and at what voltage does it operate?
                                                                                                        What functions does its integrated LCD screen offer and how are the modes managed?
                                                                                                        What connectivity and remote control options does it offer?
                                                                                                        How many transmitters or receivers can be linked to the system?
                                                                                                        What is the signal range of the RF system and how is it installed?
                                                                                                        What is the recommended procedure for installing the sensor in different types of furniture?
                                                                                                        What is the maximum power the sensor can handle and how many lights can it control?
                                                                                                        What are the characteristics of the sensor's motion detection?
                                                                                                        Does it comply with any electromagnetic compatibility or safety regulations?
                                                                                                        What type of connections and materials does the sensor include?
                                                                                                        The converter has an ultra-slim profile of just 17 mm, making it ideal for installations in confined or hidden spaces. It should be installed on solid, non-flammable surfaces, ensuring proper ventilation to avoid heat build-up. Avoid humid areas or those exposed to extreme temperatures.
                                                                                                        This model includes two control ports. One is used to connect SMART sensors, centralising the on/off function of connected luminaires. The second port allows the synchronisation of up to 5 additional converters, enabling control of a large lighting system from a single sensor, improving system efficiency and simplicity.
                                                                                                        The converter is made with a Class II polycarbonate housing that provides reinforced insulation. It includes internal protection against overheating and short circuits. It complies with multiple international certifications such as UL, ENEC, CE, UKCA, CB, RCMCOC and SAA, ensuring safety across different regulations and markets.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with SMART sensors designed for 12V DC luminaires. It removes the power limitations found in standard sensors, supporting loads of up to 72W. Sensors can be installed directly into any of the 6 MINILED outputs, making it easy to design versatile installations.
                                                                                                        Includes 6 MINILED outputs, 1 high-power output (up to 7.2A), 2 control ports, 1 sensor adapter cable, 1 interconnection cable for converter synchronisation, and 1 two-metre power cable with 90° angled type C plug and IEC 60320 C7 connector. The entire set is optimised for fast Plug&Play integration.
                                                                                                        The cable has a total length of 200 mm, allowing for convenient and flexible installation, facilitating optimal placement of the RF Smart receiver to ensure proper signal reception.
                                                                                                        This model includes a connection for connecting to Smart Global LED converters. At the other end, it has a 3-PIN connection for linking to the RF Smart receiver and receiving radio frequency signals from RF transmitters.
                                                                                                        The cable is compatible with systems operating on 12V DC and 24V DC power supplies, making it suitable for a wide range of LED luminaires in residential and commercial environments.
                                                                                                        The product is designed to work with Emuca's RF Smart system, which complies with European electromagnetic compatibility standards for lighting products, ensuring safety and reliability in demanding technical environments.
                                                                                                        The cable is made of durable and flexible plastic, ensuring a long service life under normal conditions of use. It does not require specific maintenance or frequent replacement if installed correctly, making it ideal for long-lasting and stable installations.
                                                                                                        This receiver can control up to 5 independent luminaires connected to the same converter, or all at once using a single RF transmitter. Each output has an LED indicator that facilitates channel assignment in complex installations.
                                                                                                        It is fully compatible with Emuca RF transmitters with Smart sensors: switch (switch/dimmer), door sensor (door/proximity) and motion sensor (motion). This flexibility allows you to configure customised solutions according to the type of room or project requirements.
                                                                                                        The receiver can be concealed at a distance of up to 5 metres from the RF transmitters, allowing for discreet integration into furniture or false ceilings without compromising connectivity.
                                                                                                        Pairing is done by pressing the button on the receiver and then the button on the transmitter. To unpair, simply press and hold the receiver button for 10 seconds. This quick operation is ideal for installations with rotating lights or configuration changes.
                                                                                                        It works with 12V DC or 24V DC systems via Miniled connectors, making it suitable for low-voltage LED installations in multiple applications: dressing rooms, kitchens, bedrooms or contract solutions.
                                                                                                        To correctly install the Emuca flush-mounted switch, you will need a drill with a Ø21 mm bit, a compatible panel (wood, MDF, chipboard) at least 21 mm thick, a 12V DC power supply (max. 36W) or 24V DC (max. 72W) power supply, and LED lights with Miniled connectors. The switch must always be placed after the transformer, never on the 220V AC line. In addition, it is essential to work in a dry and clean environment, avoid cuts or modifications to the cables, and check the polarity before energising the system.
                                                                                                        The D21x20 switch functions as an electronic ON/OFF switch that controls the flow of current in low-voltage LED lighting systems (12V or 24V DC). By gently pressing the surface of the push button, the flow of current to the connected luminaires is activated or interrupted. Its mechanism is designed to operate in conjunction with power supplies, and does not regulate the intensity (it is not a dimmer), but simply turns the circuit on or off. Thanks to its Miniled connectors, the system allows for an immediate and safe response, without flickering or delays, offering effective control in functional furniture solutions.
                                                                                                        Yes, the switch can be connected to Emuca Smart converters, but it cannot be connected to their control port; it must always be installed on the secondary or output side of the converter.
                                                                                                        If you want to control several LED lights from a single switch, you need to incorporate a 6-output distributor cable and a Miniled input. This accessory allows the switch output to be divided into multiple branches, maintaining compatibility with Emuca's plug & play system. The distributor connects directly to the switch output and from there up to 6 lights can be powered simultaneously. It is essential to ensure that the total power does not exceed the system limits: 36W at 12V DC or 72W at 24V DC. This solution is ideal for applications that require uniform lighting at several points from a single control point.
                                                                                                        The switch operates exclusively with low-voltage direct current (12V or 24V DC), which complies with European safety regulations for installations in furniture (low voltage = greater safety). In addition, the connectors are designed to prevent short circuits due to reverse connection. It is recommended to use it in conjunction with CE-certified power supplies that are protected against overload.
                                                                                                        To correctly install the Emuca door switch, you need a surface area of 34x32 mm, Ø3.3 mm screws longer than 20 mm, a compatible panel (wood, MDF, chipboard), a 12V DC (max. 36W) or 24V DC (max. 72W) power supply, and LED lights with Miniled connectors. The switch must always be placed after the transformer, never on the 220V AC line. In addition, it is essential to work in a dry and clean environment, avoid cuts or modifications to the cables, and check the polarity before energising the system.
                                                                                                        The door switch turns the luminaire on and off when the door is opened and closed, thus controlling the flow of current in low-voltage LED lighting systems (12V or 24V DC). When the door is opened, the push button is released and the flow of current to the connected luminaires is activated to turn them on. Its mechanism is designed to operate in conjunction with power supplies and does not regulate the intensity (it is not a dimmer), but simply turns the circuit on or off. Thanks to its Miniled connectors, the system allows for an immediate and safe response, without flickering or delays, offering effective control in functional furniture solutions.
                                                                                                        Yes, the switch can be connected to Emuca Smart converters, but it cannot be connected to their control port; it must always be installed on the secondary or output side of the converter.
                                                                                                        If you want to control several LED lights from a single switch, you need to incorporate a 6-output distributor cable and a Miniled input. This accessory allows the switch output to be divided into multiple branches, maintaining compatibility with Emuca's plug & play system. The distributor connects directly to the switch output and from there up to 6 lights can be powered simultaneously. It is essential to ensure that the total power does not exceed the system limits: 36W at 12V DC or 72W at 24V DC. This solution is ideal for applications that require uniform lighting at several points from a single control point.
                                                                                                        The switch operates exclusively with low-voltage direct current (12V or 24V DC), which complies with European safety regulations for installations in furniture (low voltage = greater safety). In addition, the connectors are designed to prevent short circuits due to reverse connection. It is recommended to use it in conjunction with CE-certified power supplies that are protected against overload.
                                                                                                        The sensor must be installed at a maximum distance of 10 cm from the door or drawer. Its head rotates 180°, allowing installation on both left- and right-opening doors. It is fixed using the double-sided adhesive included with the product.
                                                                                                        It is compatible with 8 mm LED strips operating at 12 V DC (up to 36 W) or 24 V DC (up to 72 W). The maximum output current is 3 A. In standby mode, the sensor consumes only 0.6 mA (0.0072 W at 12 V / 0.0144 W at 24 V), ensuring minimal energy consumption.
                                                                                                        The sensor integrates capacitive IR technology, improving precision and preventing electromagnetic interference. It is designed for stable operation even in complex electrical environments and works within a temperature range of -20 °C to +45 °C.
                                                                                                        It features a Miniled connector for fast, secure and error-free installation. Supplied with a 1.5 m cable for direct integration into modules without the need for extensions or splicing.
                                                                                                        It offers progressive switching on and off, providing a smooth transition with no flickering or flashing. This enhances user comfort and extends the LED strip’s lifespan by avoiding instant surges.
                                                                                                        The sensor emits a short-range capacitive infrared signal (max. 10 cm), specifically designed to activate only when a door or drawer opens or closes in front of it. Its technology avoids activation by distant objects, vibrations or interference from nearby electronic devices.
                                                                                                        The sensor's design allows both horizontal and vertical installation, provided the detection range (max. 10 cm) is maintained and aligned frontally with the moving surface (door or drawer). This provides flexibility for tall furniture, columns or vertically opening systems.
                                                                                                          At Emuca we have two models of Circum cable grommets, a 60mm diameter and an 80 mm diameter. For large plugs it is advisable to use the Circum cable grommet with an 80 mm diameter.
                                                                                                          The motorised Lift Vision television stand needs a minimum of 5 kg to function. If you want to test out its functioning without any television secured to it, then it is possible that it will carry out the raising motion but not the lowering movement. You can resolve that by simply placing the television or an equivalent weight on it.
                                                                                                          The size of television sets or monitors is linked to the measurements of the VESA stands. This measurement is the distance that exists when you measure between the screw holes for assembly. The motorised Lift Vision television stand is compatible with telelvisions or monitors with the following VESA measurements between holes: 200 x 100, 200 x 200, 300 x 300, 400 x 200, 400 x 400, 600 x 400 mm, and other measurements such as 400 x 100, 600 x 100, and 600 x 200 mm. In the following table you can find a list with the equivalents that will allow you to have a more approximate idea of the stand that you need.
                                                                                                          The majority of televisions or monitors are compatible with VESA stands. You can check that in the back part of the device there is a square or rectangle comprised of holes for assembly with screws. If that is the case, the television or monitor is compatible with VESA stands.
                                                                                                          The Quadrum cable grommet makes it possible to pass through cables of any thickness and hide their connections easily, enabling access to them at all times thanking to its folding cover and its black plastic filaments. It is designed to be embedded into a worktop or a table with prior machining of 147 x 68 mm for the model code. 5010062 and 257 x 68 mm machining for the model code. 50124. It is fastened via clipping and can be mounted on very thick surfaces.
                                                                                                          There are two options: - Without using the rubber trim: remove the cover and the rubber trim, pass the cable through the through-hole and place the cover on again but without the rubber trim. - Using the rubber trim: it is possible to make a small cut to the rubber with a cutter, in a way that makes it possible to insert the cable and thus be able to keep the rubber mounted on the cable grommet. (Recommended).
                                                                                                          The thickness of the table or desk can range from 10 mm to 88 mm.
                                                                                                          You need to take into account the television set's measurements in inches. For example, if you want to put a 46" television on the unit, this is 102x57.5 cm in size. We will place the television on the centre of the stand, so for a television set 102 cm wide we will need around 110 cm. For the height, we will centre it on the brackets where it is attached, so between the stand and the television, the unit will be almost 800 mm high. Therefore, we would have an 1100x800 mm unit approx.
                                                                                                          To know the size of a television set you need to take into account the measurements in inches. This table shows you the main equivalents:
                                                                                                          The Atom multiconnector features a Schuko F-type plug (EU) with a maximum power rating of 3,000 W - 13 A, two USB type A connectors with 5V DC output (1 x 2A and 1 x 1.5A), and an HDMI 2.0 connector. This allows a wide range of electrical and electronic devices to be connected.
                                                                                                          The manual lift-off lid features a soft-close closure for safe and convenient access to the connectors. In addition, its design includes an LED power indicator for a clear display of the device's status.
                                                                                                          It is installed by machining on surfaces of 113 x 116 mm. Brackets and screws are included in the scope of delivery, ensuring a firm fixation and easy mounting on desks or work tables.
                                                                                                          The USB ports are ideal for charging mobile devices, tablets and other electronic equipment, while the HDMI 2.0 connector is suitable for connecting displays, projectors and other AV devices.
                                                                                                          The multi-connector is made of a combination of plastic and aluminium with a black painted finish, providing resistance to wear and tear and a modern design that integrates perfectly into any office or home space.
                                                                                                          The Plugy connector has 2 USB Type A ports, with a total charging capacity of up to 3.4A (1 port at 2.4A and 1 port at 1.7A). It allows you to charge two electronic devices simultaneously, such as mobile phones or tablets.
                                                                                                          The kit includes a USB connector (2 type A ports), a 30W 12V DC converter, and fixing screws. In addition, it has a protection system against overheating, power surges and voltage surges to ensure electrical safety.
                                                                                                          Installation requires machining in the cabinet with a diameter of 25 mm. The kit also includes a 2 metre power cable with European plug for easy connection.
                                                                                                          This USB connector is ideal for use in home, kitchen or office furniture. It is perfect for charging electronic devices in an accessible and discreet way on desks, worktops or desks.
                                                                                                          It is made of plastic with black or painted aluminium finishes. Its compact and aesthetic design allows it to be integrated into any space, offering a practical and modern solution for charging electronic devices.
                                                                                                          The Vertikal multiconnector has three Schuko-type sockets with a maximum capacity of 3500W (16A) and two USB type A ports, with a 5V DC output (1A/port or 2x0.5A simultaneously). It is ideal for connecting household appliances, mobile device chargers and other electronic equipment.
                                                                                                          The multi detector requires a mounting hole with a diameter of 60 mm and is compatible with surface thicknesses between 1 and 95 mm. This makes it adaptable to a wide variety of furniture in kitchens, offices and homes.
                                                                                                          The manual extraction and concealment system allows the multicontector to retract into the cabinet when not in use, achieving a discreet integration into the surface. To use it, simply pull it gently upwards until it is accessible.
                                                                                                          The multi detector is designed with safe and resistant materials and complies with electrical standards for 230V AC. This ensures safe continuous use, as long as the specified power limits are not exceeded.
                                                                                                          The LED indicator provides a visual signal that the multi detector is switched on and operational, enhancing safety and preventing inadvertent use in the event of a power failure.
                                                                                                          The USB Type A ports are compatible with older devices and offer standard charging, while the USB Type C port is more versatile, allowing fast charging and compatibility with modern devices.
                                                                                                          During installation, be sure to drill a clean hole with a diameter of 60 mm and avoid applying too much pressure when tightening the fixing nut. This avoids damaging both the multi-connector and the surface of the furniture.
                                                                                                          Electrical safety is ensured by its design to withstand up to 3600W (16A) at the Schuko socket and power regulation at the USB ports. Complies with electrical standards for 230V AC and protects connected devices.
                                                                                                          The multi-connector can be installed on surfaces with a thickness between 1 mm and 35 mm, which makes it suitable for a wide variety of furniture and boards of different materials.
                                                                                                          It is recommended to clean the multiconnector regularly with a dry cloth to avoid dust build-up, especially on the sliding cover. Avoid using abrasive chemicals to maintain its stainless steel finish.
                                                                                                          The multi-connector is compatible with devices that require connection to Schuko sockets (maximum 3680W, 16A) such as household appliances, and to USB ports (5V, 2.4A) such as smartphones, tablets and fast-charging electronic devices.
                                                                                                          The push pull-out system allows the multi-connector to be hidden when not in use. Light pressure on the top surface causes the multi-connector to lift up, providing quick access to the plugs and USB ports.
                                                                                                          For installation, a 60 mm diameter hole is required in the surface of the furniture, compatible with thicknesses between 1 and 60 mm. Fixing is carried out by means of a manual nut without the need for tools.
                                                                                                          The USB ports have a maximum charging capacity of 12W (5V, 2.4A) and are compatible with devices such as smartphones, tablets and electronic accessories that support standard fast charging.
                                                                                                          The multiconnector complies with 230V AC electrical standards and is IP20 protected, ensuring safe use in dry indoor environments such as offices, kitchens and homes. It is not recommended for use outdoors or in wet areas.
                                                                                                          The multi-connector is installed by drilling a 100 mm diameter hole in the surface of the furniture. It is compatible with thicknesses between 1 and 70 mm. No additional tools are required, as the fixing is carried out by means of a manual nut included in the product.
                                                                                                          The integration of Schuko sockets and USB ports in a single device allows charging various electronic devices and connecting household appliances without the need for additional adapters, optimising space and functionality.
                                                                                                          The multi-connector is designed to efficiently distribute the total power (3680W for the plugs and up to 20W for the USB ports) in a safe way, avoiding overloads by means of an internal system that automatically regulates the electrical flow.
                                                                                                          To keep the device in good condition, it is recommended to clean the surface regularly with a dry cloth and avoid using abrasive products. Periodically check the extraction system to ensure that it is working without obstructions.
                                                                                                          The power strip is certified for electrical safety for 230V AC and IP20 protection, ensuring safe use in dry indoor environments. In addition, its design prevents overloading and ensures the protection of the connected devices.
                                                                                                          The multi-connector includes: 2 Schuko-type sockets (max. 3000W, 13A) for household appliances and electronic equipment. 1 USB Type A and 1 USB Type C port for charging devices (max. 15W). 1 HDMI 2.0 connector for high-definition video transmission. 1 unshielded RJ45 port for standard Ethernet connections.
                                                                                                          To install it, the cabinet must have a space of 225x111 mm and a maximum thickness of 36 mm. The multi-connector is fixed with brackets and screws included, and no additional tools are required for final adjustment.
                                                                                                          The USB ports are compatible with devices such as smartphones, tablets and electronic accessories. Maximum charging capacity is 15W (5V/3A, 9V/2A, 12V/1.5A), enabling fast charging on compatible devices.
                                                                                                          The auto-lift lid allows easy access to connectors and sockets with a simple touch. When not in use, the cover hides the ports to maintain a clean and tidy appearance.
                                                                                                          The RJ45 connector is suitable for standard networks, but because it is not shielded, it is more susceptible to interference in environments with high electromagnetic emission. It is recommended for home or office use where interference is minimal.
                                                                                                          The Schuko-type plugs of the Atom 26 Lite multi-connector have a maximum load capacity of up to 3,000 W (13 A), making them suitable for household appliances and devices with high power consumption.
                                                                                                          No, the Atom 26 Lite does not include an internal overload protection system. It is recommended to connect the device to a mains power supply with additional safety measures if necessary.
                                                                                                          The USB Type A and Type C ports enable charging of electronic devices such as smartphones, tablets, smart watches and other compatible equipment with a 5 V DC output (1 A and 2x 0.5 A).
                                                                                                          To install the Atom 26 Lite multi-connector, a machining operation is required in the cabinet with dimensions of 225 x 111 mm, ensuring correct fixing by means of brackets and screws included in the scope of supply.
                                                                                                          No, the automatic lift cover is integrated and is not replaceable or customisable, as it is part of the design and functionality of the product.
                                                                                                          The Multiconnector One requires a minimum diameter of 54 mm to be machined into the surface of the cabinet to ensure correct installation.
                                                                                                          The included connection cable has a length of 3 metres and is equipped with an angled connector for convenient and efficient installation.
                                                                                                          Yes, the Schuko (EU) plug of the Multiconnector One has an integrated child safety feature, which prevents accidental insertion of objects into the socket.
                                                                                                          Yes, the Multiconnector One is designed to be installed on surfaces with a thickness of 9 mm or more, thanks to its innovative fixing system that fits securely.
                                                                                                          It is recommended to install the Multiconnector One on flat, solid surfaces made of materials such as wood, melamine, MDF or resistant plastic, which ensure a stable and durable fixation.
                                                                                                          The Multiconnector Circle 80 requires a machining diameter of 80 mm to be installed correctly on the surface of the furniture.
                                                                                                          The device includes an integrated child safety system, which protects the Schuko (EU) socket against accidental insertion of objects.
                                                                                                          The USB Type-A and Type-C ports allow charging devices with a combined maximum power of 5W. Up to two devices can be charged simultaneously, each with a current of up to 2.1A.
                                                                                                          The connection cable has a length of 3 metres, equipped with an angled connector for easy connection to a 230V AC power supply.
                                                                                                          Yes, the Circle 80 Multiconnector is designed to be installed on surfaces with a minimum thickness of 10 mm, thanks to its top screw fixing system.
                                                                                                          The installation of the Backflip Multiconnector requires a machining with dimensions of 88x215 mm, suitable for its correct integration in the furniture.
                                                                                                          This device can be installed on surfaces with a thickness between 10 mm and 40 mm, guaranteeing flexibility for different types of furniture.
                                                                                                          Yes, its flip-up design allows the sockets to be kept hidden when not in use, providing a sleek and discreet appearance.
                                                                                                          The Backflip Multiconnector includes 2 Schuko (EU) sockets with a maximum power of 3600W (16A) and 1 USB type A port, which allows charging devices with a power of 5W and a maximum current of 2.1A.
                                                                                                          The connection cable has a length of 3 metres, making it easy to install in various locations and to connect to a 230V AC 50Hz power supply.
                                                                                                          The Multiconnector V Dock has 3 Schuko (EU) sockets with a maximum permissible power of 3600W (16A), allowing multiple devices to be safely connected.
                                                                                                          Yes, the design of the Multiconnector V Dock allows it to be installed both horizontally and vertically, screwed onto the surface of the furniture.
                                                                                                          This multi-connector includes built-in child safety, preventing accidental access to the inside of the sockets and providing added protection.
                                                                                                          The power cable is 3 metres long, with an angled connector for easy connection to a 230V AC 50Hz power supply.
                                                                                                          The matt anodised finish of the Multiconnector V Dock provides a sleek, modern aesthetic and offers increased resistance to corrosion and everyday wear and tear.
                                                                                                          The Airtop 2 Charger is compatible with all devices that support Qi wireless charging technology, such as Qi-enabled smartphones and headsets.
                                                                                                          The charger requires a machining of D. 60 mm for installation on a flat surface, ideal for workbenches or office furniture.
                                                                                                          Yes, the charger allows you to charge one device via the wireless cradle and another device connected to the USB Type A port simultaneously.
                                                                                                          The charger features overheating and overcharging protection to ensure safe use while charging electronic devices.
                                                                                                          The included power cable has a length of 1.8 metres, providing enough reach to connect the charger to a nearby power outlet.
                                                                                                          The Linky connector allows three types of mounting: recessed in the surface, installation on the side of the furniture or below the surface, offering flexibility according to the design of the furniture.
                                                                                                          Precise machining of 81x12 mm is required, suitable for installing the connector correctly.
                                                                                                          Yes, it has overload, overheating and short-circuit protection systems, ensuring the safety of devices while charging.
                                                                                                          Yes, this connector supports fast charging via the USB C port, with a maximum power of 10W (5V/2A), ideal for charging devices efficiently.
                                                                                                          The kit includes a charging base, a 1.8 metre USB cable, a wall charger, flush-mounted and surface-mounted cover caps, screws and fasteners required for mounting.
                                                                                                          The Plugy USB connector requires a 25 mm diameter machining in the cabinet for proper installation.
                                                                                                          USB Type A and Type C ports allow you to charge electronic devices such as phones, tablets and other devices compatible with Fast Charge 3.0, with a maximum power output of up to 20W.
                                                                                                          Yes, it is compatible with 24V DC power systems. Requires a 24V DC to 36W or 30W converter, depending on the configuration installed.
                                                                                                          No, the power adapter required for operation is not included in the package and must be purchased separately.
                                                                                                          It is available in black painted plastic and painted aluminium finishes, offering high wear resistance and a modern design for different furniture styles.
                                                                                                          The AirTop 2 Wireless Charger requires 60 mm diameter non-through machining for installation.
                                                                                                          The surface on which it is installed must have a maximum thickness of 2 mm to ensure efficient wireless charging.
                                                                                                          The charger is compatible with electronic devices that support Qi wireless charging technology, such as smartphones, tablets and other modern gadgets.
                                                                                                          The package includes 1 charging base with 1.5 m cable, 1 positioning sticker and 1 wall charger for electrical connection.
                                                                                                          Yes, the AirTop 2 charger has built-in overcharge and short-circuit protection systems, ensuring the safety of both the device and the charger.
                                                                                                          The Plugy USB connector is designed to be recessed into furniture, offering a discreet and functional solution for charging electronic devices such as smartphones and tablets.
                                                                                                          It has two USB Type A ports with a combined output of up to 3.40A or 1.70A per port, with a total power of 30W.
                                                                                                          For installation, a 25 mm diameter cut-out is required in the cabinet and a 12V DC and 30W constant voltage converter is required for operation.
                                                                                                          It is ideal for charging a wide variety of electronic devices such as mobile phones, tablets and other USB-powered equipment.
                                                                                                          The kit includes a USB connector with two type A ports, fixing screws and everything you need for easy installation.
                                                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned the Atom 14 multiconnector.

                                                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned the Atom 26 multiconnector.

                                                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned the Vertikal multiconnector.

                                                                                                          The USB connectors on the Vertikal multiconnector are solely for charging 5V DC - 2.10A (2x1.05A) electronic devices.
                                                                                                          The Vertikal multiconnector can be opened upwards as well as downwards. It is designed to be built-into high units as well as low units thanks to its easily extractable retractile design and manual hiding. Its innovative design makes it possible to complete integrate into kitchen, office and home furniture, in low units with the opening upwards and in high modules with it downwards.
                                                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily install the USB Plugy connector.

                                                                                                          The USB Plugy connector is designed to charge Tablets and Smartphones in a discreet and accessible way thanks to its complete integration into the furniture.
                                                                                                          In order to charge two Smartphones, it is necessary to use the Plugy with the 15 W converted (code 7001420), while in order to charge two Tablets it is necessary to connect the 30 W converter (code 7001320).
                                                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned the Vertikal Push 60 multiconnector.

                                                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned the Vertikal Push 100 multiconnector.

                                                                                                          The following video shows how you can easily install the aforementioned the Vertikal Flat 60 multiconnector.

                                                                                                          The following video shows how to assemble the keyboard holder runners.

                                                                                                          The following video shows how a revolving TV base is installed in furniture.

                                                                                                          Yes, these grommets allow the most common cables and plugs, such as the F-type plug (SHUKO) and G-type plug (UK) to pass through.
                                                                                                          An operational E-Fan air freshener emits 28 decibels, a reduced value considering that the WHO establishes that a continuous noise level of less than 30dB is suitable for resting.
                                                                                                          The noise levels suitable for our environment depend on our activity, considering we are continuously surrounded by noise such as vehicle traffic, industries and construction sites. Exposure to prolonged noise can affect our health causing stress, anxiety, irritability, insomnia, fatigue, headache, dizziness, hypertension, muscle tension, heart problems, hearing loss (temporary, irreversible or progressive) and tinnitus. The range of human’s ear audible sounds is from 0 to 120 decibels (dB), 75dB can be harmful, depending on intensity or exposure time. The noise levels in our environment should be as follows: - At home from 40 to 50dB. These are the typical values of a quiet room and a conversation with no environmental or background noise. - To sleep 30dB. The WHO establishes that continuous noise should not exceed 30dB as it can disturb sleep quality, and an instantaneous noise should not exceed 45dB since it can result in waking us up in the night. - At work 60dB. The usual office environment noise level is 60 dB, being 85dB the maximum allowed in Spain for an eight-hour workday, in case the intensity increases by 3dB, the noise exposure time should be halved. - In the city from 50 to 90dB. The range is 50 to 90 dB, depending on the city vehicles traffic and the instantaneous noise such as sirens and alarms.
                                                                                                            The normal metric thread for screws on handles is M4.
                                                                                                            In order to change the handles on a piece of furniture for other new ones, it is necessary to take into consideration the measurements of the holes in order to make the most of them. With single hole handles, it is simple and you can choose any model as it will coincide. If, on the contrary, you have more than one hole, you have to measure from centre to centre of the hole. This measurement is what will determine the handle that you need in order to be able to easily install it without having to drill new holes. Check that the measurement is a multiple of 32mm, as they are normally 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, etc. If that is not the case, it will be necessary to have a special handle measure or cover up the holes of the previous handle with a product designed for that purpose. You need to bear in mind possible marks that have been created over time. A handle provides doors with a new look and it is a great solution for adding a new touch to a piece of furniture for a very low cost
                                                                                                            In order to install a handle or a knob it is necessary to have a drill with a drill bit for wood or metal depending on the material of the door. Also, you will need screws suitable for the thickness of the door, which must completely go through it in order to screw into the handle a bit. On the contrary, if you want to replace a handle with another new one that matches in terms of drilling measurements, it is sufficient to use a screwdriver. If the screw is for use in self-screwing wood, it is necessary to measure the thickness of the door in order to not go through it and to mark the back of it.
                                                                                                            Fitting a handle is very simple, you simply need to screw in a screw that is normally metric 4 screw thread, through the back of the drawer of the door. The screw must be sufficiently long in order to go through the thickness of the drawer or the door, and then also to screw into the handle in order for it to be fastened. Bear in mind that with drawers you will sometimes find them to be double the thickness.
                                                                                                            The main difference between a handle and a knob is their shape, which is normally linked to the number of holes. Knobs have a more compact form and only one hole, although there are some that have a second hole in order to fasten their position and prevent turning. On the contrary, handles are usually longer and normally have a minimum of 2 holes, depending on their size.
                                                                                                            In order to fit a recessed or built-in handle onto a drawer or on a door it is necessary to carry out prior machining and in some cases you can avail of a drill. In the event that it is circular, you will find cutters for use with a drill, therefore you will not need as a specific a tool as a milling machine. You will easily find different different diameters, therefore it is necessary to focus on the mounting diameter and you will have to see if the recessed handle has enough overhang in order to cover up possible marks that may be produced on the edge. In the event that there is very little overhang and you are afraid that it will be seen, especially with post-formed or melamine, use well-sharpened cutters in order to prevent this situation. In the case of handles with shapes, it is indeed necessary to use a milling machine and the cutter most appropriate for the embedding to carry out. Once the handle has been embedded in, the time comes to secure it. Some handles come provided with a little hole in order to be able to screw it at the inner sides and at other times they have holes through them. Another option is to fasten them with a kind of contact adhesive. Above all, it is important tat you bear in mind the depth to be embedded and the thickness of the door, using a stop in order not to mark the inner side of the door.
                                                                                                            Yes. Models manufactured in stainless steel or anodised aluminium are especially recommended for bathrooms, kitchens or commercial spaces, where humidity or frequent use requires materials that are resistant to corrosion and daily wear.
                                                                                                            The Madrid furniture handle is designed to offer a comfortable and functional grip on kitchen furniture, bathroom furniture or any space in the home, as well as providing a modern and elegant style.
                                                                                                            The handle is 298 mm long and is made of matt anodised aluminium for strength and durability.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Madrid handle is compatible with kitchen and bathroom furniture and other spaces thanks to its versatile design and modern finish.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle includes mounting screws for easy installation on furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle can be cut with appropriate tools to fit the specific size of your project.
                                                                                                            The Jakarta furniture handle has a total length of 155 mm, which makes it suitable for various types of furniture.
                                                                                                            The Jakarta handle is made of zamak, a corrosion-resistant and highly durable material, with a matt nickel finish.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing holes is 128 mm, which makes it compatible with most standard furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, the matt nickel painted finish of the Jakarta handle is resistant to daily use and maintains its appearance over time.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle includes the screws necessary for its assembly, facilitating its installation on any piece of furniture.
                                                                                                            The Austin furniture handle has a total length of 184 mm, which gives it an elegant and functional design for different types of furniture.
                                                                                                            The Austin handle is made of aluminium, a light and strong material, ideal for use in furniture.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing holes is 128 mm, making it compatible with common standards in the furniture industry.
                                                                                                            Yes, the matt chrome finish is wear resistant and provides additional protection against corrosion, maintaining its appearance for a long time.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle includes the necessary screws (M4 screws) for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                            The Boston furniture handle has a total length of 170 mm, which makes it ideal for modern, elegant furniture.
                                                                                                            It is made of Zamak, a robust material that combines durability and corrosion resistance, perfect for prolonged use.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing holes of the handle is 128 mm, compatible with standard sizes in kitchen and household furniture.
                                                                                                            The satin nickel finish provides a sophisticated, modern look and is resistant to scratches and everyday wear and tear.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle includes the necessary screws (M4 screws) for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                            The Catarroja furniture handle is made of aluminium, which gives it durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The handle is available in various lengths, such as 108 mm, 140 mm and 172 mm, with a mounting hole spacing of 96 mm.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Catarroja handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, depending on the needs of the furniture design.
                                                                                                            The packaging includes a handle and M4 screws for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the matt anodised finish offers high wear resistance and retains its modern appearance over time.
                                                                                                            The Dortmund handle is made of ABS, a light, strong and durable material, ideal for long-term use in kitchen furniture or cabinets.
                                                                                                            The Dortmund handle has a diameter of 98 mm and a 64 mm spindle, which makes it suitable for a wide range of furniture designs.
                                                                                                            It is compatible with kitchen furniture, cabinets and other types of furniture, especially those that require a modern and functional design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle includes the necessary screws to facilitate quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the mocha painted finish is highly resistant to daily wear and tear, maintaining its aesthetic appearance over time.
                                                                                                            The Sedaví handle is made of zamak with an aluminium painted finish, offering strength, durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The handle has a length of 137 mm and an interaxis of 128 mm, which makes it suitable for various types of furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Sedaví handle is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, office and other spaces, thanks to its functional and aesthetic design.
                                                                                                            Yes, it includes the necessary M4 screws to facilitate immediate installation.
                                                                                                            The handle can be installed in either horizontal or vertical orientation, adapting to the requirements of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The Xirivella handle is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which guarantees resistance and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The handle has a length of 64 mm and an interaxis of 32 mm, ideal for various furniture applications.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Xirivella handle is perfect for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, thanks to its versatile and durable design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the product includes M4 screws required for easy and secure installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Xirivella handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to different furniture designs.
                                                                                                            The Nantes handle is made of aluminium, which guarantees durability, strength and lightness.
                                                                                                            The Nantes handle has a length of 198 mm and an interaxis of 128 mm, making it ideal for different furniture designs.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Nantes handle is versatile and suitable for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, offering functionality and style.
                                                                                                            Yes, the product includes M4 screws required for easy and secure installation.
                                                                                                            The Nantes handle has a stainless steel anodised finish, which gives it a modern and elegant design.
                                                                                                            The Assen handle is made of acrylonitrile butadiene butadiene styrene (ABS), a strong and durable material that maintains its condition even in daily use.
                                                                                                            The handle has a length of 164 mm, a gap of 128 mm and a height of 30 mm. Ideal for kitchen, bathroom and office furniture.
                                                                                                            The handle has a black painted finish, which gives it a modern and elegant design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the product includes the necessary M4 screws for safe and quick installation.
                                                                                                            The packaging contains 25 units, designed for large-scale projects or series installations.
                                                                                                            The Almería handle is made of aluminium, a light, resistant and durable material, ideal for use in furniture.
                                                                                                            The handle has a length of 148 mm and a gap of 128 mm, which makes it compatible with furniture of different sizes.
                                                                                                            The handle finish is matt anodised, offering a modern design and elegant appearance.
                                                                                                            Yes, the product is supplied with M4 screws for accurate and fast installation.
                                                                                                            The packaging contains 25 units, perfect for large-scale installation projects.
                                                                                                            The Calgary handle is made of zamak, a metal material known for its durability and strength.
                                                                                                            The handle has a total length of 166 mm and a gap of 160 mm, suitable for most furniture.
                                                                                                            The handle is finished in satin nickel, giving it a modern and elegant look.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle includes M4 screws to facilitate quick and accurate installation.
                                                                                                            The Calgary handle packaging contains 25 units, ideal for series installation projects.
                                                                                                            The Malmo handle is made of ABS, a strong and durable material that provides excellent impact protection.
                                                                                                            The handle has a length of 167 mm, with an interaxis of 96 mm, ideal for various types of furniture.
                                                                                                            It is available in two finishes: painted aluminium and painted black, to suit different styles of decoration.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Malmo handle is perfectly suited for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture thanks to its strength and functional design.
                                                                                                            Yes, it includes the necessary M4 screws for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                            The Stockholm handle is made of ABS, a strong and durable material with a textured finish, ideal for everyday use.
                                                                                                            This model has a length of 150 mm, with an interaxis of 128 mm, making it compatible with a wide variety of furniture.
                                                                                                            The handle is available in a unique black painted finish, providing a modern and versatile design.
                                                                                                            Yes, its wear resistance and design make it ideal for kitchen furniture as well as cabinets, desks and bathrooms.
                                                                                                            Yes, M4 screws are included for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                            The L'Alcudia handle is made of aluminium, which gives it strength, durability and an elegant finish.
                                                                                                            This handle has a length of 78 mm or 148 mm, depending on the model, and an interaxis of 50 mm.
                                                                                                            Yes, this handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to various furniture designs.
                                                                                                            It is available in a matt anodised finish, giving it a modern and versatile look.
                                                                                                            Yes, the product includes M4 mounting screws, which facilitates fast and secure installation.
                                                                                                            The Castellón 160 handle is made of aluminium, which guarantees lightness, strength and durability.
                                                                                                            The handle has a length of 172 mm and an interaxis of 160 mm, making it ideal for various types of furniture.
                                                                                                            The design has a symmetrical and minimalist aesthetic, ideal for modern and elegant environments.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle includes M4 screws, allowing for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                            This model has an elegant chrome finish that gives it a shiny and aesthetic appearance.
                                                                                                            The Turís handle is made of ABS plastic, which makes it strong and durable with a modern and contemporary design.
                                                                                                            The dimensions of the handle are 147 mm in length, with an interaxis of 128 mm, ideal for furniture of various sizes.
                                                                                                            The Turís handle is available in black painted and aluminium painted finishes, to adapt to different styles.
                                                                                                            The package includes the handle and M4 screws for correct installation and is individually packaged to prevent damage.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Turís handle is compatible with both horizontal and vertical installation, depending on the needs of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The handles of the Torrent range are made of matt anodised aluminium, offering a modern design and high durability.
                                                                                                            The dimensions of each handle are 120 mm in length, with an interaxis of 96 mm, suitable for multiple applications.
                                                                                                            The set includes 10 handles and is available in matt anodised finish, ideal for kitchen, bathroom or office furniture.
                                                                                                            M4 screws are included with each handle to ensure correct and easy installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handles can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to the needs of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The handles of the Castellar range are made of steel with chrome and matt chrome finishes, which ensures high resistance and durability.
                                                                                                            The dimensions of each handle are 104 mm long, with a 96 mm spacing, ideal for various furniture applications.
                                                                                                            The set includes 20 handles and is available in two finishes: chrome and matt chrome, to suit different design styles.
                                                                                                            The set includes M4 screws, suitable for quick and secure installation of the handles on furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, these handles can be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, depending on the design and need of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The handles of the Utiel range are made of steel with a satin nickel finish, guaranteeing strength and durability.
                                                                                                            This batch is only available in satin nickel finish, which gives it a modern and elegant design.
                                                                                                            The dimensions of each handle are 152 mm in length and 128 mm spacing, ideal for different furniture applications.
                                                                                                            They include M4 screws designed for fast and secure installation, with perfect fits for furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handles are designed to be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, depending on the need of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The lot includes 20 Alfafar handles, each one accompanied by the necessary mounting screws, individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches.
                                                                                                            It is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture and is compatible with both horizontal and vertical doors.
                                                                                                            Installation is simple, as it is fixed with the included M4 screws, ensuring a firm and precise integration into the furniture.
                                                                                                            The Alfafar handle is made of high quality aluminium, which guarantees lightness and resistance to corrosion.
                                                                                                            The matt anodised finish gives it a modern aesthetic and excellent durability against daily wear and tear.
                                                                                                            The lot includes 20 Paiporta handles and all the M4 screws necessary for their installation, individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches.
                                                                                                            The handle is suitable for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture and can be installed on both horizontal and vertical doors.
                                                                                                            Installation is carried out by fixing the handle with the M4 screws included in the package, ensuring a firm and durable hold.
                                                                                                            The Paiporta handle is made of zamak, a robust and corrosion-resistant material, ideal for prolonged use.
                                                                                                            It is available in various finishes, such as chrome, painted black, painted aluminium and satin nickel, to suit different styles and preferences.
                                                                                                            The set includes 20 Bombay handles and the M4 screws required for installation. Each handle is individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches.
                                                                                                            The Bombay handle is suitable for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, and can be installed on both horizontal and vertical doors.
                                                                                                            The distance between the mounting holes of the handle is 128 mm, offering a standard and versatile size.
                                                                                                            Bombay handles are made of zamak, a material resistant to corrosion and wear, guaranteeing durability.
                                                                                                            The Bombay handle is available in painted aluminium and satin nickel finishes, adapting to different decorative styles.
                                                                                                            The lot includes 25 handles made of aluminium with the necessary screws for their correct installation.
                                                                                                            The Picanya handle has a length of 45 mm and an interaxis of 32 mm, making it ideal for a wide variety of furniture applications.
                                                                                                            The handle is available in matt anodised, gloss anodised, black anodised and stainless steel anodised finishes.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Picanya handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, depending on the needs of the furniture design.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                            The Orlando handle is made of steel with a black painted or satin nickel finish, ensuring durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The mounting hole spacing of the Orlando handle is 128 mm.
                                                                                                            The set includes 10 handles and the M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Orlando handle can be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, adapting to different types of furniture.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                            The Kobe handle is made of zamak with a high quality titanium-coloured finish, offering durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The distance between the mounting points of the Kobe handle is 96 mm, which makes it compatible with most standard furniture.
                                                                                                            The set includes 20 Kobe handles and the necessary M4 screws for their correct installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the titanium finish is designed to be highly resistant to corrosion, scratches and everyday wear and tear, ensuring a long service life.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches during transport, ensuring that they arrive in perfect condition.
                                                                                                            Kyoto handles are made of zamak, a durable and resistant material, with a high quality satin nickel finish.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing points is 96 mm, which makes them compatible with standard furniture.
                                                                                                            The set includes 20 Kyoto handles and the M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the satin nickel finish is designed to offer resistance to wear and maintain its original appearance for longer.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches during transport, ensuring that they arrive in perfect condition.
                                                                                                            The Nagoya handle is made of zamak with satin nickel and titanium-coloured finishes, durable and high quality materials.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing points is 64 mm, compatible with standard furniture.
                                                                                                            The packaging includes 1 Nagoya handle and M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Nagoya handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to the needs of the furniture design.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches, ensuring it arrives in perfect condition.
                                                                                                            The Seoul handle is made of steel with a satin nickel finish, offering high resistance and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing points is 128 mm, suitable for standard furniture.
                                                                                                            The packaging includes 1 Seoul handle and M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to the design of the furniture.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                            The Aldaia handle is made of zamak with satin nickel, black painted or metallic grey finish, which ensures resistance and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing points is 96 mm, a standard measurement for furniture.
                                                                                                            The lot includes 25 Aldaia handles and M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the desired design.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                            The Shanghai handle is made of zamak, a strong material that offers durability and a high quality finish.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing points is 128 mm, which is standard for this type of handle.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Shanghai handle can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the design requirements.
                                                                                                            The packaging includes a Shanghai handle and the M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                            The Algemesí handle is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish, which guarantees durability and a modern appearance.
                                                                                                            The distance between the fixing points is 128 mm, a common standard for easy installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Algemesí handle is designed to be installed both vertically and horizontally, depending on the needs of the design.
                                                                                                            The lot includes 25 Algemesí handles, each accompanied by M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid scratches and knocks during transport.
                                                                                                            The Glasgow furniture handle is made from aluminium with a matt anodised finish, ensuring strength and durability, as well as a modern and attractive design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Glasgow handle is designed to be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to different styles and needs.
                                                                                                            The Glasgow handle has a mounting hole spacing of 64 mm, which makes it easy to install on standard furniture.
                                                                                                            The batch of 25 Glasgow handles includes M4 screws required for installation and each handle is individually packaged to prevent knocks and scratches.
                                                                                                            The Glasgow handle is available in various lengths: 84 mm, 148 mm and 180 mm, to suit different sizes of furniture.
                                                                                                            The Minneapolis furniture handle is made of zamak with a satin nickel finish, giving it durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                            The distance between the mounting holes of the Minneapolis handle is 160 mm, compatible with most standard furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, the design of the Minneapolis handle allows it to be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to different styles.
                                                                                                            The package includes a handle and the necessary M4 screws for mounting, as well as individual packaging to protect against knocks and scratches.
                                                                                                            This handle is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, providing functionality and a decorative touch.
                                                                                                            The Pedralba furniture handle is made of zamak with a chrome finish, guaranteeing durability and an elegant design.
                                                                                                            The distance between the mounting holes of the Pedralba handle is 128 mm, compatible with standard furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Pedralba handle is designed to be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to different design needs.
                                                                                                            The package includes a handle and the necessary M4 screws for installation, all individually packaged to protect the product.
                                                                                                            This handle is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, offering modern style and functionality.
                                                                                                            The Tulip1 handle is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish.
                                                                                                            The handle is available in lengths of 126 mm and 158 mm.
                                                                                                            No, this handle uses a high quality self-adhesive strip that requires no machining or screws.
                                                                                                            It is compatible with drawer fronts and cabinet doors with a minimum thickness of 19 mm.
                                                                                                            Yes, the included adhesive is of high quality, guaranteeing a secure and long-lasting attachment to the edge of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The Chiva handle is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish.
                                                                                                            It is available in lengths of 62 mm, 94 mm, 126 mm and 158 mm.
                                                                                                            No, this model includes a high quality self-adhesive strip that requires no machining or screws for installation.
                                                                                                            It is suitable for drawer fronts and cabinet doors with a minimum thickness of 19 mm.
                                                                                                            Yes, the high-quality adhesive guarantees a long-lasting and secure attachment to the edge of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The Syracuse handle is made of zamak with a chrome-plated finish, ensuring durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the needs of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The product includes a handle and M4 screws for installation. In addition, each handle is individually packaged to avoid scratches.
                                                                                                            It is ideal for drawer fronts and cupboard doors in kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture.
                                                                                                            Currently, the Syracuse handle is only available in 145 mm length with chrome finish.
                                                                                                            The handles are made of hollow stainless steel with a black painted finish, ensuring durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handles can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the needs of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The set includes 10 handles and the M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                            Each handle has a length of 220 mm and an interaxis of 160 mm, adapting to different furniture designs.
                                                                                                            The handles are individually packed to avoid scratches and to ensure their quality during transport.
                                                                                                            The Veracruz handle is made of zamak with a matt chrome finish, which gives it a modern design and high durability.
                                                                                                            Yes, this handle can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the needs of the furniture.
                                                                                                            The package includes 1 handle and M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                            The handle has a length of 150 mm and a spindle of 128 mm, perfect for different types of furniture.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to protect it from knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                            The Burton knob is made of zamak, a strong and durable material ideal for use on furniture.
                                                                                                            The Burton knob is finished in satin nickel, providing a modern and elegant look.
                                                                                                            Yes, the knob includes M4 screws for easy installation.
                                                                                                            The knob has a total length of 40 mm and an interaxle of 32 mm and is compatible with many furniture designs.
                                                                                                            Each knob is individually packaged to prevent knocks, scratches and to ensure it arrives in perfect condition.
                                                                                                            The Osaka handle has a length of 160 mm and a 96 mm spindle, ideal measurements for a comfortable and aesthetic installation.
                                                                                                            It is made of aluminium with a dark grey finish, which provides strength and a modern and sophisticated design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Osaka handle is designed to be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to various furniture configurations.
                                                                                                            Includes M4 screws, which ensure easy installation and compatibility with different types of drawer fronts and doors.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                            The Ribarroja handle has a length of 144 mm and an interaxis of 128 mm, ideal measurements to guarantee functionality and aesthetics in its installation.
                                                                                                            It is made of zamak with a black painted finish, offering a modern design and high resistance.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Ribarroja handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to the needs of the furniture design.
                                                                                                            Includes M4 screws for easy assembly and compatible with different types of drawer and door fronts.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to prevent knocks or scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                            The Baltimore handle has an overall length of 211 mm and a 192 mm centre-to-centre distance, ideal for modern furniture.
                                                                                                            It is made of zamak, a resistant material, with chrome and titanium finishes available.
                                                                                                            Yes, it can be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, adapting to different furniture designs.
                                                                                                            The handle includes M4 screws for easy installation in doors or drawers.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks or scratches during transport.
                                                                                                            What is the total length and the spacing of the handle for Riad furniture?
                                                                                                            It is made of aluminium with a bronze finish, ensuring durability and style.
                                                                                                            The handle can be installed in horizontal or vertical orientation, offering versatility for different types of furniture.
                                                                                                            It includes M4 mounting screws, which are suitable for easy and firm installation on multiple surfaces.
                                                                                                            Yes, it is designed to withstand frequent use and is ideal for kitchen, bathroom and office furniture, even in demanding environments.
                                                                                                            The set includes 8 handles, each with a 160 mm spindle, suitable for many types of furniture.
                                                                                                            The handles are made of zamak with black painted and satin nickel finishes available, providing durability and modern styling.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handles can be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, making them versatile for different applications.
                                                                                                            The package includes 25 mm long M4 screws, designed to facilitate a secure and stable installation.
                                                                                                            Yes, each handle is individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                            The set includes 20 handles, each with a 224 mm spindle, ideal for a wide range of applications.
                                                                                                            The available finishes for the handles are chrome, black painted and satin nickel, offering modern and elegant options.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Zagreb handle can be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, adapting to different furniture designs.
                                                                                                            The package includes M4 screws, ideal for firm installation in doors with different standard thicknesses.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                            The Rize handle has a 160 mm spindle, ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture.
                                                                                                            The handle is made of zamak with a chrome finish, which offers a modern and corrosion-resistant design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle can be installed in either horizontal or vertical orientation, depending on the furniture design.
                                                                                                            The package includes M4 screws, suitable for doors with different standard thicknesses, ensuring a firm installation.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                            The Memphis handle has a 160 mm spindle and is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture.
                                                                                                            The handle is made of zamak with a titanium finish, giving it a modern look and corrosion resistance.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Memphis handle can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the furniture design.
                                                                                                            It includes M4 screws, which are compatible with standard door thicknesses and guarantee a firm installation.
                                                                                                            Each handle is individually packaged to avoid knocks and scratches, ensuring it arrives in perfect condition.
                                                                                                            The Canton handle has a length of 142 mm and a centre-to-centre distance of 128 mm, ideal for installations with standard dimensions.
                                                                                                            It is made of zamak, a material renowned for its strength and quality.
                                                                                                            Yes, the design allows the handle to be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation.
                                                                                                            The package includes a handle and M4 screws for mounting, with individual packaging to protect the product.
                                                                                                            The handle is available in satin nickel finish, suitable for different decorative styles.
                                                                                                            The Bergen handle has a length of 141 mm and an interaxis of 128 mm, which makes it compatible with standard sizes.
                                                                                                            The handle is made of aluminium, a light but strong material, ideal for use on furniture.
                                                                                                            Yes, the design of the handle allows it to be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, depending on requirements.
                                                                                                            The package includes a handle and M4 screws for mounting, with individual packaging for protection during transport and storage.
                                                                                                            It is available in black painted, gold anodised, rainbow anodised and brass plated finishes, providing multiple decorative options.
                                                                                                            The Turin handle has a length of 106 mm and a 96 mm spindle, making it ideal for most standard furniture.
                                                                                                            It is made of zamak, a strong and durable material with a modern and elegant finish.
                                                                                                            Yes, the handle's design allows it to be installed in either horizontal or vertical orientation, depending on the user's preference.
                                                                                                            The package includes a handle and M4 screws for mounting, with individual packaging to protect the product during transport.
                                                                                                            The Turin handle is available in black painted and satin nickel finishes, adapting to different decorative styles.
                                                                                                            The Sofia handle has a length of 157 mm and a centre-to-centre distance of 128 mm, ideal dimensions for various types of furniture.
                                                                                                            The handle is made of aluminium, a material known for its durability and lightness, with a modern design.
                                                                                                            Yes, the Sofia handle can be installed in either landscape or portrait orientation, depending on the user's preference.
                                                                                                            The package includes a handle and M4 screws for installation, individually packaged to protect against knocks and scratches.
                                                                                                            The handle has a black painted finish, giving a contemporary and elegant style to the furniture.
                                                                                                              The Cairo handle is made of Zamak, a highly durable and resistant material that guarantees its quality.
                                                                                                              The handle has a length of 110 mm, with a gap of 96 mm, ideal for furniture with classic or vintage design.
                                                                                                              The Cairo handle is finished in bronze, giving it an elegant and traditional look.
                                                                                                              Yes, the product includes M4 screws required for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                              The packaging contains 20 units, perfect for serial or large volume installation projects.
                                                                                                              The Haiti 76 handle is made of zamak, a material that provides strength and durability.
                                                                                                              This model has a length of 125 mm and an interaxis of 76 mm, which makes it ideal for various furniture designs.
                                                                                                              The handle has a vintage style, which combines perfectly with classic or traditional designs.
                                                                                                              Yes, M4 mounting screws are included to ensure correct and easy installation in drawers or furniture.
                                                                                                              The handle is available in an elegant bronze finish, which highlights its vintage and sophisticated design.
                                                                                                              The Nairobi handle is made of zamak, a high quality and resistant material.
                                                                                                              The handle has a bronze finish, ideal for rustic, classic or colonial styles.
                                                                                                              The Nairobi handle has a length of 139 mm and a centre-to-centre distance of 96 mm.
                                                                                                              The package includes 1 handle and the M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                              Yes, each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                              The Papua handle is made of zamak with ceramic details, providing durability and an elegant design.
                                                                                                              This handle is available in bronze and old silver finishes.
                                                                                                              It has a length of 127 mm and an interaxle of 76 mm.
                                                                                                              The package includes 1 handle and the M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                              Yes, the Papua handle is designed to complement rustic, classic or colonial styles.
                                                                                                              The Alberic handle is made of zamak, a strong and durable material.
                                                                                                              This model is available in bronze and black painted finishes.
                                                                                                              The handle has a length of 77 mm and an interaxle of 64 mm.
                                                                                                              The package includes 1 handle and the M4 screws required for installation.
                                                                                                              Yes, the Alberic handle is specifically designed to complement rustic, classic or colonial style furniture.
                                                                                                              The Massanassa knob is made of zamak, a durable and resistant material.
                                                                                                              This model is available in bronze and black painted finishes.
                                                                                                              The diameter of the knob is 32 mm.
                                                                                                              The package includes 1 knob and the necessary M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                              Yes, the design of the Massanassa knob makes it ideal for complementing classic, rustic or colonial style furniture.
                                                                                                              The Casablanca handle is made of zamak with an elegant antique gold finish, combining classic design and durability.
                                                                                                              Yes, this handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to the needs of the furniture.
                                                                                                              The package includes 1 Casablanca handle and M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                              The handle has a total length of 116 mm and a 96 mm spacing, ideal for various furniture applications.
                                                                                                              Each handle is individually packed to avoid scratches or knocks during transport and handling.
                                                                                                              The Doha handle is made of zamak with an elegant antique gold finish for modern design and durability.
                                                                                                              Yes, the handle can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to the needs of the furniture design.
                                                                                                              The package includes 1 Doha handle and M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                              The handle has an overall length of 110 mm and a 96 mm spindle, suitable for multiple furniture applications.
                                                                                                              Each handle is individually packed to protect it from knocks and scratches during transport and handling.
                                                                                                              The set includes 25 furniture knobs, made of zamak, together with M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                              The knobs are made of zamak and have an elegant bronze finish, ideal for classic or vintage styles.
                                                                                                              They are ideal for drawer fronts and cupboard doors in kitchen, bathroom, home or office furniture.
                                                                                                              The knobs include M4 screws, specifically designed to ensure a secure and stable installation.
                                                                                                              Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks or scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                              The Mombasa handle includes a zamak handle and an M4 screw for installation.
                                                                                                              The handle is made of zamak with an antique gold finish, which gives it a classic and elegant design.
                                                                                                              The handle can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the furniture design.
                                                                                                              The handle includes M4 screws, designed for secure and efficient fixing to furniture made of different materials.
                                                                                                              Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                              The Luanda knob includes a knob made of zamak with an antique gold finish and an M4 screw for installation.
                                                                                                              The knob is made of zamak and has an elegant antique gold finish, ideal for both classic and modern styles.
                                                                                                              The Luanda knob is designed for installation on drawer fronts and cupboard doors, making it ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture.
                                                                                                              The included screws are of type M4, offering a secure and efficient fastening in various furniture materials.
                                                                                                              Each knob is individually packed to ensure protection against knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                              The Damascus handle has a length of 149 mm and an interaxis of 128 mm, designed to fit contemporary furniture.
                                                                                                              It is made of zamak with a satin titanium finish, ensuring durability and modern styling.
                                                                                                              Yes, it can be installed in both horizontal and vertical orientation, adapting to various design needs.
                                                                                                              The handle includes M4 screws for easy installation on doors and drawers.
                                                                                                              Each handle is individually packed to avoid scratches and damage during transport.
                                                                                                              The overall length of the Beirut knob is 50 mm, which makes it perfect for small to medium sized furniture.
                                                                                                              It is made of zamak with a dark grey finish, offering strength and an elegant design.
                                                                                                              Yes, an M4 screw is included in the packaging for easy installation in furniture.
                                                                                                              It is ideal for installation in drawers and cabinet doors in kitchens, bathrooms, offices and other household furniture.
                                                                                                              The Beirut knob is individually packaged to avoid scratches or damage during transport and storage.
                                                                                                              The diameter of the Adana knob is 38 mm, which makes it ideal for various sizes of drawers and doors.
                                                                                                              It is made of zamak with an antique gold finish, giving it a rustic and elegant style.
                                                                                                              Yes, the M4 screw required for installation is included in the packaging.
                                                                                                              The Adana knob features a classic ring design, adding a decorative and functional touch to any piece of furniture.
                                                                                                              The knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                              The Lagos handle has a length of 145 mm and a spacing of 128 mm, perfect for furniture of different sizes.
                                                                                                              It is made of zamak with a black painted finish, which gives it a classic and resistant design.
                                                                                                              The handle can be installed either horizontally or vertically, depending on the furniture design.
                                                                                                              Yes, the M4 screws required for mounting are included in the product packaging.
                                                                                                              Each handle is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                              The Budapest furniture knob has a diameter of 22 mm, ideal for compact and elegant furniture.
                                                                                                              The knob is made of zamak with an antique gold finish for a classic and refined style.
                                                                                                              The packaging includes a knob and an M4 screw for easy installation.
                                                                                                              Yes, it is designed for use in kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, providing versatility in its application.
                                                                                                              Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                              The handle has a total length of 177 mm, ideal for large and decorative furniture.
                                                                                                              The handle spacing is 96 mm, allowing a precise and uniform installation.
                                                                                                              This model has an antique gold finish, which gives it a classic and elegant design.
                                                                                                              Yes, it can be installed both horizontally and vertically, adapting to various furniture designs.
                                                                                                              The packaging includes a handle and M4 screws for easy installation.
                                                                                                              The handle has a total length of 137 mm and an interaxis of 128 mm, which allows it to be installed on different sizes of furniture.
                                                                                                              This model comes in two finishes: black painted and old gold, both designed to resist wear and tear and maintain their aesthetics.
                                                                                                              The product includes a handle and the M4 screws required for assembly, individually packaged to prevent damage.
                                                                                                              Yes, the handle can be installed either vertically or horizontally, depending on the furniture design.
                                                                                                              Yes, thanks to its zamak construction, the handle is robust and hard-wearing, ideal for furniture that is subject to frequent use.
                                                                                                              The handle has a total length of 184 mm and an interaxis of 160 mm, adapting to different furniture sizes.
                                                                                                              It is made of aluminium with a black painted finish, giving it a modern design and high resistance to corrosion.
                                                                                                              Yes, it is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, thanks to its strength and versatile design.
                                                                                                              The package includes a handle and the M4 screws required for mounting, individually packaged to prevent damage.
                                                                                                              Yes, its aluminium construction and hard-wearing finish make it ideal for furniture that is subject to intensive use.
                                                                                                              The Ceuta knob has dimensions of 31,5 x 31,5 mm.
                                                                                                              This model is available in black painted and satin nickel finishes.
                                                                                                              Yes, its zamak construction makes it ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, offering durability and strength.
                                                                                                              Installation is by means of the included M4 screw, using a standard screwdriver.
                                                                                                              The packaging includes 1 knob and 1 mounting screw, individually protected to prevent scratches.
                                                                                                              The Tanger furniture handle has a length of 147.5 mm and a spacing of 128 mm, suitable for standard mounting holes.
                                                                                                              It is made of zamak, a material known for its durability and strength.
                                                                                                              Yes, the design of the handle allows it to be installed either horizontally or vertically depending on the needs of the furniture.
                                                                                                              The package includes a handle and M4 screws for mounting, all individually packaged to prevent damage.
                                                                                                              The Tanger handle is available in black painted and satin nickel finishes, ideal for different styles of decoration.
                                                                                                                The Portland furniture knob is made of Zamak, a robust and durable material that guarantees a long service life.
                                                                                                                The Portland knob has a diameter of 24 mm, making it ideal for a wide variety of furniture.
                                                                                                                The packaging includes a knob and an M4 screw for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, the chrome finish is resistant to everyday wear and tear, maintaining its shine and elegant appearance over time.
                                                                                                                The Portland knob is suitable for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, offering versatility and modern design.
                                                                                                                The Montevideo knob is made of brass, a high quality material that guarantees durability and strength.
                                                                                                                The Montevideo knob has a diameter of 10 mm, offering a compact and discreet design.
                                                                                                                The knob has a satin nickel finish, providing an elegant and sophisticated look.
                                                                                                                Yes, the Montevideo knob is very easy to install, as it includes M4 screws to ensure secure fixing to furniture.
                                                                                                                The packaging includes 50 units, ideal for large projects or serial installations.
                                                                                                                The Denver knob is made of aluminium, a light and strong material that offers durability and aesthetics.
                                                                                                                The knob has a diameter of 12 mm, ideal for combining with different styles of furniture.
                                                                                                                The finish is matt anodised, providing a modern and minimalist look.
                                                                                                                Yes, the knob includes M4 screws required for easy and secure installation.
                                                                                                                The packaging contains 50 pieces, perfect for large or serial projects.
                                                                                                                The Vienna knob is made of zamak, a strong material that ensures durability and quality aesthetics.
                                                                                                                It is available in satin nickel, adapting to different styles of decoration.
                                                                                                                The knob has a diameter of 20 mm and a height of 20 mm, ideal for small and decorative furniture.
                                                                                                                Includes M4 screws designed for quick and secure installation, ensuring an optimal fit in any furniture.
                                                                                                                The Vienna knob is ideal for drawer fronts and cupboard doors in kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture.
                                                                                                                Benetússer knobs are made of zamak, a resistant material that combines durability and elegant design.
                                                                                                                Available finishes include satin nickel and mocha, ideal for matching different styles of furniture.
                                                                                                                Each knob has a diameter of 41 mm, which makes them suitable for small and decorative furniture.
                                                                                                                The knobs are easily installed using the screws provided. They can be recessed or surface-mounted according to the desired design.
                                                                                                                This set of knobs is perfect for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, such as drawers and cabinet doors.
                                                                                                                The set includes 25 Albal knobs made of zamak, together with the screws required for installation. Each knob is individually packaged to avoid damage during transport.
                                                                                                                Albal knobs have a diameter of 16 mm, which makes them ideal for small furniture or as decorative details.
                                                                                                                Albal knobs are available in chrome and satin nickel finishes, offering options for different decorative styles.
                                                                                                                Albal knobs are ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, adding a modern and functional touch.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packaged, which guarantees protection against knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The Verona knob has a diameter of 25 mm, offering a compact and modern design.
                                                                                                                It is made of aluminium with a matt anodised finish, guaranteeing durability and resistance to corrosion.
                                                                                                                The package includes a knob and the screws necessary for correct installation.
                                                                                                                It is suitable for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, as it combines functionality and aesthetics.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                                The Santiago furniture knob is made of zamak with a satin nickel finish, offering durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                                The package includes a knob and the necessary M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, the Santiago knob is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, thanks to its versatile design.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                                Yes, the Santiago knob is designed for installation on both drawer fronts and cabinet doors.
                                                                                                                The Milano furniture knob is made of zamak with a satin nickel finish, guaranteeing strength and a modern design.
                                                                                                                The package includes a knob and the necessary M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, the Milano knob is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, thanks to its versatile and modern design.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport.
                                                                                                                Yes, the Milano knob is designed to be installed on both drawer fronts and cabinet doors.
                                                                                                                The Massanassa knob is made of zamak, a durable and resistant material.
                                                                                                                This model is available in bronze and black painted finishes.
                                                                                                                The diameter of the knob is 32 mm.
                                                                                                                The package includes 1 knob and the necessary M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, the design of the Massanassa knob makes it ideal for complementing classic, rustic or colonial style furniture.
                                                                                                                The set includes 25 furniture knobs, made of zamak, together with M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                                The knobs are made of zamak and have an elegant bronze finish, ideal for classic or vintage styles.
                                                                                                                They are ideal for drawer fronts and cupboard doors in kitchen, bathroom, home or office furniture.
                                                                                                                The knobs include M4 screws, specifically designed to ensure a secure and stable installation.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks or scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The Luanda knob includes a knob made of zamak with an antique gold finish and an M4 screw for installation.
                                                                                                                The knob is made of zamak and has an elegant antique gold finish, ideal for both classic and modern styles.
                                                                                                                The Luanda knob is designed for installation on drawer fronts and cupboard doors, making it ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture.
                                                                                                                The included screws are of type M4, offering a secure and efficient fastening in various furniture materials.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to ensure protection against knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The knobs have dimensions of 20x20 mm, ideal for drawer fronts and wardrobe doors.
                                                                                                                The knobs have a chrome finish for a modern look and high resistance to everyday wear and tear.
                                                                                                                Yes, the set includes M4 screws necessary for the installation of the knobs, facilitating the assembly.
                                                                                                                These knobs are ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, adapting to different styles and environments.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The Idaho knob has dimensions of 40x40 mm, ideal for complementing drawer fronts and wardrobe doors.
                                                                                                                The knob has a gloss titanium finish, which offers a sleek, modern design and resistance to wear and tear.
                                                                                                                Includes M4 screws, specifically designed for easy installation in different types of furniture.
                                                                                                                Yes, the Idaho knob is designed for use on kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, adapting to various decorative styles.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The Varadero batch knobs have a diameter of 25 mm, making them ideal for a wide variety of applications.
                                                                                                                They are made of zamak, a strong and durable material. Available finishes are titanium and old gold.
                                                                                                                The set includes 20 furniture knobs, including M4 screws for installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, the knobs are compatible with kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, adapting to different decorative styles.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks or scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The Portland knob has a diameter of 24 mm, ideal for small to medium furniture applications.
                                                                                                                It is made of zamak with a chrome-plated finish, which gives it durability and a modern design.
                                                                                                                The packaging includes a knob and M4 screws for installation, ready to use.
                                                                                                                Yes, it is suitable for installation on cabinet doors and drawers in kitchens, bathrooms, offices or any furniture.
                                                                                                                The Portland knob is individually packed to avoid scratches or damage during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The overall length of the Beirut knob is 50 mm, which makes it perfect for small to medium sized furniture.
                                                                                                                It is made of zamak with a dark grey finish, offering strength and an elegant design.
                                                                                                                Yes, an M4 screw is included in the packaging for easy installation in furniture.
                                                                                                                It is ideal for installation in drawers and cabinet doors in kitchens, bathrooms, offices and other household furniture.
                                                                                                                The Beirut knob is individually packaged to avoid scratches or damage during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The diameter of the Adana knob is 38 mm, which makes it ideal for various sizes of drawers and doors.
                                                                                                                It is made of zamak with an antique gold finish, giving it a rustic and elegant style.
                                                                                                                Yes, the M4 screw required for installation is included in the packaging.
                                                                                                                The Adana knob features a classic ring design, adding a decorative and functional touch to any piece of furniture.
                                                                                                                The knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The Panama knob has a diameter of 20 mm, ideal for furniture of different styles and sizes.
                                                                                                                It is made of zamak with a chrome-plated finish, ensuring durability and elegant design.
                                                                                                                Includes a 25 mm M4 screw, suitable for easy installation in various types of furniture.
                                                                                                                Yes, this knob is perfect for use on kitchen, bathroom, home or office furniture.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The Bucharest knob has a diameter of 26 mm, suitable for various furniture applications.
                                                                                                                It is available in satin nickel and black painted finishes, offering aesthetic versatility.
                                                                                                                It includes a 25 mm M4 screw, allowing for easy and secure installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, this knob is perfect for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture thanks to its modern design.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to prevent damage such as knocks or scratches during transport.
                                                                                                                The Baku knob has dimensions of 30x30 mm, offering a compact and functional design.
                                                                                                                This model is available in satin nickel and black painted finishes.
                                                                                                                It includes a 25 mm M4 screw, which ensures a safe and quick installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, the knob is made of zamak and its finish provides good scratch resistance.
                                                                                                                It is ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, thanks to its modern and versatile design.
                                                                                                                The Istanbul knob has a diameter of 64 mm and an interaxle of 32 mm, providing a unique and modern design.
                                                                                                                This model is available in a black painted finish, giving it a sleek, contemporary feel.
                                                                                                                The packaging includes a knob and M4 screws for quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, it is designed for use in kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, thanks to its versatility.
                                                                                                                Its ergonomic design ensures a comfortable grip, making it easy to use on a daily basis.
                                                                                                                The Budapest furniture knob has a diameter of 22 mm, ideal for compact and elegant furniture.
                                                                                                                The knob is made of zamak with an antique gold finish for a classic and refined style.
                                                                                                                The packaging includes a knob and an M4 screw for easy installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, it is designed for use in kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, providing versatility in its application.
                                                                                                                Each knob is individually packed to avoid knocks and scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                The knob has a total length of 60 mm, which makes it suitable for different types of furniture.
                                                                                                                It is made of aluminium, which guarantees durability, strength and lightness.
                                                                                                                The knob has a bronze finish and is individually packaged to avoid scratches during transport and storage.
                                                                                                                Yes, the package includes M4 mounting screws, ensuring quick and easy installation.
                                                                                                                Yes, its aluminium construction and durable finish make it ideal for use in wet environments such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                                                The Cancun knob has a diameter of 28.5 mm.
                                                                                                                It is made of zamak and is available in chrome, satin nickel and black painted finishes.
                                                                                                                No, installation is simple and only requires standard tools such as a screwdriver.
                                                                                                                This knob is compatible with drawer fronts and cupboard doors, making it ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture.
                                                                                                                The package includes 1 knob and its mounting screw, individually packed to avoid scratches.
                                                                                                                The Uppsala knob has a diameter of 30 mm.
                                                                                                                It is made of aluminium and is available in stainless steel anodised, black painted and sanded finishes.
                                                                                                                Yes, its aluminium construction with an anodised stainless steel finish makes it resistant to humidity, making it suitable for bathrooms.
                                                                                                                Only a standard screwdriver is required for installation.
                                                                                                                The package includes 1 knob and 1 mounting screw, individually packed to avoid scratches.
                                                                                                                The Ceuta knob has dimensions of 31,5 x 31,5 mm.
                                                                                                                This model is available in black painted and satin nickel finishes.
                                                                                                                Yes, its zamak construction makes it ideal for kitchen, bathroom, home and office furniture, offering durability and strength.
                                                                                                                Installation is by means of the included M4 screw, using a standard screwdriver.
                                                                                                                The packaging includes 1 knob and 1 mounting screw, individually protected to prevent scratches.
                                                                                                                The Argos knob has a diameter of 30 mm, which makes it ideal for furniture of different sizes.
                                                                                                                It is made of aluminium, which guarantees excellent durability and resistance to daily use.
                                                                                                                The knob is available in black, brass and gold painted finishes, adapting to different styles of furniture.
                                                                                                                Assembly is simple, as it includes M4 screws that are fitted using a standard screwdriver.
                                                                                                                The set includes 10 knobs and the screws required for installation, individually packaged to avoid scratches.
                                                                                                                It is made of zamak, a material renowned for its durability and strength.
                                                                                                                This knob is available in satin nickel and black painted finishes, adapting to various decors.
                                                                                                                Yes, it is compatible with kitchen, bathroom and office furniture, thanks to its modern and versatile design.
                                                                                                                  This magnetic lock has a holding force of 3.2 kg, ensuring that the door remains securely closed.
                                                                                                                    The kit includes 2 x 2.35 metre Gola profiles, 2 sets of Gola accessories and 2 brackets with screws for the profiles, providing everything you need for a complete installation.
                                                                                                                      The Sharp 16 handle is designed for cabinets with sliding doors made of 16 mm thick boards. It is ideal for sliding door systems where a minimalist and modern design is required.
                                                                                                                      The Line 19 handle is made of matt anodised aluminium, which gives it high corrosion resistance, durability against wear and tear and an elegant finish. This material is both lightweight and robust, ideal for heavy-duty furniture applications such as kitchens or high-end cabinets.
                                                                                                                      The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                                                                      The RAL of the white gloss finish on the rails and handles of the Placard sliding door system is approximately 9003. The RAL of the anthracite grey finish is approximately 7043. The RAL of the black finish is approximately 9011.
                                                                                                                        To install the Rhodes handle it is necessary to pre-machine 25x7 mm to embed the handle into the edge of the panel.
                                                                                                                          Yes. We have options compatible with melamine, solid wood, metal and other materials. In addition, most bases are easily secured with standard screws.
                                                                                                                          Levellers are components that are installed on the underside of furniture to adjust its height and level the surface. They are essential in environments where the floor may be uneven, allowing furniture to be perfectly aligned and secure, preventing wobbling and possible damage. They are used in a variety of furniture, from cupboards and tables to shelving and office furniture.
                                                                                                                          In order to know if a nut is compatible with a leveller, we have to look at the internal thread of the nut and at the thread of the leveller, which must coincide. For example, if we choose a 4 metric screw thread (M4), the nut also has to have an internal metric thread of 4 (M4).
                                                                                                                          This M10 leveller can be installed on furniture with melamine, solid wood, aluminium or steel frames that have an internal thread or are prepared to receive an M10 threaded bushing or threaded sleeve. It is ideal for cabinets, display cabinets, counters and support furniture.
                                                                                                                          The overall height can be adjusted from 67 mm to a minimum of 51 mm thanks to the metric M10 thread. This adjustment is sufficient to correct unevenness of up to 16 mm on uneven floors or to adjust the levelling between adjacent modules.
                                                                                                                          Yes, thanks to its sturdy plastic base and chrome-plated steel rod, this leveller withstands high loads and is suitable for installations in shops, offices, kitchens or even technical showroom furniture. The circular base distributes the weight evenly without marking the floor.
                                                                                                                          Installation can be done from the inside of the cabinet using a hexagon spanner or from the outside with a flat tool if the design allows. Adjustment is accessible even when the cabinet is in a vertical position, facilitating on-site installation.
                                                                                                                          This model is optimised for spaces where the base of the unit has reduced contact with the floor or a more discreet solution is required. Its 43 mm base provides good support on even floors without invading too much visual or functional space.
                                                                                                                          The hexagonal base allows for more secure tightening with a spanner or hexagon socket during assembly or adjustment, preventing slippage and facilitating work in environments where tools cannot be accessed from below.
                                                                                                                          It is ideal for tall cabinets, display cabinets, storage shelves, kitchen furniture or commercial counters, especially in installations where precise levelling from the outside is required for reasons of accessibility or finish.
                                                                                                                          The M8 threaded shank can be used in both M8 insert bushings and embedded nuts, facilitating its application in wooden structures, melamine or even metal profiles with internal threads.
                                                                                                                          Made of steel and technical plastic, it withstands high loads per support point and is suitable for robust furniture. Although the load depends on the layout and type of floor, it is commonly used in applications up to 60 kg per point.
                                                                                                                          Thanks to its visible hexagonal design, it can be adjusted from the outside with a spanner without the need to move the cabinet. This makes it especially useful for mounting in confined spaces or recessed furniture where access underneath is limited.
                                                                                                                          The M6 circular leveller Ø35x14 is suitable for heavy duty furniture in contract, hospitality, kitchen and office environments, thanks to its reinforced plastic base and M6 steel screw that provides resistance to medium loads and absorbs small irregularities in the floor.
                                                                                                                          The aluminium painted finish offers excellent aesthetic integration in furniture with anodised aluminium profiles, metal structures or technical furniture plinths, as well as corrosion resistance in humid environments.
                                                                                                                          This leveller can be installed both on wooden structures and on M6 threaded metal bases. For metal structures without internal thread, the use of compatible threaded bushes or inserts is recommended.
                                                                                                                          This leveller is available in three screw heights: 20 mm, 35 mm and 45 mm. This provides an adjustment range between 8 and 15 mm depending on the model, allowing uneven floors to be compensated for without affecting the stability of the furniture.
                                                                                                                          For applications on chipboard, pre-drilling and the use of M6 metal inserts is recommended. The tightening torque should not exceed 2.5 Nm to avoid damaging the thread. The use of screwdrivers with adjustable clutch is recommended.
                                                                                                                          To prevent damage to the substrate, a maximum tightening torque of 3 Nm is recommended when installing in 16 mm chipboard. On metal surfaces with pre-existing threads this can be increased to 5 Nm.
                                                                                                                          The system allows a height adjustment of up to 18 mm, with precision M6 threading and a base that prevents sliding thanks to its anti-slip geometry in technical plastic.
                                                                                                                          Yes, provided that an M6 nut is welded or inserted. It is also possible to use M6 threaded rivets in hollow profiles. The hexagonal base allows spanner clamping for easy fitting in metal structures.
                                                                                                                          Each levelling foot is designed to withstand loads of up to 80 kg in static axial compression. In assembly of four distributed units, a total capacity of more than 300 kg can be achieved for industrial or commercial furniture.
                                                                                                                          The levelling feet have been developed according to the criteria of stability and resistance in accordance with the guidelines of the EN 14749 standard for domestic furniture and EN 14073 for office furniture. They are suitable for use in contract, retail and kitchen applications.
                                                                                                                          On chipboard or MDF, a maximum torque of 5 Nm is recommended to avoid thread collapse. In metal structures with welded nuts, tightening can exceed 8 Nm without compromising integrity.
                                                                                                                          These M10 levelling feet are designed to withstand up to 100 kg per unit in vertical static load. In four-support applications, the complete system can withstand up to 400 kg, ideal for industrial or laboratory cabinets.
                                                                                                                          The hexagonal base facilitates height adjustment from inside the cabinet with a standard spanner. This reduces assembly times in contract projects or mass installations, improving ergonomics and accuracy of adjustment.
                                                                                                                          Yes, the compact 46 mm high design allows compatibility with retractable or demountable plinth systems. It is ideal for kitchens, technical cabinets and modular furniture with floor access systems.
                                                                                                                          For high-density laminated or compact boards, we recommend the use of M10 insert sleeves or embedded nuts. These solutions increase the durability of the assembly and allow repeated assembly and disassembly without loss of stability.
                                                                                                                          Yes, the zinc-plated steel bracket is designed for maximum compatibility with modular enclosure bases, allowing mounting on both open-bottom structures and with retractable or demountable plinths.
                                                                                                                          A guide hole of Ø10.5 mm with tolerance H11 is recommended to ensure an optimum fit of the M10 screw in wood, chipboard or metal structures. This facilitates tightening without damaging the support.
                                                                                                                          This model allows adjustment from inside the cabinet using a 4 mm hexagonal Allen key. This speeds up levelling even after the module has been installed in its final position.
                                                                                                                          The lid is made of technical polyamide, with high resistance to impact, temperature and wear. It withstands intensive use in industrial, logistic or technical furniture environments without losing its shape or colour.
                                                                                                                          The levelling + bracket set has a total height of 46 mm. It offers an adjustment range of ±5 mm, ideal for compensating for uneven floors or adjusting the alignment of modules in installations.
                                                                                                                          The Ledown leveller offers an adjustment capacity of up to 25 mm by means of an Allen key no. 4. This allows it to absorb manufacturing tolerances or floor irregularities, without altering the external aesthetics of the module thanks to its completely concealed installation.
                                                                                                                          Cylindrical machining with a diameter of Ø12 mm and a depth of at least 16 mm is recommended. The body of the levelling device is pressed into the side and rests on the lower base of the side, which ensures a direct load transmission.
                                                                                                                          Adjustment is made from the underside of the furniture using a standard Allen key no. 4. This system facilitates fine adjustment once the furniture has been installed, without the need to remove plinths or front panels.
                                                                                                                          Yes, its design allows adjustment from inside the plinth by means of a through hole or side recess. It is especially useful in kitchens or bathroom furniture where total concealment and accessibility from service areas is required.
                                                                                                                          Each leveller supports up to 250 kg. It is made of steel and zinc plated zamak, which ensures mechanical strength, dimensional stability and protection against corrosion in wet or exposed environments.
                                                                                                                          This leveller allows a vertical adjustment of up to 15 mm. It can be adjusted using a spanner or socket spanner compatible with the metal hexagon socket of the M10 screw, ensuring precision and ease of installation under furniture.
                                                                                                                          It is suitable for furniture with fine adjustment requirements, especially base units, showcases, technical cabinets or commercial furniture. Its large Ø51 mm base design provides greater stability and load distribution.
                                                                                                                          Zamak offers high mechanical and tensile strength, ideal for high load or heavy duty environments. Unlike plastic materials, it does not warp over time and is not affected by varying temperatures or moderate humidity.
                                                                                                                          This leveller is screw-fastened from the inside of the furniture through its M10 thread. We recommend the use of deep-drawn metal inserts or rivet nuts in soft materials such as chipboard, in order to avoid thread loss over time.
                                                                                                                          The leveller withstands a static load of up to 150 kg per unit (with base resting on a firm surface). It is manufactured to industry-standard tolerances and meets functional stability criteria in accordance with the requirements of professional technical furniture.
                                                                                                                          This leveller has been specifically designed for use with metal or plastic clamps compatible with Ø8 mm through holes. It is ideal for modular structures using internal fixings with no visible access from the outside.
                                                                                                                          Allows vertical adjustment of up to 22 mm by turning the M6 screw at the end of the leveller. This adjustment is made from inside the clamp, ensuring discreet and precise levelling.
                                                                                                                          To ensure correct and safe assembly, it is recommended that the insertion hole is located at a minimum distance of 22 mm from the base of the furniture. This ensures that the leveller can be fully extended without compromising stability.
                                                                                                                          This component supports moderate loads, ideal for modular furniture, wall units, wall structures or dividers with invisible fixing. It is recommended not to exceed 30 kg per support point for optimum performance.
                                                                                                                          The interior leveller allows a cleaner finish, with no elements visible from the outside. In addition, it prevents the component from being exposed to direct impact or humidity, increasing its useful life in professional or high-end installations.
                                                                                                                          The Giotto leveller allows a precise height adjustment of up to 25 mm by means of a hidden nut located inside the module. This adjustment is easily carried out from inside the cabinet, ensuring an aesthetically pleasing installation with no visible elements from the outside.
                                                                                                                          Thanks to its body made of Zamak, an alloy of zinc, aluminium, magnesium and copper, the Giotto leveller withstands static loads of up to 90 kg per support point. This makes it particularly suitable for heavy-duty furniture, contract applications and large-format storage solutions.
                                                                                                                          The internal design of the Giotto allows it to be completely integrated into the base of the furniture, avoiding interference with skirting boards, baseboards or other external elements. This improves the visual cleanliness of the whole, facilitates maintenance and allows precise levelling without altering the design.
                                                                                                                          Yes, the Giotto leveller has been designed to fit standard bores of Ø15.3 mm and 10 mm depth, allowing a smooth integration into CNC production lines. Its compact design favours automated pre-assembly in industrial plants.
                                                                                                                          Zamak offers excellent resistance to compression and frictional wear, maintaining stable dimensions even under high loads. In addition, it is highly resistant to oxidation and humid environments, surpassing technical plastics and galvanised steel in terms of durability and dimensional stability.
                                                                                                                          It is specifically designed for structures with metal plinth or modules that require adjustment from the inside of the side, such as kitchen units, technical cabinets or bathroom furniture with uneven floors. It is ideal for applications that require a robust and discreet fixing.
                                                                                                                          For assembly, an Allen key no. 4 is required to adjust the M10 leveller from inside the module. The bracket is screwed directly to the side of the cabinet with standard screws (not included), allowing a height adjustment of up to 25 mm.
                                                                                                                          The set has a sturdy metal bracket and a leveller made of steel and technical plastic. In standard applications, each unit supports up to 60 kg distributed, being suitable for furniture up to 250 kg if 4 units are used correctly fixed.
                                                                                                                          The system allows a height adjustment of 25 mm. The travel is designed to absorb uneven floors or compensate for differences between modules without compromising stability, with a minimum height of 46 mm and a maximum height of 71 mm.
                                                                                                                          This model incorporates a metal bracket that improves lateral support, especially useful in furniture that is installed in series or that requires frequent disassembly. In addition, its concealed plastic cover improves aesthetics and prevents dirt from entering the mechanism.
                                                                                                                          The M10x22 leveller allows a height adjustment of 10 mm, adjustable by means of an Allen key from inside the module. Its total length is 42.4 mm with a useful height of up to 52 mm, ideal for correcting unevenness in modular or industrial installations.
                                                                                                                          This model is designed for modules with pre-assembled legs, machined bases or furniture structures where the adjustment is made from the inside. It is compatible with solutions that require internal adjustment without front access.
                                                                                                                          Thanks to its construction with a zamak body and technical plastic base, this leveller offers high mechanical strength and stability on furniture supports of up to 250 kg, depending on the number of units installed.
                                                                                                                          It is essential to respect the machining of the module in order to correctly accommodate the M10 thread. The mounting must allow access through the side to manipulate the screw with an Allen key. It is recommended to install with centred thread to ensure alignment.
                                                                                                                          Yes, the design of this leveller allows it to be mounted on compatible plastic bases such as Bone or Frigo, as long as the base has an M10 threaded socket. This makes it ideal for adjustable leg systems in kitchens, technical modules or industrial furniture.
                                                                                                                          This leveller incorporates an M10 thread that allows millimetric adjustment of the height of the furniture. It is compatible with standard M10 nuts, which facilitates its integration into bases, brackets or industrial metal structures.
                                                                                                                          Depending on the model chosen, it allows a height adjustment between 38 mm and 66 mm. Its M10 screw with Ø23 mm base and plastic cover facilitates precise adjustment even on uneven floors.
                                                                                                                          This leveller is ideal for applications in technical furniture, metal cabinets, shelving or tables with high static loads. Its zinc-plated steel structure guarantees corrosion resistance in damp or heavy-duty environments.
                                                                                                                          Thanks to its threaded steel shaft and sturdy plastic base, this leveller can support up to 250 kg per unit in static use. The polyamide cover protects the floor and improves sliding without sacrificing stability.
                                                                                                                          It can be installed from inside the module using a recessed or welded nut. It can also be mounted externally on quick-fix brackets, adapting to modular or custom configurations.
                                                                                                                          The leveller allows a height adjustment of up to 5 mm, thanks to its internal thread system that acts on a reinforced plastic base. This function is particularly useful for correcting unevenness in installations on uneven floors.
                                                                                                                          The height adjustment is made by means of a 6 mm Allen key, which allows easy access from the bottom of the cabinet without the need to disassemble it, thus facilitating quick interventions during assembly or maintenance.
                                                                                                                          The leveller has a threaded body for press-fit into machined housings or compatible M8 insert nuts. It can also be fixed by means of additional components such as brackets or technical mounting brackets.
                                                                                                                          Thanks to its 26 mm diameter base and galvanised steel core, this leveller can withstand point loads of up to 250 kg per unit, making it suitable for heavy or heavy-duty furniture in contract environments.
                                                                                                                          This model is ideal for kitchen base units, technical cabinets, bathroom furniture and furniture in installations where the lower aesthetics are not visible. Its low height makes it perfect for areas that are difficult to access or have dimensional restrictions.
                                                                                                                          A maximum torque of 6 Nm is recommended for fixing to metal structures with an M6 nut. This value guarantees a secure anchorage without compromising the strength of the hexagonal plastic component.
                                                                                                                          The black plastic hexagonal base has a dimensional tolerance of ±0.1 mm, making it compatible with machine-assisted assembly processes (robot or pneumatic screwdriver), reducing insertion errors on the production line.
                                                                                                                          Yes, the M6 screw is fully compatible with threaded inserts (helicoil or metal M6 type) and metric steel or aluminium rivet nuts. This allows it to be installed in boards, metal profiles or composite housings with threaded reinforcement.
                                                                                                                          Thanks to its zinc-plated finish and technical plastic materials, this leveller withstands moderate ambient humidity. However, for outdoor applications or direct exposure to water, it is recommended to use models with bichromate or stainless steel treatment.
                                                                                                                          The hexagonal geometry allows secure tightening with a spanner or socket spanner, preventing slippage and improving accuracy in height adjustment. It is ideal for applications where access to the adjustment point is from the outside of the cabinet.
                                                                                                                          To ensure correct mounting, it is recommended to drill holes with a diameter of 4 mm for the fixing holes and a housing of Ø23 mm with a tolerance of H8. This ensures a firm hold of the leveller without backlash.
                                                                                                                          This bracket has been designed to be compatible with M10 circular base levellers with Ø23 mm. It is possible to use it with models of other brands as long as they comply with this measurement and the standard M10 thread.
                                                                                                                          Installed on 16 mm chipboard with Ø4 x 16 mm screws, the bracket withstands lateral loads of up to 120 kg. For structural load applications or intensive use, additional metal reinforcement is recommended.
                                                                                                                          The bracket is designed with a through hole calibrated for the passage of an M10 metric bolt or screw, preferably with hexagonal or Allen head. The use of self-drilling screws is not recommended.
                                                                                                                          Yes, thanks to its compact format (height 44 mm, depth 32 mm), the bracket can be fitted between double sides or in raised plinth areas without interfering with the bottom of the module.
                                                                                                                          The large diameter plastic base (Ø60 mm) distributes the load efficiently, protecting delicate surfaces such as wooden or vinyl flooring. The M10 stem ensures precise and robust adjustment, ideal for heavy furniture or intensive use.
                                                                                                                          This leveller supports up to 100 kg per unit, depending on the type of floor and correct installation. On hard floors such as concrete or tile, maximum performance is achieved. On soft surfaces, additional underlay reinforcement is recommended.
                                                                                                                          Yes, it is compatible with M10 wood insert nuts. It is advisable to use reinforcement sleeves or insert nut with structural adhesive to improve tensile strength in low density panels.
                                                                                                                          This leveller allows adjustment of up to 25 mm, offering an effective solution for uneven floors. The wide base design helps to maintain lateral stability, even on tall or narrow furniture.
                                                                                                                          The matt chrome surface treatment provides medium corrosion resistance. For applications in humid environments or protected exteriors, it is recommended to reinforce with a plastic washer or to use versions with specific anti-corrosion coating.
                                                                                                                          Adjustment is made using a 4 mm Allen key compatible with the hexagon socket of the screw. For professional series installations, the use of an Allen key with a pre-adjusted torque stop is recommended to ensure uniformity without damaging the plastic insert.
                                                                                                                          The M6 hexagonal 17x10 leveller supports up to 60 kg per unit in static applications, provided it is correctly bolted to metal or reinforced plastic bases. It is recommended to distribute the load evenly to avoid point stresses.
                                                                                                                          Yes, the steel screw and its metric M6 thread guarantee a good performance in situations with slight vibrations. In such cases, it is suggested to apply a lock washer to avoid loosening over time.
                                                                                                                          This leveller is compatible with threaded inserts in steel, zamak or glass-fibre reinforced technical plastic. For solid wood or chipboard, it is recommended to use a deep-drawn metal insert for M6 threading.
                                                                                                                          The zinc-plated finish acts as an anti-corrosion barrier, preventing premature rusting of the screw in environments with high relative humidity (kitchens, laundries, coastal areas). This significantly extends the service life of the levelling system.
                                                                                                                          This model requires a bore diameter of 22 mm and a minimum depth of 38 mm at the base of the module. It is recommended that machining is carried out using a CNC router or drill with depth stop to ensure a precise and firm insertion.
                                                                                                                          Allows a vertical adjustment of up to 25 mm, by means of internal adjustment with Allen key nº 4. This functionality is ideal for levelling kitchen furniture, modular cabinets or industrial installations where floor unevenness needs to be corrected.
                                                                                                                          This leveller is designed to be installed on chipboard, MDF or plywood with a minimum thickness of 16 mm. Structural adhesive or anti-vibration buffers are recommended if installing in areas subject to frequent impact or movement.
                                                                                                                          Yes, it is possible to integrate it into metal structures provided that an M10 threaded adapter bushing or a machined housing with a zamak sleeve is incorporated. This improves resistance to lateral stress and extends the service life of the system.
                                                                                                                          The zamak body provides structural rigidity and durability, while the black plastic base minimises the risk of slipping and scratching on delicate floors. In addition, the black finish visually conceals the component, ideal for designer furniture.
                                                                                                                          The lugs are designed to prevent the levelling device from turning during adjustment and to improve fixing to the board. They facilitate assembly without the need for adhesives or additional fixings, providing a reliable mechanical fastening on materials such as chipboard or MDF.
                                                                                                                          A cylindrical bore with a diameter of 23 mm and a depth of at least 35 mm is recommended to accommodate the base of the leveller correctly and to allow optimum adjustment using an M10 screw. The compact design facilitates integration into plinths and base units.
                                                                                                                          This leveller is optimised for wooden structures or derivatives, but can be integrated into metal frames using M10 sockets or insert adapters with internal thread. This extends its use in technical furniture or mixed structures.
                                                                                                                          For a secure fit without damaging the zamak insert, a tightening torque of 4 to 5 Nm with a 6 mm Allen key is recommended. This ensures precise level adjustment without compromising the thread of the component.
                                                                                                                            Yes, it is possible to cut the 80 feet. To do so, you need to cut the foot at the leveller part, once this part has been disassembled, and make the cut with a cutting disk/saw that is suitable.
                                                                                                                            The following diagram shows the detail of the machining that you need to carry out on the table top of a table in order to fasten the plate of the 60 - 80 feet.
                                                                                                                            The height adjuster of the Conus leg has a central nut that allows the desired extension to be securely locked in place. This mechanism prevents accidental displacement during use, making the table structure more rigid.
                                                                                                                            5 x 25 mm self-tapping screws are included, suitable for fixing to chipboard or MDF. Not recommended for use in phenolic boards or low density core materials without additional reinforcement.
                                                                                                                            Yes, the base of the Conus leg can be screwed to both solid panels and metal structures. For steel or aluminium profiles, the use of metal-specific self-tapping screws or rivnut type threaded rivets is recommended.
                                                                                                                            The leg can be cut at the bottom, eliminating the levelling section. The adjustable base must first be removed and the cut made with a suitable saw or disc. The lower limit will depend on the space required to reinstall the leveller.
                                                                                                                            The Conus leg, made of steel with Ø60 mm and metal fixing, is designed to support up to 100 kg per unit under normal conditions of use, provided it is installed vertically and on a firm and level support.
                                                                                                                            The legs include a height adjustment system by means of a metal mounting base with M12 thread, which allows precise and safe adjustment during the installation of the furniture.
                                                                                                                            Each leg has a load capacity of up to 90 kg, making it suitable for heavy-duty tables in kitchen, professional or office environments.
                                                                                                                            Yes, the height is adjustable in a range from 830 to 850 mm thanks to the integrated levelling system, which makes it possible to adapt to small differences in floor level or specific user needs.
                                                                                                                            The set consists of 4 table legs, 4 fixing bases and the necessary mounting screws for installation, facilitating a complete and quick assembly without the need for additional accessories.
                                                                                                                            Yes, the legs can be cut from the bottom of the leveller. It is recommended that the part is dismantled and cut with a shear or tool suitable for steel, ensuring a clean finish.
                                                                                                                            The Lift Table is height adjustable from 660 to 1170 mm, making it ideal for both sitting and standing work.
                                                                                                                            Includes 1 electric frame with motor, 1 adapter, 1 up/down switch, instructions for use and mounting screws. The board is not included.
                                                                                                                            The board should have a length between 1100 and 1520 mm and a minimum depth of 600 mm to fit the structure.
                                                                                                                            The structure supports a maximum load of 50 kg, making it suitable for office environments or workspaces with light equipment.
                                                                                                                            It is powered by an electric motor that is operated by an included control switch, allowing the height of the desk to be adjusted quickly and accurately.
                                                                                                                            Each leg has a height of 695 mm and a width of 695 mm, offering a symmetrical structure ideal for dining or kitchen tables.
                                                                                                                            The set includes 2 cross-shaped table legs with all necessary accessories for installation.
                                                                                                                            The legs are easily screwed to the tabletop using the screws included in the kit. In addition, cover caps are included to hide the screws and prevent marks on the floor.
                                                                                                                            They are designed to support up to 40 kg per leg, which makes them suitable for heavy duty tables.
                                                                                                                            This model is available in two hard-wearing and modern finishes: white painted and black painted, both made of highly durable steel.
                                                                                                                            The legs have a fixed height of 400 mm, which makes them perfect for side tables or low tables.
                                                                                                                            The set includes 4 table legs in the form of a circular rod together with the necessary accessories for installation.
                                                                                                                            The legs are fixed with screws included in the kit, and are easily installed by screwing the metal base to the table top.
                                                                                                                            These legs are made of steel and are finished in white or black epoxy paint, ideal for modern interiors.
                                                                                                                            Each leg can support up to 40 kg, guaranteeing stability for different types of boards.
                                                                                                                            These legs have a fixed height of 710 mm, ideal for standard height dining or work tables.
                                                                                                                            They are easily installed by screwing the metal base to the board with screws, which are included in the set.
                                                                                                                            Each Hairpin leg can support up to 40 kg, providing stability even on large boards.
                                                                                                                            They are made of steel with a high quality epoxy paint finish, available in black or white.
                                                                                                                            The kit includes 4 legs and all necessary accessories for installation.
                                                                                                                            They are available in 720 mm, allowing them to be adapted for use on standard tables as well as on slightly higher surfaces.
                                                                                                                            Yes, the kit includes screws and anchor plates for quick and secure installation on the dashboard.
                                                                                                                            They are made of steel and available with a black or white epoxy painted finish, ensuring durability and corrosion resistance.
                                                                                                                            Yes, its base with holes allows mounting on a wide variety of boards, adapting to multiple thicknesses and materials.
                                                                                                                            Each rectangular leg has a load capacity of up to 80 kg, making them suitable for desks, dining tables or work surfaces.
                                                                                                                            These square legs are designed for kitchen, home or office tables. Thanks to their 50x50mm steel section, they offer a robust and aesthetically pleasing solution for both residential and professional applications.
                                                                                                                            The set contains 4 legs, 4 connecting plates, 4 screws for plate/leg connection and 21 screws for board/plate connection Ø5x25mm, facilitating a quick and complete installation without the need for additional parts.
                                                                                                                            The steel plate connection system allows the final position of the legs to be adjusted, facilitating their alignment with the tabletop and providing greater structural rigidity to the assembly.
                                                                                                                            The legs are available in white or black painted finishes. In addition, they incorporate adjustable plastic end caps that allow them to bridge small unevennesses in the floor, preventing wobbles and damage to the surface.
                                                                                                                            The 50x50mm square profile steel provides high mechanical strength and a robust, modern aesthetic, making it an ideal choice for work tables or areas of intensive use.
                                                                                                                            The kit consists of 4 legs of section 50x50mm, 4 crossbars of length 650mm, 8 screws M8x15mm and 8 union screws 40x35 board, including everything necessary for installation without the need to purchase additional parts.
                                                                                                                            The 650mm crossbars provide a sturdy and stable structure for work tables, allowing precise and rigid assembly, compatible with different table top sizes within their limits.
                                                                                                                            Yes, thanks to the structural system composed of steel beams and legs, this model is compatible with modular structures, ideal for customised furniture projects or contract installations.
                                                                                                                            Yes, the legs are equipped with plastic end caps that act as an aesthetic finishing touch and allow the furniture to be levelled to correct small unevennesses in the floor, preventing wobbles.
                                                                                                                            Both the legs and the crossbars are made of steel, which guarantees structural strength. The finish is available in white or black paint, ideal for integration in kitchens, offices or technical desks.
                                                                                                                            No, the tabletop is not included, so you can combine it with the rest of the furniture. The components of the table are: 1 electric desktop structure with motor, 1 adapter, 1 up and down switch, instructions for use and mounting screws.
                                                                                                                            The tabletop must be larger than the structure, therefore it will depend on the chosen width. For the minimum length of 112 cm, the tabletop should measure 120 cm, and for the 152 cm one, it should be at least 160 cm. The minimum width is 60 cm.
                                                                                                                            The mechanism raises the surface 13,5 cm from the table.
                                                                                                                              Given that the unit load of each wheel is 70 kg, the complete Slip Ø100 4-wheel kit will withstand a weight of 280 kg.
                                                                                                                              The compact 30 mm diameter is ideal for mobile pedestals for everyday use, as it allows a low overall height of the unit to be maintained without compromising the load capacity. It also makes it easy to move around in confined spaces and areas with carpeting or rugs.
                                                                                                                              Can be fixed to chipboard, MDF or multi-laminate boards using wood screws or self-tapping metal screws in reinforced structures. The zinc-plated steel plate provides a rigid and stable base for direct bolting to skirting boards or interior reinforcements.
                                                                                                                              Yes. A common configuration is to fit two braked castors at the front and two unbraked castors at the rear, allowing the unit to be easily moved and locked when in position. This improves ergonomics and safety in the working environment.
                                                                                                                              It requires periodic cleaning with compressed air or dry cloth to avoid dust accumulation on the shaft. No lubrication is required due to self-lubricating plastic components, although in industrial environments dry grease can be applied to extend bearing life.
                                                                                                                              These castors are designed for dynamic loads up to 25 kg per unit. They have undergone rolling tests on hard surfaces, withstanding repeated cycles without deformation. Together, they allow drawer units of up to 100 kg with full stability when correctly distributed.
                                                                                                                              These castors are perfect for occasional furniture, filing cabinets, mobile pedestals, service trolleys or mobile tables. Their discreet design and grey rubber tread make them suitable for both office and home environments where functionality and neutral aesthetics are sought after.
                                                                                                                              The recommended layout is to mount the 2 braked castors at the front (user accessible side) and the 2 non-braked castors at the back. This allows easy immobilisation of the furniture when in use and freedom of movement when it needs to be moved.
                                                                                                                              The rubber reduces the noise level when moving, improves grip on the floor and prevents scratches on delicate surfaces such as parquet or vinyl. It also provides a smoother ride, ideal for indoor areas with frequent traffic.
                                                                                                                              We recommend the use of wood screws with a coarse thread Ø4 mm and a minimum length of 16 mm. The assembly must be carried out on rigid structures of the furniture, such as drawer bottoms or base reinforcements. An electric screwdriver with torque control will facilitate assembly without damaging the material.
                                                                                                                              With a capacity of 30 kg per castor and a metal axle with glide bearing, this lot is ready for frequent moves. It is ideal for furniture that requires regular mobility without compromising stability or component wear.
                                                                                                                              The ball bearing ensures a smoother, more precise and durable rotation even in continuous use applications. It reduces the thrust effort and prevents blockages in environments with high frequency of movement, making it ideal for office drawer units or contract furniture.
                                                                                                                              Yes, thanks to their steel construction and double-brake geometry, the wheels are designed to maintain stability even with diagonal displacements or off-centre loads of up to 50 kg per wheel.
                                                                                                                              These wheels can be installed on both wooden and metal structures. In metallic profiles, it is recommended to use sheet metal threaded screws or threaded rivets if there is no previous thread.
                                                                                                                              Bowl castors have been tested with more than 20,000 rotation cycles under maximum load and on different surfaces. They have a certified design according to office furniture standard EN 12529.
                                                                                                                              The double base allows a more stable and secure installation of the plinth, absorbing mounting tolerances better and offering a firm fixation to both the module and the trim, especially useful in kitchen modules with intensive use.
                                                                                                                              The base is made of high-strength ABS technical plastic, which makes it suitable for kitchens, laundries and wet environments. Its structure does not absorb water and withstands exposure to cleaning products without structural deterioration.
                                                                                                                              Yes, the system incorporates adjustment from inside the cabinet by means of a screwdriver or hexagonal spanner, which makes it possible to correct unevenness after assembly without the need to dismantle the cabinet or plinth.
                                                                                                                              Thanks to its robust design and wide base, the Bone foot supports up to 65 kg per unit, even under dynamic loads such as full-extension drawers or integrated appliances, thus distributing the stress better.
                                                                                                                              It is recommended to install at least 4 feet per module (more if the width exceeds 1200 mm), make sure that the bases are correctly fixed to the bottom of the cabinet with 4x16 mm screws, and do not exceed the tightening torque for fixing to the plinth.
                                                                                                                              The integrated ball bearings in the Mak wheels significantly improve the glide, allowing smoother, quieter and less stressful turning even under load. This translates into superior manoeuvrability and increased durability in heavy use.
                                                                                                                              With a diameter of 80 mm and a load capacity of 50 kg per castor, this batch is ideal for installation in mobile office furniture, storage trolleys, commercial displays or ancillary equipment in hotels and public areas.
                                                                                                                              The kit includes mounting screws for fixing to wood and derivatives (chipboard, MDF or plywood). For installation on sheet metal or structural steel, it is recommended to replace them with sheet metal screws or rivets as appropriate.
                                                                                                                              The 2 castors with brake incorporate a mechanical locking system that simultaneously stops the rotation and rotation of the support. The brake is operated from the outside of the castor, in an accessible position, guaranteeing total immobility of the furniture.
                                                                                                                              Yes, provided that the diameter and overall height are equivalent. However, to ensure homogeneous behaviour and uniform aesthetics, it is recommended to keep the same model (Mak) in all 4 mounting positions.
                                                                                                                              Thanks to their load capacity of up to 35 kg per castor (Ø50 mm model), these Slip castors are designed for home, office or contract furniture requiring light mobility, such as filing cabinets, trolleys, display cabinets or medium-sized cupboards.
                                                                                                                              To ensure secure installation without damaging the furniture frame, a tightening torque between 2.5 Nm and 3.5 Nm is recommended using Ø4 mm self-tapping screws with countersunk head. The reinforced holes in the zinc-plated mounting plate must be used.
                                                                                                                              The Slip wheel incorporates a heavy-duty plastic tread with stable behaviour in wet indoor environments. However, it is not suitable for prolonged outdoor use or excessively rough or abrasive floors where its smooth glide could be compromised.
                                                                                                                              Yes, both versions share the same plate design (zinc-plated) and fixing dimensions, allowing a braked wheel to be replaced by a non-braked wheel (and vice versa) without the need to modify the furniture structure.
                                                                                                                              Slip wheels are designed under standard technical parameters of dynamic load and rolling tests. For contract or OEM projects, durability test results are available under conditions of 10,000 cycles at constant load in controlled environments.
                                                                                                                              A controlled insertion pressure of 5 to 8 kgf is recommended to achieve a stable fit in Ø26 mm housings. The zinc plated base design allows firm seating without the need for additional adhesive or reinforcement.
                                                                                                                              These castors are designed to fit into chipboard, MDF or solid wood. A minimum depth of 4 mm and pre-machining with a cup drill is recommended to ensure a flush and play-free insertion.
                                                                                                                              Thanks to their zinc-plated steel construction and technical plastic core, each castor can withstand up to 8 kg in static, one-off use, making them ideal for pull-out trays, rotary lids or auxiliary modules with low loads.
                                                                                                                              Yes, their auxiliary function is compatible with hinged flaps or modules with side swivel opening. They do not interfere with hinge mechanisms thanks to their reduced height and recessed format.
                                                                                                                              For precise installations we recommend the use of a hand press, cup drill Ø26 mm, depth set to 5 mm, and in some cases additional fixing with Ø3 mm screws in the holes provided in the base.
                                                                                                                              The braked castor allows both the rotation of the bearing and the rotation of the fork to be blocked, offering greater stability on mobile furniture. Unbraked castors are used for ease of movement and manoeuvrability. The kit includes 2 of each type for optimum balance.
                                                                                                                              Yes, the zinc-plated steel fixing base distributes the load adequately. However, for modules with weights close to 40 kg per castor, it is recommended to anchor the castors with through bolts or internal reinforcement with MDF or plywood reinforcement.
                                                                                                                              The transparent thermoplastic rubber provides a smooth and quiet ride on hard floors (such as ceramic, parquet or laminate), without leaving marks or damaging the surface. It also provides a more discreet visual finish, ideal for minimalist furniture designs.
                                                                                                                              These castors are designed to meet dynamic load requirements for furniture in accordance with UNE-EN 12527:2022 standards for domestic or office use, with a load resistance of up to 40 kg per castor under continuous use test.
                                                                                                                              A tightening torque of between 2.5 and 3 Nm is recommended for Ø4 mm screws, which guarantees secure anchoring without damaging the panel or the furniture material. In repetitive assemblies, the use of screwdrivers with adjustable stop is recommended.
                                                                                                                              The wheel includes a square metal plate with countersunk holes for fixing screws. It is compatible with melamine, MDF or metal bases. The use of Ø4 to Ø5 mm countersunk head screws is recommended for a firm anchorage.
                                                                                                                              Yes, the tread is made of transparent thermoplastic rubber, ideal for vinyl, parquet or laminate floors. It provides a smooth and quiet glide without leaving marks or causing abrasion on sensitive surfaces.
                                                                                                                              This castor is designed for loads up to 40 kg per unit. For applications above this threshold, it is recommended to use wheels with a higher load capacity or to distribute the load over more wheels to ensure stability and durability.
                                                                                                                              The version with brake includes a locking mechanism that acts on the rotation of the wheel and the rotation of the axle, which provides greater security in fixed positions. The version without brake is ideal for furniture that requires maximum mobility without the need for locking.
                                                                                                                              Periodic cleaning of the shaft and tread is recommended to avoid accumulation of dust or fibres that may interfere with rotation. No lubrication is required, as the chrome-plated steel shaft and bearings are designed for long maintenance-free operation.
                                                                                                                              It is recommended that Ø4 mm x 16 mm wood screws are used in each of the four holes in the plate. It is essential that the surface is flat and at least 16 mm thick to ensure a secure and stable fixing.
                                                                                                                              The main difference lies in the thickness of the metal bracket and the bearing system. The 40 kg versions offer greater structural robustness and smoother rotation under continuous load, ideal for professional applications or heavy duty furniture.
                                                                                                                              Yes, thanks to its semi-soft grey plastic tread, it significantly reduces marking and protects delicate floors. However, it is recommended to check the wheel load and weight distribution on heavy modules.
                                                                                                                              The ball bearing assembly on the rotating shaft allows smooth, lock-free rotation, even after multiple cycles. Its performance has been validated for more than 10,000 rotation cycles in laboratory tests.
                                                                                                                              Of course. It is common to combine two Slip castors without brakes with two Slip castors with brakes in applications such as side units or trolleys. This configuration allows controlled mobility and a fixed position when the brake is activated.
                                                                                                                              The castor incorporates a spigot with thread and plastic fixing nut. For assembly, it is necessary to drill a Ø10 mm through hole in the furniture board (minimum thickness 16 mm) to insert the spigot, which is fixed on the inside with the included nut.
                                                                                                                              Yes, this castor is suitable for melamine, MDF and chipboard structures. It is recommended to reinforce the fixing point if the furniture is to be moved frequently or is loaded with more than 30 kg.
                                                                                                                              The nut fixing system allows a more discreet integration from the outside of the module, which improves the aesthetics in light furniture applications. In addition, it is quicker to assemble in series or automated installations.
                                                                                                                              Thanks to its 50 mm diameter and technical plastic tread design, it performs well on parquet, stoneware or wooden floors with minor unevenness. Not recommended for use on carpeted or carpeted floors.
                                                                                                                              Provided that there is internal access to the anchorage point for the fixing nut, it is possible to integrate it into pedestals with feet. Otherwise, it is preferable to use models with a front or side mounting plate.
                                                                                                                              The Bowl castor with mounting plate is fastened with screws in the preformed holes in the top plate (zinc-plated steel). We recommend using Ø4 mm flat-head or countersunk screws with a minimum length of 16 mm, suitable for the furniture material (melamine, MDF or chipboard).
                                                                                                                              The ball bearing allows a much smoother and quieter movement, ideal for light everyday furniture. This system improves the durability of the assembly and reduces wear and tear on delicate floors such as laminate or parquet.
                                                                                                                              Yes, provided that the surface is suitable for fastening with screws. For extruded aluminium profiles, the use of self-drilling screws or rivet nuts type M4 is recommended to ensure a firm and durable fastening.
                                                                                                                              The recommended load per castor is 50 kg. On furniture with four correctly installed castors, a total load of up to 200 kg can be distributed, provided that the weight is evenly distributed and the surface is stable.
                                                                                                                              For optimum performance, it is advisable to periodically check the condition of the ball bearing and remove accumulated dust or debris. In high humidity or dusty environments, applying a small amount of dry lubricant can prolong service life.
                                                                                                                              The set consists of 4 castors: 2 with brakes and 2 without brakes, plus mounting screws. The entire system is packaged in a single batch.
                                                                                                                              Each wheel can carry up to 70 kg, so that the complete batch allows a maximum load of 280 kg.
                                                                                                                              The castors are made of a combination of steel and plastic with a grey finish. This structure ensures resistance to use in domestic and office applications.
                                                                                                                              Slip 2 castors include a mounting plate with screws for easy installation directly onto the base of the furniture.
                                                                                                                              These castors are ideal for all types of home and office furniture, thanks to their ease of installation and combination of castors with and without brakes.
                                                                                                                              The kit contains 4 castors (2 with brake and 2 without brake) together with the necessary screws for fixing, all included in the scope of delivery.
                                                                                                                              Each wheel in the Black batch with a diameter of 50 mm supports up to 35 kg, allowing a total combined load of up to 140 kg per batch.
                                                                                                                              The rubber tread ensures a quiet and smooth ride and protects floors from marks and scratches.
                                                                                                                              The castors are designed to be fixed by means of a metal plate with screws (included), allowing quick and safe installation on different types of furniture.
                                                                                                                              They are ideal for home furniture, chest of drawers, desks or furniture in youth bedrooms, offering manoeuvrability and style thanks to their black finish.
                                                                                                                              Each castor can support up to 25 kg, allowing a total load of 100 kg per kit, ideal for office or bedroom drawer units with moderate weight.
                                                                                                                              These castors are mounted by means of an M8 threaded bolt, which facilitates direct and secure attachment to the furniture without the need for additional plates.
                                                                                                                              No, this specific model consists of 4 wheels without brakes. It is ideal for applications requiring free and continuous movement.
                                                                                                                              They are designed to provide a smooth and quiet glide, ideal for environments such as offices and youth dorms where noise-free mobility is valued.
                                                                                                                              The castors are made of steel and black plastic, providing good resistance to continuous use and a discreet, professional aesthetic.
                                                                                                                              The set consists of 4 castors in total: 2 with brakes and 2 without brakes, offering a balance between mobility and stability for home and office applications.
                                                                                                                              These castors have a diameter of 50 mm, making them ideal for low to medium height furniture that requires good manoeuvrability without compromising stability.
                                                                                                                              The tread is made of red rubber, which provides a smooth and quiet ride while protecting delicate surfaces such as parquet or ceramic tiles.
                                                                                                                              Each castor supports up to 50 kg load, allowing a total capacity of up to 200 kg per kit, suitable for desks, occasional furniture or mobile modules with a medium load.
                                                                                                                              Yes, the screws required for plate mounting are included in the package, which simplifies immediate installation without the need for additional components.
                                                                                                                              Each castor supports up to 60 kg, so the 4-wheeled set can carry a total load of up to 240 kg, ideal for heavy duty home and office furniture.
                                                                                                                              These castors are fitted with ball bearings, allowing for smooth and quiet running, even on delicate surfaces or in high traffic areas.
                                                                                                                              Yes, the screws required for centre-hole plate mounting are included in the package, which facilitates immediate installation without additional accessories.
                                                                                                                              The set is made of steel with a black painted finish, combined with plastic elements, providing a modern and wear-resistant design.
                                                                                                                              Yes, the set consists of 4 castors with brakes, allowing total immobilisation of the furniture when necessary, ideal for areas where stability is required.
                                                                                                                              The set includes 4 Ø50 mm castors: 2 with brakes and 2 without brakes, together with all necessary mounting screws for installation by means of a plate.
                                                                                                                              Each Bowl 2 castor can hold up to 60 kg, allowing a total load of 240 kg per set, ideal for home and office furniture.
                                                                                                                              The locking castors of the Bowl 2 kit are fitted with a red locking mechanism that allows the unit to be securely locked when required.
                                                                                                                              They are made of plastic with a grey finish and a zinc-plated steel structure on the mounting base, offering resistance to wear and stability.
                                                                                                                              Yes, thanks to their integrated ball bearings, these castors offer a smooth and quiet ride, ideal for delicate floors and shared spaces.
                                                                                                                              The set contains 4 castors: 2 with brakes and 2 without brakes, together with all the screws required for installation using a mounting plate.
                                                                                                                              The castors have a diameter of 60 mm and can carry a maximum load of up to 30 kg per unit, ensuring stability in home or office use.
                                                                                                                              These castors are made of a plastic structure and a zinc-plated steel metal plate, which gives them wear resistance and a long service life.
                                                                                                                              Yes, thanks to their integrated ball bearings, the castors ensure a smooth and quiet running, ideal for floors that require extra care.
                                                                                                                              The set includes 4 castors in total: 2 with brakes and 2 without brakes, as well as the screws required for installation by means of a mounting plate.
                                                                                                                              The castors are made with a sheet metal structure and a transparent plastic body with a flat plate, which gives them a modern and discreet finish, ideal for offices or youth rooms.
                                                                                                                              Each castor supports up to 40 kg, offering a reliable solution for light, everyday furniture in home or office environments.
                                                                                                                              They have a diameter of 35 mm and are recommended for occasional furniture, drawer units or desks where fluid movement is desired without compromising the visual design.
                                                                                                                              Thanks to their transparent plastic design and smooth surface, they provide a smooth ride that minimises the risk of marks on delicate floors.
                                                                                                                              The mounting system uses an M8x15 threaded bolt, designed to ensure a strong and precise attachment to the base of the furniture. This system facilitates fast and secure mounting for frequently used environments.
                                                                                                                              Each castor supports up to 35 kg, giving a total capacity of 140 kg per kit. This makes them ideal for furniture that requires mobility without compromising structural stability.
                                                                                                                              Yes, the wheels are made with a black rubber tread that ensures a smooth and quiet ride, protecting delicate surfaces such as parquet or wood flooring.
                                                                                                                              The kit contains 4 castors (2 with brakes and 2 without), together with all the screws required for mounting, providing a ready-to-install solution for any residential or professional environment.
                                                                                                                              These castors are designed for household furniture, offices, chests of drawers, wardrobes or youth furniture requiring high manoeuvrability, with the possibility of partial braking thanks to the two units with brakes included in the set.
                                                                                                                                The Bone foot is made of durable technical plastic, which makes it lighter and easier to install without compromising load capacity. In addition, its internal threaded adjustment system allows precise adjustments without special tools.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the design of the Bone foot allows direct installation on clip-on or mechanical fixing bases. Its 80 mm diameter base fits perfectly into modular plinth systems with aluminium profile, allowing a secure and aesthetic fixing.
                                                                                                                                Each Bone foot supports up to 150 kg of statically distributed load, ideal for kitchen base units, modular cabinets or commercial installations. For dynamic loads or demanding environments, a minimum of 4 feet per module is recommended.
                                                                                                                                The height adjustment is done manually from the base or the bottom due to the internally threaded design. For more precise installations, it can also be adjusted with a hexagonal spanner from the central part of the base.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the Bone range includes other adjustable 130-150 mm and 150-180 mm variants, as well as specific versions for refrigerators (Frixo base) and pre-assembled kits. All are designed to suit the requirements of professional furniture.
                                                                                                                                The Smartfeet foot is made of ABS plastic with high mechanical and impact resistance. Its square design provides a more aesthetic and uniform finish, especially suitable for visible furniture such as beds, sofas, wardrobes or side tables without the need for additional trims.
                                                                                                                                Installation is extremely simple: the foot has four 5 mm fixing holes at the top, compatible with standard wood or chipboard screws. It is recommended to use Ø4-5 mm screws with a minimum length of 13 mm.
                                                                                                                                Each Smartfeet foot supports up to 30 kg in static distributed load. It is particularly suitable for auxiliary furniture, wardrobes, modular units and medium-load domestic furniture. For industrial or heavy-duty furniture, we recommend using reinforced feet such as the Bone or metallic models.
                                                                                                                                No, this model does not include an adjustment thread. It is designed for applications where aesthetics and rigid fixing of the furniture is a priority. If you need an adjustable base, we recommend levelling models such as the circular M10 or hexagonal M8.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the Smartfeet stand is available in chrome, white painted and black painted finishes, which allows it to be adapted to modern, Nordic or classic styles depending on the piece of furniture. The chrome finish is ideal for furniture displayed in shops or hotel contract.
                                                                                                                                The direct mounting base allows faster installation by dispensing with the socket, reducing costs and assembly times. It offers direct attachment to the module with greater stability thanks to its large support surface and reinforced holes for Ø4 mm and Ø4.5 mm screws.
                                                                                                                                This base is specifically designed for 135 mm diameter Bone feet. The stretched circular coupling Ø11 mm high and Ø12.75 mm in diameter guarantees a perfect fit without the need for additional adapters.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the flat geometry and small dimensions of the base allow it to be used both on mechanised floors and in grooves for the integration of levellers. It is recommended to secure the anchorage by means of the four fixing points provided.
                                                                                                                                Thanks to its design with an additional central fixing hole, this base provides a firmer anchorage, minimising the risk of shifting or tilting in heavy or frequently moving furniture, such as industrial kitchen units or hotel installations.
                                                                                                                                The use of Ø4 or Ø4.5 mm wood screws with a length of at least 16 mm is recommended. To ensure a firm hold, it is recommended to screw with a torque-controlled electric screwdriver at low speed to avoid damaging the ABS plastic.
                                                                                                                                Direct mounting requires an 18 mm diameter, 10 mm deep circular cut-out on the back of the base. This housing allows the clamp to be press-fitted, ensuring a firm hold without the need for visible screws.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the clamp is compatible with wooden skirtings between 10 and 18 mm thick. Its design allows for a certain margin of tolerance, facilitating assembly on standard skirting boards used in modular kitchens or technical furniture.
                                                                                                                                The clamp is compatible with the full range of Emuca Bone levelling feet (fixed, adjustable, screw base or direct mount). It attaches easily to the side groove of the foot without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                                                Screw mounting offers a more versatile installation, especially useful when the plinth has not been pre-machined. Direct mounting provides cleaner aesthetics and is ideal for fast assembly lines in production.
                                                                                                                                It is made of high-strength technical plastic, with a structural design that withstands tensile and lateral pressure. It has been tested for repetitive assembly and disassembly cycles without loss of fixation, ideal for removable plinths.
                                                                                                                                For the assembly of a plastic refrigerator base, such as the Frigo Base, you need the Bone kitchen feet and also the metric 10 (M10) screw from the same family, as the base has four holes for fixing the feet. The Frigo Base is also perforated for ventilation and designed for refrigerators integrated in 600 mm wide modules with tufting for assembly.
                                                                                                                                The recommended tightening torque for this screw is between 12 and 15 Nm. Exceeding this value may compromise the integrity of the plastic housing or cause deformation of the furniture structure.
                                                                                                                                Yes, it is made of high-strength zinc-plated steel, designed to withstand multiple installation cycles. Its hexagonal head allows easy access with a 6 mm Allen key without risk of rounding.
                                                                                                                                Unlike generic screws, this model is specifically machined for the upper coupling of the Bone foot. It provides greater mechanical strength, precise alignment and structural reliability in kitchen and industrial furniture.
                                                                                                                                This bolt has a standard metric thread M10 x 1.5 mm with ISO 6g tolerance, ensuring perfect compatibility with the metal nuts of the Bone system. It offers a firm and vibration resistant tightening.
                                                                                                                                Each Alumik X base is designed to withstand an approximate static load of up to 50 kg, depending on the weight distribution at the base of the unit. They are ideal for kitchen and bathroom base units or auxiliary furniture for domestic or low-demand commercial use.
                                                                                                                                Yes, they are made of high-strength ABS plastic and have a painted or chrome-plated finish to protect against environmental humidity. Their use is especially recommended for furniture exposed to the floor, such as kitchens and bathrooms.
                                                                                                                                No. Each foot includes fixing screws and its base is designed for direct installation with conventional screwing. The flat support surface and alignment of the holes facilitates mounting with standard tools, without the need for special jigs.
                                                                                                                                The height of each Alumik X foot is fixed, 80 mm from the base to the point of contact with the furniture. It is not a height-adjustable model, so it is recommended for use in level modules or with flat bases.
                                                                                                                                The Alumik X design not only enhances the aesthetics of the cabinet with a modern profile, but also offers greater structural stability thanks to its wide base. This shape also facilitates ventilation underneath the cabinet and allows for better weight distribution.
                                                                                                                                The screw fixing provides a more solid and precise anchorage in furniture structures that require maximum stability, such as high modules or industrial installations. It allows small irregularities in the floor to be absorbed without structural misalignment.
                                                                                                                                The base requires a Ø10 mm hole for the fixing screws and a circular space for the Ø12.5 mm coupling flange. It is compatible with standard machining in kitchen units with raised plinth base.
                                                                                                                                Yes, this base has been designed to be fully compatible with Bone levelling feet of different heights (100-120, 150-180, etc.). Its geometry allows a firm and uniform hold regardless of the foot model.
                                                                                                                                The screw mounting base provides a more robust attachment and improves load distribution. It is especially recommended for furniture configurations with heavy loads or multiple legs per module.
                                                                                                                                To fix the base to the module, we recommend using screws Ø4.5 x 14 mm with chipboard or MDF thread. The holes are optimised to ensure that the tightening torque does not damage the plastic and provides a secure fixation over time.
                                                                                                                                No, this clamp is designed exclusively for Line 2 and Plasline 2 skirtings made of extruded plastic. For metal edges or curved profiles, it is recommended to use solutions with metal clip or reinforced bracket fixing.
                                                                                                                                The clamp uses a press-fit system with Ø6 mm plugs that fit into a 20 mm x 7 mm socket groove. This system allows a secure fixing without the need for tools, facilitating the assembly and disassembly of the trim.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the clamp is made of high-strength technical polypropylene that retains its elasticity after multiple assembly and disassembly cycles. However, it is recommended that the lugs are checked after more than 10 uses to ensure that they are held in place optimally.
                                                                                                                                The maximum recommended lateral tolerance is ±1 mm with respect to the axis of the pin, provided that the socket groove is correctly machined. This flexibility makes it possible to compensate for slight deviations in assembly without compromising the firmness of the anchorage.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the black plastic material is UV stabilised and resistant to non-abrasive cleaning agents. It can be installed in kitchen or bathroom furniture without loss of performance or deformation over time.
                                                                                                                                The Bone foot allows precise height adjustment between 56 and 66 mm thanks to its internal thread. Adjustment can easily be made from inside the module using a screwdriver, without the need to dismantle the plinth or remove the furniture from the site.
                                                                                                                                For the assembly of a plastic refrigerator base, such as the Frigo Base, you need the Bone kitchen feet and also the metric 10 (M10) screw from the same family, as the base has four holes for fixing the feet. The Frigo Base is also perforated for ventilation and designed for refrigerators integrated in 600 mm wide modules with tufting for assembly.
                                                                                                                                Yes, its design is compatible with the Friga Base as well as with screw fastening systems. In addition, it is suitable for use in conjunction with Ø46 mm metal bases or standard mounting plates on the market.
                                                                                                                                The Bone foot is manufactured to tolerances of ±0.2 mm, which guarantees consistency in industrial production. This allows for perfect alignment in battery modules, ensuring uniform levelling without additional assembly adjustments.
                                                                                                                                This levelling foot is specially designed for installation in kitchen base units, refrigerated cabinets and service structures that rest on uneven floors. It is recommended for cabinets with a minimum depth of 500 mm and a panel thickness of at least 16 mm.
                                                                                                                                Metallic grey painted ABS offers high impact resistance, excellent dimensional stability and professional aesthetics. It is a light but robust material, ideal for installations requiring mechanical strength and decorative finish, such as office furniture bases or breakout furniture.
                                                                                                                                Each Alumix 7 foot supports up to 25 kg under evenly distributed static conditions. This makes them suitable for low modules, beds, sofas or auxiliary furniture structures without the need for additional reinforcement.
                                                                                                                                Alumix 7 feet are designed with Ø4 mm to Ø5 mm screw sockets, compatible with chipboard, euro and mixed thread screws. It is recommended to use socket head screws with a length of 15 to 20 mm to ensure a firm fixation in boards of 16 mm or more.
                                                                                                                                No. This model is not designed to receive levellers or castors, as its base is flat and closed. For mobile or adjustable systems, it is recommended to opt for feet with integrated M10 or M8 thread. Alumix 7 is a static solution, optimal for basic stability and elevation of the furniture.
                                                                                                                                The metallic grey finish applied to ABS by technical paint is highly resistant to light scratches, neutral cleaning products and indirect exposure to moisture. It has been tested in intensive use cycles to meet durability standards in contract or domestic environments.
                                                                                                                                The height of the Alumix 8 foot is 24 mm, which makes it ideal for applications where a minimum elevation of the furniture from the floor is required, such as base units or office and bathroom furniture that needs to be close to the floor without losing contact with the floor for ventilation or cleaning.
                                                                                                                                It is made of plastic with an aluminium painted finish, which gives it a modern metallic aesthetic and at the same time a light structure, resistant to humidity and frequent use in indoor environments.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the design of the Alumix 8 foot is such that it can be combined with each other and with other heights available in the same family. This makes it easy to adjust according to the project or installation need.
                                                                                                                                Each lot includes 4 Alumix 8 feet ready for installation. Screws are not specified and must be purchased separately depending on the type of furniture and mounting surface.
                                                                                                                                No. Assembly is easy and is carried out by screwing the base of the foot directly to the underside of the furniture. The use of standard screws suitable for the thickness of the board and the hardness of the material is recommended.
                                                                                                                                The foot is height-adjustable from 98 to 115 mm, ideal for compensating for uneven floors in kitchen base units or units with plinths.
                                                                                                                                The kit consists of 4 adjustable feet, 2 clamps for connection to the plinth and 4 fixing screws. Screws for mounting to the furniture are not included.
                                                                                                                                The feet are made of one-piece black plastic, while the base connectors can be made of aluminium or wood, depending on the version.
                                                                                                                                This system has been tested in accordance with UNE-EN 16230:2013/AC:2015 and UNE-EN 14749:2017, guaranteeing a high load capacity and structural reliability.
                                                                                                                                The image shows packaging options in KIT of 10 or 50 units, as well as batch presentations. All available finishes are in black colour.
                                                                                                                                The clamp is specifically designed to be compatible with the Noline and Plasline socket ranges, offering a quick and secure solution for mounting with square base Bone lifting feet.
                                                                                                                                The clamp fits into a 28 mm slot in the plinths, securing the part without the need for tools, thanks to the design of sliding tabs that make it easy to fit and remove.
                                                                                                                                The system accommodates both plastic and wooden bases, as the clamp is optimised to fit securely on both, ensuring versatility in modular or bespoke projects.
                                                                                                                                No, the design of the clamp allows tool-free assembly and disassembly, facilitating efficient installation even in series or industrial production environments.
                                                                                                                                The system is completed by a square base for the Bone elevating foot and a flange that fixes the clamp firmly, preventing unwanted movement thanks to its optimised design for a stable fit.
                                                                                                                                No, this base is press-fitted directly onto the Bone riser without the need for additional tools, making it quick and easy to assemble in industrial or modular kitchen environments.
                                                                                                                                Yes, it is compatible with the Noline and Plasline socket ranges, allowing secure integration with their respective socket front fixing clips.
                                                                                                                                The side wings guarantee a stable hold of the modules, especially when used in combination with feet and plinths, preventing unwanted shifting in technical furniture installations.
                                                                                                                                The base has 10 Ø10 mm drill holes that allow additional fixing to the module when greater stability is required or for applications requiring specific fastening standards.
                                                                                                                                Yes, with its large footprint and direct attachment to the Bone foot, it is suitable for both plinth installations and furniture solutions without a visible bottom plinth.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the square base allows for direct mounting on the Bone lifting base, creating a firm link to the lower base of the module without the need for extra adapters.
                                                                                                                                It is first pressed onto the Bone base and then screwed to the furniture from the inside of the module. If a plinth is used, this base must be combined with the corresponding clamps such as Noline or Plasline.
                                                                                                                                It provides greater structural stability to the module and allows for an even load distribution, especially in kitchen environments or technical installations that require robustness.
                                                                                                                                Yes, this base is equipped with side wings that reinforce the hold on the module and prevent unwanted movements, even without the use of visible sockets.
                                                                                                                                It is fully compatible with the clamps of the Noline and Plasline ranges, allowing standard plinths with front adjustment to be easily mounted on the base of the cabinet.
                                                                                                                                The Bone levelling foot is height-adjustable from 98 mm to 104 mm, which compensates for minor unevenness of the floor and ensures precise levelling of the furniture.
                                                                                                                                The square base allows a direct and firm connection between the base and the module by screwing from the inside. The design with a large support surface and side wings improves structural stability, especially in kitchen base units.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the kit includes 2 specific clamps for fixing skirting boards, compatible with the Plasline and Noline ranges, which facilitates the integration of the system with concealment and continuous design solutions in technical furniture.
                                                                                                                                The system is fixed by means of 4 fixing bases bolted to the module, ensuring solid fastening in demanding structures. It is recommended to apply the mounting on machined or internally reinforced surfaces for maximum performance.
                                                                                                                                Yes, the system is tested in accordance with UNE-EN 15644:2008 and UNE-EN 12520:2017, which guarantees its safe and reliable use in professional and domestic furniture applications.
                                                                                                                                In order to assemble the plastic base for the fridge, such as the Fridge Base, it is necessary to have the kitchen Bone feet as well as the number 10 metric screw thread (M10) from the same family, as the base as four holes for fastening the feet. The Fridge Base is also perforated for ventilation and designed for fridges to be integrated into 600 mm wide units with tufts for assembly.
                                                                                                                                  The glider offers a static support with point movement capability, ideal for furniture that does not require constant mobility. It takes up less space, is visually unobtrusive and avoids the use of mechanical systems such as bearings or spindles.
                                                                                                                                  It is designed for use on wooden, parquet, ceramic or laminate floors. Its technical plastic backing reduces friction and protects surfaces thanks to its low coefficient of friction. Not recommended for use on carpets or thick rugs.
                                                                                                                                  It is perfect for low or static furniture such as wardrobe modules, chests of drawers, sideboards, auxiliary furniture or beds. It is also widely used in hotel and contract furniture where stability and easy cleaning of the floor is a priority.
                                                                                                                                  It is installed by pressing or tapping the metal tip into the base of the furniture through a guide hole (recommended Ø2 mm). For hard materials such as solid wood or plywood, it is advisable to use a pre-drill to avoid splintering.
                                                                                                                                  Thanks to its technical polymer design and metal tip, the glide retains its shape and performance even after years of use. It does not deform easily, withstands moderate point loads and its bearing surface retains its even glide over time.
                                                                                                                                  The recommended depth to properly accommodate the Ø17.5 mm plug is at least 8 mm. This ensures a secure fixing without compromising the integrity of the cabinet base or bottom panel.
                                                                                                                                  Tight tolerance circular machining (Ø17.5 +0/-0.2 mm) with a flat bottom using a Forstner type drill is recommended, allowing a press fit without the need for adhesives or screws.
                                                                                                                                  It is optimised for smooth, hard surfaces such as ceramic, vinyl or varnished wood floors. The technical polymer reduces friction, preventing marks and facilitating smooth and quiet running.
                                                                                                                                  Although this glide is ideal for base or side units, it can be used in larger units if several support points are provided. It is not designed for high structural loads.
                                                                                                                                  Unlike felt, this glide does not peel off or degrade over time. It is also more visually unobtrusive and does not require adjustment like levellers, which simplifies assembly line processes.
                                                                                                                                  The slider lugs fit perfectly into bores of ø5 mm and a minimum depth of 6 mm. This tolerance ensures secure fixing without the need for additional screws, which facilitates mounting in industrial environments.
                                                                                                                                  This model with lugs allows quick assembly by pressure, reducing installation times by up to 40%. In addition, it avoids the use of visible screws, ideal for furniture with a clean or modular design.
                                                                                                                                  Thanks to its low friction and high resistance plastic base, it is especially recommended for ceramic, laminate, vinyl and varnished wood floors, where it provides a smooth and silent glide.
                                                                                                                                  Made of high-density technical polymer, this glide withstands more than 30,000 movement cycles without visible deterioration. Ideal for drawers, occasional furniture or frequently used furniture.
                                                                                                                                  The design is optimised for horizontal applications (furniture bases), but can also be installed vertically in guide or support applications if the housings are reinforced with technical dowels or metal inserts.
                                                                                                                                  The pinless glides provide a quick solution for applications where drilling of the furniture is not desired. Thanks to their flat, self-adhesive design, they allow direct installation on the module surface, reducing assembly time and avoiding additional operations in production.
                                                                                                                                  It is equipped with a high-tack acrylic technical adhesive base, capable of withstanding tensile forces in excess of 7 kg. It is effective on melamine, plywood and MDF boards with standard finish. It is recommended to be applied on clean and dry surfaces to ensure performance.
                                                                                                                                  This glide is recommended for use in the bottom corners of base units, cabinet bases or on the edge of fixed legs. As it does not protrude from the furniture, it prevents accidental snagging and prolongs the durability of the adhesive even in intensive use.
                                                                                                                                  Its technical polyethylene base has low friction, which allows a smooth glide on surfaces such as parquet, PVC, ceramic or vinyl. Compared to felt or rubber, it reduces sliding resistance by 30% and minimises wear.
                                                                                                                                  Reuse is not recommended. The adhesive is designed for a single professional application. Once removed, it loses effectiveness and may compromise the stability of the furniture. For new installations, it should be replaced with a new unit.
                                                                                                                                  The felt pads included in this pack have a 20mm diameter, ideal for a wide variety of furniture legs.
                                                                                                                                  The lot contains a total of 1500 pieces of adhesive felts in 30 sheets.
                                                                                                                                  These protectors are 2.5 mm thick, providing an excellent protective barrier without compromising the stability of the furniture.
                                                                                                                                  These self-adhesive felts are suitable for tables, chairs, heavy boots, desks, beds, wardrobes and other furniture in both domestic and commercial environments.
                                                                                                                                  The protectors are self-adhesive, allowing for quick and easy installation without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                                                  The lot contains a total of 150 square self-adhesive felt pads, distributed in 3 sheets.
                                                                                                                                  Each felt protector has a square format with dimensions of 20x20 mm, ideal for precise covering of furniture legs.
                                                                                                                                  These protectors are suitable for chairs, tables, cabinets, desks, beds, boots and other furniture that need to slide without damaging surfaces.
                                                                                                                                  The protectors are 3.5 mm thick, providing effective cushioning and protection against scratches.
                                                                                                                                  The protectors are designed with high quality adhesive to ensure a long-lasting fixation to the base of the furniture.
                                                                                                                                  Each felt protector has a rectangular format with dimensions of 100x250 mm, ideal for larger contact surfaces or loads.
                                                                                                                                  The set includes 3 large rectangular self-adhesive felt pads.
                                                                                                                                  The protectors are equipped with high-tack adhesive, which allows them to be easily attached to any type of furniture without the need for additional tools.
                                                                                                                                  The thickness of each felt protector is 3.5 mm, providing excellent protection against scratches and optimum glide.
                                                                                                                                  This product is ideal for furniture with a large surface area or weight, such as tables, beds, shelves, desks or wardrobes, preventing damage to the floor.
                                                                                                                                    Drilling template for frontal panel attachmen product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Drilling template for frontal panel attachmen
                                                                                                                                    Integrity concealed drawer slides with partial extraction and soft close (Industrial Packaging) product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Integrity concealed drawer slides with partial extraction and soft close (Industrial Packaging)
                                                                                                                                    Integrity concealed drawer slides with partial extraction and soft close product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Integrity concealed drawer slides with partial extraction and soft close
                                                                                                                                    Recycle recycling bins for kitchen, 2 x 25 L, lower fixing and manual removal product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Recycle recycling bins for kitchen, 2 x 25 L, lower fixing and manual removal
                                                                                                                                    Recycle 20 L Recycling bin for kitchen, lower fixing and manual removal product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Recycle 20 L Recycling bin for kitchen, lower fixing and manual removal
                                                                                                                                    Recycling bins for kitchen, 2 x 15 L, lower fixing and manual removal product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Recycling bins for kitchen, 2 x 15 L, lower fixing and manual removal
                                                                                                                                    Recycle Containers for kitchen drawers, Height 266 product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Recycle Containers for kitchen drawers, Height 266
                                                                                                                                    Recycle Containers for kitchen drawers with odour-proof lid, Height 266 product photo
                                                                                                                                    New
                                                                                                                                    Recycle Containers for kitchen drawers with odour-proof lid, Height 266